


HI 



^ 



1 ^ <& 



3* 



H* 



VW 






BACON'S 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



COMPRISING IN ONE VOLUME THE ESSENTIALS OF THE 

GRAMMAR WITH A CONVERSATIONAL READER 

AND COMPLETE VOCABULARIES 



By 

Edwin F. Bacon, Ph.B. 

Teacher of Modern Languages in Onkonta Statk Normal School 




NEW YORK 

MAYNARD, MERRILL, & CO, 

LONDON, G. W. BACON & CO. 

HANOVER, SCHMORL & VON SEEFELD 

1906 



C^rL^ 



LIBRARY of CONGRESS 
TwoCODies Received 

feb iy iyo6 

0} Copyright Entry 
CLASS g~ AXC, NO, 
d OOPY A. 



"f 



V 1 ' 



Copyright, 1906 

By Edwin F. Bacon 

Entered at Stationers' Hall, London 



49 



PREFACE 



f his book contains material for a complete elementary course 
in German, but no exact method for its use is here prescribed. 
This must necessarily be left, to a great extent, to the discretion 
of the teacher and will vary with circumstances, with the age and 
capacity of the pupil, with the time allotted to the study, and with 
the ability and inclination of the teacher for German conversation. 
The ideal method combines thorough grammatical instruction 
with as much conversation as time and circumstances permit. 

A distinguishing feature of the work is the manner in which 
it assists the teacher to whom German is not a native language 
to grow into the conversational method. This is done by giving 
all rules and explanations first in very plain English, with copious 
illustrations and translation exercises, and then repeating, in Ger- 
man, in a conversational way, such technical terms and forms of 
expression as are necessary in conducting a recitation in that 
language. This material will be found in connection with the 
various grammatical lessons. In addition to this there is much 
familiar and objective talk suited to the class-room and calculated 
to keep the language alive on the tongue of both teacher and 
pupil. ' 

German is a living language, and by teaching it as such the 
interest of the pupil is greatly enhanced. To promote its prac- 
tical use in the class-room in a manner involving no sacrifice of 
grammatical thoroughness, and no loss of time, was the inspiring 
motive of the present work, an effort more likely to be successful 
from the fact that it embodies the author's experience while him- 



IV PREFACE 

self growing into the conversational method. It thus represents 
no untried theory, but an actual success. 

If the advocates of the strictly " natural method " object to 
explanations being given in English, the reply is that it is practi- 
cally necessary in our public schools and colleges, and that it does 
not hinder the teacher in speaking the language he is teaching. 
It enables him to refer by page and paragraph to needed expla- 
nations in the pupil's own language, thus saving time and in no 
wise impairing the conversational method, but really making it 
practicable where it could not otherwise be employed. 

It is the hope and expectation of the author that the conver- 
sational character of the entire work, the plays suited to the school 
stage, the map and journey through Germany, together with the 
gems of poetry and song and the complete vocabularies, may 
commend it to teachers and promote in the pupil a genuine in- 
terest in the language. 

But let not the student be content with all that the book and 
the teacher can do for him. Let him seek the acquaintance of 
intelligent Germans, who are everywhere to be found in this 
country, and thus accustom the ear to the native speech. Then 
if a visit is ever made to the German Fatherland, he will be at 
home from the very beginning. The life and literature there 
open to him will be no small addition to his means of culture and 
enjoyment ; and German, because he has learned it by a living 
method, will be to him forever a living language. 

In the preparation of this work the various German grammars 
in popular use have been profitably consulted, especially those of 
Whitney, Thomas and Joynes-Meissner, together with that of 
Heyse, the universally recognized native German authority. Care 
has also been taken to conform to the recommendations of the 
" Report of the Committee of Twelve of the Modern Language 



PREFACE V 

Association of America " and to the requirements of the Board of 
Regents of the State of New York. The excellent discussion of 
methods in the report of the Committee of Twelve entitles it to 
a place upon the desk of every progressive teacher. The earnest 
recommendation there made to the use of " well chosen dialogues 
with the parts assigned" in place of the memorizing of many 
poems is here fully met by the conversations and plays of Part II, 
material already successfully used in the author's former publica- 
tions. The German spelling throughout this book conforms to 
the official revisions of 1880 and 1901, a complete guide in this 
matter being found in Daderis orthographisches Wotlerbuch, which 
is accepted as authority throughout the German-speaking world. 
The author's acknowledgments are due to several German 
scholars, to Professor Arthur H. Palmer, of Yale University, for 
the critical reading of the grammatical portion of the work in 
manuscript and for valuable suggestions ; to Prof. George Meister 
of Boston for the careful reading of the proof-sheets of the en- 
tire work, -and to Rev. Charles A. Meyer of Oneonta for valuable 

assistance by word and pen. 

E. F. B. 

Oneonta, Jan. 1, 1906. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 



Jj^^The Grammatical references throughout the book are to the sections of Part I. 



Part I. 



SEC. 

I 

2 

3 
4 
5 
6 

7 
8 

9 

10 

ii 

12 

13 
14 
15 
16 

i7 

18 

i9 

20 
21 
22 

23 
24 

25 
26 



A. INTRODUCTORY 

The Relation of German to English 
The Alphabet .... 

German Script Alphabet 

German Handwriting . 

Remarks on the Alphabet 

The Use of Capital Letters . 

Words not Capitalized 
The New German Orthography 
Pronunciation .... 

The Vowels .... 

The Modified Vowels (Umlauts) 

The Nasal Vowels 

The Diphthongs . 

The Consonants . 

Consonantal Digraphs and Trigraphs 

Compound Words 

Review Exercises . 

Reading Exercise 

Accent 

Punctuation .... 
The Hyphen .... 
Syllabication .... 
Beginnings of Conversation . 
Nouns in Common Use 
Adjectives in Common Use 
Verbs in Common Use 



PAGE 

I 

3 

4 
5 
6 

7 
8 
8 

9 
9 
10 
11 
11 
11 
13 
14 
14 
15 
17 
18 

*9 

J 9 
20 
26 
27 
28 



CONTENTS 



B. THE GRAMMAR. 



32 



27 
28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33-64 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 
42 
43 
44 

45 
46 

47 
48 

49 
50 
5i 
52 
53 
54 
55 
56 
57 
58 
59 
60 
61 
62 

63 
64 



The Parts of Speech .... 
The Article 

The Definite Article .... 

The Indefinite Article .... 

Chart of Declensions (article and pronoun) 

Remarks on the Article and Adjective . 
The Noun 

The Declensions ..... 

The Cases ...... 

The Present of fjctben, fein and roerben . 

Peculiar Use of Personal Pronouns 

The Gender of Nouns .... 

Gender denoted by Endings . 

Infinitives, etc., used as nouns 

The Gender of Compounds . 

Double Gender of Nouns 

Double Form of the Plural . 

Nouns used in the Singular only . 

Nouns used in the Plural only 

The " Strong " and " Weak " Declensions 

Classification of Nouns 

The eight regular forms of Declension . 

The first class masculine 

The second class masculine 

The third class masculine 

The first class feminine 

The second class feminine 

The first class neuter . 

The second class neuter 

The third class neuter . 

Table of the eight regular forms . 

Remarks on the Declensions 

Irregular forms of Declension 

Declension of Proper Nouns, etc. 

Review of Nouns 

Geographical Names and their Derivatives 

The Seasons ..... 

The Months . . . 

The Days of the Week 



CONTENTS 



65-74 The Numerals .... 

66 The Cardinals 

67 Declension of Cardinals 

68 Numeral Compounds . 

69 Expressions of Time 

70 The Ordinals 

71 Declension of Ordinals 

72 The Day of the Month 

73 Weight, Measure and Quantity 

74 Fractions .... 
75-81 The Adjective 

75 Declension of Adjectives 

76 The Strong Declension 

77 The Weak Declension . 

78 The Mixed Declension . 

79 Adjectives used as Substantives 

80 Comparison of Adjectives 

81 Syntax of Adjectives 
82-93 The Pronoun .... 

82 Personal Pronouns 

83 Remarks on the Personal Pronouns 

84 The Pronouns in Personal Address 

85 Non-agreement of Pronoun with Antecedent 

86 The Pronoun e3 . 

87 Possessive Pronouns, mem, beirt etc. 

88 The Possessives used Substantively 

89 Demonstrative Pronouns, biejer, etc. 

90 Interrogative Pronouns, tt>etct)er, roer and nm§ 

91 Relative Pronouns, toeldjer, leer and roaS 

92 Indefinites ..... 

93 Adjectives after the Indefinites 
94-98 The Adverb . . 

95 Comparison of Adverbs 

96 Adverbs from other parts of speech 

97 Adjectives from Adverbs 

98 A List of Adverbs in common use 
99-107 The Preposition .... 

100 Prepositions with the Genitive 

101 Prepositions with the Dative 

102 Prepositions with the Accusative . 



70-75 
70 
71 
71 
71 
72 

73 

74 
74 
75 
75-83 
75 
76 
76 

77 
78 

79 

81 

84-107 

84 

85 
86 
89 
89 

9 1 

92 

94 

98 

100 

101 

106 

107-110 
107 
107 
108 
109 

111-119 
in 
112 
114 



CONTENTS 



SBC. 
103 
104 

105 
106 
107 

I 08-1 12 

109 

IIO 

III 

112 

"3 
II4-U8 

"5 

116 

117 

118 

119-174 

120 

121 

122 

123 

124 

125 
126 
127 
128 
129 
130 

131 
132 
133 
134 

135 
136 

137 
138 
139 
140 
141 
142 



The Prepositions {Continued). 

Prepositions with the Dative or Accusative 

Remarks on the Prepositions 

Contraction with the Definite Article 

Omission of the Preposition . 

Idiomatic Phrases with Prepositions 
The Conjunction 

General Connectives 

Adverbial Conjunctions 

Subordinating Conjunctions 

The uses of ttienn, matm and al§ 
The Interjection 
Construction of Sentences 

The Normal Order 

The Inverted Order 

The Transposed Order 

General Rules 
The Verb .... 

The Principal Parts of a Verb 

The " Weak " and " Strong " Verbs 

Names of the Modes and Tenses 

Use of the Tenses 

The Indicative and Subjunctive Modes 

Peculiar uses of the Subjunctive . 

The Imperative Mode . 

The Infinitive Mode 

The Infinitive preceded by $u 

<3tatt, oljne, and um with Infinitive 

The Infinitive without gu 

An English infinitive preceded by to 

English Infinitive after how, what or where 

The Passive Voice 

English Passive rendered into German Active 

Participles ..... 

The Present Participle 

The Past Participle 

Adjectives with the form of Participles 

The Future Passive Participle 

Comparison of Participles 

The uses of fyibeit, feitt and werbert 

SBerben and tuollen contrasted 



CONTENTS 



XI 



sec. The Verb {Continued). 

143 £aben and fern as Auxiliaries 

144 Verbs Conjugated with ^aben or fetn 

145 £>aben, Conjugation of . 

146 Setn, Conjugation of 

147 28erben, Conjugation of 

148 The Auxiliaries of Mode 

149 Remarks on the Auxiliaries of Mode 

150 The Causative Auxiliary laffett 

151 Soben, Active Voice .... 

152 Soben, Passive Voice .... 

153 Examples of Weak Verbs 

154 Orthographic Irregularities of Weak Verbs 

155 ©eben, Conjugation of . 

156 @5d)ert, Conjugation of . 

157 The Mixed Conjugation, brennen, femtett, etc. 

158 S)enfen, Conjugation of . . . 

159 The Reflexive Verb ftcf) freuen 

160 Separable and Inseparable Verbs 

161 The Inseparable Prefixes 

162 The Prefixes tttif} and boll 

163 Separable and Inseparable Verbs contrasted 

164 5ht§gef)ett, Conjugation of 

165 SBetofjnen, Conjugation of 

166 Verbs Separably or Inseparably Compounded 

167 Verbs with Compound Prefixes 

168 ©idj abtoenben, Conjugation of 

169 Impersonal Verbs .... 

170 Government of Verbs .... 

171 The Strong or Irregular Verbs 

172 Orthography of the Strong Verbs 

173 Classified list of Strong Verbs 

174 An Alphabetical list of Strong Verbs . 

175 Review of Grammatical Forms 



PAGE 
I46 

147 
148 
I50 
152 

154 
155 
157 
158 
160 
162 
162 
164 
166 
168 
168 
170 
172 
172 
172 
173 
173 
174 
176 
176 
177 
178 
179 
182 

183 

184 

212 

213-217 



CONTENTS 



Part II 



no. READING AND CONVERSATION. PAGE 

1 Die Hande 218 

2 Die Karten 218 

3 Der Apfel 219 

4 Die Feder 219 

5 Der Hut . . . 220 

6 Die Uhr .......... 220 

7 Das Buch 221 

8 Das Haus 221 

9 Der Garten 222 

10 Das Jahr 223 

11 Die Geographie 223 

12 Die Grille und die Ameise 224 

13 Was ich liebe ......... 225 

14 Die kleine Wohltaterin ....... 225 

15 Du bist wie eine Blume 226 

16 Das Kanarienvogelchen ....... 226 

17 Die Biene und die Taube 227 

18 Der Wolf und das Lamm 228 

19 Die Schwalben ......... 228 

20 Die Pfirsiche ......... 229 

21 Die beiden Vogel 231 

22 Das vierspannige Fuder Nahnadeln ..... 231 

23 Die Einkehr ......... 233 

24 Nicht zu Hause 233 

25 Weisheit .......... 234 

26 Gleiches mit Gleichem ....... 234 

27 Das Heidenroslein . . 234 

28 Robert Bruce und die Spinne 235 

29 Scheiden .......... 236 

30 Die Lorelei 236 

31 Der Froschkonig . 237 

32 Auf dem Harze 240 

33 Deutsche Sprichworter 242 

34 Epigramme und Stammbuch-Verse . . . 242 

35 Hoffnung . 243 

36 Das Schloss am Meere ....... 244 

37 Das Veilchen 245 

38 Gefunden .......... 246 



CONTENTS 



xm 



39 
40 

41 
42 

43 
44 
45 
46 

47 
48 

49 
50 
5i 
52 

53 
54 
55 
56 
57 
58 
59 
60 
61 
62 

63 

64 

65 
66 

67 
68 
69 



Der Wirtin Tochterlein 

Die Grenadiere . 

Wandrers Nachtlied 

Vergissmeinnicht 

Erlkonig 

Gliickwiinsche 

Zur Jahreswende 

O Strassburg 

Barbarossa . 

Wunsch 

Mignon 

Reiters Morgengesang 

Hans im Gliick . 

Eine Tasse Kaffee 

Ausziige aus Wilhelm Tell 

Szenen aus Wilhelm Tell 

Map of the Northern part of Germany 

Das deutsche Kaiserreich 

Eine Reise durch Deutschland 

Auf der Wohnungssuche 

Im Gasthause 

Im Hutgeschafte 

Bei dem Schneider 

In der Buchhandlung 

Eine Einladung . 

Ein Freundschafts Dienst 

In einem Geschaftsbureau 

Auf dem Postamt . » 

Auf dem Bahnhofe 

Geld, Mass und Gewicht 

Briefwechsel 



Translation Exercises 
German Songs with Music 
German-English Vocabulary 
English-German Vocabulary 



PAGE 
246 
247 
248 
249 
249 
250 
251 
251 
252 
253 
253 
254 
254 
258 
269 
271 
286 
287 
289 
296 

297 
298 
298 
299 
30O 
30I 
302 
302 
302 
303 
304 

305-3I6 
317-324 

325-359 
360-372 



APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR 

Word-formation. — Derivation and Composition, following p. 372 



A NEW GERMAN COURSE 

PART FIRST 



INTRODUCTORY 
1. The German Language and its Relation to English. 

German and English are closely related languages. Both belong to 
the Germanic group of the Indo-European family of languages. English 
was originally a Low-German or Platt-Deutsch dialect, more nearly 
related to Holland Dutch than to the High German of the present 
day. It was the language of the German, or rather Germanic, tribes 
that conquered England in the fifth century. Since then it has under- 
gone great changes and has been greatly enlarged and enriched, 
especially by its union with Norman-French. 

The historical facts that led to the establishment of a Germanic 
dialect on the soil of England will be of interest to the student. The 
original inhabitants of the British Isles were of the Celtic race which 
occupied, in ancient times, nearly the whole of western Europe. In 
the early part of the Christian era the Romans conquered the part now 
known as England and made it a Roman province which they called 
Britannia ; but in the early part of the fifth century the Roman legions 
were withdrawn, being needed elsewhere, and the province was thus 
left to itself. In this weakened condition it was exposed to the inroads 
of the Picts and Scots (from Scotland and Ireland), and being unable 
to defend itself against these invaders it sought the aid of its Teutonic 
neighbors across the North Sea. The Jutes of Denmark responded to 
this call, but when they had driven off the northern invaders they made 
war upon and conquered those whom they had come to help. About 
the same time came two other Teutonic tribes, the Angles and the 
Saxons, and in the end these three tribes overran and possessed the 
whole country, driving out or exterminating the Celtic inhabitants and 
making their permanent home in the land. 

i 



2 INTRODUCTORY 

From the Angles the country received a new name, Angleland or 
England. These people called their language Anglisc, though writers 
of a later date called it Anglo-Saxon, and by this latter name it is now 
generally known, though it is sometimes called Old English. This 
Germanic dialect might have remained the permanent language of 
England but for the Norman conquest of the eleventh century which 
greatly influenced both language and people. 

The victory of William the Conqueror, at the battle of Hastings 
(A. D. 1066), marks an epoch in English history. The new rulers 
undertook to establish their language as well as their institutions 
among the conquered people, but this was found impossible. The 
common people clung to their native dialect, but received, in the 
course of time, a great number of French words, thus blending the 
two languages together and creating, in effect, a new one, namely, 
modern English, which attained its present form about the time of 
Queen Elizabeth in the sixteenth century. At the same time, and to 
their mutual advantage, the two races were also blended, so that the 
Norman conquest is now regarded as a most fortunate event. 

To the new English thus originating have been added many words 
from the Latin and other sources, making our language one of the 
most complex that has ever existed. 

It is also interesting to know that the Norman conquerors of 
England were originally of the same Germanic stock as the natives 
whom they subdued. They were the descendants of a colony of Norse- 
men or Northmen, bold sea rovers from the Scandinavian peninsula, 
who had settled in the north of France in the early part of the pre- 
vious century and had there adopted a French dialect. The English 
of to-day and their kinsmen in America are, therefore, as to their 
origin, far more Germanic than their speech. 

In beginning the study of German the great number of common 
words that resemble the English makes the vocabulary easy to learn, 
for it is just the commonest words of our language that belong to the 
Germanic stock. The greatest difficulty is with the gender of the 
nouns and with the declensions, in which only the diligent student 
becomes proficient. 









INTRODUCTORY 






3 








Das 2Xlj?l?abct. 








St 


a 


{ah) 


A 


a 


9? 


n 


(«») 


N 


n 


53 


a 


{bay) 


B 


b 








(*«) 


O 


o 


(£ 


c 


{(say) 


C 


c 


? 


* 


(>>ajr) 


P 


P 




b 


{day) 


D 


d 


O 


q 


OH 


a 


q 


(g 


e 


(«r) 


E 


e 


« 


r 


(«r) 


R 


r 




f 


(#) 


F 


f 


@ 


f* 


(<?«) 


S 


s 


® 


a 


to') 


G 


g 


£ 


t 


{lay) 


T 


t 


© 


9 


{hah) 


H 


h 


tt 


u 


M 


U 


u 




t 


(«) 


I 


i 


35 


b 


(fow) 


V 


V 




i 


Ow) 


J 


J 


23 


m 


(yay) 


w 


w 


$ 


I 


(*«A) 


K 


k 


£ 


y 


(«) 


X 


X 


1} 

V 


I 


(,/) 


L 


1 


§ 


i) 


{ipsilon) Y 


i 


1)1 


m 


{em) 


M 


m 


8 


a 


(tatf) 


z 


z 



Hie Umtaute.* 

% a = A, a 6, <j -' 6, 6 ft, u - y, a 

3ufamtnen^efet^te Konfonanten* 

(j) = ch {tsay-hah) |j = fs {ess-tsei) 

(f = ck (tsay-kah) fe = tZ (tay-tset) 



* The pronunciation of the umlauts (modified vowels) cannot be exactly repre- 
sented in the English characters. 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



sn^tf^^/>p^ C//^A 



Deutsche Schreibschrift 








r ch 




C^^i 



V V » 



^Oty ' sir ^f4^ 
ck /x tz a o u 



INTRODUCTORY 




German Handwriting 



jfcw^z^^z^ C^tU^y^ 



tjt>?rif-^z^Z4^ /t^^-^^>^^^^^' &^y-?4^ws 








a* 








\^LSV-&Z^UC#> 









</^l^/£^S~1f-Z^t^ 







6 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

5. Remarks on the Alphabet. 

1. The German language has two distinct alphabets, both for 
writing and printing. Both were derived from the ancient Latin. 
The German character, as we call it, had its origin with the 
scribes of the middle ages, before the invention of printing, and 
came into general use throughout Europe ; but one nation after 
another abandoned it for the simpler and more legible character 
which we call " Roman " and which the Germans call "lateinisch" 

2. The Germans still adhere to the old style, though they also 
use the Roman to a considerable extent, all their scientific and 
medical works being printed in it ; it is also gaining in other de- 
partments of literature and there is h movement in Germany in 
favor of its exclusive use, but the accomplishment of this reform 
is still distant and it is therefore necessary for the student to 
become familiar not only with the printed but also with the writ- 
ten German character, and especially so because the change to 
the Roman has made less progress in writing than in printing. 
In correspondence the German script is very generally used and 
may be acquired through the excellent copy-books published in 
this country or imported ; or the examples herewith given may 
serve the purpose. Certainly the student should learn to read 
the script whether he writes it or not, for most of the German 
manuscript that may fall into his hands, in the form of corres- 
pondence or otherwise, will be in this style.* 

3. Each German letter has a Roman equivalent, but both the 
long and round s (f §>) are represented by s. The compound f$ 
when changed to Roman is, by different writers, variously repre- 
sented by ss, sz, fs and E, the latter being generally used in this 
book. 

4. In the German character, the short s (3) is used at the end 
of a word, whether standing alone or in composition, the long s 
(f) in other positions; e. g., ba$, bie)e3, feljr, fdjort, cmsogefyett, 
§cw3fdj(uffel, SSaffer. In these examples the round s (§) is written 



* A finely engraved German copy-book may be had from the publishers of this work. 



INTRODUCTORY 7 

* 

in cm3gef)en and §au3fd)luffel, because au$ and §au^ are independ- 
ent words here compounded with gef)en and @d)liiffel ; but 2$ctf= in 
SSaffer is not a prefix ; it is only a syllable, and hence the long f 
is used. 

5. When an ending of declension is added to a noun, final 3 
is changed to f, as in ba§ (&xa§, Gen. be3 @rctfe3, etc., and final fj 
after a short root- vowel is changed to ff, as in ber ffiufa, Gen. 
be3 gtuffe3, etc. ; but when the root-vowel is long, the § is retained, 
as in ber gufj, Gen. be3 gu^e^, etc. 

6. In the writing of these characters (3, f, ff, £,) the learner 
will find frequent cases of uncertainty in which it will be neces- 
sary to refer to the dictionary, where the printed character will 
always indicate the one to be written. 

6. Capital Letters (@n>£e $ud)fta&ett)* 

With a capital initial are written : 

1. The first word of a sentence, of a line in poetry, and of a 
direct quotation (as in English). 

2. All nouns, common as well as proper, and all words used 
as nouns ; e. g., ba$ $au§, the house; bie airmen tmb bie 9tocf)en; 
the poor and the rich. 

3. The personal pronoun of the 3d person plural (fie, ifyrer, 
H)nett, fie), when used in place of the 2d singular in polite 
address, and also the corresponding possessive %v)v ; e. g., SSoHen 
©ie? will you f 2Bo ift 3§r $ud)? 3d) Ija&e e<3 Stjnen gegeben. 

Where is your hook ? I gave (have given) it to you. 

4. Pronouns of the second person (bu, etc.) when they are to 
come under the eye of the person addressed, as in letters, other- 
wise not. 

5. Parts of titles and proper names ; e.g., Dtto ber ©rofje, Otto 
the Great; ba§ ^flnigltdje $reuf3t|d)e golktmt, the royal Prussian 
custom-house ; bie SBeremigten ©tctcttett, the * United States ; ba% 
£ote 9fteer, the dead sea; bie SMmfdje Settling (the name of a 
newspaper at Cologne). 



8 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

6. Adjectives derived from the names of persons ; e. g., bte 
SSetbmcmnfdje 23udjf)anblitng, the Weidmann bookstore. 

7. Adjectives derived from the names of cities or towns ; e. g., 
bte £ottbotter $3ritrfe, the London bridge. 

7. Words not Capitalized. 

1. Adjectives derived from the names of countries are not 
capitalized ; e. g., bte amerifamfdje OJaljne, the American flag. 

2. The pronoun id), /, is not capitalized except where it com- 
mences a sentence ; e. g., ©eftern toax id) in dim g)orf, yesterday I 
was in New York. 

3. Nouns used as other parts of speech (adverbs, prepositions 
or prefixes) are not capitalized; e. g., morgcn3, of a morning; 
\aU$, in case ; fetb tlllt, to cause pain. 

8. The new German Orthography ($ie neuc beutftfje SHedjtfdjrei&ttng), 

1. The German orthography is nearly phonetic. It was re- 
vised under the direction of the Prussian ministry of education 
in 1880 and again in 1 901, and now conforms, as nearly as pos- 
sible, to the spoken language. Spelling books and spelling 
lessons are unnecessary and unknown in the schools of Germany, 
„&&)Xdb tote bit rtdlttg fpritf)ft" (write as you correctly speak) is the 
general rule ; yet to foreigners the spelling presents some diffi- 
culties, for these two revisions have not been able to make it 
strictly phonetic. The pronunciation of the people, even of 
the educated, cannot be taken as a guide in spelling, for there 
are various dialects, especially the south German as distinguished 
from that of the north. The standard is said to be the pronun- 
ciation of the leading actors, who must not let it be known from 
their speech from whence they came. Their pronunciation is 
above all provincialisms. 

2. As the old orthography is still found in books printed 
previous to 1880 and has not entirely disappeared from current 
literature, it may be well to note the principal changes effected 
by the two revisions. They consist : 






INTRODUCTORY 9 

a. In the omission of the silent t) in such words as 9)?ut, £ei(, 
Slier, Xct(, rot, tun (formerly written Wlutfy, Xfyetl, Xfyter, %f)al, rotf), 
tfyun) ; also in the omission of the silent f) in all words ending in 
-turn ; as, SRetdjtnm, Srrtnm, etc. (formerly written 9?eitf)t()um, 
Srrtftnm, etc.). 

b. In writing the ending -ni3 instead of -mfj in such words as 
©ebadjtnte, |)tnberm3. 

c. In writing the ending -terert in all verbs having that sound 
(a portion of them having formerly been written -tretl), such as 
ctbbteren, marfdjteren, regieren. 

d. In replacing c by f or %, according to the sound, in a con- 
siderable number of words of foreign origin ; as, Seftton, 9Mtton, 
spctrtigtp, instead of Section, Section, ^arttcip. 

e. In placing the umlaut sign over capital as well as over 
small letters ; as, Spfel, Ofen, Uoel (instead of 2(epfel, Oefen, Ue6el.) 

9. Pronunciation ($te %u^pvad)c). 

A correct pronunciation is only to be gained by imitating the 
voice of a competent teacher, and the following explanations are 
intended only to assist such instruction. 

The minute directions for pronunciation sometimes given do not accomplish 
their purpose. Every pupil will, for better or worse, take his pronunciation from 
the teacher. Foreign sounds cannot be exactly described. They must be heard. 
It is therefore only as a basis for drill, conducted by the teacher, that the following 
explanations and examples are given. 

10. The Vowels ($ie Wotak). 

There is no such variety in the sounds of the vowels as in 
English, but each vowel may be long or short. A vowel doubled 
or followed by f) is long. A vowel followed by a double con- 
sonant, and generally when followed by two separate consonants, 
is short. 

%l f a* — % has always the Italian sound, as in papa. 

a, aa long: ct'ber, t)a'6e, gafj'ne; §aar, Sfiaax. 

a short : boJ, toa&, fjat, fyat'te, Sftann, gall, ©aft. 



10 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

(§•, £♦ — @ long" is pronounced like a in /# te / when short, 
nearly like e in met. 

e, ec long: le'fen, SRe'gen, SBe'fen, mef)r, 23ee're, 9J?eer. 

c short : e3, beS, ef'fen, bren'nen, fyeffen, toer'fen. 

In an unaccented syllable, especially at the end of a word, e is 
very slight and obscure : SBlu'me, $ctr'te, Sam'pe, Sftor'gen. 

3f $♦ — 3 has usually the short sound of i in pin, milk. It 
is long and like e in me when followed by ft, and in some words 
when followed by some other single consonant. 

i long : il)m, ifjn, ifjr, t^'ncn ; mtr, btr, SDft'ne, Wbd, toi'ber, ©til. 

t short : nut, bin, btft, tft, bin'nen, fin'nen, £)tng, 9fting, Sftt'ter. 

The sound of long i vapine is heard only in the diphthong ei, as in meitt, betlt, 
fein. 

©, 0„ — D long sounds like o in 00/1/ short has no exact 
equivalent in English ; it resembles u in fun. 

0, 00, long : bot, rot, §og, flog, o'ber, $ol)'ne, $oot. 

short : Oon, Ooll, ^ot'te, SBo'dje, bort, £)orf, 3°™. 

U, U. — U long is like 00 in moon ; when short it is nearly 
like 00 in book. 

it long : $ut, 231u'me, ru'fen, Ufjr, Slnl), @djuf), ©dju'le. 

u short : 9M1, 9?nm'mer, SBut'ter, £uft, ©tnn'be. 

5), t> 4 — g) is always a vowel and is pronounced like the Ger- 
man t; e. g., ©tyn'tcuj, ©tfl'stem' ; except in some words from the 
Greek not yet fully naturalized, where it sounds like the umlaut 
ii ; as in %t)'pf)V&, !QtypO*tf)&' . 

11. The Modified Vowels ($ie Umlaute). 

These vowels (% a, D 0, U ii, fin an) are so peculiar as to be 
acquired only under the direction of a competent teacher. Ex- 
amples are : 

a long : SBti'ber, fdjab'litf), todlj'len, toal)'renb. 

a short : fjfit'te, tam'me, tp'fel, §dn'be, p&'fce. 

long : fdjon, Ijo'ren, SBd'get, Sld'mg, £ol)'ne, ©ol)'ne. 

short : fon'nen, QoTte, SM'fe, Kdp'fe, ©djty'fer. 



INTRODUCTORY I I 

it long: grim, ii'ben, (Stfjii'Ier, fitf)'(en, SBii'djer. 

it short : burnt, fimf, fjitbftf), @d)fttf fcl, ful'len. 

iiu (like German en or English oy) ; ©ebdu'be, SBdu'me, ctu'^er. 

12. The Nasal Vowels ($te Sftafettlaute). 

Nasal vowels are found only in words borrowed from the 
French. They are, however, numerous in German, and they 
retain their French sound. They are represented by the vowels 
a, e, i, o, followed by m or rt ; but they are only to be acquired 
from one accustomed to French pronunciation. They appear in 
such words as 33a|'fin' f reservoir; (Sou-jm', cousin; ©at-fon', sea- 
son; ^ar-fum' , perfume ; (Sfjam-pignon', mushroom. 

13. The Diphthongs ($te Styfjtljottge)- 

^C sounds like English long e in me ; e. g., bie, bte'ueu, £)ier f 
Steb, £ier. 

20 and ei sound like i in pine ; e. g., Wax, ^at'fer, em, mem, 
bem, fern, fern. 

At the end of a few words the e of ie is separately pronounced ; 
e. g., ga-mflH St'm-e, %ra=a j 6'bt==e. 

2lu sounds like ow in /*?«/; e. g., bleat, bream, fau'feu, £)au3. 

2tu and ett sound nearly like oy in %// e. g., §ciu'fer, SBrdu'te, 
(Ste^bdu'be, neu r neurt, Ijeu'te. 

14. The Consonants ($te Sfrmfottantett). 

There are no silent letters in the spelling of German words, 
except () in certain connections, and even here it serves to 
lengthen a preceding vowel, as in u)m, if)U, ifmeu. Consonants 
will be mentioned only where they differ in sound from the 
English. 

2$ f ft? when final or followed by another consonant, sounds 
nearly like p : ob, SDteb, 2auh, ejefyabf . 

(£, c* — In true German words c occurs only in the com- 
pounds dj, cf, frf). In foreign words it is soft before e, i, andy, 



12 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

otherwise hard. The soft sound of c is like English ts or the 
German §: D'ce*cm (o'-tsa-an) (St'ce-ro (tsee'-tsa-ro), (St)4m'ber. 
(£ sounds like k-ts before e or t as in Accept (ak-tsept'), also writ- 
ten $lf§ept' ; elsewhere it sounds like ck, as in acclamie'ren, also 
written afftamte'reu. 

S, bat the end of a word or before another consonant sounds 
nearly like t : ^>cmb, Sartb, gefartbt. This sound is between t 
and b. 

©, g at the beginning of a word or syllable sounds like g in 
go: gut, ge'gert, $er'ge, but when final after a, o, u, au, it is like 
the German 6) though somewhat softer : %olq, mag, lag ; after 
any other vowel or consonant it is palatal like tf) in id) : ©ieg, 
Sftagb, £'6'mg. ($ is distinctly pronounced before n: gua'big, 
(Sfaom. 

In words of French origin g before e preserves its French 
sound, which is like z in azure : ^a'ge, D-rau'ge, ge-me'ren. 

$g f f) at the beginning of a word or syllable is aspirated as in 
English ; e. g., <panb, 9M)r'(]aft, gret'fyeit. Elsewhere it is silent, 
yet it serves to lengthen a preceding vowel, or to make a hiatus 
between two vowels ; e. g., it)tn, ifm, tfy'nert, (£t) /re - 

% \ sounds like English y in yes : je'mattb, \t%t, Slt'tt; but in 
words of French origin j preserves its French sound, which is like 
z in azure : Soured', 3a4ou=fte'. 

H, J is pronounced as in English and (unlike English) is pro- 
nounced before u, as in Sfrtopf, ®ned)t. 

S, I sounds as in English and is not to be slighted in such 
words as ^fctlm, fycttf, bte §dlfte. 

The liquid 1 in words from the French retains its French sound 
as in SBtMet', ticket; SBoiMtfon', broth; Sou-tei'Ke, bottle. 

9t, tt is pronounced as in English, but before f it sounds like 
English ng, as in ben-fert (deng'ken) to think. 

Ct, q occurs only in union with it and is then pronounced 
nearly like kv (not like qu in question) : dual, Duel'Ie, Outt'tung. 






INTRODUCTORY I 3 

0t, t is pronounced as in English, only fuller and somewhat 
trilled. Care must be taken to pronounce it very distinctly. 

2>, f, § at the end of a word or syllable has the hissing sound 
of s in this. At the beginning of a word or syllable it has a 
sound between s and z : fte, fel)r, bie'feS, baS-fefbe. A double 
f (ff) sounds the same as § at the end of a word : SBctf'fer, totffen. 

&p and ft* — ©p at the beginning of a word sounds like ftfjp : 
jpre'djen, fpielen, ©pet'fe, and ft at the beginning of a word sounds 
like )tf)t : fte'tjen, fto'jgen, @tem, but elsewhere fp and ft sound as in 
English : ^tto'fpe, er'fte, %ixx\t In compounds this initial sound 
of fp and ft holds good : cm^fpretfjert, cm'ftofjen. 

$, t sounds as in English in all true German words. In some 
words taken from the French it sounds like ts : ^a-fton', ©taction', 
2tto>t=ttott\ 

In ify the f) is always silent, as in £f)ron, ^e-o-rie', Xf)er*mo* 
me'ter. 

3$, t> generally sounds like English /, as in SSet'ter (fetter), 
SBa'ter, toor. In some foreign words it sounds like v ; e. g., SBa'fe, 
SBiHa, S^e-ne^btg, ^o^af, but at the end of a foreign word it sounds 
like /as in Wmkta^ttt), SDa'tto. 

2®, tt> sounds like English v, as in too, tva§, toaxm, toemt, So'toe, 
except where it follows a consonant in the same syllable. Here 
it approaches the sound of the English w, as in jioet, gttmn'gtg, 
ivoax, fcfittrim'men, ©djtuef'ter. 

$, 5 always sounds like English & in &r ; e. g., ju, gtoet, Qdt, 
£erg. i 

15. Consonantal Digraphs and Trigraphs. 

(&f), d) has a guttural sound after the vowels a, o, it, QU, as in 
ad), nad), nod), 93udj, aitd), §aud), and a softer or palatal sound 
after other letters, as in id), midj, retdj, eucfj, burd), meldjer, Sftctb- 
djen. 

In words from the French, 6# sounds like sck, as in demote', 
chamois, (Sf)aufsfettr/ , fireman, 



14 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Whenever cf) is followed by § in the same syllable it has a f 
sound ; e. g., Ddj§, 2Baei)$, £atf)§, toad) 'fen. But this rule does not 
apply where §> is a contraction of e£, as in 23ttd)3 (contraction of 
23ucf)e3). 

In some words from the Greek cJi sounds like k, as in (£t)rtftit£>. 
In words from the French it is like sh as in (£()cf f (£()Ctrtte f (Sljaife. 

ff and fy have a hissing sound like s in ///z> ; e. g., SSaffer, 
baJ3, ©trafee. 

Note. — ft, although called ess-zet, is not a compound of f and g, but of f and g, 
and in Roman characters is written ss, fs or id. 

®d), f eft sounds like English ^ in disk ; e. g., ©djule, fdjtoctrg, 
^ttn'jcfyen, mi'fdjen. 

^ff Pf* — Each letter is here pronounced ; e. g., $pferb, Spfetf, 
SPfunb. 

$ty, pi) sounds like f; e. g., p^W, *$)t% 

91 g, ttg final is pronounced like #£- in thing, although in north 
Germany there is an added k sound, making 9iing, for example, 
sound nearly like Ditnf, and ©djretbnng like (Sd)rei6imf. 

%% sounds like German §, as in ©d)Ctl3, fttjen, fe£en. 

The German pronunciation is, in general, stronger and more 
emphatic than the English. One must guard against slighting 
any sound, especially the vowels. 

16. Compound Words (gufammengefeijte Shorter). 

Words forming a compound, or a word and its prefix, must be 
separately pronounced and accented ; e. g., beurtetfen (be-ur'tei-len), 
toeggefyen (toeg'ge^en), beetlen (be^et'len). 

17. Review Exercise (SBteberljofattg), 

2(ber, rjctbe, gatyne, $aax ; — ba§, §at, SQtonn, gaff, ©aft 

Sefen, SRegen, mefyr, SO^eer ; — e3, be<§, effen, $arte. 

3t)m, tf)n, tfyr, ifynen, mtr, bit, 33t6el ; — in, fjtn, ift, btft. 

33ot r rot, SBofytte, $oot ; — Don, ooff, bort, £)orf, 3 orn - 

©ut, SBIume, Uf)r, ®uf), ©djule, rufen; — 9M, Summer, Gutter, £uft. 



INTRODUCTORY 1 5 

SBaber, ferjdbiiefj, rodrjlen ; — ©attbe, 9(pfef, $(a£e, rjdtte. 

©efjbn, tjoren, SBdget, ®bnig ; — format, SBolf e, ©etjbpfer. 

@rrm, tiben, (Sdjiiler, frrtjlen ; — burnt, funf, ©tfjliiffel. 

3)ie, bienen, fjter, %kx, £teb ; — SDtot, ®atfer ; em, mem. 

5Iuf, blau, braun, £au3, faufen, $aum, au3, aufgebaut. 

Sfteu, ueuu, tjeute, Sente, SBeute ; — |)dufer, ©ebdube, ^dunre, |)dute. 

Db, 2)ieb, £aub, ge'^aOt ; — (Steer o, Gtitmber, Accent, (Safar. 

£)anb, £anb, gejanbt ; — £ag, lag, Sftagb ; tdgltct) ; jemanb, Suit. 

Victim, fjalf, |)dlfte; — dual, Quelle, Outttung, quer, .Outtte. 

(Ste, fefjr, biefe3; — fpredjen, ftct)fen f ©tern; ®nofpe. 

Nation, (Station, 2(bbttion ; — £()ron, Sweater, %$tt, £t)eorie. 

better, better, Oerftetjen ; — Diommatto ; $afe, $tlla. 

$80, roa3, menn, £oroe — groei, gmangig, groar, §er^, ©erjatj. 

Set), mid), btdj, reicfj, buret) ; — acfj, brad), ftad), audj. 

Cd)3, 83ad)$ ; (SfjriftuS ; — (Srjef, Grjartte, Grjaife, dormant. 

Safe, gufr ©trafee, ®affe, SBaffer ; — «Pfcrb r ^funb ; ^itofopt). 

18. Reading Exercise (fiefeu&mtg). 

The following sentences contain all the elementary sounds of 
the language with frequent repetitions, and if correctly pro- 
nounced and read until familiar there will be no further trouble 
with German pronunciation : 

i. 3d) r)abe eine merge gatvtte. -3d) fann (efen unb fcr)rerben. @uten 
Xag, roie get)t eg Qi)nm ? (B get)t mir gut, ier) battle, unb $fmen ? 
So tft Sofyann? -3d) rr>et§ nter)t, id) t)abe tt)n titer) t gefet)en. 

i. Ich habe eine weisse Fahne. Ich kann lesen und schreiben. 
Guten Tag, wie geht es Ihnen? Es geht mir gut, ich danke, und 
Ihnen ? Wo ist Johann ? Ich weiss nicht, ich habe ihn nicht 
gesehen. 

i. I have a white flag. I can read and write. Good day, how do 
you do ? I am well, I thank you, and you ? Where is John ? I do 
not know ; I have not seen him. 

2. £)u bift rote eiue 33lume. 3)iefe gat)ne ift rot, roeit} unb blau. 
£iefe§ £)orf ift fd)on. £>er 9Jtotm fifct in einem lleinen 33oote. £)iefe 
Stpfet finb reif. ©refer §ut ift fdiroar^. Diefe (gdjute ift grot}. 



l6 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2. Du bist wie eine Blume. Diese Fahne ist rot, weiss und blau. 
Dieses Dorf ist schon. Der Mann sitzt in einem kleinen Boote. 
Diese Apfel sind reif. Dieser Hut ist schwarz. Diese Schule ist gross. 

2. Thou art like a flower. This flag is red, white and blue. 
This village is beautiful. The man sits in a small boat. These 
apples are ripe. This hat is black. This school is large. 

3. 3d) t)abe %\xm §anbe. Der $oget fingt. Die 23ogel fingen. 
(gbuarb ber ©iebente ift $onig Don (Sngtanb. Gormen @te bentfd) 
fprecfyen? $a, em toentg. <5pvtd)tn &k ba% Sort rttfjtig an3 ! 

3. Ich habe zwei Hande. Der Vogel singt. Die Vogel singen. 
Eduard der Siebente ist Konig von England. Konnen Sie deutsch 
sprechen ? Ja, ein wenig. Sprechen Sie das Wort richtig aus ! 

3. I have two hands. The bird sings. The birds sing. Edward 
the Seventh is king of England. Can you speak German ? Yes, a 
little. Pronounce the word correctly ! 

4. Da3 ®ra3 ift grim. Die (Stfjiifer fittb fletftig. 2Inna fingt ein 
fd)one$ 8teb. SBUljelm ber ftmtitt ift $aifer Don Deutfdjtcmb. Der 
§imme( ift Man. Die gciufer finb groft nnb fcfyon. 

4. Das Gras ist griin. Die Schiiler sind fleissig. Anna singt ein 
schones Lied. Wilhelm der Zweite ist Kaiser von Deutschland. 
Der Himmel ist blau. Diese Hauser sind gross und schon. 

4. The grass is green. The pupils are industrious. Anna sings a 
beautiful song. William the Second is emperor of Germany. The 
sky is blue. These houses are large and beautiful. 

5. Dtefe ^Pferbe faufen fefyr ftfjnetf. Dtefe £eute fprecfyen beutfdj nnb 
engttfdj. 2Ba$ fiir ein ©ebtiube ift ba$> ? (53 ift ein ©djutfjauS. (Safar 
mar ein rdmifdjer §etb. 

5. Diese Pferde laufen sehr schnell. Diese Leute sprechen deutsch 
und english. Was fiir ein Gebaude ist das ? Es ist ein Schulhaus. 
Casar war ein romischer Held. 

5. These horses run very fast. These people speak German and 
English. What kind of a building is that? It is a school-house. 
Caesar was a Roman hero. 

6. $fy ijatte ba& $ncf) in ber retfjten §anb. -genre ift ber oierte 
3uii. Die ^fafnten Don Dooib finb in ber 33tbel. Diefe Quelle ift 
fiifjl nnb erfrifcfyenb. <Spielen @ie hairier ? Qa, ein ttentg. 




INTRODUCTORY 1 7 

6. Ich halte das Buch in der rechten Hand. Heute ist der vierte 
Juli. Die Psalmen von David sind in der Bibel. Diese Quelle ist 
kiihl und erfrischend. Spielen Sie Klavier? Ja, ein wenig. 

6. I hold the book in the right hand. To-day is the fourth of July. 
The Psalms of David are in the Bible. The spring is cool and 
refreshing. Do you play the Piano ? Yes, a little. 

7. £)te (gifenbafyn^tation ift in btefer (Strafe. Sftetn $ater ift ntcfyt 
$u §anfe. ©efyen ©te fyente abenb tn$ Sweater? 9cein, nicfyt fyente, 
aber t>ielletrf)t morgen. £)er £otoe ift ein fttonbtier. $)iefe s Dcauer ift 
t>on @tein. 

7. Die Eisenbahn-Station ist in dieser Strasse. Mein Vater ist 
nicht zu Hause. Gehen Sie heute abend ins Theater ? Nein, nicht 
heute, aber vielleicht morgen. Der Lowe ist ein Raubtier. Diese 
Mauer ist von Stein. 

7. The railroad station is in this street. My father is not at home. 
Are you going to the theatre this evening ? No, not to-day, but per- 
haps to-morrow. The lion is a beast of prey. This wall is of stone. 

8. flatten (gie Don etttS bis fittif ! (SinS, ^toei, bret, trier, fiinf. .Jft 
btefer !3Jcann retcf) ober arm ? @r ift toeber retdj nod) arm. £a3 $ferb 
ift ein §an3tier. <Sofrate8 mar ein griedn'fcf)er ^IjUofopf). 

8. Zahlen Sie von eins bis fiinf ! Eins, zwei, drei, vier, fiinf. Ist 
dieser Mann reich oder arm ? Er ist weder reich noch arm. Das 
Pferd ist ein Haustier. Sokrates war ein griechischer Philosoph. 

8. Count from one to five ! One, two, three, four, five. Is this 
man rich or poor? He is neither rich nor poor. The horse is a 
domestic animal. Socrates was a Greek philosopher. 

19. Accent ($tf SBetomutg). 

German accent is very similar to the English and is to be 
learned rather by practice under the direction of the teacher than 
by rules. The following are its general principles : 

1. In simple words the accent falls on the radical syllable, as 
in fctu'fen, Icm'fen, SBiu'me, Sctm'pe, todfyrenb, toe'gen. 

2. The accent never falls on a termination of declension or 
conjugation, and rarely on a suffix. As exceptions it falls on the 



I 8 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

suffix ei in such words as (Sfla-Oe-ret', slavery ; ©te^e-rei \ foundry ; 
and on terert in words having this ending, as in ab^bie'ren, to add ; 
mar-fd)te'ren, to march. 

3. Separable prefixes of verbs are accented, as au3'gef)cn, to 
go out ; ab'fd)ret-ben, to copy ; but inseparable prefixes (161) are 
never accented; e.g., beurtetlen (be*ur'ieMen), to judge; crgdfjleu 
(er-3a(/(en) f to relate ; Oerfyrcdjen (0er4pre'd)en), to promise. 

4. In compound words each member is accented as a separate 
word ; e. g., 23 lumen garten (^lu'men-gar'ten), jlower-garden. 

5. Compound particles usually accent the last member, as f)tn- 
ah', down; §in*au&' r out ; Dor-bet', past. 

The prefix urt before simple words takes the accent ; e. g., un'* 
redfjt, unjust ; Un'fdjitlb, innocence. 

6. Foreign words usually retain the foreign accent. Many of 
them are from the Latin with the last syllable dropped, and are 
therefore accented in German on the last syllable, as (Sol-bat', 
soldier ; $o-met', comet ; ^o-et', poet ; ^(a-nef, planet; ©tu-bent', 
student. 

7. Emphasis is indicated by spacing letters; thus, id) to ill 
gefyen, I will go. 

20. Punctuation (3ttterjmttftiott)> 

1. Punctuation in German is nearly the same as in English. 
The only essential difference relates to the comma, which, in 
German, is used before every dependent clause ; e. g., 3)te3 tft 
ber §ut, ben id) in 9?ero g)orf gefauft fjaoe, 7^w w the hat which I 
boitght {have bought) in New York. Sdj f)offe, bafs er 6alb lommen 
ioerbe, / hope that he will soon come. 

2. The pupil must guard against too long a pause, and espe- 
cially against letting the voice fall, at a comma when thus placed. 
The purpose of the comma in this case is not to indicate a pause, 
but to cut off the dependent from the principal clause. 



INTRODUCTORY 19 

21. The Hyphen ($er Stitbeftridj), 

1. The use of the hyphen in German differs somewhat from 
its use in English. It is not used to separate the parts of short 
compounds such as bte Stiirglotfe, the door-bell, yet it may be used 
in the case of several long words that would be unconnected in 
English, such as bte geuer^erfid)erung^@efeEf(^aft f the fire insur- 
ance company. 

2. This compound might also be written as one word, thus : 
geuert)erftc^erung§gefeK|d)aft; and the language readily admits of 
even longer compounds ; e. g., ©tafylbrafytfetlftra^enbaftntoagett, 
which is only a cable street-car, although compounded of six 
words meaning steel-wire-rope-street-way-carriage (©tctf)l*£)raf)t= 
©etl'@traJ3en^a^tt^agert). The student need not be alarmed at 
the sight of long compounds, as they are readily separated into 
their elements and are understood as separate words. 

3. There is a use of the hyphen peculiar to the German in 
such compounds as bct<§ (Sin- unb 5lu3treten, the going in and out ; 
Dforb* tmb ©iibamertfa, North and South America ; ber ©d)ufy= unb 
£eber£)anbler, the shoe and leather dealer. 

22. Syllabication ($ie (Stlfcetttrenmntg), 

1. The division into syllables is determined mainly by the pro- 
nunciation and is such that in general each syllable after the first 
must commence with a consonant except in compound words ; 
e. g., te'jert, to read; Wb'kx, eagle ; SBct'ter, father ; %ox 'ten, garden ; 
fdj)ret / 6en, to write ; etn'tre-ten, to enter. 

2. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the last 
one, and of two or more consonants thus placed the last one only 
goes with the second vowel, thus : Sa=ben, 5Ip-fe( f btimp^ert ; but 
& — ft, as in brucfen (briif-fen), and ft is never divided ; thus : er= 
fien§. 

3. These rules need to be especially observed when dividing a 
word at the end of a line. Do not commence a new line with a 



20 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

vowel, except in the case of a compound as : ^off-amt, post-office. 
Do not write 2Bot)rt=tmg f dwelling, but 2Sol)=ntmg ; not fpred^ett, 
but fyre-cfjen ; not (SHn'leit-nng,, but Qnn'Iekung,, etc. 

23. Beginnings of Conversation 

(According to the objective method). 

For the better understanding of these conversations refer in 
advance to §§ 29-31 and 23, 10. 

1. The Numerals from One to Twenty-one 
($)te 9?nmeralien Don ein3 bi$ einunb^tnan^ig). 



1 ein£ 


8 afyt 


15 fftnfeeljn 


2 groet 


9 newt 


16 fecf^erjn 


3 brei 


10 getjn 


17 ftebgetjn 


4 t)ier 


11 elf 


18 actjtgefyn 


5 ftof 


12 gtoMf 


19 neun^erjn 


6 fedjg 


13 breigefyn 


20 atoanjig 


7 fteben 


14 rjtergetjn 


21 etnunb^toanjtg 



3af)(en @ie Don ein3 bi3 ^ef)n, Count from one to ten. 

28ie oiele ©crjiiter finb in btejer How many pupils are there in 

Piaffe ? this class ? 

3arjlen ©ie bie ®nctben, Count the boys. 

3(if)len <Sie bie SJ&ibcrjen, Count the girls. 

3&fylen ©ie bie genfter, Count the windows. 

3ci!)len ©ie biefe 23nrf)er, Count these books. 



2. £)a$ 25utf).— The Book. 

ba$ $8utf), the book biefe $iicfjer, these books 

bie $iitf)er, the books bie £>cmb, the hand 

ein S5ucr) r a book in ber §cmb, in the hand 






nen, /z<?w; alt, <?/<^/ recfjt, right; finf, /<?#/ too, where ; toetcfjer, 
which ; garjte (gatjlen @te), count. 



INTRODUCTORY 21 

%&a$ ift bct§ ? What is that ? 

2)a3 ift ein $ncl), That is a book. 

3ft bag 23nct) nen ober alt ? Is the book new or old ? 

©§ ift neu, It is new. 

2Bo ift ba$ $ud) ? Where is the book ? 

(£g ift in ber §anb, It is in the hand. 

Sn roelct)er §cmb ? In which hand ? 

Sn ber redjten §anb, In the right hand. 

3&!)len ©ie biefe 23ucl)er, Count these books. 

(Sing, groei, brei, Oier, fimf, One, two, three, four, five. 

3. £)ag ®tag. — The Glass. 

ba$ ©lag, the glass ein Stag, a pitcher 

ein ©lag, a glass in bem Stage, in the pitcher 

ber Stag, the pitcher ba$ SSaffer, the water 

boft,fu//; leer, empty; Ijalb, half; gieften, A? /^r; icl) giefse, / 
pour. 

%3a§> ift \>a$ ? What is that ? 

£)ag ift ein ©lag, That is a glass. 

Sft bag ©lag t)oll ober leer ? Is the glass full or empty ? 

(£g ift leer, It is empty. 

£$a3iftbct3? What is that? 

2)ag ift ein Stag, That is a pitcher. 

3ft SSctffer in bem $ruge ? Is there water in the pitcher ? 

3a, SSaffer ift in bem Stage, Yes, water is in the pitcher. 

Set) gtefee Staffer ang bem Stage I pour water out of the pitcher 

in bag ®(a§, into the glass. 

5ft ba§ ©lag t)oH ober leer? Is the glass full or empty ? 

©S ift tjalb OoE, It is half full. 

4. £)ie ganb. — The Hand. 

eine §anb, a hand ein Singer, a finger 

roelctje §anb ? which hand ? rote m'ele, how many ? 

bk §anbe, the hands jatjle (&at)len ©te), count 



22 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



2Bag tfi bag ? 
$)a§ ift eine £>anb, 
2£elrf)e£anb ift eg? 
(£g tft bte red)te §anb, 
^elcrje £>anb ift bag ? 
£)a£ tft bte (tnfe «£)anb, 



3£a3 tft ba§ ? 
2)ag tft ein ginger, 
2Bie oiele Singer t)a6en ©ie ? 
3d) f)a6e jetjn ginger, 
Qatjlen ©ie bie ginger, 
(Sing, gtr-ei, brei, uier, fimf, fecf)g, 
fteben, ad)t, neun, gerjn, 



What is that ? 
That is a hand. 
Which hand is it ? 
It is the right hand. 
Which hand is that ? 
That is the left hand. 



What is that ? 
That is a finger. 
How many fingers have you ? 
I have ten fingers. 
Count the fingers. 
One, two, three, four, five, six, 
seven, eight, nine, ten. 



5. £)te gctfyne. 

bie gafyne, the flag 
etne gafyne, a flag 
ein Streifen, a stripe 



■The Flag. 

ein ©tern, a star 

frag fitr eine, what kind of a 

fefyr fdjon, very beautiful 



amerifanifd), American. 



SBagiftbag? 

£)a3 ift eine gafyte, 

2Sa3 fitr eine garjne tft eg ? 

(£g ift bte amerifanifcrje garjne, 

2Bag tft bag ? 

QaZ tft ein ©treifen, 

3af)(e (ftctrjlen @te) bie ©treifen, 

Sing, fttnei, brei .... bret^etjn, 

SBaStftbaS? 

£)ag ift ein ©tern. 

SSie t»ie£e ©rente ? 

©ieben unb tiier^ig ©terne, 

3ft bie gatjne fcrjon? 

3a, fie ift fefyr fctjdn, 



What is that ? 

That is a flag. 

What kind of a flag is it ? 

It is the American flag. 

What is that ? 

That is a stripe. 

Count the stripes. 

One, two, three . 

What is that ? 

That is a star. 

How many stars ? 

Forty-seven stars. 

Is the flag beautiful ? 

Yes, it is very beautiful. 



thirteen. 



INTRODUCTORY 



23 



6. £)ct$ Sftedjnen. — The Reckoning. 
ein getjler, a mistake geljen, to go 



bie Xctfel, the blackboard 
fd^reiben, to write 

2$ie tiiel ift atoet unb bret ? 

3tt)et unb bret tft fed)3. 

3ft "ba£ rtdjttg ? 

Dcein, ba£ ift ein gefyler. 

28ie toiel tft gtnei unb brei ? 

3tuei unb bret tft fitnf. 

2)a3 ift ritf)tig. 

2$ie Diet ift breimal bier ? 

£>reima( trier ift gtnolf. 

©et)e (geljen <Sie) an bie Safel unb 

ftfjreibe (fctjreiben <Sie) 3x4=12. 



ricfjtig, correct 
breimal, three times 

How many are two and three ? 
Two and three are six. 
Is that correct ? 
No, that is a mistake. 
How many are two and three ? 
Two and three are five. 
That is correct. 
How many are three times four? 
Three times four are twelve. 
Go to the blackboard and write 
3 x 4=12. 



7. Use of the Prepositions an, in, auf. 

3ln means close by, against ; as, ber @tuf)t ftef)t an ber 2$anb, 
the chair stands by, or against, the wall ; ba§ 23ilb fyangt an ber 
SSanb, the picture hangs on the wall, that is, against the wall. 

5tt has the same meaning as in English ; as, bie Sfarte liegt in 
ber ©djatfjtet, the card lies in the box. 

Slttf means on; as, ba$ SBud) liegt auf bent ^ulte, the book 
lies on the desk. 

These prepositions govern the dative when reference is had to 
location in, or to motion within, a place, as in the above ex- 
amples ; but when motion to or into a place is expressed they 
take the accusative ; thus, id) ftelle ben ©tutjl an bie 2Banb (ace), 
I place the chair by the wall (motion to a place) ; id) lege bie State 
in bie <2d)atf)tel (ace), / lay the card into the box (motion into a 
place) ; id) lege ba§> SBitdj auf ba§ ^ult.(acc), / lay the book on the 
desk (motion to a place). 

For the better understanding of these examples see §103. 



24 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

ftef)en, to stand id; ftetye, I stand 

gefjen, to go id) gelje, I go 

fatten, to hold itf) fjalte, I hold 

legen, to lay id) lege, I lay 

liegen, to lie z§> liegt, it lies 

fteUen, to place id) [telle, I place 

Ijangen, to hang e£ tjangt, it hangs 

Sc| ftefye an bent $)Mte, I stand by the desk. 

3d) gefye an ba$ ^enfter, I go to the window. 

3d) l)alte bie geber in ber §anb, I hold the pen in the hand. 

3d) lege bie geber auf ba$ ^nlt, I lay the pen on the desk. 

©ie liegt auf bem $)Mte, It lies on the desk. 

3d) f)ange ba§ 33ilb an bie 2Banb, I hang the picture on the wall, 

(§& l)dngt an ber 2Banb, It hangs on the wall. 

3d) gelje an bie %iix t I go to the door. 

3d) ftel)e an ber £itr, I stand at the door. 

8. 5luf and ju as Separable Prefixes. 

5Iufmad)en, to open; ^u'madjen, to close (160). 

Scr) mad)e bie %\xx auf, I open the door. 

3d) mad)e bie %m %u, I close the door. 

Stfj madje ba$ genfter auf, I open the window. 

3d) mad)e ba$ genfter §u, I close the window. 

Set) tnad)e ba§ $udj auf, I open the book. 

3d) mad)e ba3 33ud) §u, I close the book. 

3ft bie £itr auf ober gu ? Is the door open or shut ? 

<Sie ift ^u, It is shut. 

3ft bie §anb auf ober gu ? Is the hand open or shut ? 

©ie ift auf. It is open. 

9. Various Idiomatic Expressions. 

$erftel)en ©ie ? Do you understand ? 

3a, i^ oerftelje, Yes, I understand. 

Sftein, id) fcerftelje nic^t, No, I do not understand. 



INTRODUCTORY 



25 



53ud)ftabteren ©te ba$ SKort §au3. 
©precfjen ©te beutfc^ ? 
s $erftel)en ©te bentfcf) ? 
2£a3 tft ba3 ®egentetl toon lang ? 
§)a3 ©egentett Don tang tft fur$, 
©efyen ©te an bit £afel nnb ferret* 
ben ©te ba<§ SSort „($egentetl," 
SBetdfje ©cite ? 
Sefen ©te ba£ fitr ftdj, 



Sin tocm tft bic SRei^c? 

£)tefe£ SBort tft fefjr gebrduc^lict), 
©nredjen ©telangfant nnb beutftd), 
©te ftaben etne gute 2Iu3fprarf)e, 
£)te §auptfacf)e in einer fremben 
©pradje tft bte 2Iu3fnracf)e, 

§aben ©te gefcf)rieben ? 
yitin, id) fyabt ntdjt gefdjrteben, 
SSarnm rttdjt ? 
SSeil id) feme geber fyattt, 



3Ste fjetfjt "mountain peak" auf 

beutfc^ ? 
©8 Ijetfet „SBcrgcgfpiftc F " 

2Bte fagt man anf beutfdj " How 

do you do?" 
2£ieget)te3 3tmen? 
2Ba3 btbtuttt „&. 33.?" 
(53 bebentet ff §um SBetftriet," 
3Sa3 bebentet ff jum Seifine!" 

anf engltftf) ? 



Spell the word HqcluZ (^a-U'3). 
Do you speak German ? 
Do you understand German ? 
What is the opposite of long ? 
The opposite of long is short. 
Go to the blackboard and write 

the word „($kgentetl." 
Which page ? 
Read that to yourself (silently). 



Whose turn is it ? (to whom is 

the turn ?) 
This word is very common. 
Speak slowly and distinctly. 
You have a good pronunciation. 
The principal thing in a foreign 

language is the pronunciation. 

Have you written ? 
No, I have not written. 
Why not ? 

Because I had no pen (no pen 
had). 



What is " mountain peak " in 

German ? 
It is „.Q3erg,e3fpttge." 
How does one say in German 

" How do you do?" 
How do you do ? 
What does „§. 23." mean ? 
It means „£nm 23etfptel." 
What does ,,-utm 23etf|riet" 
1 mean in English ? 



26 



\ 

NEW GERMAN COURSE 



@& bebeutet "for example," 
SBctg h&zutet bte OTiirgung 

@g bebeutet ff ba§ Ijetfjt," 



It means " for example." 
What does the abbreviation 

„b. h." mean? 
It means n ba<o f)etf]t" (that is). 



10. The word ftc has several meanings. See the declension 
(§ 82). In the plural it means literally they or them, but by a 
peculiar liberty of speech it may meanjw// and to distinguish it, 
when so used, it is written with a capital initial : SB Hen ©te, will 
you, etc. Observe also that it is used in the imperative as well 
as in the indicative. Thus the German says gefjen Sit f go {you) ; 
[djretben Ste, write {you), etc. 

24. Nouns in Common Use (®eMud)Ucf)e ©ufcftantfoc). 

As the gender of the nouns presents a serious difficulty in 
learning German, it is well to learn a few of the more common 
ones in the singular number, in connection with the definite ar- 
ticle, at the outset. The following will be of frequent occurrence 
in the conversational exercises of this book. Their plural forms 
and full declension will be found in the word-lists from which 
they are taken (48-55). 

It will be observed that in German, as in Latin and most 
other languages, there is an arbitrary grammatical gender inde- 
pendent of sex. This is to be learned only by much practice in 
connection with the definite article in each case. 



MASCULINE 

ber £tfd), the table 
ber 33attm, the tree 
ber 33rief, the letter 
ber gug, the foot 
ber gut, the hat 
ber Hopf, the head 
ber Sftocf, the coat 
ber @Ct£, the sentence 
ber (&tuf)i, the chair 
ber ginger, the finger 



FEMININE 

bie 33fume, the flower 
bie gctfyne, the flag 
bie gctrbe, the color 
bie ®arte, the card 
bk (Spradje,the speech 
bte @timme, the voice 
bie @tra§e, the street 
bte $tobef, the needle 
bte geber, the pen 
bie Ufir. the clock 



NEUTER 

bag 23i(b, the picture 
bag 23utf), the book 
bag £)orf, the village 
bag ®eft>, the money 
bag gaug, the house 
ba^> Qad), the roof 
bag §0(5, the wood 
bag ttnb, the child 
ba?> 2Bort, the word 
bag £3rot, the bread 



INTRODUCTORY 



27 



ber Stpfel, the apple 
ber Dfett, the stove 
ber 33ater, the father 
ber 23ogef, the bird 
ber @e(b, the hero 



bie £tit, the time 
bte 9^acf)t, the night 
bie §anb, the hand 
bte 8uft, the air 
bie (gtabt, the city 



ber $nabe, the boy bte Sanb, the wall 



bag §aar, the hair 
bag $af)r, the year 
ba§ gteifct), the meat 
ba$ dimmer, the room 
ba§ Sfieffer, the knife 
bag Staffer, the water 



These nouns make a convenient spelling lesson, the letters 
being pronounced in German. The thorough learning of these 
words, so that on hearing the English the German can be given 
with the article and correctly pronounced, will be of great 
future value. 



25. Some 

toetfj, white 
fd)toctr$, black 
rot, red 
Mem, blue 
grim, green 
cjeftj, yellow 
braim, brown 
grau, gray 
grog, large 
ftein, small 
fang, long 



Common Adjectives 

!ur§, short 
gut, good 
fd)lecf)t, bad 
retdj), rich 
arm, poor 
alt, old 

jurtg, y° un g 
neu, new 

fjeifj, hot 
fatt, cold 
tjodfj, high 



(®eMudjittf)e 2lbje¥tit>e). 

ntebrtg, low 
ftarf, strong 
fdjtoad), weak 
fdt}rr>er, heavy 
letdjt, light 
fdjarf, sharp 
ftumpf, dull 
ftetl, steep 
reif, ripe 
fdjon, beautiful 
rtwjlid), useful 



Exercise (It bung.) 



£)er §ut tft jdjtoara, 

2)ie Q3tume tft fctjirn, 

£)a3 JQauZ tft gro^, 

£)er Slpfel tft reif, 

2)te §anb tft ftarf, 

2)a3 23ud) ift tteu, 

liefer (32, 4) ©tuf)( tft ntebrtg, 

SMefe 9?abet tft Hem, 

$iefeS 2Bort tft tang, 



The hat is black. 
The flower is beautiful. 
The house is large. 
The apple is ripe. 
The hand is strong. 
The book is new. 
This chair is low. 
This needle is small. 
This word is long. 



28 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

3ft ber «£mt fcl)tDar§? Is the hat black ? 

3a, er (83, 1) ift fdjtoarj, Yes, it is black. 

3ft btefe SBlume fcfjtm ? Is this flower beautiful ? 

Set, fie ift fdjon, Yes, it is beautiful. 

3ft btefe3 £cm3 groft ? Is this house large ? 

3a, e3 ift grofs, Yes, it is large. 

In the last sentences observe that the pronoun varies with the 
gender of the antecedent. 

Translate and Write: 
r. The table is new. 2. The wall is white. 3. The knife is 
sharp. 4. The hat is black. 5. The flag is red, white and blue. 
6. The street is long. 7. The hair is brown. 8. The water 
is cold. 9. Money is useful. 10. This boy is poor. 11. This 
city is large. 12. This child is beautiful. 

26. Some Verbs in Common Use (Gtebrdudjltdje SSerbcn). 

1 . The principal parts of a German verb are the infinitive, the 
imperfect (or past) tense and the past participle. 

2. Most verbs are conjugated with the auxiliary fjaben, to have, 
a few with feirt, to be (143). 

3. At this early stage of the study it would be well to turn to 
the conjugations of the three auxiliaries, fjabert, fein and toerbert 
(145-6-7), making them familiar by daily reading and correct 
pronunciation ; then, in like manner, take up the model verbs 
lo6en (151) conjugated with I)a6en, and gefyert (156) conjugated 
with fein. This will greatly facilitate the understanding of the 
elementary reading and conversation that will occur before these 
verbs are reached in regular course. 

4. The following are the principal parts of some of the more 
commonly used verbs. As they constitute an excellent exercise 
in spelling and pronunciation, as well as in learning their mean- 
ing and use, time may be profitably spent in making the pupil 
very familiar with them. The most of them will be of frequent 
occurrence in the exercises of this book. 



INTRODUCTORY 


29 


Principal 


Parts (§ a up t for men). 


INFINITIVE 


IMPERFECT 


PAST PART. 


Ijaben, to have 


f)atte 


gefjabt 


fetn, to be* 


mar 


getoefen 


Herbert, to become* 


tourbe 


getoorben 


loben, to praise 


lobte 


gelobt 


lieben, to love 


Itebte 


geltebt 


fcwfett, to buy 


faufte 


gelauft 


nerfctufert, to sell 


berfaufte 


berfauft 


fpielen, to play 


fptelte 


gefptelt 


gotten, to count 


gape 


ge^arjlt 


lefyren, to teach 


ler)rte 


geteljrt 


banlen, to thank 


banfte 


gebanlt 


terrteit, to learn 


lernte 


gelernt 


fagen, to say, to tell 


fagte 


gefagt 


fef)en, to see 


fat) 


gefe^en 


ftt^en, to sit 


w 


gefeffen 


getjen, to go* 


sm 


gegangen 


fommett, to come* 


tarn 


gefommen 


effen, to eat 


a6 


gegeffen 


trinfen, to drink 


Iran! 


getrunfen 


lefen, to read 


Ia3 


gelefen 


ftngen, to sing 


jang 


gefungen 


fpredjett, to speak 


jpract) 


gefprocfjen 


fcfjretben, to write 


fdjrteb 


gefcfjrieben 


geben, to give 


gab 


gegeben 


leifyen, to lend 


m 1 


gettefyen 


nefjmen, to take 


natjm 


genommen 


Dertteren, to lose 


berlor 


nerloren 


finben, to find 


janb 


gefunben 


oerftefjen, to understand 


oerjtanb 


nerftanben 


benfen, to think 


baifytt 


gebacfjt 


roiffen, to know (a fact) 


rouble 


genmjit 


feimett, to know (a person) 


fannte 


gefannt 


5. In the above list th 


e verbs marked with 


a star (*) are con- 


jugated with jetn (146), 


all the others with 


fyaben (145). 



30 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Exercise (U bung). 

3d) f)abe, id) fyatte, id) f)abe getjabt, I have, I had, I have had. 

3d) bin, id) roar, id) bin geroefen, I am, I was, I have been. 

3d) lobe, id) fobte, id) \)abt gefobt, I praise, I praised, I have 

praised. 

3d) faufe, id) faufte, id) fjabe ge= I buy, I bought, I have bought. 

fcmft, 

3d) fptele, id) fipielte, id) t)ctbe ge- I play, I played, I have played. 

fyiett, 

3d) fortune, id) lam, id) bin gefom- I come, I came, I have come. 

men, 

Translate and Write : 
i. I sell, I sold, I have sold. 2. I count, I counted, I have 
counted. 3. I say, I said, I have said. 4. I sing, I sang, I have 
sung. 5. I write, I wrote, I have written. 6. I give, I gave, I 
have given. 7. I find, I found, I have found. 8. I understand 
I understood, I have understood. 9. I learn, I learned, I have 
learned. 10. I take, I took, I have taken, n. I go, I went, I 
have gone. 

6. Observe that in nearly all verbs the 1st person singular 
present is formed by dropping the final n of the infinitive, as : 3d) 
ijabe, / have ; 3d) lobe, I praise ; 3d) faufe, / buy. 

7. The only exceptions to this rule in the verbs of the above 
list are fein (present, id) bin) and miffen (present, id) toeife). The 
student should also, at this early stage, learn the principal rules 
of German construction, or order of words, which differ consid- 
erably from the English (114). 






The Grammar. — 2)te $rcmtmattt 



The Parts of Speech (®te £Bo*tarten)* 

27. There are ten parts of speech : 

£)er 9Irttfet ober ba$ ©e)d)(ed)t$toort, the article. 

2)a£ ©ubftanttu ober ba3 <£)auphoort, the noun or substantive. 

S)a§ ^rortomert ober ba$ gitrtoort, the pronoun. 

2)a3 Slbjectto ober ba3 ©tgeufdjaffcStoort, the adjective. 

2)ct!3 Dcumerale ober bas Qarjlmort, tne numeral. 

£a3 95erb ober ba3 getttrjort, the verb. 

2)a3 2lboerb ober ba§ UntftcmbStoort, the adverb. 

£te ^rdpofttton ober ba§> $Berf)d(tm3toort, the preposition. 

Xie ^onjunftton ober ba$ 53inberuort, the conjunction. 

£te Snterjeftioit ober ba$ 5Iu3ruftmg3- the interjection. 

toort, 

The article, the noun, the pronoun, the adjective and the nu- 
merals are declined. The verb is conjugated. The other parts 
of speech are uninflected. 



The Article (£er SUvtiUl). 

28. The articles are used in general as in English, but are 
rendered difficult by their numerous forms of declension for case, 
gender and number. 

29. The Definite Article ($er fccftimmte Slrtifel)- 

The definite article has a distinct form for each gender, thus, 
in the nominative : 



9ft ct§ f uHtium 


^cmininum 


9£ e ii t r li m 


plural 


(masculine) 


(feminine) 


(neuter) 


(for all genders) 


ber, the 


bte, the 


bag, the 
3i 


bte, the 



32 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



30. The Indefinite Article (3er unbcftimmtc s iirttfel). 

i. The indefinite article eitt, a or an, was originally the numeral 
ettt, one, and has no plural form. 

2. The article, like the noun, is declined in four cases resem- 
bling the first four Latin cases. 

3. To these declensions are added, for convenience of ref- 
erence, the forms of the personal pronouns of the 3d person 
(82), since the definite article is frequently used in connection 
with these forms, thus : ber — er ; bte — fie ; ba$ — e3 ; etc. 

/ 31. Chart of Declensions. 

1. The Definite Article (2)er bcfttmmtc Strtifel) : 

Singular. Plural. 

<m. %. si. m. %. $l 

Nom. ber (e) bte (e) bct£ (e) bte (en) the 

Gen. be£ (en) ber (en) be3 (en) ber (en) of the 

Dat. bent (en) ber (en) bent (en) ben (en) to the 

Ace. ben (en) bie (e) ba$ (e) bte (en) the 

2. The Indefinite Article (2)er unbefttntmte 9Crtifel) : 

Nom. ettt etne ettt a 

Gen. etne3 etner etne£ of a 

Dat. einem etner etnent to a 

Ace. etnen etne em a 

3. Personal Pronouns (^erfonal'^ronontina) : 

©ritte $erfott. 

Nom. er fie e£ fie 

Gen. f etner tljrer f etner ifjrer 

Dat. ifjm i£)r irjttt ifjnen 

Ace. itjrt fie eg fie 



32. Remarks on Articles and Adjectives. 

1. The ending of an adjective after the definite article, or any 
word declined like the definite article, is e or en as indicated in 
the above chart (adjective endings in parentheses). 







THE 


ARTICLE 




2. 


Example (Qktftriel) : 










Singular. 




Plural. 




Stfasf. 


$em. 


9£eut. 


m- g. Stt. 


Norn 


. ber neue 


bte nene 


ba§ neue 


bte neucn 


Gen. 


be3 neuen 


ber nenen 


be£ nenen 


ber neuen 


Dat. 


bent neuen 


ber nenen 


bent nenen 


ben neuen 


Ace. 


ben neuen 


bte neue 


ba$ neue 


bte neuen 



33 



3. Similar to the definite article* are declined all "gender 
ending words," that is, words having a distinct ending for each 
gender. Such are : — 



Singular. 






Plural. 




2Ra8f. gem. 


a cut 




9R. g. W. 




biefer btefe 


btefeS 


this 


btefe 


these 


jener jene 


jeneS 


that 


jene 


those 


jeber jebe 


jebeS 


every 







tuefdjer irettfje 


tr>e(d)e3 


which 


toefefye 


which 


folcfjer fo£ct)e 


foIct)e§ 


such 


foldje 


such 


manner manage 


manages 


many a 


manege 


many 


4. Example (SBeiftriel) : 








Singular. 




Plural. 




2Ka8f. gem. 


STient 




9K. g. 9?. 




N. biefer btefe 


btefeS 


this 


btefe 


these 


G. biefer biefer 


bte|e§ 


of this 


biefer 


of these 


D. btefent biefer 


btefent 


to this 


btefen 


to these 


A. btefen btefe 


btefeS 


this 


btefe 


these 



5. Like the indefinite article in the singular and like biefer in 
the plural are declined the possessive pronouns, meitt, my ; betn, 
thy ; fetn, his, its; unfer, our ; t\Xtx,your; ifyv,her, their, and also 
the indefinite numeral fetn, no, not any (87). 

* Compare the endings of biefer with those of the definite article. They are sometimes 
said to be alike, but in the nominative and accusative of the feminine and neuter singular, 
and in the plural, some differences will be observed (e instead of te and eg instead of as). 



34 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



6. 


Example (SBeifptel) : 












Singular. 




Plural. 






aw'dsi. 


gem. 


stfeut. 


2K. ft. ft. 




Nom. 


mein 


meitte 


mein 


meitte 


my 


Gen. 


meineS 


metner 


mettteS 


meitter 


of my 


Dat. 


metnem 


meiner 


metnem 


meittett 


to my 


Ace. 


meinen 


meitte 


mettt 


meitte 


my 



Exercise (II bung). 

£)er $ut, the hat ; bie $arte, the card ; ba<§ 23ud), the book. 
(Sin §ut, a hat ; eine £ctrte, a card ; ein 33nrf), a book. 
S)ie £)ute, the hats ; bie Garten, the cards ; bie 23tttf)er, the books. 
3d) fyabe ben £mt, bie Starte unb bag SBucfj, I have the hat, the 
card and the book. 

£)ie ^ctrte ift in bent 23urf)e, the card is in the book. 

2)ie Garten finb in ben SSitdjern, the cards are in the books. 



2Bo ift ber $ut ? |)ier ift er. 

2Bo ift bie ®arte ? £ter ift fie. 

2Bo ift ba$ «u^ ? §ier ift e3. 

SSer §at ben §ut ? 3d) [)abe if)n. 

SSer §at bie ®arte ? 3d) fja6e fie. 

3Ser f)at ba$ SBudj ? 3d) fjabe e§. 

2Ser f)at bie |mte ? 3d) £)a6e fie. 



Where is the hat ? Here it is. 
Where is the card ? Here it is. 
Where is the book ? Here it is. 
Who has the hat ? I have it. 
Who has the card ? I have it. 
Who has the book ? I have it. 
Who has the hats ? I have them. 



Observe that fyaben governs the accusative. 



Translate and Write : * 



i. The table and the chair. 2. This city and this village. 
3. I have the pen and the letter. 4. The table is in the house. 
5. Where is the apple? Here it is. 6. Where is the pen? 



* All words required for the translation exercises will be found in the examples imme- 
diately preceding, or in the vocabulary at the end of the book. Each preparatory exercise 
should be carefully studied before attempting the translation. For these nouns see § 24. 






THE ARTICLE 35 

Here it is. 7. Where is the bread ? Here it is. 8. Who has 
the button ? I have it. 9. Who has the watch ? I have it. 
10. Who has the cards? I have them. 11. My hat, my pen 
and my book. 

7. The ending of an adjective after the indefinite article (or 
any word declined like the indefinite article) is the same as after 
the definite article, except where the indefinite article lacks the 
gender ending. In these cases the adjective takes the ending er 
in the masculine and t$ in the neuter. 

8. Example (Setftriel) : 

MASC FEM. NEUT. 

Nom. em tteuer erne neue em netted 

Gen. eineS neuett etner tteuen eme3 rtettett 

Dat. etnem neuett etner neuett etnem neuett 

Ace. etnen neuett erne neue ein neueS 

Exercise (Ubung). 
£)er alte §ut ; bie tnet^e ®arte ; ba§ neue 23udj. 
The old hat ; the white card ; the new book. 
(Sin after §ut ; erne roetfte St'arte ; ein neueS ©udj.. 
An old hat ; a white card ; a new book. 

3d) Ijabe etnen fdjtoarjen tgut, etne roetge Starte unb em netted 93utf). 
I have a black hat, a white card, and anew book. 

£)te toetfje $arte Itegt in bent neuen 23udj)e. 
The white card lies in the new book. 

£)te fletnen Garten jlnb in bm neuen SBitdjertL 
The small cards are in the new books. 

2)a£ $cmb beg neuen $ute§ ift fd^toarg. 
The band of the new hat is black. 

9. A predicate adjective is not declined but remains in its 
simple form (75) ; e. g., 

2)te ®arte ift toetfc, the card is white ; bie 23M)er finb neu. the 
books are new. 



36 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Translate and Write : 

For the nouns and adjectives in this exercise see the preceding lists (24, 25). 

i. The ripe apple, the white card, and the beautiful picture. 
2 A good father and a good brother. 3. I have a ripe apple 
and a sharp knife. 4. These white cards are in the large new 
books. 5. The roof of this new house is steep. 6. Is this card 
white or blue ? It is blue. 7. Is this knife sharp or dull ? It 
is dull. 8. Is this sentence long or short ? It is short. 

10, The definite article is used : 

a. Before a noun taken in a general sense as referring to the 
whole of a substance ; e. g., $5a3 ©ifert ift etn detail, iron is a 
metal. 

b. Before an abstract noun ; e. g., $ie ^iinftltdjfeit ift cine 
^ugenb, punctuality is a virtue. 

c. Before the name of a part of the body or things pertaining 
to the body, where we use, in English, a possessive pronoun 
(when the context plainly indicates the possessor) ; e. g., 

(£r fcl)iitteite ben $opf, He shook the head (instead of 

his head). 
(Sr fyctt ben %xm gebrodjen, He has broken his arm. 

%d) £)a6e mid) in bte §anb ge= I have cut my hand. 

fcfymtten, 
3d) tjctbe fetn (Mb in ber Sctfcfje, I have no money in my pocket. 

d. Before the names of seasons, months, and days ; e. g., 

^er3Stntertfteme!aIteSa^re^5ett r Winter is a cold season. 
$er 2(ugu[t tear jet)r roarm, August was very warm. 

(£r tarn am (an bent) 9J£orttag an, He arrived on Monday. 

e. Before the names of streets ; e. g., Sd) roofme in ber ^Dtetrtcfj- 
©trafte, / live in Dietrich street. 

f. Before feminine names of countries, as : bte ©djroeig, Switzer- 
land ; e. g., 2$ir geljen narf) ber ©diroetg, we are going to 

Switzei'la7id. 






THE NOUN 37 

g. Before a personal name used in a familiar or contemptuous 
manner ; e. g., 2)er Solemn fann e3 tun, y<?/z/z £#/* do it. 

h. Before nouns expressing weight and measure (where the 
indefinite article would be used in English) ; e. g., 

£)er s $ret3 tft gtoet 9#arf ba^ The price is two marks a pound. 

$Pfunb,* 

£)tefe3 £ucf) foftet brei SOZart bic This cloth costs three marks 

(SHe (73), an ell. 

*. When two nouns occur together in a sentence the article 
must be repeated; e. g., 

%o& 4)cut3 tmb ber ©arten ftnb The house and the garden are 

§u oerfcmfen, for sale (to sell). 

(Sine Staff e uttb etne Untertaffe, A cup and saucer. 

Translate and Write: 

i. Copper is a metal. 2. Is punctuality a virtue ? Yes, it (fie) 
is a virtue. 3. Has John broken his (ben) arm ? No, he has not 
broken it. 4. We live in Maple Street. 5. What is the price 
of this sugar ? Twenty pfennigs a pound. 6. These tables and 
chairs are for sale. 



Nouns ($aupttQ&ttet). 

33. The Declensions (Sie Qdtinationtn). 

In the declensions there are : 

1. Three persons : 

bte erfte ^erfon, the first person, 
bte groette ^erfon, the second person, 
bte britte ^erfon f the third person. 



* 2)ct§ ^funb, the pound, and bte (Site, the ell, although not belonging to the metric system. 
are often used in Germany. The pound is half a kilo and the German ell five-eighths of a 
meter, or about 24^ inches. 



38 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2. Two numbers : 

(Singular or <5tn§ar^l r singular, 
plural or Wltf)X%al)l, plural. 

3. Three genders : 

9#a3fultnum or mannlicfj, masculine, 
gemmmum or tociblitf), feminine. 
Dtatrum or facrjlttf), neuter. 

4. Four cases : 

ber Sftomtnatto ober ber erfte gall, the nominative or first case, 

ber ©emtio ober ber groeite gall, the genitive or second case, 

ber £)atib ober ber britte gall, the dative or third case, 

ber Slccufatto ober ber oterte gall, the accusative or fourth case. 

The nominative answers to the question, fter ? who ? 

The genitive answers to the question, toefjert ? whose ? 

The dative answers to the question, toem ? to whom ? 

The accusative answers to the question, toert ? whom ? 

In accordance with these terms the several cases are some- 
times called : ber 2Ber-galt, ber 2Seffen-gall, ber 2Bem-galt and ber 
2Sen=gaH. 

34. The Cases ($ie pile), 

1 . The cases are the same in name and similar in character to 
the first four Latin cases. 

2. The nominative case is used as in other languages. It is 
the subject of a sentence ; e. g., 






£)er £ifcfj tft fletn, The table is small. 

SDiefe $arte tft toeifj, This card is white. 

£)tefe SBchrme firtb griin, These trees are green. 

3. The genitive case is used as in Latin. It denotes posses- 
sion and is also used where we use the objective with of; e.g., 

3orjatm3 33ud) tft neu, John's book is new. 

2)a3 |)au3 meme3 $ater3 tft grofj, My father's house is large. 

2)a£ 2)adj) btejeg §aufe£ ift ftetl, The roof of this house is steep. 



THE NOUN 39 

4. The dative usually indicates an indirect object ; e.g., 
2)er ^ogel ift in bent ^tifig, The bird is in the cage. 

2)a3 SBtlb fjangt an ber 2Sanb, The picture hangs on the wall. 

2)te Garten ttegen anf bent ^ulte, The cards lie on the desk. 

5. The accusative denotes the object of a transitive verb and 
corresponds to the English objective ; e. g., 

3d) fyaoe einen neuen |wt, I have a new hat. 

,£)ct6en ©te btefen 33rtef gelefen ? Have you read this letter ? 

Set, id) fyabe ifyn gelefen, Yes, I have read it. 

28er fjat bie geber ? Who has the pen ? 

3d) f)ct6e fie, I have it. 

Some verbs and some prepositions govern a case without refer- 
ence to the above rules. 

6. Examples of Declension. — Articles and Noun. 
1. With the definite Article: 



ber §nt, the hat ; 


bte Stctrte, the card ; 


ba$ SBud), the book. 


Wla§l 


Singular. 


Sfceut. 


Nom. ber §nt 


bte Slctrte 


ba$ $nd) 


Gen. be£ |)ute3 


ber ®arte 


be3 2htd)e3 


Dat. bem §ute 


ber ®arte 


bent 23ud)e 


Ace ben £mt 


bte Slarte 

Plural. 


ba$ Q3ud) 


Nom. bte §ute 


bte Garten 


bte S3itd)er 


Gen. ber §itte 


ber Garten 


ber SBitdjer 


Dat. ben bitten 


ben Garten 


ben S3itd)ern 


Ace. bte §itte 


bte Garten 


bte S3itd)er 


2. With the indefinite Article : 




etn §ilt, a hat ; 


etne ®arte, a card ; 


etn SBudj, a book. 


Nom. etn ^nt 


etne Slarte 


etn £3ucf) 


Gen. etne£ §ute3 


etner ®arte 


etne£ $ud)e3 


Dat. etnem §nte 


etner ®arte 


einem 23ud)e 


Ace. einen §ut 


etne ®arte 


etn 23udj 



40 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Translate and Write : 
i. This table is small. 2. This hat is black. 3. This flower 
is beautiful. 4. These cards are white. 5. My coat is new. 
6. My cards are white. 7. This room is small. 8. John's father 
is old. 9. My brother's knife (the knife of my brother) is sharp. 
10. The hand of the child is small. 1 1. The pen is in the right 
hand. 12. The children are in the large room. 13. I have a 
letter and a pen. 14. Have you a watch? Yes, I have a new 
watch. 15. Who has the picture ? Charles has it. 



35. The present tense of fjnku, to have, fcin, to be, and 
lucrbcn, to become.* 



id) rjctbc, 
bu Ijaft, 
er f)at, 
fie rjat, 
c§ f)at, 
fair Ijabeu, 
i(jr I) abt, 
fie f)a6en, 
®ie r)a6ert, 

tcf) toerbe, 
bu totrft, 
cr lutrb. 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
she has 
it has 
we have 
you have 
they have 
you have 



id) bin, 
bn btft, 
er tft, 
fie tft, 
C0 tft, 
unr finb, 
if)r fetb, 
fie ftrtb, 
(2ie finb, 



The Present Tense of njerben. 
I become luir Herbert, 

thou becomest i()r toerbct, 

he becomes fie luerbert, 



I am 
thou art 
he is 
she is 
it is 
we are 
you are 
they are 
you are 

we become 
you become 
they become 



36. Peculiar Use of the Personal Pronoun. 

1. Observe that the pronoun corresponds to the grammatical 
gender of the noun, thus er may be translated he or it ; fie may 
be she or it, according to the gender of the noun to which it 
relates. 

2. When the plural pronoun fie is written with a capital initial 
(Sie) it means you, though literally it means they. It is as if we 



*See the full conjugations (145-6-7). 



THE NOUN 41 

should address a person in English in the third person plural 
instead of the second person ; thus, "Will they read?" instead 
of " Will you read ? " 

3. The second person singular (bu ()aft, bit 6 tft, etc.) is used 
only in the familiar style of address, as between members of the 
same family and very intimate friends. It is also the language of 
childhood, whether at home or among strangers. (See also § 84.) 

4. In order to become familiar with both styles the student 
should translate into both in the written exercises ; e. g., 
What have you there ? 2$a3 l)aft bu (Ijabeu ©te) ba ? 
Where is your book ? SSo tft betn (Sfyr) 23ud) ? 

Exercise (It bung). 

3d) rjabe etrt fdjoneS, netted Q3udj, I have a beautiful new book. 

£)aft bu (ftaben ©ie) etne geber ? Have you a pen ? 

2Sa3 fyat 5(nna gefauft ? What has Anna bought ? 

Sic I)at etne gotbeue Uf)r gefauft, She has bought a gold watch. 

23 btft bit (ftnb 3ie) ? Where are you ? 

3d) bin tin (105) ©arten, I am in the garden. 

23cr tft bc& ? Who is that ? 

Go tft mem SBrnber @eorg. It is my brother George. 

SScffen SBteifttft tft ba$ ? Whose lead-pencil is that ? 

(£3 tft ber tnctmge (87, 9), It is mine. 

9Sem fjaft bit (fjaben ©te) bay To whom have you given the 

95ilb gegeben ? picture ? 

3d) ftabe c3 mctiter (Sd^toefter ' I gave (have given) it to my 

gegeben, sister. 

SScn ()aft bu (fjaben ©te) gefefjeu ? Whom have you seen ? 

3d) f)abe ntemanb gefefjeu, I have seen no one. 

Translate and Write : 

1. What have you there? I have a gold pen. 2. What has 
Charles ? He has a wild bird. 3. Who has my new book ? 
Anna has it. 4. Where are you ? I am in the dining-room. 



42 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

5. Where are the ripe apples ? They are in the large basket. 

6. Who is that ? 7. Whose hat is that ? 8. To whom has he 
given the beautiful pictures ? 9. Whom have they seen ? (90.) 

37. The Gender of Nouns ($a8 $cfdjletf|t ber §aityttoorter). 

1 . Nouns denoting male or female beings have a corresponding 
grammatical gender, except ba c S SBetb, the woman ; ba$ 2J£enjct), 
the wench; and the diminutives in -c()cn and -kin, all of which are 
neuter, such as ba§ SDccibdjen, the girl ; ba3 grciitlctn, the young 
lady ; but nouns neuter in English may be of any grammatical 
gender in German without regard to sex or the form of the word ; 
thus, ber Xtfd), the table ; bte geber, the pen ; bct3 23nd), the book. 

2. The gender of nouns is to be learned only by diligent prac- 
tice, pronouncing them in connection with the definite article 
and with frequent repetition and emphasis. 

3. The following are the only rules for determining the gender 
that are of any practical value. 

38. Gender denoted by Endings. 

1. Nearly all nouns ending in — e, not of masculine signification 
and not beginning with ge— , are feminine. This includes nearly a 
thousand nouns, such as bte ®ctrte, the card ; bte Sctmpe, the lamp ; 
bie gamtlte (fa^mt'it-e), the family. The only exceptions to this 
rule among words in common use are ber $afe, the cheese ; ba§ 
2tnge, the eye ; and bct£> (Snbe, the end (the latter originally bd£ 
2lng and ba§ Gmb). See also § 58, 3. 

2. All words ending in -et, -t)eit, -kit, -fdjctft, -img, -in, are 
feminine ; thus : 

bte @ffat>eret f the slavery. bte greunbfdjctft, friendship, 

bte gretfjett, the freedom. bie SBofynung, the dwelling, 

bte 2Iufmerffamfett, attention. bte ^ontgtn, the queen. 



THE NOUN 43 

Feminine nouns denoting persons may be formed from the 
masculine by means of the suffix -in. They form the plural in 
-rten, thus : 

£)er ^ijnig, the king ; bie knight, the queen; Plural : bte ®om* 
gmnett. 

£)er ©dumber, the tailor; bie <Sd)neiberm, the tailoress ; Plural, 
bte vScfjnetbertmtett. 

3. When the masculine of such a noun is a monosyllable the 
vowel of the feminine is modified; thus: ber ($mf, the count; 
bte ($raftn, the countess ; arid if the masculine ends in -e this letter 
is dropped ; thus : ber Stitoe, the lion ; bte Sottttn, the lioness. 

4. All diminutives in -tf)en or —tern are neuter. Either of these 
endings applied to a noun forms a word denoting a small or young 
object of the same kind as the primitive. Both endings have the 
same meaning and the choice between them in any case is a 
matter of euphony ; thus : Xtftfjlem sounds better than S£tfcf)cf)en. 
We have similar diminutives in English such as rivulet, a small 
brook (from Latin rivus, a brook). 

5 . If the primitive word has the vowel a, 0, or u, this vowel is 
modified in the diminutive (a, b, it), and if it ends in-e this letter 
is dropped ; e. g., 

ber £t|d), the table. ba$ Sifdjlem, the little table, 

ber 23ctd), the brook. ba$ SBdcfjfem, the little brook, 

ber SSogel, the bird. ba£ $i3geltf)en or $oglem, the 

little bird, 

bte 3? rau r tne woman. ba§ grcwlein, the girl, miss, 

bte 9Jtogb, the servant-maid. ba§> 9D?ctbcf)en, the maiden, girl. 

bct£ §au3, the house. ba$ §aus>letn, the little house. 

bte gafjtte, the flag. ba§ galjnlein, the little flag. 

6. These diminutives are often used playfully and in stories 
for children ; thus, em %t[d)lem instead of etrt fleiner Xt[cr), a little 
table. They belong to the third class of neuter nouns (55). 

7. These endings may also be a mark of endearment, as : 
9)ftttterd)ert, dear mother. 



44 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Exercise 
2)te gretfjett tft beffer afe bte 

©fta&eret, nitfjt tnafyr ? 
Mermen @te mir eintge ber ®oni= 

gtnnen Don (Sngtanb, 
$)te ©rafin t)on (SattSDitrt) ift feljr 

reirf), ntd)t toafjr ? 
SSaS ift ba§ 2)imumtto toon 

£)a3 ©tmtnuttt) oon „£tfd)" tft 

„£tfrf)(etn." 
2Beld)eg ©efdj(ed)t (jaoen alle Sfe 

tmmtttoe nttt -djen unb — Icitt .? 

(Ste ftnb aHe fadjltdjen @eftf)(ed)te3, 

5lnna ^)at em $ogeld)en or 35og= 

(em, 
3)te Slinber ftrielen in einem 4>au§* 

lem, 



(ii bung). 
Freedom is better than slavery, 

is it not ? 
Name several of the queens of 

England. 
The countess of Salisbury is 

very rich, is she not ? 
What is the diminutive of 

„£ifd)?" 
The diminutive of , f £ifd)" is 

„2ifd)lem." 
Of what gender are all dimin- 
utives in -d)en and -lent ? 
They are all of the neuter 

gender. 
Anna has a little bird. 

The children are playing in a 
little house. 



39. Infinitives, etc., Used as Nouns. 

i . Infinitives and words from other parts of speech when used 
as nouns are neuter; e. g., 



ba$ Sefen, the reading 
bct3 (Sffen, the eating, food 
ba$ ©rngen, the singing 

£)a£ Sefen ift fetjr nugftd), 
2Btr (oben ba$ ©d)one unb ba£ 
©ute, 



ba§ SRaucfjen, the smoking 

ba$ @ute, the good 

ba3 ©d)one, the beautiful 

Reading is very useful. 
We praise the beautiful and 
the good. 






2. An adjective used as a noun and applied to a person takes 
the personal gender ; thus, 

ber $Itte, the old man bte 5Hte, the old woman 

ber ^rcmfe, the sick man bte toxnfe, the sick woman 
ber ^letne, the little boy bte $(eme, the little girl 



THE NOUN 45 

£)tefer 9tfte ift fef)r lran! f This old man is very ill. 

2)te Stletne ftttf auf bem (Stf)of$e The little girl is sitting on her 
itjrer Sautter, mother's lap. 

40. The Gender of Compounds. 

i. Compound nouns take the gender of the last component 
and only the last part is declined ; e. g., 

Skr SBhmtengarren, the flower-garden (from bte SBlume and ber 
(SJarten) ; gen. beg 23(umeng,arten3, etc. 

SDte ^augtiir, the house-door, front door (ba$ $av& and bte Xiir). 

Xa§ %i\tf)tu&), the table-cloth, (ber Xtfcl) and ba$ $udj). 
Sn btefem SBlumengarten finb In this flower-garden are roses 

9tofen unb SBetldjen, and violets. 

£)iefe |)au3titr ftefjt off en, This front-door stands open. 

SDicfeg ^tfdjfudj ift toetfe, This table-cloth is white. 

2. But a few nouns with a prefix take a gender different from 
the noun itself ; e. g., 

ber Wut, courage bte 2lratut, poverty 

ba$ SSort, the word bte ^tnhnort, the answer 

ber Xetl, the part bag ©egentetl, the opposite 

9(rmut ift letne ©rfjanbe, Poverty is no disgrace. 

£)ag (SJegentett Don toetfj iftftf)tt>ar5, The opposite of white is black. 

41. Double Gender of Nouns. 

A few nouns have two genders with different meanings ; e. g., 
ber SDtenfdj, the man, mankind ' ba§ 9J2enfdj, the wench 
ber 23auer, the peasant ba§ Waiter, the cage 

ber $Qut, the hat bte §ut f guard, protection 

ber @ce, the lake bte ©ee, the sea, ocean 

ber 53anb, the volume bag 23anb, the ribbon 

ber (Srbe, the heir ba$ (Srbe, the inheritance 

ber <8tf)i(b, the shield ba§ ©cfjtlb, the sign-board 

£>er Superior @ee ift fetjr grofe, Lake Superior is very large. 

2>te SBauern arbetten tm getbe, The peasants work in the field. 



46 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

42. Double Form of the Plural. 

Some nouns have two forms in the plural with different mean- 
ings, an example of which is found in English in the plurals of 
brother, viz. : brothers and brethren ; so in German : 

{bie SBtirtfe, banks (of earth), 
benches, 
bie SBartfert, banks for money. 
{bie SSorter, separate words, 
bie SSorte, words forming a 
context, connected sense. 

Thus the preacher says : bie j£e£te§trjorte, the words of the text (not £e£ttt)orter), 
but, 3Bterjtete ^Sorter finb in biefem ©a^e? How many words in this sentence? 

43. Nouns Used in the Singular only. 

Nouns used in the singular only are names of metals and other 
substances and abstract terms : 

ba$ @o(b, gold ber Sfoggen, rye 

bct£ ©ilber, silver bie @er|te, barley 

ba$ (Stfert, iron ba$ SDM)(, flour 

ba^ SSlet, lead ber @d)laf, sleep 

ba$ Stupfer, copper ber hunger, hunger 

ber ©taf)(, steel ber $)urft, thirst 

ber Qinl, zinc bie Sugenb, youth 

It will be observed that all these nouns require the article. 



44. Nouns Used in the Plural only. 

I. Some nouns occur only in the plural ; e. g., 

bie ©Item, the parents ; bie Seute, the people. 

bie ©ebriiber, the brothers (generally in a business firm). 

bie ©efdjtotfter, brothers and sisters (in a family). 

bie gerten, the holidays, vacation ; bie Qsmfimfte, the revenue. 

bie Unfoften, the costs, expenses. 



THE NOUN 47 

£)te ©ebritber ©rtmrn fdjrtefcen Dtete fdjorte Wlaxfyen. 

The Grimm brothers wrote many beautiful fairy tales. 

Stf) fyctbe fiinf @eftf)ttri(ter, greet 23rttber tmb bret ©cfjfaeftern. 

I have five brothers-and-sisters, two brothers and three sisters. 

SDte gerten fommen 6ctlb, the holidays will come soon. 

2. Seute, people, is used in forming the plural of some com- 
pounds ending in the singular in -marm. Such are : 

2)er (Sfyemcmn, the husband ; bte (Stjcleute, the married couple. 
2)er St'cmfmcutn, the tradesman ; bte Haufleute, the tradespeople. 
£)er Sctnbmcmn, the peasant ; bte ^cmblettte, the peasants. 
2)er (Sbelmarm, the nobleman ; bte (Sbedeute, the nobility. 
2)er .Jpofmcmn, the courtier ; bte §ofleute, the courtiers. 

Translate and Write : 

i. The finger, the hand and the hair. 2. The city and the 
village. 3. The speech and the voice. 4. The eating (food) 
was very good. 5. Victoria was queen of England. 6. The 
little girl has a little bird (dim.). 7. Reading and writing are 
useful. 8. This sick man is very unhappy. 9. In my flower- 
garden are many flowers. 10. The opposite of high is low. 
1 1 . These people are very industrious. 1 2. The plural of Sanb- 
matm is Sanblettte. 13. This tradesman has bought a new house. 

45. The Strong and Weak Declensions (2>te ftarfc mtb 
bte fdjttmdje ,S>efUttattott), 

1. Nouns are usually classified, with regard to declension, as 
"strong" and "weak." Nouns having the genitive singular in 
-<3 or -e£ are called "strong," all others are " weak." Feminine 
nouns, which are invariable in the singular, are classified with 
regard to the nominative plural, according to which the first class 
feminine (51) is of the "weak" declension (the -rt ending) and the 
second class (52) of the " strong " (the -e ending). Various other 
exceptions also occur in regard to particular words. 



48 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2. Adjectives are also classified as " strong " and "weak." An 
adjective not preceded by the definite article (or a word like it), 
is "strong" (76); preceded by the definite article or a similar 
word it is "weak" (77); preceded by the indefinite article, or a 
similar word, it is of the "mixed" declension (78). 

3. While these classifications will be here recognized and re- 
ferred to on account of their common use, a different, and it is 
believed a simpler and more practicable method, especially with 
regard to nouns, has been adopted and will now be explained.* 

46. Classification of Nouns. 

1. There are three classes of masculine nouns, two classes of 
feminine nouns, and three classes of neuter nouns. This includes 
all the nouns of the language except a few that are irregularly 
declined. 

2. To decline a noun it is only necessary to know the class to 
which it belongs, and this is determined by the form of the nom- 
inative and genitive singular and of the nominative plural. 
These are given in every complete German dictionary. 

47. The eight regular Forms of Declension. 

(For full declension of each class see §56). 

48. The First Class Masculine ((grfte Piaffe mamtltdj). 

1. Nouns of the first class masculine add <§ t or e3 in the geni- 
tive singular. In the plural they add e and modify the vowel a, 
0, u, if there be one. In cm only the a takes the umlaut (53dume). 



* The observation that the terms " strong " and " weak " are of little practical value to 
the student and are often neglected by the teacher led to the new classification of nouns 
first presented in the author's Leitfaden and used with approval in many schools. It is 
therefore here reproduced. Whitney, in his excellent German grammar, says (page 29) : 
" The names strong and weak declension were introduced by Grimm, and, though destitute 
of any reasonable ground of application, have become too generally and firmly established 
to be gotten rid of." Some Grammarians however reject this classification and variously 
divide the nouns into four, five, six, and even eight classes. Otto well remarks : " While 
this arrangement (the " strong " and " weak ") suffices for Germans, who know from habit 
the inflection of each word, it is insufficient for foreigners." He therefore rejects it altogether 
and devises, "for the sake of simplicity," a peculiar classification of his own with five 
declensions and many exceptions. 




THE NOUN 



49 



Examples (SBetftnete) : 
Nom. ber Sifdj, the table, gen. be£ %tfd)t$ t plur. bie £ifdje. 
Norn, ber SBaum, the tree, gen. be3 5Baume3, plur. bie SB&ume. 

Other examples of this class are : 



ber 23erg, 
ber SBrief, 
ber gtujs * 
ber greunb, 
ber $uf$,* 
ber ©aft, 
ber «§>ut, 
ber ^amm, 
ber Slnopf, 
ber ®opf, 
ber SlMig, 



the mountain 
the letter 
the river 
the friend 
the foot 
the guest 
the hat 
the comb 
the button 
the head 
the king 



ber ®orb, 
ber 9^ocf, 
ber ©a^, 
ber ©teg, 
ber ©ofjn, 
ber ©tufjl, 
ber %mm, 
ber 3Betn, 
ber SStnb, 
ber Qatyxi, 
ber £ng, 



the basket 
the coat 
the sentence 
the victory 
the son 
the chair 
the tower 
the wine 
the wind 
the tooth 
the train 



Plural : bie 23erge, bie 23riefe, bie glitffe, bie greimbe, etc. 

2. Some nouns of this class, although with a vowel liable to 



the umlaut, do not take it in the plural. 

these are : 

ber ten, the arm ber £cmt, 

ber £ag, the day ber $>unft, 

ber |mnb, the dog ber ©toff, 

ber ©cf)uf), the shoe ber SHiron, 



The commonest of 

the sound 
the point 
the stuff 
the throne 



Plural : bie Pirate, bie £age, bie £nnbe, bie ©cfjnlje, etc. 

Exercise 0i bttttg). 
SSo iff ber ®nopf ? £)ier ift er. Where is the button? Here it is. 
2$erf)atben$rief? Stel Ijat tipt. Who has the letter? Charles 

has it. 
£)er §ut liegt cmf bem nenen Th e hat lies on the new table. 

Xifcrje. 
2)er 9focf rjangt an ber tnei^en The coat hangs on the white 
SSanb. wall. 



* For declension of nouns ending in § or ft, see § 5, 5. 



50 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

£)te ©afte ftnb tit bem fjofjen The guests are in the high 

£urme. tower. 

yjla£ fjctt fetnert 9tacf. Max has no coat. 

3d) tjabe em ^aar ©djufye gefauft. I have bought a pair of shoes. 

Translate and Write : 

i. Have you my new hat ? No, I have it not. Who has it? 
Charles, has it. 2. Have you the button ? Yes, I have it. 
3. Who has the letter ? Anna has it. 4. Has Max a large dog? 
No, he has no dog. 5. My friend is in the high tower. 6. The 
comb lies on the small chair. 7. The hat hangs on the white 
wall. 8. These sentences are very long. 9. I have one head, 
two hands and two feet. 10. These chairs are large and strong. 
11. The rivers are long. 12. The teeth are white. 13. The 
king is on the throne. 14. The kings are on the thrones. 

49. The Second Class Masculine (gtucitc SUaffe mamtltd)), 

1. Nouns of the second class masculine add £ in the genitive 
singular. In the plural they modify the vowel a, o, it, if there 
be one. 

Examples (93etfpieie) : 

ber ginger, the finger ; gen. be£ ginger^ ; plur. bte ginger, 
ber SIpfel, the apple ; gen. be§ 5fyfe(§ ; plur. bte Spfel. 

2. This class includes all masculine nouns ending in el, en or er. 
Other examples of this class are : 

ber 23oben, the ground, floor ber £aben, the shutter, store 

ber SBntber, the brother ber Sflffel, the spoon 

ber gaben, the thread ber Stage!, the nail 

ber (Garten, the garden ber Dfett, the stove 

ber ©rtffel, the slate-pencil ber ©djlitffel, the key 

ber jammer, the hammer ber Spiegel, the mirror 

ber §tmmel, the sky, heaven ber $ater, the father 

ber ®orper, the body ber $oge(, the bird 

Plural : bte SBoben, bte SBritber, bte gtxben, bte (Mrten, etc. 



THE NOUN 



51 



3. Some nouns of this class, although with a vowel liable to 
the umlaut, do not take it in the plural. The commonest of 
these are : 

ber Dnfel, the uncle ber 2lbler, the eagle 

bcr Slaften, the chest, box ber Scaler, the painter 

ber iBctgen, the carriage ber 2lmertfctner, the American 

Plural: bte Dnfel, bte £'aften, bte 2Bagen, bte 2lbler, etc. 

Exercise (U b U tt g). 



3d) Ijabe einen grofjen jammer, 
2)tefe £offel ftnb Don ©ilber, 
2Ba3 toolkit ©te faufen ? 
3cl) will einen $aften fanfen, 
28a3 rjaben @te gefefjen ? 
S(i) fjabe einen 51bler gefefjen, 
SStr fjaben feme Stiff el, 
2So liegt ber neue ©ptegel ? 
<£r liegt auf bem Xtfdje, 
2So ftdjt ber ©tuljl ? 
(£r ftetjt anf bem gufjboben, 
3ft bte (Seele fterbltd) ? 
9fatn, bte ©eele ift nnfterblid), 
SBttte, geben <3ie mtr ben ©rtffel, 



I have a large hammer. 

These spoons are of silver. 

What will you buy ? 

I will buy a chest. 

What have you seen ? 

I have seen an eagle. 

We have no spoons. 

Where does the new mirror lie ? 

It lies on the table. 

Where does the chair stand ? 

It stands on the floor. 

Is the soul mortal ? 

No, the soul is immortal. 

Please give me the slate-pencil. 



Translate and Write: 

1. I have a little mirror. 2. You have a beautiful bird. 3. He 
has a new book. 4. We have the silver spoons. 5. My uncle 
has two brothers. 6. We have no carriage. 7. What have you 
bought? I have bought two hammers. 8. Where does the 
hammer lie ? It lies on the chair. 9. Where does the stove 
stand ? It stands on the floor. 10. Where is Anna ? She is in 
the large garden. 11. The son of the American is a painter 
(artist). 12. The body is mortal, but the soul is immortal. 
13. Please give me the key. 14. Where is your father? He is 
in the store. 15. He has sold his new house. 



52 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

50. The Third Class Masculine (Srittc Piaffe mamtlidj). 

i . Nouns of the third class masculine add n or en in all oblique 
cases. 

Examples (Seifpiele) : 

ber Slnabe, the boy; gen. be3 ^naben, plur. bie $naben. 
ber $elb, the hero; gen. be3 |)clbert, plur. bie £)e(ben. 

2. Nearly all nouns of this class denote men or male animals. 
Other examples of this class are : 

ber 5Iffe, the ape, monkey ber 33ar, the bear 

ber <!peibe, the heathen ber (Sfjrtft, the Christian 

ber $>ube, the Jew ber Surft, the prince 

ber £bir>e, the lion ber ©raf, the count 

ber Diiefe, the giant ber «*perr,* the master, Mr., lord 

ber ©flabe, the slave ber ©tubent, the student 
Plural : bie 5lffen, bie §eibcn, bie ^uben, etc. 

Exercise (fibltng). 
i. £)iefe Sfrtaben finb feljr glucfttdj. 2. 2)ie 5tffen leben in bem (im) 
SSalbe. 3. £)ie Subcn leben in alien Sanbern. 4. $>er £ott>e ift ein 
9knbtier. 5. (Sin 9viefe ift ein fcfjr grower Wlann. 6. 2)ie 23aren 
fcfjlafcn im SSinter. 7. griebricf) ber ®ro£e raar ein bebentenber giirft. 
8. Soljann ift ein ffciftiger ©tnbent. 9. Ultjffe^ raar ein beriirnnter 
§elb. 10. £)iefe ©flatten finb ferjr nngtiidlicfj. 11. liefer <"perr ift 
ein reidjer ©raf. 12. Stennen ©ie §errn ^rofeffor 9vingroalb? 3a, 
id) !enne irjit; er ift ein fetjr efjrticfjer 93?ann. 13. 28em geljbrt biefe 
geber ? ©ie gefjort mir. 

Translate and Write: 

1. The wild apes. 2. The poor heathen. 3. The industrious 
Jews. 4. The strong giant. 5. The good Christian. 6. Is the 
ape a beast -of -prey ? No, he is not a beast-of-prey. 7. Is this 
student industrious ? Yes, he is very industrious. 8. Are these 



* In the oblique cases of the singular £err adds only n ; thus, ber £err, be§ £errn, bem 
)errn, ben £>errn. 






THE NOUN 



53 



slaves happy ? No, they are very unhappy. 9. Who is this 
gentleman? It is Mr. Ringwald. 10. To whom does this hat 
belong (170, 3) ? It belongs to the student. 



51. The First Class Feminine (@rfte Piaffe tt>eiMidj> 

1. Nouns of this class (like all feminine nouns) have but one 
form in the singular. In the plural they add n or en and under- 
go no vowel change. 

Examples (2ktfpte(e) : 

bte $htme, the flower ; plur. bie 23litmen 

bte $tbel, the bible ; plur. bte 23tbeftt 

bte geber, the pen ; plur. bte gebertt 

bte Uf)r, the watch or clock ; plur. bte U£)rett 



Other examples of this class are : 



e 23ritcfe, the bridge 

e 23itrfte, the brush 

e £)ame, the lady 

e (£rbe, the earth 

e gctr6e, the color 

e gafjne, the flag 

e ^ctrte, the card 

e Stcrge, the cat 

e &zttt, the chain 

e $trrf)e, the church 

e $Pflcm§e, the plant 

e ©djere, the pair of shears 

e <£>cf)ttte, the school 

e 2Sefte, the vest 

e ©prctdje, the language 

e <8ftmme, the voice 

e ©trafje, the street 

e Sttmbe, the hour 

e %afd)e, the pocket 



bte ($a6el, the fork 

bte Snfel, the island 

bte 9fatbei, the needle 

bte SRegel, the rule 

bte (Sdjaufet, the shovel 

bie Safe!, the table, tablet 

bte $vau, tne woman, wife 

bte Shifter, the oyster 

bte geber, the pen 

bte Setter, the ladder 

bte Waiter, the wall 

bte @cf)itlter, the shoulder 

bte ©ctjrnefter, the sister 

bte SBctfjrt, the way, path 

bte ©cf)lact)t, the battle 

bte ©rfjrtfr, the writing 

bte SSelt, the world 

bte fttite, the line 

bte Qdt, the time 



54 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

bte Xaffe, the cup bte Qett, the time 

bte £au6e, the dove bte $(nftatt, the institution 

bte %ink t the ink bie 5(nttt)ort, the answer 

bte Qnnge, the tongue bte 5lr6ett, the work 

Plural : £)te S3ritcfen f bte SBttrften, bte £>amen, etc. 

2. All nouns of two syllables ending in -e (not -ee), denoting 
inanimate objects, are of this class, such as bte 23(unte, the flower. 
This is a very numerous class. 

3. All nouns ending in et, fjett, fett, fcfjaft, ung, or in are of this 
class. Those in -in form the plural in -nen, as : bte ®omgtn, the 
queen, plur. bte ®omgtnneu. 

Nouns in -ung of this class are numerous. They are formed 
from the infinitive of verbs ; thus : 

fdjreiben, to write bie <Srf)ret6ung, the writing 

recfynen, to reckon bte 9^ed)mtng, the reckoning, bill 

begafylen, to pay bte SBe^atjhtng, the payment 

tooluten, to dwell bte 2So()mutg, the dwelling 

regteren, to govern bte ^egterung, the government 

Exercise (lib ung). 

1. 2)te SBritcfe itber btefen glufc tft 3,000 gufj tang. 2. 2)te antert^ 
famfcfye gatjne tft rot, toetjs unb btau. 3. £>te ®a|e tft etn |>au3tter. 
4. $)te beutjcfje ©pracfye ift fdjroer. 5. £)te ^orma('@d)n(e (ba$ 2dy 
rer=©emtnar) ftefjt auf etnem fcfybnen §itgel. 6. Wlan ftfjreibt nttt 
geber unb £inte. 7. £>tefe §anbfcf)rift tft fefjr ftf)on. 8. SDtefer alte 
©olbat toar in ber ©d)lacf)t bet ©eban. 9. 2£a3 fur etn ©e6aube tft 
ba$? (££ tft etne $Unbenanftalt. 10. 3d) Ijabe etne ftetne (Severe 
unb etne grofee ©djere. 1 1 . 2Bie oiele ©rfjuten ftnb in btefent £)orfe ? 
&$ finb (86, 2) oter. 12. 2)te §of(td)!ett tft etne Stugenb. 13- Vic- 
toria toar bie ^ontgtn oon (Sngtanb. 13. £)te3 tft etne fcf)dne SSofntung. 

Translate and Write : 
1. Have you a pair-of -shears ? No, but I have a pair-of-scis- 
sors. 2. How many pockets have you in your coat? I have 
five pockets in my new coat. 3. Have you a watch ? Yes, I 



THE NOUN 



55 



have a beautiful new watch. 4. I have two brothers and one 
sister. 5. This work is very difficult, but also very useful. 6. 
How many churches are there in this city ? There are (86, 2) 
ten. 7. This railroad unites Albany and Buffalo. 8. What have 
you bought ? I have bought a gold watch and a gold chain. 
9. Who is this old lady? It is (86, 5) Mrs. Weiss. 10. Mary 
Stuart was queen of Scotland. 



52. The Second Class Feminine (3toette Piaffe toeifcttdj). 

This class includes 36 monosyllables having, like all feminine 
nouns, but one form in the singular, and in the plural taking the 
umlaut and e like the first class masculine. 

Example : bie §anb, the hand; plur. bie §anbe. 

The commonest of these nouns are : 



bie «jt, 


the axe 


bie Suft, 


the air 


bie 93anf, 


the bench 


bie SJtodjt, 


the power 


bie fQxaut* 


the bride 


bie 9ft agb, 


the maid-servant 


bie $rnft, 


the breast 


bie SftanS,* 


the mouse 


bie gauft,* 


the fist 


bie 9todjt, 


the night 


bie gturf)t, 


the fruit 


bie 9?uj3, 


the nut 


bie ©an3 f 


the goose 


bie ©dfjnur, 


the string 


bie Shaft, 


the strength 


bk <3tabt, 


the city 


bie $uf) f 


the cow 


bie 2Banb, 


the wall 



Plural : bie $£te, bie f&anh, bie SBraute, bie SBriifte, etc. 

Exercise (It bung). 
1. £)iefe 9(£t ift neu r a6er fie ift tttdjt feljr fdjarf. 2. £)er alte 
9ft ann fi^t auf einer 23anf in bent grofjat ^)3arl. 3. £>te gauft ift bie 
gebatfte §anb. 4. £)ie ®ufy ift ein fefyr niifclidjeS ^auStier. 5. 2So 
ift S^r $ruber? (£r ift in bie <&tabt gegangen (103). 6. 2)ie fdjdnen 
23ilber tjangen an ber tneiften 2Sanb. 7. £)ie 9Jctiufe ftnb fefyr lafttg. 
8. 2)ie gliegen ffiegen in ber Suft. 9. 2)a3 <Sd)(afen ift gum £e6en 
notig (39, 1). 



* In the case of du only the a is modified in the plural ; thus, bie 23taut, plur. bie SBraute. 



56 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Translate and Write : 
i. The bride was very beautiful. 2. The goose is a water- 
fowl. 3. The breast is a part of the body. 4. The fruits are 
ripe in autumn. 5. This young maid-servant is very industrious. 
6. The night is dark. 7. These nuts are sweet. 8. The three 
largest cities of the world are London, New York and Paris. 
9. Eating and drinking are necessary to life. 

53. The First Class Neuter ((Svftc Piaffe fridjHtf)). 

1. Nouns of the first class neuter add § or e£ in the genitive 
singular. In the plural they add cr and modify the vowels a, 0, u, 
if there be one (ct, o, it). 



Examples (23etfptc(e) : 
bag %$ilb, the picture 
bag 23ncl), the book ; 

Other examples of this class are : 
bag ®ab, the bath 
bag $(cttt, the leaf 
bag £)orf, the village 
bag (St, the egg 
bag ©etb, the money 
bag @(ag, the glass 
bag §aupt, the head 
bag tQaug, the house 
bag §ol§, the wood 
bag &inb, the child ■ 



gen. be^ 23ilbeg; plur. bie $tlber. 
gen. beg $htcf)eg ; plur. bie 23M)er. 



bag Stkib, the dress 
bag £ctmm, the lamb 
bag Sicfjt, the light 
bag £teb, the song 
bag ^eft, the nest 
bag $iab t the wheel 
ba$ %a{, the valley 
bag $olf, the people 
bag 2Bei6, the wife 
bag SSort, the word 



Plural : bie $ciber, bie flatter, bie 3)orfer, etc. 



Exercise (Ubung). 

1. Scf) nefjme jeberr 9D?orgen etn talttg S3ab. 2. 3)ie flatter biefer 

23aume ftnb grofc unb fd)5n. 3. (S3 gtbt t)iefe fleine 3)orfet in btefem 

Sanbe. 4. -Mian focfjt @Her in fjeifeem SSaffer. 5. 2)ie)eg |jang ifi 

t)on (Stfen, §o(§ unb ©tetn. 6. £)ie ^tnber follten regelmd^ig in bie 



THE NOUN 57 

<Stf)uie gerjen. 7. @trt 2Sagett fyat bier Diaber. 8. SMefeS £)orf liegt 
in einem fdjonert Xale. 9. Seber $oge{ (tc6t fern 9?eft. 10. 3)aS 
SOcdbc^cn rjat ein fcfjone3 £ieb gejimgen. n. 2Ste tnel (Mb fjaben 
©ie? 3d) fyabe nur gefjn SO^arf. 12. £)te Sdmmer freffen @ra3 auf 
bem ge(be. 13. SBttte, rettfjen ©ie mtr bie (£ier. 

Translate and Write: 
1. This tree has many beautiful leaves. 2. There are (86, 1) 
many sheep and lambs in (auf) this field. 3. There are twelve 
words in this sentence. 4. Please give me a glass of water. 
5. Captain Lenz is a brave soldier. 6. The girls have beautiful 
dresses. 7. The lights in this house are very bright. 8. We 
have many useful books. 9. This is a large and beautiful 
picture. 10. Where is the hammer? Here it is. 11. Where 
is the watch? Here it is. 12. Where is the egg? Here it is. 
13. Who has the button? Charles has it. 14. Who has the 
leaf? Anna has it. 15. Please pass the bread (to me). 

54. The Second Class Neuter (Smitt tlaffe fikfjlidj), 

1 . Nouns of this class add § or e3 in the genitive singular ; in 
the plural they add e and undergo no vowel change. 

Example : ba$ ^ult, the desk; gen. be3 ^utte£ ; plur. bie ^ulte. 

Other examples of this class are : 

ba§> $8oot f the boat ba§ SjSfunb, the pound 

ba$ S3rct, the bread ba$ $ltid), the kingdom 

ba$ iQaax, the hair ba$ @ctt$ f the salt 

bctS Satyr, the year ba§ @djctf, the sheep 

ba§ Wlafy, the measure ba$ ©djiff, the ship 

ba§ Sfteer, the sea ba$ @tucf, the piece 

ba§ tyaax * the pair ba$ %m, the animal 

ba$ $|3ferb, the horse ba$ Qdt, the tent 

Plural : bie S3oote, bie Qkote, bie «£)aare, etc. 



*The adjective pctar means a few, as: ein paax Sage, a few days; but ein tyaax 
©d)uf)e a pair of shoes. 



58 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2. All neuter nouns with the prefix ($e-, of which there are 
about 1 60, belong to this class, such as : 

ba§ (&tpa&, the baggage ba$ ©emdlbe, the painting 

ba§ ©etrtirtf, the drink ba$ ©ebirge, the mountain chain 

ba$ ©ebdrf)tni3, the memory bct3 ©etretbe, the grain 

ba§ ©efangnte, the prison ba$ ©etoolbe, the vault 

bag ($efcf)dft, the business ba§ ©ebdube, the building 

3. Words of this class ending in e, do not add another e in 
the plural, thus : ba$ ©etreibe, plur. bie ©etrcibc. 

4. To this class belong also a number of neuter nouns the 
signification of which admits of their use only in the singular. 
Such are the names of metals (43), as : ba$ ©olb, ba$ ©ilber, etc., 
and other abstract nouns, as : ba§ 23lut, blood ; bas> 3(etfd), meat, 
flesh; bag §eu, hay ; ba$ Qng, ice. 

Exercise (ilbung). 
1. %o& $ult fteljt ctuf bem guftboben. 2. §err Stonig madjt ein 
guteg ©efdjaft. 3. iBttte, reirfjen ©ie mir bag 93rot. 4. SBte oiele 
donate Ijat bag Satyr? @8 ijat gtootf donate. 5. %8a$ foftet bag 
©a(§? (£g foftet §efm pfennig bag $Pfunb. 6. Sft ber Some ein 
Diaubtier ? 3a, er ift ein Dvanbtier, aber ba§ ©djaf if t ein «!paugtter. 
7. 2Bo ftnb bte Sfrmben ? <Sie fpielen in bem gelte. 8. 28ag fiir ein 
9ftaft ift ba$? Sag ift ein 9fteterma&. 9. SSeldjeS ift bag befte 
06ft ? 3)er %pfel ift bag befte. 10. 2)ag perb ift ein fefjr nfifcttdjeg 
§augtier. 1 1 . ^aben ©ie ein guteg ©ebdtfjtnig ? 12. £)te £imonabe 
ift ein fetyr gefunbeg ©etranf. 

Translate and Write : 
1 . Where are the boys ? They are in the little tent. 2. Where 
does the horse stand ? He stands on the ground. 3. The Ger- 
man kingdom is large and powerful. 4. Please reach me the 
salt. 5. How many oars has that boat? It has four oars. 
6. Where is the desk ? Here it is. 7. Where is the white card ? 
Here it is. 8. Who has the beautiful pictures ? I have them. 



THE NOUN 59 

9. Who has a measure ? I have a meter measure ; here it is. 

10. What does bread cost? It costs 15 pfennigs a pound. 

1 1. The ships are on the deep lake. 12. What kind of a build- 
ing is that ? It is a school -house. 

55. The Third Class Neuter (Critic Stlaffe fa^Ittf)). 

Nouns of this class add 3 in the genitive singular. The nom- 
inative plural is like the singular. To this class belong also the 
diminutives in -djen and -tern and all infinitives used as nouns. 

Examples (33etfptet e) : 

ba$ 3^ mmer ' ^ e room; gen. be£ 3™*™^ ) P mr - bk ^tmmer. 
ba$ s JJMbd)en, the girl ; gen. be3 9Mbd)en3 ; plur. bte 9Jtdbd)en. 
ba$ £)du3lein, the little house; gen. bes> .)pdn3tetn3 ; plur. bie ^du^letn. 
ba$ 9Mnien, the reckoning ; gen. be3 9^ed)nen3 ; (no plur.). 

Other examples of this class are : 

ba$ SBiinbel, the bundle ba§ gte6er, the fever 

ba$ ^ctpt'tel, the chapter ba$ £ager, the couch, camp 

ba$ SRdtfel, the puzzle ba$ 9J£effer, the knife 

ba§> ©egel, the sail ba$ Dauber, the oar 

ba§ ®iffen, the cushion ba$ Sfjea'ter, the theater 

ba£ genfter, the window baS Ufer, the bank 

ba§ geuer, the fire ba$ SSaffer, the water 

ba$ grdntetn, the young woman ba$ (Sffen, the eating (food) 

Plural : bte SBitnbel, bte Stapitd, bte Sftatfet, etc. 

Exercise (It bung). 

1. (Sin ^du^letit ift em ftetne£ £>au3. 2. £)te £D^dbd6)ert ftnb in bent 
(Smpfang^immer. 3. SSo Itegt ba$ SBimbet ? (S3 ttcgt auf bent gufc 
boben. 4. ©in Sbpfftffen ift au3 gebern gemadjt ; e3 ift feljr mid). 
5. £)arf id) (149, 1) ba$ genfter aufmad)en ? 3a f bn barf ft. 6. SBttte, 
leitjen ®te mtr Stjr ^fteffer. 7. £)er ^ranfe letbet an gteber ; er rul)t 
auf bent Sager. 8. £)a£ Ufer be3 gtuffeS ift nut @ra3 nnb tinmen 
bebectt. 9. ©efjen ©ie gem in§ £f)eater ? 3a, fet)r gern f tnenn ba$ 



60 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

©djaufpiel gut tft. 10. Potmen ©te Sftcttfel erraten? 9^ein r id) bin 
bavin gar nidjt (92, 20) ge)d)icft. n. 2Sa3 begeicfjnet bte Qnibimg 
-djert ober -tetrt ? <8ie bejetdjnet ettt)a3 ®lcine§ ober StmgeS. 

Translate and Write : 
I. This house has ten rooms. 2. The parlor is the most beau- 
tiful room in the house. 3. The ending -djcit or -kill denotes a 
small object ; e. g., em §au3lem, a small house. 4. How many 
girls are there (86, 6) in this class? There are ten. 5. How 
many chapters are there in this book ? 6. Would you like 
(149, 3) to go to the theater this evening ? 7. The fire is in the 
stove and the water is in the pitcher or the pail. 8. Where is 
the man lying (123, 1) ? He is lying on the couch. 9. Where 
are the soldiers ? They are in the camp. 

Review Exercise in Translation. 

1. Where is the hat ? Here it is. 2. Where is the card ? Here 
it is. 3. Who has the button ? I have it. 4. Is this table large 
or small? It is small. 5. Have you anew coat? Yes, I have a 
new black coat. 6. Where are the little white cards ? They are 
in the little blue box. 7. Is this glass full or empty ? It is empty. 
8. I open the door ; I shut the door. Is the door open or shut ? 
It is shut. 9. Do you understand ? Yes, I understand. No, 
I do not understand. 10. How does one say in German, " I have 
lost my book " ? One says : 3d) fyctbe mem 23ud) uerloren. 

56. Table of the Eight Regular Forms of Declension. 

While studying the preceding lists of nouns the pupil should refer 
to the following complete table of the eight classes and should write 
out in full and recite the declension of a number of nouns of each class. 
Perfect familiarity with each form of declension as it is reached through- 
out the book should be insisted upon, for without it there can be no 
correct speaking. All the word-lists should also be so thoroughly 
learned that on hearing the English the German can be given and fully 
declined. 



THE xorx 6 1 

i. Masculine (3ftaim[u$). 
Siugular. 
1. Piaffe. 2. Piaffe. 3. italic 

Xom. bcr Q3aum bet Slpfel bcr tf nabe 

Gen. be§ 5Baum(e)3 be3 vlrfelo be§ tfnaben 

Dat. ban £ktuin e) ban ^pfd ban tfnaben 

Ace. bai £Baum bai &pfel bai viiuben 

Plural. 

Xom. Die SBaume bic ftpfel Die Stnaben 

Gen. ber £Baume bet ?tyfel bet Mne.ben 

Dat. bai Journal Den Spfeln Den >lnaben 

Ace. Die Canine Die gfyfel Die ^naben 

2. Feminine ($&etbttdj). 

1. Piaffe. 2. Hltiffe. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

Xom. Die Minnie Die tinmen Die gonb Die \\inDe 

Gen. bet SBbime bet £Btumen bet §anb ber \\inDe 

Dat. bet ©lunte Den ©lumen bet ,\>anD Den A>anDen 

Ace. Die SBtttme Die ©lumen Die £anb Die \\utDe 

3. Neuter | ^adiltdV . 

Siugular. 

1. ftteffe. 2. gteffc. 3. Staffc. 

Xom. Dae* 5*ucli ba3 ^ult bag ^tinnier 

Gen. be§ 9$ud)(e)3 Dec ^ult(e)3 Dee 3tnnnere 

Dat. Dem £htd)(e) bem^iilt(e) Dem gimmet 

Aec. Dae 93ud) ba€ N i>nlt ba€ gtmmet 

Plural. 

Xom. Die ^itcfier Die ^itite Die 3unmet 

Gen. bet SBudjet bet ^nlte bet 3i m met 

Dat. Den £Budjern ben Spuften Den 3immem 

Aec. Die ditcher Die $ulte Die Qtmmei 



62 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

57. Remarks on the Declensions. 

i. It will be seen that these models of the eight classes of 
nouns are all of the " strong " declension except the third class 
masculine and the first class feminine. They include nearly all 
the nouns in the language and are subject to less exceptions and 
require far less explanation than the usual scheme of "strong" 
and "weak" declension. 

2. In all declensions, except in the third class masculine sin- 
gular, the nominative and accusative are alike. 

3. The nominative, genitive and accusative plural are always 
alike and the dative plural always ends in n. 

4. Where a noun adds g or eg in the genitive singular either 
form may be used ; thus : be3 $cmmg or be3 $ctumeg ; beg *)Mtg or 
be^ $)3ulte3, but with monosyllables, the ending eg is preferred. In 
the same words, the dative singular may take or omit the eupho- 
nic e, thus : bem 95aum or bent SBaume ; bem S)Mt or bem $)Mte, 
but here the e is usually retained. 



58. Irregular Forms of Declension. 

A. Irregular forms (masculine) : 

1. 2)er Matter, the peasant; beg SBauerg, bem Waiter, ben SBauer; 
plur. bie SSauern, etc. In like manner decline: ber Wladfiav, 
the neighbor ; ber @tadjet, the sting ; ber SDtoSfel, the muscle. 

2. $)er @taat, the state, be§> (BtaateZ, bem &taate, ben 't&taat; 
plur. bie ©taaten, etc. In like manner decline : ber ©traf)I f the 
ray; ber @tf)mer§, the pain ; ber £>orn, the thorn ; ber ©ee, the lake 
(pi. bie @een); ber Sporn, the spur (pi. bie ©poren). 

3. 2)er 9?ame(n), the name, bt§ ^ameng, bem Harnett, ben Dfamen; 
plur. bie Mermen, etc. In like manner decline : ber 93ittf)ftabe(n), 
the letter of the alphabet; ber gelf(en), the rock ; ber gimfe(n), the 
spark ; ber ($ebcmfe, the thought ; ber $aufe(n) f the heap ; ber ©a^ 



THE NOUN 63 

men, the seed; and without plural, ber 3friebe(n), the peace ; ber 
©lcmbe(n), the belief , faith ; ber 2BtHe(n), ^ W//. 

4. £)er !>Dcann, ^ man, be§ 90?anne3, bem SJfanrte, ben Wann ; 
plur. bte banner, etc. In like manner decline: ber ©etft, the 
ghost, spirit; ber ©ott, /^ 6W; ber £etb, //^ &?<^// ber Ort, ^ 
place ; ber 9£cmb, ///<? <?^r; ber SSalb, the forest ; ber 2Burm, //** 
zew/T/s ; ber Sftettfjtum, the riches ; ber Srrtnm, the error. 

5. Foreign nouns in ox take in the genitive singular £ and in 
the plural ett, thus : ber 2)oftor, the doctor, be£ £)oftor3, bem 
SDoftor, ben Softer ; plur. bte SDofto'ren, etc. In like manner : 
ber S|3rofeffor, ber SDireffor, etc. 

B. Irregular forms (feminine) : 

1 . £)te Sautter, the mother, and bte Xocrjter, the daughter, take 
only the umlaut in the plural : bte SOcittter and bte £Mjtet. 

£)te Stftntter, the mother. 

Singular. Plural. 

Norn, bte s Dcntter bte flitter 

Gen. ber Sftntter ber Gutter 

Dat. ber Gutter ben Wixtkxtt 

Ace. bte SMutter bte SJHitter 

2. The feminine ending -in adds in the plural -nen, thus : 
$)er $atfer, the emperor ; bte ^tatfertn, the empress, plur. bte 

®aifertnnen. 

%tx gurft, the prince; bte giirfttn, the princess ; plur. bte giir= 
fttnnen. 

C. Irregular forms (neuter) : 

Seven neuter nouns take n or en in the plural. They are ba§ 
SBett, the bed (be3 %$ttte$; plur. bte SBetten) ; ba$ §emb, the shirt; 
ba$ Qfyx, the ear; ba§ 2luge, the eye ; ba$ (£nbe, the end; ba§ 
Snfelt, the insect ; and bct3 $erft, the heart, which has gen. be<3 
^jer^enS, dat. bem ^ergen, ace. ba$ ^erg ; plural, bte ^eqen, etc. 



64 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

59. Declension of Proper Nouns and of Adjectives Derived 

from Them. 

i . Names of persons may be declined either with or without 
the article. When declined with the article they remain un- 
changed, since the article itself sufficiently indicates the gender 
and case ; e. g., ber SBUfyelm, be3 SSilljelm, etc. ; without the 
article they regularly add £ in the genitive and remain otherwise 
unchanged ; thus, ,£>emrttf)3 $8u&), Henry s book. 

2. But family names ending in a sibilant (a hissing sound) as, 
f, £, 5, ft, take only an apostrophe in the genitive singular ; e. g., 
^oJ3 T SBerfe, Vbss's works. 

3. Masculine names ending in a sibilant take tn§ in the geni- 
tive ; e. g., 9Jccn;en3 SBiitfjer, Max's book. 

4. Feminine nouns ending in c add n§ in the genitive ; e. g., 
SomfettS §ltt f Louisas hat; $aro(ttten3 SBogel, Carolines bird, 
though the n of the genitive may be omitted ; thus, £oui[e3 §ut, 
etc. 

5. Names of persons and places when preceded by an adjec- 
tive take the article, thus : 

ber giite SSUfycIm, good William. 
bte fdjorte (Smtlte, beautiful Emily. 
bct§ fctlte $iu$lanb t cold Russia. 

6. Names of countries are neuter except bte ©cfjtt)et§, Switzer- 
land, and bie Xiirfet, Turkey, which are declined with the article 
like a common noun ; e. g., bte <3tf)toet£, ber @cf)rrjei§, ber ©djtoetj, 
bte 8tf)toet£ ; e. g., 

SCftetn $ruber ifi nad) ber ©cfjtoet^ My brother has gone to Switzer- 

geaangen, land. 

@r ift in ber ©cf)tt)et§ f He is in Switzerland. 

7. The preposition nctd) is also used in speaking of going to 
other countries and cities ; e. g., 

3tf) gef)e nacfj Sonbon, nad) ^ax\§ t nacfj &eutfcf)[anb. / am going 
to London, to Paris, to Germany. 






THE NOUN 65 

8. From in this connection is translated au£ ; e. g., (£r tft a u 3 
•£)annoDer, //<? is from Hanover. 

9. Names of countries and places ending in a sibilant take the 
dative with uon instead of the genitive ; e. g., bte (Strafjeit Don 9fte|3, 
///* streets of Metz ; bte ^arfy Don ^art3, the parks of Paris. 

10. Other names of countries and places may take in the sin- 
gular either the genitive or the dative with Don ; e. g., 2)te ©trafjen 
SBerlinS, or bte ©tragen Don Berlin, the streets of Berlin, but where 
a plural form occurs in such names the genitive only is used ; 
e. g., bte £)aupt|*tabt ber ^eretnigten <8taaten, ///* capital of the United 
States. 

11. Names of natural objects, as mountains, rivers and lakes, 
take the article and are declined as common nouns, thus : ber 
9it)eitt, the Rliine. 

Norn, ber IRrjein Dat. bem 9tf)etn(e) 

Gen. beS 9trjetn(e)3 Ace. ben ^R^etn 

12. The names of the months and days of the week take the 
definite article but do not vary their own form, thus : ber 2)e^em= 
ber mar fefjr fait, December was very cold; ttf) mar am (an bent) 
9ftitttood) in Dcero ?)orf, / was in New York on Wednesday. 

13. A noun in apposition must be in the same case as the 
noun to which it refers ; e. g., 

§ente traf id) §errn 9ft ary, ben Gsifentoarenfyattbter. 

To-day I met Mr. Marx the hardware dealer. 

©eftern Begegnete id) metnem alien grennbe (170, 3), bem £)r. SSogeL 

Yesterday I met my old friend Dr. Vogel. 

14. Adjectives derived from the names of countries have the 
ending iftf) and take the same endings of declension as other ad- 
jectives ; thus : 

£er amertfantferje 2Sem, American wine ; gen. be3 amertfam* 
fcrjen SSetneS, etc. 

$)te engftfdje (Spradje, the English language ; gen. ber engltfd)en 
©pradje, etc. 



66 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

(Sin itaftemfdje§ $ucf), an Italian book ; gen. etrte§ itattentfdjen 
33ud)e^, etc. Such adjectives are written with a small initial. 

15. Adjectives derived from the names of cities or towns take 
the ending -er in all cases and are invariable in declension. 
They are written with a capital initial ; thus, bie Sonboner JsBriicfc, 
the London bridge ; gen. ber Sonboner 23ritcfe, etc. 

16. All the regular forms of declension and nearly all the 
irregular ones have now been given. For the few other irregu- 
larities the student should be accustomed to refer to a German 
dictionary, where the nominative and genitive singular and nomi- 
native plural are always given and from which one acquainted 
with the regular forms can derive any full declension. 

17. It will be observed that no real German noun forms its 
plural in -§, this plural being found only in a few foreign words, 
as, ba§ @ofa, pi. bte ©ofa£ ; ber Sorb, pi. bte £orb3 ; ber Sparf, pi. 
bte Sparfe. 

Exercise (It bung). 

1. 3)te demerit arbeiten auf bent getbeunb in bent 2Batbe. 2. §err 
SBagner tft etn guter 9?acf)6ar. 3. Serine ift ein &taat ; 2lugufta ift einc 
©tabt. 4- 2Bte triele $ucf)ftaben fyat ba$ Mpfjabet? (S3 tjat 26 
£htd)ftaben. 5. 3Str finb gletcfjgefinrtt, benn ttnr tjaben etnen ©lauben, 
etnen ©ebemfen nnb etnen SSitlen. 6. 3)te gruet ^Sorter : bte Gutter 
unb bte Xofyttt f)aben etne befonbere 2)ef(tnation3form. 7. Victoria 
mar bte ®onigin Don Qntglanb nnb bie Staiferin Don Snbien. 8. 2>a3 
Wnge nnb ba$ Df)r finb Xeile be3 $£'oxptx§. 9. StfajenS nnb fiouifenS 
J8itd)er (tegen auf bem ^ulte. 10. Sco, gefye nad) ber ©djtoeig. 1 1. SSohjn 
gefjen ®te? 3d) gefje iiber §annoDer nad) Berlin. 12. £)ie ©tra^en 
Don ^art3 finb fefyr rein, ntdjt toafyr ? D ja, fefjr rein. 

Translate and Write: 

1. Every rose-bush has its thorns. 2. The director of this school 
is a good man. 3. The good mother loves her good daughters. 
4. Decline the word §er^. 5. Have you read Voss's works ? No, 
I have not read triem. 6. Where are Max's books ? They are 






THE NOUN 



67 



in his desk. 7. Switzerland is a beautiful country. 8. The 
streets of Paris are broad and clean. 9. The parks of Berlin are 
very beautiful. 10. Where has your brother gone? He has 
gone to Switzerland. 1 1 . Which is the largest river of Germany ? 
The Rhine is the largest. 1 2. This man is from Hanover, is he not ? 



60. Review of nouns selected from the preceding lists. 

The pupil should be able to give the nominative and genitive 
singular and nominative plural of each word in this list together 
with the article and the English meaning, thus : ber 23aum, the 
tree ; beg 23aume3 ; Plural : bte 35ctume ; also to decline in full ex- 
amples of each class (see lists § 48 to § 55). 



23ctutn 


tnaoe 


Jtotf 


|jau3(em 


Xijtf) 


greunb 


®amm 


$aube 


$uit 


©ttmme 


(B&rifi 


§immel 


£ut 


mt 


meib 


£amm 


©taat 


SWtebd 


Gutter 


Xod)ter 


$ab 


SDoftor 


^apitel 


@$iff 


$rief 


gran 


9Utfe( 


SRuber 


flatfer 


Robert 


£e*3 


©ebanfe 


Dfcn 


mt 


©eget 


Sidjt 


glufc 


SBriicfe 


ftnopf 


Htfel 


©abet 


§au3 


fRegel 


gieber 


SRtefe 


Snfel 


gitrft 


Sager 


Dfoget 


$ruber 


Silb 


Sube 


£><Mpt 


Soffet 


' geuer 


@raf 


Scaler 


Wlak 


Sricg 


SCtfrper 


©djule 


gaben 


genfter 


£teb 


Sfoftatt 


Slntoort 


garfce 


Sotoe 


Saffr 


©ffatoe 


<Sd)aufet 


£inte 


mod 


9uib 


fttffen 


Saben 


£ier 


£err 


jammer 


3elt 


©djlfiffet 


©alg 


buffer 


geber 


s^ 


©ptegel 


^tubent 


Sttrdje 



68 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



©pradje 


©Orjtl 


SBetn 


Safdje 


Waua 


©trafee Sletrc 


SBinb 


©teg 


§etb 


Drtfet 


©titd 


<£>aar 


SBatet 


©djaf 


W*w 


©coulter 


ton 


Stoftert 


8a$n 


61. Geographical Names and their Derivatives. 


Country or City 




Inhabitant 


Adjective 


^Ime'rtfa 




ber Slmerifancr 


amertfanifd) 


Suro'pa 




ber (Suropder 


curopatfdj 


aftcn 




ber 2(ftate 


aftattfd) 


«frtfa 




ber 5lfrtfaner 


afrifamfd) 


Sluftra'tten 




ber $luftratier 


Quftra(tfd) 


(Srtglcmb 




ber (Sttgldnbei 


engltfc^ 


Sr'lanb 




ber Srldnber 


ir(dnbifd) 


(Sdjott'tcmb 




ber ©djottc 


fdjotttfd) 


SDeutfdj'tattb 




ber SDeutfdt)e 


betttfd) 


sRufe'lcmb 




ber muffe 


rufftfd) 


^ollattb 




ber §o((dnber 


l)ol(dnbtfd) 


@rte'cfjenlanb 




ber ©riccrjc 


grted)t|d) 


granf'retd) 




ber $ran$ofc 


• fran^oftjd) 


£/ft(cr)rcidft 




ber D[t(er)reicl)er 


oft(er)retd)i)d) 


Sta'ltett 




ber Staltener 


ttaltentfd) 


©pa'rttett 




ber <5pamer 


fpantfd; 


^reit'ftett 




ber ^reujge 


preu^tfc^ 


@d)tr>Ybeit 




ber ©d)tr>ebe 


fcrjtoebtfd) 


£)d'rtemarf 




ber £)drte 


bdntfd) 


(£a'naba 




ber Qtanabter 


cartabtfd) 


(Sgfc^'teit 




ber (£gt$ter 


egtyrtifdj 


<S#'na 




ber (£f)tnefe 


cf)irteftf(±) 


Sm'bten 




ber Snbter 


tnbifd) 


Sa'part 




ber Sapatter 


japamfd) 


bte ©crjtoet^ 




ber ©crjtoeiger 


fdjtoe^ertfcrj 


bte %Mti! 




ber %itrfe 


turftfcr; 








THE NOUN , 




Son'bon 


ber Sonboner 


Sonboner 


^axW 


ber ^artfer 


^Sarifer 


Berlin' 


ber Berliner 


Berliner 


2£ten 


ber SStener 


SBtener 


^ett) g)orf 


ber Dceto gorier 


Deem glorfer 



69 



1 . The feminine of a name designating an inhabitant is formed 
by adding -in to the masculine, but those ending in -e drop this 
letter ; e. g., bte (Snglanberin, the English woman ; bte granjojtn, 
the French woman. An exception to this rule is bte 2>eutfcrje, the 
German woman. 

2. The vowel of the masculine (a, 0, u) is not generally modi- 
fied for the feminine, bte ^ron^oftn being the only instance of it 
in the above list. 

3. With the indefinite article the form designating an inhabi- 
tant is the same, throughout this list, as with the definite article ; 
e.g., ber 9(mertfaner and etn 2(mertfaner ; except ber £)eutfd)e, etn 
3)eutfdjer. 

62. The Seasons ($te gafjre^etten)* 

ber grueling, spring ber §erbft, autumn 

ber ©otmner, summer ber ©inter, winter 

63. The Months ($ie donate), 

San'uar, January Su'ti, July 

ge'6ructr, February 2lngnft', August 

yjlaxfa March ©extern' ber, September 

%pxiV, April Dfto'fcer, October 

SDccri, May ' Sfonent'ber, November 

Sit'ni, June SJe^ent'ber, December 

64. The Days of the Week ($ie 2Bod)entage). 

©onn'tag, Sunday £)on'ner3tag, Thursday 

9Jcon'tag, Monday 3 re t'* a 9r Friday 

S)ien3'tag, Tuesday ©onn'ct6enb ) 

^DHtt'tDOcr), Wednesday or (SamS'tag, $ ay 



7o 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



The Numerals (Sie Qahltvottet). 

65. The numerals are, as in English, classed as Cardinals and 
Ordinals (^arbtnatten or ©runb^afyten and Drbtnalten or Drbnung3- 
jaljlen). 

66. The cardinals (®rimb§ctl)(ert) : 



i etn (etn3) 


22 gtoetunb^toanstg 


2 gtuet 


30 bret&tg 


3 bret 


31 etntmbbretJ3tg 


4 bier 


32 5tt>etunbbrei§tg 


5 fiirtf 


40 mer^tg 


6 fetf)3 


5o funfaig 


7 ftefcen 


60 fec^ig 


8 acljt 


70 fieb^tg 


9 neun 


80 arf^tg 


io §el)n 


90 neunjig 


ii elf 


100 fyunbert 


12 gfoolf 


10 1 l)unbertunbein£ 


13 bret^eljn 


102 Ijunbertunb^tnet 


14 meruit 


125 f)unbertfunfunb§lDan§ig 


15 funfjeljn 


200 §tuei()imbert 


16 fed^efyn 


300 brettjunbert 


17 ftebge^n 


1,000 taufenb 


18 adjoint 


2,000 gtnettaufenb 


19 neun^n 


1,000,000 etne 9MIton 


20 stuanatg 


2,000,000 gtoet TOlltonen 


21 eimmbatpcmjig 


1,000,000,000,000 etne Stilton 



Examples (33 eif p tele). 



SSte t)tel tft fecl)3 unb fteben ? 
®ecl)3 unb fteben tft brei^n, 
SSte tuel tft fitnfmal neun ? 
gitnfmal neun tft funfunbtnergtg, 
3dt)le bte 3 e ^ ner ^ 
3el)n, gtnanaig, bretf$tg, :c., 



How many are six and seven ? 
Six and seven are thirteen. 
How many are five times nine ? 
Five times nine are forty-five. 
Name the tens. 
Ten, twenty, thirty, etc. 



THE NUMERALS 71 

67. Declension of the Cardinals. 

1. Only em has a full declension. It is declined like the indef- 
inite article (etn, etrte, etn), when used adjectlvely, and like btefer 
(etner, erne, em<3, etc.), when used substantively. It has also an 
adjective form with the definite article (the "weak" adjective 
declension), thus : ber eine, be3 etnen, bem etnen, ben etnen, etc. 
(77). In counting, the form etn£ (contraction of etne3) is used, 
thus : etn£, gtoei, bret, etc. 

2. Qtnet and bret have genitive and dative forms : gen. §tt)eier t 
and breter, dat. graeien and breien; e. g., 

2)er $dmg groeter Scinber, The king of two countries. 

(5r rjctt eg nur 3roeien gefctgt, He said it to only two. 

3. Some other numerals have plural forms of occasional use, 
as : cmf alien $ieren, on all fours ; fjunberte unb taufenbe, hundreds 
and thousands ; but in general the cardinals after ein are not 
declined. 

68. Numeral Compounds. 

1. With the ending er and the suffix (et are formed indeclin- 
able numeral adjectives: etnerlet, of one kind; ^toeterlet, of two 
kinds ; breterlet, of three kinds ; tnelerlet, of many kinds, etc. 
Also with mat the compounds: etnmal, once; gtoetmal, twice; 
breunal, three times, etc. 

2. With fact) or faltig are formed etnfacfj or etnfalttg, simple ; 
§tt>etfacr) f twofold, etc. i 

69. Expressions of Time. 

1 . In telling the time of day the even hours are expressed by 
the cardinals and Uf)r, clock, thus : 

SSie btel Ufjr ift e3 ? What time (how much o'clock) 

is it ? 
@& ift ein Ut)r f ^tnet Ufjr, etc., It is one o'clock, two o'clock, etc. 



72 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2. For the fractional parts of the hour : 

(££ ift em SStertel nad) em3 (or It is a quarter after one. 

better) em SBiertel (auf) groei, 
(£§ ift r)atb groet, It is half past one (half of two). 

(£§ ift em SSiertef bor gluet (or It is a quarter of two. 

better) bret SBtertel (auf) jloet, 

3. For the minutes : 

@3 ift gefjn 3fttnuten nad) brei f groangtg SOftnuten toor bier, etc. 
It is ten minutes after three, twenty minutes of four, etc. 

4. At any particular time is rendered by the preposition urn; 
e.g., 

3d) gelje urn gefyn Ufjr §u 2ktt unb ftefje um fecf)^ Ufyr auf. 
I go to bed at ten o'clock and arise at six o'clock. 

Um tote Dtel Ut)r gefjt ber Qug nad) Berlin ? Um jeljn Ufyr ffinf* 
unbgtuan^ig. 

At what time does the train go to Berlin ? At twenty-five 
minutes after ten. 

5. When it is but a little after the half -hour a German will 
often say, for example, @£ ift bret SUftnuten nad) ()a(6 fiinf, it is 
three minutes after half-past four (three minutes after half of five). 

Translate and Write : 

1. How many are (ift) eight and nine? Eight and nine are 
seventeen. 2. How many are eight times ten? Eight times ten 
are eighty. 3. What time is it? It is seven o'clock, — five 
minutes past eight, — a quarter past nine, — half past ten, — a 
quarter before eleven, — five minutes before twelve, — twelve 
o'clock, — two minutes after half past seven. 

70. The Ordinals (£>te Orbnung^a^cn). 

The ordinal numerals are derived from the cardinals by adding 
t from 2 to 19 inclusive, and to the others ft. They are de- 






THE NUMERALS 



clined like adjectives, usually with the definite article, 
irregularities will be observed in erft, brttt and ati)t. 



n 



Some 



I St 


ber, 


bie, 


ba$ 


crfte 


20th ber r bie, 


ba$ 


jtoangigftc 


2d 


11 


u 


a 


groeite 


2 1 st " " 


a 


einunb- 


3d 


" 


a 


a 


brttte 






atoanjigftc 


4th 


" 


a 


" 


tnerte 


30th 


a 


breifjiajte 


5th 


11 


" 


" 


fttnfte 


40th " " 


a 


mer^tgfte 


6th 


u 


" 


" 


fect)fte 


50th 


" 


fftnfeififtc 


7th 


II 


" 


a 


fteOente 


60th 


a 


W9fte 


8th 


it 


a 


a 


adjte 


70th 


a 


Wgfte 


9th 


it 


n 


" 


neunte 


80th 


11 


a^tjigftc 


ioth 


it 


u 


a 


gefjnte 


1 ooth u 


a 


t)imbertfte 


17th 


" 


" 


" 


fieb^e^nte 


1 oooth " 


a 


taufenbfte 


19th 


11 


n 


a 


neim§e()nte 









71. Declension of Ordinals. 

£)er erfte SJcann, The first man. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber erfte dJlann bie erften banner 

Gen. be3 erften SDfanneS ber erften Scanner 

Dat. bem erften Sftanne ben erften SDcannern 

Ace. ben erften Warm bie erften banner 

Examples (33eifpte(e). 

3Bo toofjitt £err 2lbter ? (£r motmt in bem gmetten §aufe, jenfeit ber 
®ird)e. 

Where does Mr. Adler live ? f He lives in the second house 
beyond the church. 

?(nna ift bie erfte nnb Start ber groeite in btefer Piaffe. 
Anna is the first and Charles the second in this class. 

@en. ©rant ftarb am (an bem) 23ften Suit 1885. 
Gen. Grant died on the 23d of July, 1885. 

1. It is common, especially in dating letters, to write only a 
period after the date; e. g. Berlin, 12. $luguft 1904. The date 



74 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

stands in the accusative and is read : Berlin, ben 12tcn $Titgitft 
nenn§el)nf)itnbcrmtcr. 

2. From the ordinals are formed also the adverbs: erf tens, 
firstly ; grnettens, secondly ; brittens, thirdly, etc. 

72. The Day of the Month. 

i. From nnebtcl, how many, how much, is formed the interroga- 
tive ordinal ber, bte, bets totCDtcItc ? which is also declined like an 
adjective, ber toietuclte, bes nnctuctten, etc. It is used in asking 
the date and is then put in the accusative ; e. g., 

2)en ftrieutettert Ijaben rotr fjeute ? What day of the month have 

we to-day ? 
SStr fjctben ben fiinften Mannar. We have the fifth of January. 

One may also say : 
SBelcfjes £)cttum rjctbett rotr rjeute ? What date have we to-day? 

73. Weight, Measure and Quantity. 

In expressions of weight, measure and quantity the noun is 
used in the singular after a numeral, except feminine nouns in 
-e; e. g., jroet $Pfunb f two pounds ; bret $teter, three meters ; but 
bier &\im,four ells (from bte (SITe, the ell, which equals five-eighths 
of a meter and is often used in measuring cloth). 

Examples (33etf pief e). 

3d) fjctbe fiinf ^3fnnb 3 l *der ge- I have bought five pounds of 

femft, sugar. 

2)tefes 3^ mmer tft h^) n SO^^ter fang, This room is ten meters long. 

@eben ©te mtr fiir bret Waxt Give me three marks' worth of 

£kot, bread. 

£)tefe leaner tft gefjn gnJ3 f)ocr), This wall is ten feet high. 

3d) f)ctbe bret 23ud) ©crjretbparner I have bought three quires of 

gefemft, writing-paper. 



THE ADJECTIVE 75 

A partitive genitive preceded by a noun denoting number, 
weight or measure takes the form of simple apposition (not, as 
formerly, the genitive) ; e. g., id) bttte urn em @Ict3 SSaffer, but if 
the partitive noun is modified by a declinable word either the 
genitive or the appositional form is admissible ; e. g., em ($lct3 
fatten SBafferS (gen.), or em @fa3 fafog SBaffer (ace). 

74. Fractions ($rud)ietfe). 

Fractional numbers are formed from the ordinals by adding 
tel (from &etl, /#r/) ; thus, ba$ ^tertel is contracted from ber 
tnerte ^etl, the fourth part ; e. g., 

Ill 3 1 

3 I ^ ~5 2 

©in 2)rtttel nnb em <3etf)ftel iff bret ©edjftel, ober em Ijalb. 
One third and one sixth are three sixths or one half. 

I +•# = 11 = 1A 
2)rei 95iertel nnb fimf (Sedjftel ift nenn§ef)n Qrootftel, ober etn (nnb) 
fteben groolftel 

Translate and Write : 

i. Where do you live ? I live in the third house beyond (lOO) 
the church. 2. Henry is the third and I am the fourth in this 
class. 3. Washington died on the 14th of December, 1799. 

4. What day of the month is it ? It is the first day of July, 1904. 

5. I have bought ten pounds of sugar and three ells of black 
cloth (ace). 6. This hall is forty meters long and thirty meters 
wide. 7. Three-fifths and seven-tenths are one and three-tenths. 



Adjectives ((gtftettfdjaftSttidrte*)* 

75. The Declension of Adjectives. 
1. An adjective used in the predicate, in apposition, or as an 
adverb, is not declined, thus : 

2)a§ ©rag ift grim, The grass is green. 

£>err 23rcuin nnrb retdj, Mr. Braun is getting rich. 

(Sin Wp\d reif nnb miirbe, An apple ripe and mellow. 

3>iefe Stinber finb ffeifu'g, These children are industrious. 

5(nna fdjreifit fefjr frf)on, Anna writes very beautifully. 



7 6 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



2. For an adjective used attributively before a noun there are 
three modes of declension, called the "strong," the "weak" and 
the "mixed." 

76. The Strong Adjective Declension. 

The strong declension is used when the adjective stands alone 
before the noun. It has here the gender endings of btefer (32, 4) 
except in the genitive singular of the masculine and neuter, where 
-e£ changes to -en for the sake of euphony. 

Examples of the strong declension : 

©uter SBcin, good wine; gute ©pctfe, good food ; cjutcS ®e(b, 

good money. 

Singular. 

gent. 9£eut. 

gute ©peife gute£ (Mb 

cutter ©petfe guten (Mbe3 

guter ©peife gutem ©e(be 

gute ©petfe gitteS (Mb 

Plural. 

©petfen, ©elber 

® pet) en, (Mbcr 

©petfen, (Mbern 

©petfen, (Mber 

77. The Weak Adjective Declension. 

The weak declension is used when the adjective is pre- 
ceded by the definite article or some other "gender-ending" 
word, such as btefer (32, 4). 

Examples of the weak declension : 

£)er gute SJcann, the good man ; bte gute gran, tlie good woman ; 
ba3 (jute ®tnb, the good child. 

Singular. 

WlaZl gem. 9?eut. 

Nom.ber gute Warm bie gute grew ba$ gute ®inb 

Gen. be3 guten 9)£anne3 ber guten grau be§ guten $inbe3 

Dat. bent gnten 9)tann ber guten gran bem guten Sltnbe 

Ace. ben guten Warm bte gute grew ba$ gute &tnb 





ma§t. 


Norn 


guter SSein 


Gen. 


guten 2Betne3 


Dat. 


gutem 3Setne 


Ace. 


guten 2$etn 




Nom. gute 2Betne, 




Gen. guter SSetttc, 




Dat. guten SSeinen, 




Ace. gute SSetne, 





THE ADJECTIVE 






Plural. 






Nom. 


bte guten Scanner, 


grauen, 


®inber 


Gen. 


ber guten ^tinner, 


grauen, 


ffinber 


Dat. 


ben guten SDMnnern, 


grauen, 


®tnberrt 


Ace. 


bte guten banner, 


grauen, 


®inber 



77 



78. The Mixed Adjective Declension. 

i . The mixed declension is used when the adjective is preceded 
by the indefinite article or by some word declined like it (mem, 
bem, etc., 32, 6). This is called the "mixed" declension because 
the adjective endings are partly " strong" and partly " weak." 
They are strong only where the indefinite article lacks the 
gender ending, namely, in the masculine nom. sing, and in the 
neuter nom. and ace. singular. 

Examples of the mixed declension : 

@in gnter SJfann, a good man ; eine gute grew, a good woman ; 
em gutee Sltnb, a good child. 

Nom. ein guter Warm eine gute gran ein gute£ ®mb 

Gen. eineS guten 9ftanne3 einer guten grew eine£ guten Sltnbe*3 

Dat. etnem guten SQfanne einer guten grau einem guten SCinbe 

Ace. etnen guten Wann eine gute grau ein gute3 ®tnb 

2. Rules for the weak and mixed declensions of adjectives 
have already been given and illustrated in connection with the 
article (28-32). 

Remarks on Adjective Endings. 

1. Several adjectives standing together have the same endings 
as a single one, thus : ein gropes? neue3 $>au§, a large new house. 

2. An adjective ending in el (as ebel, noble) is irregular in its 
endings of declension ; e. g., 

Nom. ber eble (not ebele) §er^og f the noble duke. 
Gen. be<3 ebeln ^er^ogS, of the noble duke. 
Dat. bent ebeln ^er^oge, to the noble duke. 
Ace. ben ebeln .Jper^og, the noble duke. 



78 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Plural : bte ebeln .Jper^oge, etc. 

With indefinite article: etn ebler ©raf, a noble count; etne eMe 
£)ame, a noble lady ; em eb(e3 $o(f, a noble people. 



79. Adjectives used as Substantives. 

i. An adjective used as a substantive retains its proper declen- 
sion as an adjective of either the strong or weak declension; thus 
from gut, good, we have ber ©nte, the good (man), bie ($htte, the 
good (woman), ba$ @Htte, the good thing, or that which is good in 
general. 



2. Examples of declension : 








Singular. 




Plural. 


3Ra§f. 


Sent. 


SReut. 


3K. ft. 9?. 


Norn, ber ©ute 


bte ©ute 


ba§ Quite 


bte ©nten 


Gen. beg ©nten 


ber (Stolen 


be£ ©nten 


ber ©uten 


Dat. bem ©uten 


ber ©uten 


bem ®uten 


ben @uten 


Ace. ben ©uten 


bte @ute 


ba$ @ute 


bte ©uten 



With the indefinite article : em ©liter, eme£ ©uten, etc. 

3. An adjective used as a noun and referring to a person takes 
the personal gender ; e. g., 



$er SCttc ift ferjr fcrjrnact), 

2)te 2Ute fifct in etnem (Sdjaufet* 

ftufji, 
SDtefer tote ift gan^ f)tifio3, 



The old (man) is very weak. 

The old (woman) sits in a 
rocking-chair. 

This poor (man) is entirely help- 
less. 

The good have nothing to fear. 

A blind man should not go on 
the street without a guide. 



£)te ©uten rjctben mcrjt3 «ut furdjten, 
(Sin Q3(mber barf (149, 1) ntcfjt 

ofme etnen gitrjrer anf ber 

(Strafje gefyen, 

4. An adjective used as a noun and not referring to a person 
is of the neuter gender ; e. g., 

dJlan bettmnbert ba§ (£bfe nnb ba§ ©crjime, one admires the noble 
and the beautiful (i. e., things that are noble and beautiful). 



THE ADJECTIVE 79 

Exercise (It bung). 

i. @uter, alter SBettt tft teuer. 2. ©ute Spetfe ift narjrfjaft. 
3. ©utes ©elb tft mifcltd). 4. @utc SBiidjer ftnb foftbar. 5. §)er 
gute 3J?amt unb bie gute grew mofjnen glitcflicf) beifammen. 6. 2)a3 
gitte Sltnb tft licbreicr) itnb fCetgtg. 7. $)err Sen§ ift eitt guter unb 
peifjtger Mann. 8. S)iefc grauen ftnb fefjr mof/ltatig ; fie fjelfen ben 
Strmen unb pflegen bie Stranfen. 9. SDie Sltnber ft^ert unlet bent 
SBaume. 10. £ie QJogel fi^en auf bm bofyen SBaumen. it. 3d) 
Ijafc fiinf neue 95itct)er. 12. 2Retn guter 33ruber rjat mir eine golbene 
Ui)r gege6en. 13. liefer 3t(te tft fetjr arm. 

„ltnb bie ^leine ftuftert (eife, 
Setfe ntit gebdmpftem Saut ; 
SDfancr)e3 roidjtige ®ef)etmnt3 
§at fie mir jcfjon anDertraut." — £eine. 

" And the little one (little girl) whispers softly, 
Softly with suppressed voice ; 
Many a weighty secret 
Has she already confided to me." 

Translate and Write : 

r. They drink only good, old, red wine. 2. Good, fresh milk 
is nourishing. 3. Cool, clear water is refreshing. 4. This old 
(man) is weak, he limps. 5. These large pictures are beautiful. 
6. My good father has given me a beautiful new book. 7. A 
good child loves its parents. 8. My dear friend lives in a large, 
white house. 9. This house is small, that house is large (89, 6). 
1 o. The scholars are in the large, new school-house. 1 1 . They 
live in those new houses. 12. The good are not always rich and 
the rich are not always good. 13. The poor admire the beauti- 
ful and the good (i. e., things beautiful and good). 

80. Comparison of Adjectives (Stetgerung ber 2lbj|eftit>e)- 

1. There are three degrees of comparison, the positive, the 
comparative and the superlative, with the same endings as in 



80 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

English, viz., er for the comparative and eft for the superlative ; 
but some euphonic irregularities will be observed, as in the fre- 
quent omission of the e in the superlative ending -eft ; e. g., 



Positive 


Comparative 


Superlative 


retdj, 


rich 


retdjer 


ber, bie, ba$ retdjfte or am retdjften 


arm, 


poor 


drmer 


ber, bie, ba$ cirmfte or am drmften 


alt, 


old 


alter 


ber, bie, ba$ altefte or am dfteften 


&o% 


large 


grd&er 


ber, bie, ba$ grofete or am groftten 


8"t, 


good 


beffer 


ber, bie, ba$ befte or am beften 


i)OCf), 


high 


Ijotjer 


ber, bie, ba§ tjbdjfte or am I)6cf)ften 


ftdfr 


proud 


ftolger 


ber, bie, ba3 ftolgefte or am ftol^eften 


bunfel 


dark 


bunfler 


ber, bie, ba$ bunfetfte or am bunfetften 



Plural : bie reidjften, bie drmften, bie dlteften, etc. 

2. In the comparative of adjectives ending in el the e is 
dropped, as bunfel, comp. bunfler. 

3. In the comparative and superlative of monosyllables the 
vowels a, 0, u, are sometimes, but not always, modified. 

4. The comparative and superlative are declined like the posi- 
tive, thus : 

Comp. : ber reidjere, be3 reidjeren, bem reidjeren, ben reidjeren, Plur. 
bie reidjeren, etc. 

Superl. • ber retdjfte, be3 reidjften, bem reidjften, ben reidjften, Plur. 
bie reidjften, etc. 

5. The form of comparison with am (an bem) as, am retdjften, 
is the dative of the superlative. It stands at the end of the 
phrase and generally after the neuter verb fetn. 

Examples (33 e t f p te le). 

£err %. ift reidj, ^err 23. ift retdjer, §err (£. ift ber retctjfte (or am 
retdjften). 

Mr. A. is rich, Mr. B. is richer, Mr. C. is the richest. 

©eorg ift alter a(3 Sofjann. George is older than John. 






THE ADJECTIVE 8 I 

6. An adverbial form of the superlative is formed with auf 
and the article; e.g., auf ba§ befte (or auf3 befte), in the best manner. 

The superlative with am is used in direct comparison where 
one thing is exalted above another (superlative relative) ; that 
with auf ba$ (aufS) is used where eminence in general is expressed 
(superlative absolute). 

7. A superlative is sometimes intensified by the prefix after, 
all ; e. g., t>er (bte, ba$) afterfcfjonfte, the most beautiful of all ; e. g., 

„(Xiu ttetneS 9#abd)en namcnS Caroline liattc cm after! tcbftc3 ®a- 
narientitfgelcljen." "A little girl named Caroline had a very dear 
little canary bird!' 

S)er ©uperlatit) uon alt ift ber (bie f ba£) altefte. 

The superlative of alt is ber (bte, bo&) altefte. 

Translate and Write : 

1 Are vou rich ? No, I am not rich. 2. Mr. Brown is richer 
than I, but he is not happier. 3. We are neither rich nor poor. 
4. Mrs. Lenz is very old, she is the oldest woman in the village 
(gen.). 5. This house is larger than that (89, 6). 6. The Eiffel 
tower is the highest tower in-the world (gen.). 7. The com- 
parative of rich is richer. 8. Caroline's bird (59, 4) was the 
prettiest of all. 

81. Syntax of Adjectives. 

1. Adjectives Governing the Genitive. 
About thirty adjectives govern the genitive, which they 
generally follow. Examples in common use are : 
bar; devoid of ' miibe, tired of 

beburfttg, in want of fdjulbtg, guilty of 

betuufct, conscious of unftfjulbtg, innocent of 

etngebenf, mindful of itberbriifftg, tired of 

fafjtg,, capable of uerbtidjtig, suspicious of 

geuufj, certain of tuert, worthy of 

tebtg, free from ttmrbio,, worthy of 

madjttg, master of unttmrbtg, unworthy of 



82 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Examples (33 

liefer SJtatm ift ber Unterftiitmng 

bebiirftig. 
„3cfj bin mir fetrter ©d)road)f)eit 

mefjr betturpt." 
3ft er einer fofd^ert %at farjig ? 
3d) bin biefer ©ac^e gemift, 
233tr finb biefer 2lrbeit mi'tbe, 
@r ift biefe3 $erbred)en£ ftfjulbig, 
liefer Sftann ift eineS 2)iebftat)b§ 

fcerbctcrjtig, 
3Str foaren befferer SBefyanbtnng 

ttmrbig, 



eifpiele). 

This man is in need of assist- 
ance. 

I am conscious of no more 
weakness (in myself). 

Is he capable of such a deed ? 

I am sure of this thing. 

We are tired of this work. 

He is guilty of this crime. 

This man is suspected of a 
theft. 

We were worthy of better treat- 
ment. 



2. Adjectives Governing the Dative. 
Many adjectives govern the dative ; examples in common use 



are 



atjnlid), similar, like 
cmgeneljm, agreeable 
begreiflid), intelligible 
befcmnt, known 
bcmfbctr, thankful 
fremb, strange 
gleicf), like 



giinftig, favorable 
moglid), possible 
notig, necessary 
nihjticfj, useful 
fcfjulbig, indebted 
fcerbunbert, obliged 
ttritlfommen, welcome 



Examples (423 etfptele). 
£)er ©olm ift feinem better dfmttcfj, The son is like his -father. 



(&§ ift mir fefyr cmgenetjm, 

Scrj bin Sfynen fetjr bcmfbctr, 

©§ mar mir nnmoglirf) §n form 

men, 
&§ ift ifvm aKe£ gteitf), 
©ie finb mir §ef)n Wlaxt fcfjulbig, 
©ie finb nn£ fjerglid) mitffommen, 



to 



It is very agreeable to me. 
I am very grateful to you. 
It was impossible for me 

come. 
It is all the same to him. 
You owe me ten marks. 
You are heartily welcome (to 

us). 



THE ADJECTIVE 



83 



3. Adjectives Used with Prepositions. 
Adjectives are often connected with prepositions governing an 



object ; examples are : 
atf)tfctm auf, careful of 
bange Dor, afraid of 
begtertg nacf), eager for 
befrett Don, free from 
ettel auf, proud of 
frofi iiber, glad of 
graufam gegen, cruel to 



rjofltd) gegen, polite to 
nadfjldfftg in, careless of 
reictj an, rich in 
fto% auf, proud of 
iibergeugt Don, sure of 
befannt mit, acquainted with 
Derfcfjmenbertfd) mit, prodigal of 



Examples (33eif ptete). 



Wlix tft Dor bem 2togang btefe§ 

®ampfe3 bange, 
2)er (&ti$aU tft begierig nacf) 

^etcrjtum, 
liefer gelbfjerr tft graufam gegen 

feme ©otbaten, 
2Str ftnb Don einer grojgen ($e= 

fafjr befrett, 
2)te Gutter tft ftot§ auf trjren 

@ofm, 
(£r tft fjofttcrj gegen feme S8orgefe|* 

ten, 
3d} bin befannt mit tfmt, 
(£r tft Derfcrjmenberifcfj mit fetnem 

(Mbe, ( 

Translate and Write : 

1. Are they in need of money? 2. I do not believe that he 
is capable of such a deed (81, 1). 3. Is the son like the father ? 
4. I owe you twenty marks. 5. Is this teacher cruel to his pu- 
pils ? No, on the contrary he is very polite to them. 6. Are 
you acquainted with this family ? No, I know them only by 
name (bem tauten nacf)). 7. One should never be tired of his 
work. 



I fear the result of this battle. 
The miser is eager for wealth. 

This commander is cruel to 
his soldiers. 

We are freed from a great 
danger. 

The mother is proud of her 
son. 

He is polite towards his supe- 
riors. 

I am acquainted with him. 

He is prodigal with his money. 



84 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

The Pronoun. — ©a3 Jyimtiort 

82. i. Personal Pronouns (^erfonal ^rottomuta). 
The Personal Pronouns are : 

First Person ((£rfte $erfon). 
Singular. Plural. 

Nom. id), I tDir r we 

Gen. metner (mem), of me uufer, of us 

Dat. mir, to me um§, to us 

Ace. mid), 



me 



urn 



us 



Second Person (gtoette ^erfon). 

Nom. bit, thou ifyr, ye 

Gen. beiner (betrt), of thee euer, of you 

Dat. bir to thee cud), to you 

Ace. bid), thee cud), you 






Nom. er, he 

Gen. f enter (fetn), of him 
Dat. ifym, to him 

Ace. tf)tt, him 



Third Person (Critic $erfon). 
Singular. 

Sent, 
fie, she 
ifyrer, of her 
U)r, to her 
fie, her 



9?eut. 
e3, it 

f enter (fetn), of it 
tf)m, to it 

eg, it 



Third Person. 
Plural. 

Nom. fie, they 

Gen. ifyrer, of them 

Dat. u)nen, to them 

Ace. fie, them 



THE PRONOUN 85 

2. The Reflexive Pronoun fid}. 

The reflexive pronoun fid), himself, herself, itself themselves, 
is of the third person for all genders, and is both singular and 
plural. It is invariable in form and is used only in the dative 
and accusative ; e. g., 
(Sr gibt fid) (dat.) bide s Dcu()e, He gives himself much trouble 

(takes much pains). 
(£r rjctt fid) (ace.) fdnoer eeriest, He has hurt himself badly. 
8te tjaben fid) (ace.) gut ctmitfiert, They amused themselves well. 

3. The Emphatic Pronoun felbft. 

The emphatic pronoun felbft (or fe(ber) is sometimes added to 
a personal pronoun for emphasis. It is invariable in form; e. g., 

3d) farm e3 felbft tun, I can do it myself. 

(£r rjctt feinen llntergcmg fid) felbft He has prepared (or caused) his 

bereitet, own ruin. 

©dbft is also used adverbially meaning even. 

83. Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 

1. A personal pronoun agrees with the noun to which it refers, 
in person, number and gender ; e. g., 

2So ift ber §ut ? §ier iff er, Where is the hat ? Here it is. 

SSo ift bie Sl'orte ? §ier ift fie, Where is the card ? Here it is. 

2Ber rjctt ben §ut ? 3d) tjabe irjn, Who has the hat ? I have it. 

2Ber rjat bte gebern ? ^ar( rjctt Who has the pens ? Charles has 
fie, ' them. 

2. The personal pronouns of the first and second persons are 
often repeated after the relative ber (bte, ba$) ; e. g., 

3d), ber id) antuefenb tear, I who was present. . 

2>u, ber bu cmroefenb ttarft, You who were present. 

28tr, bte roir anrnefenb roaren unb W T e who were present and saw 

ctlle£ aefetjen fyaben, fonnen aHeg all can relate all. 

er^dtjlen, 



86 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

3. The genitive of the personal pronoun (merrier, beiner, etc.), 
is seldom used except as the object of a verb, as : $ergcffen ©te 
meiner nicfjt, forget me not, or as the second object of a reflexive 
verb, thus : Qmmtern ©ie fid) meiner, remember me. 

4. These genitives are, in poetical style, sometimes contracted 
to mem, betn, fein, etc., thus : ^ergtft mem mtifi, forget me not. 

Exercise (U b U n (j). 

3ft biefe3 SBilb fur mid) ? Sftein, e£ ift nicrjt fur bid). 

§at betn SBruber un£ geferjen ? Sftem, er rjat un£ nicfjt gefetjen. 

|jaben ©ie bie gafjtten ? 9?ein, 3(nna f;at fie. 

3Ba3 tjat betn $ater btr gegeben ? (Sr I;at mtr erne Ul)r gegeben. 

2Ba3 molten ©ie mtr geben ? 3d) mill btr nid)t3 geben. 

28a£ rotUft bu grcm§ geben ? 3d) mill ttjm etnen 9(pfel geben. 

28er bjat un3 geferjen ? S^temanb rjat un3 gefe!)en. 

feat @eorg ftcf) Derle^t ? 3a, er f)at fid) in bie §anb ge^ 

fdjnttten. 

Translate and Write : 

1. What have you there ? I have a beautiful new book. 2. Is 
it for me ? Yes, it is for you. 3. Has Henry seen us ? Yes. 
he has seen us. 4. What will you give me ? I will give you a 
gold watch. 5. Where is the American flag? Here it is. 
6. Have you my letters ? Yes, I have them. 7. Who has the 
buttons ? I have them ; here they are. 8. Has Frederick hurt 
himself? Yes, he has cut his foot (32, 10, c). 9. Please give 
me these ripe apples. No, I will not give them to you (170, 4). 
10. I who was present and saw all can relate all. 1 1. What has 
Hedwig ? She has a beautiful little mirror. Who gave it to her ? 
(118, 5,<:). Her good teacher (fern.) gave it (has given it) to her. 

84. The Pronouns in Personal Address. 

1. The second person singular bu f)aft, bu bift, etc., is used in 
conversation, and in writing, between near relatives and in address- 
ing all children (up to the age of about 14 years). It is, also, 



THE PRONOUN 87 

as in English, the style of the Bible, of prayer, and often of poe- 
try. The plural of this form, ttjr fyabt, tr)r feib, was formerly used 
in common conversation, as we use the corresponding forms in 
English, you have, you are, etc., but there has arisen in Germany 
the singular custom of employing the third person plural in place 
of the second and indicating it by a capital initial ; thus the Ger- 
man says to a member of his own family or to one child : §aft bit 
gefd)rie6ert ? hast thou written ? and in the plural : <Qabt if)r gefcfjrte* 
6ert? have you written? But to adults to whom he is not nearly 
related he says, for both singular and plural : fgabm ©ie gefdjrte* 
bert ? have you written ? 

Hence, in speaking, there is no distinction between rjabett fie ? 
have they ? and tjabert ©te ? have you ? The connection in which 
such expressions are used will determine which is meant, though 
sometimes one may be misunderstood* 

2. This peculiarity of speech runs through all the forms of 
declension, thus : 

3So rrjarert fie gefterrt ? Where were they yesterday ? 

28 ft) avert ©te gefterrt ? Where were you yesterday ? 

3cf) battle btr, I thankyou (thee, familiar style). 

Stf) battle 3t)rtert. I thank you (formal style). 

Stf) fyabe e3 Sfjnett gefagt, I said it to you . 

2So ift betrt 23ud) ? Where is your (thy) book ? 

2So ift 3t)r SSudj ? (87, 3), Where is your book ? 

3Bo ftrtb tfyre S3iicr)er ? Where are their books ? 

2Bo ftrtb Stvre 33Mjer ? Where are your books ? 

3. The polite form ((Sic, etc) originated in the practice of 
adressing persons of distinction in this manner, and only grad- 



* This use of the third person plural in place of the second person plural is of modern 
origin, having become common only about the middle of the eighteenth century. In Ger- 
man literature of even a later date, as in the writings of Goethe and Schiller, the original 
forms are exclusively found ; e. g. 

©agt mir, Setter, 3&r fetb getoif? ber SKidjter bon biejen 
§(ud)tigen 2Jiannern, ber 3&r jogtetcb, bie ©emitter berubigt? 

Goethe's „£ermarm unb SDorotfyea" (1796). 



88 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

ually extended to the middle and lower classes. It is now the 
accepted form in general society and among all classes of 
people. 

4. As all children use the familiar style (bit, etc.) those who 
have grown up together, though not related, often continue to 
use it in after life, and any two friends may adopt it as a mark oi 
especial regard. One says of such an intimate and confidential 
friend : @r ift mein 3)u£freunb or 5)u^6ntber (one to whom he says 
bit instead of (Sie). 

5. On the other hand the familiar style may be employed in 
expressing aversion or contempt, as in quarrels; also when 
animals are spoken to or represented as speaking. Formerly, in 
Germany, house-servants were thus addressed, as indicating their 
inferior position, but it is now customary to employ, in addressing 
them, the more respectful forms ©ic, Stjtten, etc., thus : SSoQen 
©ie, instead of tot lift bit. 3d) fyabc eS 3l)nen gefagt, instead of 3d) 
fjctbe c3 bit gefagt, / have told you, etc. 

6. The personal forms bit, bctn, tfjr, eiter, are also written with 
a capital initial when they occur in letters and are to come under 
the eye of the person to whom they relate; e. g., „(£3 [jat mid) 
fefyr gefreut §u erfctljren, bafs £)tt toieber tool)l btft imb ba$ 2)ettt 
©efc^aft fo Qltt gef)t r " I am muck pleased to learn that you are again 
well and that your business is so prosperous (goes on so well), but 
ordinarily these forms are not written with capitals. 

7. The pronouns of the third person singular, cr, fie, etc., were 
formerly used in place of those of the second person bit, etc., 
and when so used were written with a capital initial ; e. g., SBttl 
St geljcn ? instead of SStUft bit gefjen ? feat Sie (fern, sing.) gefdjrtebett? 
instead of §aft bit gefdjriefoen ? This form was at one time com- 
mon in all conversation, then came to be used only in addressing 
those of inferior station, as a king to his subjects, a master to 
a servant, etc., and is still occasionaly so used, but is nearly 
obsolete. 



THE PRONOUN 89 

85. Where the Pronoun does not Agree with 
its Antecedent. 

Where a noun indicating a person is of the neuter gender, as 
ba$ SSetb, the woman; ba§ ^raulein, the young lady ; bag s D£abd)en, 
the girl, the personal pronoun accords with the natural gender ; 
e. g., 28o ift bct3 £)tenftmabd)en ? @te (not eg) tft in ber ®M)e, 
Where is the servant girl? She is in tJie kite hen. 

86. The Pronoun eg. 

The neuter form eg has some peculiar uses : 

1. As the subject of an impersonal verb; e. g., eg regnet, it 
rains ; eg gi6t or eg firtb, there is, there are. 

2. As an expletive like the English there before a verb ; e. g., 
eg mar eutmal ein Strjntg, there was once a king. 

3. After a verb in such phrases as id) Inn eg, it is I. 

4. Objectively as representing a preceding word or phrase and 
then to be translated so ; e. g., er ift ntd)t retdj, obgletdj er eg gu 
fein fcfjetnt. He is not rich although Jie appears to be so. 

5. Impersonally before a predicate nominative without refer- 
ence to the gender or number of the noun to which it relates ; 
e.g., 

SSag tft ba$ ? ©8 tft ein £tfdj, What is that ? It is a table. 

2Ba3 tft bag ? (£g tft erne Saffe, What is that ? It is a cup. 

(£g ftnb 30 Q3iicf)er cmf btefent There are 30 books on this 

Sputte, desk. 

©3 maren 50 SjSerfonen antoefenb, There were 50 persons present. 

SKer tft btefer §err ? (£g ift mein Who is this gentleman ? It is 

Q3ruber, my brother. 

6. The impersonal eg is used with the neuter verb fein when 
particular objects or persons are referred to as in the above 
examples, eg ift ein §ut ; eg toctren 30 ^serfonen anroefenb, etc., 
but when things or persons are referred to in a general sense the 
impersonal form of geben is used, as : eg gibt gute unb fd)ed)te 23iid)er, 



9<D NEW GERMAN COURSE 

there are good and bad books ; in alien 3etten gab e3 tnele SRtefen, in 
old times tJiere were many giants. 

7. English phrases consisting of a preposition followed by the 
pronoun it or its plural tJiem if it relates to a thing (not to a per- 
son), are translated into German by ba (bar before a vowel) and 
a preposition (bamtt, barin, etc.) ; e. g., 

With it, with them, bamtt : I am satisfied with it, with them, 
£>tf) bin bamtt ^ufrieben. 

In it, bavin : There is nothing in it, @3 ift mdjtS bartn. 

Of it, from it, bauon : I know nothing of it, of them, 3d) toetft 
tttdjtg bauon. 

About it, concerning it, baritber : We shall speak about it, SStr 
merben baritber fpredjen. 

From it, of it, barau3 : There will nothing good come of it, 
3)aran§ rturb ntcfjt$ ©nte3 fommen. 

For it, bafiir : How much did you pay for it ? SStetnel rjaben ©ie 
bafitr be§a()(t? 

Translate and Write : 

1. What have you written? I have written a long letter. 
2. Where were you this morning? I was at home. 3. Where 
is your book ? It lies on my desk. 4. I will give you this little 
boat. I thank you. 5. Where is the servant -girl ? She is in 
the kitchen. 6. Is Mr. Lenz at home ? I am he. 7. Once there 
were three kings. 8. There are old and young people. 9. What 
is that? It is an orange. 10. What is that? It is a shovel. 
1 1. There are ten boys and fifteen girls in this class. 12. There 
were many children present. 13. He is not satisfied with it. 
14. We know nothing of it. 15. What is there in this box? 
There are matches in it. 16. Has he spoken to you about it ? 
No, he said nothing about it. 



THE PRONOUN 



91 



87. Possessive Pronouns (SBeftijattjetgettbe &iirtt)tirter). 

1. Like the indefinite article in the singular and like btefer 
(32, 4) in the plural are declined the following possessive pro- 
nouns (called also possessive adjectives) together with the indef- 
inite numeral fetrt. 





Singular. 




Plural. 




3JU§f. 


3- e m. 


$1 e u t. 


m. & 9t. 




mein 


metne 


mein 


metne 


my 


betn 


beine 


betn 


beine 


thy 


feut 


feinc 


jet it 


feme 


his, its 


i(,r 


ujre 


u> 


tljre 


her 


unfer 


unjere 


unfer 


unfere 


our 


euer 


eure 


ener 


enre 


your 


ifyr 


if)re 


t(ir 


ifjre 


their 


Sf)r 


3f)re 


S^r 


3%e 


your 



2. These possessives are derived from the genitives of the per- 
sonal pronouns metner, betner, etc. (82). 

3. It will be observed that tf)r has three meanings, viz. : her, 
their, and your. When it means your it is distinguished in writ- 
ing or printing by a capital initial (5r)r) ; in other cases the 
meaning must be inferred from the context ; thus if one is 
speaking of a girl and says : 23o tft tf)r 2htrf) ? the meaning is, 
where is her book ? where in another connection it might mean, 
where is their book ? but in the formal style of address 28o tft 
\Si)X $3ud) ? means, where is your book? 2£o ftnb tfjre 2Utd)er ? 
may mean either where are her books ? or where are their books ? 

4. For the declension of the possessive pronouns see, as 
model, mein, § 32, 6. ' 

5. Declension with an Attributive Adjective and Noun: 

mein nener JQVit, my new hat. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. mein nener §ut metne neuen §ute 

Gen. metneg neuen §ute£ metner neuen ^)itte 

Dat. meinem neuen §ute metnen neuen §ttten 

Ace. metnen neuen §ut metne neuen £mte 



9 2 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



6. With the Definite Article : 

ber, bie, ba§ meine, mine ber, bie, ba£ nnfere, ours 

ber, bie, bas> beine, thine ber, bie, ba3 euere, yours 

ber, bie, ba§ feine, his, its ber, bie, ba§> itjre, theirs 

ber, bie, ba$ Si)re, yours. 
Plural : bie meinen, bie beinen, bie feinen, etc. 



The adjective here follows the 
definite article. 



Model of Declension : 

weak " declension with the 










Singular. 




Plural. 




Wla§l 


$em. 


Went. 


2R. g. «R. 


Norn. 


ber meine 


bie meine 


ba$ meine 


bie meinen 


Gen. 


be3 meinen 


ber meinen 


be3 meinen 


ber meinen 


Dat. 


bem meinen 


ber meinen 


bem meinen 


ben meinen 


Ace. 


ben meinen 


bie meine 


ba$ meine 


bie meinen 



8. A form of recent origin, but more used and of the same 
meaning, adds ig to the above, thus : 
ber, bie, ba$ meinige, mine ber, bie, ba$ nnfrige, ours 

ber, bie, ba$ beinige, thine ba, bie, ba$ eurige, yours 

ber, bie, ba§ feinige, his, its ber, bie, ba$ tr^rtge, theirs 

ber, bie, ba$ Sfyrige, yours 

The declensional endings are the same as with meine, etc. 



Nom. ber meinige 
Gen. be£ meinigen 
Dat. bem meinigen 
Ace. ben meinigen 



9. Model of Declension : 

Singular. Plural. 

bie meinige ba$ meinige bk meinigen 

ber meinigen be3 meinigen ber meinigen 

ber meinigen bem meinigen ben meinigen 

bie meinige ba§ meinige bie meinigen 



88. The Possessives used Substantively. 

1 . The possessive pronouns used substantively, that is, repre- 
senting a noun understood, are declined like biefer (32, 4). These 
forms are, in the nominative : 









THE PRONOUN 




93 






Singular. 




Plural. 




ma§t. 




% e m. 


fteut. 


m. %. w. 




meiuer 




metne 


metne3 


metne 


mine 


betner 




betne 


betneg 


betne 


thine 


feiner 




feme 


fetneg 


feme 


his 


it)rer 




it)re 


tf)re3 


ujre 


hers 


unferer 


unfere 


unfere^ 


unfere 


ours 


3f)rer 
eurer 




3t)re 
eure 


5f)re3 
eure3 


S^re 
eure 


[ yours 


ifjrer 




ttjre 


tf)re§ 


it)re 


theirs 






2. Model of Declension: 








Singular. 




Plural. 






ma§t 


$em. 


fteut. 


2K. ft. Ti. 




Nom. 


metner 


metne 


metner 


metne 


mine 


Gen. 


meme$ 


metner 


metne3 


metner 


of mine 


Dat. 


metnem 


metner 


meinem 


metnen 


to mine 


Ace. 


metnen 


metne 


metne3 


metne 


mine 



Examples (33etfpte(e). 

SSeffen £ut tft bte£ ? &$ tft metner. Whose hat is this ? It is 
mine. 

Swollen @te mtr 31)ren ©djtrm lettjen ? Set) Ijctbe metnen oerloren. 
Will y oil lend me your umbrella ? I have lost mine. 

3. The pronominal forms ending in -tg (ber metntge, etc.) are 
more often used than these substantive forms ; thus in the above 
examples instead of e<§ tft metner, we may say, e£ tft ber metntge, 
and instead of id) fyabe metnen oerloren, say, id) fjctbe ben metnigen 
oertoren. 

Exercise (ft b u tt g). 

1. SD^eirt neuer §ut tft ftfjroar^. 2. 28o ift Sfjr netted £md)? (S3 
tft in metnem ^ulte. 3. 3Ste m'el (Mb tjaben ©ie? 3d) fyabe letn 
@eib. 4. 5Inna3 SBilb tft fct)ort, aber betne<§ (bag betne, or ba§ bet* 
tttge), ift nod) fdjoner. 5. 2M(en @te mtr Sfyr SJceffer lettjen? 3d) 



94 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

t)abe ba§ metntge berloren. 6. Stjr £>au§ ift grij^er ctl3 ba3 unfrtgc. 

7. 3d) tDttl meine SBtlber berfaufen ; ina3 Pollen ©te mtt ben Sfyrigen 
tun ? 3d) tottl fie and) fcerfaufen. 

Translate and Write : 

1. Where is my new hat ? It lies on your desk. 2. Where is 
his new hat ? It lies on the table. 3. His good friends are very 
rich. 4. My brother's house (the house of my brother) is larger 
than yours. 5. Will you lend me your pens ? I have lost mine. 
6. He will sell his pictures ; what will you do with yours ? I will 
not sell them. 7. How much money has he ? He has no money. 

8. My books are old ; yours are new. 9. Are your pictures more 
beautiful than mine ? No, they are not more beautiful. 

89. Demonstrative Pronouns. 

1. A demonstrative pronoun is one that distinctly designates 
that to which it refers, as btefer £mt, this hat, jetted .•pans*, that 
house, Sofjaint, bcr fann t§> tun r John, he can do it. The demon- 
strative pronouns are : 



he, that one 

this 

that 

such 

ber- bte- baSjemge, he, that one ; plur. btejenigen, those. 

ber- bte-, ba3fe(6e; plur. biefelben, the same. 

ebenber- bte-, ba^fefbe ; plur. ebenbtefetben, the very same. 

ber, bte, ba3 ttamlidje ; plur. bte namltcfjen, the same. 

ber, bte, ba§ anbere, the other ; plur. bte anberen, the others. 

Examples (35eif ptele). 

28eltf)er ©pteget ift ber fief fere ? £)er erne ift eben fo gut tote ber 
anbere. Which mirror is the better ? One is just as good as the 
other. 





Singular. 




gjtast. 


$em. 


Kent. 


ber 


bte 


ba§> 


btefer 


btefe 


btefe3 


jener 


jene 


jene3 


folder 


foltfje 


foldjee 



Plural. 




9». g. Sfc. 




bte 


those 


biefe 


these 


jene 


those 


foldje 


such 



THE PRONOUN 95 

$)ie§ tft berfelbe SJfann, ben fair geftern fjter gefefyen t)a6en. 
This is the same man whom we saw here yesterday. 

2Bem gefyoren (170, 3) btefe 33iid£)er ? S)tefeS gef)ort mtr unb 
jetted gefyort metnent 23ruber. 

To whom do these books belong ? This (one) belongs to me 
and that (one) belongs to my brother. 

2. ber f bte, ha§ as a demonstrative used before a noun is de- 
clined like the definite article ; not followed by a noun it is 
declined as follows : 



2Ka§f. 


$em. 


fteut. 


9». ft. ft. 


ber 


bte 


ba$ 


bte 


beffert 


beren 


beffen 


beren (berer) 


bent 


ber 


bent 


benen 


ben 


bte 


ba$ 


bte 



ff $er ©ott, ber @tfen toadjfen liefj, 
$er tooEte feme $ned)te." arndt. 
" That God w^^> made iron to grow, he wished no serfs." 

3. In the above, quoted from „2)er gretfjett ®tf)lad)truf," ber 
occurs first as a demonstrative before a noun, then as a relative 
pronoun, and lastly as a demonstrative not followed by a noun. 

„2Sen ber §err fteb Ijctt, ben pcf)ttgt er." 

Whom the Lord loveth he chasteneth (him chasteneth he). 

4. When the demonstrative ber is used as the antecedent of a 
relative pronoun, the genitive plural is berer instead of beren ; e. g., 

%vt ®tnber berer, trefdje gut finb/finb gliicf(tcl). 

The children of those who are good are fortunate. 

5. The demonstrative ber (bte, ba$) followed by a noun in the 
genitive often corresponds to the English possessive, thus : 

SSeffen geber tft \)a$ ? @3 tft bte metner ©djtoefter. 

Whose pen is that ? It is my sister's (that of my sister). 

For the declension of biefer, jener and folder, see § 32, 4. 



9 6 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



6. SDtefer means both this and that except where this and that 
are contrasted, where biefer means this and jcncr that. Salter is 
also used to point out an object at a distance ; e. g., 

^tefe^ ,£)cm3 ift grower al£ jene3. 7%w ^iz&rc is larger than that. 
3ene 23erge finb ferjr rjod). Those (yonder) mountains are very 
high. 

7. $)erjemge, berfetbe, ber ntimttcfje and ber anbere are declined 
like the definite article with an adjective (the weak adjective de- 
clension). 

8. Example of Declension : 



Norn, berjentge 
Gen. benjentgen 
Dat. bemjemgen 
Ace. benjentgen 



Singular. 

biejentge 
berjentgen 
berjenigen 
biejentge 



SReut. 
ba^jentge 
berjentgen 
bemjemgen 
ba^jentge 



Plural. 

btejentgen 
berjentgen 
benjentgen 
btejentgen 



9. £)erjemge when used in conjunction with a relative pronoun 
is called a correlative, thus : 

£)erjemge (or ber), meldjer, he who ; biejentge (or bte), lueldje, she 
who; S)a3jemge (or ba§), rocld)e3, that which ; btejentgen (or bte), 
toeld)e, those who. 

2)erjenige, raetdjer fleifetg ift, roirb rettfi roerben, aber btejentgen, 
roeldjje faiil finb, roerben arm bletben. 

He who is industrious will become rich, but those who are in- 
dolent will remain poor. 

3Ser (or berjenige, toetdjer) feme ©efunbfyett pflegt, ber ttrirb langc 
leben. 

He who cares for his health will live long. 

btejentgen, raeldje arm finb, finb ntdjt tmmer imgliitfttd). 
Those who are poor are not always unhappy. 

9ftan Itebt benjentgen nirfjt, ber fetn SBort md)t ^alt. 
One does not love him who does not keep his word. 

3>d) t)abe foldje Sente mtf)t gent.* I do not like such people. 



* @ern fcaben, lit. to have willingly, means to like, to be fond of. 



THE PRONOUN 97 

io. Whenever a demonstrative pronoun is separated from its 
subject by the neuter verb fein it takes the neuter singular form 
regardless of the gender or number of the noun ; e. g., 

S)iefe3 ift metne geber ; jene3 tft bte Sfjrige. 
This is my pen ; that (one) is yours. 

1 1 . In like manner are used the shorter forms bte3, bct3, and 
e3 ; e. g., 

2)aS ftnb biefelben Sfrtaben, bte loir geftern t)ter gefefjen f)aben. 
Those are the same boys whom we saw (have seen) here yes- 
terday. , 

3)te3 tft metn 23ndj, itnb bct£ ift ba§ 3f)rige. 
This is my book and that is yours. 

2£a3 tft ba$ ? 2)a3 (e$) tft cin «§>ut. 
What is that ? That (it) is a hat. 

12. The demonstrative ber (bte-, ba$-) felbe sometimes replaces 
the third personal pronoun (er, fie, e§, etc.), thus : 

3d) fyabe metne (Sintrttt^farte berloren, unb ofyne fie (or ofjne btefe(be) 
fann id) ntdjt etntreten. 

I have lost my card of admission and without it I cannot 
enter. 

13. This construction is often employed for the sake of 
euphony ; thus : 

$at @eorg ben 33rief? 3a, id) fyahe tfmt benfelben (or iljn tfjm) 

gegeben. 

Has George the letter ? Yes, I have given it to him. 

i 

14. Observe in the last example that the dative (it)tn) pre- 
cedes the demonstrative (benfelben) while it follows the personal 
pronoun (tfm) (118, 5, d). 

Translate and Write : 

1. This hat is new; that (one) is old. 2. These pens are 
better than those. 3. John is lazy, but William he is industrious. 



98 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

4. Such people are not agreeable, I do not like them. 5. Those 
who are not industrious will not become rich. 6. Those who are 
not careful of their health will not live long. 7. Those who are 
indolent are always poor. 8. Those are the same men whom you 
saw here this morning. 9. I have brought your books and those 
of your brother. 10. Whose (90, 1) pens are these? This one 
is mine and that one (89, 6) is my sister's (that of my sister). 

90. Interrogative Pronouns. 

1. The interrogative pronouns are lue(d)cr, which, what ; toer, 
who ; and \va§, ivhat. They are declined as follows : 







l 


singular. 






Plural. 




SWog!. 




gem. 


5ft e it t. 




3R. %. W. 


Nom 


meldjer 




tteldje 


toe(d)e£ 




tueldje 


Gen. 


lueldjeg 




toeltfjer 


tt)e(d)e3 




uie(d)er 


Dat. 


luetdjem 




lue(d)er 


toeldjem 




toeldjen 


Ace. 


iDcldjen 




toeldje 


toeld)e3 




toekf)e 




Nom 


toer 


who 


toaS 


what 






Gen. 


lueffer 


t whose 


toeffen. 


of what 






Dat. 


toem 


to whom 










Ace. 


iDen 


whom 


tva$ 


what 





2. 2Ber and \va$ have no plural forms. 2Ber relates to persons 
only, \va§> to things only, and toe(tf)cr to both persons and things. 

Examples (33 e if pie (e). 

28er ift bag? Who is that? 

SSeffen SBudj ift bag ? Whose book is that ? 

SBem fjaften ©te. bte llfjr gege^ To whom have you given the 

6 en ? watch ? 

SBett fyabett @te gefefjen ? Whom have you seen ? 

2Ba§. ift bag ? What is that ? 

2Ba§ t)aben ©ie gefauft ? What have you bought? 

2Betd)er Slnabe ift ber fletfjigfte ? Which boy is the most indus- 
trious ? 




THE PRONOUN 99 

fiemrtcf) tft ber ffetfjtgfte. Henry is the most industrious. 

IBeldjen |)itt molten 3te faufen ? Which hat will you buy ? 

3d) ttnil biejen fcfjiuargen £ut I will buy this black hat. 
faufen. 

SScIdjeS tft bie fdjonfte SBlume ? Which is the prettiest flower ? 

Nad) meiner Sttetnung tft bie Dtofe bic fcfjonfte. 
In my opinion (according to my opinion) the rose is the most 
beautiful. 

SBeldjeio 06ft §tefjert @te Oor? Which fruit do you prefer? 
3d) gtefye ben 9lpfc( bor (164). I prefer the apple. 

3. SBa3 is often used in the sense of Id arum, why ? as in the 
following example from Schiller's Sungfrau Don Orleans, line 46 : 

„ma$ fatlt @udj em? 2Sa3 fd)e(tet Sfjr bie £od)ter?" 
What are you thinking of ? Why do you reproach your daugh- 
ter ? 

4. 9Ser followed by and] or tmmer is to be rendered by who- 
ever ; e. g., 

SKer cr and) fern mag, id) uriH t()n ntd)t etnlaffen. 
Whoever he may be, I will not admit him. 

%\\ roeldjem |jaufe ? Sn iDe(d)er ©trafje ? 3n toetd)en SBttdjern ? 
In which house ? In (or on) which street ? In which book ? 

5. 3Sa3 with the preposition ]ixx,for, is used in the sense of 
what kind of ; e.g., 

3Sa3 fur etn £)au3 tft ba3 ? What kind of a house is that ? 
2£a3 tft bag fur etn (Memetjr ? What kind of a weapon is that ? 
3Sa3 fur etnen SSagcn rjaben ©te gelauft ? What kind of a car- 
riage have you bought ? 

Translate and Write : 

1. Which man? Which lady? Which girl ? 2. Which pen 
will you buy? 3. Which apples are the best, these or those? 
(89, 1) In my opinion those are the best. 4. Which house will 



IOO NEW GERMAN COURSE 

he buy ? He will buy that large white house. 5. Which wine do 
you prefer ? I prefer Rhine-wine. 6. In which state ? In which 
city? In which village ? 7. Who is that gentleman ? It is Mr. 
Green. 8. Whose gloves are these? They are mine (87, 9). 
9. To whom will you give the pictures ? I will give them to the 
best children. 

91. Relative Pronouns (guriitfitJeifenbe giirtnorter). 

1. The relative pronouns are roe(cr)er or ber, who, which, that ; 
toer, who, and toa3, what. 

2. The relative roetdjer is declined like the interrogative toe(d)er 
(90, 1), except that it lacks the genitive, these forms being sup- 
plied by those of the demonstrative ber, not followed by a noun ; 
viz. : beffen, beren, beffert, plural berert (89, 2). 

3. Declension of the Relative toeldjer, who, which, that. 







Singular. 




Plural. 




2fta§f. 


gem. 


fteut. 


m. g. 9? 


Norn. 


toetrfjer 


toeldje 


toetcfjeS 


toelrf)e 


Gen. 


beffen 


beren 


beffen 


beren 


Dat. 


toeldjem 


toeldjer 


to element 


toekf)en 


Ace. 


toetdjen 


toeltf)e 


toelcf)e3 


toeldje 



4. £>er, bte f ba$ f as relative is declined like the demonstrative 
ber, when used without a substantive (89, 2). 

5. SSer and toa3 as relatives are declined the same as when 
used as interrogatives (90, 1). 

6. In the nominative and accusative toe(cf)er and ber are used 
according to the taste of the speaker, thus : 

2)er SCftcmn, toeltfjer (or ber) biefe£ !gau3 ge6cmt fjett, tfi fefyr reicr). 
The man who built this house is very rich. 

£)te 2ttlber, toeldje (or bte) ©te gefauft fyaben, finb ferjr fdjort. 
The pictures which you have bought are very beautiful. 



THE PRONOUN IOI 

Set) rjabe etrttge %Rim%m t berett SSert id) nicf)t lenne. 
I have several coins whose worth I do not know. 

2)a3 Jltnb, bem (or toetdjem) er ben ^3ret^ gegeben f)at, ift fetjr Hug. 

The child to whom he gave (has given) the prize is very intel- 
ligent. 

2)ie £)ame, toon tt>eld)er (or ber) ©ie ba3 |)au3 gefouft rjaben, ift 
fefyr rrjorjltdttg. 

The lady from whom you bought the house is very benevolent. 

7. SSer as a relative introduces a sentence, but tt)d3 may either 
commence the sentence or be placed after its antecedent. 

8. 2Ser as a relative is equivalent to the " correlative pronoun " 
consisting of the demonstrative berjemge (89, 9) with the relative 
toelcfjer; e. g., 

28er (or berjemge, toeldjer) m'cfjt fjoren ttrill, mu§ fiirjlen, or SBer 
nict)t fjoren totH, ber tnuf} fittjlen. He who will not hear must feel. 
3$a3 ttf) gefagt rjabe ift toar)r. What I have said is true. 

Set) f)ctbe Sfjnen alle^ ergafytt, toa3 er mir fagte. 

I have related to you everything that he told me. 

(£3 ift ntcrjt alle£ ©olb, tva$ glcmgt. Not all that shines is gold. 

Translate and Write: 

1. The man who wrote (has written) this letter is illiterate. 
2. The pupils who wrote these exercises are very diligent. 3. The 
houses which they have sold are very comfortable. 4. The child 
to whom I gave the money is very thankful. 5 . The scholar who 
won the prize is very happy. 6. I have a diamond the worth of 
which (89, 2) I do not know. 7. He who (89, 9) will not work 
must go hungry (suffer hunger). 8. What he said is not true. 
9. I have related to you all that they said to me. 

92. Indefinites (Pronouns, Numerals, etc.). 

The following words are, for the most part, too indefinite in 
character to be distinctly classified. They are therefore grouped 
together as indefinites without classification. 



102 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

1. yjl an occurs only in the nominative singular and is followed 
by a verb in the third person singular. It is translated one, they, 
or people ; also you in an indefinite sense, but it is often better 
rendered by a passive form : thus, man [agt, literally one says, but 
better they say, or it is said ; e. g., Man fagt, baj] bic ^sapancr 
eincn grofien Sieg gemonnen ijabm, It is said that the Japanese have 
won a great victory, ffllatt thus corresponds exactly to the French 
on (on dit, it is said), but for which the English lacks an exact 
equivalent. 

2. Sebcrmmtn, everybody, every one ; jemanb, somebody, some 
one, and niemanb, nobody, not any one, have no plural forms and 
no declension except that jcbermamt takes 3 and the others cs in 
the genitive, though jemanb and rtiemcmb may take also cm in the 
dative ; e. g., 

Scbermann liebt fctn 2>atcrlanb. Every one loves his native land. 
3ft jemanb fjier geraefen ? Dietn, cs mar niemanb ba. 
Has any one been here ? No, no one has been here.* 

(£r tremt niemanb (or memanbem). He trusts no one. 

3. Scber, -€, -e§, each, every, is used only in the singular ; e. g., 
Seber $oge( liedt fctn 9?eft. Every bird loves its nest. 

4. 9J?and)er, -e, -e3, many a ; plural, mand)e, many, is declined 
like biefer, but before an adjective it may omit the case ending ; 
e.g., 

„3)n (te6e<3 Sttnb, fomm, gel)' mit mir. 
%ax fefjone ©ptele fptei' id) mit bir ; 
Wand] (utnte 23inmen finb an bem Stranb. 
Petite Stutter rjal raand) gitlben ®emanb." 

(%n $ b e m „(£ r 1 t n t g"). 

„2Benn bod) manner s itrme ba§ i)atk,\va$ mand)er9xetd)eraegmirft.'' 
If only many a poor (man) had what many a rich (man) throws 
away I 



* While bet means literally there, it is often used in the sense of here, as in this example. 



THE PRONOUN IO3 

5. iSfimtitdjer, -e, -eS, plural, famtltdje, all, entire, complete ; e. g., 
3d) IjaOe 3dji((ers famtltdje SSerle, I have Schillers complete 

works. 

6. Sebtoeber, -e, -e£, and jcglirfjer, -e, -e3, ^wj, «k-^, are anti- 
quated and poetical forms of jcber and are without plural ; e. g., 

„3ebroeber Oct gilt gletdj, roo id) bem v £aupf)ht nidjt begegne." 

(© d) 1 11 e r 3 „3 u ng f r a it"). 

Every place is the same where I do not meet the Dauphin. 

7. $ein, feine, fein, ;/0, not any, is the negative of em and is 
declined like ein in the singular, and like biefer in the plural. It 
has also a pronominal form fctncr, -e, -e3, declined like btefer 
(32, 4) ; e. g., 

3d) fyabe feinen Q31eiftift unb feine geber. 
I have no lead-pencil and no pen. 

Reiner non btefen £naben fann beutfd) fpredjen. 
Neither of these boys can speak German. 

8. 2)er etne — ber anbere, the one — the other; e. g., 

S)er etne farm e£ eben fo gut tun, rate ber anbere. 
The one can do it just as well as the other. 

9. (Siner, etne, eine3, tf//^, .sw/^ 0;/*, is the pronominal form of 
ein; e. g., 

(£iner tft eben fo ftarf rate ber anbere. 
One is just as strong as the other. 

10. OTer, -e, -e3, all, has the strong adjective declension (like 
btefer) when it directly precedes the noun which it qualifies ; e. g., 

5CI(er 51nfang tft fctjraer. All beginning is difficult. 

9(11 followed by a possessive pronoun in the masculine or 
neuter singular is not declined; e. g., ail fein ©eib, all of his 
money, but in the feminine and in the plural it is declined ; e. g., 
atfe ntetne 33ttc£)er, all of my books. 



104 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

The English word all when it means the whole is rendered into 
German with gan§; e. g., all the world, bte gan§e SSelt; all day, 
ben garden Sag (accusative of time). 

W.t§> may mean everything or everybody ; e. g., 9ltte3 ift tier- 
(oren, everything is lost ; Wlc$ freut ftd), everybody is happy. 

9I[l in the plural is sometimes used in the sense of every ; as, 
die Sage, every day ; alk acf)t Sage, every week; alle brei SBocfjen, 
^w/j //z/r^ weeks. 

ii. SBetbe, &?//z, may be used either with or without the article ; 
e. g., betbe Slnaben, or bte betben Sfrtaben, both the boys ; id) rjabe 
ntetne betben 23M)er fcertoren, / have lost both my books. Neither 
of the two is translated fetrter uort betben. 

12. ©member, each other, one another ; e. g., 

£)tefe ©djtoeftern Ueben etnanber, These sisters love each other. 

13. (&t\va$, some, something, anything ; e. g., 

.Jpctben ©te erroa3 gelauft ? 9?etn, tcf) fjabe ntd)t3 gefauft. 
Did you buy anything ? No, I bought nothing. 

Some (etttfCtg) before a noun in the singular is usually not trans- 
lated ; e. g., Will you have some bread? SSollen @ie 23rot fjctben ? 

But before a noun in the plural, some is translated by eintge : 

Will you have some pens ? Gotten ©te eintge gebern t)ctben ? 

When, in reply to a question, some refers to a preceding noun 
in the singular it may be translated by tt)eld)er in the accusative 
(roelcfjen, tnelcfje, tt)elcrje3) ; e. g., 

Have you any wine ? Yes, I have some. 

betben ©te 3Sein ? Set, tcf) rjctbe toeldjen. 

Have you any bread ? Yes, I have some. 

§aben ©te $rot ? 3a, id) fjabe toelcfje3. 

14. ($ang, #//, whole, entire ; e. g., 

2)te gan^e 2$od)e, the whole week ; ba§ gan^e 3afjr, ^ m^/<? 
year. 



THE PRONOUN 105 

3d) bliefc ben ganjen £ag gu $aufe. I remained at home the 
whole day. 

15. @enug, enough; e. g., 

SSollert ©ie meljr (Mb ? 9cetn, id) battle, id) fjabe genug. 

Do you wish more money ? No, I thank you, I have enough. 

16. (Sttttge, some, a few, several; e. g., 

3d) fjabe etttige gute gebern uttb ettttge fd)(ed)te. 

I have several good pens and several bad (ones). 

17. !>U£erjrere, several, has the same meaning as eitttgc. 

18. 9}Mn\ more, is indeclinable. When used with allegation it 
follows the noun ; e. g., 

3d) f)a6e !eitt (Mb nterjr. I have no more money. 

19. 9?td)t3, nothing ; e. g., 

2Ba3 fjabett ©ie gefagt ? 3d) £)abe ntd)t3 gefagt. 
What did you say ? I did not say anything. 

20. ©ar, ^#/V*, z^/j, entirely, at all. It only adds force to other 
words ; e. g., ©ar ntdjt, »<tf at all; gar ntcr)t^, nothing at all. 

„Uttb bort tft e3 gar gn fd)on," and there it is extremely beau- 
tiful. — Heine. 

21. $tel, much; plural triele, many ; 28te trie!, how much f 2Ste 
tuele ? i/<?w w##^ f 

22. 2Bentg, little; (Sin toetttg,' # ##/*; SSentge,/^ in number. 

(S3 tnaren nnr ttjentge £eute antoefenb. There were only a few 
people present. 

23. £)te tnetften, /^ w^?^; e. g., 

(Smtge btefer Spfel ftnb retf nnb ntitrbe, aber bk metften finb unreif. 
Several of these apples are ripe and mellow, but the most of 
them are unripe. 



106 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

93. Adjectives after the Indefinites. 

There is no general rule for the ending of an adjective after these 
words, and in regard to several of them usage differs among German 
writers. In the nominative and accusative plural of (life, etnige, triele, 
iremge, and metjrere some authorities give to the adjective the strong 
or — e ending and others the weak or -en ending ; thus, a(fe Cjute 
33itd)er or aUe guten 33itd)er ; mele fdjcme 23tlber or rjtefe fdjonen Either. 
The balance of authority and good usage seems to be in favor of the 
weak or -en declension after ade and the strong or -e declension after 
the others, but in the gen. and dat. plur. the weak declension is pre- 
ferred with all these words. See Heyse's Deutsche Grammatik, p. 273, 
Remark 1. 

Other examples are : 

«g)ier firtb etittge gutc gebern. Here are several good pens. 

(53 tuctven mir luentge junge Petite, ct6er Dtcle alt(td)e Seutc antuefenb. 
There were only a few young people, but many elderly people 
present. 

(Sirtigc unb mefyrere finb glctdjBebctttenbe Shorter, 5. 23. 3d) lictbe 
etnige (obcr meljvcrc) none 33itcf)er. ©tinge and metjrere are words of 
the same meaning, etc. 

5(((e guten SBiidjer [tub nittjlid). All good books are useful. 

2)ic ^otttge uieler groftett Sanber. The kings of many great 
countries. 

Translate and Write: 

1. They say (it is said) that the Germans have won the vic- 
tory. 2. Who has been here ? No one has been here. 3. Every 
house and every garden. 4. Every child loves its mother. 
5. Many a poor (man) is happy and many a rich (man) is un- 
happy. 6. Have you Goethe's complete works ? Yes, I have 
them all. 7. This poor (man) (79, 1) has no friends and no 
money. 8. The one goes to-t he-right, the other to-the-left. 
9. John has lost all of his money. 10. I go to the city (tit 
bte <Stabt) every four weeks. 11. This poor boy has lost both 
of his books. 12. These brothers love each other. 13. Will 



THE ADVERB 107 

you have (some) butter ? No, I thank you (dat.). 14. Where 
were you yesterday ? I was in the city the whole day. 15. Have 
you enough money ? Yes, I thank you, I have enough. 16. What 
did he say? He did not say anything. These poor people have 
no money at all. 17. Several of these men are industrious, but 
the most of them are indolent. 18. All good books are useful. 
19. Anna has many beautiful pictures. 20. We have only a 
few new books. 21. The most of our books are old. 



The Adverb (Sa$ ltmftatrf>$tt»o?t)» 

94. The adverb in German is of the same nature as in English. 
It modifies a verb, an adjective or another adverb. It is often 
an uninflected adjective from which it is distinguished only by 
the context ; e. g., 

£)te SBIumc tft fdjon, The flower is beautiful. 

5(nna fdjrctbt )d)on, Anna writes beautifully. 

95. Comparison of Adverbs. 

1. The comparison of an adverb is usually that of an adjective 
used adverbially. Adverbs, as such, seldom admit of comparison. 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

jdjon, beautifully fdjoncr am fdjonftcn 

fdjnefl, rapidly fdmeller am fdjneHften 

mo()(, well beffcr am beften 

2. An adverb of time or of manner always follows the verb, 
although in English it may precede it ; e. g., 

Set) ftfjretbe oft an metnert SBntb'cr, I often write to my brother, 
3d) gefje gent tit bie (Seattle, I like to go to school. 

96. Adverbs from other Parts of Speech. 

Adverbs may be formed from other parts of speech in a variety 
of ways ; e. g., 



io8 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



morgert3, in the morning, 
tet(3, partly, 
rerf)t£>, to the right, 
ftudfoetfe, by pieces, 
gUMicfjertDeife, fortunately, 



from ber 9#orgen, the morning, 
from ber Xetl, the part, 
from ba§ 9ied)t, the right, 
from \)a$ @tuc£, the piece, 
from ba$ ©Ittcf, the fortune. 



97. Adjectives from Adverbs. 

i. Some adverbs of time and place are changed to adjectives 
by the suffix -ig, thus : 



From fyeute, to day, we have, 

From geftern, yesterday, we have, 
From bamate, at that time, we have, 
From fjter, here, we have, 

From je£t, now, we have, 

From balb, soon, we have, 



fyeittig, of to-day. 
gcftrtg, of yesterday, 
bctmctlig, of that time, 
fjtefig, of this place, 
jetjig, present, at present, 
balbtg, early, prompt. 



Examples (SBeif pie(e). 
§aben @ie bte fjettttge 3 e ^ung ? Have you to-day's newspaper ? 

3d) fjoffe cmf etne balbige Sfattuort. I hope for an immediate 
answer. 

2Bo fcmn id) bte geffrige 3 e ^ un 9 befommen ? 
Where can I obtain yesterday's newspaper ? 

2)te fjieftgen SBudjfjanbler terfaufen atterfet 23itd)er. 
The booksellers of this place sell all kinds of books. 

2. An exceptional form is the adjective tttorgettb, of to-morrow, 
from morgett, to-morrow ; e. g., 

SDtefe 5fmtonce tturb in ber morgettben 3 e ^ung erfdjetttett. 
This announcement will appear in the newspaper of to- 
morrow. 




THE ADVERB 



109 



98. A List of Adverbs. 
Adverbs in commom use and to be well learned are 



often, above, upstairs 

u n ten, below, downstairs 

loo ? where ? 

loann? when? 

rote ? how ? 

toarum ? why ? 

toeit, far 

bort, yonder 

jufammen, together 

jettf, now 

nun, now 

fcfjon, already 

nod), yet 

ttrieber, again 

bctlb, soon 

felten, seldom 

oft, often 

gutoetlen, sometimes 

getoflfynlidj, usually 

immer, always 

ftet3, continually 

nte, niemalJ, never 

je, jemal£, ever 

fritf), early 

fpat, late 

geroi^, certainly 

ttorjl, well 



rjeute, to-day 

morgen, to-morrow 

iibermorgen, day after to-morrow 

geftern, yesterday 

borgeftern, day before yesterday 

bielleicrjt, perhaps 

gent, willingly 

jet, yes 

netn, no 

nttf)t, not 

fefjr, very 

gu, to, too 

ritf)ttg, correct 

lanm, scarcely 

imgefarjr, about 

gerabe, straight, even 

betnarje, nearly 

nur, only 

fo, so, thus 

ebenfo, just as 

gteidjfaH§, likewise 

fetbft, even 

gang, whole, entire 

befonber§, especially 

perfonltcf), personally 

rjoffentltcf), as is to be hoped 

fdjneft, quickly, rapidly 



toorjer, whence 
tooln'n, whither 
tooftu, to which or what 



barcmf, upon that, thereupon 
barum, therefore 
ba§u, thereto, to it 



IIO NEW GERMAN COURSE 

toomit, with which or what fjerab, down (this way) 

luoritber, concerning what fjinab, down (that way) 

baim, thereby toodjeutltd), weekly 

bainit, with this, therewith utouat(id), monthly 

(jtnaitf, up crftenS, firstly 

f)tnetn r in, into $toeiten3, secondly 

uorunirtS, forwards t)bd)ftcn3, at the most 

ritdU)art3, backwards wenigftcnS, at the least 



Exercise (11 bung). 

1. 5(nna jdjreibt fdjon, SJtorie fdjrei&t fdjoner itnb §ebnrig fcrjretbt 
am jdjonftcn. 2. £)er (Sine geljt recf)t^, ber 5Inbere linfS. 3. 28ot)in 
getjen @ic? 3d) ge()c inbie Stabt. 4. 28aren @ie in Sparfe? 9£ein, 
mentals. 5. SGBomtt fdjreiben ©ie ? 3d) fdjretbe mit einer Jitttfeber. 

6. SSarum fjaben @ie nidjt gejctjrteben ? 2Bcil id) fetne Qctt ba^it t)atte. 

7. Sefcu Sic adc jufammen: 8. (M)eu @te oft tn3 Sweater ? 3d) 
gel)c jutoetten, after nidjt oft. 9. (Jjctjcn 8ie fjeute Sfbenb in3 ^on^ert ? 
3a, bieHeidjt 10. ©e()t 3()r ©ruber aud) ? 2)a3 toetjj id) nidjt. 
11. SBir lefen afte jufammen. 



Translate and Write : 



i. Who writes the most beautifully? Anna writes the most 
beautifully. 2. We go to-the-left, you go to-the-right. 3. When 
are you going home ? To-day or to-morrow. 4. With what does 
one write ? With a pen (dat.) or with a pencil. 5. Do you go* 
to the city (ace.) often ? No, not very often. 6. Why did you 
not learn the lesson ? Because I was ill. 7. Read this page all 
together. 8. How often do you go to the theater (ace.) ? I go 
very seldom. 9. Are your friends going this evening ? That I 
do not know. 






*£tm (do) is not an auxiliary in German. Do you go? is translated: ©cfyen ©ie? 
{go you ?) 






THE PREPOSITION 



I II 



The Preposition (&a3 %$evf)iiltm$tQOtt). 

99. The preposition in German is of the same nature as in 
English. Prepositions govern the genitive, the dative or the 
accusative. 

lOO. Prepositions with the Genitive. 



ttKitjrenb, during : 

2£til)renb bey 2Sinter3, 
roegen, on account of: 

SSegett beS Diegeng, 
ftatt, an)tatt, instead of : 

©tatt feine^ alten §ute§, 
umerrjalb, inside of, within : 

Snnei1)a(6 ber neuen geftung, 
aufeerrjatti, outside, without : 

s 3(atJ3erlialb ber gro^en ©tabt, 
o6erf)a(6, above: 

Cberrjalb ber $ritcre, 

itnterfjalb, below : 
Unterfja(6 be3 2)orfe3, 

biesjett, on this side of: 

Ste^ett be3 gluffeS, 
jeitfett, on the other side, beyond: 

Senfett beg 23erge£, 



During the winter. 

On account of the rain. 

Instead of his old hat. 

Inside of the new fortifications. 

Outside of the large city. 

Above the bridge (e. i. higher 
up the stream). 

Below the village (i. e. further 
down the stream, hill, etc). 

On this side of the river. 



On the other side of the 
' mountain, 
mtttelft, tiermuMft, tiermoge, by means of: 

SSermttteift ernes' 9ftefjere\ By means of a knife, 

fdngs, alongside of: 

StingS be3 Q3acfjes\ Alongside of the brook. 

troi3, in spite of: 

%ro| beg fel)r fatten 2$etrers\ In spite of the very cold 

weather. 



112 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



gnfolge, in accordance with: 
^ufolge SrjreS ©efep, 

ttnroett (imfern), not far from : 

Unmeit be<5 2Balbe3, 
ungeacrjtet, notwithstanding : 

Ungeadjtet btefeg ©efetjeS (or 
btefe3 ©efe£e<§ ungeatf)tet), 
urn . . .rottlen, for the sake of: 

Urn feitte^ ©ofynes roillen, 



In accordance with your com- 
mand. 

Not far from the forest. 

Notwithstanding this law. 

For the sake of his son. 



Remark. — £ang£, trotj and gufolge may also govern the dative ; 
e. g., £ctng3 be3 93ad)e§ or tang3 bem £ktrf)e; tro£ be3 fatten 2Better3 
or trofc bem fallen ^Better. 

Prepositions with the genitive less used are fraft, by virtue of; 
laut, according to, and fjalfrer, on account of; e. g., fraft fetner $lu- 
torttat, by virtue of his authority ; laut btefer ©djrift, according to 
this document ; fetner ©efunbtjett rjalder, on account of his health. 



101. Prepositions with the Dative 

au$, out of: 

9lu3 bem £au|e, 
bet, by, at the house of: 

S5et metnem $ater, 
mit, with : 

SDut metnen alien grennben, 
nad|, to, after: 

2£tr gefjen nadfj Sonbon, 

@3 tft em $tertel nadj bret, 
fett, since: 

(Sett brei SSocfjen, 
&on, of from, by: 

liefer £tfdj tft Don £ofer 

3d) gerje §u metnem SBrnber, • 



Out of the house. 

At my father's house. 

With my old friends. 

We are going to London. 
It is a quarter after three. 

Since (or for) three weeks. 

This table is of (made of) wood. 



§err SBrann tft ntcfjt $u |>anfe, 



I am going to my brother's 

(house). 
Mr. Brown is not at home. 




THE PREPOSITION 



113 



btnnen, within : 

SBtmten fed)^ Wlonatm, 
nebft, faint, together with : 

Dcebft or famt fetner gamtlie, 
mid)ft, next to : 

3d) motme nadjft ber fttrdje, 
QCindft, according to : 

Sfyrem SBunftfje gemaft Ijabe 
icrj bie SSaren nerfauft, 
gegenitber, opposite to: 

SBtr luormen ber &trd)e gegen* 
fiber fargegeniiber ber Slirdje). 
entgegett, against: 

Stem Q3efc()ie feine^ SSater^ 
entgegen ging er in bie &tabt 
^UlDlber, against : 
SLtfetnem SSunfcrje gimriber ging 
fie auf ben ©all, 



Within six months. 

Together with his family. 

I live next to the church. 

According to your wish I have 
sold the goods (wares). 

We live opposite the church. 



Against the command of his 
father he went to the city. 

Against my wish she went to 
the ball. 



Exercise (Ubuttg). 

1. 9Saf)renb be3 2$inter3 roofmen roir in ber ©tabt. 2. <Btatt 
feme* SdjtrmeS narjm er ben meinigen. 3. 3Sir roofmen au&errjalb 
ber etabt. 4. SDas §aus ftebjt jenfeit be* glnffe*. 5. Zxo§ be* fallen 
28etter3 ging er an*. 6. Um feme* 8of)ne* mitten raurbe er fefjr 
fletBig. 7. 2Str gefjen auS bem §aufe. 8. 3d) roorme bei meinem 
Cnfel. 9. SSattn gefjen Sie nad) Smtbmt? Set) gebenfe morgen 
l)in ( 5itgel)en. 10. 3d) Ijabe ifm feit brct SSodjett rtictjt geferjen. 11. 3ft 
btefer £tfdj Don ^0(5 ober mm Gstfen ? @r tft non «<pol§. 12. SSorjin 
gerjen Sie? 3d) gebje 511 meinem 'iBruber. 13. 3So rooljnen ©te? 
3d) roorjne in ber 2)ietrid)ftra^e ber ®trcrje gegenitber. 14. 2Srj tft 3f)r 
$ater ? (It tft nad) §anfe gegangen. 

Translate and Write : 
With the genitive : 

1 . During the summer we live in the country (auf bem £anbe). 
2. Instead of his book he took Anna's. 3. We live (roolmen) 



ii4 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



within the fortifications. 4. The barn stands on this side of the 
garden. 5. In spite of the rain he went home. 6. For the sake 
of their father they became very industrious. 

With the dative : 

7. They are going (they go) out of the garden. 8. We live 
with (at the house of) our brother. 9. When are you going to 
St. Louis ? I intend to go there next week. 10. When did you 
see (when have you seen) your brothers ? I have not seen them 
for three months. 1 1 . Is this house of wood or of stone ? It is 
of stone. 12. Where are they going? They are going home. 

13. Where do they live? They live in West street opposite the 
school-house. 

102. Prepositions with the Accusative. 

burd), through: 

(£r cjefyt burd) ben (Garten, 
\ux t for: 

3ft biefeS 93nd) fitr mid) ? 
gegen, against: 

(Sr raarf ben 2SaH gegen ba$ 
§au£, 
afyne, without: 

(£r fam ofjne fetnen «!put r 
urn, around, about, at: 

<Sie faufen urn ben Xtfd) 
fjerum, 



He is going through the garden. 

Is this book for me ? 

He threw the ball against the 
house. 

He came without his hat. 

They are running around the 
table. 



Urn rate triel Uf)r fdngt bie At what time does the school 
(Sdjule an ? Urn neun ltf)r, begin ? At nine o'clock, 

ttriber, against: 

SStber ben SStllen feme3 $ater£, Against the will of his father. 

The words fyinctuf, up ; lu'nctb, down ; enticing, along, which are 
ordinarily adverbs, are regarded as prepositions when employed 
in connection with a noun in the accusative and an intransitive 
verb. They are placed after the noun which they govern ; e. g., 



THE PREPOSITION 115 

3d) get)e bie %xeppt f)tttauf, I go up-stairs. 

(Sr ge^t bie £reppe f)tnab, He goes down-stairs, 

©te Qingert ba3 Ufer beg @ee3 They went along the shore of 
entlang, the lake. 

103. Prepositions with the Dative or Accusative. 

The following prepositions take the dative in answer to the 
question too (w/iere), and the accusative in answer to the question 
roorjin {whither), that is, they take the dative when the location 
of an object is in question and the accusative when direction 
towards some place is expressed. 

an, at, to, on: 

3d) gefye an bie Xafet, I am going to the blackboard. 

3d) ftetje an ber £afel, I am standing at {or by) the 

blackboard, 
in, in, into: 

SBtr a,ef)en in ba$ $au§, We are going into the house. 

2Bir (tnb in bem £)aufe, We are in the house. 
auf f on, upon: 

3d) lege ba3 $ud) an] ba$ $ult, I lay the book on the desk. 

2)a3 2htd) (tegt auf bem ^utte, The book lies on the desk. 
ne6en f by the side of: 

3d) ftelle ben €>tuf)l neben ben I place the chair by the side of 

Sifdj, the table. 

(£r ftefjt neben bem £ifdje, It stands by the side of the 

table, 

fjtnter, behind: , 

(£r gerjt Winter ben Kif($, He goes behind the table. 

(£r ftef)t tjinter bem £ifdje, He stands behind the table. 
oor, before: 

3d) ftelle ben @tuf)l t>or ba$ I place the chair before the 

genfter, window. 

$)er <Sturjl ftef)t oor bem gen- The chair stands before the 
fter, window. 



Il6 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

liber, over: 

3d) rj&ttge ba$ 23ilb iiber bie I hang the picture over the 

Xitr, door. 

2)ct3 93 tlb Ijangt iiber ber Xi'tr, The picture hangs over the 

door, 
urttcr, wider: 

2)er §unb friecfjt unter ben The dog creeps under the 

Sttfcfj, table. 

(£r liegt unter bem Stifcfje, He lies under the table, 
^ttnfitjen, between: 

3d) lege ben 231etfttft 5tt)ifd)en I lay the lead-pencil between 

ba§ 33uct) nnb bie geber, the book and the pen. 

2)er 231etftift liegt §tutfd)en bem The pencil lies between the 

23ud)e nnb ber geber, book and the pen. 

This use of the dative and accusative corresponds to the 
similar use of the ablative and accusative in Latin, where motion 
towards a place is put in the accusative and location in a place is 
put in the ablative. 

Exercise (Ubttng). 

1. SSotjin geljeu bie Sftnber ? <8te gerjen buret) ben (Garten. 2. giir 
raen ftnb btefe fdjonen 33dber ? ©te finb fiir meine Heine ©crjtuefter. 

3. SSarum laufen bie ®mber urn ben £ifd) t)erum ? ©ie fpielen nur. 

4. 2Bo ift |)etnrtd)? (£r ging eben bie Xreppe tjtnauf. 5. 28ofjm 
get)e id) ? ©te gerjen an ba§ genfter. 6. 28o t)drtgt ba3 $ttb ? (£3 
tjtingt §rt)ifct)en ben genftern. 7. 28ot)in lege id) ben fletnen Spiegel ? 
©te legen ifyn auf ben £tfd). 8. SSo ift bie ^a^e ? ©te ift eben unter 
ba3 S3ett gefrodjen. 

Translate and Write: 
With the accusative : 

I. The children are going through the house. 2. For whom 
are these new books ? They are for you. 3. John came without 
his books. 4. The dogs are running (the dogs run) around the 
house. 5. He went home against (nriber) the will of his mother. 




THE PREPOSITION 117 

6. We are going up-stairs, but you are going down-stairs. 

7. They are going along the bank of the river. 

With the dative and accusative : 

8. I am going (I go) to the window ; I am standing at the 
window. 9. They are going into the garden ; they are in 
the garden. 10. I lay the slate on the table; the slate lies 
on the table. 1 1 . The teacher goes behind the desk ; he stands 
behind the desk. 12. I hang the picture over the piano ; it hangs 
over the piano. 1 3. The cat crawls under the sofa ; she lies 
under the sofa. 14. I hang the wall-map between the window 
and the door ; it hangs between the window and the door. 

104. Remarks on the Prepositions. 

1. 28egen, ungeacfytet and gnfolge may precede or follow the 
noun, but when gufolge follows the noun it is put in the dative, 
thus : gnfolge Sfyreg Q3efef)(i> or Sfyrem 23efd)te §ufolge f according to 
your command. 

2. The noun governed by um — tDtHen always stands between 
these two words. 

3. ©egeniiber may follow or precede its object ; entgegen always 
follows it. 

4. Motion to a place (as to a city or country) is indicated by 
natf), motion to the dwelling of some person by 511, and motion 
towards an object by an. 

Stf) gef)e nacf) SBofton, I am going to Boston. 

3d) gefje gu metnem Dnfel, lam goingto my uncle's (house). 

3cf) gefye an ba§ genfter, I go (or am going) to the 

window. 

5. But to go home is nacf) §anfe gefjen, and at home is ^n §anfe. 
Set) gefje nacf) §anfe, I am going home. 

3ft «£>err SBraun §u §aufe ? Is Mr. Braun at home ? 



Il8 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

6. In the passive voice the English preposition by is translated 
bon, thus : 

2)er gute @d)u(er ift t>on fetnem Sefyrer gelobt roorben (133). 
The good scholar has been praised by his teacher. 

7. Um is often used when some loss is referred to, thus : 

$et btefem 23rcmbe jtnb bret banner um3 Seben gefommen. 
At this fire three men lost their lives. 

8. Um has the sense of for when politely asking for some- 
thing, especially at the table, thus : 

3d) bttte um eine %a\\t £f)ee. Please give me (I ask for) a cup 
of tea. 

105. Contraction of Prepositions with the Definite Article. 

The following contractions are of very common occurrence : 
kim bet bem, at the 
town t)on bem, from the 
511m git bem, to the 
jur 5U ber, to the 
burd)3 burd) ba$, through the 
fitrS fur ba$, for the 
box$ t)or bctS, before the 

Examples (SBeif p te te). 

SBetm (Sintreten in ba$ |jcmg, On entering the house. 

$om SSaffer Ijerauf, Up from the water. 

3d) fagte §um $ater, I said to the father. 

SSir ftnb im ghrnner, We are in the room. 

(£r roctrf ba$ papier in3 geuer, He threw the paper into the 

fire. 

106. Omission of the Preposition. 

Between two nouns in apposition the preposition is not used ; 
e. g., bie &tabt Berlin, the city of Berlin ; em %\o& Staffer, a glass 



itberS 


itber ba$, 


over the 


itm£ 


um ba$ f 


around the 


am 


an bem, 


at the 


an§ 


an ba$, 


to the 


auf£ 


auf ba$, 


on the 


im 


in bem, 


in the 


in3 


in ba£, 


in the 






THE PREPOSITION 



II 9 



of water ; bret SD^eter Xud), three meters of cloth; but when the 
second noun is qualified the preposition t)Ott is used ; e. g., brct 
Stfeter Don btefem fcfjtoarjen Zvufye, three meters of this black cloth. 

Translate and Write : 

1. For the sake of (100) his child he went home. 2. Where 
has your father gone ? He has gone to Mr. Wolf's. 3. Go to 
the blackboard (103) and write a German sentence. 4. In (bet) 
this shipwreck five hundred people lost their lives. 5 . On enter- 
ing he spoke to me. 6. We are in the garden. 7. The naughty 
boy threw the new book into the water. 8. Please give me a 
glass of milk. 



107. Idiomatic Phrases with Prepositions. 

Observe the following idiomatic expressions in common use : 



2£of)in gefyen ©ie ? 

3d) gefye cmf bie *poft, 

2Btr gefjen auf bert SDtarft, 

SSie fjetfet bag auf beutfcf) ? 

$3ir tDotjnetj gern auf bem £anbe, 

2ln toem tftbic SReifye? 

©ie ift on mir. 

3d) gel)c an bie £afe(. 

3d) ftefje an ber £afel. 

SBarum ge()ft bu in bie @d)ule ? 

3d) gefye nm $u lernen. 

SSir gefjenmorgen auf3 £anb, 

(£r ftubierte auf ber Umoerfitat 

3ena f 
SSoran ftarb biefer %Ram ? 
(£r ftarfc an ber ©d)tt>mbfud)t — 

an ber Cholera — an einem 

giefcer, 



Where are you going ? 

I am going to the post-office. 

We are going to the market. 

How is that in German ? 

We like to live in the country. 

Whose turn is it ? 

It is mine (my turn). 

I go to the blackboard. 

I stand by the blackboard. 

Why do you go to school ? 

I go in order to learn. 

We are going to the country 

to-morrow. 
He studied at the university of 

Jena. 
Of what did this man die ? 
He died of consumption — of 

cholera — of a fever. 



120 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



%8a$ macljert ©ie ha ? 

3d) fcfjreibe eine ^oftfarte an 

meiuen ©ruber, 
S3itte f geben ©ie mir fur fiinf 

Wlaxt ©rot, 
3ft §err Proton gu fprecfjcu ? 
9tein, tr ift nadj $aufe gegangen, 
©eit tuamt fjaben ©ic JyrtU nictjt 

gefefyen ? 
Set) fjabe ifjn Dor brei SBodjen 

gefefjen, 
2Bir fafyren mtt ber 23arjn, 
3d) fjabe fetn ©e(b bet mir, 
3d) bitte urn bte tartoffeln, 

Urn roieoiet Ufjr fcingt bte ©djtde 

an (164) ? 
©ie fcingt urn neun Ufjr an, 
3d) gefje f)eute Hbenb gu meinem 

©ruber, 
Victoria toar bte Slonigin Don 

(Snglcmb, 
28aft)ington ftarb tm filter oon 

67 Safjrert, 
©ein Monument ift bon ©tein, unb 

e£ ift 555 gufe l)od), 
2Seld)er bon biefen groei SRanneru 

ift ber Cltere ? §err 9)?. ift ber 

TOere, 
gitrcfjteft bu bid) Dor biefem 

9Jfanne ? 3a, id) fitrcfjte mid) 

fefjr oor ifjm (159), 
©eben ©ie ju guf$ ober retten 

©ie? ®eine3 Don betben, id) 

fatjre, 



What are you doing there ? 
I am writing a postal card to 

my brother. 
Please give me five marks' worth 

of bread. 
Is Mr. Brown to be seen ? 
No, he has gone home. 
When did you last see Fritz ? 

I saw him three weeks ago. 

We go by railroad. 
I have no money with me. 
Please pass (I ask for) the po- 
tatoes. 
At what time does the school 

begin ? 
It begins at nine o'clock. 
I am going to my brother's 

this evening. 
Victoria was the queen of 

England. 
Washington died at the age of 

67 years. 
His monument is of stone and 

is 555 feet high. 
Which of these two men is the 

older ? Mr. M. is the older. 

Are you afraid of this man ? 

Yes, I am much afraid of 

him. 
Are you going on foot or on 

horse-back ? Neither of the 

two, I shall go in a carriage. 






THE CONJUNCTION 121 

2>te Suft reid) gu merben f)ctt The desire to become rich has 

mcmd)en ung (Mitel) gemctcfjt, made many a one unhappy. 

9iei|ert @ie bet £ag ober bet 9?acfjt ? Will you travel by day or by 

3d) reife bet Xctg, night ? I am going by day. 

3d) ntod)te ©ie um 9^at fragen, I should like to ask your ad- 
vice. 

3d) mbd)te etnen .Split loitfen, I should like to buy a hat. 

(Soften 3te ait bte Xafel itnb Go to the blackboard and write 

jdjretbcn ©tc etnen bentjd)en a German sentence. 

Translate and Write : 

i. Where are you going ? I am going to market. 2. What is 
" type-writer " in German ? It is ,,®d)retbma)d)tne.'' 3. Do you 
like to go to school ? Yes, I like very much to go. 4. Are 
you fond of pears ? Yes, I am very fond of them. 5. Are you 
fond of w 7 ine ? No, I am not fond of it. 6. Where are you going 
to-morrow ? I am going to the country. 7. What are you doing ? 
I am writing a letter to my father. 8. Please give me ten marks' 
worth of cheese. For how much ? For ten marks. 9. Please 
pass the bread. 1 o. Where are you going this evening ? I am 
going to my uncle's. 1 1. Are you afraid of this dog ? No, I am 
not afraid of him. 1 2 . What will you buy ? I should like to 
buy a pair of gloves. 

The Conjunction (Sa3 £$tn&ett>o*t)* 

108. The conjunctions are classed as : 

1. General connectives (betorbnenbe S3tnberaorter). 

2. Adverbial conjunctions (abnerbtale 23tnbett)brter). 

3. Subordinating conjunctions (unterorbnenbe Stnbetnorter). 

109. General Connectives. 

1 . The general connectives are : 

nnb, and aber, but, however 

ober, or atletn, but, yet 

benn f for, since fonbern, but 



122 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2. These conjunctions have no influence on the order of the 
words in the sentence. They simply link words or prepositions 
together ; e. g., 

3d) farm lefen unb fcrjretben, I can read and write. 

$ctrl farm lefen, aber er farm rticfyt Charles can read, but he cannot 

fdjreiben, write. 

3d) farm rticrjt an^gerjen, benn e3 I cannot go out, for it rains. 

regnet, 

3. 9(ber is sometimes placed after the subject, or even after the 
predicate, and is then best translated however. 

3d) gelje in bie ©tabt, id) roift aber baib ^uriidferjren. 
I am going to the city, I will, however, soon return. 

4. ©onbern is used instead of after after a negative phrase 
which it contradicts ; e. g., 

3d) rottl md)t bjingefjen, fonbern ju «£)aufe bletben. 
I will not go there, but remain at home. 

110. Adverbial Conjunctions. 

1. There are about forty adverbial conjunctions, some of the 
commonest of which are • 

alfo, therefore, so ferner, further 

and), also, too nidjt nur — fonbern and), not 

ba, bann, then, when only — but also 

bagegen, on the contrary bod), jebod), however, yet 

barum, be3f)alb, therefore iibrigeng, moreover 

md)t£beftorDemger, nevertheless roeber — nod), neither — nor 

enbltd), at last, finally groar, indeed, it is true 

erft, guerft, at first entroeber — ober, either — or 

nadjfjer, afterwards au^erbem, besides 

uberbie3, besides balb — balb, now — now 

2. An adverbial conjunction when placed at the beginning of 
a phrase causes the personal verb to be placed before the 
subject : 





THE CONJUNCTION 123 

(S3 regnet, be3t)a(b mug id) §u §aufe 61ei6en (116). 
It rains, therefore I must remain at home. 

111. Subordinating Conjunctions. 

1. There are about thirty subordinating conjunctions of which 
the following are the commonest : 

Ctl3, when, as ob, whether, if 

bettor, efye, before obgleid), although 

bi3, until fett, feitbem, since 

ba, as, since fo oft, whenever 

bamtt, in order that fobalb, as soon as 

baf$, that folange, as long as 

fctHg, in case that ungeadjtet, notwithstanding 

inbem, while, as toeil, because 

nad)bem, after toenn, if, when 

2. A subordinating conjunction introduces a dependent clause 
at the end of which stands the personal verb (the transposed 
order (117). 

$IU id) in ber <5tabt toofynte, gtng id) oft m£ Sweater. 
When I lived in the city I went often to the theater. 

©obalb id) ^urudfam, fdjrieb id) an metnen $ruber. 
As soon as I returned I wrote to my brother. 

(§r fdjrteb mir, bag er tjeute anlommen ttmrbe. 
He wrote me that he would arrive to-day. 

$>a id) fein (Mb fyahe, fo mufe id) gu §aufe bfetben. 
As I have no money I must remain at home. 

2Sarum fdjreiben ©ie nicr)t ? SSeil id) feme geber fjabe. 
Why do you not write ? Because I have no pen. 

112. Use of menu, uwmt and aU. 

A careful distinction must be made between these three words. 
All mean when. 



124 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

i. 28emt, when, if, whenever, begins a conditional clause ; e. g., 

SBcnn id) Qeit ijabz, will id) ba§ 23nd) lefen. 
When I have time I will read the book. 

2. SBamt, when, is generally interrogative ; e.g., 
2$amt lucrbcn <3ic ftiiriicffommen ? When will you return . 

3. 2U3, when, as, relates to a single event in past time ; e. g., 

2((3 id) nad) §aufe fain, begeguete id) SOrem SBruber. 
As I was coming home I met your brother. 

9HS id) Jung mar, ging id) regelmaftig in bie ©d)ule. 
When I was young I went regularly to school. 



The Interjection ($a$ $tu$vuftmQ§tvott). 

113. The interjections are used as in English to express 
sudden emotions. Some of the commonest are : 

?(d) ! ah ! alas ! 3ud)f)e ! hurrah ! 

furred) ! hurrah ! D toefy ! O dear ! alas ! 

§cil ! hail ! Spfut ! fie ! fudge ! 

fyolla ! hallo ! ^o§ taufenb ! zounds ! 

Exercise (ii b u n g). 

1. Warn fyat etn neueg $nd) nnb 2(nna etnen neuen §ut. 2. 3)er 
Ketne 9St(f)elm lann gefjen, a6er er lann tridjt lefen. 3. SDiefe Seute 
finb nid)t reid), fonbern arm. 4. Qt$ regnet fefjr ftarf, begfyalb mnfc 
idj (116) etnen Sftegenfdjtrm borgen. 5. s 2t(3 rair ^uriidfamen, begeg= 
neten tnir nnfern Qsltern. 6. 2Btr fd)rteben tljnen, baf$ fair morgen 
friil) anfommen nmrben. 7. 3Benn ic§ etne geber I)dtte (117), toiirbe 
id) etnen SBrief fd)reiben. 8. SSann toerben ©te biefe SRedjnung 
beaten ? 9. TO id) in ber ©tabt toofynte, ging id) oft tn3 Sweater. 

Translate and Write : 

1. I have the old book and you have the new one. 2. The 
weather is cold outside, but this room is warm. 3. This card is 



THE SENTENCE 1 25 

not black but white. 4. The boy is ill, therefore he cannot 
(116) write his lesson. 5. You must either work or pay. 6. Do 
you think that he will arrive to-day ? 7. If we were rich we 
would build a new house. 8. When will you come ? To-morrow 
or the day after to-morrow. 9. When I was in Washington I 
saw the president. 10. Hurrah ! We have won the victory. 



Construction of Sentences (SSottfoIge)* 

114. In the construction of the German sentence there are 
three principal orders of arrangement, each depending upon the 
position of the personal or finite verb and called respectively the 
Normal, the Inverted and the Transposed order, of which the 
following are examples : 

115. The Normal or Regular Order ($egelmc£tgc SBortfolge). 

In this order the personal verb follows the subject ; e. g., 

3d) Ijabe rjettte etnen 53rief gefcfjrteben. 
I have written a letter to-day. 

«g)einrtcr) tmrb ntorgen in bte <8tabt gefjen. 
Henry will go to the city to morrow. 

116. The Inverted Order (SBerattberte SBortfofge. — Stttoerfton). 

In this order the personal verb stands before the subject. 
This order occurs when the subject is preceded by some modifier 
of the verb, often an adverb or 'adverbial phrase, or it may be a 
dependent clause ; e. g., 

§eute i)abt id) etnen 2ktef gejrfjrteben. 
To-day I wrote a letter. 

Stftorgen nrirb «§eutrid) in bte ©tctbt gefjen. 
To-morrow Henry will go to the city. 

$or bret SBodjen toar id) in Berlin. 
Three weeks ago I was in Berlin. 



126 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2Benn tdj (Mb genug tjatte, toiirbe td) btefe3 £>au3 faufen. 
If I had money enough I would buy this house. 

117. The Transposed Order (SBortfotgc be3 9te&ettfa<?e3). 

i. In this order the personal verb stands at the end of a 
dependent clause which is introduced by a relative pronoun (or 
some similar relative word) or by a subordinating conduction; e.g., 

Sfe ijt bcr 23rtcf, toeltfjert (#r ben) id) tjeute gejdjrteben fyabt. 
This is the letter that I wrote to-day. 

3d) Ijoffe, ba$ £>etnrid) morgen in bte @tabt gefyen ttnrb* 
I hope that Henry will go to the city to-morrow. 

3d) toeift md)t f ob fie e3 tun liJuncn. 

I do not know whether they can do it. 

2. Observe in the above examples that in the compound tenses 
the complement of the auxiliary, whether a past participle or an 
infinitive, stands immediately before the auxiliary. The German 
constructs his sentences thus : 

I have written. 

I have a letter written. 

To-day have I a letter written. 

To-morrow will I a letter write. 

This is the letter, which I yesterday written have. 

If I a pen had, would I a letter write. 

3. Let the pupil now translate and commit to memory these 
examples ; thus : 3d) §Q&z gefd)rteben, etc. 

118. General Rules. 

1. The above are the leading principles of construction. For 
the arrangement of the minor elements of the sentence there are 
numerous rules, too many and with too many exceptions to be 
borne in mind. As in every language, they will be acquired 
mainly by practice. The following points, however, should be 
mastered at the outset, as they are essential to correct speaking. 






THE SENTENCE 



J27 



2. Outline of the Normal Order. 

The main outline of the normal order is : 

i st. The subject. 

2d. The personal verb. 

3d. The various modifiers of the verb, as adverb, object, etc. 

4th. The non-personal part of the verb, namely prefix, par- 
ticiple or infinitive, so far as they exist in the sentence, and if 
more than one be found they will stand in the order here named. 



3. Examples of the Normal Order : 

(a) SUBJECT VERB ADVERB OBJECT PAST PART. 



Set) 
I 

(b) SUBJECT 

We 

(c) SUBJECT 

He 



v)abt 
have 



fyoffen 
hope 

VERB 

gef)t 
goes 



fyeate 
to-day 

ADV. TIME 

morgett 
to-morrow 



ein netted $ud) 
a new book 

ADV. PLACE 

in bte (BtaU 
to the city 



gefauft 
bought 

INFINITIVE 

3U gefjen 
to go 



(d) SUBJECT VERB 



ADVERBIAL PHRASE PREFIX 

jeben SDforgett um 10 \lv)x cms 

every morning at 10 o'clock out 

OBJECT 



PAST. PART. 


INFINITIVE 


gefauft 
bought 


fjctuen 
have 



^>d) tuiirbe ba$ £)au3 

I would 'the house 



4. The order of the inverted and of the transposed sentence 
is the same as the normal order except for the place of the 
personal verb. 

Translate and Write.: 

1. I have a new book. 2. Who wrote (has written) this let- 
ter ? I wrote it myself. 3. Who will go to the city to-day? I 
will not go, but John (will go). 4. We wrote (have written) three 
letters yesterday. 5 . To-morrow we shall write many letters. 
6. Two years ago we were in Paris. 7. If I had much money I 
would buy this house and garden. 8. This is the book which I 



128 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

bought (have bought) yesterday in Boston. 9. Will Henry go 
to the city to-morrow ? No, he will not go. 10. I do not know 
whether we can buy the house (or not). 11. We have bought 
three new books to-day. 12. We hope to go home soon. 13. At 
what time do you go out every morning (beg S0iorgen3) ? I go 
out at eight o'clock. 

5. The following rules of construction apply alike to all the 
three orders. 

a. A general connective does not influence the construction 
in any way ; e. g., 

©3 regnet, aber id) muft natf) §aufe gefyen. 
It rains, but I must go home. 

Set) femn bteje U()r nidjt faufen, bernt id) fjabe fan ©etb bet mir. 
I cannot buy this watch, for I have no money with me. 

b. When a verb has two objects, a person and a thing, the 
person stands first ; e. g., 

£)er SBater t)at feiucm So^nc etne gotbene llfjr gegeben. 
The father has given his son a gold watch. 

2Btflft bit mir jeijn Wlaxt letfjen ? Will you lend me ten marks ? 

c. When there are two personal pronouns as objects of a verb 
the one in the accusative generally stands first ; e. g., 

3d) rotft fie Sftnen tettjen. I will lend them to you. 

d. But if for the personal pronoun in the accusative is sub- 
stituted the demonstrative berfelGe (89, i),the dative will precede 
the accusative object ; e. g., 

3d) rotfl %\ew\ \)Q&YShz letfjen. I will lend it (the same) to you. 

e. An object with a preposition follows a simple object ; e.g., 

(St l)at btefen 23rtef an mid) gefd)rie6en. 
He wrote (has written) this letter to me. 

f. An adverb of time precedes one of place ; e. g., 

3d) roar bortge 2$od)e in ber &tabt I was in the city last week. 



THE SENTENCE 1 29 

g. Imperative and interrogative sentences are arranged in the 
inverted order ; e. g., 

®el)en Ste fort ! Go away ! 

28cmn ftmtmctt Sie %uxM ? When will you return ? 

A. The negation tttdjt follows a direct object, but precedes an 
object governed by a preposition. 

3d) fyabt bm Wlaxrn nicr)t gefefyen. I have not seen the man. 
3d) fpredje ntdjt uon btefem SJccmne. 
I do not speak of this man. 

i. When, in a dependent clause, two infinitives stand together, 
the auxiliary is placed immediately before them and the governing 
infinitive last ; e. g., 

SKerben fie e3 tun fonnen ? Will they be able to do it ? 

Dfotn, tdj gtaube ntdjt, bctfj fie eg toerben tun fonnen. 
No, I do not believe that they will be able to do it. 

J. At the end of a dependent clause the auxiliary is often 
omitted, especially in a literary style ; e. g., 

9todjbem er ba§ gefcrgt (rjatte), ging er trotu'g fort. 
After he had said that he went angrily away. 

„3f)r SKtefen, bte id) toafferte ! tf)r SBftume, 
3)te id) gepf langet (fyofot), griinet frotjttcfj fort." — (3d) tiler. 

" You meadows that I have watered, you trees that I have 
planted, preserve your joyous green." 

Translate and Write: 

1 . Does it rain ? Yes, it rains, but we must go to the city to- 
day. 2. What has your brother given you ? He has given me 
a hundred marks. 3. Will you give me this pen ? Yes, I will 
give it to you. 4. I shall write a letter to him. 5. When were 
you in the city ? We were in the city to-day. 6. When 
will your friends return ? That I do not know. 7. Have you 



I30 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

seen your brother to-day ? No, I have not seen him. 8. Do you 
believe that he will be able to do the work ? No, I do not 
believe that he will be able to do it. 9. Having said that, she 
went hastily away. 



The Verb ($<*3 ^ettttiotrt). 

119. Verbs are classified as transitive, and intransitive, but 
only verbs that take an object in the accusative are regarded as 
transitive. A verb that takes a direct object in English may, in 
German, govern a genitive or a dative, and hence be classed as 
intransitive ; e. g., 

(Sr fcebctrf bes> ($e(bes>, He needs money. 

Stf) begegnete tf)m, I met him. 

(£r fyat mir gut gebient, He has served me well. 

SBtllft bu mtr fjelfert ? Will you help me ? 

120. The Principal Parts of a Verb ($te §ou^tformctt). 

1. The principal parts of a verb, from which all the other 
tenses may be derived, are the present infinitive, the imperfect 
or past, and the past participle. 

2. The infinitive always ends in tt, and generally in en. The 
root is the infinitive without this ending ; e. g., 

lobert, to praise, root, Io& 

gef)en, to go, root, gdj 

tocmbeln, to wander, root, toanbcl 

121. The "Weak" and the "Strong" Verbs. 

1 . There are two classes of verbs called by most German gram- 
marians "weak" and "strong," but to these terms the same 
objections have been made as when applied to the declensions 
(45). They correspond to " regular " and " irregular " in English 
grammar, and many teachers prefer the latter terms (regelmd^tg 
and urtregelmtifctg). 



THE VERB 131 

2. A weak or regular verb forms its past tense by adding te or 
ete to the root, and the past participle by adding t or et ; e. g., 

loben, to praise, Mte, geloBt 
Icmben, to land, fonbete, gefattbet 

3. Whether the imperfect shall end in te or ete is a matter of 
euphony and can be determined by pronouncing the word. The 
same applies to the t or et of the past participle and to other 
endings. The euphonic e is required whenever the final con- 
sonant of the root would otherwise be indistinct ; e. g., 

reben, to talk, rebete, gerebet : present, id) rebe, bu rebeft, er rebel, etc. 
acfyten, to respect, act)tete r geacr)tet ; id) acf)te, bu acf)teft, er afytet 

4. A " strong " or irregular verb is characterized by a change 
of the radical vowel in the imperfect tense and sometimes in the 
past participle, also by the ending of the past participle in en ; e. g., 

gefyert, to go, gtng, gegcmgert ; fatten, to hold, fytelt, ge^atten. 

5. Verbs have generally the prefix ge in the past participle. 
Exceptions are (1) verbs beginning with an unaccented syllable, 
as the inseparable prefixes fee, ettty, ent, er, ge, tier, jer ; (2) verbs 
ending in -terett, as marjdjterert to march; abbteren, to add; (3) 
toerben as auxiliary of the passive voice, which drops the prefix 
ge- in the compound past tenses ; e. g., 

begotten, to pay, be$cu)lte, begat)(t. 
abbteren, to add, abbterte, abbiert. 
3d) bin gelobt tuorben (instead of getoorbett), I have been praised. 

122. Names of the Modes and Tenses. 

A German verb is conjugated throughout the following modes 
and tenses : — 

$rafen3.— Present 
SnbilattD. — Indicative ®onjimftit>. — Subjunctive 

^ntperfeltttttt. — Imperfect 
Sttbtf ctttt). — Indicative Sonjunftto. — Subj unctive 



132 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

^Serfeftum. — Perfect 

Srtbtf cttit). — Indicative ®on junf tit). — Subj unctive 

$tu3qttamt>erfeftum. —Pluperfect 
Snbtf atit). — Indicative ^onjtmf ttO . — Subj unctive 

$uturum. — Future 
3nbtfatit>. — Indicative ® on junf ttt>. — Subj un ctive 

gfuturum factum. — Future Perfect 

Snbtf atit). — Indicative $onjunfttt>. — Subjunctive 

$OttbtttonttK3 $rafen3. — Conditional Present 
$OttbttiottaU3 $erfeftum. — Conditional Perfect 

123. Use of the Tenses. 

i. The Present Tense corresponds to the English present, 
but it has only one form where the English has three ; e. g., 
3d) lobe, I praise, I am praising, I do praise (see toben, § 151). 

2. The present may be used to express a past action or event 
continuing into the present ; e. g., 

3d) tootjne t)ier fett bret 3ctt)ren, I have lived here for three years 
(since three years). 

3. The present may also be used with reference to an event 
that is to take place in the near future, especially when the time 
is indicated by an adverbial expression ; e. g., 

3n bret £agen lomme id) gurucf. In three days I shall return. 

4. The Imperfect tense is that of narrative or history. Like 
the present it has but one form where the English has three ; e. g., 

3d) lobte, I praised, I did praise, I was praising. 

5. The Perfect Tense expresses an action or event completed 
without reference to any other action or event. It is often used 
where the English uses the imperfect ; e. g., 






THE VERB 133 

2Bo fjabert ©ie biefen §ut gefanft ? Where did you buy (have 
you bought) this hat. 

3d) fysbe u)n in Sfteto 3)or! gefanft. I bought it in New York. 

6. The Pluperfect Tense is used as in English ; e. g., 
3d) fjcttte tfjn lange md)t gefefyen. 

I had not seen him for a long time. 

7. The Future Tense is used as in English and also sometimes 
to denote a probability that is expressed in English by the 
present ; e. g., 

SSo ift ba$ 23nd) ? ®§ totrb in bem cmberett 3tiwner fctn. 
Where is the book ? It is (will be) probably in the other room. 

8. The present conditional expresses what would happen under 
conditions afterwards stated, the dependent clause being put in 
the imperfect subjunctive ; e. g., 

3d) to itrbe f)tnget)en, toenn id) bte Qtit bagu fyixttz. 
I would go there if I had the time for it. 

9. The perfect conditional denotes that a certain thing would 
have happened under certain conditions, the dependent clause 
being put in the pluperfect subjunctive ; e. g., 

3d) tonrbe ba§> §cm£ gelauft fjabett, toenn id) ba§ nifttge (Mb baju 
getjabt rjdtte. 

I would have bought the house if I had had the necessary 
money for it. ' 

10. The conditionals are often replaced, the first by the im- 
perfect subjunctive and the second by the pluperfect subjunctive ; 
thus, in the above examples, td) gtttge fyirt in place of id) toitrbe 
fyingefjen, and id) f)titte ba§ «!pan3 gefanft in the place of td) toitrbe 
ba$ «§au3 gefauft tjaben. 

2Btr toitrben tfjrt getroffen fjaben, toentt totr bortfyin gegangen toaren, 
or 23tr fatten tf)tt getroffen, toentt totr bortrjtn gegangen todren. 
We would have met him if we had gone there. 



134 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

ri. Such expressions as / am to are rendered into German 
either by the future or by id) foil ; e. g., 
I am to speak at the meeting this evening. 
3d) merbe (or id) foil) f)eute 2lbenb in ber SSerjammfung fyredjen. 

12. Such expressions as I was about to, I was just going to, 
are translated by id) rooflte eben, or idj mar eben im ^Begriff ; e. g., 
I was just going to write to him, 3d) roollte eben an trjn fc£)ret6en. 
I was just going out, 3d) roar eben im $eariff an^ugetjen. 

Translate and Write : 
i . Where did you meet them ? I met them at church. 
2. Please help me to lift this trunk. 3. What are the principal 
parts of loben ? 4. We have lived in this house for ten years. 

5. Where did you buy these gloves ? I bought them in Paris. 

6. When did you see Mr. Lang ? I have not seen him for three 
weeks. 7. Where is my hat ? It must be in your room. 8. I 
would buy this house if I were rich. 9. I would have bought 
the farm if I had had money enough. 10. I was just going out 
as he entered (160, 2). 11. Are we to ride in this carriage ? 

124. The Indicative and Subjunctive Modes. 

1. The indicative is the mode of reality and of certainty; the 
subjunctive is the mode of possibility and of uncertainty. 

2. The indicative tells what actually exists, as, er lebt, he lives ; 
the subjunctive tells what is only thought of, believed, hoped 
for, etc. ; e. g., man glanbt, er (ebe nod), it is thought or believed 
that he still lives. 

3. The subjunctive is often employed in a dependent clause 
introduced by a subordinating conjunction, as roenn, if; bamit, 
in order that ; aU oh, as if; baft, that ; e. g., 

2Benn id) retd) mare, roiirbe id) bte( If I were rich I would travel 

reifen. much, 

©eben (Ste eg tf)tn, bamit er md)t Give it to him so that he may 

roetne. not cry. 






THE VERB 135 

(£r fjcmbeite, al§ oh er ^ornig mare. He acted as if he were angry. 
(£r bertft, bctfc er balb fommert He thinks that he will come 
tuerbe. soon. 

125. Peculiar uses of the Subjunctive. 

1. The imperative subjunctive is usually translated by let. It 
occurs in the first and third person ; e. g., (5r jet gelobt, let him 
be praised. 

2. The optative subjunctive expresses a wish ; e. g., SBdre er 
mtr \)vtx,+if he were only here. 

3. The potential subjunctive expresses some possibility. It is 
translated by may, might, could or would ; e. g., (£§ toctre mcfjt ffttg, 
jo 5U rjcmbeftt, it would not be wise to act so. 

4. The subjunctive of indirect statement (£)te tnbtrelte s J?ebe- 
ttetje). 

This peculiar form of speech occurs when some one relates 
or quotes indirectly something that has been said or thought, 
hoped for, or the like. The indirect statement then takes the 
form of a dependent substantive clause, the verb of which is in 
the subjunctive mode and usually in the tense employed in the 
statement thus quoted. For example, a man says : DJcetn 23ruber 
ijt Iran!, my brother is ill, and is quoted thus : (£r jctgt, baj; jein 
SBritber Iran! fei, he says that his brother is ill. Again, in the sen- 
tence : 3d) jragte ifjlt, 06 er (Mb rjabe, / asked him whether he had 
any money, the verb fjctbe is put in the present subjunctive because 
the original question was in the present, viz. : §afcen ©ie (Mb ? 

But where the present subjunctive does not differ from the 
present indicative the imperfect subjunctive is used, e. g. : They 
said that they had lost all their money, <£>te jagtett, baJ3 .^k ail irjr 
(Mb Serlorert fatten. Further examples are : 

(£r cmfroortete, bctjs er mtr ^erjn SJcctrf fjabe. 
He answered that he had only ten marks. 

@te bacfjtert, baj$ jte rjeute nidjt fommen lonntert. 
They thought they could not come to-day. 



136 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

3d) bad)te, ba$ er trie! (Mb f)dtte. 

I thought that he had much money. 

@ie er§d(j(ten mir, ba$ fie tfjr ganged SBermflgen oerloren fatten. 
They related to me that they had lost their entire fortune. 

Wan fctgt, bctfe ber ^rdftbent bettte cmfommen toerbe. 
It is said that the president will arrive to-day. 

3d) fragte irjn, toarum er jo [pat attgefommen jet. 
I asked him why he had arrived so late. 

(Sr cmttoortete, baJ3 er ben 3ttg oerferjlt r)abe. 
He answered that he had missed the train. 

(Sr fcrjrteb mir, baft er mcr)i ttorjl jet. 
He wrote me that he was not well. 

5. The conjunction that introduces the dependent clause may 
be omitted and then this clause assumes the normal order. For 
example the last sentence might be : (£r fcfyrteb mir, er fet nitf)t roof)!. 

126. The Imperative Mode (2>er Smperaiifc). 

1. The Imperative Mode corresponds in meaning to the 
English, but it has peculiarities of form that require attention. 

2. In the formal style of personal address the 3d person 
plural is used (in place of the 2d plural) in addressing one or 
more than one person, the pronoun being then written with a 
capital initial ; e. g., Soben ©te, praise {you). @ef)ert ©ie, go (you). 

3. The 3d person singular and the 1st and 3d plural of the 
present subjunctive are also used in an imperative sense ; thus 
we have, taking toben (151) as an example : 

Imperative Forms : 
Singular. Plural. 

i. lobett totr, let us praise 

2. lobe, praise (obet or lobt, praise 

3. lobe er, let him praise lobert fie, let them praise 

The formal style : Sobert ©te, praise (you). 



THE VERB 137 

Translate and Write: 

1 . If we were rich we would build a beautiful house. 2 . They 
acted as if they were crazy. 3. I hope they will go soon. 4. I 
wrote that I would arrive the day after to-morrow. 5. He said 
that his brother was dead. 6. Praise this good boy. 7. I have 
praised him, because he has helped me so well (170, 3). 

127. The Infinitive Mode (Ser SttfmittD). 

All Infinitives end in n and nearly all in en* They may be 
used as nouns and are then of the neuter gender, and used, with 
rare exceptions, in the singular number only. They are then 
declined like nouns, of the 3d class neuter (55), and are usually 
translated by the verbal noun in ing ; e. g., 

3)cr£ @ef)en tft fet)r fd)(edjt. The going is very bad. 
Sefen unb ©d)ret6en ftnb nii^tttfje ®itnfte. 
Reading and writing are useful arts. 

128. The Infinitive Preceded by ju, 

1. The Infinitive is used with the preposition 511 in a great 
variety of cases and especially where to would be used in render- 
ing it into English ; e. g., 

Gsr fing an (160, 1) gu arbetten, He began to work. 

3d) fyoffe ©te ttneber git fefjen, I hope to see you again. 

Gsrlauben ©ie mir fjter §u ftf)retben, 1 Permit me to write here. 

£)tefe SKaren ftnb 5U berfaufen, These goods are for sale. 

2Btr fjctben fyeute triel §u tun, We have much to do to-day. 

3d) frette mid) (159) ba§ §u tjoren, I am glad to hear that. 

§a6en ©ie £uft tn3 Sweater gu Have you a mind to go to the 

ge^en ? theater ? 

©obctlb id) anlam (160, 2), f)or* As soon as I arrived they 

ten fie auf gu reben, stopped talking, 

©agen ©te tfmt, roa3 er gu tun Ijat, Tell him what he has to do. 



138 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

£)iefe3 (SretgmS ift fefjr gu bellow This occurrence is much to be 

gen, regretted. 

3cfj fyabe fjeute brei 2ktcfe 511 I have three letters to write 

frf)retben, to-day. 

2)a3 Gsffen ift gum Seben notig, Eating is necessary to life. 

2. The preposition 511 when used with a separable verb stands 
between the prefix and the infinitive ; e. g., 
3d) f)abe meine 2hifgabe ab^u- I have to copy my task. 

fdjretben, 
£)ie timber roiinfctjen au^ugefyen, The children wish to go out. 
SBttte, tjelfen ©te mtr btefen SLifcf) Please help me to lift this 

aufgufjeben, table. 

129. The Prepositions ftatt, ofjne and urn with the Infinitive. 

Three prepositions only, viz. : ftcttt or artftatt, instead of ; ofjne, 
without ; and urn, in order, directly govern the infinitive with 

©tatt §u lernen rjat er nur gefotett. 
Instead of studying he only played. 

(£r ging fort ofute em SSort §u fagen. 
He went away without saying a word. 

3d) bin geformnen, urn biefe DMjtmng 511 beaten. 
I have come in order to pay this bill. 

Translate and Write: 

1. Eating and drinking are necessary to life. 2. We began 
to eat at seven o'clock. 3. We hope to see them again soon. 
4. This house is for sale. 5 . Have you much to do to-day ? 
6. We are glad to hear that. 7. Do you wish to go to the 
concert? 8. We have many letters to write to-day and to- 
morrow. 9. I wish to go out. 10. Instead of working they only 
laughed and danced. 11. They went home without paying the 
bill. 12. I came here in order to work. 



THE VERB 139 

130. The Infinitive without $u. 
Without 5U the infinitive is used : 

1 . As the subject of a sentence ; e. g., 

@einen gembett uergetijen ift ebel 
To forgive one's enemies is noble. 

Unrest fetbert ift beffer ctl£ Unrest tun. 

To suffer wrong is better than to do wrong. 

2. After the auxiliaries of mode (148) ; e. g., 3d) ten fd)reiben, 
I can write ; !£Ba3 rooGen <Ste tun? What will y on do? 

3. After roerben as auxiliary of the future tense ; e. g., 
3d) merbe gefyen. I shall go. 

4. After the verbs fjetfjen (in the sense of befet)ten, call, bid), 
fjelfen, help ; tefyren, teach; lernen, learn; madden, make ; e. g., 

@r f)iefe mid) etntreten, he bade me enter. 
£>elfen <Sie mir btefe3 ©epdd tragen. 
Help me carry this bundle (baggage). 

@r letjrte mid) fd)retben (not §u fd)retben). 
He taught me to write. 

5. After several verbs expressing sense perception; e.g., 
fefjen, to see ; fjoren, to hear; fiit)len, to feel: 

3d) fat) ifjn metnen. I saw him weeping. 
3d) fjorte ujn fpredjen. I heard him speak. 

6. The infinitive is used without §u also in certain phrases 
after other verbs ; e. g., 

3d) mill fd)tafen get)en. I will go to sleep (to bed). 
, f £af$ fie bettetn getjen, menn fie t)nngrtg finb." 
Let them go begging if they are hungry. 

(£r rooftte fid) mdjt fatten laffen. 

He would not let himself be hindered. 



I40 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

131. An English Infinitive Preceded by to. 

An English infinitive in such constructions as, I know him to 
be a good man, I wish him to go to the city, cannot be translated 
literally. A subordinate clause with the conjunction ba$ must be 
formed, thus : 3d) trjei§ r ba$ er em cwter Wann ift ; id) totfl, ba$ er 
in bte (Btabt geljett foH. 

132. The English Infinitive after how, what or where. 

An English infinitive after how, what or where requires, in 
German, a dependent clause with an auxiliary of mode ; e. g., 
I do not know how to do it. 
3d) toetfj md)t, tote id) e3 mctcfjen foil. 
He does not know where to go. 
(£r toetf$ nid)t, tuoljin er ge^en foil. 

133. The Passive Voice. 

i. To understand and correctly use the passive voice in Ger- 
man it is necessary to compare it with the English passive. 

2. In English the passive voice is formed with the several 
tenses of the neuter verb to be and the past participle of a tran- 
sitive verb ; thus, for example, with the transitive verb praise : 

I am praised, I was praised, I have beefi praised, I had been 
praised, I shall be praised, I shall have been praised. 

3. In German the same forms are used except that, instead of 
the neuter verb fetn, to be, is employed the tense auxiliary tuerben, 
to become (see the full conjugation § 147). Hence we have, as 
a synopsis of the passive voice of lobett, in the indicative mode : 
3d) toerbe getobt, I am praised (I become praised). 
3cf) ttmrbe gelobt, I was praised. 

3cf) bin gelobt toorben, I have been praised. 

3d) Wax gelobt toorbett, I had been praised. 

3ct) toerbe gelobt toerben, I shall be praised. 

3d) toerbe gelobt toorben fein, I shall have been praised. 




THE VERB 141 

4. It will be observed that in the compound tenses the past 
participle gemorben drops the prefix ge and becomes only morben. 
This is for the sake of euphony, since id) bin gelobt ttmrben sounds 
better than ttfj bin gelobt gettmrben (see looen, 152). 

5. While only verbs that take an object in the accusative are 
regarded as transitive (119) and may thus take the full passive 
form, there is a limited passive for intransitive verbs. It appears 
only in the third person singular and with the indefinite subject 
e3 expressed or understood ; e. g., 

ds> ttrirb tnir erlaubt, / am allowed ; (£$ ttmrbe mir erlaubt, / was 
allowed; (£3 ttmrbe gefungen unb getan^t, there was singing and 



6. The student must be careful to distinguish between the 
use of fern and of merben. SSerben, as the auxiliary of the passive 
voice, relates to an action in progress ; as, ba$ Qau§ ttrirb gebaut, 
the house is being built (some one is building the house) ; while 
fettt relates to a state or condition resulting from a previous 
action ; as, ba§> $QdU$ if! gebcmt, the house is built (the work is 
completed). Remember that there can be no passive voice in 
German without some form of roerben. 

134. The English Passive rendered into the German Active. 

1 . The passive voice is much less employed in German than 
in English. In place of the passive the German often employs 
the active with the indefinite pronoun mart : thus, it is said, man 
f agt ; or with a reflexive form : as, it is understood, es> rjerfterjt fid}. 

2. The German, in general, prefers the active form of any 
verb ; thus, instead of bieje3 §au3 ttmrbe rjon metnem $ater gebant, 
this house was built by my father, he would say, mettt $ater baute 
biefeS §an3 (or Ijat btefeS §au3 gebaut). 

Translate and Write : 

1. To pay one's debt is honest. 2. I can read, but I cannot 
write. 3. What will he do ? He will do nothing. 4. Please 



142 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

help me carry this trunk. 5. We taught them to read. 6. We 
heard them laughing. 7. We remained standing. 8. Let him 
go begging if he is poor. 9. I knew them to be good people. 
10. We wish them to go to school. 11. I am being praised. 
12. The good child was loved. 13. The lost key has been found. 
14. The good children had been praised. 15. By whom was 
this bridge built ? It was built by the Romans. 

135. The Participles ($te ^artijtyten). 

The participles are verbal adjectives with the meaning of verbs 
and the grammatical construction and inflection of adjectives. 
There are two participles, viz., the present and the past ; e. g., 

Soften, to praise ; participles, to6enb, praising ; getobt, praised. 

136. The Present Participle. 

1. The present participle is used as an attributive adjective as 
in English ; e. g., em tad}enbes> $tnb, a laughing child. It may 
also be used appositively in connection with another verb ; as, 
„£ad)enb fefyrte er mir ben SRitcfen." Laughing he turned his back 
on me. 

2. In other respects the use of the present participle differs 
from the English. We cannot say, for example, bct3 $inb ift 
fctdjenb, the child is laughing. We must say, bct£ ®inb (cttf)t. 

3. But when the present participle expresses not an action, 
but an attribute of the noun, it may be used predicatively ; thus, 
ba§> ®tnb ift reigenb, the child is charming. 

4. The present participle may be used as a noun with the 
definite or the indefinite article, and is then declined like an 
adjective ; e. g., 

S^eifen, to travel ; ber SRetfenbe, the traveller ; em SRetfenber, a 
traveller. 

Declension : ber Sfaifenbe, be3 SKetfenbeit; bent Dletfenben, ben 
Sftetfenben. Plural : bie ^etfenben, etc. 



THE VERB 143 

With indefinite article: (gin Sfatfenber, eme£ Dfotfenben, etrtem 
SRetfenben, einert D^etfenben. 

liefer ^Hetfenbe fjctt fetn @epacf This traveller has lost his bag- 
rjerloren. gage (luggage). 



137. The Past Participle. 

1. In addition to its use in the formation of the compound 
tenses the past participle may be used as an adjective, both pred- 
icatively and attributively ; e. g., £)er ©djlitffel tft fcerloren, the 
key is lost ; etrt fcerlorener ©crjlitffel, a lost key. 

2. The past participle may be used as a noun and is then 
declined with the article like an adjective. Examples are : 

ber @3e(erjrte, the learned man em ®efer)rter, a learned man 

ber ©efcmbte, the ambassador etrt ©efcmbter, an ambassador 

ber SBerlorene, the lost one em SBerlorener, a lost one 

ber 53efrette, the liberated one etrt SBefretter, a liberated one 

Declension : ber (Merjrte, be§ (Merjrten, bent (Mefyrten, etc. 
G£trt ©elerjrter, etne3 (Merjrten, euterrt (Met)rten, etnen (Merjrten. 



138. Adjectives with the Form of Participles. 

1 . There are many words used as adjectives that have the 
form of the past participle, but which cannot be referred to any 
known infinitive. Such are gefdjicft, skillful ; befannt, known; 
gefttrrtt, starry ; bejafjrt, aged. Many of these take the negative 
prefix mt, as, nngefcfjtcft, unskillful ; unbefcmnt, unknown; e. g., 

liefer 2lrbetter tft fetjr gefcrjicft, aber jener tft nngefcrjtcft. This 
workman is very skillful, but that one is unskillful. 

£)tefer «!perr tft mtr nnbefcmnt. This gentleman is unknown to me. 



144 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2. A verb of motion, as ktnfen, to run ; fafjren, to ride, used in 
connection with fonunen, to come, takes the form of the past par- 
ticiple (instead of the present), to express the mode of motion ; 
e- g., 

Gsr fommt gelcmfen, He comes running. 
(£r fam gefrocfjen, He came creeping, 

©te fctmen gefafyxn, They came riding. 

3. A like form is fcerloren geljen, to be lost ; e. g., 

SJcetn SBud) ift bertoren gegcmgen. My book is lost (gone lost). 

4. The past participle combined with a negation is often used 
in place of the imperative ; e. g., 

„9ctd)t lang gefeiert ! grtfd) ! $)te Stftanerfteine 
^erbet! £)en Stalf, ben Nortel §ugefa()ren !" 

©djiUerS „2BU!)etm$eU." 

Do not delay long ! Quick! Bring the wall-stones here. Bring 
the lime, the mortar. 

139. The Future Passive Participle. 

By placing §u before the present participle of a transitive verb 
there is formed a future passive participle (the Latin gerundive) 
which is used in some idiomatic phrases ; e. g., etn %\x lobenber 
©olbat, a to be praised soldier, i. e. a soldier who may be or should 
be praised ; etn me gn rjergeffenber UnfctH, a never-to-be-forgotten 
accident. 

140. Comparison of Participles. 

Both participles admit of comparison, but only when used as 
adjectives ; e.g., bebeutenb, important ; bebentenber, more important ; 
ber (bte, ba$) bebeutenbfte, the most important. 

@elef)rt, learned; gelefyrter, more learned ; ber (bte, ba§) gelefjr* 
tefte, the most learned. 



THE VERB 145 

$trtf)ott) tuar em fe^r ge(ef)rter Wlann ; er toar euter ber gelefyrteften 
trgte $eutftf)lanbg. 

Virchow was a very learned man ; he was one of the most 
learned physicians of Germany. 

Translate and Write: 

1. The boy is crying. 2. This girl is charming. 3. These 
travelers have lost their trunks. 4. The diamond is lost ; I have 
found the lost diamond. 5. William is skillful, but Thomas is 
unskillful. 6. How did he come ? He came running. 7. My 
watch is lost. 8. A child to be loved. 9. This is an important 
business. 10. Noah Webster was a learned man ; he was the 
most learned philologist of his time. 

141. The Uses of Ijafcett, fcin and taerbett. 

«<paben, to have, fern, to be and toerben, to become are used both 
as principal and as auxiliary verbs. 

1. §aben when employed as a principal verb is transitive and 
takes its object in the accusative. It often expresses possession, 
as, id) fyabe etnen tteuen <£mt, / have a new hat. 

2. (Seitt when employed as a principal verb is intransitive and 
expresses mere existence like the neuter verb to he in English ; 
e. g., 3d) bin retcf), I am rich. 

3. SSerbett has peculiar uses that have no correspondence in 
English. It means literally to become, to get, or to grow, that is, 
a transition from one state or condition to another ; as, £)te)e £eute 
toerben retcf), these people are becoming ox getting rich. 

4. The present tense of toerben with the infinitive of any verb 
forms the future of that verb, as, id) toerbe toerben, I shall become ; 
id) toerbe fjctbett, I shall have ; id) toerbe gefjert, I shall go. SSerben 
is also the auxiliary for the passive voice, as we shall see on 
reaching that conjugation (152). 



14^ NEW GERMAN COURSE 

142. SSerben and ttiottcn Contrasted. 

The difference between toerbett and toolkit and their relation to 
English shall and will should be carefully noted. Observe the 
following : 

Stf) toerbe geljett, I shall go gd) toil! gefyeit, I will go 

bu totrft gerjen, thou wilt go bu totllft gefyett, thou wilt go 

er totrb gefjeit, he will go er tottf gefjen, he will go 

totr toerbett gerjett, we shall go loir toolkit gefyett, we will go 

tfyr roerbet gefyett, you will go tfjr tooftt gefyett, you will go 

fie loerben gerjett, they will go fie toolkit ger)en, they will go 

1. Here id) toerbe gefjeit simply announces a future event, while 
id) toil! gefjett is the emphatic form of the present tense, / will go », 
am determined to go. 

2. The incorrect use of will in English, its common use in 
place of shall \ causes frequent errors in translating these words 
into German. 

3. When simple futurity is meant / shall or will should be 
translated id) toerbe, while id) totU should express only determina- 
tion ; thus, / will write a letter to-day, if it refers only to the 
future, should be rendered id) toerbe fjeute ettteit $rtef fcfjretbett, but 
the English in this case should have been not / will, but I shall. 

I tvill write, that is, I am determined to write, is to be trans- 
lated id) totfl fd)retbett. 

143. §afcett and fcin as Auxiliaries. 

1. All transitive and many intransitive verbs are conjugated 
with fjabett. 

2. With fetit are conjugated a limited number of intransitives, 
especially such as indicate motion or a change of condition.* Of 
these some of the commonest are the two auxiliaries fetit and 
toerben together with the following : 



* For the contrast between fyahtn and jein as auxiliaries see the conjugations of geben 
(155), and geben (156). 





THE VERB 




INFINITIVE 


IMPERFECT 


PAST. PART 


begegnen, to meet 


begegnete 


begegnet 


6 lei 6 en , to remain 


blieb 


geblieben 


fallen, to fall 


ftel 


gefaHen 


fltegen, to fly 


P*9 


geflogen 


gerjen, to go 


Qtng 


gegangen 


fommen, to come 


tarn 


gefommen 


gefcfjerjen, to happen 


gefc^at) 


gefcr^etjen 


ftnfen, to sink 


fan! 


gefnnfen 


fterben, to die 


ftarb 


geftorben 


tr>ctcf)fen, to grow 


ttmcp 


getoacrjfen 



147 



144. Verbs Conjugated with Jjafcen or fettu 

There are a few verbs that are conjugated with rjctben when 
they relate to motion in the abstract, but with fetn when reference 
is had to motion from or to a designated point ; e. g., 



£)er Slnabe rjat gefdjtoommert, 
£er £nabe tfi an3 lifer gefcrjtoont' 

men, 
SDtefer DJcann fjat btel geretft, 
©r tft nacfj Dinfelanb geretft, 



The boy has swum. 

The boy has swum to the 

bank. 
This man has travelled much. 
He has gone to Russia. 



Translate and Write: 

1. I shall write to him 1 to-morrow. 2. This boy will not learn 
his lesson. 3. I met 3 your brother yesterday. 4. What has 
happened ? A child has fallen into the water. 5. Is your father 
at home ? No, he has gone the city. 3 6. Where did 4 these 
plants grow. They grew4 in our garden. 7. Our friends 
arrived 5 this morning. 

The following conjugations and exercises will involve a useful 
review of the preceding lessons and the pupil should always turn 
to the sections indicated. 



1. an tljn. 2. Perfect tense and with dative. 3. £51* bie <Stobt. 4. Perfect tense. 
5. Perfect tense and §160. 



14^ NEW GERMAN COURSE 

145. The Auxiliary Verb (i}tlfs$etttx>ort) l)<tbeit, to have. 

Principal Parts (§auptformeu) : Ijakn, Ijattc, gefyafct 

$rafen3. Sm^crfcftum. 

Snbifattto. ^Bonjunf ttb. ftnbifatib. Sonjuuftiu. 

I have I may have I had I might have 

id) Ijabe id) fyctbe id) tjcttte id) Ijdttc 

bu Ijaft bu fyabeft bu fjatteft bu tjatteft 

er (fie, eS) f)at er fyabe er (fie, c£) Ijatte er Ijatte 

tuir fyabeu ttrir fjaben toir fatten totr fatten 

d)v fyabt d)x fjabet ifjr £)attet ifyr tjdttel 

fie fjafcert fie tyaben fie fatten fie fatten 

^erfeftum. 
Snb. : idj tjabe (bu t)aft, etc.) ge()abt f I have had. 
®ouj. : id) f)abe (bit fjabeft, etc.) ge()a6t, I may have had. 

$lu§quamperfeftum. 

3nb. : id) fycttte (bu fjatteft, etc.) gefyabt, I had had. 
S^onj. : id) fjdtte (bu fjdtteft, etc.) gefjabt, I might have had. 

^uturum. 

%nb.: id) toerbe* (bu totrft, etc.) Ijctbeu, I shall have. 
®ouj. : id) toerbe (bu tuerbeft, etc.) fjctben, I shall have. 

^nb. : id) tuerbe (bu ftrirft, etc.) gef)a6t f)abeu, I shall have had. 
®ouj. : id) luerbe (bu toerbeft, etc.) gefjetbt Ijaben, I shall have had. 

idj ttmrbe (bu toiirbeft, etc.) fjabeu, I should or would have. 

Sfrmbttionaftj? ^erfeftum. 
id) ruitrbe (bu ftmrbeft, etc.) gefyabt fjaben, I should or would have had. 

Sm^erath): <Sing. I)abe, have (thou); ^lur. vjabt, have (ye). 
^ttftttttit) : $)3raf. t)abtn, to have; *)3erf. gefjetbt fyaben, to have had. 
^artistpiett : ^rdf. fyabeub, having* $)3erf. gef)ctbt, had. 



* See toetbett (147)- 






THE VERB 149 

%8a$ fjaft bu ba ? 3d) rjabe em fdjotte^ 23itb. 

«g>aft bu meinen §ut ? Sftein, id) f)abe iljn nid)t. 

28er f)at i^rt ? 2)a^ toeift id) nid)t. 

§a6ert <Sie mein DJteffer gerjabt ? 3a, id) fyaht eg gerjabt. 

28o ift eg ? §ter ift eg ; nimm (nefynen ©ie) eg. 

$a)t bu (rjaben <3ie) gefdjrieben ? 9£em, id) fyabe nid)t gefcfjrieben. 

SSarum uid)t ? SBetl idj feine geber ijatte. 

2Birft bu (merben ©ie) Qtit f)aben, 3d) glaube nid)t, bag id) 3 e ^ f) as 

biefeg 23ud) §u tefeit ? ben toerbe. 

SBiirben ©ie eg lefert, toenn @ie 3a f roenn id) Qeit fjatte, niirbe xcf) 

Qeit fatten ? eg fe^r gent lefen. 

Setter, ©eben ©ie mir bie erfte ^erfon @in§af)l b^ Qtittooxtt& 
f) a b e n in alien fecfjg getten beg Subimtiug.* — © d) u 1 e r. 3d) f)abe, 
id) fjatte, id) fyabe gef)abt, id) fjatte gefyabt, id) toerbe fyaben, id) merbe 
aefyabt rjaben. 

& 3n tuelcfjem gall ift bag SSort $ut in bem ©atp „£aft bu 
meinen § u t " ?— © d). (£g fterjt int Stccufatit). 

£. SDef linieren ©ie ber §ut. — <S d). £)er §ut, beg §uteg, bem 
§ute, ben §ut; plural: bie §ute, ber £)ute, ben §iiten, bie §itte. 

& ©e^en ©ie an bie Xafel unb fd)reiben ©ie biefe £)eftmatum. 

Translate and Write : 

1. Have you my pen? Yes, I have it; here it is; take it. 
2. Who has our letters? Charges has them. 3. Who has had 
my beautiful pictures ? No-one has had them. 4. Who will have 
time to write a letter for me (a letter for me to write) ? Anna 
will not have time, but John will have time soon (will soon time 
have). 5. Is this the letter that you wrote yesterday (that you 
yesterday written have)? Yes, it is the same (89, 1). 6. Who 
has the beautiful little picture that I bought yesterday ? I do 
not know who has it (who it has). 



* Instead of this form it is admissible, for the sake of brevity, to say: ©eben <5ie mir 
eine <St)nop)t3 t>ort b a b en im ^nbtfattb. 



I50 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

146. The Auxiliary Verb (^tlfsscttroort) fettt, to be. 

Principal Parts (£)auUtformen) : feut, Wax, getucfciu 
$rafeu3. Smperfeftum. 



Snbifattt). 


^onjunltib. 


3nbi!.ati». 


®onjunftiu. 


I am 


I may be 


I was 


I might be 


id) bin 


id) fei 


id) luctr 


id) toftre 


bu bift 


bu feieft 


bu tnarft 


bn ludreft 


er (fie, t§) ift 


er fei 


er wax 


er to arc 


Xoix finb 


fair feien 


tnir waxen 


wix tuaren 


i\)x feib 


h)x feiet 


\i)x toaret 


ifjr tndret 


fie finb 


fie feien 


fie tuaren 


fie todreu 



^Scrfeftitm. 

Snb. : id) bin (bu bift, etc.) getuefen, I have been. 
S!onj. : id) fei (bu feieft, etc.) getuefen, I may have been. 

$Iu3quamperfeftum. 

£>nb. : id) Wax (bu toarft, etc.) gewefen, I had been. 

®onj. : id) tudre (bn tudreft, etc.) getuefen, I might have been. 

$utimtm. 

%nb.: id) tuerbe (bu ttrirft, etc.) fein, I shall be. 
$onj. : id) tuerbe (bu tuerbeft, etc.) fein, I shall be. 

$uturum @jaftum. 

^nb.: id) tuerbe (bu toirft, etc.) getuefen fein, I shall have been. 
Stonj. : id) tuerbe (bu tuerbeft, etc.) getuefen fein, I shall have been. 

^ottbitionaltS $rafen3. 

id) iuitrbe (bu tuiirbeft, etc.) fein, I should or would be. 

^onbittonaU^ $erfeftum. 
id) tuiirbe (bu iuitrbeft, etc.) gettefen fein, I should or would have 
been. 

Smjjeratto: ©in g. fei, be (thou); Spiur. feib, be (ye). 
Sttftttitto: sprdf. fein, to be; ^perf. getuefen fein, to have been. 
^artistyien: ^raf. feienb, being; ^erf. genjefen, been. 



THE VERB 151 

Rati, too bift bu ? §ter bin id). 

S3ift bu franl ? Sftein, id) bin gan§ tool)!. 

3So ift @corg ? (Sr ift in ber ©djule. 

SSarft bn rjettte in ber ©ctjule ? 3a, rjeute morgen. 

28o toarft bu Ijeute 9tad)mittag ? 3d) blieb $u §au|e. 

2£arum bliebft bu gu ^aufe ? Urn §u fpieten. 

3$o toarft bu gcftern ? ©eftern toar id) in ber ©tabt. 

28o toirft bu morgen fein ? Sftorgen toerbe id) 511 §aufe fein. 

2Sa3 tottrbeft bu tun, menu bu SKenn id) reicfj mare, tottrbe id) t>tet 
reid) toctreft? reifen. 

„3>u bift tote eine 2Mume, fo rjolb unb fctjdn unb rein ; 
3d) fd)au' bid) an, unb SBefymut fd)(eid)t ntir in§ §erj I)inein. 
SD^tr ift, a(3 ob id) bie §anbe auf£ §aupt bir tegen folCIt', 
SBetenb, baf$ ©ott bid) errjalte fo rein unb fd)on unb rjotb." 

2 e I) r e r. Sernen £>ie biefe3 ©ebicfjt fitr morgen au^toenbig. — 
@ dj it I e r. 3d) f)a6e e3 fcrjon geternt. 

2. ©eijen ©ie an bie £afel unb fdjreiben ©ie e3. — <S d). ©oft 
id) e3 in beutfd)er ober in (ateinifcrjer ©thrift fct)ret6ert ? 

53. ©ctjreiben ©ie eS in beutfdjer ©djrift. . . . 28er Ijat biefe£ 
©ebicfjt gefctjrieben ? — <5 d). ^einrid) §eine fjat e3 gefcrjrieben. 

& 3Ser toar §eine? — ©d). §eine toar ein beritrjtnter beutfd)er 
£)id)ter. 

2. 2)eHinieren ©ie b a 3 |) e r £. — © d). £)a£ §er§ f be3 ^eqen^, 
bent ^er^en, ba£ ^er^ ; plural : bie §er§en, ber |)er§en, ben ^er^en, 
bie ^er^en. 1 

Translate and Write : 

1. Where are you ? I am in the parlor. 2. Where is Anna? 
She is in the dining-room. 3. Where have you been to-day? 
I have been at school. 4. Where will you be to-morrow ? To- 
morrow I shall remain at home the whole day (ace.). 5. If they 
were rich (if they rich were), what would they do ? If they were 
rich they would help the poor (would they the poor help). 



152 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



147. The Auxiliary Verb ttiet&en, to become. 

Principal Parts (^jauptformen) : toerben, untrbc, geluorbett, 



$rafen3. 



Snbifatid. 
I become 
id) toerbe 
bit fair ft 
er (fie, e£) mirb 
fair icerben 
ifyr roerbet 
fie toerben 



ftonjunf tit). 
I may become 
id) toerbe 
bu tuerbeft 
er toerbe 
toir toerben 
ifyr roerbet 
fie tuerben 



^m^crfcftum. 

^nbifotiu. ®onjunftit>. 



I became 
id) ttmrbe 
bit ttmrbeft 
er nmrbe 
urir ttmrben 
if)r nntrbet 
fie nwrben 



I might become 
id) nntrbe 
bit luurbcft 
er tour be 
toir toitrben 
i()r toi'trbet 
fie luiirben 



The imp. ind. has also the singular id) toarb, bu toarbft, er toarb 

^crfcftum. 

id) bin (bu bift, etc.) getoorben, I have become. 

id) fei (bu feieft, etc.) getoorben, I (may) have become. 

^fa^quamperfeftum, 

id) toar (bu toarft, etc.) getoorben, I had become. 

id) toare (bu tocireft, etc.) getoorben, I (might) have become 

Sfntimtm. 

id) toerbe (bu toirft, etc.) toerben, I shall become, 
id) toerbe (bu roerbeft, etc.) toerben, I shall become. 

ftutnrum cjaftum. 

id) toerbe (bu toirft, etc.) getoorben fein, I shall have become, 
id) toerbe (bu toerbeft, etc.) getoorben fein, I shall have become. 

$ottbtttonaU3 $rofen3. 

id) toiirbe (bu toiirbeft, etc.) luerben, I should or would become. 

$0ttbitiottaU3 $erfeftum. 
id) toiirbe etc. getoorben fein, I should or would have become. 

$mp. : @ing. toerbe, become (thou) ; $p( ur. toerbet, become (ye). 
3nf. : ^raf. toerben, to become ; ^erf. getoorben fein, to have become. 
tyavt.: ^rdf. toerbenb, becoming; ^erf. getoorben, become. 



Snb. 
®onj 

Snb. 
®onj 

Snb. 
flonj. 

Snb. 
tonj 




THE VERB 153 

^ont»etfatiott» 

23ie ift ba§ better fjeute ? &$ ffingt an (160) fait gu merben. 

SSurbe §err 91 in Sonbon reid) ? 8a, er tourbe fet)r retcf). 
3ft 3t)r ©ruber retct) geraorben ? 9tan, er ift arm geraorben. 
2£er mirb reid) tuerben ? £)ie gteiftigen merben retct) merben. 

2£ie mirb man retct) ? SDton mirb im ©efdjafte reict). 

s Berben alle ©efd)aft3(eute reict) ? 9can, nid)t ade, nur bie fleiSigften 

unb ftitgften. 
«g)offen ©ie retd) gu merben ? 3a, ba$ tjoffe id). 

(Stub bie ^Heidjen immer glitdlid) ? 9?ein, fie finb ntct)t immer gtudtid). 
2Ber ift ber gtudlid)fte Wann ? $er SBcfte ift ber ©Oicfltdjfie. 

3m Safyre 1848 ging §err Sang nad) Qtatifornien unb mar in jenem 
£anbe ferjr gtiidtid). (£r entbedte eine ©olbmine unb raurbe baburd) 
fet)r retctj, aber am Gsnbe oerlor er atte3 unb rourbe arm. (£r ging ^u 
®runbe, meit er $u Diet unternatjm. 

2 e t) r e r. 2Ber ging nad) (Sattf ornien ? — © d) it t e r. §err Sang 
ging nad) (Satifornien. 

2. Sn me(d)em 3at)re ging er t)in ? — ©d). (£3 mar im 3at)re 1848. 

£. SKurbe er in biefem Sanbe retct) ? — Set). 3a, fet)r retct). 

£. $ertor er am Gmbe fein $ermogen ? — @ d). 3a, er oertor aEe^ 
unb rourbe arm* 

£. 3n toetdjer 2Beife certor er fein $ermogen ? — © d). (£r Dertor 
e£ baburd), bafj er gu Diet unternatjm. 

& SSetct)e^ finb bie §auptf ormen dou ro e r b e n. — © dj. SSerben, 
murbe, geroorben. 

& (Men <Sie mir bie (Styrto^ftS t)on ro e r b e n im 3nbifatiu. — 
© d). 3d) roerbe, id) murbe, u. f. to. 

Translate and Write: 

1. How is the weather to-day ? It is cold and windy ; it will 
soon rain. 2. Who became rich in California ? Mr. N. and 
also his two brothers became very rich. 3. Is it necessary to 
become rich ? No, it is not necessary, but one must have enough 
to live well (129). 4. Who is the most fortunate man ? The 
most fortunate is he who (89, 9) is neither rich nor (no) poor. 



154 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



148. The Auxiliaries of Mode (§Uf3ber&en be3 9Jtobu3)* 

i. There are six auxiliaries of mode having peculiarities that 
require especial attention. They are : 

biirfen, be permitted, may, dare miiffen, must, be compelled 
fonnen, can, be able foEen, shall, be obliged 

mogen, may, like tooEen, will, be willing 

2. These verbs have each a complete conjugation, except in 
the imperative, which occurs only in toolkit (luoEe, plural moEt), 
while their English equivalents are very defective. They are 
followed as in English by the infinitive ; thus, id) fcmn (efen, / can 
read; tdj nutfj nctcfj ."pcutfe gerjen, I must go home. 

3. The compound tenses of these verbs are formed with the 
auxiliary fjaben in the same manner as other verbs, except that 
when, in a compound tense, one of these verbs is preceded by 
another verb in the infinitive the past participle of the modal 
auxiliary is replaced by its own infinitive ; thus, id) fjabe gemufet, 
I have been obliged, but id) ()abe eg tun muffen, / was obliged to do 
it; id) t)a6e gefomtt, / have been able, but id) rja6e eg tun fonnen, 
/ have been able to do it. 



4. Conjugation of the Auxiliaries of Mode. 
The Principal Parts (^auptformen). 



Snfin. : 


biirfen 


fonnen mo" gen 


muffen 


foEen 


raoEen 


3mperf. : 


burfte 


fonnte mod)te 


mufete 


foEte 


tooEte 


2. «part. : 


geburft 


gefonnt gcmoctjt gemufst 


gefoEt 


geraoEt 






^rftfenS— 3nb 


ilatit). 






id) barf 


fann 


mag 


mufj 


foE 


fcriH 


bu barf ft 


fannft 


magft 


mufet 


foEft 


totUft 


er barf 


fann 


mag 


mufj 


foE 


rooEen 


ttrir biirfen 


fonnen 


mogen 


miiffen 


foEen 


tt)t bitrft 


fonnt 


mb'gt 


mitf$t 


foEt 


tooEt 


fie biirfen . 


fonnen 


mogen 


miiffen 


foEen 


moEen 







THE 


VERB 




i55 






$rafen3 — $ 


onjunftit). 






id) bitrfe 


fonne 


moge 


miiffe 


folk 


raofte 


bu biirfeft 


fonneft 


mogeft 


miiffeft 


folteft 


raofteft 


er biirfe 


fonne 


moge 


miiffe 


folle 


mo He 


rati bitrfen 


fonnen 


mogen 


miiffen 


f often 


mo Hen 


ifyr biirfet 


fonnet 


moget 


miiffet 


follet 


raoftet 


fie biirfen 


fonnen 


mogen 


miiffen 


follen 


ra often 



^mperfeftmtu 

Snb. : id) bnrfte, fonnte, moctjte, innate, foftte, rooftte. 
®onj. : id) biirfte, fonnte, mb'djte, miiftte, foftte, raoftte. 

^erfeftum. 
Snb. : id) rja6e (bu fyaft, etc.) geburft, gefonnt, gemod)t, gemuftt, etc. 
$ n j. : id) rjabe (bu fyabeft, etc.) geburft, gefonnt r gemod)t r gemufet, etc. 

^ttt^quampcrfeftum. 

Snb.: id) fjatte (bu rjatteft, etc.) gefonnt, gemod)t f gemufet, etc. 
^ n j. : id) fjatte (bu rjcitteft, etc.) geburft, gefonnt, gemodjt, etc. 

$uturum, 

%nb. : itf) merbe (bu mirft, etc.) biirfen, fonnen, mogen, etc. 
Si on j. : id) merbe (bu roerbeft, etc.) biirfen, fonnen, mogen, etc. 

Sfuturum egaftum. 

Sub.: id) merbe (bu mirft, etc.) geburft rjaben, gefonnt rjaben, etc. 
$ n ). : id) merbe (bu merbeft, etc.) geburft rjaben, gefonnt fjaben, etc. 

$rdfen3: id) miirbe (bu raiirbeft, ( etc.) biirfen, fonnen, mogen, etc. 
^erfcftum : id) miirbe (bu raiirbeft, etc.) geburft rjaben, gefonnt fjabeu, etc. 

149. Remarks on the Auxiliaries of Mode. 

1*. $iirfetu 

The ordinary meaning of biirfen is to be permitted ; thus, barf 
id) au3ge()en ? may I go out ? but it may mean dare; thus, id) 
barf nid)t in£ SSaffer fpringen, benn id) faun nictjt fd)raimmen, / dare 



156 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

not jump into the water, for I cannot swim. It has also a pecu- 
liar use in the imperfect subjunctive. Here it means may, as 
bte3 biirfte morj)l tvafyl fetlt, this may perhaps be true. 

2. ^imnen. 

The original meaning of fonnen was to know, and this is still 
preserved in some expressions, as fonnert ©ie beutjtf), do you know 
or understand Germany but it ordinarily corresponds to the 
English can ; as, id) fann lefen unb ftfvretben, I can read and write. 

Sftogen has also several uses. It means may in such expres- 
sions as, e<§ mag toafyr fein, it may be true, and it is very often 
employed in expressing like and dislike for a person or a thing ; 
thus, ttf) mag ba$ nttfjt, / do not like that. In the imperfect sub- 
junctive it is used in speaking of what one would like to do or to 
purchase ; thus, roomtt fann id) Sfynen bienert ? how can I serve you ? 
ttf) motf)te etnen §ttt faufen, I should like to buy a hat ; motf)ten ©ie 
tn£ ^fjeater gefyen? would you like to go to the theater? 

4. TOffetu 

Sfttiff en has only the one meaning, must, but as must has in En- 
glish but one tense, the present, some care must be taken in 
translating the various tenses from the German ; thus ttf) tmtfjte 
ttatf) §ctufe getjen, does not mean / must go home, but / had to go 
or was obliged to go home. 

5. ©otfen> 

©often means both shall and ought. It relates both to duty 
(which was its original signification) and to authority ; thus, ma3 
foil ttf) tun ? what shall I do ? ®te fatten fritter tommen follen, you 
ought to have come sooner. In the imperfect subjunctive after 
menn it relates to an event that may happen, but is not certain ; 
thus, menn z§> regnen follte, fo lonnten mir mtf)t au^farjren, if it should 
rain, we could not ride out. It is also used in referring to a 
thing that has been said or reported as a fact, but which the 



THE VERB 157 

speaker does not vouch for ; thus, 5llejartber Hamilton foil biefe 
QMmne gepflanjt tjaben, Alexander Hamilton is said to have planted 
these trees. 

6. g&ottat. 

3SoIIen signifies will, choice or desire ; as, id) \v\U 0,ef)en, / will 
go ; xva§ tvolim @ie, what do you wish f In the imperfect tense it 
means would or wished; thus, id) too lite f)ing,ef)en,aber tcf) burfte ntdjt, 
/ wished to go there, but I was not permitted. Sometimes it refers 
to an event that is about to happen, etrt Sftcmrt, ber nad) (Sncjlanb 
gef]en roollte, « man who was just about to start for England. It 
has also a peculiar use in such assertive phrases as, er ftntf biefe 
©d)u(b be§at)It fyaben, he claims to have paid this debt. 

150. The Causative Auxiliary, laffen, to Jet, permit, to cause 
a thing to be done. 

Principal Parts : laffen, ltef$, gelaffen. Aux., fjaben. 

1. This verb, in addition to its independent uses, may be joined 
to the infinitive of another verb in a manner similar to the aux- 
iliaries of mode, and is sometimes classed with them ; e. g., 
Saffert ®ie mid) etntreten. Let me enter. 

2So laffen ©ie Sljre ^letber Where do you have your cloth- 

mad)en ? ing made ? 

Scf) laffe fie bet bent ©cfynetber I have it made by the tailor 

5lbter matfjen. Adler. 

9?ad)ften ©omnter toerbe id) em Next summer I shall have a 

,£)au£ bauen laffen. house built. 

1 
Translate and Write: 

1 . May I open the window ? Yes, if it is too warm here. 
2. Have you translated the sentence ? No, I was not able to 
translate it. 3. Is this news true ? It may indeed be true. 
4. Were you at school to-day ? No, I wished to go, but I was 
obliged to remain at home. 5. What can I do for you ? (how can 
I serve you ?) I should like to buy some (several) handkerchiefs. 



158 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

151. gobett, to praise, Pri?icipal Parts : lo&Ctt, lobte, gclo&t. 

A Vei'b of the Weak {regular) Conjugation. Aux. : fjafieit. 

$rafen§. Sm^erfeltum. 

Snbifatib. tonjunfttb. Snbtfatib, ^onjunftiD. 

I praise I may praise I praised I might praise 

id) lobe id) lobe id) lobte id) lob(e)te 

bu lobft bit lobeft bn lobteft bit lob(e)teft 

er Io6t er lobe er lobte er lob(e)te 

totr loben ruir loben loir lobten toir lob(e)ten 

tl)r lobt i()r lobet il)r lobtet tfjr lob(e)tet 

fie loben fie loben fie lobten fie lob(e)ten 

^crfeftum. 

5 n b. : id) Ijctbe (bn l)dft, er l)at, etc.) gelobt, I have praised. 

6 n j. : id) l)abe (bn l)abeft f er t)abc, etc.) gelobt, I may have praised. 

$hi3quam}> erf ef turn. 

3 n b. : id) l)atte (bu l)atteft f er l)attc, etc.) gelobt, I had praised. 
SI n j. : id) Ijcttte (bu Ijcitteft, etc.) gelobt, I might have praised. 

$uturum. 

3 u b. : id) loerbe (bu nnrft, etc.) loben, I shall praise. 
St n j. : id) loerbe (bu toerbeft, etc.) loben, I shall praise. 

gfutttrum egaftum. 

Sub.: id) toerbe (bu loirft, etc.) gelobt tjaben, I shall have praised. 
St n j. : id) toerbe (bu nierbefl, etc.) gelobt t)ctben, I shall have praised. 

®onbttiottaU3 $rafen3, 

id) toiirbe, etc. (bu toitrbeft, etc.) loben, I should or would praise. 

®0ttbtttmtali3 $erfeftum. 

id) toitrbe(butourbeft, etc.) gelobt l)aben, I should or would have praised. 

Smperath): (Sing, lobe, praise (thou); ^lur. lob(e)t, praise (you). 
Sitfittitfo: ^3raf. loben, praise; ^erf. gelobt ^aben, have praised. 
^arttstytett : ^rcif. lobenb, praising; ^erf. gelobt, praised. 



THE VERB 159 

Stout) e?f a tion* 

2 e vj r e r. 2Sa3 fiir etn $erb ift (often ? — © d) ft I e r. S b e n 
ift etn 8$er& ber )d)tuact)en (regelmdfcigeu) Conjugation. 

5. ©e6en ©ie mir bie ©tynopfig oon 1 b e n im Snbifatio. — 
© clj. 3d) lobe, id) lobte, id) l)abt gelobt, id) l)atte gelobt, id) roerbe 
loben, tc^ merbe gelobt rjaben. 

2. Conjugieren ©ie loben im ^lu^quamperfeltum Conjunftib. — 
©d). 3d) fjatte gelobt, bu fjatteft gelobt, er tjdtte gelobt,- etc. 

2. Hftennen ©ie mir etnige anbere 5Ber6en ber fdjtoadjen Conjuga- 
tion. — © dj. ©oil tcf) bie §auptformen geben ober blo3 bie Snfinitioe ? 

& (Men ©ie mir nur bie §auptformen. 



^nfinitit). 


3mp erf ef him. 


2. %att 


adjten, to respect 


a&jtett 


geadjtet 


abbieren, to add 


abbierte 


abbiert (121, 5) 


bauen, to build 


baute 


^baut 


erfldren, to explain 


erfldrte 


erfldrt (121, 5) 


glauben, to believe 


glaubte 


geglaubt 



2Ser lobt ben guten ©crjftler ? £>er £et)rer tobt tfm. 

SSarum lobt er itjn ? @r lobt ttjtt, loeil er f)oflid) unb fletfeig tft. 

5(d)teft bu beine (Sttern ? D ja, id) act)te fie fet)r. 

SSer l)at btefe^ grofce fQau$ gebaut ? 3d] tuetft nid)t, roer e3 ^baut 
v)at, aber ^err Sen^ v)at e3 bauen laffen. 

Glauben ©ie atfeS, mag ©ie f)oren ? -jftem, id) glaube nur, \va§ 
bemiefen ift. 

Translate and Write : 
1 
1 . What kind of a verb is glauben ? It is a verb of the weak 

conjugation. 2. Conjugate abbieren in the perfect indicative. 

3. Does the teacher praise the naughty scholars ? No, he does 

not praise them. 4. Who built that new house ? I do not know, 

but Mr. Wollman had it built. 5 . Can you explain this sentence ? 

No, I cannot explain it, for I do not understand it. 6. Go to 

the blackboard (156) and write the principal parts of Oermieten 

and galjlen. 7. Translate and write this sentence. 



i6o 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



152. Sofcett, to praise, Passive Voice (133) : Aux. tuerbeit. 
$rafett§. $mtoerfeftum. 



Snbifattb: 


®ottjunfttto. 


^rtbtfatit). 


Sonjunftib. 


I am 


I may be 


I was 


I might be 


praised 


praised 


praised 


praised 


id) tuerbe 


id) tuerbe 


id) tuurbe 


id) tuurbe 


bu totrft 


bu tuerbeft 


bu tuurbeft 


bu tuiirbeft 


er tuirb 


%, er tuerbe 


^ er rourbe 


*§, er tuurbe 


luir tuerben 


g? rotr tuerben 


s: iuir tunrben 


S: rutr tuiirben 


il)r roerbet 


ttjr roerbet 


il)r tuurbet 


itjr tuiirbet 


fie tuerben 


fie Herbert _ 


fie tunrben 


fie roiirben 



^crfcftum. 

3 n b. : id) Bin (bu frift, etc.) gelobt tuorben, I have been praised. 
$ n j. : id) f et (bu feieft, etc.) gelobt tuorben, I may have been praised. 

$ht3quamberfeftum. 

^nb. : id) toar (bu tuarft, etc.) gelobt tuorben, I had been praised. 
$ n j. : id) tuare (bu tuareft, etc.) gelobt tuorben, I might have been 

Sutimtm. [praised. 

id) tuerbe (bu tuirft, etc.) getotit roerben, I shall be praised. 

id) tuerbe (bu tuerbeft, etc.) gelobt tuerben, I shall be praised. 

ftuhmtm esaftum. [praised, 

id) tuerbe (bu tuirft, etc.) gelobt tuorben fein, I shall have been 
id) tuerbe (bu roerbeft, etc.) gelobt tuorben fein, I shall have been 
^onbittonattS ^rfifenS. [praised, 

id) toiirbe (bu iuitrbeft, etc.) gelobt tuerben, I should be praised. 

$frmtuti0ttatt3 ^erfeftum. 
id) tuiirbe, etc., gelobt tuorben fein, I should have been praised. 

^mtoerath) : © i n g. : tuerbe gelobt, be (thou) praised ; ^ t u r. : toerbet 

gelobt, be (ye) praised. 
Snfimtit) : $)3 r a f. : gelobt tuerben, to be praised ; ^ e r f. : gelobt 

tuorben fein, to have been praised. 
^arttatbteit : ^5 r a f. : gelobt tuerbenb, being praised ; ^ e r f. : gelobt 

tuorben, been praised. 



Sub. 
®onj 

Snb. 
®onj 



THE VERB l6l 

Stonfcetfattom 

Sefjrer. 28a3 fur erne gorm be3 $erb3 tjabett toir t)ier ? — 
<© d) ii 1 e r. 28tr f)aben bie paffioe gorm. 

£. 2Sa3 fiir $erben roerben in ber paffioen gorm f onjugiert ? — 
@d). 9Ute tranfitioen $erben tjaben biefe gortn. 

2. 9tennen ©ie mir eintge atibere tranfitioe $erben. 

© d). t)ofen, to fetch t)dren, to hear fpietcn, to play 

lieben, to love madjen, to make (efjren, to teach 

2. <8inb btefe £krben gebrductjltcr) ? — <3cij. 3a, fetjr gebraud)tid). 

2. ©ef)en <3te an bte Xafel itnb fctjreiOert ©te bte @t)nopft3 Oon 
lieben im s $affioum, SnbifattO unb SlonjunfttO (ber (Skitter get)t nnb 
fcfyretbt : id) roerbe geliebt, n. f . to.). 

3)te gute Gutter liebt unb lobt if)r gute£ $inb. (Ste liebt e3, roeit 
fie eine gute Gutter ift ; unb fie lobt e$, toeit e£ fleifu'g unb lieben^- 
toltrbig ift. ©3 ift iinmer fo ; bie guten ®inber toerben t)on alien guten 
9Jtenfd]en geliebt unb gelobt. $ergif$ ba$ nidjt, mein Stinb ; toenn bu 
immer gut unb liebretd) bleibft, fo toirft bit Oon jebermann, ber bid) 
fennt f geliebt unb gelobt toerben. 

2 e I) r e r. SDefltnieren ©te ba3 3Sort Gutter. — © cij. 2)ie Gutter, 
ber Gutter, ber Gutter, bie Gutter; plural, bie Gutter, u.f.to. 

£. 28efd)e3 finb bie §auptformen Oon lieben? — <Sct). Steben, 
liebte, geliebt. 

2. ^onjugieren @ie f p i e 1 e n im ^erfeftum bcS 3nbtfatio3. — <5 dj. 
id) Ijabe gefpiett, u. f. to. 

Translate a,nd Write : 

i . Is this the active or the passive voice of the verb ? It is 
the passive voice. 2. Is loben a transitive or an intransitive verb ? 
It is a transitive verb. 3. Is lieben a common verb ? Yes, a very 
common verb. 4. Does the good mother love her children ? 
(Loves the mother, etc.) Yes, she loves them very-much. 
5. Why does she love them ? She loves them because she is a 
good mother. 6. Is this the dictionary that you bought yester- 
day in New York ? Yes it is (the same, § 89). 



1 62 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



153. Examples of Weak Verbs. 

Like loben are conjugated the greater part of German verbs, 
among the commonest of which are : 



bcwen, to build 
brcwd)en, to need, use 
ebjren, to honor 
ctlen, to hasten 
frctgen, to ask 
fiifjren, to lead, guide 
gtaubcn, to believe 
f) off en, to hope 
Ijoren, to hear 



fctufen, to buy 
ladjen, to laugh 
leben, to live 
legen, to lay 
(efjren, to teach 
lernen, to learn 
lieben to love 
mad)en, to make 
fctgen, to say, tell 



fd)tden, to send 
fd)meden,to taste 
fpielen, to play 
ftellen, to place 
fudjen, to seek 
toeinen, to weep 
roofynen, to dwell 
gafjlen, to count 
getgen, to show 



154. Orthographic Irregularities of Weak Verbs. 

i. In the conjugation of weak verbs euphony sometimes 
requires an e between the final letter of the root and an inflec- 
tional ending beginning with a consonant. This applies to verbs 
the roots of which end in b, bm, bit, t, tilt, dpi, glt f fftl, such as 
tanben, adjten, atmen, etc. 

Compare the conjugation of lobert, to praise, with ctd)ten, to 
respect. 

PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. 



id) lobe 


id) lobte 


id) ad)te 


id) act)tcte 


bu lobft 


bu (obteft 


bu adjteft 


bu adjteteft 


er lobt 


er lobte 


er acfjtet 


er ad)tete 


ttur (oben 


nrir (obten 


tt)ir ad)ten 


tutr ad)teten 


it)r lobt 


it)r (obtet 


ifyr acf)tet 


it)r afytetet 


fie (oben 


fie lobten 


fie ad)ten 


fie adjteten 




Examples 


(J© e t f p i e I e). 




INFINITIVE. 


IMPERFECT. 


PAST. PART. 




lanbett 


(anbete 


gelanbet 


to land 


anttoorten 


annuortete 


geantiuortet 


to answer 


red) it en 


redjnete 


geredjnet 


to reckon 


offnen 


offnete 


geoffnel 


to open 






THE VERB 163 

2. Verbs ending in -eln, or -errt are regular except that the 
ending of the infinitive is only tt (not en), and that the first person 
singular of the present indicative of those in -eln loses the c 
before I. 

Examples (33 e if pi el e). . 



bettelrt 


Mtdte 


gebettelt 


to beg 


rjctnbeut 


rjctnbelte 


gefjanbelt 


to act 


tin bent 


tinberte 


getinbert 


to change 


rubern 


mberte 


gembert 


to row 



Present Tenses of fietteln and dttbertt* 

id) bettle, I beg id) tinbere, I change 

bit Bettelft bu tinberft 

er fcettelt er tinbert 

totr betteln ttrir tinbern 

tljr bettelt tfjr ctnbert 

fie betteln fie tinbern 

3. Verbs the roots of which end in a sibilant (f r f$, ff, fcfj, 5) may 
add or omit the euphonic e in the second person singular of the 
present tense ; e. g., 

reifen, to travel. Princ. parts : reifen, retfte, geretft. 

Spr&fcnS: id) reife, bn retfefy or retft, er retft, totr reifen, etc. 

In like manner are conjugated : 



Qrii&ett 


grirfcte 


gegrtifet 


to greet 


ttmnfd)en 


ttmnfcfjte 


gettmnfcfjt 


to wish 


tcm^en 


tcmjte 


getan^t 


to dance 



4. Verbs with the first syllable unaccented do not take the 
prefix ge in the past participle (see § 121, 5). Such are ; ctbbieren, 
to add ; be^arjlen, to pay ; ergtirjlen, to relate, etc. 



164 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

A Strong Verb with the Auxiliary (jabcu* 
155. (Uefoen, to give. Principal Parts : gc6ett f gab, gegcfcetu 





$rafen3. 


$m$>erfeftmm 


Snbtfattb. 


®onjunftit>. 


^ttbifatit). 


®ottjunfttt>. 


I give 


I may give 


I gave 


I might give 


id) gebe 


id) gebe 


id) gab 


id) gabe 


bu gibft 


bu gebeft 


bn gabft 


bn gtibeft 


er gtbt 


er gebe 


er gab 


er gabe 


ftnr geben 


nn'r geben 


ftir gaben 


fair gaben 


ifyr gebt 


ifyr gebet 


ifyr gabt 


ifyr gabet 


fie geben 


fie geben 


fie gaben 


fie gaben 



^erfeftum. 

Snb. : id) fyahz (bn l)aft f er fyat, etc.) gegeben, I have given. 

$ o n j. : id) fyabe (bn fyabeft, er fyabc, etc.) gegeben, I may have given. 

$ltt3quam$)erfeftttm. 

Snb. : id) §atk (bu fyatteft, er fyatte, etc.) gegeben, I had given. 
$ o n j. : id) fydtte (bn fyatteft, er fjtitte, etc.) gegeben, I might have given. 

§uturtttn, 

S n b. : id) toerbe (bn nrirft, er toirb, etc.) geben, I shall give. 
®on j. : id) tnerbe (bn toerbeft, er toerbe, etc.) geben, I shall give. 

$utuntm cgaltum* 

Snb. : id) inerbe (On toirft, etc.) gegeben fyaben, I shall have given. 
® o n j. : id) toerbe (bu merbeft, etc.) gegeben fyaben, I shall have given. 

®onbtttotialt3 ^rfifett^ 

id) toiirbe (bn toiirbeft, etc.) geben, I should or would give. 

®0ttbttumati3 $erfeftum. 
id) toiirbe, etc., gegeben fyaben, I should or would have given. 

3m*)erati& : ©ing. gib, give (thou); ^lur. geb(e)t, give (you). 
Sttfmttiti : ^3rdf. geben, give ; ^erf. gegeben fyaben, have given. 
*partisi|jictt : ^rdf. gebenb, giving; g$erf. gegeben, given. 



THE VERB 165 

Stent) etfattotu 

2$a3 [)aft bu ba ? 3d) fjabe ein fdjflneS SBtlb. 

SBtllft bu ey mtr gebeu ? Dcein, id) tt)iU e3 bir uicfjt gebeu. 

SSarum uidjt ? SBeil e3 mir uicfjt gefjort (170, 3). 

2£em gefjort e3 ? ©3 gefjort meiuem 23ruber. 

2Sa3 tottfft bu mtr gebeu ? 3d) mill btr biefe fcfjbue $afe gebeu. 

3Sa3 fjaft bu ^ebtutg gegebeu ? 3d) fjabe ifjr eiue Ufjr gegebeu. 

SBerftefjft bu bte beutfdje ©rammattf ? 3d) lerue fie efieu. 

@ib mir bie ©t)uopfi3 t»ou geBeit im Snbtfarto. 3d) gebe, id) gab, 
id) fjabe gegebeu, id) tjatte gegebeu, icf) merbe geben, id) raerbe gegebeu 
t)aben. 

Su toeldjem galle ftef»t ba<3 2Sort mir ? @g ftefjt im £)atto. 

9lt)o gebeu regiert beu $)arto. @ebeu regiert eiue ^erfon im £)atit) 
unb eiue ©acfje im 5Iccufatio. 

9tenue mir einige ber gebraucfjlicfjfteu $erbeu, tuelcfje eiue ^erfou im 
3)atto uub eiue ©adje im ^ccufarto regiereu. ©efjr gebrductjltct) finb : 

aubieten, to offer fagen, to say, tell 

briugen, to bring fctjicfen, to send 

ergafjlen, to relate fcfjeufen, to present 

gebeu, to give oorfefeu, to read (to one) 

leifyeu, to lend getgert, to show 

SSoHen ®ie mir germ Wlavf Iett)en ? 3a, mit Skrguitgen. 
SBttte, fcfjideu ©ie mir ba§ $8u&) §uriid, rrjelct)e^ ©ie oorige 2Socfje 
geborgt tjabert. 3d) raill e3 gleicfj guriidfefjideu (160, 1). 

1 
Translate and Write : 

1. What have you there? I have a fountain-pen. 2. To 
whom does it belong ? It belongs to me. 3. Will you give it 
to me ? No, I will not give it to you, but I will lend it to you. 
4. Please send me the books that belong to me. 5. Who 
related this story to you ? My mother related it to me. 6. Please 
show me your collection of photographs. You have a fine col* 
lection. 



166 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

A Strong Verb with the Auxiliary fettt* 
156. (Bel)en, to go. Principal Parts : gcfjen, ghtg, gegangen. 





$rafett3. 


^mperfeftam. 


Snbilattto. 


flonjuttftib. 


Snbifatito. 


&onjunfttt>. 


I go 


I may go 


I went 


I might go 


id) ger)e 


id) gefje 


id) ging 


id) ginge 


bu QC^ft 


bu gerjeft 


bu gingft 


bu gingcft 


er gerjt 


er gelje 


er ging 


er ginge 


rotr gerjen 


tm'r gef)en 


fair gin gen 


lutr gtngcn 


Hjr gef)t 


itjr ge()et 


i()r gingt 


ifyr ginget 


fie gefyen 


fie gef)en 


fie gingeu 


fie gin gen 



y 



^erfeftum. 

3 n b. : id) bin (bu bift, er tft, etc.) gegangen, I have gone. 

^ o n j. : id) fei (bu feieft, er fei r etc.) gegangen, I may have gone. 

3n b. : id) roar (bn toarft, er tr>ar, etc.) gegangen f I had gone. 
$ o n j. : id) tntire (bu tncireft, etc.) gegangen, I might have gone. 

gfitturum. 

Sub. : id) toerbe (bu inirft, er toirb, etc.) gefjcn, I shall go. 
^on j. : id) tnerbe (bu roerbeft, etc.) gefjcn, I shall go. 

ftuturum cjaftum. 

Sub.: id) toerbe (bu toirft, etc.) gegctngen fetn, I shall have gone. 
$ o n j. : id) toerbe (bu tnerbeft, etc.) gegangen fetn, I shall have gone. 

$onMttottaii3 $rafen3. 

id) roitrbe (bu ttmrbeft, er ttmrbe, etc.) gerjen, I should or would go. 

$0ttbittimali3 ^erfeftum. 
id) toiirbe (bu roitrbeft, etc.) gegangen fetn, I should or would have gone. 

3mjjerath»: 'Sing. ger)(e) f go (thou); ?$L gerjt (gef)en ©ie) go (you). 
Sttfinitto : ^rdf. gerjen, go ; ^ er f. : gegangen fetn, to have gone. 
^artistyien : ^rtif. gerjenb, going; ^erf. gegangen, gone. 



THE VERB 167 

^unt»crfatiott» 

©uten SDforgen, $)la£, roof)in gerjft bit ? 3d) getje in bie ©dude. 

2So ift bein SSater ? Gr ift in bie (Btabt gegangen. 

2£o roarft bu geftern ? 3d) mar bet meinem Dnlel in 9ttbanrj. 

SBann toirft bu nad) 3)eutfd)lanb gefyen ? 3d) fjoffe nad)fte3 3af)r 
mit meinem better fyin^ugefjen. 

9Jat roeldjem «g)t(f^t>er£> mirb geljen lonjugiert ? Wit feiiu 

SScrben ade QSerben mit fein lonjugiert? D nein, nur gemiffe 
intranfitiue $crben roerben mit fein lonjugiert. 

D^enne mir einige ber gebriind)lid)ften SSerben, raelcfje mit fein fonju- 
giert merben. golgenbe finb fe()r gebrdud)lid) : 

SBegegncn, bleiben, fallen, fliegen, gerjen, lommen, gefdjerjen, finlen, 
ffcerben, roadmen (143, 2). 

Saben Sie §errn Ctto neu(id) gefeljen ? 3a, id) begegnete tfjm 
fjeute SDcorgen auf ber ©trafje (or id) bin ir)m begegnet). 

3So ift 5f)r 33ud) ? 3d) roetfj e3 nid)t ; eS ift oerloren gegangen. 

Sft 3t)r S3ruber ju «*paufe ? 3a, er ift eben angelommen. 

2Sa3 ift gefcrjerjen ? ©in £inb ift in3 SBaffer gefaffen. 

5ft ber arme SDcann nod) am £eben ? Dcein, er ift rjeute SDforgen 
geftorbcn. 

3So finb biefe ^3f(an§en getoacrjfen ? ©ie finb in unferem ©arten 
gemad)fcn. 

Stonjugieren <Sie b eg eg n en im ^rafen^ be3 ®onjunftit>3. 3d) 
bcgcgne, bu begegneft, *c. 

Translate and Write : 

1 . Where are you going ? We are going to the post-office. 

2. Is your uncle at home ? ( No, he has gone to Switzerland. 

3. Have you met Mr. Stein recently? Yes, I met him at the 
bank yesterday. 4. What has happened ? Two children have 
fallen into the river. 5. When did Mr. Lenz die ? He died on 
the 10th of July. 6. Did these apples grow in your orchard? 
No, they grew in Mr. Smith's garden. 7. Give the synopsis cf 
bleiben in the indicative (the pupil will write the required synop- 
sis). 8. Conjugate lommen in the perfect indicative (write the 
conjugation). 



i68 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



157. The Mixed Conjugation (bie gemtf d)te Conjugation). 

I. Nine verbs have in the imperfect and past participle the 
endings of the weak conjugation while undergoing the vowel 
change that characterizes the strong. This constitutes a separate 
conjugation called "mixed." These verbs are : 



INFINITIVE. 


IMPERFECT. 


PAST PART. 


brennen, to burn 


brannte 


gebrannt 


fennen, to know 


fannte 


gefannt 


nennen f to name, call 


narntte 


genannt 


rennen, to run 


rannte 


geranut 


fenben, to send 


fanbte 


gejanbt 


toenben, to turn 


toanbte 


getoanbt 


bringen, to bring 


bradjte 


gebracrjt 


benfen, to think 


badjte 


gebacrjt 


toiffen, to know 


toujjte 


getonfet 



2. Of these verbs only rennen is conjugated with fein, the others 
with tjctben. In the imperfect subjunctive they all follow the 
weak conjugation, thus, brermte, fennte, nennte, etc., except the last 
three, which are brad)te, bad)te, and toiiJ3te. 

3. The conjugation is otherwise regular except the present of 
toiffen which is, Indie, id) toetfc, bu toetfjt, er toetfj; Plur., toir 
rotffen, etc. ; Subj., id) toiffe, bu totffeft, er toiffe, etc. 

4. Bennett, means to know (a person), to be acquainted with ; 
as, Rennen @te §errn SBolf ? Do you know Mr. Wolff Stiffen 
means to know in general, as SStffen ©te too ^)err 32Solf tootjnt ? 
Zto jf/0^ know where Mr. Wolf lives ? They correspond to 
connaitre and savoir in French. 



158. Model verb, benfen, to *A//i/r. 

$raf. S n b. : id) benfe, bu benfft, er benft, toir benfen, 2c. 

^ottj.: id) benfe, bu benfeft, er benfe, toir benfen, 2c. 
3mto. S n b. : id) bact)te r bu bacfjteft, er bacfjte, toir batten, 2c. 

$ n j. : id) bdcr)te, bu badjteft, er bdct)te f toir batten, 2c. 



THE VERB 169 

$erf. Snb. : id) fja&e (bu §aft f er f)at, 2c.) gebacrjt. 

$ n j. : id) f)abe (bu §a6eft f er f)abe, 2c.) gebac^t. 
$fo£q. Snb.: id) fjatte (bu fjatteft, er t)atte, 2c.) gebacfjt. 

SI n j. : icf) fettle (bu fjatteft, er fjfttte, 2c.) gebacfjt. 
%ut. Sub.: id) tnerbe (bu toirft, er rotrb, 2c.) benfen. 

$onj. : id) toerbe (bu toerbeft, er toerbe, 2c.) benfen. 
ftnt'ts. Snb. : icf) toerbe (bu totrft, er ttrirb, 2c.) gebactjt f)abeu. 

$onj. : idj toerbe (bu ruerbeft, er tuerbe, 2c.) gebadjt f)aben. 
tfonb. $raf. : id) toitrbe (bu ftmrbeft, er trjitrbe, 2c.) benfen. 
tonb. *perf. : id) toiirbe (bu toitrbeft, 2C.f gebacfjt rjaben. 
^mpcratio : (Sing, benfe ; ^lur. benf(e)t (benfen ©te). 
Snfimtto : ^5 r a f . benfen ; ^ e r f. gebacfjt f)a6en. 
^ttrtist^tctt : ^ r a f. benfenb ; ^ e r f. gebadjt. 

$lont> erf atum* 

2Ba£ benfen ©ie Don btefem Jeanne ? 3d) betracfjte tfjn aU geftfjicft 
unb gufcerfdffig. 

^ennen ©ie §errn 5(ftmann ? Sa, id) fenne ifjn fefyr gut, er iff ein 
9tad)6ar t»on mir. 

2Ba3 iff ein SSettrennen ? (Sin SSettrennen iff ein SKennen , f um bie 
%&?tte," b. f). fur einen $prei3, ober, 6ei bem bk Qu)&jaua 2Betten 
madjen. 

SSiffen <Ste, too $err $lein ftorjnt ? Sa, er toofjnt in ber ffiaxtU 
ftrafce ber SHrctje gegeniiber. 

®ef)en ©ie an bie £afef unb fcr)reiben ©ie bie ©tjnopfi^ t)on nennen 
im Snbifatit) unb ^onjunftit) (ber ©cfjufer gefyt unb fdjreibt). 

Translate and Write: 

1. What do you think of these people ? I regard them as in- 
telligent and agreeable. 2. Do you know Mr. Weiss ? I know 
him only by name. 1 3. What did the farmer bring with (him) 
from the city ? He brought five peaches. 2 4. What is this con- 
jugation called ? 3 It is called the " mixed " conjugation. 5. Why 
is it called " mixed " ? It is called " mixed " because it is partly 
"strong" and partly "weak." 

1 bem 'ftamen nadj. 2 <5r bxafyte . . . mtt (164). 3 2Bie nennt man btefe Conjugation? 



170 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Reflexive Verbs (SRiitf^telenbe ZSevbeu). 

A reflexive verb takes as an object a reflexive pronoun repre- 
senting the subject itself and of the same person and number. It 
is always transitive and conjugated with fyaben. 

159. The Reflexive Verb fid) freuen, to rejoice, be pleased. 

Principal Parts : ftct) freuen, freute fid), fid) gefreut. 



$rafcn3. 



Smfcevfeftum. 

3nbifatit>. Sonjunftib. 



Snbifatib. $oujunftib. 

I rejoice I may rejoice I rejoiced I might rejoice 

id) freue mid) id) freue mid) id) freute micf) id) freute mid) 
bu freuft bid) bu freueft bid) bit freuteft bid) bit freuteft bid) 
er freut fid) er freue fief) er freute fid) er freute fid) 

loir freueu un£ loir freueu un3 loir freuten un3 roir freuten un§ 
if)r freut eud) if)r freuet eucf) if)r freutet end) if)r freutet eud) 
fie freuen fid) fie freuen fid) fie freuten fid) fie freuten fid) 

$erfeftum. 
Sub.: id) fjabe mid) (bu r)aft bid), etc.) gefreut, I have rejoiced. 
$ n j. : id) ()ct6e mid) (bu fyabeft bid), etc.) gefreut, I may have rejoiced. 

^Slu^uantberfeftimu 

3nb. : id) rjatte mid) (bu fyatttft bid), etc.) gefreut, I had rejoiced. 
^ n j. : id) fjtitte mid) (bu fjcttteft bid), etc.) gefreut, I might have 

Suturum. [rejoiced. 

3 n b. : icf) roerbe mid) (bu totrft bid), etc.) freuen, I shall rejoice. 
$ on j. : id) toerbe mid) (bu loerbeft bid), etc.) freuen, I shall rejoice. 

$utimtm Galium. 

Sub.: id) loerbe mid) gefreut I)a6en, I shall have rejoiced. 
$ it j. : id) roerbe mid) gefreut fjctben, I shall have rejoiced. 

tonbitimtaftS $rafeu3. 

icf) roitrbe micf) freuen, I should or would rejoice. 

$onbtttonali§ $e?feftum. 
icf) roitrbe mid) gefreut tjaben, I should or would have rejoiced. 
$mb. : (Sing, freue bid), rejoice ; ^3(ur. freut eud), rejoice (you). 
3«f. : ^rcif. fief) freuen, to rejoice; ^ erf.: fid) gefreut rjaoen. 
$art : ^3 r df. fief) freueub, rejoicing; ^erf. ficfj gefreut, rejoiced. 



THE VERB 171 

greuen @ie fid) ii6er btefe3 (5reigni3 ? Stein, id) freue mid) baruber 
ntdjt, tm ©egenteil, id) bebaure e3 fefjr. 

SSiirben <Ste fid) freuen, menu Sf)r 2kuber fjeute anfommen foHte ? 
3a, gerotfj roitrbe id) mid) barttber fef)r freuen. 

SBoruber freuen fid) biefe Slinber fo fefjr ? @ie freuen ftc£) itber bte 
Stnfimft ifjrer abutter. 

2Sie f)etj5t f t cr; freuen rrjdrtticr) auf engtifct) ? @£ fjetfjt, to r^^ 
oiies self, or to be pleased. 

Dcennen ©ie mir einige anbere reflerbe $erben, meldje rate „fid) 
freuen" fonjugiert merben. ©ef)r gebraud)(ict) finb : 

fid) beeilen, to hasten fid) geroofmen, to accustom one's 

fid) bemuljen, to take trouble self to 

fid) ertmtern, to remember fid) fetjen, to take a seat 

fid) erldlten, to take cold fid) aufljatten, to stop, tarry 

fid) erfunbigen, to inform one's fid) uorbereiten, to prepare one's 

self. self (for something) 

fid) fiircrjien, to be afraid fid) befinnen, to recollect 

•SBtlben ©ie ©a§e, in benen btefe SBerben Dorfommen. 

^Beetle bid), fonft rotrft bit fpctt in bie ©d)u(e fommen. 

SBemiifjen @ie fid) nicfjt, id) tuerbe mid) felbft bebienen. 

3d) fann mid) nid)t erinnern, mo id) meinen s J?egenfd)trm gelaffen fjabe. 

§aben ©ie fid) erfciltet ? 3a, aber nid)t fel)r fdjraer. 

3d) fjabe mid) erfunbigt unb f)abc erfarjren, baft biefe3 £)aug gu tier- 

mieten ift. 

Translate and Write : 

1. Are you pleased with (do you rejoice over) this news ? Yes, 
I am very much pleased with it. 2. Would you rejoice if you 
should receive a letter from your brother to-day ? 3. Name a 
very common reflexive verb. 4. Form a sentence in which the 
verb fid) fet}en occurs. 5. Walk in, take a seat. 6. I cannot 
remember where I left the books. 7. Hurry or you will be late. 
8. How did you take cold? That I do not know. 9. Do not 
take the trouble to bring the pen back (128, 2). 



172 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

160. Separable and Inseparable Verbs. 

(Srennbare mtb mttremtbare $erben.) 

1. A separable verb is one that has a prefix that, in certain 
constructions, is separated from it and placed at the end of the 
clause; e. g., gefjen, to go ; cm^gerjen, to go out; er gtng fjeute 
morgen urn 5ef)n ilfjr au3, he went out at ten o'clock this morning. 
Many prepositions and adverbs are employed as separable pre- 
fixes. They may be simple ; as ctb, cm, ctu3, bet, mit, nad), ()in, 
fycr, rueg, §u r or compound, as beoor, bctfjer, batjin, fjinauf, fjinab, 
()eran3, gnfammen. 

2. These prefixes are freely applied to any verb where the 
sense requires it, but they are separable only in simple tenses 
and in principal clauses. In compound tenses and independent 
clauses they are not separable; e. g., 
3d) fctm fjente morgen urn 10 I arrived at io o'clock this 

llrjr an. morning. 

9tt3 icfj anfam, begcgnete id) $>errn As I arrived I met Mr. Alt- 
Stttmann. mann. 

?(nfommen, to arrive, is separable in the first example, being 
in a simple tense and in a principal clause ; but inseparable in 
the second because it is in a dependent clause (al$ icfj anfam). 

161. The Inseparable Prefixes. 

An inseparable verb has an unaccented prefix. The prefixes 
that are always inseparable are : 

fie, tmp, ent, er, ge, tier, $er. 

These prefixes are not words, but only syllables the significa- 
tion of which depends upon their connection with verbs. 



162. The Prefixes mift and t»oH 

TOf; is almost always inseparable as in mtfjitngen, to fail, and 
mijsbraucrjen, to misuse. With Doll are formed a few inseparable 
compounds such as Dollbringen, to accomplish, and OoHenben, to 
finish, also several separables such as Ooftgiefjen, to pour full. 



THE VERB 173 

163. Separable and Inseparable Verbs Contrasted. 

There are several contrasts between the separable and insepa- 



rable verbs, namely : 

A separable verb has a sepa- 
rable prefix. 
The prefix is accented. 
The past participle takes ge. 



An inseparable verb has an in- 
separable prefix. 
The prefix is unaccented. 
The past part, does not take ge. 



164. A Separable Verb : auS'gefyett, to go out. 

Principal Parts : auS'gefjen, gtng — au3, au^gegangen. 
(see gefjen, 156). 

$rafett§. 

Snb.: id) gefje (bu geoft, er gefjt, etc.) au3, I go out. 
$onj. : id) gefje (bu gefjeft, er gefje, etc.) au3, I may go out. 

^mperfeftum. 

5 n b. : idj ging (bu gtngft, er ging, etc.) au§, I went out. 

®on j. : id) gtnge (bu gingeft, er gtnge, etc.) ctu3, I might go out. 

^erfeftum. 

Sub. : id) bin (bu btft, er tft, etc.) au<8gegangen, I have gone out. 
®onj. : id) fei (bu feieft, etc.) att^gegcmgen, I may have gone out. 

$ut3quamj>erfeftttttt. 

Snb. : id) toar (bu rnarft, er tear, 1 etc.) auSgegangen, I had gone out. 
$on j. : id) roare (bu to&rejr, etc.) ctu3gegcmgen, I might have gone out. 

gfutimtm. 

Snb. : id) roerbe (bu rotrft, er unrb, etc.) au3gefjen, I shall go out. 
$onj. : id) toerbe (bu toerbeft, etc.) cut3gel)en, I shall go out. 

^ttturum ejaftum. 

^nh.: id) toerbe au3gegcmgen fetn, I shall have gone out. 
$onj. : id) tnerbe ctu^gegctngen fetn, I shall have gone out. 



174 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

ftonbttiomittS $rafen3, 
id) ttmrbe (bit toitrbeft, etc.) cmSgeljen, I should or would go out. 
^onbtttoitalte ^erfeftum. 

id) nn'trbe ansgegangen fern, I should or would have gone out. 

3m^ : (5 in 9. get) au§, go (thou) out; ^3(ur. gel)t ctu$, go (you) out. 
3nf. : ^prtif. auSgerjen, go out ; ^erf. auggegangen fein, to have gone 

[out. 
$art. : ^rdf. anSge()enb, going out\ *)3erf. an^gegangen, gone out. 

165. An Inseparable Verb, bdofjncn, to reward. 

Principal Parts : belofjnen, beloljnte, be(of)nt. 

The conjugation of an inseparable verb has no peculiarity 
except that the unaccented and inseparable prefix replaces the 
characteristic ge in the past participle, thus avoiding the pres- 
ence of two unaccented syllables at the beginning of a word; 
thus the synopsis of belotjnen in the indicative is : 

3d) bclotjne, id) beloljnte, id) fjabe belofynt, id) (jatte belotjnt, id) toerbe 
belofnten, id) loerbe beloljnt Ijaben. 

® onto erf ation. 

©uten £ag, ^f)iu>p, tft 3ftr $ater %\\ §aufe ? Sftetn, er tft eben 
au^gegangen. 

SSann fommt er §nrM ? £)a3 rrjei§ id) nid)t. 

Urn rrj»iet»tel lUjr gefyen ©ie morgen3 au§ ? 3d) ge^e getnbfynrtd) 
gegen ad)t Ufyr au£. 

2Ba$ fur ein $erb ift a u 3 g e f) e n ? (S3 ift ein trenn6are3 $erb. 

Slommt bie Xrennung in alien gettformen Dor ? ^ e * n r f* e fommt 
nur in ben einfadjen geitformen nnb gtoar nur in ^)anptfdgen Dor. 

©tbt e3 Diele tremtbare SBerben ? Set, febr triete. 

($tbtn <Ste mir einige 23etfpte(e Don trennbaren $erben. llnter ben 
gebiaud)lid)|ten finb 511 nennen : 

ab'lteferrt, to deliver toor'gtefjen, to prefer 

ab'fcfyretben, to copy toeg'gefjen, to go away 



THE VERB 175 

cm'nefjmen, to accept ^u'macrjen, to close, shut 

cm'fommen, to arrive rjinanfgerjen, to ascend 

auffterjen, to arise rjtnctb'fteigen, to descend 

au^'fpredjen, to pronounce fjinetifgerjen, to enter 

bei'morjtten, to attend Oorbet'reiten, to ride past 

em'fctben, to invite guriidTfe^ren, to return 

mtfnerjmen, to take with ^uritd'fommen, to come back 

Q3t(ben Ste etnen ®a(3, in bent ba$ SSort abfcrjreiben Dorfommt. 
3d) l)abe litcine 2lufgabe gefdjrteben unb abgefcfjrteben. 

23t(ben <5ie etnen (Sag, in bent ba$ 2Bort an3fprecrjen im Snt- 
peratiD Dorfommt. ©precrjen ©ie ba$ SBort rtcrjttg au3. 

23i(ben @te einen ©a£, in meldjem ein trennbare£ $erb in einem 
9?ebenfa£ Dorfommt. 3d) gtng geftern in bie <5taU, unb aU id) 
guriicffam, begegnete id) Sfyrem 53ruber. 

©eben ©te mir einige SBetfptele Don untrennbaren $erben. ©erjr 
gebraucrj(id) finb : 

begafjten, to pay entteden, to discover 

empferjlen, to recommend Derfprecfjen, to promise 

er^afylen, to relate gerbrecrjen, to break in pieces 

gefctllen, to please 

S3t(ben <5ie etnen (3a|, in bem ba$ SSort be^arjlentm ^Lugquam- 
perfeftum be3 StonjunftiD3 Dorfommt. SSenn er mir fetne ©djulb be^aljlt 
tjatte, fo mitrbe id) metne eigenen ©dmlben be§a£)(t tjaben. 

Translate (and Write : 

1. Are you going out this morning? No, I shall remain at 
home the whole day. 2. Have you copied the exercise? No, 
not yet. 3. When do you intend to copy it ? I intend to copy 
it this evening. 4. Will you accept their invitation ? No, I 
shall not accept it. 5. Who informed you (imparted to you) 
this news ? I read it in the newspaper. 6. At what time did 
your friends arrive ? They arrived at ten o'clock this morning. 
7. Where are you going ? I am going to the city. 8. When 



176 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

will you return ? I hope to return to-morrow evening. 9. The 
letter which I am now copying will be delivered in the city to- 
morrow evening. 

166. Verbs Separably or Inseparably Compounded. 

Several prepositions, namely burd), through; f)trtter, behind; 
itBer, over ; unter, under^nA. um, around, are separably or insepa- 
rably compounded with a verb, with a difference of meaning. 
When separable they are taken in a literal sense, when insepa- 
rable in a figurative sense. 

Examples (33 e i \ p t e I e). 
Separable. Inseparable. 

burcfy'retfen, to travel through burrfjret'fen, to travel about in a 

a country (without stop- country 

P^g) 

fjtn'tergefyen, to walk behind t)tntergel)'en, to deceive 

it'berfegen, to set across uberfe^'en, to translate 

un'terfycttten, to hold under unter fyalt'ert, to entertain 

um'gefjen, to go around (by a umge'fyen, to evade 

circuitous way) 

£)urrf)'ret)en as Separable. 
Principal Parts: burtffretfen, retfte — burd), burrfj'geretft. 

£)urtf)retfen as Inseparable. 
Principal Parts : burtfjrei'fen, burcfyret'fte, burdjretft' . 

167. Verbs with Compound Prefixes. 

Compound prefixes such as cmfrecf)t, upright; fytnctuf, up; f)ina6, 
down; boran, before, in front, are of frequent occurrence and are 
always separable ; e. g., 

5lufred)tftel)en, to stand erect ; ftcmb — aufred)t, aufrecf)tgeftcmben. 

feinaufatfyn, to ascend ; gtng — fyinauf, fytnaufgegcmgen. 

£>tnabfteigen, to descend; ftteg — fn'nab, f)tnabgefttegen< 



v 



THE VERB 177 

Exercise (It bung)* 

Set) fenue bie @tf)toet§ fetjr gut. 3d) burdjrei'fte ba$ gauge £aub. 
9Str fanbert greuube, bie im£ jefyr gut uutertjiefteu. 
Sd) §abt meiue 2Iufgabe iiberjetrt' unb gefdjrieben. 
©te()e aufred)t uub gib ad)t tote ein guter ©olbat. 
2Sir gingeu beu 2terg tjinauf uub fabeu bie ©onne aufgei)en. 
©pater ftiegen tutr bett 33erg f)iuab uub fetjrten iu bte <&tabt guriid. 



A Verb both Separable and Reflexive. 
168. Sid) afcttJcnben, to turn away from. 

Principal Parts : fid) abroeuben, tocmbte fid) ab, fid) ab^tvanbt 

$rafen3. 

Sub. : id) roenbe mid) (bu raeubeft bid), etc.) ab, I turn away. 

$ u j. : id) tuenbe mid) (bu raeubeft bid), etc.) ab, I may turn away. 

Smjjerfeftuttt. 

3 n b. : id) raanbte mid) (bu roanbteft bid), etc.) ab, I turned away. 
$ u j. : id) rocmbte mid) (bu manbteft bid), etc.) a^ f I might turn away. 

^erfeftum. [away. 

Sub.: id) f)abe mid) (bu ()aft bid), etc.) abgemanbt, I have turned 
® n j. : id) fyabz mid) (bu ()abeft bid), etc.) abgeraaubt, I may have 

[turned away. 
^Jtt^qttctnt^crfcftnm. 

Sub.: id) fyattt mid) (bu fyatiz\t bid), etc.) abgemanbt, I had turned 

[away. 
9t u j. : id) f)dtte mid) (bu fjatteft bic§, etc.) abgetuaubt, I might have 

[turned away. 
$uturum. 

Sub.: id) raerbe mid) (bu rotrft bid), etc.) abraenbeu, I shall turn 

[away. 

ton j. : id) raerbe mid) (bu raerbeft bid), etc.) abraenbeu, I shall turn 

[away. 



178 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

ftttturum cgaftum. 

£5 tt b. : tcf) ttJerbe mid) abgemcmbt l)aben, I shall have turned away. 
$ n j. : idj raerbe mid) abgetranbt fyaben, I shall have turned away. 

®mtbttionaU§ ^rafe«§. 
id) tDiirbe mid) (bu raitrbeft bid), etc.) abraertben, I should turn away. 

^onbitionoli^ $erfeftum. 
id) roiirbe mid) ctbgerocmbt l)aben, I should have turned away. 

Smjjeratiti: ©in 9. raenbe bid) ab; ^(ur. mertbet eud) (or raenben <3te 

[fid)) ab. 
Sitftttitto: ^rcif. fid) abraenben; ^erf. fid) abgeracmbt fyabett. 
^aritstyien : S^raf. fief) abmenbenb ; ^erf. fid) abgemembt. 

On this model write the full conjugation of fid) umfeftren, to 
turn around. 

Principal parts : fid) umferjren, fefyrte fid) urn, fid) umgefefyrt. 
Auxiliary : rjabett. 

169. Impersonal Verbs (Uityerfimltdje 95crbcn)* 

1. An impersonal verb has, as in English, besides the infini- 
tive, only the third person singular with the impersonal subject 
eg, it. 

These impersonal forms are much more extensively used in 
German than in English. Those that relate to the phenomena 
of nature are conjugated with rjct6en. They are as follows: 



^ttftntttD. 


$rafeit3. 


3tttJ> erf ef turn. 


regttett, to rain 


eg regnet 


e^ regnete 


fdjneiett, to snow 


eg fdmeit 


eg fdjnette 


fjageln, to hail 


eg fyagelt 


eg rjagelte 


botmern, to thunder 


eg bomtert 


eg bonnerte 


blifcen, to lighten 


eg Mtgt 


eg Mtgte 


frierett, to freeze 


eg friert 


eg fror 


tauen, to thaw 


eg taut 


eg taute 


tctgert, to dawn 


eg tagt 


eg tagte 



THE VERB 179 

<£erf. : e£ rjat geregnet, gefcfjneit, ge^agett, gebonnert, 2c. 

Pu3g. : e£ rjatte geregnet, gefcf)nett r gerjagelt, gebonnert, 2c. 

$ut. : e£ rotrb regrten, fcfjneien, rjageln, bonnern, 2c. 

$ut. e$. : e3 tutrb geregnet rjaben, ge[crjneit rjaben, 2c. 

tfonb. ^rdf. : e3 toiirbe regrten, fcfjneten, rjageln, bonnern, 2c. 

£onb. ^erf. : e3 roitrbe geregnet rjaben, gefdmeit rjaben, etc. 

2. Many other verbs are used impersonally in idiomatic phrases 
of which the following are examples : 

($e6ett, to give : e3 gi6t, there is, there are. 

greuen, to gladden, to give pleasure : z§> frent mid), I am glad. 

^(opfen, to knock : e3 flopft, some otie is knocking (at the door). 

Serb tnn, to cause pain or sorrow : e£ tut mtr leib, I am sorry. 

23unbern, to wonder, be surprised: e3 rounbert mtcrj, / am sur- 
prised. 

eein, to be : e£ ftltb, there are ; e§ roar, there was. 

Sciuren, to ring : e<§ lautet, the bell rings, is ringing. 

©cfjetnen, to seem, appear: e3 jcrjeint mtr, it seems to me. 

$erfterjen, to understand: eg Oerfterjt ficfj, of course. 

170. Government of Verbs (<Refttott bcr SScrBctt)* 

1. The following verbs, and some others of like nature, are 
followed by a predicate nominative : 

fetn, to be fcfjetnen, to seem, to appear 

roerben, to become fjetften, to be called, to bear a 

bteioen, to remain 1 name 

liefer Sftctnn ift mem greunb, This man is my friend. 

S3 ift unb hltibt immer bte 28arjr* It is and always remains the 

Ijett, truth. 

23te fjetBen @te ? Set) r)ei^e gri| What is your name ? My name 

Neuter. is Fritz Reuter. 

2. A few verbs take an object in the genitive, though the 
modern tendency is to put them into the accusative, often with a 
preposition. Such are : 






180 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

23ebiirfen r to need ; gebenfen and fic£) erinnern, to remember. 

£)er £ranfe bebarf ber ^Huf)e f The sick man needs rest. 

(Gebenfen ©ie meiner (or an mid)), Remember me. 

„@ebenfe an beinen ©djityfer in " Remember thy creator in the 
beiner Sugenb," days of thy youth." 

3d) fann mid) feineS 9camen3 (or an feinen Seamen) ntdjt erinnern. 
I cannot remember his name. 

3. Many verbs take an object (usually personal) in the dative ; 
e.g., 

begegnen, to meet feljten, to fail, ail geljoren, to belong to 

banfen, to thank folgen, to follow f)e(fen, to help 

btenen, to serve gefaden, to please fdjaben, to harm 

3d) begegnete ifjm, I met him. 2Ba3 fefjlt 3t)nen ? What ails 

you? 
3d) banfe Sfynen, I thank you. £)elfen ®* e m * r ' ne ^P me> 
SSem gefyort btefe Dietfetafc^e ? To whom does this valise be- 
@te geljort mir, long? It belongs to me. 

4. Some verbs take a person in the dative and a thing in the 
accusative. Such are : 

anbteten, to offer geben, to give fd)enfen, to present 

bringen, to bring leifyen, to lend fd)iden, to send 

erg&fjlen, to relate Itefern, to deliver r^ergeifjen, to pardon 

3d) bot if)m ^fyxWaxt an, I offered him ten marks. 

Gn^dfylc mir erne ©efdjjtdjte, Tell me a story. 

3d) mill btr btefe3 93t(b geben, I will give you this picture. 

5. All transitive verbs govern the accusative ; e. g., id) fd)reibe 
etnen SBrief, / am writing a letter. 

No German verb is regarded as transitive unless it governs its 
object in the accusative, 



THE VERB l8l 

28ie famen ©te ttber ben glufj ? £er gdrjrmann fefete un3 iiber. 

SSer f)at „@:oange(ine" aug bem (Sngtifdjen in3 2)eutfdje uberfe|t ? 
3)er beutfd)e 2>id)ter grei(igratf) rjat e3 iiberfegt. 

|>aben @te fid) im Concert gut unterrjalten ? 3a, pemfidj; bie 
SD^uftf mar gut, aber ba3 ©ingen tear uur mtttetmdBtg. 

9Sa3 fur em SSerb ift „abroenben"? (£3 tft em ^er6 ber „g,emtfdj* 
ten" Conjugation, unb tft §ugteid) trennbar unb refterjo. 

@eben ©ie mir eine e>rjnopfi3 oon „ftd) abmenben" im Snbifafio. 
3d) menbe mid) ab, id) roanbte mid) ab, :c. 

S3t(ben @ie einen ©a§, in bem ba3 SSerb „fid) abferjren" oorlommt. 
Set) faun St)nen ein Qitat au£ „2)er SBtrtttt £odjtertein" geben, in bem 
btefeS $erb Oorlommt. ©ut ; fagen ©ie e3 nur §er. 

„2)er ftweitt bedte ben ©djteier ^u 
Unb febjrte fid) ab unb meinte ba^u." 

SSie ift ba$ SSetter ? (£3 tft fetjr fdjledjt ; geftern fdjneite e3, t)eute 
morgen tyat e3 geregnet, unb \t%t tjagelt e£ ; fetjen ©ie bie $agelf5r- 
ner. 

2Sa3 finb ^agettorner ? ©3 finb gefrorene 9iegentropfen. 

yjlan fann fid) bei fokrjem ^Better leid)t erfdtten. 3(6er menu man 
gefunb tft, fid) toarm anfleibet unb ©ummtftfjutje trdgt, rjat man nid)t£ 
§u fiirdjten. 

£)a t)aben ®ie red)t. 2)er ©efunbe fitrdjtet fid) nid)t oor bem 
fd)led)ten SSetter. 

TRANSLATk AND WRITE : 

i. Stand erect and speak slowly and distinctly. 2. Who trans- 
lated this poem ? I do not know who translated it ; it must 
have been a good poet, for the translation is very beautiful. 

3. At what time does the sun rise and at what time does it set ? 
At this season it rises at six o'clock and sets at half past five. 

4. There are good and bad books, just as there are good and bad 
people. 5. What are you rejoicing about (moriiber) ? I rejoice 
over (iiber) the arrival of my father. 6. Who is knocking ? go to 



182 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

the door and see ; it is our neighbor, Mr. Miiller. 7. There are 
(86, 5) ten new books on this desk. 8. They turned away and 
wept. 

171. The Strong or Irregular Verbs. 

1. A so called irregular verb is irregular only in certain tenses. 
In the following list (§ 173) the principal parts, together with all 
irregularities, are given and the pupil who has well learned the 
regular conjugations will require nothing more in order to the 
complete mastery of these verbs. Note the following review of 
principles : 

2. The present indicative is regular except in the second and 
third singular, where the vowel is sometimes changed or modified 
(almost always if it is a, 0, or «) ; as id) befetjle, Oil befieljlft, er 
befteljlt, ttrir befetjlen, etc. ; ictj rjalte, bit t)ti(tft, er rjalt, fair tjaltert, etc. 

3. The present subjunctive is always regular ; as, ict) befeijle, bit 
befetjleft, er befeljle ; rotr beferjlen, iljr befeljlet, fie beferjlen. 

4. The imperative is regularly formed from the root of the 
verb by adding e for the singular and et or t for the plural ; as, 
rjalten, hold ; root rjalt ; imper. sing, fjafte ; plur. rjaltet. The im- 
perative singular is often irregular, but the plural is always 
regular, being the same as the second plural of the present 
indicative. Whether the plural ends in et or t is a matter of 
euphony and requires no rule ; e. g., gefjert : Imperative g,er)(e) 
plural g,ef)(e)t. 

5. The imperfect indicative always changes the root vowel of 
the infinitive without adding, in the first person, any termination ; 
thus, icf) befcttjl, bit befctrjleft, er befatjl ; toir befarjlen, ttjr befatjlet, fie 
befallen. 

6. The imperfect subjunctive adds e to the indicative, at the 
same time modifying the vowel a, 0, u, if there be one ; but the 
vowel may be changed, as in the imperfect subjunctive of beferjlen, 
which is icf) before, bit befotjleft, er beforjle ; fair befofjlen, iljr befotjlet, 



THE VERB 183 

fie beforjlen. Observe that in the imperfect (both indicative and 
subjunctive) the third person singular is always like the first. 

7. The compound tenses will present no difficulties to those 
acquainted with the regular conjugations. 

172. Orthography of the Strong Verbs. 

1. German spelling is nearly phonetic, but between the sounds 
of f, ff, and |3 there is so little difference that the learner is liable 
to error in spelling. Observe the following examples of spelling 
in the principal parts of verbs. 



Sefen, to read 


(a3 


gelefen 


3)ceffeu, to measure 


mafc 


gemeffeu 


^eifteu, to call 


rjte£ 


gerjetfeen 


©etfeen, to bite 


btfe 


gebtffen 



2. The general rule is that the sibilant (f, ff, g) of the imper- 
fect and of the past participle accords with that of the infinitive. 
It deviates from it in the imperfect of such words as meffert where 
ff necessarily changes to $ and in the past participle wherever the 
vowel differs from that of the infinitive as in the past participle 
of beifteu. 

3. In accordance with this rule let the pupil write the principal 
parts of bfajen, to blow ; effen, to eat ; ftofjett, to push, thrust and 
flteften, to flow. For these words see the list § 173. 

This rule applies to all verbs having f, ff, or fj in the infinitive. 

4. The use or omission of e after a sibilant or dental (ff, t, b) 
in the personal endings is a matter of euphony ; thus, in the 
present tense : 

beifeen, to bite gtexten, to glide letben, to suffer 

PRESENT. PRESENT. PRESENT. 

id) bei^e icfj gtette idj letbe 

bu bet&eft bu gleiteft bit letbeft 

er beiftt er glettet er leibet 

5. But with most verbs the word admits of pronunciation 
without this euphonic c ; as id) gebe, bu gtbft, er gibt ; id) greife, bu 
gretfft, er gretft, etc. 



184 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

173. A List of Strong Verbs. 

Classified with Reference to the Vowels of the Imperfect 
Tense and the Past Participle. 

For models of the full conjugation of strong verbs see gebcn (155), and gefyen 
(156). In this list the imperative singular is the last form with each verb and is 
indicated by an exclamation point. 

Instead of reciting the principal parts in the usual manner, e. g., beif^en, bi\], 
gebtffcn, it is recommended that the pronoun and the auxiliary verb be em- 
ployed ; e. g., 

Teacher : iBeifteu. Pupil: SBeiften, to bite ; id) beifte, id) bifj, id) I)abe gebiffett. 
Teacher: SBletben. Pupil: 351eiben, to remain ; id) bletbe, id) blieb, id) bin 
gebliebett. 

This method of recitation greatly facilitates the acquisition and practical use of 
these verbs and fixes in memory the correct auxiliary. 

The vowel indications of the several classes are as follows : 

Examples. 
betjieu, bifc, gebiffett 
bleibett, btteb, gebliebett 
biegeit, bog, gebogeu 
bittbett, banb, gebiutbeti 
gebcirett, gebar, geboren 
effett, 0,% gege[[en 
bacfett, buf, gebacfett 
bfafett, blieS, geblafett 

Also eight verbs not classified. 

The verbs in most common use (about 90 in the list of 160) are marked with 
an asterisk (*) and should be particularly well learned. Being marked in the same 
manner in the alphabetical list following, they may there be used as a review lesson. 

First Class. 

Vowel of imperfect and past part. \. 

i. 23ei$en,* to bite; Sm)). id) big; ty erf. idj Ijabe gebiffen. 

$rafeu3. ^mperfeftum. 

Sfttbifatito. ®onjunftib. ^nbifatito. ®onjunftib. 

id) beige id) beige id) big xcfj biffe 

bu beig(ef)t bu beigeft bu biffeft bu biffeft 

er beigt er betge er big er biffe 





Imperf. 


Past Part 


1st Class 


i 


i 


2nd Class 


tc 


ic 


3rd Class 








4th Class 


a 


u 


5th Class 


a 





6th Class 


a 


c 


7th Class 


it 


a 


8th Class 


ie 


a 



. THE VERB 185 

ttnr 6etf$ert ftrir fcetjjen linr Biff en toir biff en 

ifjr beijst * ' il)r beiftet ifyr biffet if)r biffet 

fie v bei^en fie beifjen fie biffen fie biffen 

Snipercttit): bei^(e)! bei^(e)t! beif3en ©ie! 

Thus also : ctbbeijjen, to bite off; jerbeiften, to bite in pieces. 
Ex. : 2)er £unb f)at ben $naben gebiffen. 

2. (£rblcid)en, to turn pale ; id) erb(id); id) bin erblid)en. 
S^raf. : id) erb(eid)e, bit erb(eid)ft, er erb(eid)t; erb(eid)(e)! 

Ex. : 2>er 2)ieb erblid), ate er ben ^olijiften \&\ 
This verb is also used figuratively meaning to die. 

3. ®fctd)en, to resemble ; id) g(id); id) Ijctbe gegtidjen. 
^rdf. id) gletdje, bit gteidjft, er g(eid)t; gkid)(e)! 

Thus also : uerg{etd)en, to compare. 
Ex. : ®cr ©obit gleidjt fetnem 2>ater. 

4. (S5Ieitcn f to glide ; id) glitt, id) bin geglitten. 
^rdf. : id) glette, bit gletteft, er gleitet; glett(e) ! 

Ex. : S)er @d)litten gleitet itber ba8 (§i§. 

5. ®retfen,* to grasp ; id) griff; id) Ijabe gegriffen. 
^ r a f. : id) gretfe, bit gretfft ; er greift ; gretf (e) ! 

Thus also : ergretfen, to seize. 

Ex. : S)a§ $inb greift nacb bent 2Jioitbe. 

6. $netfen, to pinch; id) fntff ; id) f)abe gefniffen. 
^rdf. : id) fneife, bn fneifft, er fneift; fneif(e) ! 

Ex. : 2>er l^nabe frtiff feinen $amaraben in ben s tar. 

7. Seibcn,* to suffer; id) Kit; id) Ijabe gelitten. 
^rdf. : id) kibe, bn (eibeft, er tetbet; leib(e) ! 

Ex. : 3)er $ranfe teibet an einem ^ieber. 

8. ^fetfeit, to whistle ; id) pfiff ; id) I)abe gepfiffen. 
$ r f . : id) pfetfe, bn pfeifft, er Jpfetft ; pfeif (e) ! 

Ex. : 2Ber fann biefe SJMobie pfeifen ? 

9. Ofet^en, to tear; id) rift ; id) rjabe geriffen. 
^rdf. : id) reijje, bu retfteft, er rei&t; reifj(e) ! 

Thus also : ^erreiftett, to tear in pieces. 
Ex. : 3)er SBotf jerrif! bct§ &umn. 



1 SBetjjt or beiftet, and thus also with many other verbs in the second person plural of 
the indicative present, and consequently in the plural of the imperative, t^e two having 
the same form 



1 86 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

10. Sftettett, to ride (on horseback) ; id) rttt ; id) bin geritten. 
^3 r d f . : id) reite, bit retteft, er reitet; reit(e) ! 

This verb may also be used transitively ; e. g., id) Ijabe bag ^ferb geritten. 

Ex. : „2Ber reitet fo fefit burdj 9foxd)t uub SBinb? 
(§g ift ber $ater mit feinem $inb." — G. 1 

ii. Scfjfetdjen, to sneak ; id) fd)(id) ; id) Bin gefd)(id)en. 
*Praf. : id) fd)leid)e, bu fd)(eid)ft, er fd)(eid)t ; fcf)leidj(e) ! 

Thus also: ($:tn'fd)(eid)en, to steal into {a place). 
Ex. : S)er 2)ieb fd)Ud) in bag §ang ein. 

12. 6d)Ieifeit,* to sharpen; id) fdjliff ; id) fya&e gefcpffen. 
^rdf. : id) fdjletfe, bu fdjtetfft, er [crjleift; fd)letf(e) ! 

Ex. : 3d) roUt mein Sfteffer fd)tetfen taffen. 

13. Sdjmetgen, to fling: id) fdjnufe ; id) Ijabe gefd)mif|en. 
s $rdf. : id) jdjmeifse, bu fdjmeifeeft, er fdnneifet; fdjmetJ3(e) ! 

Ex. : (£r fcrnnift bag papier tng geuer. 

14. ©djneiben,* to cut ; id) fd^nttt ; id) fjabe gejdjnitten. 
^rdf. : id) [duteibe, bu |d)neibe|t, er fdjneibet; fd)neib(e) ! 

Ex. : 3)er ©djneiber fcftneibet bag Xuti). 

15. Sdjreiten, to stride ; id) fdjritt; id) bin gefdjritten. 

^ r a f . : id) fd)reite r bu fdjretteft, er f djreitet ; fd)reit(e) ! 
Ex. : S)er 3ager fdjreitet (ebbaft burdj bie SBiefe. 

16. Streidjen, /<? stroke; id) ftricr); id) I)a6e geftricrjen. 
^3 r a |. : id) ftreicrje, bu ftreidjft, er ftreidjt ; ftreid)(e) ! 

Thus also : an'ftretcrjen, to paint (as a house). 

Ex. : 3)er 2lnftreid)er bat bag §aug roeift angeftridjen. 

17. Streitett, to strive, dispttte, quarrel; id) ftritt ; id) fyabz geftritten. 
$P r a f. : id) ftreite, bu ftreiteft, er ftreitet ; ftreite ! 

Ex. : 2ftU meinem 23ruber roift id) ntcbt ftreiten. 

18. Sfikidjett, to yield; id) roid) ; id) 6in gerDtcfjen. 

'^rdf. : id) roeidje, bu toetdjft, er toeicfjt; roetd)(e) ! 
Ex. : 3d) roeidje nur ber ©eroatt 
2Beid)en, to soak, is weak and conj. with foaben. 



1 The names of German authors quoted are given or indicated by initials : G., Goethe ; 
Sch., Schiller ; von F., von Feuchtersleben, etc. 



THE VERB 187 

Slottttetffttum, 

[Let the pupil compose original answers, in complete sentences, to such ques- 
tions as are left unanswered in the text.] 

£)er |)unb ()at ben ®uaben gebiffen. 

£)at er ifyx in bie |)cmb gebiffen ? ^tein, er 6if$ ifyn in ba§ 23ein. 

28er fyat gebiffen ? 2Ben fyat er gebiffen ? 

Stonjugicren ©ie ba3 SBort „beiJ3en" im ^erfeftum be§' 3nbtfatto3. 
S)eflimeren <Ste „mer" nnb , f t?ag". 

2£em gletdjt biefe3 Sftabdjen ? ©te (or e3) (85,) gleid)t tfyrer Gutter. 
2Sem gleidjen ©ie ? 

2Bie tft ber arme DJcamt gefallen ? @r glitt auf bem (£tfe au3.* 

§at er fid) oedetjt ? Set, er Ijat ben gufe uerrenft. Stnb ®ie auf 
bem (Stfe au^gegtitten ? 

SBonac^ grcift ba3 $inb ? @3 greift nad) bem Sftonbe. kann ba§ 
kinb ben 5D?onb ergreifen ? 

S&oran leibet ber ^ranfe? (Sr letbet an einem giefrer. SBoran 
letbet biefed ®inb ? 

3Be(d)e 9Mobte fannft bu pfetfen ? 3d) fann „bie 2Bad)t am Sffijein" 
pfetfen. 

3)iefe $inber ftnb fef)r nad)laffig. @ie reiften £od)er in tfjre 
tteiber. 

SDftt raelcfyem §t(f§t)erb rairb „reiten" lonjugiert? 

£)er 3)ieb fd)(id) in ben £aben tin unb ftat)t Suraelen im 2Bert Don 
9Jc. 50,000. 3n toeffen £aben fd)(id) er ein? 

£)er ©d)eerenfd)feifer t)at mein Stfefjer fefyr gut gefdjtiffen. 2Bie 
t)te^ er ? £)a3 roeifj id) ntctjt. 

3d) t)abe mid) in ben ginger gefdjmtten. £>aben ©ie fief) in ben 
gufs gefd)nitten ? 

§)er 2lnftreid)er ftrtdt) ba§ §au3 grim an. SSeffen £)au3 fyat er 
angeftrid)en ? 

SSir finb ntc^t berfetben 9#eimtng, aber roir raerben ntcrjt barum 
ftreiten. 

2)ie 23ritde raid) bem £)rang be3 (StfeS unb ging iiber ben SSafferfaE. 
SMdjengatl? 



r 2tu§'glettert, *o j/z)>, as on the ice. 



i88 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Translate and Write : 

i. Whom (90, 1) did the dog bite (123, 5) ? 2. Why did the 
man turn-pale ? 3. Whom do you resemble ? 4. Did you slip 
on the ice? 5. Did the child grasp after the moon (123, 5). 
6. The sick man has (suffers with 1 ) consumption. 7. Can you 
whistle? 8. Into which store did the thief sneak? 9. What 
color 2 did he paint the house ? 10. Did (123, 5) the bridge yield 
to the ice ? Yes, it yielded and was carried over the falls. 3 

1 Seibet an. 2 9ttit roelcfjer $arbe. 3 i'tber bie gafte gerifjen. 



Second Class. 

Vowel of imperfect and past part, te» 

19. f8Uibtn* to remain ; 3 m p. : id) blteb; ^5 erf. : id) bin geblteben. 
$rafett£. $mperfeftum. 



^nbifattrj. 


®onjunftit>. 


^nbifatib. 


®ortjunftit>. 


id) bletbe 


id) bletbe 


idj blteb 


id) bliebe 


bu bteibft 


bn bleibeft 


bn bltebft 


bn bltebeft 


er bletbt 


er bletbe 


er blteb 


er bliebe 


loir bletben 


loir bleiben 


loir blteben 


loir blieben 


tt)r bletbt 


if)r bletbet 


iljr bliebt 


tt)r bltebet 


fie bletben 


fie bletben 


fie blteben 


fie blieben 



3mperatiD: bletb(e) ! bleibt! bletben @ie! 
Ex. : 2Bir finb fange in ber @tabt gebtieben. 

20. @tebetf)en, to thrive ; id) gebtef); id) bin gebteljen. 
$Prftf. : \6) gebetbe, bu gebetl)ft, er gebeiljt; gebeicj(e) ! 

Ex. : ®ie ©rate ift biefe§ 3ahr gut gebiefyen. 

2 1 . Seiljen, * to lend; id) lief) ; id) t)abe geliefjen. 
$raf. : id) teilje, bu leil)ft, er leU)t; leif)(e) ! 

Ex. : 33itte, lei^en @ie mix stnan^ig 2Warf. 

22. SO?eibcn f to shun, avoid ; id) mteb ; id) fjabe gemieben. 
^rctf. : id) nteibe, bu metbeft, er nteibet; meibe! 

Thus also : rjermetbert, to shun, avoid. 

Ex. : 2Ba8 tud)t 3U meiben ift, mitf? man erbuiben. 



THE VERB 189 

23. ^retfett,* to praise ; id) prie3; id) rjabe geprtefert. 
9$ r ft |. : id) pretfe, bit pretfeft, er pretft ; preif (e) ! 

Ex. : S)te yiatnx pveift ben (Stopfer. 

24. Stfetbett, to rub, grate ; id) rte6 ; id) fjabe gerieben. 
^rdf. : id) retbe, bu reibft, er retbt; reib(e) ! 

Thus also : gerreibett, fo reduce to powder. 
Ex. : (gr rteb fid) Me §anbe oor SBergniigett. 

25. Sdjeiben, to depart, separate ; id) fdjieb ; idj bin gejd)ieben. 
^raf. : id) fcrjetbe, bu fdjeibeft, er fdjeibet ; fd)eibc! 

Thus also : entfdjeiben, to decide (with baben). 

Ex. : 2)te beften greunbe miiffeti am (Snbe fcbetben. 

Also trans, with baben : „©ott fdjieb bie ginfternis oon bem 2id)t." 

26. Sdjeinett,* to shine, seem; id) fd)ien ; id) fyabe gefdjtenen. 
^3 r a f . : id) fcfjeine, bit fdjeinft, er fd)eint; fd)ein(e) ! 

Ex. : S)ie ©onne fcfieirtt am Sage unb ber 9ftonb bet Sftadjt. 

27. Sdjret&ert,* to write ; id) fdjrieb ; id) t)a6e gefdjrteben. 

$ra|. : id) fdjreibe, bu fcrjreibft, er fcfjreibt; fd)reib(e) ! 

Thus also : abfdjreiben, to copy. 

Ex. : 3d) Ijaht bie Slufgabe abgefcbrieben. 

28. ©djreien, to cry, scream; id) fdjrie; id) rjabe gefdjrieeu. 
^rd|. : id) jdjreie, bu fd)rei[t, er fdjreit ; fd)rei(e) ! 

Ex. : 2)a§ $inb jcbrie bie gan^e s J?ad)t biuburd). 

29. 6d)it)etgett, to &? silent ; id) jd)ft)ieg ; id) fyabe ge)d)tt)iegen. 
$)3 r a f . : id) fdjmeige, bit fdjroeigft, er fdjtueigt ; f d)roetg(e) ! 

Thus also ; fttflfcbroetgen, to be still, silent. 

Ex.: ©eftter fagt ju 3tubeu^, „3br fdjroetgt big man end) aufruft." — Sch. 

30. Speien, to spit, to vomit; 'id) fpie; td) rjabe gefpieen. 
$rSf. : id) fpete, bu fpetft, er fpeit ; fpei(e) ! 

Ex. : S)er SMfan tyeit fteuer unb 2tfd>e. 

3 1 . ©tetgen,* to ascend ; id) ftieg ; id) bin geftiegen. 
$Praf. : id) fteige, bu fteigft, er fteigt ; fteig(e) ! 

Thus also : hinauf'fteigen, to ascend. 
Ex. : Sir ftiegen ben 33erg binauf. 

32. Sretfcett,* to drive, do ; id) trieb ; id) tyabt getrieben. 
$P r a f . : id) treibe, bu treibft, er treibt ; treib(e) ! 

Ex. : 2)er ©chafer treibt bie ©djafe. 



19° NEW GERMAN COURSE 

33. $erseU)en,* to pardon; id) t>ergiel) ; id) fya&e oergiefyen. 
$Prcif. : id) i)ergetl;c r bu bergcitjft, er t)er^ett)t ; oergett)(e) ! 

Ex. : SBergei^en ©ie mir = (Sntfdjulbigen @ie mid). 

34. SSetfen, ^ j^w; id) mie£; id) fyabe gemiefen. 
^rtij. : id) meife, bu mcifeft, er meift; toeif(e) ! 

Ex. : 0?r mieS mir ben 2Beg sum 2)orfc. 

35. Stifyn, to accuse ; id) §ie() ; id) tjabe gegtefjen. 
^3 r a f . : id) geifye, bu gett)ft f er 5ei£)t ; gei()(e)! 

Ex. : SHefer 9ftann ift eine§ 2krbred)en§ gejiehert morben. 



ftonfccrfatioit. 

SSie lange finb ©ie in ber ©tabt geblieben ? 3d) btieb nur brei 
%age bort. 

£>ie Gmtte ift gut gebiefyen, unb bie SBauern freuen [id) fefjr bartiber. 

SBttte, letrjen ©te mir ge£)n 9Jtarf. Seiber fyabe id) nttfjt fo Diet (Mb 
bei mir. 

(Sin outer 90?cmn Dermeibet bofe ©efeflfdjaft. 

„@3 ift beftimmt in @otte£ $lat, baf$ man 00m liebften, toa3 man 
£)at r mug fdjeiben." — von F. 

3d) bitte ©ie gu entfcfjeiben. 

2)ie Sonne fdjetnt buret) bie 3?egentro|)fen unb t)erurfact)t einen 9?egen= 
bogen. 

2Benn id) eine gute geber t)dtte, raitrbe id) einen 23rief an meinen 
SBruber fct)retben. 

28arum fd)rie ba$ ®inb bie gauge S^actjt t)inburd) ? 

Sfabeau fagte gum ©otbaten : „©tetg auf bie 2Barte bort unb fag' 
un3, mie bie ©d)lad)t fid) roenbet." — Sch. 

2Ba§ treiben ©ie jegt? 1 3d) bin @efd)&ft3reifenber. 2Ba3 fur 
ein ©efd)aft<§marm ftnb ©ie ? 

$ergeit)en ©ie mir, menu icf) ©ie Oerte|t fjabe. 2)a3 ift fetjr 
Oergeitjlid). 



1 treiben, to drive is also used in the sense of do ; e. g., toct§ treiben ©ie jetjt ? what is 
your employment at present ? 



THE VERB 191 

Translate and Write: 

1. How long' will you remain here? 2. How much money 
did you lend him (123, 5) ? 2 3. Good children avoid the company 
of the bad (39,2). 4. We praise God for all his goodness. 

5. The sun shines by day and the moon and stars by night. 

6. The poor orphans cry for bread. 3 7. Do you speak German ? 

8. The soldier ascended the watch-tower 4 to see the battle. 5 

9. The shepherd drives the sheep into the field. 

I 2Sie lange. 2 Seifjen governs a person in the dative (170, 4). 3 „2)ie armert 2£aijen 
id)reten nati) Srot." — Sch. 4-©tteg auf bte 2Sarte. sum bit @d)lad)t ju befe&en. 

Third Class. 

Vowel of imperfect and past part, o, 

36. SBtegert,* to bend; Sntp. : id) bog; ^erf. : id) fyctbe gebogen. 
$rafen3. $mperfeftum. 

Snbtfatiu. £ortjurtf ttt>. grtbtfatit). ®onj'unfttb. 



id) biege 


3d) biege 


3d) bog 


id) boge 


bu btegft 


bu biegeft 


bu bogft 


bu bogeft 


er biegt 


er biege 


er bog 


er boge 


toir btegen 


totr btegen 


totr bogen 


loir bogen 


ifyr biegt 


tf)r bieget 


if)r bogt 


tt)r bbget 


fie btegen 


fie biegen 


fie bogen 


fie bogen 



3 m \) er at ib: tueg(e)! biegt! biegen ©ie! 
Ex. : £>er 33ogen biegt ftd), aber er bridjt nicht. 

37. SSieten,* to offer; id) bot; tcf) tjabe geboten. 
$praf. : id) btete, bu bieteft, er bietet; biet(e)! 

Thus also : art'btetett, to offer. ( 
Ex. : 3d) bot ibm jebrt Wlaxl art. 

38. gltegett,* to fly ; id) flog ; id) bin geflogen. 
^rcif. : iti) fliege, bu fltegft, er fliegt; flieg(e)! 

Thus also : fortfftegett, to fly away. 

Ex. : 3rrt §erbft ftiegert bie $oget fiibrccirtg. 

39. glteijett, to flee ; id) ffoh,; id) bin geflofien. 
^rctf. : id) ffiefje, bu fltegft, er fltel)t; flief)(e) ! 

Thus also : erttfliefjert, to escape, to run away. 
Ex. : 3)ie $erbrecber firtb erttflobert. 



192 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

40. glieffen,* to flow; tdjftofc; id) bin gef (of fen. 
^raf.: id) fltejse, bit fltefscft, er fltcfet; flte^(c) ! 

Ex. : £)a§ 53ad)iein ffiefst in ben glufe. 

41. griercn,* to freeze; id) fror; id) (jabc gefroren. 
^rcif. : id) friere, bn frterft, er fricrt; friere! 

Ex. : ©eftern §at e§ gefroren. 

Thus also : erfrieren, to freeze to death (with feut). 

Ex. : 2)er SReifenbe ift in bent ©tnrnte erfroren. 

42. (SJente^cn, to enjoy, eat; id) gertofs; id) rjabe genoffen. 
^riif. : id) getttefje, bit gemefjeft, er geniefjt; genicf3(c) r . 

Ex.: „©ie genoffen ihr einfad)e§ Slbenbmaljf." 

43. ©tegett,* to pour; icrjgofj; id) rjabe gegoffen. 
^rctf. : id) giefee, bit gicfteft, er gtefet; gtefj(e)! 

Thus also : au3'gteJ3en, to pour out. 

Ex. : 9ftcm gieftt bag SSaffer au§ bem tag in ba§ ©lag. 

44. Slriedjen,* to creep ; id) frod) ; id) bin gefrodjen. 
y$xa). : icf) friedje, bn frtecrjft, er lried)t; lricd)(e)! 

Ex. : 2)ie $a£e ift unter ba% §an§ gefroren. 

45. Ditcdjen,* &? smell ; id) rod); id) rjabe gerodjen. 
Praf. : id) riecfje, bu tteefjft, er riecrjt; rtedj(e)! 

Ex. : SSet^e 23tunte ried)t am beften ? 

46. ©djieBen,* fe j/wz'*, ///*// ; id) fdjob ; id) fjabe gefcrjoben 
^rctf. : id) fdjtcbe, bn fdjtebft, er fd)iebt; fd)ieb(e) ! 

Ex. : 23itte, betfen ©ie ntir biefen £tfd) an bie SBattb fdjiebett. 

47. Sdjte^en,* to shoot ; id) fcfjofj, icf) rjabe gefd)offen. 
^rdf. : id) fdjtejse, bn fcrjiefjeft, er fdjtefet; fd)ie^(e) ! 

Ex. : Ser SHpenjager fd)ie§t ba% SBilbpret. 

48. Stfjttcften,* to shut; id) fcfjlofe ; id) l)abe gefd)loffen. 
^rdf. : id) fcrjtiege, bn fd)lief3eft, er fd)(ie^t; fd)(te^(e)! 

Thus also: gnfehtieften, to lock. 
Ex. : ©djUefcen ©ie bie Siir $u. 

49. ©ieben, to boil; id) fott ; id) rjabe gefotten. 
^5raf. : id) ftebe, bn fiebeft, er fiebet; fieb(e) ! 

Ex, ; §)a§ 2Baffer ift fiebenb heift. 



THE VERB 193 

50. Sjmegen, to sprout ; id) fprofe ; id) Bin gefproffen. 
^Srctf.: id) fyrte&e, bit fpriefeeft, er fprte^t ; fprie^(e)! 

Ex. : 3m griibltng tyrteften bie ^fXanjeit. 

51. Qtitbtn, to fly off (as sparks) ; id) ftob ; id) bin geftoben. 
$r&f.: id) ftiebe, bn ftiebft, er ftiebt; ftieb(e)! 

Ex. : £)a§ ^Pferb lief jo jdjnett, baft bie ^unfen ftoben. 

52. £riefeu, A? ^n/; id) troff ; id) bin getroffen. 
$Praf. : id) triefe, bn triefft, er trieft; trief(e)! 

Ex. : 3)er Sftegen trieft t>on bent 2)ad)e. 

53. $erbrie$en, to z>#r; id) Derbro^; id) l)abe berbroffen. 
^rdf. : id) toerbrtefje, bn berbriefjeft, er Derbriefet; DerbrieJ3(e) ! 

Rarely used except reflexively in the 3d singular: e§ oerbrieft mid), I am 
vexed. 

54. $erlieren,* to lose ; id) tierlor; id) l)abe berlorcn. 
spraf. : id) berliere, bn berlterft, er berliert; t)erlier(e) ! 

Ex. : 3d) fiabe bog rteue 23ud) beriorert. 

55. SBtegen, to weigh; id) tnog; id) l)abe getnogen. 
?fi r a f . : id) rotege, bn nriegft, er toiegt ; nriege ! 

SSdgen (t»og, geroogen) has the same meaning. 
Ex. : SEBie trie! toiegt biefe§ $adet ? 

56. $itf)tn* to draw; id) §og ; id) t)abe gegogen. 
$r&f. : id) 5ie()e f bn giet)ft r er §iet)t ; 5iel)(e) ! 

Thus also : erjieben, to bring tip (a child) ; oorjieben, to prefer. 
Ex. •. 2)a§ $ferb giebt ben 2Bagen. 

57. 23etoegen, to induce ; id) betoog; id) l)abe betoogen. 
^p r a f . : id) betoege, bn betnegft, er betoegt; betoege! 

Ex. : 3d) fonnte tbn ntcfrt beroegen, longer bier ju bletben. 
23etrjegen, to move, is weak. 

58. gedjten, to fight ; id) fod)t; id) Ijcrbe gefod)ten. 
^rcif. : id) fed)te, bn fidjtft, er ftd)t; fid)t! 

Ex. : S)er ged)tmei[ter tebrt bct§ ^ed)ten. 

59. gledjtett, to braid ; id) \lod)t; id) I)abe gef!od)ten. 
^3 raj. : id) fledjte, bn fltdjtft, er fitd)t; flidjt! 

Ex. : SDem ©ieger roarb ein $ranj gef(od)ten. 



194 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

60. «§eBeit,* to lift ; id) l)ob; id) fyct&e gefyoben. 
^JSraf. : id) fjebe, bu f>ebft r er l)ebt; f)eb(e) ! 

Thus also : anfheben, to pick up. 

Ex. : SHefer Coffer ift fdjroer ; id) fann tbn uid)t aufheben. 

61. SJklfett, to *#*/£; id) moff ; id) tjabe gemolfen (gemetft). 
*Pra). : id) metfe, bu melfft, er melft; metfe! 

Ex. : Sftan melft bie $iihe morgenS unb abenb§. 

62. *Pffegett, to consult, take counsel; id) pftog ; id) f)abe gepflogen. 
*P r ci f. : id) pflege, bit pfiegft, er pflegt ; pflege ! 

^3[tegen is weak when it means to nurse or to be accustomed (to do a 

thing). 
Ex. : 2BiIbetm Sett pflog 9tot mit feitten (Sibgenoffen. 

63. Clitetten, to spring, gush forth; id) quoll; id) bin gequotten. 
$P r a | . : id) quelle, bu quittft, er quittt ; quill ! 

Ex. : 2)a3 Staffer quittt au§ bem SBruimen. 

64. ©cfjerett, to shear ; id) fdjor ; id) rjabe gefd)oren. 
^P r a f. : id) fdjere, bu fdjerft, er fdjert ; fd)er(e) ! 

Ex.: S)er 23auer fdjert bie ©d)afe. 

65. Sdjmeisctt, to melt ; id) fdjmotj; id) bin gefdjmot^en. 
^P r a ). : id) fdjmelge, bu fdjmtlgeft, er fdjmit^t ; fdjmttj ! 

©djmetjen when transitive is weak. 
Ex. : S)og (Sis fcbmiigt in ber @onne. 

66. ©djtoeflen, to swell ; id) fdjfooH ; id) bin ge|d)tt)olten. 
^P r a \. : id) fdjmelte, bu fdjttuffft, er fdjtoiHt ; fdjnnH ! 

Ex. : 2)er glufe fcfcttrittt iiber feine Ufer. 

67. SBektt, to weave ; id) mob ; id) f)abe gemoben. 
^P r a f. : id) roebe, bu mebft, er roebt ; roeb(e) ! 

Ex. : 3)er 2Beber tnebt bo§ £nd). 

68. ©limmen, to glow ; id) glomm; idj fyabe gegtommen. 
$Pr&). : id) glimme, bu gtimmft, er glintmt; glimm! 

Ex. : 2)a§ ^ener gitmmt in bem Ofen. 
This verb has also weak forms. 

69. SHimmen, to climb ; id) ftomm ; id) bin geftommen. 
^P r a f. : id) fftmme, bu fltmmft, er f limmt ; f timm(e) ! 

Ex. : §)er SUpenjciger ftimmt bie fteite ^e(§roanb binauf. 



THE VERB 195 

70. (grfdjaffen, to resound; id) erfcfjoll ; tdj bin erfdjolteu. 
^rdf. : id) erfcfjalle, bu erfcfjallft, er erfdjaHt; erfcfjall(e)! 

Ex.: 2)a§ 3agbborn erfdjaflt burd) ben $3alb. 

71. Saufett, A? dh#£ (said of animals); ify f off ; id) tjCtbe gefoffeu. 
^rdf. : tdj faufe, bu faufft, er fauft; fauf(e)! 

Ex. : 2)er 2fienj«f» trinft; bas Xiex fauft. 

72. ©augett, &? j«^; id) fog; id) fjabe gefogeu. 
^rdf. : id) faugc, bu faugft, er faugt; faug(e)! 

Ex. : S)ie 3ungen faugen bie 9JJifcf> ber Gutter. 

73. ©djnaufcett, to snort, pant ; icf) fdjuob ; id) rjabe gefd)noben. 
^rtif. : id) ftfjnauoe, bu fdjnaubft, er fdntaubt; fd)uaub(e)! 

74. ©iirett, to ferment ; e3 gor; e3 ift gegoreu. 
^raf. : e£ gdrt; gdre! 

Ex. : 2)a§ 33ier gctrt in bent g-afte. 

75. (£rliifd)en, #? become extinct ; id) erlofcf) ; \6) biu erlofdjeu. 
^rdf. : id) erldfdje, bu erlijcrjeft, er erlifdjt ; erlif dC) ! 

Thus also : cm§tofd)en, to extinguish, erase. 

Ex : £)a§ Sic^t ift ertofdjen. 

As transitives these verbs are weak. 

76. ©djtnb'rett, to swear; id) fc^toor ; id) tjabe ge|d)tt)orett. 
*J$r&f. : ic^ fcfjtoore, bu fcfjtoorft, er fdjtotfrt; fd)toor(e)! 

Ex. : 3He @otbaten fiaben ouf bie gafine gefc&tttoren. 

77. Sktriigett,* to cheat; id) betrog ; id) fyaht betrogen. 
^rdf. : id) betriige, bu betritgft; er betriigt; betriig(e)! 

The simple verb tritgen, to chedt, deceive, is not common except in some 
proverbial expressions, as'ber <2>tf)ein triigt, appearances deceive. 

>]%. (grftefett, to choose ; id) erfor; \§ fyabt erforeu. 
^rdf. : id) erfiefe, bu erfiefeft, er erfieft; erliefe! 

(Srfiiren (erfor, erforen), to choose, is antiquated. 
Ex. : „3dj erfor fie, d8 fie niebrig roar." — Sch. 

79. Sitgen,* to tell a lie ; id) log ; id) rjabe getogeu. 
$Prdf.: ifi) luge, bu (iigft, er lugt; luge! 
Ex. : <S$ ift eine ©iinbe 31: lug en. 



196 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

^ott&crfatiotu 

2Ba§ fyat er Sfmen fur ba§ ^Sferb angeboten ? 

2Bor)in fltegen bie $oge( im |)erbfte ? 

2)er ©efangene erttflot) au£ bent (SJefdngnte unb Derftedte fief) im 
2Balbe. 

SDte SBacfje fltefjen in ben glufe, unb bie gftiffe in ba3 9D?eer. 

£)ie $at$e frod) unter ba3 ©ofa unb uerftedte fid) bort. 

£)ie fdjonften 2ttumen riecfjen nitfjt immer am beftcn. 

2)er grofd) fagre jur tbnigStodjter : f ,^un fdjieb mir bein golbenes 
c XeUer(ein nafjer, bamit mir gufammen eff en. " — Grimm. 

@ef$ier fagre §n Ztti: ,ffia&)' bid) fertig einen 2lpfel t)on bc3 
Sfrtaben flopf §u fd)ief3en. '' — Sch. 

3m grueling ftme&en bie SBaume. ©prieften bie SBaume im Winter ? 

§aben ©ie etroa$ uerloren? 3a, id) I;a6e einen gotbenen SHing 
berloren. 

SBierjiel ttriegt ba§ $tnb ? (S3 miegt neun ^)Sfunb. 

£)a3 ^3ferb giefjt ben 2Bagen. Stannft bit einen SSagen §iet)en ? 

2)ie SKutter pffegt bct<§ ®inb. 

2)iejer SDtonn §at mid) betrogen. §at er Srjrten fatfd)e£ ©elb ge= 
geben? 

Translate and Write: 

1. A good bow bends easily. 2. The bow broke because it 
was bent too far. 3. It is here forbidden to play on the grass. 1 
4. In the spring the birds fly northward. 5. It is spring and 
the brook flows through the forest.' 6. Pour the water into the 
wine. 7. Why did the cat creep (123, 5) under the house ? She 
saw a mouse there and wanted to catch it. 2 8. Which flower 
smells the best ? In my opinion 3 the rose smells the best. 
9. Please help me to push this piano against the wall. 10. The 
white man 4 shoots well, but this Indian shoots better, he hits 
the bull's-eye every time. 

x $Iuf bem @ra§ §u fpteten. 2 unb toottte fie fangen. 3 <>ftatf) meiner Sfteimmg. 4 2)er 
SBetfte (39, 2). 






THE VERB 



197 



Fourth Class. 

Vowel of imperfect a J past part. u» 

80. SBhtben, to bind; Snip. : id) banb ; ^erf. : id) rjab gebunben. 
^nbifatib. ®onjunftit>. Snbitatito. ®onjunfti&. 



id) binbe 


id) binbe 


id) banb 


id) bdnbe 


bu binbeft 


uu binbeft 


bu banb(e)ft 


bu banbeft 


er binbet 


er binbe 


er banb 


er bdnbe 


fair binben 


nrir binben 


roir banben 


fair banben 


i£)r btnbet 


irjr binbet 


if)r banbd 


it)r biinbd 


fie btnben 


fie binben 


fie banben 


fie banben 



Smperatibe: binbe! binbet! binben ©ie! 

Thus also : einbittben, to bind (as a book) ; rjerbinben, to bind up (as a 
wound); e. g., btefe§ 23ud) ift febr ftarf eingebunben; bie SSunben rourben 
tterbunben. 

81. 2)itt(jett, to hire (a servant) ; id) bang (®. bingte) ; id) fyabe ge- 

bungen. 
^raf. : id) binge, bu bingft, er bingt; binge! 

Originally and now often weak. 

82. $ringen, to press forward ; id) brang ; id) Ijabe gebrungen. 
^3rdf. : id) bringe, bu bringft r er bringt; bring(e)! 

Thus also : etn'brtngen, to press into (a place). 
Ex.: S)er 3ciger brang burcb ba% ©eftriipp. 

83. ginben,* to find; id) fanb ; id) l)abe gefunben. 
^rdf. : id) finbe, bu finbeft, ( er finbet; finbe! 

Thus also : fid) ein'finben, to be (at a certain place). 

Ex.: S)a§ SBertorene ift gefurtben ruorben. 

3d) fyabe &ertyrod)en mid) in ber @tabt um gebn Ubr ein;mftnben. 

84. @elingen(impers.), to succeed ; e3 gelang ntir ; e3 ift mir gelungen. 
$)3rdf. : e3 gelingt ntir, itmt, irjr, 2c. 

Ex. : 2Mne Unternebmung ift mtr gut gelungen. 

85. ^ftngen, to sound; id) Hang; id) fyabe geftungen. 
^rdf. : id) Hinge, bu flingft, er ftingt; fringe! 

Ex. : £) am (Snbe eine§ SBorteS ftingt ttrie t. 



I9« NEW GERMAN COURSE 

86. Sfthtgen, to struggle, strive for ; id) rang ; id) t)abe gerungen. 
$)3ra). : id) ringe, bu ringft, er ringt; rtng(e)! 

Ex.: „93orroart3 ! SSortt)drt§! 3m ©efange ringe tnit bent @d)mer$ ber 
2Be(t." — Geibel. 

87. Sdjlutgett, to wind, entwine ; id) fcfjtang ; id) tjabe gejd)(ungen. 

Thus also : t>erfd)ttngen, to devour. 

Ex. : £>a§ $inb fd)lang bic 5(rme urn ben £a(6 feiner Sautter. 
2)er 2Bolf serrtfj bo« £amm unb Derfd)lang e$. 

88. (Sc^tt»inbctt f to vanish; id) fd)tr>cmb ; id) bin gefcfjttmnben. 

9$ r a f. ; id) fdjnnnbe, bu fd)U)inbeft, er fdjnrinbet ; fd)tt>inb(e) ! 

Thus also : fcerfdjnrinben, to disappear. 

Ex. : Senn bag atte 3abr fcfottuubet, trttt bo8 neue 3abr an. 

89. Sdjtoingen, to swing; id) fdnnang, id) rjabe gefd)tr>ungen. 

*P x a f. : id) fd)tt)inge, bu fdjroingft, er fcfjtrjingt ; jd)tt)ing(e) ! 
Ex. : 2)ie $tnber fcbnungeu fid) auf bent ©cbaufefbrett. 

90. Stngen,* to sing ; id) fang ; id) t)abe gefungen. 

Ex. : 2)a8 2ftabd)en bat ein fcbbneS £ieb gefungen. 

91. 8infen,* to sink ; id) fan!, id) bin gefunfen. 
^ r a |. : id) finfe, bu finfft, er finft ; ftnf(e) ! 

Ex. : 2)ie @onne ftnft Winter bie SBerge. 

92. (gtyrittgen,* to spring ; id) fprang; id) bin gefprungen. 
^rdf. : id) fpringe, bu ftmngft, er fpringt; fpring(e)! 

Ex. : ZtU fprang &om SBoote an bag lifer. 

93. £rittfen,* to drink ; id) tran!; id) fyaht getrunfen. 
^raf. : id) trinfe, bu trinfft, er trtnft; trinl(e)! 

Ex. : 2)ie Sentperanjter trinfen nur SBaffer. 

94. SBinben, to wind, twist, wreathe ; id) tuanb ; id) fyaht gettmnben. 
^P r a f . : id) roinbe, bu toinbeft, er hrinbet; ttrinb(e)! 

Ex. : „Unb urn bie @aufe minbet fid) ber tran^." — Sch. 

95. 3^i«9cn f to compel; id) gtoang ; id) rjabe gegttmngen. 
$raf. : id) fringe, bu sttringft, er ^niingt; 5trjing(e)! 

Ex. : S)er geinb nmrbe gefungen fid) juriicfjusieben. 






THE VERB 199 

^otttietfattott* 

2)er $)ieb tt)urbe gefangen, gebunben unb \n§ ©efangni3 getoorfen. 

S)ie SSunben be3 (Satbaten ttmrben erfi berbunbeu ; er ttmrbe barnt 
in3 |)ofpttal getragen. 

Urn ben £>ieb gu oerfjaften, mufcte bie ^otigei in ba$ §au£ einbrin^ 
gen. 

2Ba» fjaft bu gefunben? 3d) (jabe etn 3ef)nmatr>©tucf gefunben; 
fjaben @ie etn foldfyejo (Mbftucf Derloren ? 

©etne Unternefymungen finb ifjm fefjr gut gelungen, unb er ift reicf) 
geroorben. 

2)ie golbene ®ugel fiel auf bie Gsrbe, roOte bann in£ SSaffer unb 
berfdjmanb. 

„£)ie Sorelei" totrb ii6eraH in Steutfdjtanb gefungen. 

9?enne mtr einige anbere beliebte beurfcfye Steber. „§eibenr63leui," 
. . . u. f. to. 

2Ser fjat „bie Sorelei" gefcfyrieben ? 

3Sarum ftnft etn (Stein, menu man it)n in3 Staffer ttrirft ? @r ftnft, 
rceit er fd)tnerer al3 ba<§ SBaffer ift. 

2Ba3 trinlen ©ie am (tebften ? 

Translate and Write: 

1 . Why was the thief bound ? He was bound to keep him 
from running away. 1 2. Did the police-officer force his way into 
the house? 2 3. A traveler found a bag of diamonds in the 
desert, but he could neither 3 eat them nor 3 sell them, therefore 
he died of hunger. 4 4. The' golden ball disappeared into the 
water. 5. Why did the stone sink into the water? 6. I drink 
beer sometimes, but I prefer wine. 5 7. Who compelled the lazy 
boy to go to school ? 6 

1 urn ifjn abjufjatten fortjulaufen. 2 ift . . . eingebrungen. 3 toeber . I . nod;. 4 ftarb 
Dor hunger. s id) jietje SEein toor. 6 in bie ©$ule ju getyen. 



200 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Fifth Class. 

Vowel of imperfect a, past part. o. 

96. (SJeMren,* to bear; Smp.: id) gebar (£'. gebdre); $erf. : id) 

Ijabe geboren. 
$rafen3. ^m^erfeftum. 

^nbifatirj. Sonjunftito. ^nbifatiu. lonjnnftiu. 

id) gebdre id) gebdre id) gebar id) gebdre 

bit gebierft bit gebdreft bit gebarft bn gebdreft 

er ge6iert er ge6dre er gebar cr gcbdrc 

tt)ir ge6dren ttrir gebdren toir gebaren toir gebdren 

ifyr gebdrt irjr gebdret ifjr gebart ifyr gebdret 

fie gebdren fie gebdren fie gebaren fie gebdren 

3 m per a tin: gebier! gebdret! gebdren ©ie ! 
Ex. : 2Bafl)ington ttmrbe int Sabre 1732 geboren. 

97. SSefeJjfcti, to command; id) 6efar)l (®. before); id) \)<xbz befotjlen. 
^3rdf. : id) befeljle, bn befierjlft, er befief)(t; befiet)t! 

Ex. : 2)er £err befiebtt bem 5)iener bad (Sffen 311 beretten. 

98. SBergen, to conceal; id) barg ; id) rjabe geborgen. 
$rdf. : id) berge, bu birgft, er birgt; birg! 

Thus also : SBerbergen, to conceal. 

Ex. : ®er 2)teb bat ba§ geftobtene (Mb uerborgen. 

99. SBerftert, to burst ; id) barft ($. bbrfte), tdj bin geborften. 
$P r a f. : id) berfte, bn birft, er birft ; birft ! 

Ex. : 3)er Stampffeffel barft unb ridjtete trielen ©cbaben an. 

100. 2$redjett,* to break; idj brad); id) rjabe ge6rod)en. 
$P r a f. : id) breeze, bn bridjft, er bridjt ; brief) ! 

Thus also : ^erbrecfoeil, to break in pieces. 
Ex. : 2)ie genfterfefietbe ift jerbrodjen ttwben. 

101. Sreftfjen, to thresh; id) brafct) ; id) fyabe gebrofdjen. 
^3 r a f. : idj brefdje, bn brifd)eft, er brtfdjt ; brifd) ! 

Ex. : ®er Matter brifefot ba§ ©etreibe. 

102. (£rfdjre<fett, to be frightened ; id) erfdjraf ; id) bin erfd)roden. 
9$ r a f. : ict) erfctjrede, bu erfdjridft, er erfd)ridt ; erfdjrid ! 

(Srfdjretfen, to frighten, is regular and with baben. 
Ex. : 3)er S)ieb erjct)raf, al« er ben ^ottjiften erbticfte. 



THE VERB 201 

103. (Mtett, to be worth ; id) gait ($. gtiltc), id) babe gegolten. 
^3 rcij. : id) gelte, bu giltft, er gilt; gilt! 

Ex. : 2)iefe Mnje gilt itic^t mebr ; fie i[t oerattet. 

104. <£>elfett,* to help ; id) §alf ($. plfe) ; id) l)abe gefyotfen. 
$raf. : id) t)e(fe, bu Ijtlfft, er t)ilft; t)t(f ! 

Ex. -. @ei bilfreid), jo roirb man bir ijeifen. 

105. 9fceJjmen,* ft? &*£<?/ id) nai)m; id) tjabe genommen. 
^3 r a ). : id) neljme, bu ntmmft, er rrimmt ; uimm ! 

Ex. : Sreten ©ie ein ; nebmen @ie s .J3Iat3. 

106. Sdjefteu, ft? ^/^/ id) fd)alt; id) Ijabe gefdjotten. 
$P r a f. : id) fd)elte f bu fdjittft, er |d)ilt ; fd^itt ! 

Ex. : ba§ uuartige £inb ift oft gefd)otteu ttorbeu. 

107. Spredjcn, to speak ; id) fprad) ; id) l)abe gejprod)en. 
$)3 r a f. : id) fpredje, bu fprtdjft, er jpridjt ; jprid) ! 

Ex. : Sir tyredjen beutfdj uub fraujbfifd). 

108. Stedjen, to sting; id) ftad) ; id) fjabe geftodjeu. 
^rd).: id) ftecl)e, bu ftid)ft, er ftidji; fttdj!" 

Ex. : „9?o8tein fpracf), id) ftedje bid), 

©aft bu ettug benfft an mid)." — G. 

109. SteJjleti,* to steal ; id) ftafyt; id) Ijabe gefto^ten. 
$raf.: id) fte()le, bu fttetjtft, er ftiebjlt; ftierjt! 

Ex. : SSer fttetjlt tuirb beftraft toerbeit. 

no. Sterkn,* ft? die; id) ftarb (SL fturbe) ; id) bin geftorbeu. 
^ r ft f. : ic^ fterbe, bu fttrbft, er ftirbt ; ftirb ! 
Ex.: „Sterben ift nicbt§, aber tebeu unb uid)t ferjen, bag ift ;in Un= 
gtfitf." — Sch. 

in. Sreffett, & /^V, ;/z^// id) traf; id) l)abe getroffeu. 
$raf.: id) treffe, bu trtffft, er trtfft ; triff! 

Ex. : „3)er 2tyfel ift getroffeu ! S)er $nabe tebt !" — Sch. 

112. Berber ktt, to perish ; id) berbarb (St Derbiirbe) ; id) bin oer- 
borben. 
yj§ r a j. : id) cerberbe, bu oerbirbft, er fcerbirbt ; oerbirb ! 

As transitive, to spoil, conjugated with babeu. 

Ex. : 3)ie liberfd)tt)emmung bat bie §euerute oerborben. 



202 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

113. SHkr&ett, to sue for, court, enlist (as soldiers); idjj tDCtrb (R. 

miirbe) ; id) f)abe gemorben. 
^3 r a f . : id) toer6e r bit mirbft, er roirbt; lr»tr6 ! 

Ex. : SBater £htbaut fagt : Gbr tuerbt urn meine 9ftargot. — Sch. 

1 14. SSerfen,* to throw ; id) raarf (®. tniirfc) ; id) fjabe geroorfen. 
^rdf. : id) tuerfc, bu nrirfft, er luirft ; toirf ! 

Ex. : „9BBer unfdjufbig ift, tnerfe ben erften @tein." 

115. Segimtett,* /v? ^z'/z; id) begantt($. begbnne); id) l)abe begonnen. 
SPrSf. : id) beginne, bu beginnft, er beginnt; beginne! 

Ex. : 2Bo haben nur begonnen (an'gefangen) ? 

116. ©etoimtett,* zv? «/*«; id) getrjtnne, ic§ geroann (St getuonne); id) 

l)abe gemonnen. 
$Praf. : id) gettunne, bu genrinnft, er geroinnt; gerainne! 
Ex. : Ser hat ben $ret3 getnonnen? 

117. SRumen, to leak, flow ; id) rann (®. ronne); id) biu geronuen. 
$P r a f . : id) rinne, bu rinuft, er riunt ; rinu(e) ! 

Ex. : 3)aS 9?egemnaffer rtnnt burd) ben 9ftnnftein. 

118. Sitmett, to think, meditate ; id) fcmn (St fonne); id) tyaht ge= 

fomten. 

^Prdf. : id) fume, bu finnft, er fiunt; finn(e)! 
Ex. : „%m Ufer fteb/ id), [inn' unb jinn', 

2Bo fommft bit ber, mo gefyft bit bin?" — G. 

119. ©pitmen, to spin; id) fpann (®. fpbnne); id) ()abe gefponnen. 
$rdf. : id) fpinne, bu fpinnft, er fpinnt; fpinne! 

Ex. .- ®a§ Bftabdjen ftfct am @ptnnrab ttnb tyinnt gitadjs. 

120. 6d)tMttttnett,* to swim; icf) fdjraamm (St fd)roomme); id) bin 

gefdjroommen (144). 

Ex. : 3)er £mnb fprang aits bent 33oote nnb fdjmamm an ba3 Ufer. 

121. Smitten,* to come ; id) !am; id) bin gefommen. 
^3rdf. : id) fomme, bu fommft, er fommt; (fomm(e)! 

Thus also : cmf'ommen, to arrive. 
Ex. : SBann (inb @ie angefommen ? 






THE VERB 203 

Stontierfattott. 

Sn toeldjem 3al)re ftnb ©ie geboren ? 3d) bin tm Sarjre 1832 ge* 
boren. 

2)er §err befatjl bem Wiener in bie &tabt §u getjen. 2Ber befat)! 
bem SDiener? 2Beld)en gall regtert ba$ 35erb ff 6efe^ien" ? 

$onjugieren ©te „r>erbergen" tm ^erfeftum be3 ®onjunttit)3. 

S)iefer 9ftann fiel auf bem (Sife unb brad) fief) ben 91rm. 2$er ftel 
auf bem (£ife? <Smb ©ie auf bem Qnfe gef alien? 

SSer brifd)t SSet^en? ~Der $auer brtfd^t alle 21rten Don ©etreibe. 

2)er £)ieb erfct)raf f at3 er ben $o(i§eibiener erbticfte. 

2)iefe $riefmarfe gilt rjier ntdjt ; e3 ift eine auSlanbtfdje. 

23itte, tjetfen <Ste mir biefen Coffer bie Xreppe fyinauftragen. 

SBitte, nef)tnen @ie *JSta§. 3d) banle, id) fyahe grofce (£ile, id) fann 
nict)t lange blei6en. 

£)ie Gutter rjat ba£ unartige ®inb gefctjotten. 

(Sprectjen ©ie beutfd)? 3a, ein menig. 2Ber fpridjt am beften 
beutfd)? 

2Senn biefer 9#ann nidjt geftorjlen l)atte, jo mare er nid)t ins @e^ 
fdngnte gemorfen raorben. 

$)er arme SO^ann ftarb an einer Snngenentjunbung. 

(Sin SSafinfinniger roarf einen (Stein burd) bie genfterfd)eibe. 

2)er ffiann ftet)t am Ufer be3 23ad)e3 unb fagt : 

„9Im Ufer fief)' id), firm unb firm, 
2Bo fommft bu fyer, ipo gefjft bu I)in ?" — G. 

Urn mieoiel Urjr ftnb ©ie angelommen ? 3d) 6in urn sefm Uljr an- 
gefommen. Urn raieoiel Ut)r finb ©ie Oon ber ©tabt abgefaljren? 

Translate and Write : 

1. Washington was born in the year 1732. 2. Command the 
child to come here. 1 3. Where did you hide the ring ? 2 4. Who 
broke this ruler? 5. Were you frightened 3 when you saw the 
watchdog ? 6. Please help me to carry 4 this trunk. 7. Do not 
scold; speak quietly. 8. Who spoke (123, 5); no one spoke. 
9. Who has stolen my pen ? No one has stolen it, there it lies 



204 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

on the floor. 10. All human beings 5 must die. n. You have 
hit the mark. 12. If you had studied more diligently you would 
have won the prize. 6 13. If I had known that my father was 
here I would have come sooner. 7 

1 Ijterljev ju fommeti. 2 use berbergert or berftetfen. 3 ttarett ©ie erjdjrocfen ? *• i n fin. 
without ^u. 5 alle "JDlenfcfyen. 6 ttmrben ©ie ben ^SretS gemonnen fyaben. 7 See § 123, 9-10. 



Sixth Class. 

Vowel of imperfect a t past part, c, 

22. (Sfffeti,* 'to eat; 3 m p. : id) afc ; ty e r f . id) Ijabe gcgeffen. 

$rafe«3. ^mperfeftum. 

Snbifatit). ®onjunfttu. ^nbifatiu. ®onjnnftiu. 



id) effe 


id) effe 


id) afj 


id) dfee 


bu tffeft (i&t) 


bu effeft 


bu afeeft 


bu afjeft 


er ifct 


er effe 


er afe 


er dfte 


roir effen 


roir effen 


roir aften 


roir dfcen 


ifjr effet 


irjr effet 


ti)r aftet 


if)r dfeet 


fie effen 


fie effen 


fie often 


fie dften 



3 m p e r a t i t> : if$ ! effet ! effen ©ie ! 
Ex. : 2BaS effen @ie $u 9Jttttag ? 

123. greffeit, to eat, devour (said of animals); id) fraft ; idj rjctbe 

gefreffen. 
% r d f. : id) freffe, bu friffeft (frifet), er frtfet ; frtfc ! 
Ex. : S)er SSoIf jerri^ ba§ &mm unb fraft e3. 

124. ($tekn,* to give ; id) gau ; id) rjabe gegeoen. 
^rdf.: id) ge6e, bu gi6ft, er gibt; gib! 

Thus also : ju'geben, to admit. 

Ex. : 3d) gebe ba% nicfrt 311, benrt eg ift ntc&t roabr. 

125. ©enefen, /<? recover from illness; id) gena3 ; id) Sin genefen. 
^P r a f. : id) genefe, bu genefeft, er geneft ; genefe ! 

Ex. -. S)er $ranfe ift genefen. 

1 26. ® efdjeljen, to happen ; e£ gefdjaij ; e3 ift gefd)ef)en ! 
$rdf.: e£ gefd)ierjt; (impersonal, see § 169). 

Ex. : 2Bct8 ift geftfjehen ? 



THE VERB 205 

127. Sefett,* to read ; id) Ict3; id) fjabe gelefen. 
$ r a f. : id) lefe, bu liefeft, er lieft ; lie3 ! 

Thus also : Dor'tefen, to read to one. 

Ex. : (gr bat ntir etite fdjbne @efd)id)te rjorgefefen. 

128. Sfteffen,* /<? measure ; id) maf} ; id) fjabe gemeffen. 
$P r a j. : icf) meffe, bu miff eft (mifct), er mtfet ; mif$ ! 

Ex. : 2Bie (ang ift biefeg gimmer? SD^effen @ie eg. 

129. Seljcn,* to see ; id) fat); id) tja6e geferjen. 
s $raf. : icf) felje, bu fiet)ft, er fiefjt; fief)! 

Ex. : 3d) fal) aug bent f^enfter unb erbtidte ein SJogehteft in bent SBaume. 

r 30. £reten,* to tread; id) trat ; id) bin getreten. 
$raf. : id) trete, bu txittft, er tritt; tritt! 

Thus also : euttretett, to enter. 

Ex. : @r trat in bag 3i nnner ein uno f e £ te fid) an oen 2ifd). 

Also used transitively ; e. g., er bat mid) auf ben ^uft getreten. 

131. $$tx§t\\txi * to forget ; id) oergafc ; id) t)abe bergeffen. 

Sfiva). : id) uergeffe, bu bergiffeft (bergifjt), er bergifjt; fcergif}! 
Ex.: SJiefeS $tub ift nadjtaffig; eg t-ergijjt affeS. 

132. 23tttctt f * to beg, ask ; id) bat; id) fjabe gebeten. 
^rdf. : id) bitte, bu bitteft, er bitkt; bitte! 

Ex. : 3d] bitte urn ein @la§ 2$affer. 

133. Si^en,*to sit; icf) faf$ ; id) fjabe gefeffen. 
$raf. : id) ftfce, bu ftfceft, er fi£t; ft|e! 

Ex.: 9ftan ftfct auf einent ©tubl unb Itegt im SBette. 

134. Siegen,* to lie down; id) fag; id) fjabe getegen. 
^3 r a f . : icf) liege, bu liegft, er liegt; liege! 

Ex. : 3d) lege bag 23ud) auf bag $utt. So liegt eg ? 

Slant) erf atiotu 

Urn toietnel Ut)r effeu ©ie 5U SD^ittag ? 3d) effe gefoofjnlicf) um 
jtofllf Ut)r gu SDcittag. 

$)ie 90?enfd)eu effeu ; bie Xiere freffeu. 

£)er ^ranle ift geuefeu. 

2$a3 ift gefd)et)en? (Sin ^pferb ift bat>ou gelaufeu (has run away). 

2Bie laug unb trie breit ift bie)e3 ^hunter ? 33? effeu <Sie e3. 



206 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

$8a3 fefjen <5ie bort auf bem |mgel? 3d) fefje 23aume, gelber unb 
|)dufer. 

£reten @te ein ; nefymen Ste $)3ia(5. 

3d) fyabe fcergeffen, metn 53ucf) mir^ubringen. 

£)ie Slinber finben e3 fc^tuer unb langroeilig, ftill §u figen. 

Sn ber 9?ad)t (iegt man tm $8ette unb fdjlaft. @liidiid) ftnb bie* 
jenigen, toetcfje rufjig fd)(afen fonnen. 

Translate and Write : 

i . If you had eaten the green fruit you would have become 
ill (123, 9-10). 2. Cattle 1 eat grass and hay. 3. I would have 
given you the picture if you had asked me for it. 2 4. The 
patients have all recovered.^ 5. What has happened? A child 
has fallen from the bridge into the river, but a Newfoundland 
dog has saved it.+ 6. Read slowly and distinctly. 7. Measure 
this desk; how long and how wide is it? 8. May is write a 
letter here ? Yes, certainly. 9. One sits in a chair or lies in 
bed. 

1 ba§ 3SieE>. 2 roenn ©ie mid) barum gebeten fatten. 3|'inbatle genefen. 4ein -Keufunb; 
lanbet Ijat e3 gerettet. s barf id) (149, 1). 

Seventh Class. 

Vowel of imperfect it, past part. a. 

135. 23atfen,* to bake ; Snip. : bul; $J3erf. : id) rjabe gebacfen. 

$rafett3. ^m^crfcltttm. 

Snbifattb. ®onjurtftit>. ^nbifattb. £onjunftit>. 



id) bade 


id) bade 


id) buf 


id) biife 


bu bdcfft 


bu bacfeft 


bu bufft 


bu biifeft 


er bticft 


er badt 


er buf 


er biife 


toir bacfen 


rotr bacfen 


rotr bufen 


tnir bufen 


ifjr badt 


ifjr bacfet 


tfyr buft 


iijx biifet 


fie bacfen 


fie bacfen 


fie bufen 


fie bufen 


3mperatib: bacf(e)! bacf(e)t! 


bacfen @ie! 




When intransitive, weak. 






Ex. : S)er Sbddtx bacft SBrot unb £udjett. 





THE VERB 207 

136. gafjren,* to ride, drive ; id) fubjr; id) bin gefafjren. 
^raf. : id) fafjre, bit fct^rft, er fdfprt; fa£)re! 

Transitive with baben, intr. with feirt. 
Ex. : 3d) bin beute aufs 2anb gefafiren. 

137. ©ra&en,* to dftgv ictj grub ; id) fya&e gegraben. 
Spraj. : id) grabe, bu grdbft, er grdbt; grabe! 

Thus also : begraben, to £«rj. 

Ex. : ®ie Seic^en roerben in bent $trd)bof begraben. 

138. £abett,* to load; id) fab; id) tja6e gelaben. 
^raf.: id) labe, bit Idbft, er Ictbt ; lab(e)! 

Thus also : ein'Iaben, to invite. 

Ex. : 2)a§ @cf)iff ift fertig gelaben roorben. 

139. ©d)affen, to create ; id) jdjitf : id) fja6e gefct)affen. 
^rct f. : id) fdjaffe, bit fcfjaffft, er ftfjafft; fc^affe! 

Ex. : 5lm SInfang fdjuf ©ott §unmet unb @rbe. 

140. ©djfogen,* & &ratf, strike; id) fd)fag ; id) tjabe ge|d)lagen. 
^rdj. : id) fd)(age f bit fdjldgft, er fcl;£dgt ; fd)(ag(e)! 

Ex.: 2)er ^einb ift gestagen roorben. 

141. £ragett,* to carry, wear; id) tntg ; id) Ijabe getragen. 
Spraf. : id) trage, bu trdgft, er trdgt; trag(e)! 

Thus also •. hinauftragen, to carry up. 

Ex. : „@ie trug ben grofd) fiinauf unb fefcte ibn in bte ©cfe." 

142. 2Sarf)feit,* to grow ; id) ttm'dj3; id) bin getoadjfen. 
^rdf. : id) toadjje, bu nmd)(|e)[t, er ttmd)ft; itmrf)f(e)! 

Ex.: 3So ftnb btefe *J3fIan$en geioacbfen? 

143. SBafdjcn,* to wash; id) mufd) ; id) l)abe getoafrfjen. 
^rdf. : id) mafdje, bu trjd)d)(e)[t, er todfdjt; toafdj(e)! 

Ex. : 9ftan rodfcbt mit Staffer unb @cifc. 

Stotm erf atiotu 

£)er SBdder, ft)e(cf)er gute3 unb ge[unbe<o $8vot hixdt, uerbient geef)rt 
§u roerben. 

SJcan fdfjrt in einem SSagen ober in einent $8oote, man reitet auf 
einem ^ferbe. 



2CS NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2)ie Setdje tnirb in ber @rbe begraben ober toirb nerbrannt. 2Bao 
ift am beften, begraben ober uerbrannt gu roerbcn ? 

OTe bie perfonlid)en grennbe ber 23raut unb beg 53rautigam3 tourbcn 
eingelaben. 

2lm 2lnfang beg SlriegeS ttmrben bit Stiffen in alien ©djlacfjten 
gestagen. 

Wlan trdgt fetne ^tteiber nnb tragt @elb in ber Safdje. 

£)ie &onig3tod)ter trng ben grofcl) l)inauf nnb fettfe iljn in bie (£cfe. 

28o ftnb biefe ^flangen geraacljfen ? ©ie finb in nnferm ©arten 
getrjacrjfen. 

2)ie 2Bafcl)frau tt)dfcf)t bie SSafcrje mil fjeifjem 2Baffer unb ©eife. 

Translate and Write : 

I. Who bakes the best bread in this village? 2. Will you 
ride in a carriage, or will you ride on horseback ? ' 3. The grave 
of Sir John More was dug at night. 2 4. Who was invited to the 
wedding? 5. The enemy has been beaten. 6. Do you carry 
much money in your pocket 3 ? 7. Which overcoat will you wear 
to-day ? 8. Did this plant grow in your garden ? (123, 5). 

1 28o(ten ©tc fctfyren ober reiten? 2 bei 9iad;t. 3 in ber Safcfye (32, 10 c). 

Eighth Class. 

Vowel of imperfect ic r past part. a. 

144. 231afen,* to blow ; ^mp. : blie£; ^5 erf.: id) rjabe geblafen. 
Snbifattto. ®onjunftit>. Snbifattt). ® onjunftit). 



id) blafe 


id) blafe 


id) blie3 


id) 6 lief e 


bn blafeft 


bu blafeft 


bn b lief eft 


bn bliefeft 


er blaft 


er blafe 


er blie3 


er btiefe 


ttir blafen 


fair blafen 


toir 6 lief en 


toir bliefen 


irjr blaft 


it)r blafet 


il)r bltefet 


iljr btiefet 


fie blafen 


fie blafen 


fie bliefen 


fie bliefen 


^mperatit 


)': blaf(e)! blaf(e)t! 


blafen ®ie! 




Thus also : 


auS'rjtafen, to blow out, 






Ex. : Sarum rjabert @ie ba& SHcfjt 


auggeMafen? 





THE VERB 209 

145. SBraten,* to roast ; id) briet; idj rjabe gebraten. 
ipr&f. : id) brate, bu bratft, er brat; brat(e)! 

Ex. : 2)a§ $(eifd) ttrirb in betn Ofen gebraten. 

146. gatten,* to fall; id) pel; id) bin gefallen. 
«PrSf. : id) falle, bu fftUft, er fallt; f all(e) ! 

Thus also : ein'fatlen, to occtir to one's mind. 
Ex. : 3)a§ 23ud) ift auf ben gjwpoben gefallen. 

147. gangcn,* to catch ; icf) prig; id) rjabe gefangen. 
^JSrctf. : id) fange, bu fangft, er fangt; fang(e)! 

Thus also: etnpfan'gen, to receive ; otl'fongen, to begin. 
Ex. : SQtan fangt ^tfcbe mit ber 2lngel. 

148. fatten,* ta /^/^; id) i)ie(t; id) fjabe getjalten. 
Sprftf. : id) i)afte, bu ^attft, er tjalt; f)att(e)! 

Thus also : bebalten, to &?<?/ ; erbalten, to receive ; auf'balten, to stop, de- 
tain. 
Ex. : 3d) balte bag 33ud) in ber recbten £>anb. 

149. ^angen,* to hang; id) tying; id) tjabe getjangen. 
^rcif.: idj l)dnge, bu Ijangft, er rjtingt; l)dng(e)! 

Ex. : 2)ie Ubr bangt an ber SBanb. 

150. Saffen,* to let, leave ; tct) liejg, id) fjabe gelaffen. 
*Praf. : id) laffe, bu laffeft (Icijjt), er lafet; laft! 

Thus also : oerlaffen, to leave. 

Ex.: 2Bo laffen @ie 3bre ©cbittje madjen (150)? 

151. $aten,* to advise ; id) riet ; id) fjabe geraten. 
$Prti|. : id) rate, bu ratft, er rat; rat(e)! 

Thus also: oerraten, to betray ; errateit, to guess. 

Ex. : 3d) toiirbe 3bnen raten gWid) nad) §au|e p geben. 

152. Sdjlafen,* to sleep ; idj fdjlief; id) tyabe gefctylafen. 
Sprftf.: id) fdjlafe, bu fdjfttfft, er fdjtfift; fd)laf(e)! 

Ex. : 3Sie tange fdjtafen ©ie getnbbrtUd) ? 

2)er 2Sinb bldft ; e3 friert ; man mufe pd) to arm anlteiben. 
(MrateneS SHinbfleifd) rjeifet „9i oft brat en". 
3n bent ©djaufaiet „2Si(i)eim Sell" Ijeifjt e3: „2)er Styfet ift 
gefallen, ber S^nabe lebt." 



2IO NEW GERMAN COURSE 

©8 fd((t mtr e6en etn, bctJ3 id) urn gebn llljr bet bent Qatmar^t fein 
muf3. 

2)ie ^onk^tocrjter roarf bie Slugel tit bie §o()e unb fing fie ttneber. 

3()ren roerten 23rief Dom 8. biefeS Wlonat$ f)abe id) empfangcn 
(erf)a(tert). 

SSa§ fjalten @te in ber recrjten |)anb ? 

SSemt <Sie metne geber Ijabeit, fo burfen ©ie biefelbe befyalten. 

3n „2Si(l)elm %di" fagt 2(rmgarb: „£)a f)angt ber SanbDogt, tjabt 
ffiefaeft,il)r$Buben." — Sch. 

2Bo laffert ©te Sfyre Hletber macfjen ? 3d) laffe fie bet bent @d)nei= 
ber gifdjer madjen. 

3d) roiirbe 3f)nen raten, tjeute git |)aufe $u bleiben, bentt @ie rjaben 
fid) fcfyroer erfdltet. Sie ntiiffen fid) in actjt nefjinen. 

2$ie lange fdjlafen <Bk jebe 9tad)t ? 3d) jct)lafe fect)^ bi3 fieben 
©tnnben. 

Translate and Write: 

i . Do you think the wind will blow as r hard to-morrow as l it 
does to-day? 2. In the autumn the apples fall from the trees. 
3. The cat catches the mice and eats them. 4. They held a 
council to decide 2 whether the war should be continued. 3 
5. Where do these people have their shoes made ? 6. A student 
should sleep at-least eight hours. 

J eben jo ftarf tote. 2 6ie fyietten 'Rat, urn ju entjdjciben. 3 tottgejetjt merben fottte. 

Verbs not Classified. 

153. £aufett,* to run; id) lief; id) bin gelaufen. 
^rcif. : id) laufe, bn taufft, er lauft ; (anf(e) ! 

Ex. : 2Belcfie§ £ier lauft am fdjnettftett ? 

154. «§a«en, to hew, beat, whip ; id) rjteb ; id) fyabe gerjauen. 

Ex. : 2)ec $utfd)er fyieb auf bte ^ferbe unb fie ^ogen an. 

155. Stolen, to push, thrust; id) ftie^; id) ^abz geftofeen. 
sprftf. : id) ftofee f bn ftofeeft, er ftfl&t; ftofe(e) ! 

Thus also : ab'ftoften, to push off. 

Ex. : „(§r ftoftt ftfjon ab. @ott betf bit, braber @tf)hrimmer!" — Sch. 






THE VERB 211 

156. «§e%n,* to bid, be called; id) fytejs ; id) rjabe gerjeifcen. 
$Praf. id) fjetfce, bu fyetfceft, er Ijetfjt; §eife(e) ! 

Ex. : ^etften ©ie ibn bereintreten. 
SSie Ijeiften @ie ? 

157. Diufen,* to call; id) rtef ; id) IjaBe gerufen. 
^raf. : id) rufc, bu rufft, er ruft; ruf(e) ! 

Ex. : §aben <©ie tnid^ gerufen ? 

158. ®eljett,* to^v/ id) ging; id) bin gegangen. 
S$ x a f. : id) ge()e, bu gefjft, er gel)t ; gefy(e) ! 

Ex. : SBobin gehen @te ? 3d) gerje in bie @d)ule. 

159. Std)(e)tt,* to stand ; id) ftanb ; id) l)abe geftanben. 
$raf. : id) ftelje, bu ftebft, er ftef)t ; ftel)(e) ! 

Thus also : auffteben, to arise, stand up. 

Ex. : 2Bo ftebt ber ©tubf ? @r ftebt an bent £ifdje. 

©tefien @te auf ! 

160. £mt,* to do, make ; id) tat; id) r)abe getau. 
$raf. : id) tue, bu tuft, er tut ; tu(e) ! 

Ex. : 3d) babe attes SD^ogticfje fiir @ie getan. 

^ontictfatiott* 

£)er ®nabe lam getaufen unb fagte uu3, ba$ feiu $ater gefaugeu 
roorben fei (125, 4). 

28ie fjeijst bu ? 3d) t)ei^e (Clarence (£roalb. 
9tufen ©ie beu £)iener ? Set) rjabe ifjn fdjon gerufeu. 
@et)eu <8ie an bie S£afe( uub fdjreiben <5ie bag 3Sort 
3So fteljt ftart ? (£r ftefot an bem genfter. 
2Sa3 {)aben @ie getau ? 3d) rjabe nidjt§ getan. 

Translate and Write: 

1. Who came running ? The boy came running. 2. What is 
the name of the man who said "He is already pushing off " ? 
His name is Werni. 3. Did you call the servant ? No, I did 
not call him (123, 5). 4. Where are you going ? I am going 
to school. 5. Where am I standing? 6. Who did that? 



212 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



174. An Alphabetical List 
to the 



of the Strong Verbs with References 
Classified List. 



*Backen 


'35 


*gehen 


158 


Quellen 


63 


sinnen 


118 


*befehlen 


97 


gelingen 


84 






*sitzen 


133 


*beginnen 


ii5 


gelten 


103 


*Raten 


151 


speien 


30 


*beiBen 


1 


gene sen 


125 


*reiben 


24 


spinnen 


119 


bergen 


98 


genieBen 


42 


*reifien 


9 


*sprechen 


107 


bersten 


99 


*geschehen 


126 


*reiten 


10 


sprieBen 


50 


*betriigen 


77 


*gewinnen 


116 


*riechen 


45 


*springen 


92 


bewegen 


57 


*gieBen 


43 


ringen 


86 


stechen 


108 


*biegen 


36 


gleichen 


3 


rinnen 


117 


*stehen 


159 


*bieten 


37 


gleiten 


4 


*rufen 


157 


*stehlen 


109 


*binden 


80 


glimmen 


68 






*steigen 


3i 


*bitten 


132 


*graben 


137 


Saufen 


77 


*sterben 


no 


*blasen 


M4 


*greifen 


5 


saugen 


72 


stieben 


5i 


*bleiben 


19 






schaffen 


139 

25 


stoBen 


155 
16 


*braten 


145 


*Halten 
*hangen 


148 


scheiden 


streichen 


*brechen 


100 


149 


*scheinen 


26 


*streiten 


J 7 






hauen 


154 


*schelten 


106 






Dingen 


81 


*heben 


60 


scheren 


64 


*Tragen 


141 


dreschen 


101 


*heiBen 


156 


*schieben 


46 


*treffen 


11 1 


dringen 


82 


*helfen 


104 


*schieBen 


47 


*treiben 


3 2 






Klimmen 


68 


%chlafen 


T 5 2 


*treten 


130 


Erbleichen 
erkiesen 


2 

78 


klingen 
kneifen 


85 
6 


*schlagen 
schleichen 


140 
11 


triefen 
*trinken 


52 
93 


erloschen 
erschallen 
erschrecken 


75 

70 

102 


*kommen 
*kriechen 


121 

44 


*schleifen 
*schlieBen 


12 

48 


*tun 
Verderben 


160 
112 


*essen 


122 


*Laden 


138 


schlingen 
schmeiBen 


87 
13 
65 
73 


verdrieBen 


53 


*Fahren 
*fallen 


136 
146 


*lassen 
*laufen 
*leiden 


150 
153 


schmelzen 
schnauben 


*vergessen 

*verlieren 

*verzeihen 


131 
54 
33 


*fangen 


H7 


7 


*schneiden 


14 




fechten 


58 


*leihen 


21 


*schreiben 


27 


*Wachsen 


142 


*finden 


83 


*lesen 


127 


schreien 


28 


*waschen 


143 


flechten 


59 


*liegen 


134 


' schreiten 


!5 


weben 


67 


*fliegen 


38 


*lugen 


79 


schweigen 


29 


weichen 


18 


fliehen 


39 


Meiden 


22 


schwellen 


66 


weisen 


34 


*flieBen 


40 


melken 


61 


*schwimmen 


120 


werben 


113 


freshen 


123 


*messen 


128 


schwinden 


88 


*werfen 


114 


*frieren 


4i 






schwingen 


89 


wiegen 


55 






*Nehmen 


i°5 


schworen 


76 


win den 


94 


G'aren 


74 






*sehen 


129 






*gebaren 


96 


Pfeifen 


8 


sieden 


49 


Zeihen 


35 


*geben 


124 


pflegen 


62 


%ingen 


90 


*ziehen 


56 


gedeihen 


20 


*preisen 


23 


*sinken 


9i 


zwingen 


95 



The commonest words are marked (*) as in the classified list. 



REVIEW 213 

175. Review of grammatical forms (2ltfgemeirte SBtebcrljohmg). 

It would add greatly to the value of these exercises if the pupil would form a 
sentence in each case where practicable, for example with biejer : „£)ieie§ tieue 
£aus ift groft unb fdjon," and with „eiit §nt/' „id) fyabe einen neuert §ut gefauft." 

Stefftnieren ®ie ben 6e[timmten 5lrtifel (31). 
SDeftmieren ©ie ben unbefttmmtert 5lrti!e( (31). 
Mlmieren ©te „btefer M (32, 4). 
SSeldje Shorter rnerben une „btefer" beflmiert? (32, 3). 
SDeflmieren Ste „mem" (32, 6). 
SBeuije Sorter toerben tote „mein" beflmiert? (32, 5). 
$)eflimeren @ie „ber §ut"; „bte ®arte"; „ba3 23uct)" (34, 6). 
£>efttmeren 8te „eut §ut," „eine ®arte," „em SBudj" (34, 6). 
SMdje ©nbungen be^eic^nen ba£ roet61icrje (Stefcrjiecrjt? (38, 2). 
SSetctje Qntbungen be§etcfjnen ba§ jcicfjltcrje ©efcrjlecrjt? (38, 4). 
3)eftmteren @ie bte acrjt SD^uftertDdrter anf ©eite 61. 
2Bte fjeifjen bte Dter 3af)re3§etten ? (62). 
SBte t)eifecn bte donate? (63). 
2Bte Ijei&en bte %age ber SSorf)e? (64). 
,3at)ten ©ie Don ein§ 6i§ gtoan^tg (66). 
3at)len @ie bte ^efyner : §e()n, gtDcm^tg, n. f. id. (66). 
2)eftinieren @te: „ber erfte 9#ann" ; „bte gtoeite gran"; „ba$ 
brttte ftinb" (71). 

£ejen ©ie fotgenbe SBrutfjtetle : 

1 3 7 9 1191Q1 

2< 4» ¥' TO' -"-Sf *3> °2' 

2)eflinieren <Ste : „guter S33etn"; „gute@petfe"; „gute§ (Mb" (76). 

£)efltmeren ©ie: „ber reife 5(pfel"; „bte iDet^e ®arte"; „ba3 nene 
$ud)" (77). 

£)ef(mteren <3ie: , f ein retfer Sfyfel"; „ehtetoetf$e ®arte"; „einneue3 
$utf)" (78). 

©teigern @ie folgenbe 2lbjefttDe: „retcr)" ; „arm"; „alt" ; „jung"; 
„gut" (80). 

£)eftmieren ©ie (tnt ^omparattD) „ber altere" unb (tm ©uperlatio) 
„ber ftftefte" (80, 4). 

Mlinieren @te: „ber reicf)fte 9J?ann"; „bie fd^onfte SBlume"; „ba3 
6cftc $ucfj" (80, 4). 



214 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

$effimerett ©ie ba§ $erfonat=$ronomen uottftanbtg in alien ^3er= 
fonen unb giiften (82). 

3)eflinieren ©ie: „tnein neues $ud)." 

Mlinieren ©ie: „ber meinige" unb „ber S^rtge" (87,9). 

2)eflinieren ©ie: „meiner" unb „|etncr" (88). 

£)efltmeren ©ie: ff ber — r bie — , ba£jenige," unb „ber — r bic — , 
ba3fet6e" (89, 1). 

U6erfe^en ©ie : I will give the book to him who writes best. 

$)efltmeren ©ie „toetd)er" „njer" unb „toa& u (90, 1). 

SBelcfje ^rdpoftttonen regieren ben ©emtio? (100). 

SSeldje ^rapofitionen regteren ben £)atio? (101). 

2Beldje ^rdpofittonen regieren ben 2(ccufatio ? (102). 

SSelcfje Sprapofttionen regteren ben SDattu auf bte $rage „too"? unb 
ben Stccufattt) auf bie grage „toofyn"? 

2Bie fjei^en bte bret Drbnungen ber 28ortfolge ? ©eben ©ie $ei- 
fpiele (114-117). 

3Se(d)e§ finb bte £)auptformen Oon „loben" „lanben" unb „adjten" 
(121, 2). 

2Ba3 fur SBerben toerben nttt „f)aben" lonjugtert? (143, 1). 

9cennen ©ie ntir einige $erben, roelcfje mtt „fetn" lonjugtert toer- 
ben (143, 2). 

@eben ©ie ntir eine ©t)nopfi3 Don ^fyaben" tm Snbifatio : id) (jabe, 
id) Ijatte, etc. 

©eben ©ie ntir eine ©tntopfi§ oon folgenben $er6en int Snbifatio 
unb ^onjunftio : „fein" (146), „ioerben" (147), r ,lo6en" 2lftioum 
unb Spafftoum (151-152), „gef)en" (156), „fid) freuert" (159), *«#* 
getjen" (164). 

^onjugieren ©ie ft fyahen" int ^erfeftum be3 ®onjunftio3: id) fyahe 
geljabt, bu fjabeft gefyabt, u. f. to. 

^onjugieren ©ie „loben" ^affioum int ^3rafen3 be3 3nbifatiD§: id) 
toerbe gelobt, bu rotrft gelobt, u. f. it). (152). 

Hftemten ©ie ntir einige SSerben toetdje ben £)atio regieren (170, 3). 

9cennen ©ie ntir einige SBerben rrjelcr)e eine ^erfon int SDatio unb 
eine ©ad)e im 2lccufatio regieren (170, 4). 



REVIEW 2 I 5 

©crjreiben @te bte §auptformen t)on fofgenben Herbert: befetjten, 
begcmn, bog, bat, brad), gebtffert, geboten, aft, fiel, gtng, goft, grif, net, 
gefd)tafen, gefdjrteben, geferjen, gefprodfjen, geftanben, getan, fcergeffen, 
getoorfen; bteiben, fommen. 

The pupil should be able to give the principal parts together with the present tense of 
ali verbs marked (*) in die list (on hearing any form) in the manner suggested at the be- 
ginning (173). 

Translate and Write: 

1 . What is that ? It is a pen. 

2. Is that a card ? No, it is no card, it is a picture. 

3. Where is the apple ? Here it is. 

4. Where is the knife? Here it is. 

5. Who has the button ? Charles has it. 

6. Who has the cups ? Anna has them. 

7. Where are you going ? I am going to the window, to 
the table, to the black-board. 

8. The ripe apple and the new book lie on the new table. 

9. Where does the chair stand ? It stands by the window. 

10. Whose pen is this? It is mine (87, 8). 

1 1. My new book contains many beautiful pictures. 

12. What are the four seasons called? (see t) et^en). 

13. John is the first and Anna is the second in this class. 

14. Count the boys in this room. 

1 5. How many are three and four ? Three and four are seven. 

16. How many are five time's seven? Five times seven are 
thirty-five. 

17. What have you there ? I have a new pen and a new book. 

18. This book is mine and that one is yours (87, 8). Mine 
is better than yours. 

19. Good old wine is red; good food is nourishing; good 
money is useful ; good wines are dear ; good children are agree- 
able. 

20. A ripe apple and a new book lie on the desk. 

21. Mr. Altman is richer than Mr. M tiller, but he is not happier. 

22. Mr. A. is rich ; Mr. B. is richer ; Mr. D. is the richest. 



2l6 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

23. I have seen the richest man in America. What is his 
name ? It is Rockefeller. 

24. Bid him walk in (see () e i (3 e n). 

25. Please give me the book. 

26. Does it belong to you? No, it belongs to my brother (170,3). 

27. Please lend me your umbrella, I have lost mine. 

28. He who is wise saves his money, does he not ? (nicfjt tuafjr ?) 

29. Who is that gentleman ? It is Mr. Hoffmann. 

30. Which prepositions govern the genitive? 

31. Form a sentence in which the word „ttmt)renb" occurs. 
(Seep. 175). 

32. I have written a letter to-day. 

33. Yesterday I wrote two letters. 

34. This is the letter that I received yesterday (114-117.) 

35. Who wrote this letter (123, 5)? I wrote it myself. 

36. I shall go to the city to-morrow. To-morrow I shall go 
to the city. 

37. If I had a good pen I would copy this letter (123, 8). 

38. I do not know whether (117, 1) I can pay this bill to-day. 

39. At what time (69, 4) do you usually go out in the morn- 
ing (beg 9J?org,en3)? I go out usually at 9 o'clock. 

40. Hasten or you will be late to school (159). 

41. A fire broke out this morning at 250 Main St. (160). 

42. If I had enough money I would go to Germany. 

43. What do you intend to do to-day- 

44. If it does not rain I shall go to the city. 

45. Arise ! Go to the blackboard and write this exercise. 

46. May 1 we sing? Yes, what will you sing? 

47. May I open the window ? Yes, certainly. 

48. Please open the door. 2 I have opened it. 

49. Read all together. 3 

50. On what page? Page 227. 

51. I go to the desk. I am standing by the desk. 

52. I hang the picture between the door and the window. It 
hangs between the door and the window. 



REVIEW 217 

53. Have you written your lesson ? I have written it all, ex- 
cept one sentence that I did not understand. 

54. Show me the sentence that you do not understand. 

55. This sentence is not difficult. * It is explained s in the 
grammar, paragraph 133. The verb must be 6 in the passive 
voice. 

56. The difficulties are all explained in the grammar. 

57. Always refer to 7 the explanations in the grammar. 

58. The construction of sentences s is difficult. It is explained 
in paragraphs 1 14-1 18. 

59. The dog will bite the boy. The boy is afraid of the dog,9 
is he not ? 

60. This little boy resembles his father. 

61. Please lend me five marks. I need it very much. 10 

62. We must have these knives sharpened. 11 They are very 
dull. 

63. I have cut my finger I2 with this sharp knife. 

64. The sun shines very brightly to-day. Let us take a walk. 13 

65. The travelers ascended the mountain and saw the sun 
rise. 

66. Excuse me. I did not do it on purpose. 14 
6j. The hunter shoots the wild animals. 35 

68. Have you lost anything? Yes, I have lost my watch. 

69. I have found a watch ; is it yours ? 

70. Washington was born in the year 1732, and died in the 
year 1799. 

1 Siirfen. 2 Stufmacben. 3 %ilt sufammen. * 'ftidjt ftfjtoer. 5 Use the passive voice of 
evftdren. 6 Use ft e b e n. i %v\ jud&en. 8 3SoTtfolge or (ga^bitbung. 9 giircbtet fid) t)or bent 
£>unbe. I0 3c*) ^ht e§ feljr notig. "See § 150. 12 see § 32, 10 <\ ^©^ajieten geben. 
* abficfjtlicfi. or mit ftletft. *s ba% 2Bilbptet. 



PART SECOND. 

Reading and Conversation. 

(Sefe= nub ©preftyitfmngen.) 

1* £ie g>ant>t. 

£)ie\ganb, bie recite &cmb, bie Utile §attb; ber ginger, ber S^W' 
finger, ber £Qcitte(finger, ber Dftngfinger, ber Heine ginger, ber £)anmen ; 
— ^afyle, gafykn ^ie ; — einS, gtt>ei brei, t>ier, fitnf, fed)8, fieben, adjt, 
nenn, gel)n. 

Setjrer. 2Ba3 ift ba§ ? ©filler. Xa§> ift eine |>anb. 

2Be(cf)e £attb ift e§ ? ©3 ift bie recite £anb. 

SBeldje £anb ift ba3 ? ®a§ ift bie ttalc £anb. 

2Ba§ ift ba§ ? ®a§ ift em ginger. 

SBelc^er ginger ift ba§ ? ®a§ ift ber 3^ig^finger f — ber 
SKittelfittger, — ber Dtingfinger, — ber Heine ginger, — 
ber Sattmen. 

3ft ber Saumen ein ginger ? 3a, ber ®aumen ift eiu 
ginger. 

SBie biete ginger finb ba§ ? ®a§ finb fitnf ginger. 

Style (jaljlen ©ie) bie ginger. (£tn3, jtoei, brei, bier, 
fitnf, fed)3, fieben, ad}t, nenn, jeljn. 

2* 3>te Garten. 

£>ie $arte, bit garbe, bie @d)ad)reC; — toeifs, bfan, grim, gelb; — 
l'a\)k, gafjfen @ie. 

23a§ ift haZ ? <£)a§ ift eine Harte. 
SBetdje garbe Ijat fie ? ©ie ift toeifj. 
SBetc^e garbe fjat biefe Sarte ? ©ie ift Mau. 
2Betd)e garbe Ijat btefe SJarte ? ©ie ift gritn. 
2Betd)e garbe ijat biefe Sfarte ? ©ie ift gelb. 

218 



READING AND CONVERSATION 219 

23etd)e garBe fyat biefe ®arte ? ©ie ift rot 

S'afyk (jaljlen ©ie) bte Garten. ©in§, gtoei, brei, bier 

fftnf. 
3d) lege bte Garten in bie ©cfyadjtet. 2So liegen bie ffiar^ 

ten ? ©ie liegen in ber ©djadjtet (103). 

£)er Sfyfef, ber 33annt; — bte garbe, bie gorm, bte §anb, bte recfjte 
gattb; — grim, gefb, rot, runb; — fatten, toad) Jen, gem effen. 

2Ba§ f)alte id) i)kx in ber £>anb ? ©ie fjattett einen Stpfel 
in ber $cmb. 

3n metcfyer §anb Ijatte id) ben Sfyfel? ©ie fatten ii)n in 
ber redjten £>anb. 

98a§ fiir etne $orm f;at er? ©r ift runb. 

28eld)e garbe fjat er ? @r ift griin (gclb, rot). 

9Bo toad)fen bie 2(pfel? ©ie roadmen auf ben SBaumen. 

3f3t bu (effen ©ie) gern Sfyfel ? 3a, id) effe fie fetjr gem. 

3)ie geber, bte @taf)(feber, bie Suite, bie $reibe, bie (^ct)tefertafe(, 
bie 2Banbtafe( ; ber ©egenftanb, ber geberljatter. £)er ©rtffef ; ba% 
papier; — befeftigen, bienen, fdjreiben, brandjen. 

2Ba§ fiir ein ©egenftanb ift ( ba§ ? £)a§ ift eine geber. 

3®a§ fur eine geber ift e§ ? (B ift eine ©taf)lfeber. 

233o Befefttgt man bie geber ? 9Kan befeftigt fie an bent 
geber^alter. 

SBo^u bient bie geber ? ©ie bient pm ©djreiben. 

28a§ braud)t man aufter ber geber pm ©d)reiben ? 9Kan 
braud)t S^inte unb papier. 

©d)reibt man mit ber geber auf bie ©d)iefertafet ? 9iein, 
auf bie ©cfyiefertafet fdjreibt man mit einem ©riffet. 

SBomit fdjreibt man an bie SSanbtafel ? Sin bie 2Banb= 
tafet fdtjreibt man mit ®reibe. 



220 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

£)er gut, ber gutmadjer, ber $opf, ber §err, ber Ifrtabe ; bte §cmb, 
bte £)ame ; ba$ TOabrfjen ; — btenen, bebecfen, tragen, ab'nefymen. 

3Ba§ ift ba§ ? £)a§ ift ein £ut. 

28a§ filr ein |mt ift e£ ? (B ift ein gtf^nt (ein ©trof)- 
l)nt, ein £t)Unberf)itt). 

SBeldjc gar&e tjat er? (£r ift Braun (gran, ftfytoarj, toetjj). 

9B05U bient ber |ntt? ©r bient jum 93ebeden be§ So{)fe3. 

28er madjt £ute? ®er ^utmadjer madjt |mte. 

2Ber trctgt cinen §ut? £>erren nnb Snaben tragen §nte. 

Stragen bie ®amen nnb SDJabdjen and) ^itte? 3a, bie 
®amen nnb SDJabdjcn tragen and) £nite. 

£ragt man ben |>ut im 3irower? S^eitt, man tragt ifyn 
getootjnlid) nnr im greien. 

SBamt nimmt man ben |htt anf ber Strafe ab? 2JJan 
nimmt i^n ab, toenn man griifst 

6. Sie XXf)t. 

£)te Ufyr, bte £afd)emtf)r, bte SEBcmbuljr, bte vgtanbufjr, bte £urmutjr, 
bte 2Be<fiti)r, bte ©tunbe ; ba3 >JtfferMatt, ^ %&wt ba£ ©eftaufe, ba8 
©otb, ba$ ©Uber, ba£ SCReffittg ; ber 3eiger ; — geben, btetten, befteljen, 
madjen, cm^etgen. 

2Ba3 filr ein ©egenftanb ift ba3 ? ®a3 ift eine Uljr. 

28a§ fiir eine Uf)r ift e§ ? (B ift eine Xafdjenufjr. 

2Ba§ gibt e§ fonft nod) fiir Utjren ? @§ gibt 28anbnf)ren, 
©tanbnfjren, Xnrmnljren nnb SBecfutjren. 

3ft bie Ut)r niifclidf) ? 3a, fie ift feljr nitfctid). 

3n tt)eld)em Stvt&t biettt bie Uljr ? ©ie getgt nn§ bie 
©tnnben an. 

2Boran§ Befteljt bie Ufyx ? @ie fiefteljt an§ bem ©eljaufe, 
bem 23erf, bem Qtffcrbfatt nnb b^n 3eigem. 

2Borau§ toirb ba3 ©eljaufe einer £afd)emtf)r gemad)t? 
(£§ toirb au§ ©olb, ©itber ober S^idet gemad)t 



READING AND CONVERSATION 221 

£)ctg Bud), bag £el)rbud), bag Sefebud), bag Sorterbud), bag 9?ed)en= 
bud), bag vgdjreibbutf), bad (Sefangjmtf) ; tie ^pradje, bie ©ette, bie 
ednile, bie 2lrt ; — fatten, eutfyalteu, gefyoren, tegen, liegeu, nentten, 
braudjeu, giif)Ien. 

2Sa3 ift bag ? ®a§ ift em SSud). 

2Ba3 fitr em 23ud) ift e§ ? ©3 ift em Sejjrlmdj ber beut= 
fctjeu ©pradje. 

SBte tuete ©etten entfjalt e§ ? ©3 entplt — ©etten. 

3$em geprt e3 ? (B geprt S^nen (mir, bit). 

3n toetdjer |)anb Ijalte id) ba§ 25ud) ? ©ie [jalten (bit 
f)d(tft) e§ in ber redjten §anb. 

3it toetdjer §anb Ijalte id) je|t ba§ 93ud) ? ©ie fatten 
(bit fjaltft) e* jefct in ber (infen $cmb. 

3d) (ege ba3 23nd) aitf ben SCifd). 3Bo liegt ba§ 35ud) ? 
S3 liegt auf bent £ifd)e. 

9Zenne (nennen ©ie) mir nod) anbere Slrten bott 99itc^ern r 
bte man in ber ©d)itfe braudjt. — 9Jtan 6raud)t 28orterbitd)er, 
fiefebitdjer, 3ted)ett6ucf)er, ©d>reibMd)er, @efangbitd)er unb 
nod) triele anbere. 

Qafyt (ja^len ©ie) bie 93iid)er, toetdje auf biefem S£ifd)e 
liegen. — (£in§, jtuet, brei, bier, fiinf, fedj§. 

£)er §of, ^ er ^Brctterjaun, ber ©artett ; bie (Strafte, bte ®iidje, bie 
$iuberftube, bie 5Jlauer, bie gamifie; bag fiub, bag 2Bobut)aug, bag 
Saubfyaug, bag (gtafet, bag 3* mmer r bad 33efud)g$immer, bag 2Bof)tt= 
gttmtter, bag (gpeifqtmmer, bag edjlaf^immer; — fodjett, brateu, bad'en, 
toafdjen, trettnen, fyeifeu, fdjlafett, fpteten, fid) befmbeu, fid) auf Ijalten. 

28ie nennt man ein betooljn6are§ £>au§ ? 9Kan nennt e§ 
ein 2Bof)nf)au§. 

9^emte mir bie t>erfd)iebenen Simmer eine§ 3BoljnIjaufe§. 
— ©ie Ijeifjen : 35cfud)3gtmmer, SBoIjn^immer, ©petfejimmer 
unb ©djlaf^immer. 



222 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2Be(d)e3 ift gefobtjntid) ba% fc^bnfte Simmer im §aufc? 
®a§ 93efud)§jimmer ift getoofjnlid) ba§ fdjihtfte. 

28o pit fid) bie gamilie getootjntid) auf ? 3m 28oljn= 
dimmer. 

3n toeitfjem 3tmmcr totrb getyeift ? 3m ©petfejimmer. 

28a§ toirb in ber Sitdje getan ? 3tt ber $itd)e mirb ge= 
fod)t, gebraten, gebaden unb getoafdjen. 

2So fc^Iafen unb tyielen bie Sinber ? 3n ber ^inberftube. 

28a3 befinbct fid) neben einem Sanbtjaufe ? 9Zeben einem 
Sanbljaufe befinben fid) meift ein §of unb ein ©arten. 

SBoburd) ttnrb ber £of toon ber ©traf^e getrennt ? £)er £of 
ttrirb turn ber ©trafce enttoeber burd) eine 5Di cuter, eincn 93ret= 
terjcum ober ein ©tafet getrennt 

£)er ©arten, ber Dbftbcmm, ber 2tyfe(baum, ber 33intbaum, ber 
$trfd)bcmm, ber $fir|id)baum, ber @traud), ber $ofyI, ber ©parcel, ber 
iSatat; bie 33of)tte, bie (£rbfe, bie $artoffef, bie 23(ume, bie SRofe, bie 
^ttte, bie 9te(fe, bie Xufpe; ba$ (SJemiife, ba3 SBeiftfjen, ba§ (Stiefmitrter* 
cfyen, ba$ $ergij3tneimtidjt, ba& ©dnteegtocfdjen; — gebett, ttemten, 
ttadtfen, fittben, fid) befinben. . 

9Beld)e Slrten turn ©arten gibt e§? @§ gibt Dbftgarten, 
©emiifegdrten unb 33htmengarten. 

3Sa§ befinbet fid) in bem Dbftgarten ? Stt bem Dbftgarten 
befinben fict) Dbftbdume unb ©trdudjer. 

9fenne mir einige Slrten bon Obftbdumen. — ®er SXpfcl= 
baum, ber SBirnbaum, ber ®irfd)baum, ber SPftrficpaunu 

3Ba§ toadjft im ©emitfegarten ? 3m ©emitfegarten toacfyfen 
alle Slrten toon ©emitfe, tote : 23of)nen, ©rbfen, ^artoffeln, 
®ot)l, ©parget, ©atat 2C. 

28a§ finbet man im Slumengarten ? 3m 93lumengarten 
finbet man fcfybne 95(umen, toie : Sftofen, 23eitd)en, Silien, 
9Mfen, SCnfyen, ©tiefmittterdjen, SSergifcmeinnidjt, ©d)nee; 
glbcfdjen unb nod) biele anbere. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 223 

10. 5)a3 %af)t. 

2)er grilling, ber eommer, ber ©erbft, ber Sinter; Me ^aljreSgeit, 
Me SBocfye; ba3 3aljr, ba3 ©djaltjaljr; — i)eij3en. 

2Ste ^etfeen bie bier Qafjre^^etten ? ©ie Ijeifjen : grueling, 
Sommer, ^erbft nub SBinter. 

2Betcf)e Saljre^eit fjaben tutr }e§t? 2Bir Ijjaben jetjt — . 

SSie Dielc Sage Ijat ba§ 3aljr? 2)a§ 3aljr Ijat 365 Sage. 

£>aben alle Saljre 365 Sage? Stein, ba§ ©djaltjaljr Ijat 
366 Sage. 

2Sie mete donate Ijat ba3 Saljr ? $a8 3aljr Ijat jtoolf 
donate. 

3Bie Ijeifcen biefelbeu ? ©ie Ijeifsen : Sanuar, gebrnar, SRarj, 
2tyrtl, 9Kat, Sunt, 3uti, 2(ngnft, September, Dftober, 9Jo^ 
Dember, Member. 

2Sie f)etBen bie Sage ber 28ocf)e ? ©ie Ijetften : ©onntag, 
iUontag, S>ien3tag, 5D?ittir>orf), S)rmner§tag, fjreitag, 8onn= 
abenb (©amStag). 

2Beld)e§ ©atutn (ben ttnet)ie(ten) Ijaben toil Ijeute? 2Bir 
fjaben Ijente ben — . 

11* £)ie (Steografjljie* 

£)er (5rbtet(, ber (Smtoofjtter, ber glufo bie §cutptftabt, bie 2Mt, bie 
itfepuMif ; ba$ ?cmb, ba§ ^cmigreicf), ba% ^aiferreid). 

2Sie Ijeiften bie fiinf ©rbteile ? ©ie tjeiftett : ©nropa, 2Ifien, 
9lfrifa, SImerifa nnb SCuftraltcn. 

9Be(c£)e§ finb bie totdjtigften Scinber @nrr>pa§ ? Snglanb, 
S)entfd)lanb, 9htf$lanb, granfreid), Dfterreid), Stalien nnb 
©panien finb bie toicijtigften. 

88etd)e3 ift bie £anptftabt toon granfreid) ? ®ie £aiipt= 
ftabt tnm granfreid) ift $ari& 

38e[dje§ ift bie grofete ©tabt ber SBett? Smtbon ift bie 
groBte ©tabt ber 3Beti 



224 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

3Bte tuele Sintooljner Ijat Sonbon? Sonbon ^at itber 
fed)§ TOillionen ©intooljner. 

2Beld)e3 ift bie groftte ©tabt 2lmerifa3? 9tet)^orf ift bie 
groftte ©tabt 3lmertfa§. 

28ie biele (Sintootjner l)at SReto^orf? *fteto=g)orf Ijat 
4,500,000 ©itttooljtter. 

2Beld)e§ ift bie ^auptftabt ber SSereinigten ©taaten? 
SBafljington ift bie ^auptftabt ber SSereinigterx ©taaten. 

SSelcfye 9iegteruug§form Ijafien bie brei Canber ©nglanb, 
®eutfd)lanb Hub granfreid)? ©ngtanb ift em ^imigreid), 
£)eutfd)Ianb eitt $aiferreid) unb granfreid) eine ^iepublif. 

2Beld)e§ ftnb bie grofjten Sftitffe 35eutfd)lanb§ ? 2)ie grBjjten 
glitffe ®eutfd)tanb3 finb ber dtytin, bie Kibe, bie Dber unb 
bie ®onau. 

12. £)te Grille imfc bit SJmeife* 

£)er Winter, ber (Sommer; bie grille, bie 2lmeife, bie ^cilte, bie 
Speife, \>k 3eit, bie Slnttoort; — fommett, fingen, cmttoorten, erttribent, 
tangett, arbeitett; — ©unger fyaben. 

(£ine ©ride lam Bet ftrenger SMlte #x ifjrer IJiadjbarin, ber 
2lmeife. 

„grau9iacparin,'' fagte fie, „leif)t tnir bod) ettoa§ ©£eife, 
benn id) f)abe hunger unb nid)t§ ju effett." 

„$aft bu nicfyt ©^etfe fiir ben SBinter gefammelt?" fragte 
bie Slmeife. 

„3d) ljatte ja leine Qtit ba^u," toar bie Stnttoort. 

„$eine 3eit, Sfrau ©rille ? 28a§ E)aft bu benn im ©ommer 
5U tun geljafct?" 

„3>d) Ijafie gefungen unb mufi^iert," antftortete bie ©rilte. 

„9htn gut," erttriberte bie Slmeife, „ttenn bu im ©ommer 
muftjiert Ijaft, fo magft bu im 2Binter tauten. 28er nidjt 
arbeitet, foil and) tiidjt effen!" 



READING AND CONVERSATION 22 5 

13. 3£a$ id) Kefce. 

3d) liebe bie Stumcn, 3d) ItcBc ba§ 93ad)lein, 

3d) IteBe ba§ ©piet, ®en glu£ unb ben ©ee, 

3d) liebe bie ©cfynte, ®te btiitjenben 93aume, 

3d) liebe gar Diet. ®ert gtit^ernben ©djnee. 

3d) liebe bie 3SogeI, ®ie ©rbe, ben pummel, 

©ie fingen fo fcfybn, ®ie ©onne, ben ©tern, 

3d) liebe bie SBiefeu, 3d) liebe ba§ alleS, 

2)ie griinenben §o^it 3d) f)ab r e§ jo gem. 

3d) liebe bie SDtotfcfyeu, 
®en froljlidjen Tint, 
3d) liebe ^er^innig, 
28a§ fcpn iff nnb gut 

14. 5>te fleitte SESofjftaterut. 

£)er §of, ber <Sd)ttee, ber 9)tatfd); bie Sopaferht; ba£ tajMjen, 
ba$ $riimdjen, ba3 Xierdjen, ba3 SBogfeht; bie (Sltern; — fammetn, 
fpredjeti, fiittertt, fjm'ftreuett, auf picfen, cmS'fefjen, fatt toerben. 

S§ Wax ein feljr falter, ftrenger SSinter* ^a fammelte bie 
fleine SOtuma bie Sfritmdjen, bie bom ©ffen itbrig blieben, 
unb Derroafjrte fie in einem Sttftdjen. 

®ann ging fie jtoeintal im Stage I)inau§ auf ben $of nnb 
ftreute bie $riimd)en t)in, nnb bie 9Joglein flogen Ijerbei nnb 
picften fie auf. 

*J)a§ fallen bie ©Item unb freuten fid), tote tiebtid) 50Jinna 
jtoifc^eu ben Ijuugrigeu SSogteiu auSfafj. „28arum tuft bu 
ba§?" fpradjen enbtid) bie Sltern. 

„S§ ift ja alle§ mit ©d)nee unb &i§ jugebecft," anmortete 
Sftinna, „baf$ bie S£ierd)en nid)t§ finben lonnen; fie finb fo 
l)ungrig unb arm, barum fiittere id) fie, toie bie reid)en 2Ffen= 
fdjen ben armen fjetfen." 



226 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

®a fpradj ber SBatcr : „®u fannft bod) aber nidjt flit alte 
9Sbgeld)en f org en." 

„(£§ tun getnifs," anttnortete SKinna, , f aIIe anberen St'inber 
and) fo tote id), unb bann toerben tool)( alle 93oge(d)en fatt." 

®a f iifeten bie ©(tern iljr gute§ $inb unb fpradjen : „2)u 
bift unfere Hebe, tuoljltatige 5Ktuna ; bleibe immer gut unb 
freunb(id) gegen bie 9JJenfd)en unb gegen bie £ierd)en and)." 

^rutntna^cr. 

15* £u bift ttrie ewe $Hume« 

®u bift tote eine 93lume, 
©o tjolb, fo fcfyon unb rein, 
3d) fdjau bict) an, unb SBeljtnut 
©ringt nttr m§ «£>er$ fyinein- 

SD?ir ift, al§ ob id) bie §dnbe 
9tuf§ §aupt bir legen follt r , 
93etenb, bafj ©ott bid) erljatte 
©o rein unb fcfyon unb ijolb. 

£ c i tt e. 

16* £>a$ ^anarienfeogetdjetu 

£)er @ame, ber 3 U( ^ er r & er ^ a f*9r ber £ob; bie £rcme, bie Gutter; 
ba$ §aubd)en, ba% <&tMd)tn, baS $raut, ba$ geq; — trauern, (egen, 
tun, toetnen, rcecfen, brtngen, l)tn'ge()en, unrest tyanbeln, an'fangen. 

©in l(eine§ Wab&jen, namen§ Caroline, fyatte ein altera 
tiebfte£ Sfanarienoogelcfyen. 2)a§ £ierd)en fang fo frbfytid) 
ben ganjen £ag unb toar fefyr fdjott, gotbgelb mit fdjtoaraem 
^aufidjen. 

Caroline gab ifym ©anten ^u effen unb fitf)lenbe3 $raut, 
and) mandjmal ein ©titddjen $uder unb taglid) frtfd)e§, f(are§ 
8Baffer. Slber plo^ttdj fing ba§ 93ogetd)en an gu trauern, unb 
eine3 9Korgen§, ate Caroline ifynt SBaffer bringen tnollte, lag 
e£ tot im ®aftg. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 227 

®ct toetnte bie SHeine fef)r urn ifjr liefte£ 2Sogeld)en unb 
ttagte tljren SScrluft ber 3Ruttcr. ®ie SKutter after gtttg f)in 
unb faufte eiti anbere§, ba§ nod) fdjoner tuar ate ba£ erfte 
unb eften fo frofjlid) fang, unb tat e§ in ben ®afig. 

Stllein baS Heine SJiabdjen freute fid) ttic^t, fonbern toeinte 
nod) mefjr, ate e§ ba§ neue 9Sogeld)en falj. 

Sa ttutnberte fid) bie Gutter unb fagte: „9Kein liefte§ 
SHnb, toarunt toeinft bit nod)? Seine Sranen ineden ba£ 
tote 2Soge(d)en nid)t tuieber auf, unb Ijter fjaft bu ja ein 
neueS." 

®a antioortete Caroline : „9Id), (iefte SDhttter, id) Ijafte 
unredjt gegen bay Sierdjen ge^anbett : id) J)afte nod) fur j tor 
feinem Xobe em @titdd)en B^der, tt)e[d)e3 bu mir fitr ba^felfte 
gaftft, if)m tttdjt geftradjt, fonbern felftft gegeffen. 

©o tyrad) ba§ Sftagblein utit red)t Bctriifitem ^erjen. ®ie 
Gutter after tadjette nid)t lifter bie SHage be§ 9Kabd)en3, benn 
fie erfannte unb berefjrte bie Ijeilige ©timnte be£ ©etiriffen3 
in bent £erjen be3 Sinbe3. « r „ m m a $ c r. 

17* £>te SMene unb bie £aufce» 

Sin 93iend)en fiet in einen 23ad). 

35ie§ faf) ton often eine faufte 

©ie ftrad) ein 93lattd)en bon, ber Saufte 

Unb toarf 3 iljr jtt. ®a§ 93iend)en fd)tnamm banad) 

Unb f)alf fid) g(itdlid) au§ bent 23ad). — 

9?ad) f ur jer 3^it biefetfte Xaufte 

®af* toieber frieblid) auf ber faufte. 

®a fd)Ud) ein Sager teif Ijeran 

Unb tegte fd)on bie glinte an. 1 

Sdjon Ijatte er ben £al)n getyamtt 2 : 

Sfteut 93iend)en !am unb ftad) if)n in bie «£anb. 

$uff ! ging ber ©djnft baneften. 3 

®te Saufte flog baton. — 2Sent banfte fie tljr Seften ? 

1 took aim. 2 had cocked the gun, 3 the shot missed. 



228 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

18, 5)er 28olf uttb ba$ Saturn. 

£)er Sotf, ber 33atf), ber £)urft, ber $fan, bcr SDfamat; bie Unterfjaf* 
tuna,, bte (Strafe; ba% ^amm, baS gammdjen, ba$ Sort; — trtnfen, 
faffen, t>erfcf)(mgen, triiben, fltegen, ertoibern, ftfjhnpfett, reben, gerreigett, 
an'fangen. 

©in 2Bolf lam an emeu 2Sad), urn feinen T)nrft ju tofdjen. 
SBeiter unten am 33ad)e kmerlte er em Sammdjen, toe(d)e3 
e6enfatl£ gelommen ioar, um ^n trtnlen. 

(£r fafjte fofort ben bofen $Ian, ba§ nnfdjnlbige Slier ju 
berfdjtingen, nnb ftng bafjer folgenbe Unterljattnng mit bem= 
f elfien an : 

„2)u triifift mir ba§> SBaffer, I)etmtMifd)e§ Xter!" 

„28ie tft ba§ moglid), ba bod) ba3 SBaffer t>on btr $n mir 
fliefct ?" ertoiberte ba§ Samm. 

„9Bie, bn fdjtmpfft tooljl nod) auf mid)?" 

„3cfj fdjtmpfe mdjt." 

, f 2t6er box fedj§ SJconaten rjaft bn 93i3fe3 rjon mir gerebet!" 

„95or fed)3 Sftonaten faar id) nod) gar nidjt gefioren." 

„©o tft e§> betn SBruber getoefen !" 

„$tf) §abe gar leinen Srnber." 

„9cnn, fo toar'3 bein SSater, nnb ba§ berbient ©trafe!" 

9Kit biefen SBorten ftet ber SBolf itber ba§ Samm Ijer nnb 
aerrift e§. 

19. 3)ie ^djUjalfcett. 

50httter, SKntter ! nnfere ©djtoalfien, 
©ielj bod) felfier, Sftntter fielj ! 
gnnge r)a6en fie Belommen l 
Unb bie SITten fitttern fie. 

3lfe bie lieBett Iteinen ©djtoatten 
SBnnberrjoll irjr 9ieft gefiant, 
£a6 r id) ftnnbenlang am genfter 
|>eimlid) itjtten jngefd)ant 




READING AND CONVERSATION 229 

Unb nacfybem fie eingericfytet 2 
Unb Betooljnt ba3 fleine £an3, 
(Stouten fie mit feugen 2Ingen 
©ar berftanbig nadj mir au§. 3 

Set, e§> fciitert, fie fatten geme 4 
Wand)t§> gtcttfc^erttb mir erjaljtt 
Unb t§> IjaBe fie BetritBet 
2Ba3 jur 9febe nod) gefeljtt. 5 

Sin3 nm§ anbre brie ein Sleinob 
<pielten fie iljr §an§ in $ut 6 ; 
@telj bod), tote bie fteinen Sopfdjen 
©tree! t Ijerbor bie jnnge SBrut ! 

Unb bie 8tltcn ein§ nm£ anbre 
SBringen i^nen Sia^rung bar; 
£), nrie fofttidj tft ^u fd)anen 
@o ein IteBe^ ©djtoalBen^aar ! 

1 They have hatched young ones. 2 After they had arranged. 3 They looked up very 
intelligently at me. * They would gladly. s They were sad because they could not speak 
better. 6 They guarded their house. 

20. 5>ie ?Pftefidje» 

£)er ^Pfirfidj, ber 33aum, ber @ol)n, ber gimmel, ber 33ruber, ber 
Jhtabe, ber 9?ad)bar, ber ganbmatm ; bie S8adt, bie grutfjt, bie ^ug, bie 
Gutter ; bag IHttb, bag 33ett, bag 2Iuge, bag @d)[aflammer(ein ; — er= 
fatten, fcfymedett, rufen, fcr)iittetn r nefymen, mtt'bringeti, auf beioafyren, 
aufeffen, forf toerfen, auf'ffopfen, fid) tmmbent, fief) freuen, ftitPfcfytoei- 
gen, jerfdjmetgetu 

©in Sanbmann Bradjte an£ ber ©tabt fihtf ^firfidje ttttt, 
bie fdpnften, bie man fefjen fonnte* Seine StHnber aBer fallen 
biefe gmd)t jum erftenmaL 2)e§^alB bmnberten nnb frenten 
fie fid) feljr iifier bie fcpnen 9lpfel mit ben rotlidjen 95acfen 
nnb bem ^arten glaum. ®aranf berteilte fie ber SSater nnter 
feine bier ^naBen nnb einen erfjielt bie SKntter. 



230 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2lm 2T6enb, aU bie $inber in ba§ ©cfytaffammertein gingen, 
fragte ber SSater: „9l\m, toie tjaben eud) bte fc^onen SIpfel 
gefcfymecft?" 

„|jerrlid), (ieber SSater," fagte ber altefte; „e3 ift erne 
fcfyone grud)t 3d) fjabe mtr ben ©tein auf 6etoaI)rt unb tottt 
mir barau§ eitten 23aum erjtefjen." „23rat) !" fagte ber 95ater r 
„bu toirft ein guter Sanbmann toerben." 

„3d) tjabe ben meinigen fogtetd) aufgegeff en, " rief ber 
jitngfte, „tmb ben ©tein fortgemorfcn, unb bte Gutter Ijat 
mtr bte ^atfte t>on bem ttjrigen gegeben. £), ba§ fdjmedt fo 
fiife unb jerfd)mifjt etnem im SJiunbe!" 

„9hnt," fagte ber SSater, „bu t)aft getan, tote alle Itetnen 
Jfinber tun." 

®a begann ber ^meite ©o!)n : „3d) Ijafie ben ©tein, ben ber 
Heine SBrubcr fortoarf, aufge^oben nub aufgeftopft. ©§ tear 
ein S?ern barm, fo fittf mie eine Sftufj. 2I6er meinen ^firfid) 
f)dbt id) tjerfauft unb fo met ©etb bafitr erljatten, baf$ id), 
menu id) nad) ber ©tabt fomme, jtootf bafitr fanfen faun." 

®er SSatcr fdjiittelte ben §top] unb fagte: „$tug ift ba§ 
tool)!, aber finbltd) unb natitrlid) ift e§ ntdjt. SBetoafjre bid) 
ber $immel, ba§ bu tein ©ei^ate toerbeft!" 

„Unb bu, ©buarb?" fragte ber SSater ben lettfen ©o^n, 
„toa§ Ijaft bu getan?" 

„3d) Ijabe," cmttoortete Sbuarb, „meinen $firfid) bem 
©o^ne unfere§ 9?acpar§, bem franfen ©eorg, ber ba3 gieber 
I)at, gebradjt. ®r toollte tljn nid)t ne^men ; ba fyabe id) xi)n 
ii)m auf ba§ SBett getegt unb bin fortgetaufen." 

„9fttn," fagte ber SSater, „mer I)at tooljt ben beften ©ebraud) 
t)on feinem $firftdj gemadjt?" 

®a riefen alle brei: „®a§ §at 99ruber ©buarb getan!" 
©buarb aber fdjtoieg [till, unb bie Gutter xtmarmte ilju mit 
einer £rane im Singe. « r u m m a $ e r. 



I 
READING AND CONVERSATION 23 1 

©in Saftg Dor bem fjcnfter tiittg, 
Sarin eirt SSBglcttt fafj ; 
©ar tranrtg tear ba§ arme 3)ing — 
geljlt tljm bcnit tool)! ettoaS? 1 

©in anbre§ SSoglein flog bafjer, 
£ing an ba§ ©titer fid) : 
„(£t, tt>a§ BctruBt bid) benn fo feljr 
Unb ttmrum gramft bu btdt) ? 

„®u mirft jo forgfam l)ier geljegt, 
$aft ettte SBojjmtttg fd)5n, 
SBtrft retd) gefiittert unb ge^flegt; — 
3d) lann bid) nicfyt t>erftel)n!" 

$)a§ SSoglein in bem Safig fprad) : 
„D fount' id} jteljn ntit bir! 
2Bo^( l)ab' id) alle§, aber — ad), 
SDie greiljeit feljlet mir !" 2 

(5 n e ( i n. 

1 Did anything ail him ? 2 I am denied my freedom. 

22* &a$ trierfpatmifte $uber Sttafjna&eltt* 

£)er ©utsbefifcer, ber £)ampffeffe(, ber Ihtedjt, ber £afttoagen, ber 
28eg, ber (Styegatte ; bte ^afynabel, bte £)refd)tnafd)tne ; ba$ guber, ba$ 
gufyrtoerf, ba$ gerrettljauS, ba$ £or ; — benfett, ber jprecfyen, beftetgett, 
beloben, frtegett, cmf tragen, ab'ljolen, fcor'fafyren, etn'fattett, etn'fefyarfen, 
mifbrmgett, ab'ftetgen, att'ftopfett, fytt^u'fiigen. 

©in SRecflenlmrger ©ut§befi|er ^atte in ber ©tabt einen 
ncucn ©ampffeffel fiir feine ®refd)mafd)ine gefauft unb trug 
einem feiner Sfttedjte anf, bier ^Pferbe t)or einen Saftmagen 5U 
fpannen unb ben Seffel abjuljotett. £)er $ned)t fpannte an 
unb fuljr Bet feinem £erm bor. 



232 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

3)ct ftel e§ ber gran be§ ©nt36efi£er3 ein, baft fie feme 
Sftaljnabeln nteljr Ijiitte, nnb fie Bat ijjren SKamt, bcm Sfrtecfyt 
anf^ntragen, etttett S3rtef babon mitpBringen. 

®er @nt3Befi|er toar ein fel)r jartlidjer (Hjegatte, imb toeif 
er tonfjte, bafs feitt Sned)t fel)r bergefclid) ttmr, fc^drfte er ijfjm 
ttrieberljolt ein, ja an bie 9Za^nabe(n fitr bie gnabige gran $n 
benlen. 

3)er Shtedjt bertyrad), biennial nidjt, tt>te getootjnlid), £er- 
gefclid) ^n feitt, Beftieg feitt ©attefyferb nnb macule fid) mit 
feinem fcfytoeren gnljrtoerle anf ben 2Beg. 

„9^nn foil ttticf) bod) tonnbern, 1 06 griebrid) bie ^a^nabefn 
nid)t t)ergtfet!" fagte ber ©ut§6efiijer ^n feiner gran, afe er 
ben Shted)t au§> bent £ore fallen falj. 

Qu gepriger $tit 2 lam griebrid) guriid!, aBer ttttt leerem 
SBagen, (£r fuljr Beint ^errenljaufe box, ftieg bom ^ferbe 
aB nnb ftopfte Bei ber gnabtgen gran an, ^n 93rief Wa^na? 
beln, ben er it)r mitBringen follte, gierlidt) gtotfd^en jtoei gin- 
gem Ijaltenb. 

2)ic gnabige gran fiffnetc fetter bie £iir nnb BeloBte btn 
Sfrtecfyt einmal iiBer ba§ anbere barii6er,3 baf$ er nidjt t>er= 
geffen £>atte r bie 9Jal)nabe[n mitpBringen, 
' S)er ©nt^Befi^er lam and) Ijinju nnb fagte : „9la, griebrid), 
ba§ ift fd)i3n t)on bir, baft bn and) an bie 9Zaf)nabeln gebad)t 
Ijaft SIBer toa§ ift benn mit bem 4 ©ampffeffet ? §aft bn 
ifyn nid)t Meg en lonnen ?" 

„9Kit bem S)am^fleffel ?" fragte griebrid) Befrembet, nnb 
tt)ie an£ einem £ranme ermadjenb fiigte er nad) einer $anfe 
Ijittju: „3a, e§ toar mir 5 bod) bie gan^e $eit, ate 06 id) 
ttma% bergeff en Ijatte ! " ? t n b r m e. 

1 1 wonder whether. 2 At the proper time. 3 Praised the servant again and again. 
* How about the steam boiler ? s It seemed to me. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 233 

33et einem SBirte ■ ftmnbermitb, 
®a tear id) jitngft <$u ©afte ; 2 
gin golbner Stpfel tear feitt ©d)i(b 
9In einem tangen Slfte. 

6§ toar ber gute Styfetbaum, 
33ei bem id) eingefe^ret, 3 
SDKt fitter Sioft unb frifdjem ©djaum 
£at er ntidjt toofjfgenafjret. 

©3 famen in fern grimed §au3 
SSiel leufytfcefdjttmtgte ©afte; 
@ie fprangen frei unb fyielten @d)mau§* 
Unb fangen auf ba§ befte, 

3d) fanb eitt Sett ju fitter 9htf) r 
SCuf tteidjen griinen fatten ; 
®er 2Btrt r er becfte felbft mid) $x 
3Kit feinem luljlen ©fatten, 

Uiun fragf id) nad) ber ©djulbigfeit, 6 
©a fdjuttelf er btn SBtyfet. 
©efegnet fei er altegeit 
SBwt ber SBurjel U§ sum ©ipfet. 

Ufjtaitb. 

1 At the house of. 2 I was a guest. 3 With whom I stopped. 4 Made a feast, s He 
himself covered me up. 6 1 asked for the bill. 

24* 9Hdjt su $anfe* 

Seffing tarn eine§ 9Ibenb§ nad) §aufe unb Bfopfte an feine 
Xiir* ®er Sebiente falj au3 bem f5enfter f erlannte feinen 
|>errn im ®unleln nid)t unb rief : „3)er ^rofeffor tft tttd^t 
5U £aufe!" „@djabet ttidjts," anttoortete Seffing, „id) toerbe 
ein anbermal tirieber borfommen," unb ging ntljtg fort 



234 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

25. 28et3!)eit. 

5lfe man Spates fragte, ttm§ ba§ fdjftrierigftc nub toa§ ba3 
leidjtefte ®ing itt ber SBett fei, 1 antoartctc cr : „2)a§ fdjtoie* 
rigfte ift, fid) fc(6ft fenneu ju lernen, unb ba$ (eidjtefte, an 
ben ^anbhtngen cmberer 2abe( §u finbett." 2 

1 See §125. 2 To find fault. 

20. <3feid)ed mit ©letdjetm 

3It§ Sorb ©[jcfterfiefb eine§ Xage3 feinen greunb, ben Sorb 
©trafforb, Befucfyte, bifc if)n ber Siebling§[)unb be3fefben in§ 
»ciiu 

„3ritrd)ten ©ie nidjtV fcigte Sorb ©trafforb, „mein Heitter 
$unb Betftt mentals." 

Sorb Sljefterfielb ftrectte ben «£ntnb mit feinem ©pajierftocfe 
511 93oben unb ertoiberte in betnfelBeu Xone: „gurd)ten ©ie 
mdjtg, SDtylorb, id) fdjlage ntcmafe Heine £hmbe." 

27. £>a$ ^etbenro^Ieht. 

©al) ein $naB' ein 9io§lein fteljn, 
3tMem auf ber ^eiben, 
28ar fo jung unb morgenfdjon, 
Sief er fdjnell, e3 nal/ 5U feljn, 
©af) r 3 mit tuelen greuben. 
3io3tein, SftoSletn, DtoSlem rot, 
9fio£tein auf ber ^eiben. 

SnaBe f^rac^ : id) Bred)e bid), 
$to§tein auf ber §eiben ! 
IRMem tyrad) : id) ftecfye bid), 
S)a^ bu etoig benlft an mid)/ 
Unb id) toilFs nic^t letben. 
StBSleut,. 3?Mein, $o3lein rot, 
StMeitt auf ber ^etben. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 235 

Unb ber mtlbe SfttaBe brad) 2 
r § Dio»lein auf ber |>etben ; 
3?5§tetn toefjrte fid) unb ftad), 
§alf ifjttt bod) fein 2M) unb 9Id),3 
9Jhi£t T e* efien teibcn. 4 
9?Mein, 9?5§letn, 9io^fetn rot, 
3io§(ein auf ber Seibcn. _ _ 

1 * ® e t J) e. 

1 So that you will remember me forever. 2 Srad) ba3 SftoSteitt. 3 It did not help it (the 
rose) to say " Oh ! Ah ! " 4 Just had to permit it. 

28* Dtafcert SBruce unb bie Spume* 

SDer 23a(fen, ber 3toetf, ber © e *b, ber 5 e ntb, ber luSgang; bie 
epitme, bie ©d)latf)t, bit 2lufmerffamfett, bie Uttabfjangigfett, bie ilber- 
mad)t ; baS yit%, ba§ ©efedjt, ba$ SBaterfonb ; — fcfjfafert, ertDadjett, 
erreidjen, geltncjen, rufen, berufyen, unterltegett, fid) bemitfyett, fid) be? 
ftcirigen, () era b' fa ((en. 

Robert Srucc fd)(ief einft, nad) ciner berloreuen ©d)lad)t, 
in ber ©djeune eine§ Saubmanns. 

?Im nddjften 9Jiorgen, afe cr erttmdjte, fal) er erne ©{mute, 
bie i()r 91e£ an einem 33a If en beg ®a(^e§ befeftigen tootfte. 1 
Sie lounte iljren Qtved \cboi) nid)t erreidjen, fonbern fiel 
immer toieber Ijerafr 

2)ie3 erregte bie Slufmerffamfeit be* §elben. Sr faf) bie 
©pinne fid) gmolfmal t>ergeben3 bcmitfjen, aber ba% brei^eljnte 
9)M gelang e3 if)r, 2 ben fallen 511 erreidjen. 

Xa fprang ber Jtbnig t)on feinem Sager auf unb rief: 
„Unter(ag id) nid)t and) ^nolfmal 3 ber Ubermad)t meiner 
getnbe? 3 -9luf einem ®efed)te fierufjt trielleicfyt 4 bie Unab= 
f)dngig!ett be§ 33aterfanbe§!" 

Sinige Sage barauf beftatigte fid) biefe ^offnung burd) ben 
fiir ©djottlanb glorreid)en 9lu3gang ber ©c^Ia^t bet 33annocf= 
burn. 

1 Was trying to fasten. 2 She succeeded. 3 Was I not overcome twelve times by the 
superior power of my enemies ? * Depends perhaps. 



236 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

29. Scheiden. 

Es ist bestimmt in Gottes Rat, 

DaB man vom Liebsten, was man hat, 

Mu$ scheiden ; 

Wiewohl doch nichts im Lauf der Welt 
Dem Herzen, ach ! so sauer fallt 
Als scheiden. 1 

So dir geschenkt ein Knosplein was, 2 
So thu' es in ein Wasserglas ; 
Doch wisse : 

Bliiht morgen dir ein Roslein auf,3 

Es welkt wohl schon die Nacht darauf ; 

Das wisse ! 

Und hat Gott Liebes dir beschert, 
Und haltst du es recht innig wert, 
Das Deine ; 

Es wird wohl wenig Zeit noch sein, 
Da lafit es dich so gar allein ; 4 
Dann weine ! 

Nur muBt du mich auch recht versteh'n : 
Wenn Menschen auseinander geh'n, 
So sagen sie : „Auf Wiederseh'n !" s 

Von Feuchtersleben. 

1 There is nothing so hard as parting. 2 If some one presents you a little bud. 3 If a 
rose blooms on the morrow. 4 It will leave you alone, s Till we meet again. 



30* %\t goretet* 

3d) toeift nitfjt, tva% foil e3 bebeuten, 1 
3)ctf$ id) fo trcmrig bin; 
@tn Wlaxtym cm3 alien 3etten, 
®a§ iommt mix md)t au§ bent ©inn. 3 



READING AND CONVERSATION 237 

$ie Suft tft ttyl mtb e3 bmtfelt, 
Unb rttljtg flteftt ber Stljetn ; 
®cr ©tyfel be§ Sergei funfett 
3m 3l6ettbfMtnenfdjetn. 

2)ie fdjihtfte Sungfrctu ft|et 
®ort oben ftmnberbar, 
3I)r golb'neS ©efdjmetbe b(i|et, 
©ie fammt iljr golbene§ |>aar. 

©ie fammt e3 mit gotbettem $amme, 
Unb fingt em Steb babei ; 
®a§ t)at eine totmberfame, 
©etoaltige 9KeIobei 

®en ©differ im fleinen ©cfyiffe 
©rgreift e§ mtt toilbem 28et) 3 ; 
(£r fdjaut tttcfyt bte gelfenrtffe, 
@r fdjaut mtr Ijittauf in bte §ty\ 

3d) glaube, bte SBellen berfcfylingen 4 
9lm Gmbe ©differ nnb Jfaljtt; 
Unb ba§ £>at mtt intern ©tngen 
®te Corelet getan. 

$ e i tt e. 

1 What it means. 2 It is always in my mind. 3 It fills the boatman with terror (because 
he fears the Lorelei). 4 The waves will swallow up. 

31. Der Froschkonig-. 

(Aus Grimms Marchen. — Abgekiirzt).. 

Der Konig, der Frosch, der Wald, der Brunnen, der Rand ; die Tochter, 
die Linde, die Kugel, die Stimme; das SchloB, das Tischlein ; — trinken, 
werfen, schieben, befehlen, versprechen, hinaus'gehen, hinab'fallen, her- 
auf'holen, ein'lassen, an'fangen. 

In alten Zeiten lebte ein Konig, dessen Tochter waren alle 
schon, aber die jiingste war die schonste von alien. Nahe bei 
dem Schlosse des Konigs lag ein grower, dunkler Wald und in 



238 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

dem Walde unter einer alten Linde war ein Brunnen. Wenn 
nun der Tag recht heiB war, 1 so ging das Konigskind hinaus in 
den Wald und setzte sich an den Rand des kuhlen Brunnens, 
und wenn sie Langeweile hatte, so nahm sie eine goldene Kugel, 
warf sie in die Hohe 2 und fing sie wieder. 

Einmal aber fiel die Kugel nicht in ihr Handchen, sondern 
auf die Erde und rollte dann ins Wasser und verschwand. Da 
fing das Madchen an zu weinen und weinte immer lauter und 
lauter, und als sie so weinte, horte sie eine Stimme, welche rief : 
,,Was hast du,3 Konigstochter? Warum schreist du so sehr?" 

Sie sah sich urn 4 und erblickte einen Frosch, der seinen dicken, 
haBlichen Kopf aus dem Wasser streckte. „Ach, du bist es, 
alter Wasserpatscher," sagte sie, „ich weine iiber meine goldene 
Kugel, die mir in den Brunnen hinabgefallen ist." 

Da sagte der Frosch : „Wenn du mich lieb haben willst,s und 
ich soil dein Spielkamerad sein, an deinem Tischlein neben dir 
sitzen, von deinem goldenen Tellerlein essen, aus deinem Becher- 
lein trinken, wenn du mir das versprichst, so will' ich hinunter- 
steigen und dir die goldene Kugel wieder heraufholen." 

Die Konigstochter versprach es, und der Frosch tauchte sei- 
nen Kopf unter, sank hinab und kam wieder herauf, hatte die 
Kugel im Maule und warf sie ins Gras. Die Konigstochter war 
voll Freude. Sie hob die Kugel auf und lief nach Hause. 

„Warte, warte," rief der Frosch, „nimm mich mit, nimm mich 
mit ; ich kann nicht so laufen wie du !" Aber sie horte nicht 
darauf 6 und hatte den armen Frosch bald vergessen. Am nach- 
sten Tage aber, als sie mit ihrem Vater und alien Hofleuten bei 
Tafel saf>, da kam der Frosch, klopfte an die Tiir und rief : 

„K6nigstochter, jiingste, 
mach mir auf 7 ; 
weiBt du nicht, was gestern 
du zu mir gesagt 
bei dem kuhlen Brunnen wasser ? 
Konigstochter, jiingste, 
mach mir auf." 7 



READING AND CONVERSATION 239 

Sie wollte ihn nicht einlassen, aber der Konig sagte : „Meine 
Tochter, was du versprochen hast, das mufit du auch halten." 
Sie ging und machte die Tiir auf, und der Frosch folgte ihr an 
den Tisch und rief : ,,Heb mich herauf zu dir." Sie wollte das 
nicht tun, aber der Konig befahl es ihr, und sie nahm den Frosch 
und setzte ihn auf ihren Stuhl neben sich. 

Der Frosch sprang von dem Stuhle auf den Tisch und sagte : 
„Nun schieb mir dein goldenes Tellerlein naher, damit wir zu- 
sammen essen." s Das muBte sie tun, und als der Frosch genug 
gegessen hatte, sagte er : „Ich bin miide und will schlafen ; trage 
mich hinauf in dein Kammerlein." Sie trng ihn hinauf und 
setzte ihn in die Ecke. Da kam er zu ihr gekrochen und sagte : 
,,Heb mich herauf, oder ich sag's deinem Vater." 

Da wurde sie bitterbose, hob ihn auf und warf ihn mit aller 
"Kraft gegen die Wand. ,,Nun wirst du Ruhe haben, du gar- 
stiger Frosch," sagte sie. Als er aber herabfiel, da war er kein 
Frosch mehr, sondern 9 ein Konigssohn mit schonen und freund- 
lichen Augen. Da erzahlte er ihr, er sei von einer bosen Hexe 
verwiinscht worden, 10 und niemand hatte IO ihn aus dem Brunnen 
erlosen konnen als sie allein. 

Der Konigssohn war nun nach ihres Vaters Willen ihr lieber 
Geselle und Gemahl, und am anderen Morgen fuhren sie zu- 
sammen in einem schonen Wagen mit acht weiBen Pferden in 
sein Reich und lebten gliicklich zusammen bis an ihr seliges 
Ende. 

1 When the weather was very warm. 2 tossed it up. 3 What is the matter? 4 She 
looked around 5 If you will love me. 6 She did not piy attention. 7 Open the door. 
8 So that we may eat together. 9 See §109, 4. 10 He related to her that he had been 
bewitched by a wicked sorceress, and that no dne had been able, etc. See §125, 4. 

Model of Conversation, 
Wann lebte dieser Konig ? 
Waren seine Tochter alle schon ? 
Welche Tochter war die schonste ? 
Was lag bei dem Schlosse des Konigs ? 
Was befand sich in dem Walde ? 



24O NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Wohin ging das Konigskind ? 

Wohin setzte sie sich ? 

Was tat sie mit der goldenen Kugel ? 

Wohin fiel einmal die Kugel ? 

Was tat darauf das Madchen ? 

Was horte sie, als sie weinte ? 

Was rief die Stimme ? 

Was erblickte sie, als sie sich umsah ? 

Was sagte sie zu dem Frosch ? 

Was versprach ihr der Frosch ? 

Warum war die Konigstochter voll Freude ? 

Was tat sie darauf ? 

Was rief der Frosch ? 

Let these questions with suitable answers be continued to the end of the piece. 
It would be an excellent exercise for the pupil to compose and write the questions 
and answers to this and other pieces. 

32. Auf dem Harze. 

Auf dem Berge steht die Hutte, 
Wo der alte Bergmann wohnt ; 
Dorten rauscht die grime Tanne, 
Und erglanzt der gold'ne Mond. 

In der Hutte steht ein Lehnstuhl, 
Reich geschnitzt und wunderlich ; 
Der darauf sitzt, der ist gliicklich, 
Und der Gliickliche bin ich ! 

Auf dem Schemel sitzt die Kleine, 
Stiitzt den Arm auf meinen SchoB ; 
Augleih wie zwei kleine Sterne, 
Miindlein wie die Purpurros'. 

Und die lieben blauen Sterne 
Schau'n mich an so himmelgrofS, 
Und sie legt den Lilienfinger 
Schalkhaft auf die Purpurros*. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 241 

Nein, es sieht uns nicht die Mutter, 1 
Denn sie spinnt mit grcxBem Flei£, 
Und der Vater spielt die Zither 
Und er singt die alte Weis'. 2 

Und die Kleine fliistert leise, 
Leise mit gedampftem Laut ; 
Manches wichtige Geheimnis 
Hat sie mir schon anvertraut. 

„Aber seit die Muhme tot ist, 
Konnen wir ja nicht mehr gehn 
Nach dem Schutzenhof zu Goslar, 
Und dort ist es gar zu schon. 

„Hier dagegen ist es einsam 
Auf der kalten Bergeshoh', 
Und des Winters sind wir ganzlich 
Wie vergraben in dem Schnee. 

„Und ich bin ein banges Madchen, 
Und ich fiircht' mich wie. ein Kind 
Vor den bosen Bergesgeistern, 
Die des Nachts geschaftig sind." 3 

Plotzlich schweigt die liebe Kleine, 
Wie vom eigneu Wort erschreckt, 
Und sie hat mit beiden Handchen 
Ihre Augelein bedeckt. 

Lauter rauscht die Tanne draufien, 
Und das Spinnrad scnnarrt und brummt, 
Und die Zither klingt dazwischen, 
Und die alte Weise summt : 

,, Fiircht' dich nicht, 4 du liebes Kindchen, 
Vor 4 der bosen Geister Macht ; 
Tag und Nacht, du liebes Kindchen, 
Halt en Eng'lein bei dir Wacht." Heine. 

1 The mother does not see us. 2 The old melody. 3 Who come out at night. 4 Do not 
be afraid of. 



242 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

33. Deutsche Sprichworter. 

i. Armut ist kerne Schande. 

2. Morgenstunde hat Gold im Munde. 

3. Morgen, morgen, nur nicht heute, sprechen alle tragen 
Leute. 

4. Lesen und nicht verstehen ist halb miiiMg gehen. 

5. Williges Herz macht leichte FiiJBe. 

6. Wo man Liebe saet, da wachst Freude. 

7. Ein frohes Herz, gesundes Blut 
Ist besser, als viel Geld und Gut. 

8. Schweigen bis zur rechten Zeit 
Ubertrifft Beredsamkeit. 

9. Es ist auf Erden keine bessere List, 
Als wer seiner Zunge Meister ist. 

10. Wer auf jede Feder acht't, 
Nie das Bette fertig macht. 

11. Herr Gutgenug, der bequeme Knecht, 
Macht seine Sachen nur halb und schlecht. 

12. Wer im Sommer nicht mag schneiden, 
MuB im Winter Hunger leiden. 

13. Wer den Schaden nicht weiB zu meiden, 
Der muB ihn leiden. 

14. Geh treu und redlich durch die Welt, 
Das ist das beste Reisegeld. 

15. Gute Spriiche, weise Lehren 
Mufi man iiben, nicht bloB horen. 

34. Epigramme unci Stammbuch-Verse. 

1 
Im Gliicke niemals stolz, 
Im Ungliick edelmutig, 
Den Freunden stets getreu, 
Und gegen Feinde giitig. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 243 

II 

Sanft entfliehe dir das Leben 

An der Tugend Hand ; 

Freundschaft, Lieb' .und Treue weben 

Dir ein Rosenband. 
in 
Die reine Freundschaft reiner Herzen 
Geht Hand in Hand in Freud' und Schmerzen, 
Kein Gliick, kein MiSgeschick trennt sie. 

IV 

Der Mensch hat ein zweites Herz, eine zweite Seele, — seinen 
Freund. 

Heiter wie der Tag im Lenze 
FlieSe dir dein Leben hin, 
Unschuld sei's, die dich umkranze, 
Tugend deine Fuhrerin. 

VI 

Dem kleinen Veilchen gleich, 
Das im Verborg'nen bluht, 
Sei immer fromm und gut, 
Auch wenn dich niemand sieht. 

VII 

Die Blumen fallen ab, 
Die Rosen wie die Nelken, 
Doch unsre Freundschaft soil 

Zu keiner Zeit verwelken. 

1 

35. Die Hoffnung. 

Es reden und traumen die Menschen viel 

Von bessern kiinftigen Tagen ; 

Nach einem gliicklichen, goldenen Ziel 

Sieht man sie rennen und jagcn. 

Die Welt wird alt und wird wieder jung, 

Doch der Mensch hofft immer Verbesserung. 



244 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Die Hoffnung fiihrt ihn ins Leben ein, 
Sie umflattert den frohlichen Knaben ; 
Den Jiingling locket ihr Zauberschein, 
Sie wird mit dem Greis nicht begraben ; 
Denn beschliejSt er im Gra.be den miiden Lauf, 
Noch am Grabe pflanzt er — die Hoffnung auf. 

Es ist kein leerer, schmeichelnder Wahn, 
Erzeugt im Gehirne des Toren ; 
Im Herzen kiindet es laut sich an : 
Zu was Besserm sind wird geboren. 
Und was die innere Stimme spricht, 
Das tauscht die hoffende Seele nicht. 



Schiller. 



36. Das Scliloss am Meere. 

Hast du das SchloB gesehen, 
Das hohe SchloB am Meer ? 
Golden und rosig wehen 
Die Wolken driiber her. 

Es mochte sich niederneigen 
In die spiegelklare Flut ; 
Es mochte streben und steigen 
In der Abendwolken Glut. 

„Wohl nab' ich es gesehen, 
Das hohe SchloJB am Meer, 
Und den Mond dariiber stehen 
Und Nebel weit umher." 

Der Wind und des Meeres Wallen, 
Gaben sie frischen Klang ? 
Vernahmst du aus hohen Hallen 
Saiten und Festgesang ? 

„Die Winde, die Wogen alle 
Lagen in tiefer Ruh : ; 
Einem Klagelied aus der Halle 
Hort' ich mit Tranen zu." 



READING AND CONVERSATION 245 

Sahest du oben gehen 
Den Konig und sein Gemahl ? 
Der roten Mantel Wehen, 
Der goldnen Kronen Strahl ? 

Fiihrten sie nicht mit Wonne 
Eine schone Jungfrau dar, 
Herrlich wie eine Sonne, 
Strahlend im goldnen Haar ? 

„Wohl sah ich die Eltern beide, 
Ohne der Kronen Licht, 
Im schwarzen Trauerkleide ; 
Die Jungfrau sah ich nicht." Uhland. 

37. Das Veilchen. 

Ein Veilchen auf der Wiese stand, 

Gebuckt in sich und unbekannt ; 

Es war ein herzigs Veilchen. 

Da kam die junge Schaferin 

Mit leichtem Schritt und munterm Sinn 

Daher, daher, 

Die Wiese her, und sang. 

Ach ! denkt das Veilchen, war' ich nur 

Die schonste Blume der Natur, 

Ach, nur ein kleines Weilchen, 

Bis mich das Liebchen abgepfliickt 

Und an dem Busen matt gedriickt ! 

Ach nur, ach nur 

Ein Viertelstiindchen lang ! 

Ach ! aber ach ! das Madchen kam 

Und nicht in acht das Veilchen nahm ; 

Zertrat das arme Veilchen. 

Es sank und starb und freut sich noch : 

Und sterb' ich derm, so sterb' ich doch 

Durch sie, durch sie, 

Zu ihren FiiBsen doch. Goethe. 



246 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

38. Gefunden. 

Ich ging im Walde 
So fur mich hin, 
Und nichts zu suchen, 
Das war mein Sinn. 

Im Schatten sah ich 
Ein Blumchen stehn, 
Wie Sterne leuchtend, 
Wie Auglein schon. 

Ich wollt' es brechen, 
Da sagt' es fein : 
Soil ich zum Welken 
Gebrochen sein ? 

Ich grub's mit alien 
Den Wiirzlein aus, 
Zum Garten trug ich's 
Am hiibschen Haus. 

Und pflanzt' es wieder 
Am stillen Ort ; 
Nun zweigt es immer 
Und bluht so fort. 

Goethe. 

39. I>er Wirtin Tochterlein. 

Es zogen drei Bursche wohl uber den Rhein, 
Bei einer Frau Wirtin, da kehrten sie ein : 

„Frau Wirtin, hat Sie gut Bier und Wein? 
Wo hat Sie Ihr schones Tochterlein ? " 

„Mein Bier und Wein ist frisch und klar, 
Mein Tochterlein liegt auf der Totenbahr." 

Und als sie traten zur Kammer hinein, 
Da lag sie in einem schwarzen Schrein. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 247 

Der erste, der schlug den Schleier zuriick 
Und schaute sie an mit traurigem Blick : 

„Ach, lebtest du noch, du schone Maid ! 
Ich wiirde dich lieben von dieser Zeit." 

Der zweite deckte den Schleier zu 
Und kehrte sich ab und weinte dazu : 

„Ach, daft du liegst auf der Totenbahr ! 
Ich hab' dich geliebet so manches Jahr." 

Der dritte hub ihn wieder sogleich 
Und kiifite sie auf den Mund so bleich : 

„Dich liebt' ich immer, dich lieb' ich noch heut 
Und werde dich lieben in Ewigkeit." 



Uhland. 



40. Die Grenadiere. 

Nach Frankreich zogen zwei Grenadier', 
Die waren in Rutland gefangen. 
Und als sie kamen ins deutsche Quartier, 
Sie liefien die Kopfe hangen. 

Da horten sie beide die traurige Mar : 
Dafi Frankreich verloren gegangen, 
Besiegt und zerschlagen das groBe Heer — 
Und der Kaiser, der Kaiser gefangen. 

Da weinten zusammen ( die Grenadier' 
Wohl ob der klaglichen Kunde. 
Der eine sprach : „Wie weh wird mir, 
Wie brennt meine alte Wunde ! " 

Der andre sprach: „Das Lied ist aus, 
Auch ich mocht' mit dir sterben, 
Doch hab' ich Weib und Kind zu Haus, 
Die ohne mich verderben." 



248 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

„Was schert mich Weib, was schert mich Kind, 
Ich trage weit bess'res Verlangen ; 
LaB sie betteln gehn, wenn sie hungrig sind — 
Mein Kaiser, mein Kaiser gefangen ! 

„Gewahr' mir, Bruder, eine Bitt' : 
Wenn ich jetzt sterben werde, 
So nimm meine Leiche nach Frankreich mit, 
Begrab' mich in Frankreichs Erde. 

„Das Ehrenkreuz am rot en Band 
Sollst du aufs Herz mir legen ; 
Die Flinte gieb mir in die Hand, 
Und giirt mir urn den Degen. 

„So will ich liegen und horchen still, 
Wie eine Schildwach' im Grabe, 
Bis einst ich hore Kanonengebriill 
Und wiehernder Rosse Getrabe. 

,,Dann reitet mein Kaiser wohl uber mein Grab, 
Viel Schwerter klirren und blitzen ; 
Dann steig' ich gewaffnet hervor aus dem Grab, 
Den Kaiser, den Kaiser zu schiitzen." 



Heine. 



41. Wandrers Nachtlied. 

Uber alien Gipfeln 

1st Ruh' ; 

In alien Wipfeln 

Spiirest du 

Kaum einen Hauch ; 

Die Voglein schweigen im Walde. 

Warte nur, balde 

Ruhest du auch. 



Goethe. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 249 

42. Verg'issmeiimiclit. 

Es bliiht ein schones Bliimchen 
Auf unsrer griinen Au'; 
Sein Aug' ist wie der Himmel, 
So heiter und so blau. 

Es weiB nicht viel zu reden, 
Und alles, was es spricht, 
Ist immer nur dasselbe, 
Ist nur : VergiBmeinnicht. 

J'on Fallersleben. 

43. Erlkonig". 

Wer reitet so spat durch Nacht und Wind ? 
Es ist der Vater mit seinem Kind ; 
Er hat den Knaben wohl in dem Arm, 
Er fa£t ihn sicher, er halt ihn warm. 

„Mein Sohn, was birgst du so bang dein Gesicht ?" — 
„Siehst, Vater, du den Erlkonig nicht ? 

Den Erlenkonig mit Kron' und Schweif ?" — 
„Mein Sohn, es ist ein Nebelstreif." 

„Du liebes Kind, komm, geh' mit mir ? 
Gar schone Spiele spiel' ich mit dir ; 
Manch' bunte Blumen sind an dem Strand ! 
Meine Mutter hat manch' gulden Gewand." 

„Mein Vater, mein Vater, und horest du nicht, 

Was Erlenkonig mir leise verspricht ?" — 
„Sei ruhig, bleibe ruhig, mein Kind; 

In diirren Blattern sauselt der Wind." 

„Willst, feiner Knabe, du mit mir gehn? 
Meine Tochter sollen dich warten schon ; 
Meine Tochter fiihren den nachtlichen Reihn, 
Und wiegen und tanzen und singen dich ein." 



250 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

„Mein Vater, mein Vater, und siehst du nicht dort 
Erlkonigs Tochter am diistern Ort ?" — 

„Mein Sohn, mein Sohn, ich sen' es genau ; 
Es scheinen die alten Weiden so grau." 

„Ich Hebe dich, mich reizt deine schone Gestalt ; 

Und bist du nicht willig, so brauch' ich Gewalt." 
„Mein Vater, mein Vater, jetzt fafit er mich an ! 

Erlkonig hat mir ein Leids getan !" 

Dem Vater grauset's, er reitet geschwind, 
Er halt in den Armen das achzende Kind, 
Erreicht den Hof mit Miih' und Not ; 
In seinen Armen das Kind war tot. 

Goethe. 
44. Gluckwiinsche. 

I. 

„Angenehme Feiertage ! " 

11. 
„Frohliche Weihnachten ! " 

in. 
„Prosit Neujahr !" 

IV. 

„Viel Gliick zum neuen Jahre !" 

v. 
„Die besten Wiinsche zum neuen Jahre !" 

VI. 

„Die herzlichsten Gluckwiinsche zum Jahreswechsel !" 

VII. 

Karl Schubert und Frau 
gratulieren herzlich zum neuen Jahre. 






READING AND CONVERSATION 25 I 

45. Zur Jahreswende. 

Durch des Lebens wilde Stiirme vorwarts stets mit frischem 

Mut! 
Ob sich hoch die Welle tiirme, dich besiege nicht die Flut. 
Was dir auch der Sturm genommen, halte fest am Hoffnungs- 

griin, 
Andre Zeiten werden kommen, andre Blumen werden bliihn. 

Beug' das Haupt nicht traurig nieder, weil dir eine Bliite fallt, 
Was vergangen, kehrt nicht wieder, doch viel Bliiten hat die 

Welt. 
Drum zuriick schau nicht vergebens, immer vorwarts hei^t es hier, 
Denn ein Abschnitt deines Lebens liegt auf ewig hinter dir. 

War er lieblich, war er heiter, wein' ihm eine Trane nach, 
Aber dann auch rastlos weiter durch Gefahr und Ungemach ! 
Sicher fiihrt ein Weg ins Klare, ob auch Sturm und Wetter 

droht, 
Nur den Mut, o Herz, bewahre : hilf dir selbst, so hilft dir Gott ! 

H. von Engelhardt. 
46. O Strassburg". 

Strafiburg, o Strafiburg, du wunderschone Stadt, 
Darinnen liegt begraben so mannicher Soldat. 

So mancher und schoner, auch tapferer Soldat, 

Der Vater und lieb' Mutter boslich verlassen hat. 

Verlassen, verlassen, es kann nicht anders sein ! 

Zu Strafiburg, ja zu Stra^burg Soldaten miissen sein. 

Der Vater, die Mutter, die ging'n vors Hauptmanns Haus : 

,,Ach Hauptmann, lieber Herr Hauptmann, gebt mir mein' 

Sohn heraus." 
Euren Sohn kann ich nicht geben fur noch so vieles Geld ; 
Euer Sohn, und der muS sterben im weit und breiten Feld. 
Was 1 lauft ihr, was 1 rennt ihr nach fremden Dienst und Land ? 
Es hat's euch niemand geheiBen ; dient ihr dem Vaterland ! 

Volkslied. 

1 Was often equals warum, " why," as here. 



252 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

47. Barbarossa. 

Der alte Barbarossa, 
Der Kaiser Friederich, 
Im unterird'schen Schlosse 
Halt er verzaubert sich. 

Er ist niemals gestorben, 
Er lebt darin noch jetzt ; 
Er hat im SchloB verborgen 
Zum Schlaf sich hingesetzt. 

Er hat hinabgenommen 
Des Reiches Herrlichkeit 
Und wird einst wiederkommen 
Mit ihr zu seiner Zeit. 

Der Stuhl ist elfenbeinern, 
Darauf der Kaiser sitzt ; 
Der Tisch ist marmelsteinern, 
Worauf sein Haupt er stiitzt. 

Sein Bart ist nicht von Flachse, 
Er ist von Feuersglut, 
Ist durch den Tisch gewachsen, 
Worauf sein Kinn ausruht. 

Er nickt als wie im Traume, 
Sein Aug' halb offen zwinkt ; 
Und je nach langem Raume 
Er einem Knaben winkt. 1 

Er spricht im Schlaf zum Knaben : 
„Geh hin vors Schlofi, o Zwerg, 
Und sieh, ob noch die Raben 
Herfliegen um den Berg. 

Und wenn die alten Raben 

Noch fliegen immerdar, 

So mufi ich auch noch schlafen 

Verzaubert hundert Jahr." Ruckert. 

1 At long intervals (of time) he beckons to a boy. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 253 

48. Wunsch. 

Etwas wiinschen und verlangen, 

Etwas hoffen mufi das Herz, 

Etwas zu verlieren bangen 

Und um etwas fiihlen Schmerz. 

Deine Lust und deine Wonne 

Mufit du an was immer sehn, 

Soil vergeblich Mond und Sonne 

Nicht an dir vorubergehn. 

Gleich von unbegrenztem Sehnen 

Wie entfernt von trager Ruh', 1 

Miisse sich mein Leben dehnen 

Wie ein Strom dem Meere zu. Ruckert. 

Free alike from unbounded longing and from indolent repose. 

49. Mignon. 

Kennst du das Land, wo die Citronen bliihn, 
Im dunkeln Laub die Gold-Orangen gluhn, 
Ein sanfter Wind vora blauen Himmel weht, 
Die Myrte still und hoch der Lorbeer stent, 
Kennst du es wohl ? 

Dahin ! dahin 
Mocht' ich mit dir, o mein Geliebter, ziehn ! 

Kennst du das Haus ? Auf Saulen ruht sein Dach, 
Es glanzt der Saal, es schimmert das Gemach, 
Und Marmorbilder stehn und sehn mich an : 
Was hat man dir, du armes Kind, getan? 
Kennst du es wohl ? 

1 Dahin ! dahin 
Mocht' ich mit dir, o mein Beschiitzer, ziehn ! 
Kennst du den Berg und seinen Wolkensteg ? 
Das Maultier sucht im Nebel seinen Weg, 
In Hohlen wohnt der Drachen alte Brut ; 
Es stiirzt der Fels und liber ihn die Flut. 
Kennst du ihn wohl ? 

Dahin! dahin 
Geht unser Weg ! Vater, laB uns ziehn ! Goethe. 



254 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

50. Reiters Morgengesang. 

Morgenrot, 1 
Leuchtest mir zum friihen Tod ? 
Bald wird die Trompete blasen, 
Dann mufi ich mein Leben lassen, 
Ich und mancher Kamerad ! 

Kaum gedacht, 
War der Lust ein End' gemacht. 2 
Gestern noch auf stolzen Rossen, 
Heute durch die Brust geschossen, 
Morgen in das kiihle Grab ! 

Ach, wie bald 
Schwindet Schonheit und Gestalt ! 
Tust du stolz mit deinen Wangen,3 
Die wie Milch und Purpur prangen ? 
Ach, die Rosen welken all' ! 

Darum still 
Fug' ich mich, wie Gott es will. 
Nun so will ich wacker streiten, 
Und sollt' ich den Tod erleiden, 
Stirbt ein braver Reitersmann. Hauff. 

* In reading this piece repeat the first line of each stanza, thus : „Morgenrot, Morgen- 
rot." 2 There was an end of the pleasure. 3 You look proudly. 

51. Hans im Gliick. 

(Nach dem Englischen, von Dr. Lindorme.) 

Hans Steinkopf, ein Bauernknecht ; Baumgarten, Inspektor 
auf einem Rittergut ; Bauern. 

{Scene : eine Wiese ; man sieht Hans Steinkopf, sich auf eine Harke stiitzend.) 

Hans. Ach, arbeiten, arbeiten, arbeiten den ganzen Tag lang, 
und wenn man sich einen Augenblick ausruht, hat's der In- 
spektor in seinem Buche, und dann sind zwei Groschen hin. 
(Kommt nach vorn.) Ich hasse den alten Patron ! Na, wenn ich 
Herr dieses Gutes ware, so wiirde ich eins zur Regel machen 1 — 



READING AND CONVERSATION 255 

so etwas 2 wie Arbeit gabe es nicht mehr. Das ganze Jahr hin- 

clurch Sollte Feiertag Sein. (Baumgarten tritt ein, sich untertanig ver- 
i eugend.) 

Hans. Ich bin sehr miide, Herr Inspektor, und da habe ich 
ein biBchen innegehalten, urn auszuruhen ; 3 ich hoffe, Ihr werdet 
es entschuldigen. 

Baumgarten (sich verbeugend). Entschuldigen ? Ich hoffe, daB 
Euer Gnaden 4 Euern sehr untertanigen und ehrerbietigen Die- 
ner 5 Wilhelm Baumgarten entschuldigen werden, der sich in 
Euer Gnaden Gegenwart verfugt hat, 6 urn Euer Gnaden zu 
benachrichtigen — 

Hans. Gnaden ! Es beliebt Euch zu scherzen, 7 Herr In- 
spektor. 

Baumgarten. Nein, Euer Gnaden, ich kenne meine Pflicht 
besser ; ich wiirde nie daran denken, mit einem hohen Herrn zu 
scherzen. 

Hans. Was — hoher Herr ? Ach, Ihr meint wahrscheinlich 
den alten Baron. Nein, mit dem diirft Ihr nicht allzuviel Scherz 
treiben. 8 

Baumgarten. Ich sage, ich wiirde nie daran denken, mit einer 
Personlichkeit von Euer Gnaden hohem Range Scherz zu treiben. 

Hans. Hohem was ? — hohem Range ? Ach, jetzt merke ich 
erst, was los ist.9 Ihr seid verriickt ! 

Baumgarten. Euer Gnaden belieben zu scherzen, aber wenn 
Euer Gnaden so giitig sein wollen, diesen Brief zu lesen, so 
werden Euer Gnaden sich uberzeugen. Werden Euer Gnaden 
sich herablassen ? IO 

Hans. I nun, 11 ich wiirde mich schon herablassen, hinderten 
mich daran nicht verschiedene Griinde, von denen einer ist, daB 
ich nicht lesen kann. 

Baumgarten. Euer Gnaden haben vollkommen recht, denn 
dergleichen Kiinste sind fur jemand von Euer Gnaden Adel viel 
zu gering. 

Hans. Gnaden und immer wieder Gnaden ! Ich will Euch 
was sagen, Herr Inspektor, lafit es nun des Spaces genug sein, 1 - 



256 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

denn mogt Ihr auch hier Inspektor sein, soviel Ihr wollt, ich lasse 
es mir nicht langer gefallen. 13 Mein Name ist Hans Steinkopf, 
und wenn Ihr mich nicht bei dem Namen nennen wollt, so werde 
ich Euch nicht antworten, und dam it Punktum ! *4 

Baumgarten. Nun denn, Herr Steinkopf, seid so gut und 
hort zu, wahrend ich diesen Brief lese. (Liest.) 

Geehrter Herr ! Dieses diene Ihnen zur Nachricht, daB 
Baron Ohnewitz heute morgen nach sehr kurzer Krankheit 
gestorben ist. Wahrend derselben erklarte er, daf$ er ver- 
heiratet gewesen sei l s und einen Erben habe. Die Frau, 
mit der er verheiratet war, wurde gewohnlich Steinkopf 
genannt. Sie war arm unci ungebildet, und Seine Gnaden 
erkannte sie aus Griinden falscher Scham nie als seine 
Gemahlin an. 16 Sie starb vor einiger 17 Zeit und hinterliei 
einen Sohn namens Hans Steinkopf. Dieser besagte Hans 
Steinkopf ist der Erbe des Titels und des Grundbesitzes. 
Ich habe daher die notigen Schriftstiicke an Sie abgesandt, 
um ihn in Gemafiheit des letzten Willens und Testaments 
Seiner Gnaden 18 sofort in den Besitz zu setzen. Zu Ihren 
Diensten. Ihr 

R. von der Heide, Rechtsanwalt. 
Hans. Was? — alles mein? Die Hauser, die Baume, die 
Felder, die Pferde, die Kiihe, die Hunde, die Katzen und die 
Schweine ! — was ? Sind die alle mein ? Und ich, Hans Stein- 
kopf, bin jetzt Baron und Herr dieses ganzen Rittergutes ? — 
Sagt mir, ist es so ? 

Baumgarten. Ich wiederhole, das ganze Rittergut ist Euer. 
Hans. Hurra! LaB die Glocken lauten, — laB das Bier 
laufen, — laB — geh, rufe das ganze Dorf zusammen ! 

Baumgarten. Werden Euer Gnaden heute im Schlosse speisen ? 
Hans. Ja. 

Baumgarten. Was befehlen Euer Gnaden zu Mittag ? 
Hans. Beefsteak mit Zwiebeln, und zwar recht viel. 
Baumgarten (fiir sich). Beefsteak mit Zwiebeln! Was fur ein 
Gericht fiir einen Baron ! 




READING AND CONVERSATION 257 

Hans. Was murmelst du da ? Geh schnell. Ich werde sie 
alle gliicklich machen, und dann gehe ich zu Kathchen. 

Baumgarten. Mit Euer Gnaden giitiger Erlaubnis, wer ist 
Kathchen ? 

Hans. I nun, Kathchen wird meine Frau und Eure Herrin 
sein, wenn ich Euch ehrlich genug finde, um Euch in meinem 
Dienste zu behalten. 

Baumgatten. Mit Euer Gnaden Erlaubnis, ich habe eine 
wunderschone Tochter. 

Hans. Schwatzt mir nicht von Eurer Tochter ; setzt Euch 
in Bewegung ! 

Baumgarten. Ich bin Euer Gnaden alleruntertanigster Diener. 

(Ab mit Verbeugung.) 

Hans. Ha, ha, ha, was fur Spektakel werde ich im Dorfe 
machen ! (Rennt hin und her.) Wo soil ich zuerst hingehen ? Ich 
will nach — nein, da will ich nicht hin ; ich will zu Pachter 
Schmidt gehen — nein, da will ich auch nicht — ich will vor 
allem zu Kathchen gehen ; — wie froh wird sie sein — 

(Die Bauern stiirzen jauchzend herein.) 

Hans. He ! Johann ! Thomas ! Philipp ! Wilhelm ! Wie 
geht's euch ? Hier giebt's etwas Neues fur euch ! Kommt, stellt 
euch im Kreise auf, ich will euch eine kleine Rede halten. (Sie 
scharen sich alle um ihn.) Das erste von allem hat euch der Inspek- 
tor wahrscheinlich schon gesagt, namlich, daB ich euer Baron und 
Gutsherr bin. 

Bauern. Hurra ! Hurra ! Baron Hans lebe hoch und noch- 
mals hoch und zum drittenmal hoch ! 

Hans. Ich werde jedem sein Pachtgeld heruntersetzen ! 

Bauern. Hurra! Hurra! Hoch! Hoch! 

Hans. Ihr sollt gar keine Pacht mehr bezahlen ! 

Bauern. Hurra ! Hurra ! 

Hans. Ich werde keine armen Leute im Dorfe haben, ich 
werde sie alle reich machen ! 

Bauern. Hurra ! Baron Hans lebe hoch ! 

Hans. Ich werde keine Waisenkinder haben, ich werde ihnen 
alien selber Vater sein ! 



258 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Bauem. Hurra ! Hurra ! 

Hans. Ich werde keine Witwen haben, ich werde sie alle 
heiraten ! 

Bauem. Hurra ! Hurra ! 

Baumgartcn (tritt ein). Euer Gnaden, das Essen ist fertig. 

Hans. Nun kommt alle mit mir auf das SchloB. Ihr seid 

heute meine Gaste. (Geht ab, alle folgen ihm jauchzend). 

1 1 would make one rule. 2 such a thing. 3 I stopped a little while to rest. *• your 
grace (or highness). s your most humble and obedient servant. 6 who has come into your 
grace's presence? 7 you are pleased to joke. 8 you dare not joke too much, gl see now 
what is the matter. IO will your grace condescend ? n well now. I2 let there be an end of 
this joking. I3 I will not submit to it any longer, uand that is all about it. IS see §125, 4. 
J 6 an'erkennen, to recognize. '7a little while ago. I8 according to the last will of his 
grace. 

52. Eine Tasse Kaffee. 

Lustspiel fur Madchen, von Wilhelm Pailler. 
(Fur die Zwecke der Schule gekiirzt.) 

Personen. 
Frau Mathilde von Langen. 
Frau Rosa von Bangen. 
Lisette, Mathildes Stub enniadc hen. 

Eine Kramerin. Eine Schustersfrau. Eine Dame. Zwei Kinder. 

Scene : ein Wohnzimmer in Mathildes Haus. 

(Die Verwickelung des Stiickes wird durch die Ahnlichkeit der Namen der Frau 

von Langen und der Frau von Bangen herbeigefuhrt, von denen die erstere im 

ersten, die letztere im zweiten Stock wohnt.) 

Erste Scene. 
Lisette, bald darauf Mathilde. 

Lisette (tritt ein, eine Schachtel und einen Brief in den Handen tragend; sie 
liest die Adresse der Schachtel, munter). Also „ZU eigenen Handen der 

gnadigen Frau Mathilde" soil diese Schachtel iibergeben werden ; 
— „die gnadige Frau Mathilde" ist aber im Augenblick nicht zu 
Hause. Horch ! mir scheint . . . ! ja, das ist Frau Mathilde; ich 
will ihr gleich entgegenkommen mit der Schachtel „zu eigenen 
Handen" ! 



READING AND CONVERSATION ' 259 

Mathllde (tritt ein in eleganter StraBen -Toilette mit Hut und Umhangtuch). 
Lisette (halt die Schachtel entgegen mit Verbeugung). Gnadige Frau, 

diese Schachtel . . . 

Mathilde. Laft mich doch erst Hut und Tuch ablegen ! (Legt 

beides auf einen Stuhl rechts ) Nun laft sehen ! (Tritt an den Tisch links.) 
Lisette (stellt die Schachtel auf den Tisch und iiberreicht den Brief). Auch 

dieser Brief . . . 

Mathilde. Kam mit der Sendung ? (dffnet den Brief.) Das ist 
ja die Hand von Freundin Antonia ! Ei, ei, — Lisette, hore nur ! 

Lisette. Bin ganz Ohr, 1 gnadige Frau. 

Mathilde (liest). „Soeben erhielt ich von meinem Vetter in 
Kairo eine Sendung allerechtesten, trefflichen Mokkakaffees und 
beeile mich, Dir eine Probe davon zu baldigem Versuch vorzu- 
iegen. Es wiinscht Dir recht guten Appetit Deine Freundin 
Antonia " — O, die Hebe, gute Seele ! 

Lisette. Also Kaffee ist in der Schachtel ? 

Mathilde. Freilich, Lisette, echte, duftende, siifie Mokka- 
bohnen . . . Ich will sie gleich versuchen. Nimm den Schatz 
mit dir und bereite mir gleich eine Tasse guten Kaffees. 

Lisette (nimmt die Schachtel zu sich). Ganz wohl, gnadige Frau. 
Sonst befehlen Sie nichts? 

Mathilde. Nein, nichts, als daft du recht flink den Kaffee 
bereitest. 

Lisette. Sie sollen zufrieden sein, gnadige Frau. 

Mathilde (deckt den Tisch und nimmt eine Zeitung). Ei, die Muster- 

zeitung ist angekommen. Nun wollen wir sehen, was Frau Mode 

ZU sagen hat. (Setzt sich hin und liegt.) 

Zweite Scene. 
Lisette. Mathilde. Kramerin. 

Lisette (bringt eine Kanne Kaffee mit einer Tasse, Zucker und Zwieback auf 
einem Prasentierteller und stellt diesen auf den Tisch). (Ab.) 

Mathilde. Jetzt will ich ganz meinem Kaffee angehoren. 2 
(Es wird an die Tiir gepocht.) Nun, wer soil jetzt kommen ? (Es 
klopft wieder.) Herein ! 



260 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Kramerin (tritt schleichend und lachelnd ein und stellt ihr Biindel oder ihren 
Kasten gleich auf den nachsten Stuhl und beginnt auszukramen). Gllten 

Abend, untertanigste Dienerin, Frau Baronin, kaufen viel- 
leicht . . . 

Mathilde. Bin keine Baronin und kaufe nichts. 

Kramerin. O Madam, schone Madam — nur anschau'n, nui 
anschau'n. 

Mathilde. Ich danke, ich will gar nichts ansehen ; ich bedarf 
nichts, ich kaufe nichts. 

Kramerin. Da Sehen Sie nur! (Die Kramerin zeigtnach und nach 3 

all das Genannte vor.) Diese schonen, weiBen, echten Taschen- 
tiicher ! 

Mathilde. Ja, ja — schon gut. Haben Sie nicht gehort, daft 
ich nichts — gar nichts kaufe ? 

Kramerin. Aber vielleicht doch ein solches Burstchen ? 

Mathilde. Nein, gar nichts ! 

Kramerin. Oder einen Kamm ? 

Mathilde. Nein, nein ! 

Kramerin. Oder ein Nadelbiichslein ? 

Mathilde. Nun ja ! Reichen Sie das Nadelbiichslein her ! 
Was kostet's ? 

Kramerin. Der nachste Preis,* gnadige Frau, der aller- 
nachste . . . 

Mathilde (ungeduldig). Was kostet das Buchslein ? 

Kramerin. Gnadige Frau ! Zwanzig Kreuzer. 

Mathilde (das Geld darreichend). Hier, Frau, ist das Geld. Leben 
Sie wohl ! 

Kramerin. Tausend Dank. Aber gnadige Frau, haben Sie 
doch auch gute Nadeln ? — Da sehen Sie ! 

Mathilde (erhebt sich und greift nach der Klingel, unmutig). Wollen 

Sie, daB ich die Dienerschaft rufe ? Gehen Sie doch. 

Kramerin (zusammenpackend). O, bitte, bitte, — ich gehe ja 
schon. 

Mathilde. Also, leben Sie wohl ! 

Kramerin. Empfehle mich, schone Madam I. (Ab.) 




READING AND CONVERSATION 26 1 

Mathilde (setzt sich nieder). Gottlob, daB diese schreckliche 
Kramerin aus dem Hause ist. Mein armer Kaff ee ! (Nimmt die 

Kanne.) 

Kramerin (wieder hereinguckend). Kaufen Sie auch kerne Hand- 
schuhe ? 

Mathilde (etwas erschreckt, die Kanne niedersetzend). Was gibt's ? 

Nein, nein ! 

Kramerin. Oder Strumpf bander ? 

Mathilde (erhebt sich). Gehen Sie augenblicklich ! 

Kramerin. Auch keine Tabaksdose ? Empfehle mich Ma- 
dame. (Ab.) 

Dritte Scene. 

Mathilde. Lisette. Eine Dame. 

Mathilde. Wie mich diese Person aufgeregt hat ! Aber ein 
Schluck von diesem Kaffee wird mich beruhigen. (Setzt sich und 

hebt den Deckel von der Kanne.) Wie lieblich er duftet ! (Will ein- 
schenken ; Lisette tritt rasch ein.) 

Lisette. Gnadige Frau ! 

Mathilde. Nun, was bringst du fur Neuigkeiten ? 

Lisette. Eine Dame will unsere Wohnung besehen ; sie hat 
gehort, daB wir nachstes Vierteljahr ausziehen. 

Mathilde. Nicht moglich ! Grade jetzt . . . , es sind ja noch 
zwei Monate Zeit. Entschuldige mich, Lisette. 5 

Lisette. Es wird zu spat sein, die Hausfrau wies die Dame 
bereits an unsere Tiir. (Ab). 

(Die Dame ist dunkel gekleidet, von steif er, strenger Haltung, spricht auch stets 
mit soldatischer Kiirze, und in knappem, befehlendem Tone.) 

Mathilde (verbeugt sich stumm). 
Dame (ebenfalls). 

Mathilde. Sie wollen mein Quartier . . . 
Dame. O, verstehe, daB mein Besuch nicht angenehm sein 
kann. 

Mathilde (artig). Ich bitte sehr 6 . . . 



262 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Dame. Kenne das. (Sich umsehend.) Das Zimmer ist hiibsch, 
die anderen werden es auch sein. Brauche nichts weiter zu 
sehen, will nur noch einiges horen. Haben Sie die Giite, mir 
ganz kurz einige Fragen zu beantworten. 

Mathilde. Ich bin bereit, Madame. Ganz kurz. 

Dame. Sie brauchen nur zu sagen : ja ! oder nein ! 

Mathilde. Ich bitte zu beginnen. 

Dame. Ist eine Holzlage bei der Wohnung ? 

Mathilde. Ja. 

Dame. Im Hofraum ? 

Mathilde. Nein. 

Dame. Im Keller. 

Mathilde. Ja. 

Dame. Heizt sich die Wohnung gut ? 

Mathilde. J a. 

Dame. Trocken ? 

Mathilde Ja. 

Dame. Nachbarschaft angenehm ? 

Mathilde. So ziemlich. 

Dame. Steht auf dem Dachboden eine Waschmange ? 

Mathilde. Nein. 

Dame: Also im Keller? 

Mathilde. Nein. 

Dame. Auch nicht ? ! Also im Hausflur ? 

Mathilde. Ja. 

Dame (sich zum Abgehen wendend). Empfehle mich. 

Mathilde (in Gedanken). Ja. (Dann sich verbessernd und die Dame 

fortgeleitend.) Ach, entschuldigen Sie ! . . . Hat mich sehr ge- 
freut, Sie kennen zu lernen . . . 
Dame (ab.) 

Vierte Scene. 

Mathilde. Zwei Kinder. Lisette. 
Mathilde (blickt ihr kopfschuttelnd nach). Was f iir sonderbare Leute 
doch auf dieser Welt herumspazieren ! Aber mein Kaffe ! Jetzt 

soil mich nichts mehr Storen ! (Sie legt Zucker in die Tasse und setzt sich). 



READING AND CONVERSATION 263 

[Es offnet sich rasch die Tiir, und zwei Kinder, iibertrieben aufgeputzt, von 
verschiedenem Alter, BlumenstrauBe in der Hand, treten ein und leiern, ohne sich 
unterbrechen zu lassen, in eintoniger Weise ihien Gluckwunsch ab. Das groBere 
Madchen tragt einen geschriebenen „Wunsch" zusammengerollt in der Hand.] 

Die Kinder (beginnen den Vers. Mathilde sieht erschreckt auf und sucht 
sie zu unterbrechen, gibt aber den Versuch bald auf und hort, sich darein er- 
gebend, zu). 

An dem schonen Namensfeste 
Leitet treuer Liebe Sinn 
Unsre Schritte wieder, beste, 
Teure Patin zu Euch hin. 
Dank sei Gott, der Euch am Leben 
Uns zum Segen noch erhielt, 
Frohlich wollen wir ergeben, 
Folgsam tun, was er befiehlt. 
Er erhalte Euch noch lange, 7 
Mehre Eures Lebens Gliick, 
Und es triibe keine bange, 
Schwere Sorge Euren Blick. 8 

Mathilde (freundlich). Nun, Kinder, wer seid ihr denn ? Was 
wollt ihr denn ? — Ich kenne euch ja gar nicht. 

(Das groBere Madchen iiberreicht stumm die Rolle.) 

Mathilde. Was soil ich mit dieser Rolle anfangen ?9 

Kinder (glotzen sie schweigend an). 

Mathilde (entfaltet die Rolle und blickt hinein). Da haben wir's ! 

Kinder, ihr habt die Wohnung verfehlt, 10 ich feiere nicht mein 
Namensfest heute, ich bin nicht die Frau v. Bangen, sondern die 
Frau v. Langen. Die Frau von Bangen wohnt um eine Treppe 
hoher, im zweiten Stock. Versteht ihr, Kinder ? (Klingelt.) 

Lisette (tritt ein). Sie wiinschen, gnadige Frau ? 

Mathilde. Lisette, fiihre diese Kinder hinauf zu Frau v. Ban- 
gen. Sie haben ihre Gr-atulation hier an die unrechte Adresse 
gebracht. (Gibt die Rolle zuriick.) - — So, Kinderchen, folgt diesem 
Madchen, dann werdet ihr zu eurer Frau Patin kommen, zur 
Frau v. Bangen. 



264 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Lisette (die Hande ausstreckend). Kommt, Kinder ! 
(Fiihrt die Kinder hinaus ; ab.) 

Fiinfte Scene. 
Mathilde. Lisette. Schustersfrau. 
Mathilde. Ach, mein lieber, armer, guter Kaffee ! (Sie langt 

nach der Kanne ; vor der Tiir wird ein Wortwechsel horbar; Mathilde horcht auf.) 

Lisette (drauBen). Aber sagen Sie doch, wer Sie sind ! 
Schustersfrau. Will's schon sagen, aber Ihnen nicht. 
Lisette. Ich muB Sie ja doch anmelden. 11 
Schustersfrau. Was anmelden? Ich melde mich schon selber 
an. 

Mathilde (aufstehend). Was geht denn da drauBen vor? 

[Sie eilt zur Tiir; im selben Augenblick tritt die Schustersfrau ein, gering aber 
ordentlich gekleidet ; sie spricht in aufgeregtem Tone und halt ein Papier in der 
Hand.] 

Schustersfrau. Ei, da ist sie ja selber ! 

Mathilde (tritt zuruck). Wer sind Sie denn ? 

Schustersfrau. Schau, schau, jetzt sind wir auf einmal fremd 
geworden ! — Mein Mann ist schon zwanzigmal umsonst herge- 
laufen. 

Mathilde. Was soil denn das alles heifien ? 

Schustersfrau. Was das heiBen soil? Ich bin die Schusters- 
frau von der Drachengasse und bin nun hier . . . 

Mathilde. Aber was geht denn das alles mich an ? Was 
wollen Sie denn hier ? 

Schustersfrau,. Geld will ich ; es ist die hochste Zeit ! Seit 
vier Jahren lassen Sie nur immer machen und arbeiten, 12 aber 
noch ist kein Heller bezahlt. 

Mathilde. Erlauben Sie ... 

Schustersfrau. Ich erlaube nichts, als mich zu bezahlen. Hier 
ist die Rechnung ! (Zeigt das Papier.) Ich gehe nicht fort, bevor 
ich mein Geld habe ! 






READING AND CONVERSATION 265 

Mathilde. Das ist ja die reine Erpressung ! Ich bin keinen 
Heller schuldig und soil doch bezahlen, und noch dazu verlangt 
man das auf so unverschamte Weise ! (Wendet sich ab.) 

Schustersfrau. So ? Das ist unverschamt ? Nun warte, gna- 
dige Frau, ich will dir sagen, was unverschamt ist. Da horen 
Sie ! (Liest die Rechnung.) „Am 12. Januar 1867 — das sind jetzt 
fast f iinf Jahre ! — fur Frau v. Bangen ein Paar Schuhe . . . 

Mathilde. Schon wieder diese Frau v. Bangen ! — Nun ist 
mir alles klar. 

Schustersfrau. So ? Nicht wahr, jetzt kennen Sie mich ? — 
nicht wahr, jetzt erinnern Sie sich ? — nicht wahr, jetzt bezahlen 
Sie mich ? 

Mathilde. Davon ist keine Rede . . . 

Schustersfrau. Was ? Keine Rede ? Soil ich weiter lesen ? 
(Liest.) Am 28. Januar 1867 . . . 

Mathilde. So lassen Sie mich doch zu Worte kommen.^ 

Schustersfrau. Sobald ich zu meinem Gelde komme, sollen 
Sie zu Worte kommen. 

Mathilde. Diese Rechnung lautet auf : + eine Frau v. Bangen, 
nicht wahr ? 

Schustersfrau. Nun, haben Sie etwa ihren eigenen Namen 
vergessen ? Ja — fur die gnadige Frau Rosa v. Bangen. 

Mathilde. Das bin ich nicht. 

Schustersfrau. Was ? ! 

Mathilde. Mein Name ist Mathilde von Langen. Verstehen 
Sie ? von Langen, Mathilde von Langen, nicht : Rosa v. Bangen. 

Schustersfrau. Sie sind gar nicht die Frau v. Bangen ? 

Mathilde. Nein, gute Frau. 

Schustersfrau. Ja, wo ist denn diese Gnadige v. Bangen ? 

Mathilde. Um eine Treppe hoher, im zweiten Stock. (Klingelt.) 
Mein Madchen soil Ihnen die Wohnung der Frau v. Bangen 
zeigen. (Klingelt.) Wo steckt denn meine Lisette wieder ? 

Schustersfrau. Ich bitte um Verzeihung, gnadige Frau. 

Mathilde. Folgen Sie mir ; ich will Sie hinauffuhren. (Beide ab.) 



266 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Sechste Scene. 

Mathilde. Lisette. Frau v. Bangen. 

Lisette (eintretend). War mir's doch, als hatte Frau Mathilde 
geschellt. Ei ja, sie hat ihren Kaffee schon genommen and ich 
soil nun wegraumen ? j s (Am Tisch.) Ja, was ist denn das ? Aber 
so sind diese gnadigen Damen ! Sie hat den Kaffee gar nicht 
angeriihrt, lafit ihn kalt werden ! Ach, diese Launen, — und 
der Kaffee ist doch so trefflich ! Das will ich doch soviel als 

moglich gut machen. (Sie schenkt sich ein und trinkt.) Jetzt noch 

ein kleiner Nachgufi. (Trinkt schneii die Tasse leer.) Nun hore ich 
aber meine gnadige Frau schon zuriickkehren. (Sie steht auf und 

nimmt das Service vom Tisch und will fort.) 

Mathilde (Lisetten begegnend). Ach nein, Lisette! La6 diese 
Sachen nur noch hier ; stelle alles wieder auf den Tisch. 
Lisette (zogert). 
Mathilde. Nun schnell und hole noch eine zweite Tasse. 

Lisette (hat das Service auf den Tisch gestellt). Gnadige Frail . . . 

Mathilde. Was soil es ? 

Lisette. Noch eine zweite Tasse soil ich bringen ? 

Mathilde. Freilich ! Was ist da zu fragen ? Schnell ! Ich 
habe Frau v. Bangen eingeladen zu diesem ersten Versuch des 
frischen Mokkakaffees. 

Lisette. Frau v. Bangen will hier Kaffee trinken f 

Mathilde. Ist's denn das erste Mai, dafi Frau v. Bangen bei 
mir Kaffee trinkt ? Geh und hole die Tasse, eine zweite Tasse ! 
Augenblicklich ! 

Lisette. Ja, ja, sogleich, gnadige Frau. (Ab). 

Mathilde (geht an die Tur). O, nur herein, Frau v. Bangen. 

(Reicht ihr die Hand; Frau von Bangen tritt ein.) 

v. Bangen. Ergebenste Dienerin, Frau von Langen. Bin so 
frei, von Ihrer giitigen Einladung Gebrauch zu machen ; aber 
bitte, bitte, nur keine Umstande machen. 

Mathilde. Wollen Sie freundlichst Platz nehmen. Wo darf 
ich den Stuhl hinsetzen ? 



READING AND CONVERSATION 267 

v, Bangen. Ach, Sie machen soviele Umstande l6 ; ich bin ja 

hier wie ZU Haiise. (Fafitselbst einen Stuhlund setzt sich rechts an den Tisch.) 

Mathilde. Meine Lisette wird sogleich eine Tasse bringen. 

v. Bangen. O bitte, hat gar nichts zu sagen, 17 nur keine Um- 
stande. Haben Sie schon gehort, dafi des Herrn Biirgermeisters 
Mops erkrankt ist ? Er hat sich iiberfressen. Sie konnen sich 
denken, wie die ganze Familie in Verzweiflung ist. Drei Dokto- 
ren haben an dem Mops herumkuriert, aber er ist noch nicht 
besser geworden. 

Mathilde. Schrecklich ! 

v. Bangen. Und die Tochter meiner Schneiderin wurde von 
den Blattern befallen. 18 

Mathilde. Das arme Madchen ! 

v. Bangen. Und wissen Sie, daft die Gurken schon wieder 
teurer geworden sind ? 

Mathilde. Ist mir ganz neu. 

v. Bangen. Ja, wahrhaftig ! Aber Sie merken ja gar nicht 
auf alle diese Neuigkeiten ! 

Mathilde. Ich kann gar nicht begreifen, wo Lisette mit der 

Tasse bleibt. (Lisette erblickend, die eben eintritt.) Nun endlich, end- 
lich ! (Lisette stellt die Tasse vor Frau v. Bangen hin.) So, Lisette, jetzt 

bediene die gnadige Frau. 

Lisette. Ich, gnadige Frau ? (Zogert.) 

v. Bangen. O lassen Sie, lassen Sie ! I9 Nur keine Umstande ; 
ich bediene mich schon selbst. Mit Ihrer giitigen Erlaubnis ! 

(Legt Zucker in ihre Tasse.) 

Mathilde. Hole frisches Wasser, Lisette. 
Lisette. Sogleich. (Ab.) 
Mathilde. Bitte zu nehmen. 

V. Ba7lgen (ergreif t die Kanne, will einschenken — springt entriistet auf). 

Frau v. Langen, das diirfen Sie mir doch nicht bieten. 

Mathilde (aufstehend, entsetzt). Was beginnen Sie ? 2 ° Ist an dem 
Kaffee etwas geschehen? 21 

v. Bangen. O nein, meine sehr gnadige, sehr giitige Frau 
von Langen, mit dem Kaffee ist nichts geschehen und wird ewig 

nichtS geschehen. (Sie dreht die Kanne um, zum Zeichen, dafi sie leer sei.) 



268 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Mathilde. Kein Kaffee ? ! 

v. Bangen. O Sie Komodiantin ! Mich so freundlich einzu- 
laden und mir dann leere Kannen vorzusetzen ! — Fiirwahr, das 
sollen Sie mir bezahlen, so wahr ich eine Zunge habe. 

Mathilde (klingelt). 

v. Bangen. O schellen Sie nur ! Soil mich vielleicht Ihre 
Magd vor die Tiire setzen ? 

Mathilde. Halten Sie ein ! — ein Irrtum . . . 

v. Bangen. Nein, es ist kein Irrtum. Sie wollten mich nur 
zum Narren halten. 22 Adieu, Frau von Langen. Sie sollen noch 
an mich denken. In einer halben Stunde hetze ich die ganze 
Stadt gegen Sie auf. 23 (Ab.) 

LlSette (tritt ein und bleibt verzagt stehen). 

Mathilde. Lisette, was ist's mit dem Kaffee ? 2 + Wer hat ihn 
getrunken ? 

Lisette (ganz verzagt). Gnadige Frau . . . 

Mathilde. Dein Gesicht bekennt schon alles. Du hast den 
Kaffe getrunken. Geh, Lisette, geh mir aus den Augen, auf 
immer, 2 5 — du bist deines Dienstes entlassen. 

Lisette (erschreckt, die Hande faltend). Ach, gnadige Frau ! 

Mathilde. Ja, auf der Stelle ! 26 

Lisette. O lassen Sie mich doch bei Ihnen bleiben ! 

Mathilde. Schweig ! Trage das Service hinaus ! 

Lisette (nimmt das Service und geht weinend hinaus). 

Mathilde (fur sich). Ich werde sie doch nicht entlassen, denn 
sie ist sonst ein gutes Madchen. Jetzt mu$ ich jedoch zur Frau 
von Bangen gehen und mich mit ihr versohnen, sonst wiirden 
wir ein schreckliches Gerede haben. 27 (Ab.) 

1 I am all attention. 2 I will give my whole attention to the coffee. 3 by degrees, one 
after the other. * the lowest price, s ask the lady to excuse me. 6 please (not be offended). 
7 may he preserve you long. 8 may no care disturb you. 9 what shall I do with, etc. 
10 mistaken the dwelling. " I must announce you. I2 see lassen, §150. J 3let me speak, 
u this account is for — . is and I am to clear off the table. I6 you make so much ceremony. 
1 7 it is no matter. I8 was attacked with small-pox. *9 it is no matter (let it be). 20 what are 
f you doing ? 2I is something the matter with the coffee ? 22 you only wanted to make a fool 

of me. 2 3 I will arouse the whole town against you. 2 4 what about the coffee ? 2S go out 
of my sight forever ! 26 on the spot, instantly ! 27 a terrible scandal. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 269 

53. Otu^iige au$ @tf)xtltt$ ,,%8xlf)clm Sett," 

1 

^ifdjerfltufce, fingt im j£a$n l 
■JMobie be§ ituljretljens 

(£§ Iad)e(t ber ®ee, er labet §nm 23abe, 
3)er $na6e fcpef ein am gritnen @eftabe, 

3)a fjort er etrt Elingen, 

2Bie gtotert fo f% 

2Bie ©ttmmen ber (Snget 

3m ^3arabie3. 
Unb rote er erroacrjet in feltger Suft, 
2)a jpiilen bie Staffer itmi urn bie SBruft, 

Unb e3 ruft an3 ben Xtefen : 

£ie6 Sfrtabe, 6tft mein ; 

3d) lode ben ©deafer, 

Sdj §iery tr)n herein. 
2 

£irte, auf bem SBerge * 
SSartation be§ J^ufyreifyenS 

S^r fatten, lebt too# ! 

Sfjr fonnigen SBeiben ! 

£)er <e>enne mnfe fctjetben, 

2)er ©rnnmer ift rjin. 
2Btr fafyren $u $erg, rotr tommen ftrieber, 
2Benn ber $ndud rnft, roenn erroacr)en bte £ieber, 
SSenn mit tinmen bte (£rbe fid) lleibet neu, 
SBenn bie ©ritnnlein fltefjeit im lie61id)en Wlal 

3(jr fatten, lebt morjl ! 

3fjr fonnigen 2Beiben ! 

2)er ©enne mnfc fct)etben r 

£)er @ommer tft tjtn. 
3 
5ltyettjager x 
etfdjetnt gegenitbet auf ber ^olje be§ ftelfen, jtoeite Satiation 

©§ bonnern bk §5t)en, e3 gtttert ber ©teg, 
9?td)t granet bem ©crju^en anf }cfjnnnblid)tem 2Beg. 



270 • NEW GERMAN COURSE 

(£r fctjreitet berroegen 

$luf gelbern Don (£i3, 

2)a pranget fein grilling, 

2)a gritnet fein 9to3 ; 
Unb unter ben gitfcen em neblidjteS SD?eer, 
©rfennt er bte Stable bcr $?enfd)en nicfjt mefyr ; 

2)urd) ben 9iif3 nur ber SSolfen 

(Mltcft er bte 2Belt, 

Xtef unter ben SSaffern 

£)a§ griinenbe gelb. 



Wit bem ^fei(, bem S3ogen, 
&urd) ©ebirg unb Xal 
®ommt ber ©d)uj3 ge^ogen 
gritt) am 99?orgenftraf)l. 

9£ie im 9Retc^ ber Siifte 
Sftmig ift ber 2Beif), 
2)urd) ©ebirg unb Stliifte 

|>errfd)t ber (Sdjiuje fret. 

Si)m gerjort ba£ 2Beite, 
2Ba3 fein ^fet( erretc^t ; 
2)a3 ift feme 23eute, 
2Ba3 ba fleugt unb freudjt. 

5 
Sarm^crjigc SBriibcr 3 

Sftafd) trttt ber Xob ben Sftenfcfjen an ; 

(£3 ift tfmt feine grift gegeben; 
(£3 ftitrgt ilm mitten in ber 33at)n f 

(£§ reifet ifjn fort uom Pollen Seben. 
S5ereitet ober nid)t, ^u gefjen, 
(Sr mufs t)or feinen 9ftid)ter ftetjen. 

1 Act I, Scene i, 2 Act III, Scene i. 3 Act IV, Scene 3. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 271 

54* (©cenett au$ „2$ifl)elm SeH" 

Der £}ut oes Cyrannen. (Sellers Cob. 

Note. — In order to adapt these scenes to performance on a school stage some liberty 
has been taken with the arrangement though not with the words. The workmen who first 
appear are conversing about the fortress that is being built by the tyrant and one of them 
is uttering Tell's words as they enter (Act I, Scene 3). 



<£ r ft e Scene 

9ftel)rere Strbeitcr fotnmen im ©efprad). 

©rfter ®efefl 
28a3 |jcmbe fcautert, lonnen <£)&rtbe ftiit^en. 

(yiai) ben 33ergen jeigenb.) 

£)a£ |>au3 ber greiljeit fyat un3 ($ott gegritttbet. 

(2ftan bort etne trommel, e§ fommen Seute, bie einen |)ut auf einer ©tange tragen ; 
ein SluSrufer folgt iforten.) 

Btticiter ©efefl 

2Ba3 mill bie trommel ? ' (Met ad)t ! 

5lu3rufer 

3n be£ ®aifer3 Dfotnen ! febxtt ! 

©efeflett 

©till bocfj ! §oret ! 

Slu^rufer 

St)r fetjet btefen |>ut r banner oon Urt. 
5(ufrid)tett trjtrb matt ilm 2 auf £)of)er <Saule, 
bitten in 5tltorf r an bentil)M)ften Drt; 
Unb btefen ift be3 SanbbogtS mW unb ^einung : 
£)em |jut foil g(eid)e (£t)re, mie ilmt feI6ft, gefdjeljn. 3 
yjlan foil ttjtt mit gefcognem Stttte unb mit 
(Sntolofttem $aupt oereljren. 

(Srfter ©efefl 

2Bir 'tten £mt bereljren ! 

feat man je oemommen bon bergleicfyen ? 



272 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

<5 to e ite 5 ctm 

(From Act III, Scene 3.) 

%x i e jj Ij a r b t unb £ e u t b, 1 b treten bor, cmdjten bie ©tangc unb fatten mit spifen 
in £anben ju beiben ©eiten 2Bad)t. 

fjfriefjljarbt 

2Bir paffen auf 4 umf onft. (£3 tuill fid) niemanb 
§eran 6egeben unb bem §ut fetn T Dfaoeren^ 
(Srgeigen. 7 3 mar bocf) fonft tote Satjrmarft t)ter; 
Sefct ift ber gauge dinger raie oerobet, 
©eitbem ber ^opang auf ber ©tange fyangt. 

|)ore, ©efeH, eg fdugt mir au gu beud)ten,s 
SBtr ftefyen filer am granger Dor bem §ut ; 
7 3 ift bod) eiu ©ctjimpf fire eiuen 9teiter3mann, 
©djtlbtoadj' §u ftefju Oor eiuem leeren $Q\\t, 
Unb jeber rectjte ®er( mufc m% oeractjten. 
3)ie 9toeren£ gu mad)en eiuem $ut, 
@3 ift bod), traun, eiu narrifcfjer 23efe()L 



SBarum nicfjt eiuem (eeren, fjorjlen §ut ? 

©ftcffi bu bid) bod) Oor mancrjem rjofyleu (Sd^abel. 

£ i t b e g a r b, 9ft e dj t Ij 1 1 b unb © I § b e t § treten auf mit Jtinbern unb ftetten fid) 
um bie ©tange. 

Seut^oib 

9ftag, mer ba mid, am .Jput t»oru6erge£m, 
3d) briid' bie 5lugen §u unb fe§' nid)t t)in. 

9Jled)tf)Ub 

£)a rjangt ber Sanboogt ; rjabt Sfefpeft, tfjr $8u6en ! 

(£I36etf) 

2SoIIt'3 @ott, er ging ? unb liefj' un3 feinen §ut ! 
(£<§ follte brum ntcf)t fd)(ed)ter ftetjn um£ Sanb. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 273 

^rieParfct, berjcfjeudjt fie 

SSolIt tf)r com pa& ! 6 SBertounfdjteS SBott ber 2Seiber! 
2Ber fragt natf) eudj ? ©djtcft cure Scanner fjer, 
SSenn fie ber SDhit ftid)t, 7 bem 23efet)l §u trotjen. 

SBeiber gefjen. 

Sett mit ber 2(rmbruft trttt auf, ben Jtnaben an ber §>anb fiiEjrenb ; fie gefyen an bem 
£ut borbei gegen bie borbere ©jene, o§ne barauf ju adjten. 

SBaltljer, jetgt nad) bem SSatmberg 

$ater, iff 3 toafyr, ba£ auf bem Serge bort 
£)te Sciume bfuten, menu man eirten 6treitf) 
Srauf f iifjrte s mit ber 5ljt? 

Sett 

SBer fagt ba3, Slnabe ? 

233attf>er 
£>er SDZetfter |)irt erjd^lt'g. 2)ie SBaume feten 9 
©ebannt, fagt er r unb toer fie fdjabige, 
§)em matf)fe fetne £>anb f)erau3 ^um ($rabe. 

£efl 

£)ie Saume finb gebannt, ba<§ ift bie 2Baf)rf)eit 

SBattijer 

(St, SBater, fie!) ben §ut bort auf ber ©tange. 

$3a3 fiimmert un§ ber jgut ? ^omm', lafj un3 gefyen. 

^nbem er abgefyen toitf, tritt tljm. ^rie^arbt mit borge^altener ^?ife entgegen. 

3n beS taiferS Stamen ! $aftet an I0 unb fte^t. 

£efl, greift in bie ^pife 

2Ba3 mollt t^)r ? SBarum pallet it)r mid) auf ? " 

$rtep arbt 

St)r f)a&t'§ 9Jcanbat eeriest ; tfjr mfi&t un£ folgen. 



274 NE W GERMAN COURSE 

2eutf)ott> 
3§r fyaht bem $ut ntcfjt 9?et>eren§ berotefen. 

greunb, lajg mttf) gefyen. 

$rieParbt 

gort, fort in3 ©efdngniS ! 

£)en $ater in3 @efdngm3 ! |)iife ! §i(fe ! 3" b« ©&ene rufmb. 
.Jperbei, ifyr banner, gute &eute, fjelft ! 
©etoalt ! (&ttvalt ! ©ie fii^ren tf)tt gefangen. 

9fl o H e t m a n n / *> er starrer, unb ^etermann, ber ©igrift, fommen fyerbei, 
mit bret anbern Sttannern. 

Stgrtft 

SSag giebt'3 ? 

OfJoffetmamt 
2Ba3 I2 legft bu §anb an biefen 9D?ann ? 

$rtefjf)arbt 

(£r ift em getnb be3 Staifer3, em $errdter. 

£ett, fafet i^n $eftig 

©in $errdter, id) ? 

Stoffelmamt 

£)u trrft bid), greunb. £)a3 ift 
£)er $eE, ein (Srjrenmann unb guter 33iirger. 

238attljer, erbticft SBattfyet giirften unb eilt ttym entgegen 

($ro§Oater, fu'lf ! ©eroalt gefdjtefjt bem $ater. 13 

^ricParbt 

3n3 ($efdngni3, fort ! 

2Baftf)er $iirft, Ijerbeteitenb 

3dj Icifte ^urgfcrjaft, Ijattet 
Urn ®otte3 roiften, %ett, roa£ ift gefrf)ef)en ? 

3ttelc§t!jat unb ©t auf f adj er fommen. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 275 

S)e3 £anbbogt§ okrfjerrltdje ©etualt 
$erad)tet er unb mill fie rttdjt erfemten. 

©tauffatfjer 

S)a3 t)atf berXell getan? 

9Md)ttjal 

S)a3 Mgftbu, $ube! 

Seutfjolb 

@r f)at bem .gut nicf)t 9?et)eren^ bemiefen. 

SBattljer prft 

Unb barum foil er in<§ ®efangni3 ? greunb, 
Dftmm meine $urgfrf)aft art I4 unb latj ilm lebtg. 

$rteparbt 
$urg' bu fur btcf> unb beinen etgnen £eib. 
SKtr tun, ma3 unfer3 2(mte3. 15 gort mtt ifjm! 

2Jlettf)tr)af, ju ben Sanbteuten 

Dtein, ba§ ift fd)reienbe ©etoatt. (Srtragen rotV3, 
3)aJ3 man ttjn fortfiif)rt, fred), Dor unfern 5lugen ? 

Sigrift 

2Btr ftnb bie ©tdrlern. greunbe, bulbef 3 nid)t 
2Bir tjaben etnen Wx&zn an ben anbern. 16 

f^riePatrbt 
SSer toibcrfc^t fid) bem Sefeljl be3 $ogt<§ ? 

Stfodj bret Sattbleute, f>erbeiettenb 

SBtr fjetfen end). %$a§> gibt'3 ? <3d)(agt fie §u $oben. 

^ilbegarb, 2ft e dj 1 1) 1 1 b unb @ t § B e t Ij fommen juriitf . 

Sdj fjelfe mir fdjon fetbft @ef)t, gute Seute. 
fD^eint tfjr, menu id) bie ®raft ge6raud)en taollte, 
3d) miirbe mid) oor tfjren ©ptefcen furdjten ? x * 



276 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

SReldjtljal, ju ftrtef^arbt 

SSag^, tfyn au£ unfrer SOfttte toegjufiiCjren ! 

SBaltfjer prft unb Stauffarfjer 
@elaffen ! ffiufjtg ! 

gfrteparbt, jrfjreit 

5(ufruE)r unb (Smporung ! 

2ftan prt ^agbtjorner. 

SBei&er 

$)a fommt ber Sanbbogt. 

^ricParbt, erfjebt bie ©timme 

Dfteuteret ! (Smporung ! 

©tauffadjer 

(ScrjreF, bi§ bu berfteft, <5crjurfe ! 

9Joffefotamt unb 9Jleld)tl)at 

SEBiUft bu fcfjtoetgen ? 

ftfriefjljarbt, ruft nod) tauter 

Qvl |nlf , §u |nlf ben SDtenern be3 ©efefce3 ! 

SBaftfjer prft 

2)a ift ber SBogt. 2Bef) un§, tt)a<S nrirb ba§ toerben ? 

©e^ter, Stubolf ber |>arra§, 23ert a unb Hubert $ treten em. 

JKuboff ber §atta§ 

spiafc, ^la§ bem Sanbtiogt ! 

(Seller 

£reibt fie au^einanber. 
9Sa3 lauft ba§> SBolf gufammen ? 23er ruft £tlfe ? 

Stttgemeine ©titte. 

2Ber toar'3 ? 3d) mill e3 totffen ; &u ftnc^arbt, 

£)u tritt t)or. 
2Ber btft bu, unb tva$ pftft bu biefen SKatm? 



READING AND CONVERSATION 277 

$rieparbt 

©eftrenger §err, id) bin bein SBaffenfnecijt 
Unb moipeftellter SSa^ter bet bem §ut. 
2)iefen StD?amt ergriff id) iiber frifcfjer £at, 
2Bie er bem Qui ben (£t)rengru§ berfagte. 
SBerfjaften raoHt' tc£) if)n, rate bu befafylft, 
Unb mit @emalt mill iljn ba^ S5olf entreiften. 

($e$(er, nad) eine 5paufe 

SBeradjteft bu f o betnen ®aifer, Sett, 

Unb midj, ber f)ier an feiner OBtatt gebietet? 

$er§eif)t mtr, Ueber §err. %u$ Unbebad)t, 
%l\fyt au3 $erad)tung enrer tft 7 3 gefcrjefyn* 

(SJc^ier, nadj einigem ©ttttfdjtoetgen 

£)u bift em SD^eifter auf ber fcnbruft, XeE ; 
9ftan f agt, bu ndjmft e£ auf l8 mtt jebem ©crjii|en ? 

2Baltt)er Sett 

Unb ba$ muft toatyr fetn, §err ; 'nen 5tyfet fdjiefjt 
£)er $ater bir bom $aum auf rjunbert ©cfyrttte. 

(Scaler 

3ft ba3 bein ®nabe,£etl? 

Sett 



3a, tteber §err. 



®e$er 

§aft bu ber SHnber mefjr ? 

Sett 



Qroet Slnaben, £err. 



©efcler 

Unb metd)er iff 3, ben bu am meiften liebft? 



2/8 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

£err, beibe finb fie mir gletd) liebe $inber. 

©efeler 

yixm, Sell, toeit bu ben 2fyfel triffft bom SBaume 
2Iuf fjunbert ©dfyrttte, fo roirft bu beine ®unft 
$or mtr betoaljren miiffen. Sftrnm bie 5Irmbruft, — 
$)u fjaft fie gleid) ^ur $cmb, — unb mad} 7 bid) fertig, 
(£inen Vtyfel tjon be£ ®naben $opf gu fdjtejsen. 

Sttte geben «3eid)en be§ ©tfjredenS. 

sea 

§err, toeId)e3 llngeljeure finnet Ujr 

Sflir an ? ^ 3d) foil 00m §aupte meine£ ®inbe3 — 

(Better 

$)u ttrirft ben 5fyfel frf)ief$en toon bem ®opf 
2)e3 ®naben ; id) begeljr^ unb hull's. 

3^foH 
Sttit metner 2Irmbruft auf ba$ liebe ^au^t 
2)e£ etgnen ®inbe£ §te(en ? (Sfyer fterb' icf). 

(Seller 

2)u fdjte^eft, ober fttrbft mit beinem Sfrtaben. 

£efl 

3d) foil ber Sftorber toerben meine£ $inb£ ? 
§err, t^r tjabt feme SHnber, toiffet ntdjt, 
2Ba3 fid) betoegt in eine3 35ater^ §er^en. 

8d^er§t nic6)t, §err, mit biefen armen Seuten. 
3I)r fef)t fie bleid) unb §itternb ftelm; fo raenig 
(Sinb fie tur§toeil3 geraoljnt au3 eurem 9ftunbe. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 279 

®ef?ler 

2Ber fagt eud), baJ3 id) fdjerge ? 

§ter tft ber SIpfeL 
Sftan madje ^Return ; er nef)tne feme SSeite. 
3e§t, ®cf)iil3e, trtff unb fet)'£e nid)t ba3 3tel 

©tauffadjer 
|>err £anbuogt, ritfjrt end) ntdjt be<3 $inbe£ Urtfdjulb ? 

Jftoffefatamt 
£) benfet, ba$ em ©ott im §tmme( tft, 
2)em tfyr miijst 9iebe ftetjtt fur eure £aten. 

®C^(cr r jeigt auf ben ftnaben 

90?an binb 1 ifjn an bte Stnbe bort. 

SBaftljet Sell 

9fttd) birtben ? 
9?em, id6> tutll rttc£)t gebunben fein. 3d) totH 
©till fjalten, lute em £amm, unb and) ntdjt atmen. 

9hibotf ber |)arra§ firlJTt ben £naben an ben 23cmm. 
9htbolf ber $arra3 
3)te 5lugen nur lag btr uerbmben, Sfrtabe. 

SBaWjer Sell 
SSarunt bte 5lugen ? benfet tf)r, id) fiirdjte 
2)en pet( uon $ater3 §anb ? 

£efl, jum. Sanbbogt 

(Srlaffet nttr bm (Stfjufj. |ner tft mem §er$. 

©r reifct bte 23ruft auf. 

Sftuft enre SReiftgen unb ftofjt mid) nteber. 

®ej?Ier 
3d) tutE bein £eben ntdjt, idj nnK ben <3djuf$. 

£eff ftefyt in fur^tertidjem jtampf, mit ben -Spanben jutfenb unb bte rottenben Stugen balb auf 
ben Sanbbogt, balb $um £nmmel geridjtet. ^totjtid) greift er in fetnen £od)er, ntntmt etnen 
jfaeiten ^)feit b,erau§ unb ftecft ib,n in feinen ©otter. £>er Sanbbogt benterlte atte biefe 23e; 

roegungen. 



280 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

2®altljer £ett, untcv ber Shtbe 

3Sater f fdjiefj' bit. 3d) furdjt' mid) nid)t. 

£efl 

(£§ muf}. 

(Sr rafft fid) jufammen ltnb legt an. 

JKubeus 

ber bte ganje geit iiber in ber Ijeftigften ©bcmnung geftanben unb mit @ett>alt an fid) 
gefyaften, tritt Ijerbor 

§err £anbt)ogt, meiter raerbet tfyr'S rttdjt trei6en ; 
Sf)r roerbet n i cl) t. (53 mar nur eine ^ritfung. 

31)r fdjroeigt, 6i3 man eudj aufruft. 

dub ens 

3d) mill reben. 
3d) barf 3. S)e3 ®onig3 (£t)re ift mir l)eilig; 
$)odj folc£)es3 Diegiment mufj $ a 6 ermerben. 
2)a3 ift be3 ®onig3 SBWe ntdjt, id) barf 8 
2kl)aupten. ©oldje ©raufamfett berbient 
90?ein $olf ntdjt ; ba^u t)a6t iljr feine $ollmad)t. 

GJefeJer 

§a, trjr errutjnt end) ! 

Jftubens 

3d) §ab r frill gefdjmiegen 
Qu alien fc^meren £aten, bie id) fat) ; 
Sftetn ferjenb 21uge t)ab ? tcf) gugefcrjloffen ; 
SD^ein itberjdjroellenb nnb emporte3 §er^ 
Igab' id) tjinabgebrttdt in meinen $ufen ; 
2)od) langer fdjroeigen mar' $errat gugleidj 
$tn meinem SSaterlanb unb an bent ®aifer. 



icr 
^erroegner, btefe ©pradje beinem §errn ? 



READING AND CONVERSATION 28 1 

Rubens 

2)er ®aifer tft litem «£>err, nidjt tf)r. — gret bin itf) 
2Sie if)r geboren, ititb id) meffe mid) 
Wit eud) in jeber ritterlidjett SDigenb. 

3d) f)ab' em ©djroert, 
Unb loer mir nal)t — 

©taitffadjer, ruft 

Ser Stpfel tft gefatlen. 

^nbem fid) atte nad) biefer ©ette getnenbet unb 35erta ^nrijdjen ;ftubeu$ unb ben Sanboogt fid) 
getrjorfen, 6at £ett ben ^feU abgebrMt. 

^ijffefmamt 

£)er $nabe lebt. 

SBtelc ©ttmmctt 

£)er 2fyfe( ift getroffen. 

SSalt&et ftiirft fdjroanft unb brofit ju finfen, 23erta ^att il)tt. 
($e§ler f erftauut 

@r t)at gefc^offen ? 3Bte? 2)er$afenbe! 

SSerta 

£)er Sfrtabe lebt. ^ommt -m euc^, guter better. 

233oIt^er £etf, fommt mtt bent %p\d gefprungen 

$ater fjter tft ber 5tpfel.* 

XeH f Ijijre. 

2Ba3 befell ify, £err ? 

2)uftecfteft 
$lo§ eirten gmeiten $fetl gu btr. — Sa, ja, 
3d) fat) eg mofjl. 2Sa3 meinteft bu bamtt ? 



* The boy with the apple on his head may step behind a screen just before Tell shoots. 
Then he may pick up another apple with an arrow stuck through it, that has been placed on 
the floor near him. This he brings to Tell. 



282 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Sell, berlegen 

^)err f ba$ ift ctlfo braucpd) bet ben ©cfjiitjen. 

®efeler 

9?ein f %di, bie Hnttoort lafc' id) bir nid)t gelten ; 2I 
(S3 totrb toa3 2lnber£ 22 tt>of)l bebeutet fyaben. 
©ag' mtr bte 2Saf)r()ett frtftf) unb fro()(id), %ett ; 
2Ba3 e^ aud) fet, bent Seben fid)r 7 id) bir. 
2Bo§u ber groeite ^JSfetl ? 

Sell 

2M)(an ! o §err, 
3Sei( tfyr mid) meineg £eben3 fyaht geftcrjert, 
©o tt)tH id) end) bie SBaljrljett fagen. 

©r §ief)t ben Spfeit au§ bem ©otter unb fteljt ben Sanbbogt mtt einem furdjtbaren 

23Ucf an. 

Wit biefem §raeiten S|3fetl burcfjfdjofe id) — en d), 
SBemt id) metn liebeg $mb getroffen fjcttte, 
Unb eurer f raarjrlid), f)dtt 7 id) trirfjt gefet)(t. 

2Bof)t, Sell. 2)eS SebenS f)ab 7 id) bid) gefidjert; 

3d) gab metn ^Ritterroort, ba$ mitt id) fyalten. 

$)odj met! id) beinen bofen ©inn erfannt, 

Witt id) btcfj fufjren (affen 23 unb Oerroarjren, 

2So roeber SOconb nod) Sonne bid) befd)eint, 

3)amit id) ftdjer fet oor beinen ^Sfetten. 

©rgreift ifjn, ^rtectjte. SBinbet tf)tt. £ea »irb ge&unben. 

<3tauffadjer 

O nun ift atteS, alle3 f)in. 2 4 SDftt euc^ 
(Sinb rair gefeffelt aEe unb gebunben. 

Scut^otb, nafjert fid) 

%ttt, eg erbarntt mid) 2 * ; bod) id) muf$ get)ord)en. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 283 

£ebt toofji ! 

2$altl)er £efl 

fid) mit fjeftigent Sdjmerj an ifjn fdjmiegenb 

D better ! SBatcr ! fieber SSater ! 

Sett f ^ebt bie Slxme 511m £immet 

3)ort broben ift bettt better. 3>en ruf an. 

Stauffadjer 

XeH, jag' id) eurem SSetbe nidjts Hon end) ? 

fjebt ben £naben mit gnbtunfl an feine SBruft 

2)er $ncuV ift wrt)erte|t; mtr rotrb ©ott fjelfett. 

tfteifst fid) fdjnetf loss unb folgt ben 'Saffenfnedjten. 



Dritt e Scene 

From Act IV, Scene 3 
Strmgarb (eine arme #xau) nnb lelt (oerftedt) marten auf @ef?ter. 
©eftler unb 9?ubolf ber £mrra§ tretert em im ©ejpradj 

®e^ler 

3d) f)a6 ? ben «5nt nttfjt aufgefterft gn 9'tftorf 
£e3 Sdjerge3 tnegen, ober nm bte |)er§en 
2>e3 $o(f£ §u pritfen ; bteje fenn' id) langft. 

Ohtbolf ber £arra3 
£>a3 QMf Ijat aber bod) gettiffe D^ec^te. 

©efjler 
§)te ab^moagen, ift je|t feme 3 e ^* 

<2ie tooCien corixber. fetgarb toirft fid) Dor bem Sanbbogt nieber. 

9(rmgarb 

95armf)ergtgfett! §err Sanboogt ©nabe! ©nabe! 



284 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

®efeter 

2£a3 brtngt i6)r end) auf off iter ©trafte mtr 
Sit 2Beg ? Quritcf ! 

2trmgarb 

SD^etn 9Jtatttt Hegt im ©efangnte ; 
SDte armen SBaifen ftfjreht tract) S3rot. .Spabt DJattetb, 
©eftrcnger «<perr, tntt unferm grofeen (£(enb. 

JRubotf ber §arra§ 

2Ber feib i^r ? 2Ber tft euer SDtomt ? 

SIrmgarb 

©tit oritter 
SStlbtjeuer, guter §err f Oom s Jttgt6erge, 
2)er itberm 2(6grunb meg ba§ frete ©ra3 
9Ibmdf)et oon beit fcfjroffen gel|enrodnben, 
SBofn'n ba£ ^tet) ftcl) ntcr)t getraut §u ftetgen. 

ORubotf ber $arra3, jum Sanbbogt 

S3et ©ott ! em etenb unb erbarmttdj £e6en ! 
3dj bitt 7 end), gebt tfjn (o3, ben armen SJcantt. 

<3u bev grau. 

G&utf) foil 9^ect)t raerben. 3)rtnnen auf ber 2mrg 
9cennt enre SBitte ; r)ier tft md)t ber Drt. 

2lrmgarb 

S^etn, netn, itf) roetctje rttct)t oon btefetn $pia|, 
23i3 mtr ber S5ogt bm $cann guritcfgegeben. 

®e$ler 

SBetb, roollt tfyr mtr ®emalt antun ? §tnraeg ! 

9trmgarb f fid) auf ben tfnteen toerfenb 

(Seredjtigfett ! Sanbbogt. 2)u bift ber ^trfjter 
3m £anbe an be£ taiferS <Btatt nnb ©otteS. 
£u 7 beine Spfltdjt. ©0 bn ©eredjtigfetr 
$om §tmme( fyoffeft, fo er^etg' fie un£. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 285 

®ej?Ier 
gort ! ©djafft ba$ fred^e SSolf mtr any ben 2lngen. 

gin fpfcil burcfcbohrt ihn;* er fabrt mtt ber ipanb an§ £erg unb wttt finren. 9fttt 
matter Stimmme 

©ott jet mtr gnabtg ! 

Ofubolf ber £arra3 
#err Sanbbogt ! ©ott ! 2Ba3 tft bag ? SSoijer tarn ba$ ? 

9(rmgarb, auffabratb 

SJtorb ! 3tforb ! (gr tanmelt, ftnft. @r ifi getroffen. 
Smitten tn§ §erj tjat tfjn ber $fet( getroffen. 

Oiubolf ber £arra3 

SSelct) gra&ltdjeS (SreigniS ! ®ott ! §err fitter, 
Dtnft bte (Srbarmung ©otte3 an ; ttjr fetb 
@tn 9ft arm be3 Zobtz. 

©efcler 

£a3 tft Sells ©efdjofj. 

Sett, crid^ctnt plo^ltd) 

£)n lennft ben ©etjugen, fudje fetnen anbern. 
gret ftnb bte ^jfitten ; ftcrjer tft bte Unfcrjulb 

$or btr ; bu tutrft bent £anbe nicrjt merjr fcfjaben. m.) 

1 

1 What does the drumming mean ? 2 it will be raised. 3 The same honor will be paid 
to it as to himself. *See auT / paJien. S I am thinking (see on'fattgen). 6 Will you clear 
out ? 7 if they have the courage. s When any one strikes them with the ax. 9 See § 125, 4. 
10 See an'halten. "See auf'halten. I2 Why? J 3 They are doing harm to father. ^See 
an'ttebmen. is What our office requires. I6 We support each other, i? See fid) fiirdjten 
bor, p. 241, last stanza. I8 You are equal to. J 9 See art'l'mnen. 20 You will not carry it 
further. 2 * I cannot accept this answer. 22 Something else. 2 3 See tajjert, § 150. 24 All is 
lost. 25. I am sorry for you, see § 159. 



*Tell may here approach so near as to shoot without danger of doing any harm. 
Gessler should fall and be immediately surrounded by his suite. 



286 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 




READING AND CONVERSATION 



287 



56. Das Deutsche Reich. 

Das deutsche Reich wurde im Jahre 1871 gleich nach dem 
Deutsch-Franzosischen Kriege gegriindet. 

Das Reich besteht aus 26 Staaten mit einer Gesamt-Bevolke- 
rung von 60,000,000 Seelen. 

Die wichtigsten dieser Staaten sind : 

PreuBen mit einer Bevolkerung von 

Bayern . 

Sachsen 



Wiirtemberg . 
Baden . 

ElsaB-Lothringen 
Hessen . 
Hamburg 



35,000,000 Seelen 
6,000,000 
4,500,000 
2,000,000 
2,000,000 
2,000,000 
1,000,000 
800,000 



Die Haupt-Autoritat in politischer und militarischer Hinsicht 
ist der Konig von PreuBen. Er ist das Haupt des Bundes und 
tragt daher den Titel " Deutscher Kaiser." 

Die gesetzgebenden Korperschaften sind der Bundesrat und 
der Reichstag. 

Der Bundesrat, welcher aus 59 Mitgliedern besteht, vertritt 
die Regierungen der einzelnen Staaten des Reiches. 

Der Reichstag besteht aus 397 Mitgliedern, welche fur drei 
Jahre durch allgemeines direktes Wahlrecht erwahlt werden. 

Der jetzige Kaiser, Wilhelm der Zweite, ist ein Mann von 
edlem Charakter und groBer Energie. Er interessiert sich fur 
alles, was das Wohlsein seines iVolkes betrifft und iibt einen 
groBen EinfluB auf die Politik seiner Zeit aus. 

Das stehende Heer des Reiches besteht aus 500,000 Mann, 
welche Zahl im Kriegsfalle auf 3,000,000 erhoht werden kann. 
Es wird als das starkste auf dem Kontinent betrachtet. 

Deutschland verdankt seine hervorragende Stellung als eine 
Weltmacht drei Mannern, namlich : Kaiser Wilhelm dem Ersten, 
dem Reichskanzler und Staatsmann, Fiirsten von Bismarck, und 
dem Heerfuhrer in zwei groBen Kriegen, Graf en von Moltke. 



288 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Die wichtigsten Stadte Deutschlands sind : 

Berlin, die Hauptstadt des Konigreichs PreuBen und des 
deutschen Reiches, eine der grofiten und schonsten Stadte der 
Welt. 

Hamburg an der Elbe, von dessen Hafen (Cuxhaven) die 
Schiffe der Hamburg-Amerika Linie auslaufen. 

Bremen an der Weser, wo sich die Haupt-Agentur des Nord- 
deutschen Lloyd befindet. Die Schiffe dieser Linie fahren von 
Bremerhaven ab. 

Breslau an der Oder, die Hauptstadt von Schlesien, die dritt- 
groBte Stadt Deutschlands. (Nur Berlin und Hamburg sind 
grower.) 

Dresden, die Hauptstadt von Sachsen, mit weltberuhmten 
Gemaldegallerien. 

Miinchen, die Hauptstadt von Bayern, auch ein Mittelpunkt 
der Kunst. 

Frankfurt am Main, der Geburtsort Goethes und einer der 
groftten Geldmarkte der Welt. 

Koln am Rein, mit dem beriihmten gotischen Dom. 

Hannover, die Hauptstadt des vormaligen Konigreichs glei- 
chen Nam ens, woher die jetzige konigliche Familie von England 
stammt. 

Leipzig, beruhmt durch seine zahlreichen Druckereien und 
Verlagsbuchhandlungen und sein Musik-Konservatorium. 

Strassburg, seit 1871 wieder eine deutsche Stadt, in dessen 
Minister sich eine wundervolle astronomische Uhr befindet. 

Danzig an der Weichsel (Vistula), unweit ihrer Miindung in 
die Ostsee, eine bedeutende Seehafen- und Fabrikstadt. 

Der Schulbesuch ist in Deutschland gesetzlich erfordert, daher 
allgemein. Es gibt Privatschulen, Volksschulen, Realschulen, 
Realgymnasien, Gymnasien und Universitaten. Die Kindergar- 
ten hatten ihren Ursprung in Deutschland. 

Es sind in Deutschland 21 Universitaten, von welchen die 
bekanntesten diejenigen von Berlin, Jena, Bonn, Heidelberg, 







READING AND CONVERSATION ,289 

Halle, Leipzig und Munchen sind. Die alteste Universitat ist 
Heidelberg und die neueste StraBburg. Jena ist am starksten 
von Auslandern besucht. 

Die bekanntesten Namen in der deutschen Literatur sind: 

Lessing, Verfasser von " Minna von Barnhelm," "Emilia Ga- 
lotti," und " Nathan der Weise." 

Goethe, Verfasser von ''Faust," " Egmont," " Iphigenie auf 
Tauris," und "Hermann und Dorothea." 

Schiller, Verfasser von " Das Lied von der Glocke," " Wallen- 
stein," "Maria Stuart," "Jungfrau von Orleans" und " Wilhelm 
Tell." 

Heine, einer der besten lyrischen Dichter, Verfasser von "Die 
Lorelei," "Du bist wie eine Blume" und vielen anderen Gedichten. 

Die bekanntesten Roman- und Novellenschreiber der moder- 
nen Zeit sind Gustav Freytag, Georg Ebers, Friedrich Spielhagen 
und Paul Heyse. E. F. B. 

57. Eine Reise durch Deutschland. * 

Herr Meister in seiner Wohnung. Herr Parks tritt ein. 

Herr Meister. Guten Tag, Herr Parks. Seien Sie mir herz- 
lich willkommen 1 ! Treten Sie nur ein ! Setzen Sie sich ! Ich 
habe Sie lange nicht gesehen. Wo hatten Sie sich denn ver- 
steckt ? 

Herr Parks. Haben Sie nicht gehort, da.B ich vor einiger 
Zeit 2 nach Deutschland ging ? \ 

Herr M. Kein Wort davon habe ich gehort. Also, Sie haben 
mein deutsches Vaterland besucht. 

Herr P. Ja, das habe ich getan. 

Herr M. Und wie hat es Ihnen dort gef alien ? 3 

Herr P. Ganz gut. Sie wissen, da£ ich immer die Absicht 
hatte, dorthin zu gehen, und am Ende bot sich mir eine gute 
Gelegenheit, meinen Wunsch in Erfullung zu bringen. 

Herr M. Und wie ist das alles gekommen ? 



290 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Herr P. Ich ging als Fiihrer einer kleinen Gesellschaft von 
vier jungen Mannern, die eben aus der Schule entlassen waren 
und sich zu ihrer weiteren Ausbildung ein wenig die Welt an- 
sehen wollten. 

Herr M. Das war wirklich eine gute Gelegenheit. Also statt 
Geld auszugeben haben Sie Geld verdient. 

Herr P. Nein, das nicht ; es war nur ein gegenseitiger Dienst.* 
Die Herren, die ich fiihrte, bezahlten die ganzen Unkosten. 

Herr M. Nun, das muB eine prachtvolle Reise gewesen sein. 
Mit welchem Dampfschiffe sind Sie denn gefahren ? 

Herr P. Mit dem Dampfer „Deutschland." 

Herr M. Das ist der groftte Dampfer der Hamburg-Amerika 
Linie ; und wie lange waren Sie auf der Reise ? 

Herr P. Von New York bis nach Hamburg etwas iiber 
sieben Tage. 

Herr M. Wie hoch kam Ihnen die Seereise ? s 

Herr P. Dreihundertfunfundsiebzig Mark (M. 375), d. h., 
ungefahr neunzig Dollars in der ersten Kajiite. 

Herr M. Also Sie landeten in Hamburg ; und was haben 
Sie dort gesehen ? 

Herr P. Nicht sehr viel. Wir blieben nur zwei Tage, und 
das ist wenig Zeit fur eine so grofie Stadt. 

Herr M. Wie groB ist Hamburg ? 

Herr P. Es hat beinahe 700,000 Einwohner. Es ist der 
bedeutendste Seehafen Deutschlands. 

Herr M. Aber Hamburg liegt nicht gerade an der See. 

Herr P. Nein, es liegt an der Elbe, nicht weit von der Miin- 
dung. Wir landeten in Cuxhaven und fuhren dann mit der 
Eisenbahn nach der Stadt. 

Herr M. Kehrten Sie in einem Hotel ein ? 

Herr P. Nein, wir gingen in eine Pension, welche uns em- 
pfohlen war, denn als Amerikaner wollten wir so viel als moglich 
deutsch sprechen und die hauslichen Sitten des Landes be- 
obachten. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 29 1 

Herr M. Da hatten Sie recht. In einem fremden Lande 
sollte man, wenn mbglich, in einer Familie leben. Da hort man 
die Sprache des Landes viel mehr als in einem Hotel. 

Herr P. Wir kamen gegen Abend an und gingen bald mit 
einem Fiihrer aus, um die Stadt zu besehen. Zuerst gingen wir 
zu einem Vergniigungsort, welcher ,,die Binnen-Alster" heiBt. 
Da hatten wir eine schone Gelegenheit, den deutschen Volks- 
charakter zu beobachten, denn es ist der belebteste und belieb- 
teste Vergniigungsort der Stadt. 

Herr M. Ja, ich kenne den Ort. Die Binnen-Alster ist ein 
Bassin, von prachtvollen Hotels und Villen umgeben. 

Herr P. Auf dem Wasser fuhren viele kleine Boote. 

Herr M. Sie horten auch gute Musik, nicht wahr ? 

Herr P. Ja, natiirlich ; denn die Deutschen haben eine grofte 
Vorliebe fiir Musik. 

Herr M. Und wie amiisierten Sie sich sonst noch 6 in Ham- 
burg ? 

Herr P. Am andern Tage besuchten wir die Webersche 
Bilder-Gallerie, die Borse und am Abend das Stadt-Theater, wo 
wir dem Schauspiel „Wilhelm Tell" beiwohnten. Es wurde 
prachtvoll gespielt. 

Herr M. Wieviel bezahlten Sie fiir das Billet ? 

Herr P. Nur drei Mark die Person fiir einen guten Platz. 

Herr M. Wurden Sie schnell mit dem deutschen Gelde ver- 
traut ? 

Herr P . Es hat uns wenig Miihe gemacht, denn man hat 
dort das Decimal-System wie bei uns ; hundert Pfennig machen 
eine Mark, und die verschiedenen Miinzen sind leicht zu lernen. 
Eine Mark ist ungefahr 24 Cents oder ein englischer Schilling. 

Herr M. Was fiir Strafienbahnen hat man heutzutage in 
Hamburg ? 

Herr P. Die elektrische Bahn iiberall, und das Fahrgeld ist 
sehr mafiig, nur zehn Pfennig, ungefahr 2 J Cents unseres Geldes. 

Herr M. Alles ist in Deutschland billiger als hier, denn die 
Arbeitslohne sind niedriger. Was haben Sie sons^ gesehen > 



292 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Herr P. Das ist ziemlich alles, was wir in Hamburg gesehen 
haben, doch war mir ein Spaziergang, den wir am zweiten Tage 
machten, sehr interessant. In einem fremden Lande ist es im- 
mer lehrreich, durch die Straiten zu gehen und die verschiedenen 
Sitten und Trachten zu beobachten. 

Herr M. Fanden Sie es leicht, mit den Deutschen zu ver- 
kehren ? 

Herr P. Es wurde uns nicht schwer, denn wir hatten uns 
in der Konversation zu Hause schon geiibt. Auf diesem Spazier- 
gang sprachen wir mit einigen Leuten, die wir trafen, nur urn 
die Aussprache zu horen. Man sagt, daft jeder Ort in Deutsch- 
land seinen Dialekt habe, aber wahrend dieser Reise fand icfr 
keinen grofien Untersehied. 

Herr M. Unter gebildeten Leuten ist die Aussprache iiberall 
ziemlich gleich, nur in den niederen Klassen findet man Dialekte, 
in der Tat oft unverstandliche Dialekte, plattdeutsch zum Bei- 
spiel. 

Herr P. Ja, ich denke, da$ einer, mit clem ich redete, platt- 
deutsch sprach, denn ich konnte ihn gar nicht verstehen. 

Herr M. Das mag wohl der Fall gevvesen sein, es war viel- 
leicht ein mecklenburger Bauer, der die Stadt besuchte. Nun 
wohin reisten Sie von Hamburg ? 

Herr P. Nach Berlin. Wir fuhren mit der Bahn in sieben 
Stunden hin. 

Herr M. Wie weit ist Berlin von Hamburg ? 

Herr P. 286 Kilometer oder 179 englische Meilen. 

Herr M. Sie sind nicht sehr schnell gefahren, nur etwas liber 
25 englische Meilen die Stunde. 

Herr P. Wir heilten sehr oft an, denn es war ein ,,Bummel- 
zug,"7 wir waren aber zufrieden ; denn beim Jangsamen Fahren 
kann man Land und Leute besser betrachten. Wir unterhielten 
uns audi mit den andern Reisenden. Die Wagen sind ganz 
anders gebaut als bei uns. In jedem Abteil sind zwei Banke 
einander gegeniiber wie in einem Omnibus. In Berlin trafen wir 
gute Freunde, welche alles Mogliche taten, um unseren Aufent- 



READING AND CONVERSATION 293 

halt in der deutschen Hauptstadt interessant und lehrreich zu 
machen. Sie besorgten uns eine Pension bei einer sehr liebens- 
wiirdigen Familie in der Mittelstrafie, wo nur deutsch gesprochen 
wurde. 

Herr M. Wie lange blieben Sie in Berlin ? 

Herr P. Gerade eine Woche. Wahrend dieser Zeit gingen 
wir alle Tage spazieren oder fuhren in einer Droschke durch die 
Stadt. 

Herr M. Sie hatten nicht sehr weit von ihrer Pension zu 
gehen, um alle Sehenswiirdigkeiten zu finden. 

Herr P. Das ist wahr, denn die interessantesten Gebaude, 
Museen, und Monumente sind alle beisammen in der beriihmten 
Strasse, welche „Unter den Linden" heifit. Da besuchten wir 
die Universitats-Gebaude, das Opernhaus, die konigliche Biblio- 
thek, das neue Museum, die National Gallerie, die Akademie der 
schonen Kiinste, das Zeughaus und die beiden koniglichen Pa- 
laste. In dem inneren Stadtteil befmden sich prachtvolle Wohn- 
hauser. 

Herr M. Waren Sie im Theater ? 

Herr P. Ja, im „ Deutschen-Theater" in der Schumann 
StraBe, wo wir Theresina GeBner in „ Hero und Leander " sahen. 

Herr M. Sind Sie auch im Koniglichen Opernhaus gewesen ? 

Herr P. Ja, natiirlich. Wir haben dort „Tannhauser" von 
Wagner gehort. Was mir hier am meisten auffiel, war die gro.Se 
Biihne, die fur mehrere hundert Personen Spielraum gewahrt. 
Es war die groBartigste Musik, die ich je gehort habe. • 

Herr M. Haben Sie den Kaiser gesehen ? 

Herr P. Ja, wir hatten das Gliick, gerade vor dem Schlofi zu 
stehen, als er herausgeritten kam, um seinen gewohnlichen 
Nachmittagsspazierritt zu machen. 

Herr M. Ritt er ganz allein ? 

Herr P. Nein, er war von zwei Adjutanten begleitet, mit 
denen er sich lebhaf t unterhielt ; ein Mann seiner Leibgarde 
folgte ihm mit der Konigs-Standarte ; so ritt er, von einer gro- 
Ben Menschenmenge begrii^t, nach dem Tiergarten. 



294 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Herr M. Sie haben sich also in Berlin gut unterhalten. 

Herr P. Oh ja, nur muBten wir leider viel zu friih fort, denn 
unsere Zeit war sehr beschrankt ; ich habe nur noch den kleinen 
Ausflug zu erwahnen, den wir nach Potsdam, der Sommerresi- 
denz der preulMschen Konige, machten. Wir besuchten hier das 
SchloB „Sans Solicit wo Friedrich der GroBe lebte und starb, 
und den schonen Park mit der herrlichen Terrasse. 

Herr M. Welchen Ort besuchten Sie danach? 

Herr P. Von Berlin gingen wir direkt nach Leipzig, denn 
einer unserer Gesellschaft wollte in das dortige Konservatorium 
eintreten. 

Herr M. Er tat wohl daran, denn der beste Musik-Unterricht 
wird dort erteilt. Haben Sie einem Konzert in Leipzig beige- 
wohnt ? 

Herr P. Ja, wir haben ein wunderschones Konzert im Ge- 
wandhaus gehort. 

Herr M. Was haben Sie sonst Interessantes in Leipzig ge- 
funden ? 

Herr P. Das Interessanteste fur mich war die Freundlichkeit 
der Leute. Wir fanden sie sehr liebenswiirdig und entgegen- 
kommend. 

Herr M. Dafiir sind die Sachsen wohlbekannt. 

Herr P. In jedem Lande besuche ich gerne die Schulen, 
und in Leipzig wurde mir eine gute Gelegenheit hierzu geboten. 
Ein Lehrer nahm einen Tag Urlaub und fiihrte uns durch 
mehrere offentliche Schulen, wo wir sehr freundlich empfangen 
wurden und die Unterrichtsmethoden mit groBem Interesse be- 
obachteten. 

Herr M. Es freut mich, da.6 Sie ein so freundliches Wort 
iiber Leipzig zu sagen haben, denn ich wohnte selbst wahrend 
einiger Zeit dort und machte dieselbe Erfahrung in Betreff der 
Gutmutigkeit des Volkes wie Sie. Nun, wo war Ihr nachster 
Aufenthalt ? 

Herr P. Von Leipzig fuhren wir iiber Frankfurt am Main 
nach Mainz, da wir die Rheinreise machen wollten. In Frank- 



READING AND CONVERSATION 295 

furt stiegen wir am Abend ab und blieben iiber Nacht, um das 
beriihmte Goethe-Haus zu besuchen. Die Reliquien aus dem 
Leben dieses grofien Dichters interessierten uns sehr, wie iiber- 
haupt die ganze Stadt Frankfurt. Wir waren gerne langer dort 
geblieben, aber wir muBten friih am andern Morgen fort. In 
Mainz nahmen wir gleich das Morgenboot nach Koln. 

Herr M. Ich bin sehr neugierig, Ihre Bemerkungen iiber den 
Rheinstrom zu horen. 

Herr P. Wir haben in kurzer Zeit so viel gesehen, dafi die 
Beschreibung sehr mangelhaft sein mu&. Unsere Erwartungen 
waren hoch gespannt, da wir so viel iiber die Schonheiten des 
Rheines, seine romantische Umgebung mit den malerischen 
Dorfern und den alten Burgen gehbrt hatten, und wir wurden 
nicht enttauscht, obgleich die Berge nicht so hoch sind, als wir 
erwartet hatten. 

Herr M. Sie sahen auch viele Weinberge, nicht wahr ? 

Herr P. Ja, die Gegend ist beriihmt wegen des Weines, und 
viele Weinberge sind so steil, dafS die Winzer fast senkrecht 
hinaufklettern miissen. Als wir an Bingen vorbeifuhren, dach- 
ten wir an das wohlbekannte Gedicht "Bingen on the Rhine" 
von Frau Norton, welches mit den Worten anfangt : 

" A soldier of the legion lay dying in Algiers." 

Auf einem hohen Felsen, Bingen gegeniiber, steht das Natio- 
nal-Denkmal, das Germania auf ihrer „ Wacht am Rhein " dar- 
stellt, und etwas weiter stromabwarts sahen wir den Mauseturm, 
bekannt durch das Gedicht von Southey; ''Bishop Hatto and 
the rats." 

Herr M. Diese Geschichte ist aber nicht wahr, denn der 
Turm wurde erst hundert Jahre nach dem Tode des Bischofs 
Hatto gebaut. 

Herr P. Zunachst kamen wir an die diistere, steile Felsen- 
wand, auf der die sagenhafte ,, Lorelei " sitzt und die Schiffer 
durch ihre Schonheit und ihren Gesang ins Verderben lockt. 
Dieser Felsen soil ein Echo fiinfzehnmal wiedergeben. Gegen- 
iiber der Universitats-Stadt Bonn liegt der beriihmte Drachen- 



296 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

fels oder das Siebengebirge, woriiber Byron so schon geschrieben 
hat.* Wir kamen am Abend in Kbln an, und besuchten dort den 
beriihmten Dom ; und damit endete unsere Tour durch Deutsch- 
land, denn wir muiken am andern Morgen den Zug nach Rot- 
terdam nehmen. Von dort fuhren wir mit dem Dampfschiff 
,, Staatendam " nach London, wo wir uns eine Woche aufhielten, 
und dann kehrten wir iiber Liverpool nach unserer Heimat 
zuriick. 

Herr M. Sie haben gut daran getan, diese Reise zu machen, 
denn die beste Art und Weise seine Ausbildung zu erganzen. 
ist fremde Lander zu besuchen, besonders wenn man fahig ist, 
die Sprache der Lander, in die man kommt, zu sprechen. E F B 

1 You are heartily welcome. 2 Some time ago. 3 How were you pleased there ? 4 A mu- 
tual service. s What did the sea voyage cost you ? 6 Otherwise. 7 A slow train that stops 
at all stations. 

58. Auf der Wohiiung-ssuche. 

Fremder (ins Haus eintretend). Entschuldigen Sie, haben Sie 
Zimmer zu vermieten ? 

Hausfrau. Jawohl, treten Sie gefalligst naher. 1 Was fur ein 
Zimmer wiinschen Sie ? 

Fremder. Ich wiinsche ein mobliertes Zimmer nebst Kammer. 

Hausfrau. Wir haben ein hiibsches Zimmer mit Kammer im 
zweiten Stock. Wollen Sie es sich ansehen ? 

Fremder. Ja, wenn es Ihnen angenehm ist. 

Hausfrau. Bitte sich gefalligst hinauf zu bemiihen 2 ; ich 
werde es Ihnen zeigen. 

Fremder. Das Zimmer gefallt mir. Was kostet es ? 

Hausfr-au. Ich lasse es Ihnen fiir fiinfzig Mark den Monat. 

Fremder. Ich finde den Preis nicht zu hoch ; ich werde das 
Zimmer mieten. Man bezahlt den Betrag voraus, nicht wahr ? 



* See Byron's vivid description of the Rhine scenery in Canto III of " Childe Harold," 
commencing : 

" The castled crag of Drachenfels 
Frowns o'er the wide and winding Rhine, 
Whose breast of waters broadly swells 
Between the banks which bear the vine." 



READING AND CONVERSATION 297 

Hausfrau. J a, es ist hier so gebrauchlich. 

Fremder. Gut, hier sind fiinfzig Mark. 

Hausfrau. Danke verbindlichst. 

Fremder. Mein Gepack ist auf dem Bahnhofe ; ich werde es 
gleich hoi en lassen. 3 

Hausfrau. Sehr wohl ; ich werde das Zimmer sogleich in 
Ordnung bringen. 

Fremder. Guten Morgen ; ich werde in einer Stunde zuriick 
sein. 

Hausfrau. Guten Morgen. 

1 please walk in. 2 please step upstairs. 3 see § 150. 



59. Im Gasthause. 

Fremder (ins Gasthaus eintretend und Platz an einem Tische nehmend). 

Kellner ! 

Kellner. Bitte sehr, womit kann ich dienen ? * 

Fremder. Ich bitte um die Speisekarte. 

Kellner (bringt dieselbe). Hier, mein Herr ! Was belieben Sie 
zu bestellen ? 2 

Fremder. Bringen Sie mir zunachst3 eine Gemiise-Suppe. 

Kellner (die Suppe bringend). Was ist auBerdem gefallig ?* 

Fremder. Ich bitte um eine Portion Kalbsbraten mit griinem 
Salat. 

Kellner. Bedauere sehr, mit Kalbsbraten kann ich leider 
nicht mehr auf warten.s 

Fremder. Dann bitte ich um ein Beefsteak mit Kartoffel salat. 

Kellner (das Verlangte bringend). Befehlen Sie sonst noch etwas, 6 
mein Herr ? 

Fremdei'. Ja, bringen Sie mir gefalligst einen Schokoladen- 
Pudding. — (Nach dem Essen.) Kellner, ich wunsche zu zahlen. 
Wieviel macht das zusammen ? 

Kellner (addierend). Zwei Mark fiinfundsiebzig, mein Herr. 

Fremder (gibt ihm das Geld und dazu ein Trinkgeld). 7 

Kellner. Danke verbindlichst. 8 



298 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Fremder. Adieu ! 

Kellner. Empfehle mich bestens ! 9 

1 How can I serve you ? 2 what are you pleased to order ? 3 first of all. * what more 
will you have ? 5 1 cannot serve you with roast veal. 6 do you order anything more ? 
7 " drink money," i. e., a " tip." 8 Thank you very much, 9 your most obedient (lit. I com- 
mend myself to you). 

60. Im Hutgeschafte. 

Herr N. (eintretend). Guten Tag ! 

Commis. Guten Tag, mein Herr. Womit kann ich Ihnen 
dienen ? 

Herr N. Ich mochte einen Hut kaufen. 1 
Commis. Was fur einen Hut wiinschen Sie ? 
Herr N. Ich wiinsche einen Filzhut. 

Commis (nachdem Herr N. mehrere Hiite aufprobiert hat). Dieser Hut 

paBt Ihnen vortrefnich. 2 

Herr N. J a, er gefallt mir. Was kostet er ? 

Commis, Er kostet zwolf Mark. 

Herr N. Bitte, senden Sie ihn nach meiner Wohnung. Hier 
ist meine Karte. 

Commis. Jawohl, ich werde es sogleich besorgen. 3 

Herr N. Hier sind zwanzig Mark ; konnen Sie mir acht 
Mark zuriickgeben ? 

Commis. Gewi^, mein Herr. (Uberreicht ihm das Geld.) 

Herr N. Danke sehr. 

Commis. Adieu, mein Herr ! Besuchen Sie uns wieder ! 4 

'See §149, 3. 2 fits you very well. 3 1 will attend to it immediately. * call again. 

61. Bei dem Schneider. 

Kunde (eintretend). Guten Tag ! 

Schneider. Guten Tag, mein Herr ! Womit kann ich Ihnen 
dienen ? 

Kunde. Ich mochte mir einen Anzug machen lassen. * 

Schneider. Ich stehe zu Ihren Diensten. 1 Was fur einen 
Anzug wiinschen Sie ? 

Kunde. Ich wiinsche einen Reiseanzug, moglichst warm, fur 
den Winter 



READING AND CONVERSATION 299 

Schneider. Welche Farbe ziehen Sie vor ? 2 

Kande. Ich ziehe etwas dunkles vor. Bitte mir mehrere 
Muster zur Auswahl vorzulegen. 3 

Schneider. GewiB, mit Vergniigen. Hier sind verschiedene 
dunkle Stoffe. Dieser dunkelblaue diirfte Ihnen vielleicht kon- 
venieren ; + er ist sehr gut und haltbar. 

Kunde. Der St off gefallt mir. Ich wiinsche Rock, Hose 
und Weste aus ein und demselben Stiicke ; — was wird von die- 
sem Stoffe der fertige Anzug s kosten ? 

Schneider. Ich kann Ihnen denselben fur 150 Mark herstellen. 

Kunde. Fur diesen Preis konnen Sie ohne Zweifel ein sehr 
gutes Futter, sowie gute Knopfe und Seide zu der Arbeit ver- 
wenden ? 

Schneider. Seien Sie aufter Sorge, mein Herr ; ich suche 
eine Ehre darin, nur das beste Material zu verarbeiten. Bis 
wann brauchen Sie den Anzug ? 

Kunde. Ich hatte ihn sehr gern 6 bis heute liber acht Tage. 

Schiieider. Gut, ich werde es moglich zu machen suchen, ihn 
bis dahin fertig zu stellen. ? 

Kunde. Wann darf ich zum Anprobieren kommen ? 

Schneider. Wenn es Ihnen angenehm ist, nachsten Sonn- 
abend Nachmittag. 

Kunde. Schon ; wollen Sie diese fiinfzig Mark einstweilen 
als Abschlagszahlung annehmen. Adieu ! 

Schneider. Danke verbindlichst, mein Herr. Empf ehle mich 
bestens. 8 

1 1 am at your service. 2 vorziehen, to prefer. 3 show me samples to choose from. 
4- may perhaps please you. s the complete suit. 6 1 should like to have it. 7 I will try to 
have it by that time. 8 I bespeak your favor. 

62. In cler Buchhandlung-. 

Kunde (eintretend). Guten Morgen, Herr Fischer ! 
Buchhdndler. Guten Morgen, Herr Meyer ! Was verschaff t 
mir die Ehre Ihres Besuches ? 1 

Kunde. Ich mochte 3 einige Biicher kauf en. 



300 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Buchhandler. Das ist sehr schon von Ihnen. 3 In welchem 
Genre 4 kann ich Ihnen dienen ? 

Kunde. Ich wiinsche zunachst den neuesten Supplementband 
zu Meyers Konversations-Lexikon. 

Buchhandler. Den habe ich leider nicht vorratig ; ich werde 
jedoch die Bestellung noch heute an meinen Kommissionar ab- 
gehen lassen,s sodafi der Band mit der nachsten Sendung hier 
eintrifft. 

Kunde. Schon ! Sodann brauche ich einige kleinere Schrif- 
ten, welche ich hier aufgeschrieben habe, von denen ich aber 
leider den Verleger nicht kenne. 

Buchhandler. Nun, das macht nichts ; wenn Sie mir den 
Namen des Autors angeben konnen, 6 so kann ich den Verleger 
leicht im Katalog auffinden. 

Kunde. Sie finden auf diesem Zettel Autor und alles ubrige 
genau angegeben. Tragen Sie jedoch, bitte, Sorge,? dafi ich von 
allem die neueste Auflage erhalte. 

Buchhandler. GewiB, das soil geschehen. 

Kunde. Ich werde nachste Woche die Sachen abholen las- 
sen. 8 Adieu ! 

Buchhandler. Sehr wohl, Herr Meyer. Empfehle mich 
Ihnen bestens. 

1 the honor of your visit. 2 See § 149, 3. 3 That is very kind of you. 4 in what manner, 
s See § 150. 6 if you can give me the name of the author. ? please take pains. 8 See § 150. 

63. Eine Einladung. 

Herr Braun (klopft an die Tur). 
Herr Miiller (im Zimmer.) Herein ! 
Herr B. (eintretend.) Guten Tag, Herr Miiller ! 
Herr M. Guten Tag, Herr Braun ! Wie geht's Ihnen ? 
Herr B. Ich danke, mir geht's gut, und Ihnen ? 
Herr M. Ich befinde mich leider nicht sehr wohl. 1 
Herr B. Das tut mir sehr leid ! 2 Was fehlt Ihnen ? 
Herr M. Ich habe heute heftiges Kopfweh, und gestern hatte 
ich Fieber. 



READING AND CONVERSATION 301 

Herr B. Ich wiirde an Ihrer Stelle einige Tage das Zimmer 
hiiten.3 

Herr M. Ja, ich werde heute zu Hause bleiben und zum Arzt 
schicken. 

Herr B. Daran thun Sie wohl, denn es ist sehr stiirmisch 
und naBkalt drauBen. 

Herr M. Wollen Sie nicht Ihren Uberrock ablegen und ein 
wenig Platz nehmen ? 

Herr B. Danke sehr, ich habe keine Zeit. Ich kam nur im 
Vorbeigehen,* urn Sie fur morgen zu einem gemiitlichen Gesell- 
schaftsabend, den ich in meinem Hause arrangiere, einzuladen. 

Herr M. Sehr schmeichelhaft ! Wenn sich mein kleines Ubel 
bis dahin gelegt hat,* werde ich nicht ermangeln, Ihrer freund- 
lichen Einladung mit Vergniigen Folge zu leisten. 6 

Herr B. Danke sehr. Also auf Wiedersehen ! 

Herr M. Auf Wiedersehen ! 

* 1 am not very well. 2 1 am sorry. 3 remain at home. 4. in passing, s if I am well by 
that time. 6 to comply with. 

64. Ein Freimdschaftsdienst. 

Herr Herrmann. Gehen Sie heute in die Stadt, Herr Rein- 
haus ? 

Herr Reinhaus. Ja, ich habe versprochen, mich um zwolf 
Uhr bei meinem Bruder einzufinden. 1 

Fahren sie mit der Bahn ? 2 

Ja, mit dem Zehn-Uhr-Zuge. 

Darf ich Sie mit einem kleinen Auftrage belasti- 

Bitte, ich stehe zu Ihrer Verfiigung. 4 
Ich wiirde Sie ersuchen diesen Brief Maximilian- 
straBe 20 abzugeben. 

Herr R. GewiB, das werde ich gern tun. Auf Wiedersehen ! 
Herr H. Auf Wiedersehen ! 

1 1 have promised to be at my brother's at noon. 2 by railroad. 3 May I trouble you 
with an errand ? 4 1 am at your service. 



Herr 


H 


Herr 


R. 


Herr 


H 


gen ? 3 




Herr R. 


Herr 


H 



302 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

65. In einem Geschaftsbureau. 

t Reisender (ins Bureau eintretend). Guten Morgen ! 1st Herr 
Schmidt zugegen ? l 

Geschdftsfuhrer. Nein ; Herr Schmidt ist verreist. 2 

Reisender. Wissen Sie vielleicht, wann er zuruckkommt ? 

Geschdftsfuhrer. Leider kann ich Ihnen den Tag seiner 
Riickkunft nicht bestimmt angeben. 

Reisender. Erwarten Sie ihn diese Woche ? 

Geschdftsfuhrer. Nein, er kommt nicht vor nachster Woche 

Reisender. Wollen Sie ihm gefalligst 3 diese Karte geben, 
wenn er kommt ? 

Geschdftsfuhrer. GewiB ! 

Reisender. Ich danke Ihnen. Adieu ! 

Geschdftsfuhrer. Adieu ! 

1 present (here). 2 out of town. 3 if you please. 

66. Auf dem Postamt. 

Fremder. Wie hoch ist das Porto nach Amerika ? 

Beamtcr. Zwanzig Pfennig fur je 15 Gramm. 

Fremder. Und wie hoch im Inlande ? 

Beamier. Zehn Pfennig. 

Fremder. Bitte, geben Sie mir drei Postmarken zu 20 Pfennig 
und fiinf zu zehn Pfennig. 

Beamier (die Marken gebend). Das macht zusammen eine Mark 
zehn Pfennig (M. 1.10). 

Fremder. Wann schlieBt die Brief einnahme fiir. New York ? 

Beamier. Um zehn Uhr abends. 

Fremder. Ich danke sehr. 

67. Auf dem Bahnhofe. 

Reisender (am Billettschalter). Wann geht der nachste Zug 
nach Berlin ab ? 

Beamier. Um zehn Uhr zwanzig. 

Reisender. Bitte, geben Sie mir ejn Billett zweiter Klasse, 1 
Wie viel kostet es ? 



READING AND CONVERSATION 303 

Beamier. Fiinfundachtzig Mark zwanzig Pfennig. 
Reisender. Wieviel Freigepack darf man mitnehmen ? 
Beamter. Fiinfundzwanzig Kilo. 2 

Der Portier (raft in den Wartesaal). Einsteigen in der Richtung 
nach Berlin ! 

Der Reisende wahlt seinen Bahnwagen und steigt ein. Wenn er rauchen will, 
so wahlt er ein ,,Rauchcoupe"; wenn er aber nicht rauchen will, nimmt er ein 
Coupe mit der Aufschrift „Fiir Nichtraucher." 

Schafflier (wahrend der Reise in das Coupe schauend). Ihre Fahrkar- 

ten, meine H err en ! 

Der Reisende zeigt dem Schaffner seine Fahrkarte. 

Sdiaffner (in Berlin angekommen). Berlin ! Alles aussteigen ! 

Der Reisende steigt aus, nimmt eine Droschke und fahrt mit seinem Gepack" 
nach seinem Hotel. 3 

1 The second class coaches correspond to our first class ; the " first class " to our Pullman 
palace cars. The rates are considerably less than with us. 

2 25 Kilogramms= 55 lbs. Only a limited amount of luggage is carried free in foreign 
countries. 

5 The rates for hack hire are moderate and are regulated by law, the tariff being posted 
in every droschke. 

68. Geld, Mass unci Gewiclit. 

Das Dezimalsystem fur Geld, Mass und Gewicht wurde im 
Jahre 1872 im ganzen deutschen Reiche eingefuhrt. Nach die- 
sem System : 

100 Pfennig == l 1 Mark = 23.85 cents. 

100 Centimeter = 1 Meter = [39.37 inches. 

100 Centigramm = 1 Gramm =15.4 grains. 

100 Centiliter = 1 Liter = 2.1 13 pints. 

1 Quadrat-Meter = 1.196 square yard. 

100 Quadrat-Meter = 1 Quadrat-Hektometer (1 Hektar). 

Groiere Entf ernungen werden nach Kilometern (1,000 Meter) 
gerechnet, und fur groBeres Gewicht wird das Kilogramm (kurz 
Kilo), 1,000 Gramm, gebraucht ; z. B., 10 Kilo Zucker ; eine 
Entfernung von 25 Kilometern Das alte deutsche Wort ,,Pfund" 
(ein halbes Kilo) ist auch gebrauehlich. (Sieh FuBnote, Seite 
37) 



304 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Die deutschen Munzen. 

An Goldmiinzen gibt es Zwanzig-, Zehn-, und Fiinf-Mark- 
stiicke. 

Aus Silber sind 5 Mark-, 2 Mark-, 1 Mark- und 50 Pfennig- 
Stiicke. 

Aus Nickel sind 20, 10 und 5 Pfennig-Stiicke, und aus Kupfer 
2 Pfennig- und 1 Pfennig-Stiicke. 

Das Deutsche Thermometer. 

Man braucht in Deutschland das Thermometer nach Celsius, 2 
bei dem der Gefrierpunkt o (Fah. 32) und der Siedepunkt 100 
Grad (Fah. 212) ist. 

1 The sign of equality is read " ist gleich," pi. " sind gleich." 

2 The Celsius thermometer, named from its Swedish inventor, is the same as the centi- 
grade. It has superseded the " Reaumur " in Germany. 

69. Brief wechsel. 

New York, den I5ten Dezember 1905. 
Herrn K. F. Koehler, 

Leipzig. 
Beiliegend senden wir Ihnen eine Postanweisung iiber 10 Mark, 
wofiir Sie uns gefalligst mit der Post ein Exemplar von Kohler's 
deutschem Worterbuch zusenden wollen. 

Achtungsvoll 

Maynard, Merrill & Co. 

Leipzig, den 2 5sten Dezember 1905. 
Herren Maynard, Merrill & Co. 

New York. 
In Beantwortung Ihres gefalligen Schreibens vom 1 5ten dieses 
Monats teile ich Ihnen ergebenst mit, daB ich Ihnen heute 
das gewiinschte Worterbuch habe zugehen lassen (118, 5, i). 

Ergebenst 

K. F. Koehler. 



TRANSLATION EXERCISES. 

These exercises are based, for the most part, on the reading exercises of Part II. 
The references are to the grammatical sections of Part I. An English word in 
parenthesis is not to be translated. Two words connected by a hyphen are to be 
translated as one word ; for example, finger-nail, ^ingentagel. A difficult sentence 
is sometimes rearranged within brackets in the German order, and constant refer 
ence should also be made to the sections on construction (Parti, §§ 1 14-118). 
The pupil is supposed to have mastered the elements of the grammar before mak- 
ing these translations. 

Use both forms of personal address (36, 4). e. g., 2>efUmere (beffinteren ©ie). 

1. The Hands. 

(See No. 1, page 218.) 

Man x has two hands and ten fingers. Is the thumb a finger ? Yes, 
the thumb is a finger. On the end of each finger 2 is a finger-nail. 

The middle-finger is between (103) the index-finger and the ring- 
finger. 

The right hand is stronger than (80) the left hand, and the right 
arm is stronger than the left arm. One whose 3 left hand is stronger 
and more skillful than his (32, ior) right hand is left-handed. 

What do I hold in my right hand ? You hold (36, 4) a pen in your 
right hand (32, 10, c.) 

Which hand is (the) stronger, the right hand or the left hand ? 
The right hand is usually the stronger.4 

Decline the German words 5 £>m9 er an d §Gtlb. 

1 ber 3ftenjclj. z 5tm (Srtbe eine3 jeben $tnger§. 3 @iner, bejjen (89). * ftcirfev, or bie 
ftarteve. 5 X)efltntere (bcfltrtieren ©te) bie beutjd)en Shorter. (The pupil will also write the 
full declension of these nouns, as also of those given in the exercises following.) 

2. The Cards. 

(See No. 2, page 218.) 
I have here several cards of different colors. 1 This card is white, 
this card is blue and this card is green. The white card is a visiting- 
card. My name is on it. 2 There are (86, 1) no names on the other 
cards. I hold these cards in my hand (32, 10 c). There are also sev- 
eral cards in this little box. I lay these cards into the box (103). 

305 



306 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

There are now six cards in the box. I take them out of the box and 
count them : one, two . . . 

What color is (fjctt) this card ? It is white. 

Is there a name on it ? 3 Yes, there is a name on it. 

Are there (86, i) names on the other cards? No, on the other 
cards there are no names. 

What is your name ? It is Edwin Jahn. 

Where do the cards lie [where lie the cards] ? They lie in the box. 

Where does the box stand ? It stands on the desk. 

Where do you stand ? I stand on the floor and by the desk. 

Decline the words 4 ®ctrte and <&tf)atf)tzl. 

ibon toerjdjtebener garbe. 2 jtel)t barauf. 3 ©tcbt ein 9iame barauf ? 4 S)ef(inicre 
(beftinicren 6te). (The pupil will also write the declensions in full.) 

3. The Apple. 

(See No. 3, page 219.) 

The apple is an excellent fruit. Everybody is fond of l apples. 
They grow in all countries of the temperate zone. A great quantity 
of -them 2 are sent every year from the United States to 3 foreign coun- 
tries, especially to England. 

In which zone do apples grow best ? 4 They grow best in the tem- 
perate zone. 

Are you fond of apples ? 5 Yes, I am very fond of them. 

How many apples have you eaten to-day? I have eaten no applet 
to-day [I have to-day no apples eaten], but yesterday I ate two or 
three (123, 5). 

Whose apple is this ? It is yours (87, 6). Decline the words 
2tyfet and Obft. 

1 gem, fain, willingly, applies to anything that is done with pleasure, as, gem eff en, gem 
trtnfen, gern geben, etc. 2 bat)on. 3 nad) (104, 4). *am beften (80). s @fjen ©ie gern Stpfet ? 

4. The Pen. 

(See No. 4, page 219.) 

The pen is very useful and in the hand of a great man it is " might- 
ier than the sword." Pens were formerly made of quills, 1 but now-a- 
days they are made of steel or of gold. I prefer 2 a gold-pen. 

Have you a gold-pen ? Yes, I have a gold fountain-pen with a 
diamond-point.3 






TRANSLATION EXERCISES 307 

Where did you get it ? * My father gave it to me as a Christmas- 
present.s 

What kind of a 6 pen is this ? It is (86, 5) a steel-pen. 
Decline and write the words geber and ©efdjenf. 

I aus jtieten gemadjt. 2 3§ V-*Y • . . t>or. 3 mit einer 2>iamantenfpi£e. 4 23or;er Ijaben 
©ie fie ? (23ofyer Ijaft bu fie ?) 5 al3 ein 2Seit)nad)t§gefd)enr\ 6 23a§ fur eine. 



5. The Time-piece. 

(See No. 6, page 220.) 

A time-piece tells us the time (shows us the hours). A watch is 
carried z in the pocket. A wall-clock hangs on the wall. A beauti- 
ful gold watch costs at-least 300 marks, 3 but a cheaper watch often 
keeps just as good time.3 

Have you a watch with you ? 4 No, but I have one at home.S 

What did it cost (123, 5) ? It cost 40 marks. 

Is it of 6 gold or of silver? It is neither 7 of gold nor 7 of silver; it 
is of brass gold-plated. 8 

What time 9 have you ? By my watch IO it is half past five, — a 
quarter to six, — ten minutes past seven, — three minutes after half 
past eight (69). 

What kind of IZ a time-piece is that? It is a wall-clock. 

What are the principal parts of 12 ^etgett ? Decline the word 

W)t\ 

1 ifftcm tragi. 2 roenigftenS 300 Tlaxt. 3 gei)t oft ebenjo gut. *beiftd). sju|)aufe. 6 bort. 
7tDeber — nod). 8 t>on Detgolbetem Sftefjing. 9 2Bie biel Ui)r. I0 9lad) meirter Uh,r. " 2Ba§ 
fiir eine? I2 2Betd)e3 finb bie ^auptformen bon. 

6. The Book. 

(See No. 7, page 221.) 

There are many kinds x of books in the world ; some 2 are good and 
useful, others 2 are bad or useless. Let us (l5°) read only good books. 
We have no time to read useless books [useless books to read]. In 
order (129) to learn a foreign language [in order a foreign language 
to learn] one needs 3 a grammar and a reading-book. 

What kinds of books 4 do you prefer ? I prefer 5 biographical and 
historical works. 

How many books have you ? I have about a hundred books. 



308 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Name (i57) tome a historical work that you have read. I have 

read Schiller's " History of the Thirty Years' War." 6 

What are the principal parts of nennett ? 

X (S§ gibt triete Strten. 2 einige — anbere. 3braud)t mart. 42Ba§ ji'tr 23iid)er? 5.3d) 
jtefye — bor. 6 „@efd)id)te be§ breifngjaljrigen ,f?tiege§." 

7. The Garden. 

(See No. 9, page 222.) 

We have a beautiful garden. It contains vegetables, flowers, ber- 
ries, shrubs and fruit-trees. In summer we pick and eat the berries 
[pick and eat we the berries], but I prefer l the ripe fruit, especially 
apples and cherries. In autumn the gardener gathers the vegetables 2 
and carries them 3 into the cellar. 

Where is your garden ? It is behind the dwelling-house. 

Is there a fence around the garden ? Yes, a hedge-fence. 

How large is the garden ? It is fifty meters 4 long and twenty meters 
wide. 

Your garden is larger than mine (87, 9), is it not 5 ? Decline Qfyv 
©arten. What are the principal parts of etttljaltett. 

l 3tylk$t — box. 2 ba§ ©emiije. 3 e§. 4 fiinfgtg 2Jleter. s rtidjt roaljr. 

8. The Year. 

(See No. 10, page 223.) 

The earth revolves around the sun 1 in 365, days 5 hours, 48 min- 
utes and 5 1 seconds. It is wonderful that all (the) years have exactly 
the same length. 2 The ships and the railroad-trains are not so regu- 
lar. The year is divided 3 into 52 weeks, each week into seven days, 
each day into 24 hours, each hour into 60 minutes and each minute 
into 60 seconds. 

How many months has the year ? The year has twelve months. 

Which month is the most beautiful ? In my opinion 4 June is the 
most beautiful. 

Where will you spend the next vacation ? 5 I intend to spend it 
(128, 2) in the Adirondacks. 

Why will you go-there? 6 I shall go-there because I enjoy the 
mountain-air and admire the landscapes [the mountain-air enjoy and 
the landscapes admire]. 

Decline the word Sftortat. What are the principal parts of etrttetfett ? 

1 beroegt fid) itm bte Sonne. z genau btefetbe ^eitbauer Ijaben. 3 eingeteilt (at end of sen- 
tence). 4?ftad) metner SJietnung. s bte nadjfien getten (pi.)- 6 bortJ)tn geljen. 



TRANSLATION EXERCISES 309 

9. Geography. 

(See No. 11, page 223.) 

Geography is very interesting. Every-one should study it before 
he goes travelling. 1 Americans travel a great deal 2 in Europe. They 
visit London, Paris, Berlin, Rome, Vienna and other great cities. 
One may learn a great deal by travelling. 3 

Which foreign cities have you visited ? I have visited only London 
and Paris. 

Do you intend to visit other cities ? [Have you the intention other 
cities to visit ?] Yes, I intend to visit Berlin, Rome and Athens. 

Why did you not (123, 5) visit Rome when you were last* in 
Europe ? Because I had neither 5 time nor 5 money for it. 6 

Decline the words Stmertfcmer and @tctbt. 

Conjugate the word gefyert in the present indicative and subjunctive. 7 

1 elje er auf bie 3teife gef)t. 2 \djx bid. Hurdj ba% 9Mfen. 4 ba§ Ie|te Wlai. s toeber — 
nod). 6 bafiir. 7 im ^rafenS be3 3 n ^^ at ^ § un ^ be% J?onjunftib5. 

10. The benevolent little Girl. 

(See No. 14, page 225.) 

Minna was a very benevolent girl. She loved the birds and fed 
them when x the ground was covered with snow and they found little 
to eat 2 [and they little to eat found]. Her parents were much pleased3 
and said : You are our dear benevolent Minna. Be always good to 
the birds 4 and to all other s (93) animals. 

How did Minna feed the birds ? She scattered little-crumbs on the 
ground and the birds flew down and picked them up. 

Were the birds afraid of 6 Minna? Yes, they were afraid of her; 
for they did not know that she wished 7 to feed them [that she them 
feed would 7]. 

Give a synopsis of fltegert in the indicative (itf) fliege, id) flog, etc.) 

With which auxiliary verb is fliegett conjugated ? 

I totnn. 2 menig ju efjen. 3 freuten fid) \d)x. 4 gegen bie 2Sogel. 5 cttte anbeven. 6 fid; 
fitrd)ten toor, to be afraid of. See last stanza of page 241. 7 toottte. 

11. The Canary Bird. 

(See No. 16, page 226.) 
Little Caroline loved the birds just as much as l Minna (did). She 
had a canary-bird that she kept 2 in a cage. The bird sang very 
happily and was not at all afraid of 3 Caroline, but one morning Caro- 



3IO NEW GERMAN COURSE 

line found it dead in the cage. She wept when 4 she saw the dead 
bird, but her mother went out and bought another and put it into the 
cage. Caroline would have been very happy (123, 10) when 5 she saw 
the new bird, but she remembered that she had eaten a little-piece of 
sugar that her mother had given her for the bird [that she a little- 
piece of sugar, which her mother to-her for the bird given had, herself 
eaten had]. This made her very sad. 

What kind of a bird 6 did Caroline have ? She had a canary-bird. 

Did she take good care of the bird ? 7 Yes, she took very good 
care of it. 

Did the bird die [died the bird] ? Yes, Caroline found it dead in 
the cage. 

What (did) the mother do when she saw the dead bird ? She bought 
another and put it into the cage. 

Have you a canary-bird ? No, I have no canary-bird. 

Write a synopsis of fid) erntttem in the indicative and subjunctive. 

'ebenfo fefyr tote. 2 in einem fttiftg Ijielt. 3 furd)tete fid) gar nidjt bov. *aU. s al§. 
6 tt>a3 fur einen 33oget ? 7 pftegte fie ben SSogel gut ? 

12. The Bee and the Dove. 

(See No. 17, page 227.) 

A bee fell into the water and would have drowned x if a dove had 
not thrown 2 a leaf to her [if a dove to-her not a leaf thrown had]. 
She crawled onto the leaf and flew away, but she did not (118, 5 h) 
forget the kindness of the dove ; for when a hunter was about to 
(123, 12) shoot the dove [when a hunter the dove shoot would] the 
bee came and stung him in the hand. This prevented him from hit- 
ting the dove.3 Then the dove thanked the bee, but the hunter did 
not thank her (dat.), he wished 4 to kill her, but she flew far away. 

Who fell into the water ? A little bee fell into the water. 

Who threw a leaf into the water ? A dove threw a leaf into the 
water. 

Who wished to shoot the dove ? A hunter wished to shoot the dove. 

Why did he not hit the dove ? Because the bee came and stung 
him in the hand [and him in the hand stung]. 

Do you believe this story ? No, I do not believe it. 

Why do you not believe it ? Because the bee and the dove are 
not such good friends [not such good friends are]. 



TRANSLATION EXERCISES 311 

In which case is SBaffer in the sentence (Sine £Hette ftet in ba% 
SBaffer. It is s in the accusative. 

1 tnare ertranfert. 2 jugeroorf en. 3 berfyinberte ifyn bte Xaubt %u treffen. 4 roottte. s fteljt. 



13. The Peaches. 

(See No. 20, page 229.) 

A peasant bought in the city five peaches which he brought home 
with him x and gave one to each of his four boys 2 and one to-the 
mother. The oldest boy ate up his peach and planted the stone in 
order to (129) raise a tree. The second son sold his peach and re- 
ceived money enough for-it^to buy (129) twelve peaches in the city. 
f The youngest son ate up his peach and threw the stone away ; but 
Edward, the third son, gave his peach to-a sick boy. 

How many peaches did the peasant bring home with him from the 
city [brought the peasant from the city home with] ? He brought three. 
To-whom (90, 1) did he give them? He gave them to-his children 
and to-the mother. 

Which boy was the most generous (80) ? Edward was the most 
generous. 

Are you fond of 4 peaches ? Yes, I am fond of them, but I prefer 5 
cherries. 

When are peaches ripe ? In this region 6 they are ripe in the month 
of July.7 

Why did Edward give his peach to-the sick boy ? He gave it to- 
him (118, c, d) because he was goqd-hearted. 

Would you have given your peach to-a sick boy? That I do not 
know [that know I not], perhaps and perhaps not. 

I do not think that you would have done it. 

If I had two peaches I would give one to-a sick boy ; but if I had 
I only one I would eat it myself. That would be right, 8 would it not ? 9 
It would at-least be very natural. We are all selfish. 

In which case is the word &tabt in the first sentence ? Go to the 
blackboard I0 and write the declension of @tctbt. 

1 mit nctd) $au\t bradjte. 2 jebem feiner bier Jtnaben etrtert. 3bafitr. *@ffen <Sie ( iff eft 
bu) gem. s id) jtefye. . . bor. 6 in biefer ©egertb. 7 im 3Jionat '^uti. 8 rerf)t. 9 n id)t tnafrr ? 
10 art bie £af el. 



312 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

14. A Forgetful Servant. 

(See No. 22, page 231.) 

A landed-proprietor once sent a servant into the city to get a steam- 
boiler that he had bought [in order x a steam-boiler that he bought had 
to get 2 ]. The servant went with a four-horse-team, 3 but came back 
with an empty wagon [came however 4 with an empty wagon back]. 
He had forgotten the steam-boiler, but he had not forgotten a paper 
of sewing-needles that his master had commanded him to get [but he 
had a paper (of) sewing-needles, that his master him commanded had 
with (him) to bring not forgotten]. 

Whom did the landed-proprietor send into the city ? He sent one 
of his servants. 5 

What was 6 the servant to bring home ? He was to bring a steam- 
boiler. 

Did he bring it [brought he it]? No, he forgot it. 

Did he forget the sewing-needles ? No, he did not forget them. 

Why did he forget the steam-boiler ? He forgot it because he was 
thinking all-the-time of the needles. 7 

Have you a good memory ? Yes, when I am attentive. 

Go to the black-board and write the declension of (^ebadjtTU^. 

1 urn. 2 abjuljoten. 3 mit einem SStergefpamx. *abex = however (109, 3). s etncn jeiner 
.ilned)te. 6 joflte (149, 5). 7 fortiua^renb an bie ^tdfynabctn badjte. 

Note. — Observe the difference between briligert and holert. In No. 13 the 
farmer brought (bracftte) 12 peaches home from the city, but here the servant is 
ordered to go and get the steam-boiler, hence l)olen is used. Note also that a house 
servant is a 2)iener, while a farm laborer is a $ned)t. 

15. Robert Bruce. 

(See No. 28, page 235.) 
Robert Bruce, king of Scotland, was a brave soldier, but he was not 
always victorious. After l winning several victories over the English 
[After he several victories over the English won had], he was defeated 
and driven into exile. 2 Once, while he was a fugitive, he slept in a 
barn where he observed a spider that tried twelve times in vain to 
attach her web to a beam of the roof [which twelve-times in-vain tried 
her web to a beam of the roof to attach] ; the thirteenth time, however, 
she succeeded in reaching the beam. This encouraged him to try his 
fortune again [fortune once more to try], and soon afterwards he won 



TRANSLATION EXERCISES 313 

won the great battle of Bannockburn. Then he became again king of 
Scotland and ruled until 3 his death in-the year 1329. 

Who was Robert Bruce ? He was king of Scotland. 

With whom was he at war ? 4 He was at war with the kings of 
England. 

W 7 ith which kings ? With Edward I [Edward the First] and Ed- 
ward II. 

What [which] great battles did he win ? He won the battles of 
Loudon Hill and Bannockburn. 

W 7 hat kind of a man s was Robert Bruce ? He was a very brave and 
honorable man, was he not ? 6 Yes, he is said to 7 have been very 
brave. 

Decline ber (Srfte (32, 2) and construct a sentence in which this 
form occurs (see page 175). Edward the First was King of England. 

Do you admire Robert Bruce ? Yes, I admire him very-much. 

1 5iad)bem. 2 in bte $etbannurtg getrtebert. 3 bi§p. ■* fixfjrte er ^rieg. 5 ma§ fiir ein 
3Jlann. fcmtfjt hmfjt ? ?et \oii (149, 5). 

16. The Lorelei. 

(See No. 30, page 236.) 

On a cliff on the bank of the Rhine-river l sits, according to an old 
legend 2 a beautiful sorceress called the " Lorelei." 3 She is combing 
her golden hair and her golden jewelry sparkles in the evening-sun- 
shine. Below on the water sits a boatman in a little boat. This man 
ought (149, 5) to look down constantly into the water in order (129) 
not to strike against the rocks [in order not against the rocks to strike], 
but he is bewitched by the sorceress and is compelled to look up to 
her.4 If he is not more-careful his boat will be dashed-in-pieces s and 
he will be drowned. 6 

What is the " Lorelei " ? It is a fabulous sorceress, that sits on a 
high cliff on the bank of the Rhine. 

Why does the man in the boat look up at the Lorelei ? He looks 
up at her because he is bewitched and cannot help it. 7 

What ought he to do ? He ought to look continually into the water 
in order to avoid the rocks. 

Who is the author of this song ? The . author is the lyric poet 
Heinrich Heine. 

Have you ever seen the Lorelei ? No, I never saw her. 



314 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Have you ever been bewitched ? As far as I know, not. 8 
If you had been in the boat would you have looked up to the Lore- 
lei ? That I do not know, perhaps. 

Go to the blackboard and write a sentence in which the word 
" Lorelei " occurs (see page 175). (The pupil goes to the board and 
writes.) What have you written ? I have written : The Lorelei is a 
dangerous witch. 

1 2lm lifer be§ ^iljetnftroms. 2 uatf) einer alten ©age. 3 bie Sorelet genannt. -tpilji-Ijtns 
auf $u fefyen. s jet jdjmettert. 6 mivb ertrinfen. 7 unb es nidjt bermeiben fann. 8 fobielic^ 
tueijj, nein. 

17. Tlie Frog-Prince. 
(See No. 31, page 237.) 

There was once x a prince who had been bewitched and changed 
into a frog. He lived in a spring in the forest. Once a princess came 
and sat by 2 the spring. She played with a golden ball which she 
tossed up 3 and caught again. But once the ball fell into the water and 
sank. Then the princess wept until the- frog dove-down 4 and brought- 
up 5 the ball. The princess picked it up and ran home, but she for- 
got the poor frog who had been so kind to her 6 until he came to 7 the 
palace where she lived. Then she released him from the charm of 
the sorceress by throwing him 8 against the wall and he was a prince 
again. Then they married and lived together until their happy end. 

What happened to 9 the prince? He was bewitched and changed 
into a frog. Where did he live ? He lived in a spring in a large, 
dark forest. Who came and sat by the spring? A princess came. 

What did the frog do for the princess ? He dove down and brought 
up a golden ball that had fallen into 'the water. 

How did the princess release the prince from the charm ? She 
threw him against the wall. 

What did the prince then 10 do? He conducted the princess into 
his kingdom. 

In what kind of a carriage " did they ride ? They rode in a beau- 
tiful carriage with eight white horses. 

Have you a carriage with eight white horses ? I have a carriage, 
but only two horses, and that is enough for me. 

Construct a sentence in which the word Dertoctttbeltt occurs. The 
prince was bewitched and changed into a frog. 

1 (5§ tbar etnmal. 2 an . 3 { n fa ^>o£>e toarf. 4 Ijinuntettaudjte. 5 bie Jtugel IjeTaufbradjte. 
6 ber jo gut gegen fie getoefen tt>ar. 7 ju. 8 inbetn fie tfjn . . . 9aia§ gefdja^ mtt ? xo barauf. 
11 in toa§ fiir einem SSagen? 



TRANSLATION EXERCISES 3 I 5 

18. On the Harz. 

(See No. 32, page 240.) 

The Harz-mountains are (ift) in North Germany, between the Elbe 
and the Weser. The highest peak of the Harz is the Brocken, from 
which is often seen the " Spectre-of-the-Brocken." T In a hut on one 
of these mountains stands an arm-chair. In the arm-chair sits a man 
and on a foot-stool by his side 2 sits a maiden who tells him about 
(rjort) the evil mountain-spirits that appear at nights But the father 
sings : " Do not be afraid of 4 the bad mountain-spirits, for angels keep 
watch over thee day and night [keep day and night over thee watch]." 

Which is the highest peak of the Harz-mountains ? The highest 
peak is the Brocken. 

What is often seen from this peak [what sees one often from this 
peak out] ? The Spectre-of-the-Brocken is often seen. 

Where does the hut stand of which one speaks in the poem ? It 
stands on the mountain. 

Where does the maiden sit ? She sits on a foot-stool. 

Is she afraid of the bad mountain-spirits ? Yes, she is much afraid 
of them. 

What does the father sing ? He sings : " Do not be afraid, dear 
little-child, of the bad mountain-spirits." 

Why should the child not be afraid of the bad mountain-spirits ? 
Because the angels watch over her 5 day and night [day and night 
over her watch]. 

Are you afraid of ghosts ? No, I am not afraid of them ; they would 
not harm me [they would to-me no harm do]. 

Go to the blackboard and write the declension of 33erg. 

Have you ever visited the Harz-mountains ? No, I have never 
visited them. 

Why not? Because I made only a short trip 6 through Germany 
and had not time 7 to visit all the interesting regions. 

Do you intend 8 to visit Germany again ? Yes, certainly, I hope 
sometime 9 to study at 10 one of the German universities. 

At which university ? That I have not yet decided. 11 

^ort roo cm§ man oft . . . iieffi. 2 an ietner <8ette. 3 bie bet ^iadjt erfdjetttett. 4 f iircfit 
bid) ntdjt t>or. * fiber itjr 33adjt batten. 6 nttr eine fttrje Dtetje. •? tjatte fetne ^eit. s £aben 
Sic bic 2t.bii.cfjt. 9 einmal. ioauf. ll itodj ni$t entjcfjieben. 



316 NEW GERMAN COURSE 

19. A German Conversation. 

What would you do if you were rich ? If I were rich I would build 
a beautiful house. 

Would you live in the beautiful house ? Certainly I would live in 
it [would I therein dwell]. 

Do you live now (123, 1) in your own house ? No, I live in a house 
that I have rented. 

To whom does the house belong (170, 3) in which you now live? 
It belongs to Mr. Meyer. 

What kind of a man 1 is Mr. Meyer ? He is a very friendly and 
honest man. 

Is he a born German ? 2 Yes, he is a born German. 

Are you a German ? No, I am (an) American. 

Do you speak German [speak you German] ? Yes, I speak it, but 
not as well as English. 

Where did you learn (123, 5) German ? I learned it at-first in the 
school and later in the university. 

Were you ever in Germany ? Yes, last summer. 3 

Which cities did you visit (123, 5) ? I landed in Hamburg and 
visited then Berlin, Dresden, Leipsic, Frankfort on the Main and 
made the tour-of-the-Rhine, from Mayence to (6t3) Cologne. 

Did you understand the language in Germany ? Yes, and I made 
myself also understood. 4 

Do you find the German literature interesting ? Yes, especially the 
poetry. 

Name S some of the greatest German poets. Goethe, Schiller, Heine, 
Korner, Uhland and Freiligrath. 

Which German plays have you read ? I have read " Wilhelm Tell," 
" Maria Stuart " and " Jungfrau von Orleans." 

Who is the author of these plays ? (gen.) Schiller wrote them all. 

Which German romances have you read ? I have read " Immen- 
see," " Hoher als die Kirche " and " Peter Schlemihl." 

Have you read " Hermann und Dorothea ?" Yes, I have read that 
also [I have that also read]. 

Who is the author of-it ? 6 Goethe, the greatest (80) German poet. 
Have you read Goethe's " Faust " ? No, I have not yet read it. 

1 2$a§ fiir etn ?Cftcmn. 2 etn geborener 2)eutfdjer. 3 im bortgen ©otntner. ^matfjte mid) 
audj berjtanblid). 5 ^enne (nennen ©ie) mir. 6 babon. 



HEIDENROSLEIN 



317 



J. W. v. Goethe 
Ettuas bewegt. 



Heinrich Werner. 




1. Sah ein Knab' ein Ros - lein steh'n, Ros - lein auf der 

2. Kna - be sprach : " Ich bre - che dich, Ros - lein auf der 
f$. Und der wil - de Kna - be brach's Ros - lein auf 

-===: . * ' 



der 



P 



m 



r—\- 



*=* 



£ 



mmm 



=t 



Hei - den, 
Hei - den,' 
Hei - den ; 



9 



z-r 



war 
Ros 
Ros 



P 



k^ 



V- 



so jung und mor - gen-schon, 
lein sprach : " Ich ste - che dich, 
lein wehr - te sich und stach, 



fc_l 



i 



=— 9 



1 — rl N — H — "1 m i i - i 



e& 



:r - 



SE&*^ 



f^ 



lief er schnell, es nah' zu seh'n, sah's mit vie - len Freu-den. 
dass du e - wigdenkstan mich, und ich will's nicht lei -den.' 
half ihm doch kein Weh und Ach, musst es e - ben lei -den. 



^£S 



-v^t-t 



£ 



mf cres. 



1. • j- ■ — 

[_ k _L_| v J L v »_ 



r^f 



Ros- lein, Ros-lein, Ros -lein rot, Ros -lein auf der Hei - den. 
mf cres. -^ A , 

A- -#- -^ 0- *- £ jl. 



~S: 



=g — I V- 



— ■ — v— -F 1 1 



i 



Die dritte Strophe kraftig und bewegt, 



3i» 



LORELEI 



Heinrich Heine. 



Mdssig. 



Friedrich Silcher. 



m m±S3 3& 



t 



=p — p-i— *> 



3 



i. Ich weiss niclit,was soil es be - deu - ten, dass ich so trau rig 

2. Die schon - ste Jung - frau sit - zet dort o - ben wun-der 

Piufl- Den Schif-fer im klei - nen Schif-fe er-greift'smit wil-dem 




bin;. . ein Mahr-chen aus al - ten Zei - ten, das 
bar;. . ihr gold'-nes Ge - sch - meide blit - zet, sie 
Wen'; er schautnicht die Fel - sen - rif - fe, er 









*=2=± 




dim. 



PPi 



=te=£ 



:*=£ 



jzf 



A^^j: 



r ^rrt 



kommt mirnichtausdem Sinn. 

kammt ihr gol-de-nes Haar 

schaut hin -auf in die Hon'. 

c dim. 

— ±L # 0~~ 



Die Luft ist kiihl und es 
Sie kammt es mit gol - de-nem 
Ich glau - be, die Wel-len ver - 





n 



is J"— I*?/ 



£ 



3. Strophe lebhaft und kraftig, die 4 Schlusstakte langsam und// wiederholt. 



dun - kelt, und ru - hig fliesst der Rhein, . . m/der 
Kam - me und singt ein Lied da - bei, . . . /"das 
schlin - gen am En - de Schiffer und Kahn;. . ^"und 



i 



3i9 



m- 



Gi - pf el des Ber-ges fun - kelt im A - bend-son -nen - schein. 
hat ei - ne wun-der - sa - me, ge-walt' - ge Me - lo - dei. 
das hat mit ih - rem Sin - gen die Lo - re - lei ge - than. 



sm 



pm^mMn^ 



1 



FRUHLINGSGRUSS 



Heinrich Heine. 
m p Einfach und zart. 



Felix Mendelssohn-Bartholdy 

( 1809-1847 ). 



m=i=£=m^w mt- 



1. Lei - se zieht durchmein Ge - miit lieb - li - ches Ge - Jau - te ; 

2. Klinghin-aus bis an das Haus, wo die Blu-men sprie-ssen 

3. Sprich zum Vog-lein, das da singt auf dem schwanken Zwei-ge, 



A 



BH 



£ a 



t=rt 



-#- a 



*/ 



E^« 



-?: 



* 



£=SPS 



-LI 




"J 



i 



II 



3 



S*-*-«r^ ± ^- s 



s 



klin - ge, klei -nes Fruhlings-lied,kling' hin-aus in's Wei - te ! 

wenn du ei - ne Ro - se schaust,sag',ichlass sie grii - ssen ! 

und zum Bachlein,das ka klingt,dass mir kei -nes schwei - ge! 



m 



««- 



f— f— r 



9 



A A 



ise*? 



fil 



320 



O TANNENBAUM 



p Andante. 




f^g^E^E^^E^ 



■v— 



i. O Tannenbaum,o Tannenbaum ! Wie griinsinddei -ne Blat- ter. Du 

2. O Tannenbaum, o Tannenbaum ! Du kannstmir sehrge -fal- len.Wie 

3. O Tannenbaum, o Tannenbaum ! Dein Kleid will mich was lehren : Die 



-4-H— F« ■ iF^ii- 



£ 



3*$* 



•^gT^rr- 8 



i 






i 



*f£ 



S 



*| 



?=* 



^*: 



fc 



— b»- 



±=f 



-k— 



tp 



1P1 



ifcteic 



tfc=g 



griinst nicht nur zur Som-mer-zeit,Nein auch im Win-ter,wenn es schneit.O 
oft hat nicht zur Weih-nachtszeit Ein Baum von dir mich hoch erfreut! O 
Hoff-nung und Be-stan-dig-keit Giebt Trost und Kraft zu je- der Zeit. O 



ippSiN^PJig^lliP 



p 



?=F 



*-•- 



fH"^- 



S^-^ 



fefe 



1 



Tan-nen-baum, o Tan -nenbaum,Wiegriinsind dei - ne Blat - ter! 
Tan -nen-baum, o Tan - nenbaum,Du kannstmir sehr ge - fal - len ! 
Tan -nen-baum, o Tan - nenbaum ! Das soil dein Kleid mich leh - ren. 




^m 



z—± 



m 



t===t 






:s 



±=> 



GELUBDE 



321 



H. F. Massmann. 
G eh alien. 



e 



ftiiif^ 



Ich hab' mich 
Mein Herz ist 
Ach, Gott ! thu' 
Lass Kraft mich 



er 
ent 
er 
er - 



glom 

he • 

wer - 



I I 
ben mit Herz 
men, dir treu 
ben mein jung 
ben in Herz 



VOLKSWEISE, 



i*E 



i 



und mit Hand 
zu - ge -wandt, 
Her-zens -blut, 
und in Hand, 



dir, 
du 
zu 
zu 



mf 



1p 



1-J- 



»/ 



I 1 r 



^E *3SE=& 



1= 



Land voll Lieb' und Le - ben, mein deut 
Land der Frei'n und From-men, du herr 
fri-schem,freud'-gem Le - ben, zu frei - 
le - ben und zu ster - ben fur's heil' • 



sches Va - ter -land, dir, 
lich Her-manns-land, du 
em, from-mem Mut, zu 
ge Va - ter - land, zu 




r^=* 



m=± 



>/ 



bS 



Land voll Lieb' und Le - ben, mein deut 
Land der Frei'n und From-men, du herr 
frischem,freud'-gem Le - ben, zu frei • 
le - ben und zu ster - ben fur's heil' 

=- 9/ 



rtt. 



§5 



1 — r 



4= 



:& 



£eM 



sches Va - ter - land, 
lich Her-manns-land. 
em, from-mem Mut. 
ge Va - ter -land. 



rit. 



-t 



-#- -0- 



s 



1 



322 



SCHIFFERGESANG 



Etwas bewegt. Neapolitanisches Volkslted: Santa Lucia. 
Soli: Wiederholung Chor. 




t4=J-- 



m 



*2 



» P 



t=t 



*=r 



aoE 






9t 



Schon glanzt des Mon-des Licht am 
Sieh' Ster - ne herr -lichgliih'n, Liif 
Freu' dich der Ju-gend-zeit mit 

P— == 

n — i=y 



Him 

- te 

Lie 



mels - bo - gen, 

er - wa - cnen, 

dern,Tan - zen ! 



Soli : Wiederholung Chor 






i 



m 



±® 



-t 



lieb - licb die Liif • te weh'n, still sind die Wo • gen. 

ii - ber die Wei - len hin tanzt schon mem Na - chen. 

Lass dich, weil's Le - ben mai't, mit Ro - sen kran - zen ! 



9± 



V— 



J±=£ 



9/ 



wm 




Mein Schiff-lein war - tet dein, Lieb -chen, steig' furcht-los ein. 
Ho -re der Sehn-sucht Lied, die tief im Her -zen gliibt. 
Ju - gend flieht bald vor - bei, e - wig bleibt Lieb' und Treir! 



»/ 



m 



'if 



mmm 



i 



1 

: 1E 



* » 




4^- 



:*= 



I 



1-3. Treu - lie - bend harr' ich hier, o komm' zu mir ! 



9i= 



■/. 



-P-> P- 



-r — r — 1 — £ — g- 



t 



*~ 



I 



DER ALPENHIRT 



323 



v Fallersleben. 
Frisch bewegt. 
mf 



VOLKSWEISE. 




n 



i§§^]i 



mf 1. Dorthoch auf der 
p 2. Daschau' ich die 
p 3. Und treibtmich der 



Al - pe, 
Dor -fer 
Win-ter 



m 
hin 



ist mei 
Ne - bel 
un - ter 



- ne Welt, da 
und Rauch und 
in's Thai, dann 




wo s mir 

at - me 

denk' ich : 

cres. 



auf Er-den am bes-ten ge - fallt. Da duf - ten die 
der Bergluft er - qui-cken-den Hauch.Daweissich von 
der Sommer kommt wie-der ein -mal ! Der Som-mer, der 



t=l 



m 



m 



-H^t 



49- 



1 F fcr 



j - t: . j_pTJ E £jE£*fa 



&s 



n 



9 m f 



*=t± 



I 

Krau - ter, da mur - melt der Quell, da klin - gen die 

kei - nem Ge - larm und Ge - schrei^und spiel' ei - nen 

bringtmich zur Al - pe zu - ruck; /"da dro - ben ist 



5-#- 



4=1 



-•- -&- 



i± 9 mf 



f^tm 



/ 



r-t 



- 9 9 '- j : 



t=M 



m& 



IS 



l f .- 



f- 



£ 



M* 



w^^m 



Glocklein so lus - tig und hell, juch-he! so 
Landler auf mei -ner Schalmei,/"juch -he ! auf 
Al - les,mein Le - ben,mein Gliick juch- he ! mein 



lus -tig und hell, 
mei- ner Schalmei. 
Le - ben, mein Gliick ! 



-*- -*--9 



/ 



9^ 



m 



£ 






t^M^M 



n 







324 DIE WACHT 

Max Schneckenburger. 
Lebhaft und energisch. 



AM RHEIN 

Carl Wilhelm. 



=r 



:i 



± 



r^f 



£=* 



4 



i. Es braust ein Ruf wie Don - ner - hall, wie Schwert-geklirr und 

2. Durch Hun -dert-tau -send zuckt es schnell,und Al - ler Au - gen 

3. So lang ein Tro-pfen Blut noch gliiht,noch ei - ne Faust den 

4. Der Schwur er-schallt,die Wo - ge rinnt, die Fah-nen flat - tern 




Wo - gen -prall : 

bli - tzen hell ; 

De - gen zieht, 

hoch im Wind 



Zum Rhein,zum Rhein, zum deutschen Rhein ! wer 

der deut - sche Jiing -ling fromm und stark, be 

und noch ein Arm die Biich - se spannt, be 

am Rhein, am Rhein, am deutschen Rhein, wir 



&^m 



i 



m^^M^ 




will des Stromes Hii-ter sein? Lieb' Va-terland,magst ruhigsein,lieb' 

schirmtdie heil'-ge Lan-des-mark. Lieb' Va-terland,magstruhig sein, lieb' 

tritt kein Feind hierdeinen Strand ! Lieb' Va-terland,magstruhig sein, lieb' 

Al - le wol-len Hii-ter sein! Lieb' Va-terland,magst ruhig sein, lieb' 

-F 1 1 1 P- — r &> 1 — I — r *H— * — I — ; — I H — ; — * — * 1 1 

— I H5>— s.- !-• — 3 ' m — p-^—p— hp-*— p — P — — 



9^t 




GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



Note. — The nom. and gen. sing, and nom. plur. of nouns is given in the manner usual 
in dictionaries, also the principal parts of strong or irregular verbs. Where the gen. sing. 
of a noun is like the nom. the fact is indicated by a dash and the same mark indicates that 
the nom. plur. is like the sing. The gender of nouns is indicated by the initials m. f. n. 
thus : die Blume, /. ( — , -n) ; der Finger, m. (-s, — ). Where an adverb is, only an unin- 
flected adjective the one form stands for both ; thus, schon may be translated beautiful or 
beautifully according to the context (§ 94). Separable verbs are so indicated by an accent 
mark on the prefix ; thus, aVdriicken. The references in parenthesis are to sections of 
Part I. Only such translation of each German word is given as corresponds to its use in 
this text. In the case of compounds and other long words the grammatical indications are, 
for the sake of brevity, frequently omitted. 



ab, off, away, down, exit, 
ab'driicken, to shoot (an arrow). 
Abend, m. (-s ; -e) evening. 
Abendmahl, n. supper. 
Abendsonnenschein, evening sunshine. 
Abend wolke,/ evening cloud, 
aber, but. 

ab'fahren, to depart, set sail. 
ab 'fallen, to fall off. 
ab'gehen, to go away. [ben. 

ab'geschrieben, copied ; inf. ab'schrei- 
Abgrund, m. abyss, precipice. 
ab'holen, to fetch, go and get. 
ab'kehren (sich), to turn away. 
ab'kiirzen, to shorten, abbreviate. 
ab'legen, to lay off. 
ab'leiern, to drawl (a speech or air). 
ab'mahen, to mow (grass). 
ab'nehmen, to take off. 
ab'pfliicken, to pick off. • 
Abschlagszahlung, /. part payment. 
Abschnitt, m. (-s, -e), division, part. 
ab'schreiben, to copy, 
ab'senden, to send (away). 
Absicht,/. ( — , -en), intention. 
absichtlich, intentional. 
ab'steigen, to descend. 



Abteil, m. (-s, -e), compartment. 

ab'wagen, to consider. 

ab'wenden, to turn away. 

ach ! ah 1 oh I 

Acht,/ attention, care; in — nehmen, 

to take care of. 
achten, to respect, notice, 
achtungsvoll, respectful. 
achzen, to sigh, moan. 
Adel, m. (-s), nobility. 
Adresse,/. ( — , -n), address. 
Affe, m. (-n, -n), monkey, ape. 
Afrika, Africa. 

Ahnlichkeit, / ( — , -en), similarity. 
Akademie,/ ( — , -n), academy. 
allein, adv. alone ; conj. but. 
allerecht, most genuine. 
allerliebst, very dear. 
allernachst, the very next, the lowest, 
alleruntertanigst, most obedient. 
alles, all, everything. 
allezeit, forever, always. 
allgemein, general. 
allzuviel, too much. 
Alpen, pi. the Alps. 
Alpenhirt, m. alpine shepherd. 
Alpenjager, m. alpine hunter. 
als, when, as ; besser — , better than. 
also, so, thus, therefore. 



325 



326 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



alt, old ; die Alten, the old ones. 

altdeutsch, old German. 

Alter, n. (-s), age. 

Altorf, a Swiss village, now Altdorf. 

am = an dem, at the (105). 

Ameise,/ ( — , -en), ant. 

amerikanisch, American. 

Amt n. (-es, Amter), office ; Post — , 
post-office. 

amiisieren, to amuse. 

an, to, on, by, at. 

ander, other; ein andermal, another 
time ; eins urns andere, one after the 
other; noch andere Arten, other 
kinds ; am andern Morgen, the next 
morning. 

an'erkennen, to recognize. 

Anfang, m. ( — s, Anfange), beginning; 
am — , in the beginning. 

an'fangen, to begin, do. 

an'geben, to state, specify. 

an'gehoren, to belong to. 

Angel,/ ( — , -n), fish-hook. 

angenehm, agreeable. 

Anger, m. (-s, — ), green field. 

an'glotzen, to stare at. 

an'kleiden (sich), to dress one's self. 

an'klopfen, to knock (at a door). 

an'kommen, to arrive. 

an'kiinden, to announce. 

Ankunft,/ arrival. 

an'legen, to take aim. 

an'melden, to announce. 

an'nehmen, to accept. 

an'probieren, to try on (clothes). 

an'richten, to cause. 

an'riihren, to touch. 

an'schauen, to look at. 

an'sehen, to look at. 

an'sinnen, to demand, exact of one. 

an'spannen, to harness up (horses). 

Anstreicher, m. (-s, — ), house-painter. 

an'treten, to approach. 

an 'tun, to do, offer. 

Antwort,/ ( — , en), answer. 



antworten, to answer. [vately). 

an'vertrauen, to confide to one (pri- 

an'zeigen, to point out. 

Anzug,#z.(-s,Anziige), suit (of clothes). 

Apfel, m. (-s, Apfel), apple. 

Apfelbaum, m. apple-tree. 

Appetit, tn. appetite. 

April, m. April. 

Arbeit,/. (— , -en), work. 

arbeiten, to work, study. 

Arbeiter, m. (-s, — ), workman. 

Arbeitslohn, m. wages. 

Arm, m. (-es, -e), arm. 

arm, poor. 

Armbrust,/ crossbow. 

Armut,/ poverty. 

arrangieren, to arrange. 

Art,/ ( — , en), manner, way. 

Arzt, m. (-es, Arzte), physician, doctor. 

Asche,/. ashes. 

Asien, Asia. 

Ast, m. (-es, Aste), branch (of a tree). 

astronomisch, astronomical. 

Atem, m. breath ; — holen, to breathe. 

atmen, to breathe. 

auch, also. 

Aue,/ ( — , -n), meadow. 

auf, on, upon, in. 

auf bewahren, to lay up, keep. 

auf bliihen, to blossom. 

Aufenthalt, m. stay, visit. 

auf essen, to eat up. [tion. 

auf 'fallen, to impress one, strike atten- 

auf'finden, to find, look up a thing. 

Aufgabe,/ ( — , -en), task, lesson. 

auf'geben, to give up. 

auf'gehen, to rise, go up (the sun). 

auf'geregt, excited, angry. 

aufgeschrieben, written down. 

auf'halten (sich), to stay, live. 

auf'heben, to pick up ; hob ihn auf, 

picked him up. 
auf'hetzen (gegen), to excite, to arouse 

(against). 
auf horchen, to listen. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



327 



auf klopfen, to break open. 

Auflage,/. ( — , -n), edition (of a book). 

auf machen, to open. 

auf merken, to pay attention to. [tion. 

Aufmerksamkeit, /. (— , -en), atten- 

auf nehmen, to take up, compete with. 

auf passen, to watch. 

auf pflanzen, to erect, set up. 

auf picken, to pick up. 

auf putzen, to dress up. [erect. 

aufrecht, upright ; — stehen, to stand 

auf regen, to excite, anger. 

auf richten, to set up. 

auf rufen, to call out, ask. 

Aufruhr, m. uproar. 

aufs = auf das, upon the (105). 

Aufschrift,/. ( — , -en), inscription. 

auf stecken, to set up. 

auf tragen, to order, command. 

auf treten, to appear on the scene. 

Auge, n. (-S,-n), eye. 

Augenblick, m. moment. 

augenblicklich, instantly. 

Auglein, n. (-s, — ), little eye. 

August, m. August. 

aus, out, from. 

Ausbildung,/ culture, education. 

auseinander, from each other ; — gehen, 

to separate. 
Ausflug, m.(-s, Ausfliige), excursion. 
Ausgang, m. (-s, Ausgange), result, 
aus'geben, to give out. [exit. 

aus'gehen, to go out. 
aus'kramen, to take out. 
Auslander, m. (-s, — ), foreigner, 
auslandisch, foreign, 
aus'laufen, go out, sail. 
Ausrufer, m. (-s, — ), crier, herald, 
aus'ruhen, to rest. 
aus'schauen, to look out. 
aus'sehen, to appear, look like. 
aufier, besides, out of. 
auBerdem, besides that. 
auBerhalb, outside of. 
Aussprache,/. pronunciation. 



aus'sprechen, to pronounce, 
aus'steigen, descend (from a coach), 
aus'strecken, to stretch out. 
Australien, Australia. 
aus'iiben, to exert. 
Auswahl,/ ( — , -en), choice. 
auswendig, outside; — lernen, to 

learn by heart. 
aus' Ziehen, to move out. 
Auszug, m. (-es, Ausziige), extract. 
Autor, m. (-s, -en), author. 
Axt,/. ( — , Axte), axe. 



Bach, m. (-es, Bache), brook. 

Bachlein, n. (-s, — ), little brook. 

Backe,/ ( — , -n), cheek. 

backen, to bake. 

Backer, m. (-s, — ), baker. 

Bad, n. (-es, Bader), bath. 

Bahn,/. ( — , -en), path, way. 

Bahnhof, vi. railway station. 

Bahnwagen, m. passenger coach. 

bald, soon ; bald — bald, now — now. 

baldig, immediate. 

Balken, m. (-s, — ), beam, timber. 

Band, m. (-es, Bande), volume ; n. (-es, 

Bander, ribbon. 
bang, timid, fearful, 
bangen, to fear. 
Bank, /. ( — , -en), money bank ; //. 

Banke, seat, bench. 
Bannberg, a hill near Altorf. 
bannen, to banish, conjure, bewitch. 
Bar, m. (-en, -en), bear. [rick I. 

Barbarossa, red-beard, Emperor Frede- 
barmherzig, merciful ; " barmherzige 

Briider," brothers of mercy. 
Barmherzigkeit,/ mercy, charity. 
Baron, m. (-s, -e), baron. 
Baronin,/ ( — , -nen), baroness. 
Bart, m. (-es, Barte), beard. 
Bassin, n. reservoir, pond, 
bat, asked, inf. bitten. 



328 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



bauen, to build; — lassen, to have 

built, to cause to be built (150). 
Bauer, m. (-n, -n), peasant ; n. (-s, — )., 

bird-cage. 
Bauernknecht, m. farm-hand. 
Baum, m. (-es, Baume), tree. 
Bayern, Bavaria. 
Beamte, m. (-n, -n), official, 
beantworten, to answer. 
Beantwortung, /. reply. 
Becherlein, n. (-s, — ), little goblet, 
bedauern, to regret. 
bedeckt, covered; inf. bedecken. 
bedeuten, to signify, mean, 
bedeutend, important. 
bedienen, to serve. 
Bediente, m. (-n, -n), the servant. 
bediirfen, to need, require. 
beeilen (sich), to hasten. 
befallen, to befall, attack. 
Befehl, m. (-s, -e), command, [mand. 
befehlen (befahl, befohlen), to com 
befestigen, to attach, make fast. 
befiehlt, commands; inf. befehlen. 
befinden (sich), to be, be found; was 

befindet sich, what is there ? 
befremdet, astonished. 
begeben (sich), to go or betake one's 

self (to some place). 
begegnen, to meet. 
begehren, to demand, 
begleiten, to accompany, 
begraben, to bury. 
begreifen, to understand, 
begriissen, to greet, salute. 
behalten, to keep, 
behaupten, to assert, 
bei, by, at the house of. [birds. 

beide, both ; die beiden Vogel, the two 
beiliegend, enclosed. 
Bein, n. (-es, -e), leg. 
beinahe, nearly, 
beisammen, together. 
Beispiel, n. (-s, -e), example. [at. 

bei'wohnen (dat.), to attend, be present 



bekennen, to confess, reveal, 
bekommen, to get, obtain; {with dat.) 

to agree with one's health. 
belastigen, to trouble. 
belebt, lively. 
belieben, to like, choose {dat.) to please ; 

wie es Ihnen beliebt, as you please. 
beloben,, to praise, 
bemerken, to observe. 
Bemerkung,/. ( — , -en), remark. 
bemiihen (sich), to take the trouble, try. 
benachrichtigen, to inform. 
beobachten, to observe. 
bequem, comfortable. 
Beredsamkeit, /. eloquence. 
bereit, ready. 
bereiten, to prepare. 
bereitet, prepared, ready, 
bereits, already. 
Berg, m. (-es, -e), mountain, 
bergen (barg, geborgen), to conceal. 
Bergesgeist, m. mountain spirit, ghost. 
Bergeshohe, f. mountain height. 
Bergluft,/! mountain air. 
Bergmann, m. miner, 
bersten (barst, geborsten), to burst, 
beruhen, to depend upon, 
beruhigen, to quiet, calm, 
beriihmt, celebrated, 
besagen, to say, mention ; der besagte 

Hans, the said Hans, 
bescheinen, to shine upon. 
bescheren, to give, bestow upon. 
beschirmen, to defend. 
beschlieSen, to end, conclude, 
beschrankt, limited. 
Beschreibung, / ( — , -en) description. 
Beschiitzer, m. (-s, — ), protector 
besehen, to view, look at. 
besiegen, to conquer. 
Besitz, m. possession. [daily. 

besonder, especial; besonders, espe- 
besorgen, to provide, 
besser, better; " zu was (etwas) bes- 

serem," to something better. 






GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



329 



best, best ; am besten, the best. 
Bestandigkeit, / constancy, 
bestatigen (sich), to be confirmed. 
bestehen, to consist ; besteht aus, con- 
besteigen, to mount. [sists of. 

bestellen, to order. 
Bestellung,/. ( — , -en), order, 
bestimmen, to determine. 
bestimmt, definite, determined. 
bestrafen, to punish. 
Besuch, m. (-es, -e), visit. 
besuchen, to visit. [lor. 

Besuchszimmer, n. drawing room, par- 
beten, to pray. 

betrachten, to observe, regard. 
Betrag, m. (-es, Betrage), amount, sum. 
Betreff, m. relation; in — ■, with regard 
betreffen, to concern. [to. 

betreten, to tread, set foot upon, 
betruben, to grieve, trouble. 
betriibt, sad. [deceive, 

betriigen (betrog, betrogen), to cheat 
Bett, n. (-es, -en), bed. 
betteln, to beg. 
Beute,/. booty, 
bevor, before. 

bewahren, to keep, guard, preserve. 
bewahren, to show T , prove, 
bewegen (sich), to move, agitate. 
Bewegung,/. ( — , -en), motion, action. 
bewiesen, proved, shown; inf. bewei- 
bewohnbar, inhabitable. [sen. 

bewohnen, to inhabit. 
bezahlen, to pay. 

bezeichnen, to mean, designate, signify. 
Bibliothek, /. ( — , -en), library. 
Biene, / ( — , -n), bee ; Bienchen, n. 
Bier, n. (-es, -e), beer. [little bee. 

bieten, (bot, geboten), to offer. 
Bild, n. (-es, -er), picture, 
bilden, to form, construct. 
Bilder-Gallerie,/. picture gallery. 
Billet, n. (-es, -e), ticket (of admission). 
Billetschalter, m railroad ticket office. 
billig, just, cheap, fair. 



Billion, f. in German a million million. 

binden (band, gebunden), to bind. 

Binnen-Alster, an artificial pond or 
reservoir for pleasure boats in Ham- 

Birnbaum, m. pear tree. [burg. 

bis, to, until. 

MB, bit ; inf. beiBen. 

biBchen, a little bit. 

Bitte,/ ( — , -n), request, petition. 

bitte, please ; inf. bitten, beg, ask ; ich 
bitte um, I ask for, please give me. 

bitterbose, very angry. 

blasen (blies, geblasen), to blow. 

Blatt, n. (-es, Blatter), leaf. 

Blattchen, n. (-s, — ), little leaf. 

Blattern, pi. small-pox ; mit — befal- 
len, attacked with small-pox. 

blau, blue. 

bleiben (blieb, geblieben), to remain. 

bleich, pale. 

Blick, m. (-es, -e), look, sight. 

Blindenanstalt,/ blind asylum. 

blitzen, to lighten, shine. 

bloB, bare ; only. 

bliihen, to bloom. 

Bliimchen, n. (-s, — ) little flower. 

Blume,/ ( — , -n), flower. 

Blumengarten, m. flower-garden. 

BlumenstrauB, m. bouquet. 

Blut, n. blood. 

Bliite,/ ( — , -n), blossom. 

bluten, to bleed. [ground. 

Boden, m. (-s, Boden), floor, soil, 

Bogen, m. (-s, — ), bow. 

Bonne,/. ( — , -n), bean. 

Boot, n. (-es, -e), boat. 

borgen, to borrow. 

Borse,/. ( — ,-n), purse, stock-exchange. 

bose, bad, wicked. 

boslich, wickedly, unkindly. 

bot, offered; inf. bieten. 

brach, broke ; inf. brechen. 

braten (briet, gebraten), to roast. 

brauchen, to need, use. 

brauchlich, customary. 



33Q 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



brausen, to roar. 

Braut,/. ( — , Braute), bride. 

Brautigam, m. (-s, -e), bridegroom. 

brav, brave, nice, good. 

brechen (brach, gebrochen), to break. 

breit, broad. 

brennen (brannte, gebrannt), to burn. 

Bretterzaun, m board-fence. 

Brief, m (-es, -e), letter ; ein — Nah- 

nadeln, a paper of sewing needles. 
Briefeinnahme, / receiving of letters at 

post office. 
Brief wechsel, m. correspondence. 
Brief marke,/ postage stamp, 
bringen (brachte, gebracht), to bring. 
Brot, n. (-es,-e), bread; in pi. loaves. 
Bruchteil, m. fraction. 
Briicke,/ ( — , -en), bridge. 
Bruder, m. (-s, Briider), brother, 
brummen, to hum, buzz. 
Brunnen, m. (-s, — ), fountain, spring. 
Brunnenwasser, n. spring-water. 
Briinnlein, n. (-s, — ), little brook. 
Brust,/. (— , Briiste), breast, bosom. 
Brut, / brood. 

Bube, m. (-n, -n), boy, fellow. 
Buch, n. (-es, Biicher), book. 
Buchh'andler, m. bookseller. 
Biichse,/ ( — , -n), box, rifle. 
Biichslein, n. (-s, — ) little box. 
Buchstabe, m. (-n, -n) letter of the 
biicken (sich), to bow. [alphabet. 

Biihne,/ ( — , -n), stage (of a theater). 
Bummelzug, m. a slow train making 

many stops. 
Bund, m. (-es, Biindc), union. 
Biindel, n. (-s, — ), bundle. 
Bundesrat, in. federal council. 
bunt, many colored, variegated. 
Burg/ ( — , -en), castle. 
biirgen, to go security, give bail. 
Burger, m. (-s, — ), citizen. 
Biirgermeister, m. mayor. 
Biirgschaft, / security ; — leisten, to 

go security, bail. 



Bursche, m. (-n, — n), fellow. 
Biirstchen, n. (-s, — ), little brush. 
Busen, m. (-s, — ), bosom. 

C 

Celsius, inventor of the Celsius ther- 
mometer. 
Charakter, ///. (-s, -e), character. 
Citrone,/ ( — , -n), lemon. 
Commis, m. ( — , — ), salesman. 
Cylinderhut, m. silk hat. 



da, there, here ; — doch, since, because. 

dabei, therewith. 

Dach, n. (-es, Dacher), roof. 

Dachboden, m. garret. 

dadurch, by it, through it. 

dagegen, on the contrary. 

daher, therefore; hither, along. 

Dame,/. ( — , -n), lady. 

damit, so, in order that. 

Dampfer, m. (-s, — ), steamship. 

Dampfkessel, m. steamboiler. 

Dampfschiff, n. steamboat. 

danach, to it, after it. 

daneben, to one side. 

Dank, m. thank. 

danken, to thank. 

dann, then. 

daran, by it. [wards. 

darauf, upon it, upon which, then, after- 

dar'bringen, to present, offer. 

darf , dare, may ; inf. diirfen. 

darin, in it. 

darinnen, therein, in it. 

dar'reichen, to reach to one, give. 

dar'stellen, to represent. 

dariiber, over it, concerning it. 

darum, therefore. 

daB, that. 

Datum, m. (-s, Data), date. 

Daumen, m. (-s, — ), thumb. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



331 



davdn, away ; of it. 

dazu, thereto ; besides, in addition. 

dazwischen, between. 

Deckel, m. (-s, — ), cover. 

Degen, m. (-s, — ), sword. 

dehnen, to extend. 

dein, deine, dein, pi. deine, thy ; der, 

die, das deinige (87, 9). 
Deklination, / ( — , -en), declension. 
deklinieren, to decline. 
denken (dachte, gedacht), to think. 
denn, then, for. 
dergleichen, the like, such, 
der-, die-, dasjenige, that one (89, 7). 
der-, die-, dasselbe, the same ; wie hei- 

fien dieselben ? what are they called ? 
deshalb, therefore. 
deutsch, German, 
deutsch-franzosisch, German-French ; 

der — e Krieg, Franco-Prussian war. 
Deutschland, Germany. 
Dezember, m. December. 
Dialekt, m. (-s, -e), dialect. 
Dichter, m. (-s, — ), poet. 
dick, thick. 

Dieb, m. (-es, -e), thief, 
dienen, to serve. 
Diener, m. (-s, — ), servant. 
Dienerschaft, /. ( — , -en), servants. 
Dienst, m. (-es, -e), service. 
Dienstag, m. Tuesday. 
dieser (-e, -es), (dies, das), this ; pi. 
diesmal, this time. [diese, these. 

Ding, n. (-es, -e), thing, 
direkt, direct. 
doch, though, I pray you. 
Doktor, m. (-s, -en), doctor. 
Dom, m. (-es, -e), dome, cathedral. 
Donau,/ Danube (river). 
Donnerhall, m. thunder-peal. 
donnern, to thunder. 
Donnerstag, m. Thursday. 
Dorf, n. (-es, Dorfer), village. 
dort, dorten, there, yonder. 
Drache, m. (-en, -n), dragon, kite. 



Drachenfels — Siebengebirge, name of 

mountain chain. 
Drachengasse, f. name of a street. 
Drang, m. (-es), pressure. 
drauBen, without, outside. 
Dreschmaschine, /. threshing machine. 
dringen (drang, gedrungen), to press, 

force (one's way). 
drinnen, within, 
dritte, third ; zum drittenmal, for the 

third time. 
drittgrofite, third largest. 
drohen, to threaten. 
Droschke,/. ( — , -n), hack, cab. 
driiber = dariiber, over it. 
driicken, to press. 

Druckerei,/. ( — , -en), printing office. 
duften, to be fragrant. 
dulden, to permit, suffer. 
Dunkel, n. darkness. 
dunkel, dark. 
dunkelblau, dark blue. 
dunkeln, to darken, 
durch, through, by. [pierce. 

durchboren, to bore through, penetrate, 
durchschieften, to shoot through. 
diirfen, to dare, may (149, 1). 
diirr, dry. 
Durst, m. thirst, 
duster, dark, gloomy. 

E 

eben, even, just now; level. 

ebenfalls, also, likewise. 

Echo, 11. (-s, -s), echo. 

echt, genuine. 

Ecke,/. (— , -n), corner. 

edel, noble. 

edelmiitig, noble-minded. 

Ehegatte, m. (-n, -n), husband. 

ehemalig, former, old, late. 

eher, rather, sooner. 

Ehre,/ ( — , -n), honor. 

EhrengruB, m. salute of honor. 



332 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Ehrenkreuz, «. cross of honor. 
Ehrenmann, m. honorable man. 
ehrerbietig, respectful. 
ehrlich, honest. 

Ei, n. (-es, -er), egg ; interj. ah ! 
Eidgenossen, //. sworn companions. 
eigen, own. 

Eile,/ haste ; — haben, to be in haste. 
eilen, to hasten. 

ein, a, one ; so — Mann, such a man ; 
der eine . . . der andere, the one . . . 
einander, each other. [the other. 

ein'dringen, to press in, to fill. 
ein'fach, simple. 
ein' fallen, to occur to the mind. 
EinfluB, m. (^Hisses, -fliisse), influence. 
ein/fiihren, to lead into, introduce. 
einige, several, some. [hotel. 

Einkehr,/. turning in ; putting up at a 
ein'kehren, to turn in, put up. 
ein'laden, to invite. 
Einladung,/. ( — , -en), invitation. 
ein'lassen, to let in, admit, 
einmal, once. 
ein'richten, to arrange. 
einsam, lonely. 
ein'scharfen, to impress upon, 
ein'schenken, to pour out, fill. 
ein'schlafen, to fall asleep. 
ein'schleichen, to steal lightly in. 
einst, once. 

ein'steigen, to enter (a carriage). 
einstweilen, meanwhile. 
eintonig, monotonous. 
Einwohner, m. (-s, — ), inhabitant. 
Einzahl,/. singular. 
einzeln, single. 
Eis, n. ice. 

Eisen, n. iron ; von — , made of iron. 
Eisenbahn,/. railroad. 
Elbe,/. Elbe (river). 
elegant, elegant. 
elektrisch, electric. 
Elend, n. misery. 
Elfenbein, n. ivory. 



Elsafi-Lothringen, Alsace-Lorraine. 

Eltern,//. parents. 

empfangen, to receive. [parlor. 

Empfangszimmer, n. reception-room, 

empfehlen (sich) (empfahl, empfoh- 
len), to recommend one's self ; ich 
empfehle mien, a polite form of sal- 
utation, [ren. 

emport, shocked, aroused ; inf. empo- 

Emporung,/ (— , -en), rebellion. 

Ende, n. end; am Ende, finally, at last. 

endlich, at last, finally. 

Endung,/. (— , -en), ending. 

Energie,/. energy. 

Engelein, n. (-s, — ), little angel. 

England, England. 

englisch, English. 

entblofien, to bare. 

entdecken, to discover. 

entfalten, to unfold. 

entfernt, distant. 

Entfernung,/ ( — , -en), distance. 

entfliehen, to flow, pass away. [one). 

entge'genhalten, to offer, bold out (to 

entge'genkommen, to come to meet. 

entgegenkommend, hospitable. 

entge'gentreten, to go to meet. 

entglommen, kindled, enthused. 

enthalten, to contain. 

entlassen, to dismiss. 

entreiBen, to tear away, liberate. 

entriistet, angered. 

entscheiden (entschied, entschieden), 
to decide. 

entschuldigen, to excuse. 

entsetzt, shocked. 

enttauscht, deceived. 

entweder, either ; entweder — oder, 
either — or. 

Epigramm, n. (-s, -e), epigram. 

erbarmen (sich), to move to pity; es 
erbarmt mien, I am sorry. 

erbarmlich, miserable. 

Erbarmung,/ mercy. 

Erbe, m. (-n, -n), heir. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



333 



erblicken, to see, notice, observe. 

Erbse,/ (— , -n), pea. 

Erde,/. (— , -n), earth, ground. 

Erdteil, m. continent. 

erdulden, to endure, suffer. [rence. 

Ereignis, n. (-nisses, -nisse), occur- 

erfahren (erfuhr, erfahren), to learn, 
experience. 

Erfahrung,/. ( — , -en), experience. 

erforden, to require, demand. 

erfreuen, to rejoice, gladden. 

Erfiillung,/. ( — , -en), fulfillment. 

erganzen, to complete, add to. 

ergeben (sich) (ergab, ergeben), to 
submit, surrender, give up ; Ihr er- 
gebener Diener, your obedient ser- 
vant ; -st, respectfully. 

erglanzen, to shine. 

ergreifen (ergriff, ergriffen), to seize. 

erhalten (erhielt, erhalten), to receive ; 
to keep, maintain. 

erheben (sich) (erhob, erhoben), to arise. 

erhielt, received ; inf. erhalten. 

erhohen, to increase. 

erinnern (sich), to remember. 

erkalten (sich), to take cold. 

erkennen, to recognize, perceive. 

erklaren, to declare, explain. 

erkranken, to fall ill. 

erkiihnen (sich), to dare, presume. 

erkundigen (sich), to inform one's self. 

erlassen, to excuse from. 

erlauben, to allow. 

Erlaubnis, / permission. 

erleiden (erlitt, erlitten), to suffer. 

Erlkonig, Earlking, an evil spirit of 
Northern mythology. 

erlosen, to release. 

ermangeln, to fail. 

Ernte,/ ( — , -n), harvest. [tyranny. 

Erpressung, /. ( — , -en), oppression, 

erquicken, to quicken, refresh. 

erraten (erriet, erraten), to guess. 

erreichen, to reach, attain. 

erschallen, to resound. 



erscheinen (erschien, erschienen), to 

appear. 
erschrecken (erschrak, erschrocken), to 

be frightened, 
erst, first. 

erstaunt, astonished, 
ersuchen, to request. 
erteilen, to give, impart, 
ertragen (ertrug, ertragen), to endure, 
erwachen, to awake. 
erwahlen, to choose, elect, 
erwahnen, to mention. 
Erwartung,/. ( — , -en), expectation, 
erwerben (erwarb, erworben), to win, 

gain, acquire, 
erwidern, to reply. 
erzahlen, to relate. 
erzeigen, to show. 
erzeugen, to generate, 
erziehen (erzog, erzogen), to raise. 
Essen, n. eating, food, 
essen (a!3, gegessen), to eat. 
etwa, about, perhaps, possibly. 
etwas, some, something. 
euer, eure, euer, pi. eure, your ; der, 

die, das eurige, yours. 
ewig, forever, eternal. 
Ewigkeit,/ (— , -en), eternity. 
Exemplar, n. (-es, -e), copy. 



fahig, able. 

Fahne,/. (— , -n), flag. [go. 

fahren (fuhr, gefahren), to ride, drive, 

Fahrgeld, n. fare. 

Fahrkarte,/. ticket (for fare). 

Fahrmann, m. ferryman. 

Fall, m. (-s, Falle), fall, case. 

fallen (fiel, gefallen), to fall. 

falsch, false, counterfeit. 

falten, to fold, wrinkle. 

Familie,/. ( — , -n), family. 

fand, found; inf. finden. 

fangen (fing, gefangen), to catch. 



334 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Farbe,/. ( — , -n), color. 

FaB, n. (-sses, Fasser), barrel, tub. 

fast, almost. 

Faust,/ (— , Fauste), fist. 

Februar, m. February. 

Fechtmeister, m. fencing-master. 

Feder,/ ( — , -n), feather, pen, spring. 

Federhalter, m. penholder. 

fehlen, to fail, ail, miss. 

fehlerhaft, deficient. 

Feiertag, m. (-es, -e), holiday. 

fein, fine. 

Feind, m. (-es, -e), enemy. 

Feld, n. (-es, -er), field. 

Fels, m. (-en, -en), rock, cliff. 

Felsenriff, n. rocky reef. 

Felsenwand,/. rocky wall, precipice. 

Fenster, n. (-s, — ), window. 

Fensterscheibe, /. window-pane. 

fertig, ready ; — machen, to make 

ready, complete. 
fesseln, to chain, fetter, 
fest, fast, firm. 
Festgesang, m. festive song. 
Feuer, n. fire. 
Feuersglut,/ fiery red. 
Fieber, n. (-s, — ), fever. 
fiel, fell ; inf. fallen. 
Filzhut, m. felt hat. 
nnden (fand, gefunden), to find, 
ting, caught ; inf. fangen. 
Finger, m. (-s, — ), finger. 
Finsternis,/. darkness. 
Fischerknabe, m. fisher-boy. 
Flachs, m. flax, 
flattern, to flutter. 
Flaum, m. down, fuzz. 
Fleisch, n. flesh, meat. 
FleiB, m. (-es), industry. 
fleiBig, industrious. 
fleugen = fliegen, to fly. 
fliegen (flog, geflogen), to fly. 
flieBen (floB, geflossen), to flow, 
flink, quick, quickly. 
Flinte,/ (— , -n), gun, rifle. 



flog, flew ; inf. fliegen. 

Flb'te,/ (— , -n), flute. 

FluB, m. (-sses, Fliisse), river. 

fliistern, to whisper. 

Flut,/. (— , -en), flood. 

folgen, to follow. 

folgsam, obedient. 

Form,/. ( — , -en), form. 

fort'bluhen, to bloom always. 

fort'gehen, to go away. 

fort'geleiten, to accompany out. 

fort'laufen, to run away. 

fort'reiBen, to tear away. 

fort'werfen, to throw away. 

Frage,/ ( — , -en), question. 

fragen, to ask. [Main. 

Frankfurt am Main, Frankfort on the 

Frankreich, France. 

Frau, / ( — , -en), woman, wife, lady; 

— Nachbarin, lady neighbor. 
frech, bold. 
frei, free. 

Freigepack, n. baggage carried free. 
Freiheit,/. freedom. 
freilich, indeed. 
Freitag, m. Friday, 
fremd, strange, foreign. 
Fremde, m. (-n, -n), stranger, 
fressen, to eat, devour. 
Freude,/ (— , -n), joy. 
freudig, joyous. 

freuen (sich), to rejoice, be pleased. 
Freundin,/ ( — , -nen), lady friend, 
freundlich, friendly. 
Freundlichkeit,/. ( — , -en), friendliness. 
Freundschaft, / ( — , -en), friendship. 
Freundschaftsdienst, m. friendly ser- 
friedlich, peacefully. [vice. 

Friedrich, Frederick; — der GroBe, 

Frederick the Great. 
frieren (fror, gefroren), to freeze. 
frisch, new, fresh ; iiber frischer Tat, 

in the very act. 
Frist,/ (— , -en), time, respite, 
froh, happy. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



335 



frohlich, joyous, happy. 

fromm, pious, devoted. 

Frosch, m. (-es, Frosche), frog. 

Froschkonig, m. frog-king or prince. 

Frucht,/. (— , Friichte), fruit v 

friih, early. 

Friihling, m. (-s, -e), spring. 

FriihlingsgruB, m. spring greeting. 

Friihlingslied, n. spring song. 

Fuder, n. ( -s, — ), wagon-load. 

fiigen (sich), to submit. 

fiihlen, to feel. 

fuhr, rode; inf. fahren. 

fiihren, to lead ; deal (a blow). 

Fiihrer, m. (-s, — ), guide, leader. 

Fuhrwerk, n. (-s, -e), cart, wagon. 

Fiillfcder,/ fountain-pen. 

Funke, m. (-n, -n), spark. 

fur, for ; was — ein, what kind of ? 

furchtbar, terrible. [afraid of. 

fiirchten, to fear; sich — vor, to be 

fiirchterlich, terrible. 

furchtlos, fearless. 

Fiirst, m. (-en, -en), prince. 

fiirwahr, indeed, truly. 

FuB, m. (-es, FiiBe), foot. 

FuBboden, m. floor. 

Futter, n. (-S, — ), lining; fodder. 

fiittern, to fodder, feed; line (a coat). 



gab, gave ; inf. geben. 

Gallerie,/ ( — , -n), gallery. 

ganz, whole, entire ; die ganze Zeit, 

all the time ; den ganzen Tag, all day. 
ganzlich, entirely. 
gar, very (adds force to other words) ; 

— nicht, not at all (see § 92, 4 and 
garstig, ugly, nasty. [20). 

Garten, m. (-s, Garten), garden. 
Gast, m. (-es, Gaste), guest. 
Gasthaus, n. restaurant. 
geballt, closed ; die geballte Hand, the 

closed hand, fist. 



Gebaude, n. (-s, — ), building. 

gebaut, built ; inf. bauen. 

geben (gab, gegeben), to give. 

gebieten (gebot, geboten), to command. 

gebildet, cultivated. [mountains. 

Gebirge, n. (-es, -e), mountain chain ; 

gebraten, roasted; inf. braten. 

Gebrauch, m. (-es, Gebrauche), use, 
usage, custom. 

gebrauchlich, common, customary. 

gebraucht, used ; inf. brauchen. 

Geburtsort, m. birth-place. [ory. 

Gedachtnis, n. (-nisses, -nisse), mem- 

gedampft, suppressed. 

Gedanke, m. (-n, -n), thought ; in Ge- 
danken, absent minded. [tend. 

gedenken (gedachte, gedacht), to in- 

Gedicht, n. (-es, -e), poem. 

geehrt, honored ; inf. ehren. 

Gefahr,/ ( — , -en), danger. 

gef alien (gefiel, gef alien), to please. 

gefallig, pleasing ; Ihr — es Schreiben, 
your favor ; — st, if you please. 

Gefangene, m. (-n, -n), prisoner, cap- 
tive. 

Gefangnis, n. (-nisses, -nisse), prison. 

Gefecht, n. (-es, -e), battle. 

Gefrierpunkt, m. freezing point. 

gefroren, frozen ; inf. frieren. 

gegangen, gone ; inf. gehen. 

gegen, toward, against. 

Gegend,/ ( — , -en), region. 

gegenseitig, mutual. [object. 

Gegenstand, m. (-es, Gegenstande), 

Gegenteil, n. opposite ; im — , on the 

gegeniiber, opposite to. [contrary. 

Gegenwart, /. presence. 

gehabt, had ; inf. haben. 

Gehause, n. (-s, — ), case (of a watch). 

Geheimnis, n. (-nisses, -nisse), secret. 

gehen (ging, gegangen), to go. 

Gehirn, n. (-es, -e), brain. 

gehorchen, to obey. 

gehoren, to belong to. 

gehorig, due, proper. 



336 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



geht, goes ; inf. gehen. 

Geist, m.(-es, -er), ghost/ spirit. 

Geizhals, m. miser. 

gekleidet, dressed; inf. kleiden. 

gekrochen, crept ; er kam — , he came 

gekiirzt, abridged. [creeping. 

Gelarm, n. noise. 

gelassen, calm, quiet. 

Gelauten, (-s, — ), ringing. 

Geld, «. (-es, -er), money ; noch so 

vieles — , ever so much money. 
Geldmarkt, m. money market. 
Geldstiick, ;/. (-es, -e), coin. 
Gelegenheit, /. ( — , -en), opportunity. 
gelernt, learned ; inf. lernen. 
geliebt, loved ; inf. lieben ; mein Ge- 

liebter, my beloved one. [ceed. 

gelingen (gelang, gelungen), to suc- 
gelobt, praised; inf. loben. 
gelten, to be worth, be valid. 
Geliibde, n. (-s, — ), vow. [chamber. 
Gemach, «. (-es, Gemacher), room, 
Gemahl, m. consort, husband (or wife). 
Gemah'lin,/ ( — , -nen), wife. 
Gemaldegallerie, / picture-gallery. 
GemaBheit,/. accordance, 
gemischt, mixed. 
Gemiise, n. (-s, -e), vegetables. 
Gemiisegarten, m. vegetable garden. 
Gemiise-Suppe,/ vegetable soup. 
Gemiit, m. (-es, -er), mind, soul, 
gemiitlich, pleasant, comfortable. 
genannt, named, called; inf. nennen. 
genau, exact. 
genug, enough. 
Geographie,/. geography. 
Gepack, n. baggage, luggage. 
gerade, exactly, just ; straight, even, 
gerechnet, reckoned; inf. rechnen. 
Gerechtigkeit,/. justice. 
Gerede, n. disagreeable talk, scandal. 
Gericht, n. (-es, -e), dish (of food), 
gering, little, small, simple. 
Germania, poetical name for Germany. 
gern, willingly, fain, gladly. 



Gesammtbevolkerung, total population. 

Gesang, m. (-es, Gesange), song. 

Gesangbuch, n. song book. 

Geschaft, m. (-es, -e), business. 

geschaftig, busy. 

Geschaftsbureau, n. business office. 

Geschaftsfiihrer, m. business manager. 

Geschaftsmann, m. business man. 

Geschaftsreisende, m. commercial trav- 
eller. 

geschehen (geschah, geschehen), to 
happen, be done. 

Geschichte,/. (— , -n), story, history. 

geschickt, skillful. [race. 

Geschlecht, n. (-es, -er), sex, gender, 

Geschmeide, n. (-es, — ), jewelry. 

GeschoB, n. (-es, -e), shot. 

Geschrei, n. outcry. 

geschrieben, written ; inf. schreiben. 

geschwind, swift. 

gesehen, seen; inf. sehen. [ion. 

Gesell(e), m. (-n, -n), fellow, compan- 

Gesellschaft,/ ( — , -en), company. 

Gesellschaftsabend, m. evening party. 

Gesetz, «. (-es, -e), law. 

gesetzgebend, law-making. 

gesetzlich, lawful. 

Gesicht, n. (-es, -er), face, countenance. 

gespannt, intense. 

Gesprach, n. (es, -e), conversation. 

Gestade, n. (-es, -e), shore, bank. 

Gestalt,/ ( — , -en), form. 

gestern, yesterday. 

gestorben, died ; inf. sterben. 

gestreng, stern, strict ; gestrenger Herr, 
your excellence. 

gesund, healthy; adv. healthful; der 
Gesunde, the healthy person. 

gesungen, sung ; inf. singen. 

getan, done ; inf. tun. 

Getrabe, n. trot. 

getragen, carried ; inf. tragen. 

Getrank, n. (-es, -e), drink. 

Getreide, n. (-s, -e), grain. 

getreu, faithful. 






GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



337 



geiibt, practiced ; inf. iiben. 

gewachsen, grown ; inf. wachsen. 

ge waff net, armed. 

gewahren, to grant, afford, [violence. 

Gewalt, /. ( — , -en), force, authority, 

gewaltig, powerful. 

Gewand, n. (-s, Gewander), garment. 

Gewandhaus, n. name of a concert hall 

in Leipsic. 
Gewicht, n. (-es, -e), weight. 
gewiB, certain. 
Gewissen, n. conscience, 
gewohnlich, usual. 
gewohnt, accustomed, 
geworden, become; inf. werden. 
gewiinscht, wished, ordered. 
gib, give; imperative of geben. 
ging, went ; inf. gehen. [tree. 

Gipfel, m. (-s, — ), summit, top of a 
Gitter, n. (-s, — ), grate, bars, 
glanzen, to shine. 
Glaube, m. (-ns), belief. 
glauben, to believe, suppose, imagine, 
gleich, adj. like, alike, same, equal to ; 

adv. immediately ; Gleiches mit Glei- 

chem, like for like, " tit for tat." 
gleichgesinnt, like-minded, 
glitzern, to glitter. 
Glocke,/. ( — , -n), bell, clock. 
Glocklein, n. (-s, — ), little bell, 
glorreich, glorious. 
Gliick, n. luck, fortune. 
gliicklich, happy, fortunate. 
Gliickwunsch, m. good wish. 
gliihen, to glow. 
Glut,/ (— , -en), glow. 
Gnade, / grace, mercy ; Eure Gnaden, 

your grace. [spect). 

gnadig, good, gracious (a title of re- 
Goethe-Haus, the birthplace of Goethe. 
Gold, n. gold ; golden {adj.) made of 
goldgelb, golden yellow. [gold. 

Goldmine,/. ( — , -n), gold-mine. 
Gold-Orange,/ golden orange. 
Goller, n. (-S, — ), doublet, jacket. 



Goslar, the name of a town. 

gotish, Gothic. 

Gott, m. (-es, Gotter), God. 

gottlob, thank God. 

Grab, n. (-es, Graber), grave. 

graben (grub, gegraben), to dig. 

Grad, m. (-es, -e), degree. 

Graf, m. (-en, -en), count. 

gramen, to grieve. 

Grammatik, / ( — , -en), grammar. 

Gras, n. (-es, Graser), grass. 

graBlich, horrible. 

Gratulation,/ ( — ,-en), congratulation. 

gratulieren, to congratulate. [afraid. 

grauen, to be terrified ; mir graut, I am 

Grausamkeit,/ ( — , -en), cruelty. 

grausen, to be terrified. 

greifen (griff, gegriffen), to grasp. 

Greis, m. (-es, -e), old man. 

Grenadier, m. (-s, -e), grenadier. 

Griffel, tn. (-s, — ), slate-pencil. 

Grille,/ ( — , -n), cricket. [coin). 

Groschen, m. (-s, — ), groshen (a small 

groB, large, great. 

groBartig, splendid. 

GroBvater, m. grandfather. 

griin, green. 

Grund, m. (-es, Griinde), ground, cause; 

zu Grunde gehen, to fail. 
Grundbesitz, m. landed estate. 
griinden, to found, establish. 
Griinder, m. (-s, — ), founder. 
griinen, to become green, thrive ; die 

griinenden Hoh'n, the blooming 
griiBen, to greet, salute. [heights. 

gulden = golden. 
Gummischuh, m. rubber shoe. 
Gurke,/ ( — , -n), cucumber. 
Gut, n. (-es, Giiter), property, estate, 
gut, good. 
Gute,/ kindness, 
gutgenug, goodenough. 
giitig, kind, good. 
Gutmiitigkeit,/ kindness. 
Gutsherr, m. landlord, proprietor. 



338 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Gymnasium, (-s, Gymnasien), a school 
for the classics and ancient languages 
(prep, for the university). 



Haar, n. (-es, -e), hair. 

haben (hatte, gehabt), to have. 

Hafen, m. (-s, Hafen), harbor, haven. 

Hagelkorn, n. hailstone. 

hageln, to hail. 

Hahn, m. (-es, Hahne), cock ; den — 

spannen, to cock a gun. 
halb, half. 

Halite,/ (— , -n), half. 
Halle,/. (— , -n), hall. 
halten (hielt, gehalten), to hold, keep : 



fest 



to hold fast ; Wacht 



keep watch, to guard ; an sich — , to 

restrain one's self. 
Haltung,/ ( — , -en), manner, style. 
Hand,/ ( — , Hande), hand. 
Handchen, n. (-s, — ,) little hand. 
handeln, to act ; unrecht — gegen, to 

do wrong to. 
Handlung,/ ( — , -en), action, conduct. 
Handschrift,/ handwriting. 
Handschuh, m. glove. 
hangen (hing, gehangen), to hang. 
Hannover, Hanover (a city). 
Harke,/ (— , -n), rake. 
harren, to wait anxiously. 
Harz, m. the Harz mountains. 
HaB, m. hate. 
hassen, to hate. 
haBlich, ugly, hateful. 
hatte, had ; inf. haben. [knot. 

Haubchen, n. (-s, — ), little crest, top- 
Hauch, m. (-es, -e), breath. 
Haupt, n. (-es, Haupter), head, chief. 
Haupt-Agentur,/ chief agency. 
Haupt- Autoritat, / chief authority. 
Hauptf orm, / principal part (of verb). 
Hauptmann, m. captain. 
Hauptsatz, m. principal clause. 



Hauptstadt, /. capital. 

Haus, n. (-es, Hauser), house; zu 
Hause, at home. 

Hausflur,/ hallway, corridor. [wi.'e. 

Hausfrau,/ lady of the house, house- 

Hauslein, n. (-s, — ), little house. 

hauslich, domestic. 

Haustier, n. domestic animal. [ben. 

heb — herauf , pick up ; inf. herauf 'he- 

heben (hob, gehoben), to lift. 

Heer, n. (-es, -e), army. 

Heerfiihrer, m. commander, chieftain. 

heftig, violent. 

Heide,/ ( — , -n), heath, heather. 

Heidenroslein, n. little heath-rose. 

heilig, holy, sacred. 

Heimat,/ home, native land. 

heimlich, secretly. 

heimtuckisch, treacherous. 

Heinrich, Henry. 

heiraten, to marry. 

heiB, hot. 

heiBen, (hieB, geheiBen), to be called, 
to have a name ; es heiBt, it is said ; 
er heifit, his name is 

heiter, happy, joyous. 

heizen, to heat. 

Held, vi. (-en, -en), hero. 

helfen, (half, geholfen), to help. 

hell, clear, bright. 

Heller, m. a small coin, not now in use. 

her, here, a prefix indicating motion to- 
wards the speaker, hin und her, to 
and fro. 

herab 'fallen, to fall down. 

herab'lassen, to condescend. 

heran'schleichen, to sneak up. 

herauf 'heben, to pick up. 

herauf'holen, to bring up. 

herauf'kommen, to come up. 

heraus'geben, to give out, give up. 

heraus'reiten, to ride out. 

herbei'eilen, to hasten up to. 

herbei'fliegen, to fly near. 

herbei'fuhren, to lead in, cause. 




GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



339 



Herbst, m. (-es, -e), autumn, fall. 

herein ! come in ! 

herein'gucken, to look in, peek in. 

herein'kommen, to come in. 

herein'ziehen, to draw in. 

heffallen, to fall upon. 

hei/fliegen, to fly about (here). 

her'kommen, to come ; wo kommst du 
her ? whence comest thou ? 

Hermann, hero who delivered Germany 
from Roman dominion. 

Hermannsland, poetical for Germany. 

Herr, m. (-n, -en), sir, lord, master, Mr. 

her/reichen, to reach here, give over. 

Herrenhaus, n. mansion. 

Herrin,/ ( — , -nen), mistress, lady. 

herrlich, glorious, splendid. 

Herriichkeit, f. ( — , -en), splendor. 

herrschen, to rule. 

her'sagen, to recite. 

her'stellen, to make ready. 

herum'kurieren. to treat (for illness). 

herum'spazieren, to walk about. 

herun'tersetzen, to make lower, to re- 
duce. 

hervor'ragend, important, eminent. 

hervor'steigen, to ascend. 

hervor'strecken, to stretch forth. 

Herz, n. (-flus, -en), heart. 

Herzensblut, n. heart's blood. 

herzig, lovely. 

herzinnig, heartily. 

herzlich, hearty. 

Hessen, a state of the German empire. 

Heu, n. hay ; — ernte, hay harvest. 

heute, to-day ; — morgen, this morning; 
— iiber acht Tage, a week from to- 

heutzutage, now-a-days. [day. 

Hexe,/. ( — , -n), witch, sorceress. 

hier, here. 

Hilfe,/ help. 

hilfreich, helpful. 

Hilfsverb, n. auxiliary verb. 

himmelgrofi, as big as the sky. 

Himmelsbogen, m. arch of heaven. 



hin, away, past, lost. 
hinab'drucken, to suppress, press down, 
hinab'fallen, to fall down, 
hinab'genommen, taken down; inf. 

hinabnehmen. 
hinab'sinken, to sink down, 
hinab'steigen, to descend, 
hinauf fiihren, to conduct up. 
hinauf gehen, to ascend, 
hinauf klettern, to climb up. 
hinauf schauen, to look up. 
hinauf tragen, to carry up. 
hinaus'gehen, to go out. 
hindern, to hinder. 
fcindurch, throughout. 
hinein'blicken, to look into, 
hinein'dringen, to press in, fill, 
hinein'gucken, to peek into, 
hinein'schleichen, to steal into, 
hinein'treten, to walk in. 
hin'flieBen, to flow on, away, 
hing, hung; inf. hangen. 
hin'gehen, to go along. 
hin'gesetzt (sich), seated himself. 
Hinsicht,/ ( — , -en), respect, 
hin'streuen, to scatter about, 
hinter, behind. 
hinterlassen, to leave behind, 
hinun'tersteigen, to descend. 
hinweg, away. 

hinzu'fiigen, to add. [proach. 

hinzu'kommen, to come to (a place) ap- 
Hirte, m. (-n, -n), shepherd. 
hob, lifted ; inf. heben. 
hob — auf, picked up ; inf. auf heben. 
Hoch ! high ; inierj. Hurrah ! 
Hof, m. (-es, Hofe), yard, court, 
hoffen, to hope. 
Hoffnung,/ ( — , -en), hope. 
Hoff nungsgriin, n. good hope. 
Hofleute, pi. courtiers, 
hoflich, courteous, polite, 
Hoflichkeit,/. politeness. 
Hofraum, m. court yard." 
hoh = hoch, high. 



340 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 






Hohe, /. (— , -en), height; in die — 

werfen, to toss up. 
hohl, hollow. 

Hohle,/. ( — , -n), cave, cavern, 
hold, lovely, charming. 
holen, to fetch. 
Holz, u. (-es, Holzer), wood. 
Holzlage,/. woodroom. 
horbar, audible. 
horch ! hark ! listen ! 
horchen, to listen. 
hdren, to hear. 

Hose,/ ( — , -n), pants, pantaloons. 
Hotel, n. (-s, -s), hotel. 
hub — hob, lifted ; inf. heben. 
hiibsch, pretty. 
Hiigel, m. (-s, — ), hill. 
Hund, m. (-es, -e), dog. 
Hunger, m. hunger; — haben, to be 

hungry; — leiden, to suffer hunger. 
Hut, m. (-es, Hate), hat ; /. guard, pro- 
hiiten, to keep, guard. [tection. 

Hiiter, m. (-s, — ), defender, protector, 
Hutgeschaft, n. hat store. [keeper. 

Hutmacher, m. hatter. 
Hiitte,/. (— , -n), hut. 



ihr, her, their. 

ihrige (der, die, das), hers, theirs (87, 8). 

im = in dem, in the (105). 

immer, immerdar, always, continually. 

Inbrunst,/! ardor, deep emotion. 

indem, while. 

Indien, India. 

Inland, n. inland. 

innehalten, to stop, halt. 

innere (der, die, das), inner, interior. 

innig, heartily. 

ins = in das, in the (105). 

Inspektor, m. (-s, -en), overseer. 

interessant, interesting. [self. 

interessieren (sich), to interest one's 

irren, to err. 



Irrtum, m. (-s, Irrtiimer), error, mis- 
Isabeau, Isabeau. [take. 

Italien, Italy. 



ja, yes, surely, indeed, however. 

Jagdhorn, n. hunting horn. 

jagen, to hunt. 

Jahr, n. (-es, -e), year. 

Jahreswechsel, m. New Year. 

Jahreswende, /. change of seasons, new 

year. 
Jahreszeit,/ season of the year. 
Jahrmarkt, m. annual fair. 
Januar, m. January, 
jawohl, yes indeed. 
je, ever, always. 
jeder, (-e, -es), each, every, 
jederman, everybody. 
jedoch, however, 
jemand, anyone. 
jenseit, on the otner side, 
jetzig, present. 
jetzt, now; nocn — , stfll. 
Johann, John, 
juchhe ! hurrah 1 
Jude, m. (-n, -n), Jew. 
Jugend,/ youth. 
Jugendzeit,/ time of youcn. 
Juli, m. July. 
jung, young. 
Jungfrau, /. maiden. 
Jiingling, m. (-s, -e), youth, 
jiingst, recently. 
Juni, m. June. 
Juwel, n. (-es, -en), jewel. 



K 

Kaffee, m. coffee. 

Kafig, m. (-s, -e), cage. 

Kahn, m. (-es, Kahne), boat. 

Kairo, Cairo. [/. empress. 

Kaiser, m. (-s, — ), emperor; Kaiserin, 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



34> 



Kaiserreich, n. empire. 

Kajiite,/. ( — , -n), cabin (of a ship). 

Kalbsbraten, m. roast veal. 

kalt, cold. 

Kalte,/. cold. 

kam, came ; inf. kommen. 

Kamerad, m. (-en, -en), comrade. 

Kamm, m. (-es, Kamme), comb. 

kammen, to comb. [room. 

Kammer, f ( — , -n), chamber, bed- 

Kammerlein, n. little sleeping room. 

Kampf, m. (-es, Kampfe), struggle. 

Kanarienvogelchen, n. little canary bird. 

kann, can ; inf. konnen. 

Kanne,/. ( — , -n), can. 

Kanonengebriill, n. roar of cannon. 

Karte,/. ( — , -n), card. 

Kartoffel,/. ( — , -n), potato. 

Kartoffelsalat, m. potato salad. 

Kastchen, n. (-s, — ), little box. 

Kasten, m. (-s, — ), box. 

Katalog, m. (-s, -e), catalogue. 

Kathchen, Kitty, dim. of Katharine. 

Katze,/ (— , -n), cat. 

kaufen, to buy. 

kaum, scarcely. 

kehren, to turn. 

kehrt, turns ; inf. kehren, — nicht wie- 

der, returns not again. [ an y (87). 

kein, keine, kein, //. keine, no, not 
Keller, m. (-s, — ), cellar. 
Kellner, m. (-s, — ), waiter. 
kennen, to know ; — lernen, to become 

acquainted with. 
kennt, knows ; inf. kennen. 
Kerl, m. (-s, -e), fellow. 
Kern, m. (-es, -e), kernel. 
Kind, n. (-es, -er), child. 
Kindchen, n. (-s, — ), little child. 
Kinderchen, pi. little children. 
Kindergarten, m. kindergarten. 
Kinderstube, / nursery. 
kindlich, childish. 
Kinn, n. (-es, -e), chin. 
Kirche,/. ( — , -n), church. 



Kirchhof, m. churchyard, graveyard. 

Kirschbaum, m. cherry tree. 

Kirsche,/. ( — , -n), cherry. 

Klage,/ ( — , -n), complaint. 

Klagelied, n. mournful song. 

klagen, to complain, lament. 

klaglich, sad, mournful. 

Klang, m. (-es, Klange), sound. 

klar, clear. 

Kleid, n. (-es, -er), dress, clothing. 

klein, little, small. 

Kleinod, n. (-s, -e), treasure. 

Klingel,/ (— , -n), little bell. 

klingeln, to ring (as a little bell). 

Klingen, n. musical sound. 

klingen (klang, geklungen), to sound. 

klirren, to clash, sound aloud. 

klopfen, to knock. 

Kluft,/. ( — , Kliifte), chasm, gorge. 

klug, intelligent. 

Knabe, m. (-n, -n), boy. 

knapp, close, abrupt. 

Knecht, m. (-es, -e), farm servant. 

Knie, n. (-es, -e), knee. 

Knopf, m. (-es, Knopfe), button. 

Knosplein, n. (-s, — ), little bud. 

kochen, to cook. 

Kocher, m. (-s, — ), quiver (for arrow). 

Koffer, m. (-s, — ), trunk. 

Kohl, m. cabbage. 

Koln, Cologne (a city). 

kommen (kam, gekommen), to come. 

Kommissionar, m. commissioner. 

Komodiantin,/ comedienne. 

Konig, m. (-s, -e), king. 

Konigin,/ ( — , -nen), queen. 

koniglich, royal. 

Konigreich, n. kingdom. 

Konigskind, n. king's child. 

Kb'nigssohn, m. king's son, prince. 

Konigs-Standarte, /. royal standard. 

Konigstochter, f king's daughter. 

konnen, can, to be able. 

Kontinent, m. continent. 

konvenieren, to please, suit. 



342 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Konversations-Lexikon, n. encyclope- 
Konzert, n. (-es, -e), concert. [dia. 
Kopf, m. (-es, Kbpfe), head. 
Kopfchen, n. (-s, — ), little head. 
Kopfkissen, n. pillow. 
kopfschiittelnd, shaking the head. 
Kopfweh, n. headache. [tion. 

Korperschaft, / corporation, organiza- 
Kost,/ food. 
kostbar, expensive, 
kosten, to cost ; to taste, 
kostlich, precious, delightful. 
Kraft,/. (— , Krafte), strength. 
Kramerin,/ peddler woman. [(79). 
krank, sick ; der Kranke, the sick one 
Krankheit,/. ( — , -en), sickness, [land. 
Kranz, m. (-es, Kranze), wreath, gar- 
kranzen, to wreathe, crown. 
Kraut, n. (-es, Krauter), herb, plant. 
Kreide,/ chalk, crayon. 
Kreis, m. (-es, -e), circle, 
kreuchen = kriechen, to creep. 
Kreuzer, m. a small silver coin, 
kriechen (kroch, gekrochen), to creep. 
Krieg, m. (-es, -e), war. 
kriegen, to get, obtain ; to make war. 
Kriegsfall, m. case of war. 
Krone,/ ( — , -n), crown. 
Krug, m. (-es, Kriige), pitcher. 
Kriimchen, n. (-s, — ), little crumb. 
Kiiche,/ ( — , -n), kitchen. 
Kuckuck, m. (-s, -e), cuckoo. 
Kugel,/ (— , -n), ball, bullet. 
Kuh,/ ( — , Kiihe), cow. 
kiihl, cool, 
kiihlen, to cool. 

Kuhreihen, m. a melody to call cows, 
kummern, to concern. 
Kunde, m. (-n, -n), customer. 
Kunde,/ ( — , -n), intelligence, news, 
kiinftig, future. 

Kunst,/ ( — , Kiinste), art, skill. 
Kupfer, n. copper. 
kurz, short, shortly. 
Kiirze,/ brevity. 



Kurzweil, /. jest, amusement. 

kiissen, to kiss. 

Kutscher, m. (-s, — ), coachman. 



lacheln, to smile. 

Laden, m. (-s, Laden), store (shop). 

laden, to load ; invite. 

lag, lay ; inf. liegen. 

Lager, n. (-s, — ), couch, camp, resting 

place ; Lagerbier, n. beer that has 

lain in storage to improve. 
Lamm, n. (-es, Lammer), lamb. 
Lammchen, n. little lamb. 
Land, n. (-es, Lander), land, country. 
landen, to land. 
Landesmark, /. boundary. 
Landhaus, n. country house, mansion. 
Landler, m. waltz music. 
Landmann, m. countryman, farmer. 
Landvogt, m. governor, 
lang, long. 

langen (nach), to reach for. 
Langeweile,/ weariness, Fr. ennui. 
langsam, slow, 
langst, long ago, long since, 
langweilig, tiresome, 
lassen, to let, leave, 
lastig, troublesome. 
Lastwagen, m. lumber wagon, 
lateinisch, Latin. 
Laub, n. (-es), foliage, leaves. 
Laube,/ ( — , -n), arbor. 
Lauf, m. (-es, Laufe), course, running, 
laufen (lief, gelauf en), to run ; herum- 

— , to run around; kam gelaufen, 

came running (138, 2). 
Laune,/ ( — , -n), humor, whim. 
Laut, m. (-es, -e), sound, 
laut, loud, aloud ; prep, according to. 
lauten, to sound ; lautet auf, relates to. 
lauten, to ring. 
Leben, n. (-s), life. 
leben, to live ; lebe hoch ! Hurrah ! — 

Sie wohl ! farewell ! 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



343 






lebhaft, lively. 

ledig, free, unmarried. 

leer, empty. 

legen, to lay. 

Lehnstuhl, m. arm-chair, 

Lehrbuch, n. text-book. 

Lehre,/. ( — , -n), teaching, lesson. 

lehren, to teach. 

Lehrer, m. (-s, — ), teacher. 

Lehrer-Seminar, n. Normal School. 

lehrreich, instructive. 

Leib, m. (-es, -er), body. 

Leibgarde,/ body guard. 

Leiche,/. ( — , -n), corpse. 

leicht, light, easy. 

leichtbeschwingt, light-winged. 

Leid, n. (-es), harm, hurt; einem ein 

Leids tun, to hurt, harm one. 
leiden (litt, gelitten), to suffer ; permit; 

er leidet an Fieber, he suffers with 
leider, alas, unfortunately. [fever. 

leihen (lieh, geliehen), to lend. 
Leipzig, Leipsic. 
leise, lightly, softly, 
leisten, to render; einen Dienst — , to 
leiten, to lead. [render a service. 

Lenz, m. (-es, -e), Spring. 
lernen, to learn, study. 
Lesebuch, n. reading book. 
lesen (las, gelesen), to read. 
Leseiibung, / reading exercise, 
letzt, last. 

leuchten, to shine, lighten. 
Leute, //. people. 
Licht, n. (-es, -er), light. 
lieb, dear ; am liebsten, super I. ^/"gern 

(80, 5); — haben, to love, like. 
Liebchen, n. beloved one. 
Liebe,/ love. 
lieben, to love, like, 
liebenswiirdig, amiable, lovely. 
lieblich, lovely. 
Lieblingshund, m. pet dog. 
liebreich, lovely. 
Lied, n. (-es, -er), song, tune. 



liegen (lag, gelegen), to lie. 

liegt, lies ; inf. liegen. 

Lilie,/. (— ,-n), lily. 

Lilienfinger, m. lily-finger. 

Limonade,/. lemonade. 

Linde,/. ( — , -n), linden-tree. 

Lineal, n. (-s, -e), ruler, straight-edge. 

Linie,/ ( — , -n), line. 

link, left ; links, to the left ; ( — han- 

dig), left-handed. 
List,/. ( — , -en), trick, art. 
loben, to praise. 
Loch, n. (-es, Locher), hole, 
locken, to lure, entice. 
Lorbeer, m. (-s, -en), laurel. 
Lorelei, a fabled sorceress of the Rhine, 
los, loose, free ; — werden, to get rid 

of ; gebt ihn — , set him free, 
loschen, to quench. 
los'reiBen, to tear away, rescue. 
Lowe, m. (-n, -n), lion. 
Luft,/ (— , Liifte), air. 
liigen (log, gelogen), to tell a lie. 
Lungenentziindung, / inflammation of 

the lungs. 
Lust,/. ( — , Liiste), desire, pleasure, 
lustig, happy, joyous. 
Lustspiel, n. comedy. 
lyrisch, lyric. 



M 

machen, to make ; das macht nichts, 

that is no matter. 
Macht,/ ( — , Machte), might, power, 
mag, may ; inf. mogen ; das mag sein, 

that may be. 
Mai, m. May (the month). 
Maid,/ maid. 
maien, to be like May; ,,weil's Leben 

mai't," in youth. 
Mainz, Mayence (a city). 
Mai, n. (-es, -e), time ; einmal, once, 
malerisch, picturesque. [said. 

man, one, they, people ; — sagt, it is 



344 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



mancher (-e, -es), many a ; //. manche, 
many ; manches, many a thing. 

manchmal, sometimes. 

Mandat, n. (-es, -e), command. 

mangelhaft, deficient. 

Mann, m. (-es, Manner), man. 

mannicher, = mancher, many a. 

Mantel, m. (-s, Mantel), mantle, cloak, 

Mar,/ tale. [robe. 

Marchen, n. (-s, — ), legend, fable. 

Mark,/, mark, the unit of money value. 

Marmelstein, m. marble. 

Marmorbild, n. marble statue. 

Marz, m. March. 

MaB, n. (-es, -e), measure. 

maBig, moderate. 

Material, n. (-s, -e), material. 

Mathilde, Matilda. 

matt, faint, exhausted, limp. 

Matte,/ ( — , -n), mat, greensward. 

Mauer,/ ( — , -n), wall. [animal). 

Maul, n. (-es, Mauler), mouth (of an 

Maultier, n. mule. 

Maus,/ ( — , Mause), mouse. 

Mauseturm, m. mouse-tower. 

Mecklenburg, a German state. 

Mecklenburger, m. a citizen of Mecklen- 

Meer, n. (-es, -e), sea, ocean. [burg. 

mehr, more. 

mehren, to increase. 

meiden (mied, gemieden), to avoid. 

mein, my ; der, die, das meinige, mine. 
(87, 8). 

meinen, to mean, think, say. 

Meinung, / ( — , -en), meaning, inten- 
tion, opinion. 

meist = meistenteils, for the most 
part ; generally. 

Meister, tn. (-s, — ), master. 

Melodei = Melodie,/. (— , -n), melody. 

Mensch, m. (-en, -en), man, human 
being. 

Menschenmenge, / crowd of people. 

merken, to observe. 

messen (maB, gemessen), to measure; 



sich — mit, to be a match for, to be 
Messer, n. (-s, — ), knife. [equal to. 
Messing, n. brass. 
Meuterei,/ ( — , -en), mutiny. 
Mignon,/ favorite, darling. 
Milch,/ milk, 
militarisch, military. 
mir, to me (82, 1). 
MiB^eschick, n. misfortune, 
mit'bringen, to bring with one. 
Mitglied, n. member. 
Mitleid, n. pity, sympathy. 
mit'nehmen, to take with one. [dinner. 
Mittag, m. noon ; zu — essen, to eat 
mit'teilen, to inform, impart. 
Mittelfinger, m. middle finger. 
mittelmaBig, middling good. 
Mittelpunkt, 771. central point, center, 
mitten, in the midst. 
Mittwoch, m. Wednesday. 
mobliert, furnished (as a house). 
Mode,/ ( — , -n), fashion; Frau — , 

dame Fashion. 
modern, modern, 
mogen, may. 
moglich, possible ; moglichst warm, 

as warm as possible. [nels. 

Mokkabohne, / Mocha beans or ker- 
Mokkakaffee, m. Mocha coffee. 
Monat, m. (-s, -e), month ; vor sechs 

Monaten, six months ago. 
Mond, 771. (-es, -e), moon. 
Montag, m. Monday. 
Monument, 71. (-s, -e), monument. 
Mops, m. (-es, -e), pug dog. 
Mord, m. (-es, -e), murder. 
Morder, m. (-s, — ), murderer. 
Morgen, m. (-s, — ), morning; heute 

— , this morning. 
morgen, to-morrow; — friih, early to- 
morrow morning. 
Morgengesang, m. morning song. 
Morgenrot, n. morning-red, dawn, 
morgens = des Morgens, of a morning, 

in the morning. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



345 



morgenschon, beautiful as the morning. 
Morgenstrahl, m. morning light. 
Morgenstunde, / morning hour, 
miide, tired. 

Miihe,/ ( — , -n), trouble, pains. 
Muhme,/. ( — , -n), aunt, nurse. 
Miinchen, Munich (a city). 
Mund, m. (-es, Miinder), mouth. 
Miindlein, n. (-s, — ), little mouth. 
Miindung, /. ( — , -en), mouth (of a 
Miinster, m. (-s, — ), cathedral, [river). 
munter, lively. [coin. 

Miinze,/. ( — , -n), coin ; Gold — , gold 
murmeln, to -murmur, mutter. 
Museum, »/ (-s, Museen), museum. 
Musik,/ music. [of music. 

Musik-Konservatorium,?z. conservatory 
Musik-Unterricht, m. instruction in 
musizieren, to make music. [music. 
muB, must ; inf. miissen. 
miissen, must. 
muBig, idle, indolent. 
Muster, n. (-s, — ), sample. 
Musterwort, n. specimen word. 
Musterzeitung,/. fashion paper. 
Mut, m. (-es), spirit, courage. 
Mutter,/. ( — , Mutter), mother. 
Mylord, my Lord. 
Myrte,/ ( — , -n), myrtle. 



N 



nach, after, to, according to ; — und — , 
by degrees ; weinen — , to weep for. 

Nachbar, m. (-s, -n) ; Nachbarin, /. 
( — , -nen), neighbor. [hood. 

Nachbarschaft, /. ( — , -en), neighbor- 

nachdem, after. 

Nachen, m. (-s, — ), boat. 

NachguB, m. another cup. 

nachlaBig, careless. 

Nachmittag, m. afternoon. 

Nachmittagsspazierritt, afternoon ride 
(on horseback). [tion. 

Nachricht,/. ( — , -en), news, informa- 



nachst, nearest, next. 
Nacht, / (— , Nachte), night. 
nachtlich, nightly. 
Nachtlied, n. evening song. 
Nadel, / ( — , -n), needle. 
Nadelbiichslein, n. little needle-box. 
nahe, near; naher, comp. ^/"nahe. 
nahm, took ; inf. nehmen. 
Nahnadel,/. sewing needle. 
nahrhaft, nourishing. 
Nahrung,/ food, nourishment. 
Name, m. (-ns, -n), name; nur dem 

Namen nach, only by name, 
namens, named. 
Namensfest, n. birthday. 
namlich, namely. 
Narr, m. (-en, -en), fool; einen zum 

Narren halten, to make a fool of one. 
narrish, foolish. 
naB, wet. 

naBkalt, damp and cold, 
national, national. [ment. 

National-Denkmal, n. national monu- 
Natur,/ ( — , -en), nature. 
natiirlich, natural, of course. 
Nebel, m. (-s, — ), fog, mist. 
Nebelstreif, m. streak of mist. 
neben, near, by the side of. 
Nebensatz, m. dependent clause. 
neblich, misty, foggy. 
nehmen (nahm, genommen), to take. 
nein, no. 

Nelke,/ (— , -n), pink. [call. 

nennen (nannte, genannt), to name, 
Nest, n. (-es, -er), nest. 
Netz, n. (-es, -e), net, web. [new. 

neu, new; etwas Neues, something 
neugierig, curious, anxious. 
Neuigkeit,/. ( — , -en), news. 
Neujahr, n. New Year. 
neulich, recently, the other day. 
nicht, not ; nichts, nothing. 
Nichtraucher, m. non-smoker. 
Nickel, «. nickel. 
nicken, to nod. 



346 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



nie, niemals, never, 
nieder, down. 

nie'derbeugen, to bow down, 
nie'derneigen, to bow down, [sit down, 
nie'dersetzen, to set down ; (sich), to 
nie'derstoBen, to knock down, 
nie'derwerfen, to throw down, 
niedrig, low, humble. 
niemals, never. 
niemand, nobody, no one. 
nimm, imperative of nehmen, to take. 
noch, yet, still; — nicht, not yet; — 

so viel, ever so much. 
nochmals, once more, 
norddeutsch, North-German. 
Not,/. ( — , Note), need, distress. 
notig, necessary. 

Novellenschreiber, m. novel writer. 
nun, now ; — gut, very well. 
nur, only. 

NuB,/. (— , Niisse), nut. 
niitzlich, useful. 



Ob, if, whether, although ; als — , as if; 

— auch, although. 
Oben, above, up there. 
oberherrlich, superior. 
Obgleich, although. 
Obst, n. fruit. 
Obstbaum, m. fruit tree. 
Obstgarten, m. orchard. 
Oder, /. a river of Germany. 
Oder, or. 

Ofen, m. (-s, — ), stove, 
often, open, 
offentlich, public, 
offnen, to open. 
oft, often. 

Ohne, without. [foolish. 

Ohnewitz, a name meaning without wit, 
Ohr, n. (-es, -en), ear. 
Opernhaus, n. opera-house, 
ordentlich, decently. 



Ordnung,/. ( — , -en), order. 
Ort, m. (-es, Orter or Orte), place. 
Osterreich, Austria. 
Ostsee,/ the Baltic sea. 



Paar, n. (-es, -e), pair ; ein paar, a few. 
Pacht,/. ( — , -en), rent, lease. 
Pachter, m. (-s, — ), farmer, tenant. 
Pacht geld, n. rent-money (for land). 
Packet, n. (-es, -e), package. 
Palast, m. (-es, Palaste), palace. 
Papier, n. (-es, -e), paper. 
Paradies, n. paradise. 
Park, m. (-es, -e), park. 
Passagier, m. passenger. 
passen, to fit, suit. 
Patin,/. ( — , -nen), godmother. 
Patron, m. (-s, -e), patron, fellow. 
Pause,/ (— , -n), pause. 
Pension,/ ( — , -en), boarding house. 
Person,/ ( — , -en), person. 
Personlichkeit,/ ( — , -en), personage. 
Pfarrer, m. (-s, — ), pastor, preacher. 
pfeifen (pfiff, gepfiffen), to whistle. 
Pfeil, m. (-es, -e), arrow. 
Pferd, n. (-es, -e), horse. 
Pfirsich, m. (-s, -e), peach. 
Pfirsichbaum, m. peach-tree. 
Pflanze,/ ( — , -n), plant, 
pflanzen, to plant. [tomed to. 

pflegen, to take care of; to be accus- 
Pflicht,/ (— , -en), duty. 
Pfund, n. (-es), pound. 
Pike,/ (— , -n), pike. 
Plan, m. (-es, Plane), plan, 
plattdeutsch, low German. 
Platz, m. (-es, Platze), place, spot ; — 

nehmen, to take a seat, 
plotzlich, sudden. 
pochen, to rap, knock. 
Politik,/ politics. 
politisch, political. 
Polizei,/ police. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



347 



Polizeidiener, m. policeman. 

Polizist, m. policeman. 

Popanz, m. bugbear, scarecrow. 

Portier, m. (-s, -s), porter, door-keeper. 

Portion,/ ( — , -en), portion. 

Porto, n. postage. 

Post,/. (— , -en), post, mail; mit der 

— , by mail. 
Postamt, n post office. 
Postanweisung,/ post office order. 
Postmarke,/ postage stamp. 
prachtvoll, splendid. 
Pranger, m. (-s, — ), pillory. 
pranget, shines, glows ; inf. prangen. 
Prasentierteller, m. server. 
Preis, m. (-es, -e), prize, price. 
PreuBen, Prussia. 
preuBisch, Prussian. 
Privatschule,/ private school. 
Probe,/ ( — , -n), test, proof, rehearsal. 
Prosit ! (Lat.) much good may it do you ! 
priifen, to examine, test. 
Priifung,/ ( — , -en), test, rehearsal. 
Puff ! bang ! 
Pult, n. (-es, -e), desk. 
Punktum, enough said, that is all. 
Purpur, m. purple. 
Purpurrose,/ purple rose. 

Q 

Quadrat, n. (-es, -e), square. 
Quartier, n. (-es, -e), quarters (rooms). 
Quell, m. (-s, -e), spring. 

R 

Rabe, m. (-n, -n), raven. 

Rad, n. (-es, Rader), wheel. 

Rand, m. (-es, Rander), edge, brink. 

Rang, m. (-es, Range), rank. 

rasch, quick. 

rasen, to rage, go mad. 

rastlos, restless, [gen, to take counsel. 

Rat, m. (-es, Rate), counsel; — pfle- 



Ratsel, n. (-s, — ), puzzle, riddle. 

Raubtier, n. beast of prey. 

Rauch, m. (-es), smoke ; — coupS, 

rauchen, to smoke. [smoking car. 

Raum, m. (-es, Raume), space, room. 

rauschen, to rustle. 

Realgymnasium, n. same as Real- 

schule with Latin added. 
Realschule,/ a school of practical arts, 

sciences and modern languages. 
Re'aumur, a thermometer now gener- 
ally superseded in Germany by the 

Celsius (see p. 304). 
Rechenbuch, n. arithmetic, [count, bill. 
Rechnung, / ( — , -en), reckoning, ac- 
recht, right, real; — haben, to be right ; 

rechts, to the right. 
Recht, n. (-es, -e), right ; euch soil — 

werden, you shall have justice. 
Rede, / ( — , -n), speech, talk; — 

stehen, to answer for. 
reden, to speak, to say. 
redlich, honest. 
Kegel,/ (— , -n), rule. 
regelmafiig, regular. 
Regen, m. rain. 
Regenbogen, m. rainbow. 
Regenschirm, m. umbrella. 
Regentropfen, m. raindrop. 
Regenwasser, n. rain-water. 
regieren, to govern, rule. 
Regierung,/ ( — , -en), government. 
Regierungsform,/ form of government. 
Regiment, n. government. 
regnen, to rain. 

Reich, n. (-es, -e,) kingdom ; adj. rich. 
reichen, to reach. [empire. 

Reichskanzler, m. chancellor of the 
Reichstag, m. imperial diet. 
Reigen {or Reihen), m. (-s, — ), a 

dance with song and music. 
rein, clear, pure. 
Reis, n. (-es, -er), twig, branch. 
Reise,/ ( — , -n), journey. 
Reiseanzug, m. traveling suit. 



348 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Reisegeld, n. traveling money, fare. 

Reisende, m. (-n, -n), traveler. 

Reisige, m. (-n, -n), trooper. 

reiBen, (riB, gerissen), to tear. 

reiten (ritt, geritten), to ride. 

Reiter, Reitersmann, m. horseman. 

reizen, to charm. 

Reliquien, pi. relics. 

rennen (rannte, gerannt), to run. 

Republik,/. ( — , -en), republic. 

Respekt, m. (-es), respect, regard. 

Reverenz,/. reverence. [river. 

Rhein, m. Rheinstrom, m. the Rhine 

Rheinreise, /. Rheintour,/ the tour of 

Richter, m. (-s, — ), judge, [the Rhine. 

Richtung,/. ( — , -en), direction. 

rief , called ; inf. rufen. 

Riese, m. (-n, -n), giant. 

Rigiberg, in. name of a mountain. 

Rindfleisch, n. beef. 

Ring, m. (-es, -e), ring. 

Ringfinger, m. ring-finger. 

rinnen (rann, geronnen), to run, flow. 

Rinnstein, m. gutter. 

RiB, m. (-sses, -sse), crack, opening. 

Ritter, m. (-s, — ), knight. 

Rittergut, m. landed estate. 

ritterlich, knightly. 

Ritterwort, n. word of honor. 

Rock, m. (-es, Rocke), coat. 

Rolle,/ ( — , -n), roll, role (in a play). 

rollen, to roll. 

Roman, m. (-s, -e), romance. 

romantisch, romantic. 

Rose,/. ( — , -n), rose. 

Rosenband, n. rose-wreath. 

rosig, rosy. 

Rb'slein, n. (-s, — ), little rose. 

RoB, n. (-sses, -sse), horse. 

Rostbraten, m. roast beef. 

rot, red. 

rotlich, reddish. 

Riicken, m. (-s, — ), back. 

Riickkunft, /. return. 

Ruf, m. (-es, -e), call 



rufen, to call. 

Rune,/ rest. 

ruhig, quiet. 

rund, round. 

Russe, m. (-n, -n), Russian. 

RuBland, Russia. 



S 




Saal, m. (-es, Sale), hall. 

Sache,/ ( — , -n), thing. 

sachlich, neuter (gender). 

Sachse, m. (-n, -n), Saxon. 

Sachsen, Saxony. 

saen, to sow (seed). 

sagen, to say, tell. 

sagenhaft, fabled. 

sah, saw ; inf. sehen. [instrument). 

Saite, / ( — , -n), string (of a musical 

Salat, m. (-es, -e), salad, lettuce. 

Salz, n. (-es, -e), salt. 

Same(n), m. (-ns, -n), seed. 

sammeln, to gather, collect. 

Samstag, m. Saturday. 

sanft, soft, gentle. 

sang, sang ; inf. singen. 

sank, sank ; inf. sinken. 

Sans Souci (French), without care, the 

name of a palace at Potsdam. 
satt, full ; — werden, to have enough. 
Satz, m. (-es, Satze), sentence, 
sauer, sour, hard. 
Saule,/ (— , -n), column, 
sauseln, to rustle. 
Scene {or Szene),/ ( — , -n), scene. 
Schachtel,/ ( — , -n), box. 
Schade(n), m. (-ns, Schaden), harm. 
Schadel, m. (-s, — ), skull. [matter. 
schaden, to harm ; schadet nichts, no 
schadigen, to harm. 
Schaf , n. (-es, -e), sheep, 
schaffen, to do, create. [Schaferin. 
Schafer, m. (-s, — ), shepherd; fern. 
Schaffner, m. (-s, — ), conductor, 
schalkhaft, roguishly. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



349 



Schalmei,/. ( — , -en), a reedpipe. 

S chart jahr, n. leap-yt ar. 

Scham,/ shame. 

Schande,/. shame, disgrace. 

scharen v sich), to gather about one. 

scharf, sharp. 

Schatten, m. (-s, — ), shadow, shade. 

Schatz, m. (-es, Schatze), treasure. 

schauen, to see, look at, schau an ! 
see ! 

Schaukelbrett, m. swinging board. 

Schaum, m. (-es, Schaume), foam. 

Schauspiel, n. drama, play. 

scheiden (geschied, schieden, to sepa- 
rate, depart. [to appear. 

scheinen (schien, geschienen), to shine, 

schellen, to ring (a bell). 

Schemel, m. (-s, — ), foot-stool. 

Schere,/ ( — , -n), shears; die kleine 
— , the scissors. 

scheren, to shear ; to care about ; was 
schert mien das, what do I care for 
that. 

Scherenschleifer, m. shears -grinder. 

Scherz, m. (-es, -e), joke. 

scherzen, to joke, jest. 

Scheune, / ( — , -n), barn. 

schicken, to send. 

schieben (schob, geschoben), to shove. 

S chief ertaf el,/, slate. 

schien, seemed ; inf. scheinen. 

schieSen (schoB, geschossen), to shoot. 

Schiff, n. (-es, -e), ship, boat. 

Schiffer, m. (-s, — ), boatman. 

Schiffergesang, m. boatman's song. 

Schifflein, n. (-s, — ), little boat. 

Schild, m. (-es, -e), shield; n. (-es, 
-er), sign-board. 

Schildwache,/. guard, sentinel. 

schimmern, to shine. 

Schimpf, m. (-es, -e), disgrace. 

schimpfen, to insult. 

Schirm, m. screen ; Regen — , umbrella. 

Schlacht,/. (— , -en), battle. 

Schlaf, m. (-es), sleep. 



schlafen (schlief, geschlafen), to sleep. 
Schlafer, m. (-s, — ), sleeper. 
Schlaf kammerlein, n. little bedroom. 
Schlaf zimmer, n. bedroom. [strike. 
schlagen (schlug, geschlagen), to beat, 
schlecht, bad. 
schleichen (schlich, geschlichen), to 

sneak ; hinein — , to steal into. 
Schleier, m. (-s, — ), veil. 
Schlesien, m. Silesia. [close. 

schlieBen (schloB, geschlossen), to 
Schlitten, m. (-s, — ), sleigh, sled. 
SchloB, 11. (-es, Schlosser), castle. 
Schluck, m. (-es, -e), sip, swallow. 
Schmaus, m. (-es, -e), feast; einen 

— halten, to make a feast. 
schmecken, to taste. 
schmeichelhaft, nattering. 
schmeicheln, to flatter. 
Schmerz, m. (-es, -en), pain, trouble. 
schnarren, to rattle. [snow-drop. 

Schnee, m. (-s), snow; — glockchen, 
schneiden (schnitt, geschnitten), to cut. 
Schneider, m. (-s, — ), tailor; f. -in. 
schneien, to snow, 
schnell, quick. 

schnitzen, to carve. [ding. 

Schokaladen-Pudding, chocolate pud 
schon, already. 

schon, beautiful, fine; very well. 
Schonheit,/. (— , -en), beauty. 
Schopfer, m. (-s, — ), creator. 
'SchoB, m. (-es, SchoBe), lap. 
Schottland, n. Scotland. 
Schrecken, m. (-s), terror, horror. 
schrecklich, dreadful. 
Schreibbuch, n. writing book. [write. 
schreiben (schrieb, geschrieben), to 
Schreiben, n. (-s, — ), writing; letter. 
schreien (schrie, geschrieen), to cry, 
Schrein, m. (-es, -e), coffin, [scream. 
schreiten (schritt, geschritten), to step, 

stride. 
Schrift, / ( — , -en), writing ; Schrif- 

ten, pi. books, works. 



35o 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



Schriftstiick, n. document. 

Schritt, m. (-es, -e), step. 

schroff, steep. 

Schuh, m. (-es, -e), shoe. 

Schulbesuch, m. school attendance. 

Schuld,/. ( — , -en), debt, guilt. 

schuldig, guilty, indebted. 

Schuldigkeit, /. (— , -en), indebted- 
ness, debt. 

Schule,/ ( — , -n), school. 

Schiiler, m. (-s, — ), scholar, pupil, 

Schurke, m. (-n, -n), rascal. 

Schufi, m. (-sses, Schiisse), shot. 

Schustersfrau,/. shoemaker's wife. 

schiitteln, to shake. 

Schiitze, m. (-n, -n), hunter, archer. 

schiitzen, to shelter, defend. 

Schiitzenhof, m. meeting place for 

schwach, weak. [marksmen. 

Schwalbe,/. (— , -n), swallow. 

Schwalbenpaar, n. pair of swallows. 

schwamm, swam ; inf. schwimmen. 

schwank, flexible, wavering. 

schwanken, to stagger. 

schwarz, black. 

schwatzen, to chatter, prattle. 

Schweif, m. (-es, -e), tail, [be silent. 

schweigen (schwieg, geschwiegen), to 

schweigend, silently. 

Schwein, n. (-es, -e), pig, swine. 

Schweiz,/. Switzerland. 

schwer, heavy, difficult, severe. 

Schwert, n. (-es, -er), sword. 

Schwertgeklirr, n. clang of swords. 

Sch wester,/ ( — , -n), sister. 

schwierig, difficult. 

schwimmen (schwamm, geschwom- 
men), to swim. 

Schwimmer, m. (-s, — ), swimmer. 

schwinden (schwand, geschwunden), 
to vanish, disappear. 

schwmdlich, dizzy. 

Schwindsucht,/. consumption. 

Schwur, m. (-es, Schwiire), vow, oath. 

Sedan, a city in France. 



See, tn. (-s, -n), lake ; /. ( — , -n), sea. 
Seehafen, m. ocean harbor. 
Seele,/. ( — , -n), soul. 
Seereise,/ sea voyage. 
Segen, m. (-s, — ), blessing, 
segnen, to bless. 

sehen (sah, gesehen), to see. [osity. 
Sehenswiirdigkeit, /. ( — , -en), curi- 
Sehnen, n. longing. 
Sehnsucht,/ longing. 
sehr, very, very much, 
sei, imperative of sein, to be. 
Seide, / silk. 
Seife,/. ( — , -n), soap. 
sein, seine, sein, //. seine ; der, die, 
das seinige, his (87, 1-8). [weeks. 
seit, since ; — drei Wochen, for three 
seitdem, since. 
Seite,/. ( — , -n), side, page, 
seiber, self, myself ; sieh doch — , see 
selbst, self. [for yourself, 

selig, blessed, happy, 
senden (sandte, gesandt), to send 
Sendung,/. (— , -en), package, 
senkrecht, perpendicular. 
Senne, m. (-n, -n), herdsman. 
Service, n. service (dishes). 
setzen, to set, put ; (sich), to take a seat. 
sicher, sure, safe, certain, 
sichern, to assure. 
siedend, boiling; inf. sieden. 
Siedepunkt, m. boiling point. 
Sieger, m. (-s, — ), victor, conqueror. 
Sigrist, m. sexton. 
Silber, n. silver. 

singen (sang, gesungen), to sing, 
sinken (sank, gesunken), to sink. 
Sinn, m, (-es, -e), mind, sense, thought, 
sinnen (sann, gesonnen), to meditate. 
Sitte,/ ( — , -en), custom, manners, 
sitzen (saB, gesessen), to sit. 
Sklave, m. (-n, -n), slave. 
SO, thus, so. 
sodaB, so that. 
soeben, just now. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



351 



sofort, at once, immediately. 

sogleich, immediately. 

Sohn, m. (-es, Sonne), son. 

solcher (-e, -es),//. solche, such. 

Soldat, m. (-en, -en), soldier. 

soldatisch, soldier-like. 

sollen, shall. 

Sommer, m. (-s, — ), summer. 

Sommerresidenz,/. summer residence. 

Sommerzeit,/". summer time. 

sonderbar, strange, peculiar. 

sondern, but (109, 4). 

Sonnabend, m. Saturday. 

Sonne,/ ( — , -n), sun. 

sonnig, sunny. 

Sonntag, m. Sunday. [what else ? 

sonst, else, otherwise ; was — noch ? 

Sorge,/. ( — , -n), care, anxiety. 

sorgen, to provide for. 

sorgsam, careful. 

soviel, as much, as well. 

Spanien, Spain. 

spannen, to strain, make tense ; den 

Hahn — , to cock a gun. 
Spannung,/ ( — , -en), tension, excite- 
Spargel, m. (-s, — ), asparagus, [ment. 
SpaB, m. (-es, SpaBe), joke. 
spat, late ; spater, later. 
spazieren, to go for pleasure. 
Spaziergang, m. pleasure walk. 
Spazierritt, m. pleasure ride. 
Spazierstock, m. walking-stick, cane. 
Speise,/. ( — , -n), food. 
Speisekarte, / bill of fare, 
speisen, to -eat. 

Speisezimmer, n. dining-room. 
Spektakel, m. (-s, — ), noise, show. 
Spiegel, m. (-s, — ), mirror. 
spiegelklar, very clear. 
Spiel, n. (-es, -e), play. 
Spielkamerad, m. playmate. 
Spielraum, m. room for a play, space. 
SpieB, m. (-es, -e), spear. 
Spinne,/. ( — , -n), spider, 
spinnen (spann, gesponnen), to spin. 



Spinnrad, n. spinning wheel. 
sprach, spoke, inf. sprechen. 
Sprache,/. ( — , -n), language, speech. 
sprang, sprang, jumped ; inf. springen. 
sprechen (sprach, gesprochen), to 

speak. [exercise. 

Sprechiibung,/ ( — , -en), conversation 
Sprichwort, n. proverb. 
sprieBen (sproB, gesprossen), to sprout, 
springen (sprang, gesprungen), to 

spring, jump. [ing. 

Spruch, m. (-es, Spriiche), speech, say- 
spiilen, to rinse, 
spiiren, to feel, trace. 
Staat, m. (-es, -en), state. 
Staatsmann, m. statesman. 
stach, stung ; inf. stechen. 
Stadt,/. (— , Stadte), city. 
Stadtteil, ni. part of the city. 
stahl, stole ; inf. stehlen. 
Stahlfeder,/ steel pen. 
Staket, n. (-s, -e), picket fence. 
Stammbuch, n. album. 
stammen, to originate. 
Standuhr,/. shelf -clock. 
Stange,/ ( — , -n), pole. [hard. 

stark, strong ; es regnet — , it rains 
Statt,/ place, stead, 
statt, instead of. 

stechen (stach, gestochen), to sting. 
stecken, to stick, hide. [chasm). 

Steg, m. (-es, -e), footplank (over a 
stehen (stand, gestanden), to stand. 
stehlen (stahl, gestohlen), to steal, 
steif, stiff. [cend. 

steigen (stieg, gestiegen), to rise, as- 
steigern, to raise, compare. 
steil, steep. 

Stein, ni. (-es, -e), stone. 
Stelle,/. ( — , -n), place, spot, 
stellen, to place, set. 
Stellung,/. (— , -en), position. 
Stern, m. (-es, -e), star, 
stets, always, continually, [the pansy. 
Stiefmiitterchen, n. little stepmother, 



352 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



stieg — ab, descended ; inf. ab'steigen. 

Stil, m. (-es, -e), style. 

still, still. 

Stille,/. silence. 

still'schweigen, to keep silence. 

Stimme,/. ( — , -n), voice. 

Stock, m. (-es, Stocke), stick, cane, 

story of a house. 
Stoff, m. (-es, -e), stuff, material, 
stolz, proud. 
storen, to disturb. 
Strafe,/. ( — , -n), punishment. 
Strahl, m. (-es, -en), ray. 
strahlen, to shine, radiate. 
Strand, m. (-es, -e), strand, shore. 
Strafie,/ (— , -n), street. 
StraSenbahn,/ street railroad. 
StraBen-Toilette,/. street costume. 
Strauch, m. (-es, Straucher), shrub. 
streben, to strive, [strike to the ground. 
strecken, to stretch ; zu Boden — , to 
Streich, m. (-es, -e), stroke, blow. 
streiten (stritt, gestritten), to quarrel, 

darum — , to quarrel about it. 
streng, severe. 

Strohhut, tn. straw hat. [river. 

Strom, m. (-es, Strome), stream, a large 
stromabwarts, down stream. 
Strumpfband, n. garter. 
Stubenmadchen, n. servant maid. 
Stuck, n. (-es, -e), piece. 
Stiickchen, n. (-s, — ), little piece. 
Student, m. (-en, -en), student, 
studieren, to study. 
Stuhl, tn. (-es, Stiihle), chair, 
stumm, dumb, silent. 
Stunde,/. ( — , -n), hour. 
stundenlang, for hours. 
Sturm, m. (-es, Stiirme), storm, 
stiirmisch, stormy. 
stiirzen, to rush, plunge, overthrow, 
stiitzen, to lean, support, 
suchen, to seek, 
siidwarts, southwards. 
Bummen, to hum. 



Siinde,/ ( — , -n), sin. [volume. 

Supplementband, m. supplementary 
siiB, sweet. 
System, n. (-s, -e), system. 



Tabaksdose,/ tobacco-box. 

Tadel, m. blame, fault. 

Tafel,/ (— , -n), table, tablet; black- 
board ; bei — , at dinner, [one day. 

Tag, vi. (-es, -e), day; eines Tages, 

taglich, daily. 

Tal, n. (-es, Taler), valley. 

Tanne, /. (— , -n), Tannenbaum, m. 
fir tree, Christmas tree. 

tanzen, to dance. 

tapfer, brave. 

Tasche,/ ( — , -en), pocket. 

Taschentuch, n. pocket handkerchief. 

Taschenuhr,/ watch. 

Tasse,/. ( — , -n), cup. [fact. 

Tat, / ( — , -en), deed ; in der — , in 

tat, did ; inf. tun. 

Taube,/. ( — , -n), dove. 

taumeln, to stagger. 

tauschen, to mislead, deceive. 

Teil, m. (-es, -e), part. 

teilen, to divide, share. See mit'teilen. 

Tellerlein, n. little plate. 

Temperanzler, m. (-s, — ), teetotaler. 

Terasse,/ ( — , -n) terrace. [will. 

Testament, n. (-es, -e), testament, 

teuer, dear. 

Theater, n. (-s, — ), theatre. 

tief, deep. 

Tiefe,/. (— , -n), depth. 

Tier, n. (-es, -e), animal. 

Tierchen, n. (-s, — ), little animal. 

Tiergarten, m. zoological garden. 

Tinte,/. ( — , -n), ink. 

Tisch, m. (-es, -e), table. 

Tischlein, n. (-s, -e), little table. 

Titel, m. (-s, — ), title. 

Tochter,/. ( — , Tochter), daughter. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



353 



Tdchterlein, «. little daughter. 
Tod, m. (-es), death. 
Ton, m. (-es, Tone), tone. [gate. 

Tor, m. (-en, -en), fool; n. (-es, e), 
tot, dead. 

Totenbahr,/ death bier. 
Tour,/. ( — , -en), tour. 
Tracht,/. (— , -en), costume, 
traf , hit, met ; inf. treffen. 
trage, lazy, idle. 

tragen (trug, getragen), to carry, wear. 
Trane,/ (— , -n), tear. 
trauen, to trust, venture. 
Trauerkleid, n. mourning dress. 
trauern, to mourn, to droop. 
Traum, m. (-es, Traume), dream, 
traumen, to dream, 
traun, in truth, really. 
traurig, sad. 

treffen (traf, getroffen), to hit, meet, 
trefflich, excellent. [ry on, do. 

treiben (trieb, getrieben), to drive, car- 
trennbar, separable. 
trennen, to separate, divide. 
Trennung,/. ( — , -en), separation. 
Treppe, /. (— , -n), stairs, die — hin- 
auf , up stairs ; die — hinab, down 
treu, faithful. [stairs. 

Treue,/. faithfulness. 
treuliebend, truly loving, 
trinken (trank, getrunken), to drink. 
trocken, dry. 

Trommel,/ ( — , -n), drum. 
Trompete,/ (— , -n), trumpet. 
Tropfen, m. (-s, — ), drop. 
Trost, m. consolation, 
trotz, in spite of. 
trotzen, to defy. 
triiben, to soil, roil. 
Tuch, 11. (-es, Tiicher), cloth, shawl. 
Tugend,/ ( — , -en), virtue. 
Tulpe,/ (— , -n), tulip. 
tun (tat, getan), to do. 
Tiir, (— , -en), door, 
tiirmen, to tower, mount high. 



Turmuhr,/ tower-clock. 
Tyrann, m. (-en, -en), tyrant. 

U 

Ubel, n. (-s, — ), evil, indisposition. 

iiben, to practice. 

iiber, over, above, across ; for. 

iiberall, everywhere. [overeat. 

iiberfressen (iiberfraB, iiberfressen\ to 

iibergeben (iibergab, iibergeben), to de- 

iiberhaupt, in general. [liver over. 

Ubermacht,/ superior power. 

iiberreichen, to deliver, hand over. 

Uberrock, m. overcoat. [to overflow. 

ii'berschwellen (schwoll, geschwollen), 

Uberschwemmung, / flood. 

ii'bersetzen, to set across. 

iiberset'zen, to translate. 

iibertreffen (iibertraf, iibertroffen), to 

iibertrieben, excessive. [surpass 

iiberzeugen, to convince. 

iibrig, over, remaining. 

Ubung,/ ( — , -en), exercise. 

Ufer, n. (-s, — ), bank (of a river). 

Uhr,/ ( — , -en), watch, clock. 

um, around ; — zu, in order to ; — 
willen, for the sake of. 

umarmen, to embrace. 

um'drehen, to turn over. 

umflattern, to flutter about. 

Umgebung,/ ( — , -en), surroundings. 

umgiirten, to gird on. 

Umhangtuch, n. shawl. 

umher, around. 

umkranzen, to wreathe. 

um'sehen (sah, gesehen) (sich), to 

umsonst, in vain. [look about. 

Umstand, m. (-es, Umstande), cere- 
mony, circumstance. [dence. 

Unabhangigkeit, / ( — , -en), indepen- 

unartig, naughty. 

Unbedacht, m. thoughtlessness. 

unbegrenzt, unbounded. 

unbekannt. unknown. 



354 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



unbestimmt, indefinite. 

und, and. 

ungebildet, uncultivated. 

ungeduldig, impatient. 

ungefahr, about. [monster. 

Ungeheuer, n. (-s, — ), atrocious thing, 

Ungemach, n. (-es, -e), misfortune. 

Ungliick, n. misfortune. 

ungliicklich, unfortunate. 

Universitat,/. ( — , -en), university. 

Unkosten,//. expenses. 

unmutig, ill-humored. 

unrecht, wrong. 

Unschuld,/ innocence. 

unschuldig, innocent. 

unser (-e, — ),//. unsere, our; der, die, 
das unsrige, ours. 

unten, below. 

unter, under. 

unterbrechen (unterbrach, unterbro- 
chen), to interrupt. 

unterhalten (unterhielt, unterhalten), 
to entertain, converse. 

Unterhaltung, /. ( — , -en), conversa- 

unterirdisch, subterranean. [tion. 

unterliegen (unterlag, unterlegen), to 
be defeated. [men. 

unternahm, undertook ; if if. unterneh- 

unternehmen (unternahm, unternom- 
men), to undertake. [ m g- 

Unternehmung,/ ( — , -en), undertak- 

Unterricht, m. (-s), instruction. 

Unterrichtsmethode, /. method of in- 
struction. 

Unterschied, m. (-es, -e), difference. 

untertanig, humble. 

un'tertauchen, to dive. 

untrennbar, inseparable. 

unverletzt, unharmed. 

unverschamt, impudent, shameless. 

unverstandlich, unintelligible. 

unweit, not far from. 

Uri, name of a Swiss canton. 

Urlaub, m. leave of absence, furlough. 

Ursprung, m. (-es, Urspriinge), origin. 



Variation,/. (— , -en), variation. 

Vase,/ ( — , -n), vase. 

Vater, m. (-s, Vater), father. 

Vaterland, n. fatherland. 

Veilchen, n. (-s, — ), violet. 

verachten, to despise. 

Verachtung,/. disrespect. 

verarbeiten, to use up, employ. 

verbessern, to repair ; sich — , to cor- 
rect one's self. [ment. 

Verbesserung, / (— , -en), improve- 

verbeugen (sich), to bow. [tion. 

Verbeugung, / ( — , -en), bow, saluta- 

verbinden (verband, verbunden), to 
bind up. 

verbindlich, kindly; ich danke ver- 
bindlichst, many thanks. 

verborgen, concealed ; im Verborgenen, 
in concealment. [brennen. 

verbrannt, burned (cremated) ; inf. ver- 

Verbrechen, n. (-s, — ), crime. 

Verbrecher, m. (-s, — ), criminal. 

verdanken, to owe, be indebted to. 

Verderben, n. destruction ; v. to spoil ; 
perish. 

verdienen, to deserve, merit, earn. 

verehren, to honor, revere. 

vereinigt, united. 

Verfasser, m. (-s, — ), author. 

verfehlen, to miss. 

verf iigen (sich) to go, betake one's self. 

Verfiigung, / ( — , -en), disposal, ser- 
vice. 

vergangen, past ; inf. vergehen. 

vergebens, vergeblich, in vain. 

vergessen (vergaB, vergessen), to for- 

vergeBlich, forgetful. [get. 

vergiB, forget ; imp. of vergessen. 

VergiBmeinnicht, n. forget-me-not. 

Vergniigen, n. (-s, — ), pleasure. 

Vergniigungsort, m. pleasure resort. 

vergraben, buried. 

verhaften, to arrest. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



355 



verheiraten, to marry. 

verkaufen, to sell. 

verkauft, sold; inf. verkaufen. 

verkehren, to converse, associate with 

Verlagsbuchhandlung,/ book publish 

ing house. [quire 

Verlangen, n. desire ; v. to demand, re 
verlassen (verlieB, verlassen), to leave 
Verleger, m. (-s, — ), publisher. 
verletzen, to harm, wound, violate 

sich — , to hurt one's self. 
verlieren (verlor, verloren), to lose. 
verlor, lost ; inf. verlieren. [lost. 

verloren, lost; — gegangen, (gone) 
Verlust, m. (-es, -e), loss. 
vermeiden (vermied, vermieden), to 

shun, avoid. 
vermieten, to let (lodgings). 
vernehmen (vernahm, vernommen), 
verodet, deserted. [to hear. 

Verrat, m. treason. 
Verrater, m. (-s, — ), tiaitor. 
verrenken, to sprain, 
verriickt, crazy, insane. 
Vers, m. (-es, -e), verse. 
versagen, to refuse. 
verschaffen, to provide. 
verscheuchen, to drive away, 
verschieden, different. 
verschlingen (verschlang, verschlun- 

gen, to swallow, devour, 
verschwand, vanished, disappeared ; 

inf. verschwinden. 
verschwinden (verschwand, ver- 

schwunden), to disappear, vanish, 
versohnen, to reconcile. 
versprach, promised ; inf. versprechen. 
versprechen (versprach, versprochen), 

to promise. 
verstanden, understood ; inf. verstehen. 
verstandlich, intelligible. [self. 

verstecken (sich), to hide, conceal one's 
verstehen (verstand, verstanden), to 

understand. 
Versuch, m. (-es, -e), attempt, trial. 



versuchen, to try. 

verteilen, to divide. 

vertraut, acquainted, trusted. 

vertreten (vertrat, vertreten), to repre- 

verursachen, to cause. [sent. 

verwahren, to lay up, save, guard, keep. 

verwegen, bold, daring; Verwegener! 
m. bold one. 

verwelken, to wither, wilt. 

verwenden (verwandte, verwandt), to 
use, employ. 

Verwickelung, / (— , -en), complica- 
tion, plot. 

verwiinschen, to bewitch, enchant. 

verwiinscht ! intejj. confound it 1 

verzagt, in despair. 

verzaubern, to enchant, bewitch. 

verzeihlich, pardonable. 

Verzweiflung,/ despair. 

Vetter, m. (-s, -n), cousin. 

Vieh, n. (-es), cattle. 

viel, much ; viele, many. 

vielleicht, perhaps. 

vierspannig, with four horses. 

Vierteljahr, n. quarter of a year. 

Vogel, m. (-s, Vogel), bird ; —nest, n. 
bird's nest. 

Voglein, n. (-s, — ), little bird. 

Vogt, m. (-es, Vbgte), governor. 

Volk, n. (-es, Volker), people. 

Volksschule, / public school. 

voll, full. 

vollkommen, complete. 

Vollmacht,/. ( — , -en), authority. 

vollstandig, complete. 

von, of, from ; — Eisen, made of iron. 

vor, before. 

voraus, in advance. 

vorbei'fahren, to pass by. 

vorbei'fliehen, to flee past. 

vorbei'gehen, to pass by. 

vordere, front. 

vor'fahren, to drive in front of. 

vorgehalten, held before (one) ; inf. vor- 
halten, 



356 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



vorig, former ( — e Woche), last week. 
vor'kommen, to occur, call, visit. 
vor'legen, to lay before (one), to show. 
Vorliebe,/. taste, passion, 
vorratig, ready, on hand. 
vor' setzei: , to set before (one). 
vortrefflich, excellent, very well, 
vorii'bergehen, to pass by. 
vorwarts, forward ; — heiBt es hier, 

forward is the word here, 
vor'zeigen, to exhibit, display, 
vor'ziehen, to prefer. 
Vulkan, m. (-es, -e), volcano. 

W 

wachsen (wuchs, gewachsen), to grow. 
Wacht,/. ( — , -en), watch ; — halten, 

to stand guard. 
Wachter, m. (-s, — ), watcher, guard, 
wacker, brave. 

Waffenknecht, m. man-at-arms. 
Wagen, m. (-s, — ), wagon, carriage. 
wagen, to venture. 
wahlen, to choose. 
Wahlrecht, n. right of suffrage. 
Wahn, m. (-es), delusion. 
wahnsinnig, insane. 
wahr, true ; niclit — ? is it not so ? 
wahrend, during. 
wahrhaftig, indeed, truly. 
Wahrheit,/. (— , -en), truth, 
wahrlich, truly, indeed. 
wahrscheinlich, probably. 
Waisenkind, n. orphan-child. 
Wald, m. (-es,Walder), woods, forest. 
wallen, to undulate (of water). 
Walther, Walter (Tell's boy). 
Wand,/. (— , Wande), wall. 
Wanderer, m. (-s, — ), traveler, wan- 
Wandtafel,/ blackboard. [derer. 

Wanduhr,/. wall-clock. 
Wange,/. ( — , -n), cheek. [then. 

wann, when; dann und — , now and 
warf , threw ; inf. werfen. 



warm, warm. 

Warte,/. ( — , -n), watchtower. 

warten, to wait ; to take care of. 

Wartesaal, m. waiting-room. 

warum, why. 

was, what (sometimes = warum, why). 

Wasche,/. washing. 

waschen (wusch, gewaschen), to wash. 

Waschfrau,/. washerwoman. 

Waschmange,/ mangle (for ironing). 

Wasser, n. (-s, — ), water. 

Wasserfall, m. waterfall, cataract. 

Wasserpatscher, m. water-paddler. 

weben (wob, gewoben), to weave. 

Weber, m. (-s, — ), weaver. 

Webersche, relating to Weber. 

Weckuhr,/. alarm-clock. 

weg, away. 

weg'fiihren, to lead away. 

weg'raumen, to clear off (a table). 

Wen, n. woe, pain. 

wehen, to wave, float, blow. 

Wehmut,/ sadness. 

wehren (sich), to defend one's self. 

Weib, n. (-es, -er), wife, woman. 

weiblich, feminine. 

weich, soft. 

weichen (wich, gewichen), to yield. 

Weide, / ( — , -n), willow; pasture. 

Weih, m. (-es, -e), eagle. 

Weihnachten, //. Christmas. 

Weihnachtszeit,/ Christmas time. 

weil, because, while. 

Weilchen, n. a little while. 

Wein, m. (-es, -e), wine. 

Weinberg, m. vineyard. 

weinen, to weep, cry. 

Weise,/. ( — , -n), way, manner; tune. 

weisen (wies, gewiesen), to show. 

Weisheit,/ ( — , -en), wisdom. 

weiS, know ; inf. wissen. 

weiB, white. 

weit, far, wide; weiter, further. 

Weite,/. ( — , -n), distance. 

Weizen, m. wheat. 



GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



357 



welcher (-e, -es), pi. welche, who; 

welken, to wilt, wither. [which. 

Welle,/. ( — , -n), billow, wave. 

Welt,/. (— , -en), world. 

weltberiihmt, famous. 

Weltmacht, / world-power. 

wem, to whom (go, i). 

wenden (wandte, gewandt), to turn. 

wenig, little. 

wenn, when, if. 

wer, who (90, 1). [become. 

werden (wurde or ward, geworden), to 

werfen (warf , geworfen), to throw. 

Werk, n. (-es, -e), works (of a clock). 

Wert, m. (-es, -e), worth, value ; adj. 

worth, worthy ; — halten, to esteem 

highly ; werter Herr, dear sir. 
wessen, whose (90, 1). 
Weste,/. ( — , -n), vest, waistcoat. 
Wette,/. ( — , -n), wager, bet ; um die 

— , for a wager. 
Wetter, n. (-s, — ), weather. 
Wettrennen, n. race, running match, 
wich, yielded ; inf. weichen. 
wichtig, weighty, important. 
widersetzen, to resist, 
wie, how, like ; — viele, how many, 
wieder, again, 
wie'dergeben, to give back, 
wiederholen, to repeat. 
wiederholt, repeatedly. 
wie'derkehren, to return. 
wie'dersehen, to see again ; auf Wie- 

dersehen, till we meet again, 
wiegen (wog, gewogen), to weigh ; — 

(regular) to rock ; — dich ein, rock 

thee to sleep, 
wiehern, to neigh (as horses), 
wies, showed ; inf. weisen. 
Wiese,/. ( — , -n), meadow, 
wieviel, how much ; um — Uhr, at 

what time ; der wievielte, what date 
wiewohl, though, however. (7 2 )« 

wild, wild. 
Wildheuer, m. gatherer of wild hay. 



Wildpret, n. wild game. 

Wilhelm, William. 

Wille, m. (-ns, -n), will. 

willig, willing. 

Wind, m. (-es, -e), wind. 

winken, to beckon. 

Winter, m. (-s, — ), winter. 

Winzer, m. (-s, — ), vine-dresser. 

Wipfel, m. (-s, — ), top (of a tree). 

Wirt, m. (-es, -e), landlord ; / -in. 

wissen (wufite, gewuBt), to know. 

Witwe,/. ( — , -n), widow. 

wo, where. 

Woche,/. ( — , -n), week. 

wodurch, by what. 

wofiir, for which. 

Woge,/ ( — , -n), wave. 

Wogenprall, m. roar of waves. 

woher, whence (direction toward the 

speaker). 
wohin, whither (direction away from 

the speaker) ; — gehen Sie ? where 

are you going? 
wohl, well, indeed, 
wohlan ! well ! now then ! 
wohlbekannt, well known, 
wohlbestellt, duly appointed. 
wohlgenahrt, well nourished. 
Wohlsein, n. welfare. 
Wohltater, m. (-s, — ), benefactor, 
wohltatig, benevolent. 
wohnen, to live, dwell. 
' Wohnhaus, n. dwelling-house. 
Wohnung,/ ( — ,-en), dwelling. 
Wohnungssuche,/ lookingfor lodgings. 
Wohnzimmer, n. sitting-room. 
Wolf, m. (-es, Wolfe), wolf. 
Wolke,/ (— , -n), cloud. » 
Wolkensteg, m. cloudy pathway, 
wollen, to want, will, 
womit, with what. 
wonach, after what. 
Wonne,/(— , -n), joy. 
woran, on what, of what ; — starb er ? 

of what did he die ? 



358 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



worauf, upon which. 

woraus, from what ; — besteht . . . ? 

what does . . . consist of? 
Wort, n. (-es, Worter andWorte), word. 
Worterbuch, n. dictionary. 
Wortfolge,/ order of words, 
wortlich, literally. 
Wortwechsel, m. dispute. 
wuriiber, over what, concerning what. 
WOZU, why, wherefore, for what purpose. 
Wunde,/. ( — , -n), wound, 
wunderbar, wonderful. 
wunderlich, queer, quaint, 
wundermild, very kind, 
wundern (sich), to wonder, be surprised, 
wundersam, wonderful, 
wunderschon, very beautiful. 
wundervoll, wonderful. 
Wunsch, m. (-es, Wiinsche), wish. 
wiinschen, to wish. 
Wurzel, /. ( — , -n), root. 
Wiirzlein, n, (-s, — ), little root. 



Zahl,/ ( — , -en), number, 
zahlen, to count, 
zahlreich, numerous. 
Zahnarzt, m. dentist. 
zart, tender. 
zartlich, tender, kind. 
Zauberschein, m. magic light, 
zehn, ten ; die Zehner, the tens. 
Zehnmarkstiick, n. a coin of ten marks. 
Zeichen, n. (-s, — ), sign. 
Zeigefinger, m. index finger. 
zeigen, to show, point out. [clock). 
Zeiger, m. (-s, — ), pointer (hand of a 
Zeit,/. ( — , -en), time, tense. 
Zeitform,/ tense. 
Zeitung, / ( — , -en), newspaper. 
Zeitwort, n. verb. 
Zelt, n. (-es, -e), tent. 
zerreiBen (zerriB, zerrissen), to tear in 
pieces. 



zerschlagen (zerschlug, zerschlagen) 
to beat in pieces. 

zerschmelzen (zerschmolz, zerschmol- 
zen), to melt. 

zertrat, trampled on; inf. zertreten. 

zertreten (zertrat, zertreten), to tread 
under foot. [notice). 

Zettel, m. (-s, — ), bit of paper (for a 

Zeughaus, n. armory. [go. 

Ziehen (zog, gezogen), to draw, pass, 

Ziel, n. (-es, -e), aim, mark, goal, end. 

zielen, to aim. 

ziemlich, tolerably; about. 

zierlich, delicately, nicely. 

Zifferblatt, n. dial (of a clock). 

Zimmer, n. (-s, — ), room. 

Zitat, n. (-s, -e), quotation. 

Zither,/ ( — , -n), zither (a musical in- 
strument). 

zittern, to tremble. 

zogern, to hesitate. 

zu, to, too. 

zucken, to twitch, thrill, tremble. 

Zucker, m. sugar. 

zu'decken, to cover up. 

zu'driicken, to close (as the eyes). 

zuerst, first of all. 

zufrieden, satisfied 

Zug, m. (-es, Ziige), train. 

zu'gewandt, inclined ; inf. zu'wenden. 

zugleich, at once, at the same time. 

zu'horen, to listen to. 

zum = zu dem, to the (105). 

zunachst, next. 

Zunge,/. (— , -n), tongue. 

zur = zu der, to the (105). 

zuriick, back. 

zuriick'bringen, to bring back. 

zuriick'geben, to give back, restore. 

zuriick 'kehren, to return, turn back. 

zuriick 'kommen, to come back, return. 

zuriick'schauen, to look back. 

zuriick'schicken, to send back. 

zuruck'schlagen, to strike back, turn 
back. 






GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 



359 



zuriick'ziehen, to draw back, retreat. 
zusammen, together. 
zusam' menpacken, to pack up. 
zusam'menraffen (sich), to collect one's 

self. 
zusam' menrollen, to roll up. 
zu'schauen, to look at, observe. 
Zuschauer, m. (-s, — ), spectator. 
zu'schlieBen, to close, lock, 
zu'senden, to send (to one). 
zuverlassig, reliable, 
zuweilen, sometimes. 
zu'werfen, to throw (to one). 



zwar, indeed, in truth. 
Zweck, m. (-es, -e), purpose. 
Zweig, m. (-es, -e), twig, branch, 
zweigen, to sprout, branch out. 
zweimal, twice. 
Zwerg, m. (-es, -e), dwarf. 
Zwieback, m. rusk (a kind of biscuit). 
Zwiebel,/ ( — , -n), onion, 
zwinken, to twinkle, wink, 
zwischen, between. 
zwitschern, to twitter. 
zwolf, twelve. 
zwolfmal, twelve times. 



ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. 



Note. — The references in parenthesis are to the sections of Part I. 
to the German-English vocabulary. 



See also the note 



about, etwa, ungefahr; — to do, im 

Begriffe sein zu tun. 
a (an), ein, eine, ein (30). 
accept, an'nehmen (nahm, genommen). 
acquainted, bekannt. 
act, die Tat ( — , -en) ; v. handeln. 
active, tatig. 
admire, bewundern. 
afraid of, sich fiirchten vor (159). 
afterwards, nachher. 
again, wieder, noch einmal. 
against, gegen, wider. [Wochen. 

ago, vor, seit ; two weeks — , vor zwei 
agreeable, angenehm. 
all, aller(-e, -es),//. alle (92, 10). 
along, langs. 
already, schon. 
also, auch. 
always, immer. 
American, der Amerikaner (-s, — ); 

adj. amerikanisch. 
angel, der Engel (-s, — ). . 
animal, das Tier (-es, -e). 
another, ein anderer; one — , each 

Other, einander (92, 12). 
anything, etwas (92, 13); not — , nichts. 
ape, der Arte (-n, -n). [schienen). 

appear, erscheinen (erschien, er- 
apple, der Apfel (-s, Apfel). 
arise, auf'stehen (stand, gestanden). 
arm, der Arm (-es, -e) ; — chair, der 

Lehnstuhl. 
around, urn, herum. 
arrival, die Ankunft ( — , Ankiinfte). 
arrive, an'kommen (kam, gekommen). 



as, wie ; — well — , so gut wie ; — if, 

als ob. 
ascend, hinauf'steigen (stieg,gestiegen). 
ask, fragen ; bitten (bat, gebeten). 
attentive, achtsam. 
author, der Verfasser (-s, — ); der 

Autor (-s, -en), 
autumn, der Herbst (-es, -e). 
auxiliary verb, das Hilfszeitwort. 
avoid, vermeiden (vermied, vermi.eden). 
away, weg, fort. 



bad, schlecht, bose ; the bad (one), der 

Bose. 
bag, der Sack (-es, Sacke); a — of 

diamonds, ein Sack Diamanten. 
bake, backen (buk, gebacken). 
ball, der Ball (-es, Balle); die Kugel 

(~,-n). 
bank (of earth), die Bank ( — , Banke) ; 

(for money) die Bank ( — , -en). 
barn, die Scheune ( — , -n). 
basket, der Korb (-es, Kbrbe). 
battle, die Schlacht ( — , -en). 
be, sein (war, gewesen); (146). 
be {imperative), sei, seien Sie (146). 
beam, der Balken (-s, — ). 
beast, das Tier (-es, -e) ; — ot prey, 

das Raubtier. [g en )' 

beat (strike), schlagen (schlug, geschla- 
beautiful, schon ; superl. der (die, das) 
because, weil. [schonste. 

become, werden (wurde, geworden). 

bed, das Bett (-es, -en). 

bee, die Biene ( — , -n). 



360 






ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 



361 



beer, das Bier (-es, -e). 

before, vor, ehe. 

beg, bitten (bat, gebeten). 

behind, hinter. 

believe, glauben. 

belong, gehoren (170, 3). 

below (down-stairs), unten. 

bend", biegen (bog, gebogen). 

benevolent, wohltatig. 

Berlin, Berlin. 

berry, die Beere ( — , -n). 

best, best ; the — , der (die, das) beste, 

am besten (80, 5). 
better, besser (80, 1). 
between, zwischen. 
bewitch, verwiinschen. 
bid, heiBen (hieB, geheiBen); — him 

come in, heiBen Sie ihn hereintreten. 
bill (account), die Rechnung ( — , -en). 
bind, binden (band, gebunden). 
biographical, biographisch. 
bird, der Vogel (-s, Vogel). 
bite, beiBen (biB, gebissen). 
blackboard, die Tafel ( — , -n). 
blue, blau. 

boat, das Boot (-es, -e). 
boatman, der Schiffer (-s, — ), der 

Bootsmann. 
body, der Korper (-s, — ). 
book, das Buch (-es, Biicher). 
bom, geboren ; inf. gebaren. 
both, beide ; die beiden. 
bow, der Bogen (-s, — ). 
bow, die Verbeugung ( — , -en) ; v. sich 

verbeugen. 
box, die Schachtel ( — , -n). 
boy, der Knabe (-n, -n). 
brass, das Messing (-s). 
brave, tapfer. 
bread, das Brot (-es, -e) ; two loaves 

of — ■, zwei Brote. 
break, brechen (brach, gebrochen). 
breast, die Brust ( — , Briiste). 
bride, die Braut ( — , Braute). 
bridge, die Briicke ( — , -n). 



bright, hell, klar, blank. 

bring, bringen (brachte, gebracht). 

broad, breit, weit. 

Brocken (the highest peak of the Harz 

mountains) ; the " Spectre of the — ," 

das Brockengespenst. 
brook, der Bach (-es, Bache). 
brother, der Bruder (-s, Briider). 
build, bauen. 

building, das Gebaude (-s, — ). 
bull's-eye, das Schwarze (-n). 
business, das Geschaft (-es, -e). 
but, aber. 

butter, die Butter ( — ). 
button, der Knopf (-es, Knopf e). 
buy, kaufen. 



cage, der Kafig (-s, -e). 

California, Californien. 

call, rufen (rief, gerufen) ; " nennen 
(nannte, genannt); to be called, hei- 
Ben (157, 1). 

camp, das Lager (-s, — ). 

can, konnen (konnte, gekonnt). 

canary-bird, der Kanarienvogel. 

cannot, kann nicht, konnen nicht. 

capable (of), fahig (81). 

card, die Karte ( — , -n). [pflegen. 

care, die Sorge ( — , -n) ; to take — of, 

careful, vorsichtig. 

Caroline, Karoline. 

carriage, der Wagen (-s, — ). 

carry, tragen (trug, getragen). 

case, der Fall (-es, Falle) ; in this — , 
in diesem Falle. 

cat, die Katze ( — , -n). 

catch, fangen (fing, gefangen). 

cattle, das Vieh (-es). 

cellar, der Keller (-s, — ). 

certainly, gewiB. 

chain, die Kette ( — , -n). 

chair, der Stuhl (-es, Sttihle) ; arm — , 
der Lehnstuhl. 



362 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



change, verwandeln. 

chapter, das Kapitel (-s, — ). 

charm, der Zauber (-s, — ). 

charming, reizend. 

cheap, billig. 

cheese, der Kase (-s, — ). 

cherry, die Kirsche ( — , -n). 

child, das Kind (-es, -er). 

Christian, der Christ (-en, -en). 

Christmas,//. Weihnachten ; — pres- 
ent, das Weihnachtsgeschenk. 

church, die Kirche ( — , -n). 

city, die Stadt (— , Stadte). 

class, die Klasse ( — , -n). 

clean, rein. 

clear, klar. 

cliff, die Klippe ( — , -n). 

clock, die Uhr ( — , -en). 

cloth, das Tuch (-es, Tiicher). 

coat, der Rock (-es, Rocke). 

cold, kalt ; to take — , sich erkalten. 

collection, die Sammlung ( — , -en). 

Cologne, Koln. 

color, die Farbe ( — , -n). 

comb, der Kamm (-es, Kamme); v. 
kammen. 

come, kommen (kam, gekommen); — 
back, zuruck'kommen. 

comfortable, bequem. 

command, der Befehl (-es, -e) ; v. be- 
fehlen (befahl, befohlen). 

common, gebrauchlich. 

company, die Gesellschaft ( — , -en). 

comparative, der Komparativ. 

compel, zwingen (zwang, gezwungen). 

complete, vollstandig, samtlich ; — 
works, s'amtliche Werke. 

conjugate, konjugieren. 

constantly, fortwahrend. 

construct, bilden. 

consumption, die Schwindsucht. 

contain, enthalten (enthielt, enthalten). 

continually, fortwahrend. 

contrary, on the — , im Gegenteil. 

conversation, die Konversation ( — , en). 



cool, kiihl. 

copper, das Kupfer (-s). [ben. 

copy, ab'schreiben (schrieb, geschrie- 

correct, richtig. 

cost, kosten. 

couch, das Lager (-s, — ). 

counsel, der Rat (-es, Rate). 

count, der Graf (-en, -en); v. zahlen. 

country, das Land (-es, Lander) ; in 

the — , auf dem Lande. 
cover, die Decke ( — , -n) ; v. bedecken. 
crawl, kriechen (kroch, gekrochen). 
crazy, verriickt, wahnsinnig. 
creep, kriechen (kroch, gekrochen). 
cruel, grausam ; — to, grausam gegen 

(81, 3)- 
crumb, die Krume ( — , -n) ; little — , 

das Kriimchen. 
cry, weinen. 
cup, die Tasse ( — , -n). 
cut, schneiden (schnitt, geschnitten). 



1) 



dance, der Tanz (-es, Tanze) v. tanzen. 

dangerous, gefahrlich. 

dark, dunkel. 

daughter, die Tochter ( — , Tochter). 

day, der Tag (-es, -e) ; which — of the 
month, der wievielte (72) ; the whole 
— , den ganzen Tag {ace. of time) ; by 
— , bei Tage or am Tage. 

dead, tot. 

dear, lieb, teuer. 

death, der Tod (-es). 

December, der Dezember. 

decline, declinieren. 

deed, die Tat ( — , -en). 

deep, tief. [schlagen. 

defeat, die Niederlage ( — , -n) ; v. 

deliver, befreien ; (goods) abliefern. 

denote, bezeichnen. 

desert, die Wiiste ( — , -n). 

desk, das Pult (-es, -e). 

diamond, der Diamant (-en, -en). 



ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 



363 



dictionary, das Worterbuch. 

die, sterben (starb, gestorben) ; to — of 

hunger, Hungers sterben. 
different, verschieden. 
difficult, schwer, schwierig. 
difficulty, die Schwierigkeit ( — , -en). 
dig, graben, (grab, gegraben). 
diligent, fleifiig. 

dining-room, das Speisezimmer. 
dinner, das Mittagessen. 
director, der Direcktor (-s, -en). 
disappear, verschwinden (verschwand, 

verschwunden). 
distinctly, deutlich. 
divide, dividieren, einteilen. 
do, tun (tat, getan) ; machen ; what are 

you doing ? was machen Sie ? 
dog, der Hund (-es, -e). 
door, die Tur ( — , -en). 
dove, die Taube ( — , -n). 
Dresden, Dresden. 
dress, das Kleid (-es, -er) ; die Klei- 

dung ( — , -en) ; v. kleiden, an'kleiden. 
drink, trinken (trank, getrunken). 
drive, treiben (trieb, getrieben) ; fahren 

(fuhr, gefahren). 
drown, ertrinken (ertrank, ertrunken). 
during, wahrend. 
dwell, wohnen. 
dwelling, dwelling-house, die Woh- 

nung ( — , -en). 



E 



each, jeder, -e, -es ; — other, einander. 

earth, die Erde. 

easily, leicht. 

eat, essen (aB, gegessen); — up, auf- 
essen ; (of animals) fressen ; the eat- 
ing (food), das Essen (-s). 

Edward, Eduard. 

egg, das Ei (-es, -er). 

either — or, entweder — oder. 

Elbe, die Elbe (river). 

empty, leer. 



enchant, bezaubern, verwunschen. 

encourage, ermutigen. [( — , -en.) 

end, das Ende (-s, -n) ; die Endung 

enemy, der Feind (-es, -e). 

England, England. 

English, englisch. 

enjoy, genieBen (genoB, genossen). 

enough, genug. 

enter, ein'treten (trat ; getreten) ; on 

entering, beim Eintreten. 
erect, auf'recht, gerade. 
especially, besonders. 
evening, der Abend (-s, -e) ; this — , 

heute abend, 
ever, je, jemals. 
every, jeder, -e, -es ; — body, jeder- 

mann; — time, jedesmal. 
evil, bose, iibel. 
exactly, genau. 
excellent, vortrefflich. 
except, ausgenommen. 
exercise, die (J bung ( — , -en). 
explain, erklaren. 
explanation, die Erklarung ( — , -en); 

to refer to the — , die Erklarung auf- 

suchen. 



fabulous, fabelhaft, sagenhaft. 

fall, fallen (fiel, gefallen). 

family, die Familie ( — , -n). 

far, weit ; — away, weit weg ; too — , 

zu weit. 
father, der Vater (-s, Vater). 
feed, fiittern. 
fence, der Zaun (-es, Zaune) ; hedge — , 

die Hecke ( — , -en), 
few, wenig. 

field, das Feld (-es, -er). 
find, finden (fand, gefunden). 
fine, fein, schon. 
finger, der Finger (-s, — ) ; —nail, der 

Fingernagel. 
fire, das Feuer (-s, — ). 



364 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



first, erst ; at — , zuerst. [( — , -n). 
flag, die Fahne ( — , -n) ; die Flagge 
floor, der FuBboden or der Boden (-s, 
flow, fliefien (floB, geflossen). [Boden). 
flower, die Blume ( — , -en), garden, 

der Blumengarten. 
fly, fliegen (flog, geflogen) ; — away, 

weg'fliegen ; — down, nie'derfliegen. 
fond, to be — Of, gern essen, trinken, etc. 
foot, der FuB (-es, FiiBe) ; — stool, der 

Schemel (-s, — ); three feet high, 

drei FuB hoch. 
ioXyprep. fur; conj. denn. 
forbid, verbieten (verbot, verboten). 
foreign, fremd; a — language, eine 

fremde Sprache. 
forest, der Wald (-es, Walder). 
forget, vergessen (vergaB, vergessen). 
forgetful, vergeBlich. 
form, die Form ( — , -en). 
former, f riiher ; — ly, vormals. 
fortification, die Festung ( — , -en). 
fortunate, gliicklich. 
fountain, der Brunnen (-s, — ); — pen, 

die Fiillfeder. [Main. 

Frankfort on the Main, Frankfurt am 
fresh, frisch. 

friend, der Freund (-es, -e). 
friendly, freundlich. 
frighten, erschrecken ; to be frightened, 

erschrecken (erschrak, erschrocken). 
frog, der Frosch (-es, Frosche); 

prince, der Froschkonig. 
fruit, die Frucht ( — , Friichte); das 

Obst (-es) ; — tree, der Obstbaum. 
fugitive, der Fliichtling (-s, -e). 



G 



garden, der Garten (-s, Garten). 
gardener, der Gartner (-s, — ). 
gather, sammeln. 
generous, groBmiitig. 
gentleman, der Herr (-n, -en). 
geography, die Geographie ( — , -en). 



German, der Deutsche (-n, -n) ; a — , 

ein Deutscher ; adj. deutsch. 
Germany, Deutschland; North — , 

Norddeutschland. 
get, bekommen (bekam, bekommen); 

go and — , holen. 
ghost, der Geist (-es, -er). 
giant, der Riese (-11, -n). 
girl, das Madcben (-s, — ). 
give, geben (gab, gegeben). 
glass, das Glas (-es, Glaser) ; a — of 

water, ein Glas Wasser. 
glove, der Handschuh. 
go, gehen (ging, gegangen) ; where are 

you going? wohin gehen Sie? — 

out, aus'gehen. 
gold, das Gold (-es) ; adj. golden ; a — 

pen, eine Goldfeder. 
good, gut ; — -hearted, gutherzig. 
goodness, die Giite. 
goose, die Gans ( — , Ganse). 
grammar, die Grammatik ( — , -en), 
grasp, greifen (griff, gegriffen); to — 

after, nach etwas greifen. 
grass, das Gras (-es, Graser). 
grave, das Grab (-es, Graber). 
great, groB. 

green, griin. [Erde. 

ground, der Boden (-s, Boden), die 
grow, wachsen (wuchs, gewachsen). 

H 

hair, das Haar (-es, -e). [( — , -n). 

hall, der Saal (-es, Sale); die Halle 
Hamburg, Hamburg, 
hammer, der Hammer (-s, Hammer), 
hand, die Hand ( — , Hande). 
handkerchief, das Taschentuch. 
hang, h an gen (hing, gehangen). [ver. 
Hanover ; from — , aus or von Hanno- 
happen, geschehen (geschah, gesche- 

hen). 
happy, gliicklich, frohlich ; happily, 

glucklicherweise. 



ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 



365 



Harz, der Harz (-es); — mountains, 

hastily, hastig. [das Harzgebirge. 

hat, der Hut (-es, Hiite). 

have, haben (hatte, gehabt). 

hay, das Heu (-es). 

head, der Kopf (-es, Kopfe). 

health, die Gesundheit. 

heathen, der Heide (-n, -n). 

help, h elf en (half, geholfen) ; cannot 

— it, kann es nicht vermeiden. 
Henry, Heinrich. 

her, ihr, ihre, ihr; pi. ihre ; — self, selbst. 

here, hier. [verborgen). 

hide, verstecken, verbergen (verbarg, 

high, hoch ; higher, hoher. 

himself, selbst, sich selbst. 

his, sein, seine, sein; pi. seine (87, 1). 

historical, historisch. 

hit, treffen (traf, getroffen). 

hold, halten (hielt, gehalten). 

home, die Heimat ; at — , zu Hause ; 

to go — , nach Hause gehen. 
honest, ehrlich. 
honorable, ehrenhaft. 
hope, die Hoffnung ( — , -en). 
horse, das Pferd (-es, -e). 
hour, die Stunde ( — , -en). 
house, das Haus (-es, Hauser); at the 

— Of, bei. 

how, wie ; — many, wiviele. 
however, aber, jedoch (109, 3). 
human being, der Mensch (-en, -en), 
hundred, hundert. ( 

hunger, der Hunger (-s) ; to suffer — , 
hungry, hungrig. [Hunger leiden. 

hunter, der Jager (-s, — ). 
hurry, die Eile ; v. sich beeilen. 
hurt, verletzen. 
hut, die Hiitte ( — , -n). 



ice, das Eis (-es). 
if, wenn. 
ill, krank. 



illiterate, ungebildet. 

immortal, unsterblich. 

impart (information), mit'teilen. 

important, wichtig. 

in, in, auf ; to come — , herein'kommen. 

index-finger, der Zeigefinger. 

Indian, der Indianer (-s, — ). 

indolence, die Faulheit. 

indolent, trage, faul. 

industrious, fieiflig. 

inform {one's self), erkundigen (sich). 

instead of, statt, anstatt. 

intelligent, intelligent. [ben. 

intend, beabsichtigen ; die Absicht ha- 

intention, die Absicht ( — , -en). 

interesting, interessant. 

into, in. 

invite, ein 'laden (hid, geladen). 



Jew, der Jude (-n, -n). 

jewelry, das Geschmeide (-s, — ) ; die 

Juwelen, pi. 
John, Johann. 
July, Juli, m. 
just, richtig, gerecht; —as good as, 

ebenso gut wie. 

K 

keep, behalten (behielt, behalten); to — 
watch Over, Wacht halten liber. 

key, der Schlussel (-s, — ). [schlagen. 

kill, todten, tot'schlagen (schlug, ge- 

kind, die Art ( — , -en) ; what — of, 
was f iir ein ; adj. gutig. 

kindness, die Giite. 

king, der Konig (-s, -e). 

kingdom, das Reich (-es, -e), das 
Konigreich. 

kitchen, die Kuche ( — , -n). 

knife, das Messer (-s, — ). 

knock, klopfen. [wissen (157). 

know (a person), kennen; (a fact), 



366 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



M 



lady, die Dame ( — , -en), die Frau ( — , 

lake, der See (-s, -n). [-en). 

lamb, das Lamm (-es, Lammer). 

land, Ian den. 

landed-proprietor, der Gutsbesitzer. 

landscape, die Landschaft ( — , -en). 

language, die Sprache ( — , -n). 

large, groB ; how — , wie groB. 

last, letzt, vorig; — week, vorige 

late, spat ; later, sp'ater. [Woche. 

laugh, lachen. 

lay, legen. 

lazy, tr'age, faul. 

lead-pencil, der Bleistift (-es, -e). 

leaf, das Blatt (-es, Blatter). 

learn, lernen ; learned, gelehrt. 

leact, at — , wenigstens. 

left, link ; to the — , links ; handed, 

linkhandig. 
Leipsic, Leipzig, 
lend, leihen (lieh, geliehen). 
lesson, die Aufgabe ( — , -n), die Lek- 

tion ( — , -en). 
letter, der Brief (-es, -e). 
lie, to — down, liegen (lag, gelegen) ; 

to tell a — , lugen (log, gelogen). 
life, das Leben (-s, — ). 
lift, auf'heben (hob, gehoben). 
light, das Licht (-es, -er) ; adj. leicht. 
like, lieben, gern haben ; adj. ahnlich. 
limp, hinken. 

literature, die Literatur ( — , -en). 
little, klein ; a — , ein wenig. 
live, leben ; (in a house) wohnen. 
long, lang. 
look, sehen (sah, gesehen), schauen ; 

— up, hinaufsehen ; — down, hinun- 

tersehen or hinunterschauen. 
Lord, der Herr (-n, -en), 
lose, verlieren (verlor, verloren). 
love, die Liebe ; v. lieben. 
low, niedrig. 
lyric, lyrisch. 



maid, die Jungfrau ; -servant, das 

Dienstmadchen. 
maiden, das Madchen (-s, — ). 
make, machen. 

man, der Mann (-es, Manner). 
many, viele ; how — , wie viele ; — a, 

mancher, -e, -es,//. manche. 
map, die Landkarte. •[ (-s, — ). 

mark, die Mark (a coin) ; das Zeichen 
market, der Markt (-es, Markte). 
marry, heiraten. 

master, der Herr (-n, -en), der Meister. 
match, das Ziindholz. 
Mayence, Mainz. 

may, mogen (mochte, gemocht) (148, 4). 
me, dat. mir; ace. mich (82, 1). 
measure, das MaB (-es, -e) ; v. messen, 

(maB, gemessen). 
meet, treffen (traf, getroffen). 
metal, das Metal (-s, -e). [inches. 

meter, das Meter (-s, — ), = 39.37 
memory, das Gedachtnis (-nisses, 

-nisse). 
middle-finger, der Mittelfinger. 
mighty, machtig. 
milk, die Milch. 

mine, der, die, das meinige (87, 8). 
minute, die Minute ( — , -n). 
mirror, der Spiegel (-s, — ). 
mix, mischen. 
money, das Geld (-es, Gelder) ; no — , 

kein Geld ; no — at all, gar kein Geld 

(92, 20). 
month, der Monat (-s, -e) ; what day 

of the — ? der wievielte (72). 
moon, der Mond (-es, -e). 
morning, der Morgen (-s, — ) ; adv. 

morgen ; this — , heute morgen ; to- 
morrow — , morgen friih. 
mortal, sterblich. 
most, meist, meistens ; the — of them, 

die meisten von ihnen ; — beautiful, 

der, die, das schonste. 



ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 



367 



mother, die Mutter ( — , Mutter). 
mountain, der Berg (-es, -e) ; — air, 

die Bergluft ; — spirit, der Berggeist ; 

— chain, die Gebirgskette. 
mouse, die Maus ( — , Mause). 
Mrs., Frau. 
much, viel ; very — , sehr viel ; for how 

— , fiir wie viel. 
my, mein, meine, mein, pi. meine (87, 
myself, selbst (82, 3). [1). 



N 



name, der Name (-n, -n) ; by — , dem 
Nam en nach ; what is your — ? wie 
heiBen Sie ? my — is John, ich heiBe 
Johann ; v. nennen (nannte, genannt.) 

natural, naturlich. 

naughty, unartig. 

necessary, notig. 

need, die Not ( — , Note) ; in — of (in 
want of), bediirftig (81, 1). [—in. 

neighbor, der Nachbar (-n, -n); fern. 

neither — nor, weder — noch. 

never, nie, niemals. 

new, neu. 

news, die Nachricht ( — , -en) ; die 
Neuigkeit ( — , -en), 

newspaper, die Zeitung ( — , -en). 

night, die Nacht (— , Nachte). 

no, nein ; (not any), kein (-e, — ) ; pi. 
keine ; — one, niemand, keiner. 

northward, nordlich. 

not, nicht ; is it — SO ? nicht wahr ? 

nothing, nichts. 

nourishing, nahrhaft. [tage. 

now, jetzt, nun; now-a-days, heutzu- 

nut, die NuB ( — , Niisse). 



O 



oar, das Ruder (-s, — ). 

Oblige, verbinden (verband, verbun- 

den); einem einen Gefallen tun. 
observe, beobachten. 



occur, vor'kommen (kam, gekommen). 

often, oft, haufig. 

old, alt. 

on, auf, an. 

once, einmal ; — more, noch einmal. 

one, (mem.) ein ; (pron.) man; no — , 

niemand ; — says, man sagt. 
only, nur. 

open, off en ; v. offnen, auf'machen. 
opinion, die Meinung ( — , -en); in my 

— , nach meiner Meinung. 
opposite, gegeniiber. 
or, oder. 

orange, die Apfelsine ( — , -n). 
orchard, der Obstgarten. 
Order, der Befehl (-s, -e) ; v. befehlen 

(befahl, befohlen) ; bestellen ; in — to, 

um zu. 
Orphan, die Waise ( — , -n). 
other, der (die, das) andere; another, 

noch ein ; each — , einander (92, 12). 
ought, sollte (149, 5). 
our, unser, -e, — ; pi. unsere (87, 1). 
out, aus. 

outside, auBerhalb. 
over, iiber. 
owe, schuldig sein. 
own, eigen. 



page, die Seite ( — , -n). 
pail, der Eimer (-s, — ). 
paint, die Farbe ( — , -n) ; to — a house, 

ein Haus anstreichen. 
painter, der Maler (artist) (-s, — ) ; der 

Anstreicher (house-painter) (-s, — ). 
pair, das Paar (-es, -e) ; — of shears, 

die groBe Schere ; — of scissors, die 

kleine Schere ( — , -n). 
pale, bleich ; to turn — , erbleichen 

(erblich, erblichen). 
paper, das Papier (-s, -e) ; news — , 

die Z°itung ( — , -en) ; a — of sewing 

needles, ein Brief Nahnadeln. 



368 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



paragraph, der Paragraph (-s, -en). 

parents, die Eltern,//. 

park, der Park (-es, -e or -s). 

parlor, das Besuchszimmer. 

part, der Teil (-es, -e). 

passive, passiv ; in the — voice, im 

Passivum. 
patient, der Kranke (-n, -n, or -n, -n). 
pay, bezahlen. 
peach, der Pfirsich (-s, -e). 
peak {point), die Spitze ( — , -n). 
peasant, der Bauer (-s, -n). 
pen, die Feder ( — , -n) ; a gold — , eine 

Goldfeder. 
pencil, der Bleistift (-s, -e). 
people, das Volk (-es, Volker), pi. die 

Leute. 
perfect, perfekt, vollstandig. 
perhaps, vielleicht. 

permit {consent to), leiden (litt, gelitten). 
philologist, der Philologe (-n, -n). 
photograph, die Photographie ( — , -n). 
piano, das Klavier (-es, -e). 
pick, pfliicken, — up, auf'picken, auf- 
picture, das Bild (-es, -er). [heben. 
piece, das Stuck (-es, -e). 
pitcher, der Krug (-es, Kriige). 
plant, die Pflanze ( — , -n) ; v. pflanzen. 
play, das Spiel (-es, -e); das Schau- 

spiel ; v. spielen. 
please, gefallen (gefiel, gefallen); — 

give me, bitte geben Sie mir ; as you 

— , nach Belieben; are you pleased. 

with ? freuen Sie sich liber ? 
plural, die Mehrzahl, der Plural, 
pocket, die Tasche ( — , -n). 
poem, das Gedicht (-es, -e). 
poet, der Dichter (-s, — ). 
poetry, die Poesie ( — , -n). 
police, die Polizei ; — officer, der Poli- 

zeidiener. [gen sie. 

polite, hoflich; — to them, hoflich ge- 
poor, arm. 

post-office, die Post, das Postamt. 
pound, das Pfund (-es, -e). 



pour, gieBen (goB, gegossen). 
powerful, machtig. 

praise, loben ; preisen (pries, gepriesen). 
prefer, vor'ziehen (zog, gezogen); I — , 

ich ziehe vor. [anwesend. 

present, das Geschenk (-es, -e); adj. 
president, der Prasident (-en, -en). 
pretty, schon, hiibsch. 
price, der Preis (-es, -e). 
prince, der Prinz (-en, -en). 
princess, die Prinzessin ( — , -nen). 
principal parts, die Hauptformen; 

what are the of ? welches sind 

die Hauptformen von? 
prize, der Preis (-es, -e). 
punctuality, die Punktlichkeit. 
pupil, der Schiiler (-s, — ). 
push, schieben (schob, geschoben) ; — 

Off, ab'stoBen (stieB, gestoBen). 
put, setzen ; stecken ; tun (tat, getan). 

Q 

quantity, die Quantitat ( — , -en). 
queen, die Konigin ( — , -nen). 
quietly, ruhig. 
quill, der Kiel (-es, -e). 



R 



train, der 



railroad, die Eisenbahn; 

Eisenbahnzug. 
rain, der Regen (-s, — ) ; v. regnen. 
reach {attain), erreichen. 
read, lesen (las, gelesen). [Lesebuch. 

reading, das Lesen (-s) ; book, das 

receive, erhalten (erhielt, erhalten). 

recently, neulich, kurzlich. [genesen. 

recover {from illness), genesen (genas, 

red, rot. 

reflexive, reflexiv. 

refreshing, erfrischend. 

regard, betrachten. 

region, die Gegend ( — , -en). 

regular, regelmaBig. 



ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 



369 



rejoice, sich freuen (159). 

relate, erzahlen. 

release, befreien. 

remain, bleiben (blieb, geblieben). 

remember, sich erinnern. 

rent (a house), mieten. 

resemble, gleichen (glich, geglichen). 

return, zuriick'kommen (kam, gekom- 

men. 
Rhine, der Rhein (-es) ; — wine, der 

Rheinwein ; the tour of the — , die 

Rheintour. 
rich, reich. [gefahren). 

ride, reiten (ritt, geritten) ; fahren (f uhr, 
right, recht ; to the — , rechts. 

ring, der Ring (-es, -e); finger, der 

ripe, reif. [Ringfinger. 

rise, auf'stehen (stand, gestanden) ; the 

sun rises, die Sonne geht auf. 
river, der FmB (Flusses, Fliisse). 
rock, der Fels (-en, -en); der Felsen 

(-s, — ). [romisch. 

Roman, der Romer (-s, — ) ; adj. 
romance, der Roman (-es, -e). 
roof, das Dach (-es, Dacher). 
roOm, das Zimmer (-s, — ). 
rose, die Rose ( — , -en) ; — bush, der 

Rosenstrauch. 
rule, regieren. 

ruler {straight-edge), das Lineal (— s, -e). 
run, laufen (lief, gelaufen) ; — away, 

fort'laufen. 



S 
sad, traurig. 

sake ; for the — of, um . . . willen. 
sale, der Verkauf (-es, Verkaufe) ; for 

— , zu verkaufen. 
salt, das Salz (-es, -e). 
same, der-, die-, dasselbe (89, 1). 
satisfied, zufrieden. 
save, ersparen. 
say, sagen. 
scatter, streuen. 



scholar, der Schuler (-s, — ). 

school, die Schule ( — , -en) ; — house, 

das Schulhaus. 
scissors, die kleine Schere ( — , -n). 
scold, schelten (schalt, gescholten). 
Scotland, Schottland. 
sea, die See ( — , -n). 
season, die Jahreszeit ; at this — , zu 

dieser Jahreszeit. 
second, die Sekunde ( — , -n) ; adj. der, 

die, das Zweite. 
see, sehen (sah, gesehen). 
seldom, selten. 
selfish, eigensiichtig. 
sell, verkaufen. [(r57> *)• 

send, schicken, senden (sandte, gesandt) 
sentence, der Satz (-es, Satze). 
servant, der Diener (-s, — ) ; farm — , 

der Knecht (-es, -e); girl, das 

Dienstmadchen ; die Magd (-, Magde). 
serve, dienen. [geht unter. 

set, setzen; the sun sets, die Sonne 
several, einige, mehrere. 
sharp, scharf. 
shears, die Schere ( — , -n). 
sheep, das Schaf (-es, -e). 
shepherd, der Schafer (-s, — ). 
shine, scheinen (schien, geschienen). 
ship, das Schiff (-es, -e) ; — wreck, 

der Schiffbruch. 
shoot, schiefien (schoft, geschossen). 
should, sollen (149, 5). 
I shovel, die Schaufel ( — , -n). 
show, zeigen ; (to point out), an'zeigen. 
shrub, der Strauch (-es, Straucher). 
shut (the door), zu'machen. 
sick, krank ; the — man, der Kranke. 
side, die Seite ( — , -n). 
silver, das Silber ; adj. silbern. 
sing, singen (sang, gesungen). 
sink, sinken (sank, gesunken). 
sir, Herr (-n, -en) ; yes — , ja (Herr). 
sister, die Schwester ( — , -n). 
sit, sitzen (sa6, gesessen). 
skillful, geschickt. 



37o 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



slate, die Schiefertafel. 

slave, der Sklave (-n, -n). 

sleep, der Schlaf (-es) ; v. schlafen 

(schlief, geschlafen). 
slip, aus'gleiten (glitt, geglitten). 
slowly, langsam. 
small, klein. 
smell, der Geruch (-es, Geruche); v. 

riechen (roch, gerochen). 
sneak, schleichen (schlich, geschlichen); 

to — into, ein'schleichen. 
snow, der Schnee (-s). 
sofa, das Sofa (-s, -s). 
soldier, der Soldat (-en, -en). 
some, etwas. 

sometimes, zuweilen, manchmal. 
son, der Sohn (-es, Sonne). 
song, der Gesang (-es, Gesange). 
soon, bald ; sooner, eher, f riiher. 
sorceress, die Zauberin ( — , -nen), die 

Hexe ( — , n). 
soul, die Seele ( — , -n). 
sparkle, funkeln. 

speak, sprechen (sprach, gesprochen). 
spectre, das Gespenst ; the — of the 

Brocken, das Brockengespenst {an 

optical illusion). 
speech, die Rede ( — , -n). 
spend {the time), zu'bringen (brachte, 

gebracht). 
spider, die Spinne ( — , -n). 
spite, der Groll (-es) ; HaB (-sses) ; in 

— of, trotz. 
spoon, der Loffel (-s, — ). 
spring, der Friihling (-s, -e). 
spring {of water), der Bmnnen (-s, — ); 

v. springen (sprang, gesprungen). 
stairs, die Treppe ( — , -en) ; up — , 

oben ; down — , unten. 
stand, stehen (stand, gestanden); — 

erect, gerade stehen. 
star, der Stern (-es, -e). 
state, der Staat (-es, -en), 
steal, stehlen (stahl, gestohlen). 
steam-boiler, der Dampfkessel. 



steel, der Stahl; — pen, die Stahlfeder. 

steep, steil. 

sting, stechen (stach, gestochen). 

stone, der Stein (-es, -e). 

store {shop), der Laden (-s, Laden). 

story, die Geschichte ( — , -n) ; die 
Erzahlung ( — , -en). 

stove, der Ofen (-s, Ofen). 

street, die StraBe ( — , -n). 

strike, schlagen (schlug, geschlagen); 
to — against, an'stoBen (stieB, ge- 
stoBen). [als. 

strong, stark; stronger than, starker 

student, der Student (-en, -en). 

study, studieren, lernen. 

succeed, gelingen (gelang, gelungen). 

such, solcher, -e, -es,pl. -e (89, 1). 

suffer, leiden (litt, gelitten). 

sugar, der Zucker (-s). 

summer, der Sommer (-s, — ). 

sun, die Sonne ( — , -n). 

sweet, suB. 

Switzerland, die Schweiz. 

sword, das Schwert (-es, -er). 

synopsis, die Synopsis ( — , Synopsen). 



table, der Tisch (-es, -e). 

take, nehmen (nahm, genommen). 

teach, lehren. 

teacher, der Lehrer (-s, — ). 

tell, sagen, mit'teilen. 

temperate, maBig. 

tent, das Zelt (-es, -e). \dai). 

thank, der Dank (-es) ; v. danken {with 

thankful, dankbar. 

that, pron. dieser, das, jener (89, 1); 

conj. daB. 
the, der, die, das, //. die (29). 
theatre, das Theater (-s, — ). 
them, sie; to — , ihnen (82, 1). 
then, dann, da. 
there, da, dort; — are, es gibt, es 

sind (86, 1). 



ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 



371 



therein, darin. 

therefore, deshalb, darum. 

thief, der Dieb (-es, -e). 

think, denken (dachte, gedacht) (157, 

1) ; glauben. 
third, der, die, das dritte (71). 
this, dieser, -e, -es; pi. diese (89, 1). 
thorn, der Dorn (-es, -en). 
though, obgleich ; as — , als ob. 
throne, der Thron (-es, -e). 
through, durch. 
throw, werfen (warf, geworfen) ; to — 

away, weg'werfen. 
thumb, der Daumen (-s, — ). 
time, die Zeit ( — , -en) ; piece, die 

Uhr (— , -en). 
tired, miide; — of his work, seiner 

Arbeit miide (81, 1). 
to, prep, nach, zu, an ; adv. bis. 
to-day, heute. 
together, zusammen ; all — , alle zu- 

saramen. 
tolerably, ziemlich. 
to-morrow, morgen ; the day after — , 

iibermorgen; — evening, morgen 

abend. 
too, zu. 

tooth, der Zahn (-es, Zahne). 
tour, die Tour ( — , -en) ; the — of the 

Rhine, die Rheintour. 
tower, der Turin (-es, Tiirme). 
tradesman, der Geschaftsmann. 
translate, iibersetz'en. 
translation, die Ubersetzung. 
travel, reisen. 

traveler, der Reisende (-n, -n) 
tree, der Baum (-es, Baume). 
trouble, die Mtihe ; to take — , sich die 

Muhe geben. 
true, treu, wahr. 
trunk, der Koffer (-s, — ) ; {of a tree), 

der Stamm (-es, Stamme). 
try, versuchen. 

turn, drehen ; — away, sich aVkehren. 
typewriter, die Schreibmaschine. 



u 



umbrella, der Regenschirm or der 

Schirm (-s, -e). 
uncle, der Onkel (-s, — ). 
under, unter. [standen.) 

understand, verstehen (verstand, ver- 
unhappy, ungliicklich. 
unite, vereinigen. 

United States, die Vereinigten Staaten. 
university, die Universitat ( — , -en), 
unskillful, ungeschickt. 
until, bis. 
up, auf, oben. 
us, uns (82, 1). 
useful, niitzlich. 
useless, nutzlos, unniitz. 
usually, gewohnlich. 



vacation, die Ferien (pi). 
vain, eitel ; in — , vergebens. 
vegetables, das Gemiise (-s, — ). 
verb, das Zeitwort. 
very, sehr. 
Victoria, Victoria. 
victorious, siegreich. 
victory, der Sieg (-es, -e). 
village, das Dorf (-es, Dbrfer). 
virtue, die Tugend ( — , -en). 
visit, der Besuch (-es, -e) ; v. besuchen. 
visiting-card, die Visitenkarte. 
Voice, die Stimme ( — , -n) ; the — of 
the verb, die Form des Verbs. 

W 

wagon, der Wagen (-s, — ). 

walk, gehen (ging, gegangen). 

wall, die Mauer ( — , -n) ; (inside wall) 

die Wand ( — ,Wande); clock, die 

Wanduhr; map, die Wandkarte. 

war, der Krieg (-es, -e). 

warm, warm. 



372 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



watch (time-piece), die Uhr ( — , -en) ; 
the " watch on the Rhine," die 

Wacht am Rhein; dog, der 

Wachthund ; tower, der Wacht- 

turm ; v. wachen, Wache halten. 

water, das Wasser (-s, — ) ; — fowl, 
der Wasservogel ; a glass of — , ein 

weak, schwach. [Glas Wasser. 

weather, das Wetter (-s, — ). 

web, das Netz (-es, -e). 

wedding, die Heirat ( — , -en). 

week, die Woche ( — , -n) ; every four 
weeks, alle vier Wochen. 

weep, weinen. 

well, gut. 

Weser, die Weser (a river of Germany). 

what, was ; — kind of a, was fiir ein. 

when (interrog.) wann ; (cond.) wenn ; 
(past time) als. 

where, wo, wohin. 

whether, ob. 

which, welcher (-e, -s) ; //. welche ; 
der, die, das,//, die (91). 

while, die Weile; prep, wahrend. 

whistle, pfeifen (pfiff, gepfiffen). 

white, weiB. 

who, wer>(go). [Tag. 

whole, ganz ; the — day, den ganzen 

whom, wen ; to — , wem or an wen (go). 

whose, wessen (90). 

why, warum. 

wide, breit. 

wild, wild. 

will, der Wille (-ns) ; v. wollen (148). 

willingly, gern ; I go — , ich gehe gern. 

win, gewinnen (gewann, gewonnen). 

window, das Fenster (-s, — ). 

windy, windig. 



wine, der Wein (-es, -e). 

wish, der Wunsch (-es, Wiinsche) ; v. 

wiinschen ; do you — ? wiinschen Sie 

or mochten Sie? (149, 3). 
witch, die Hexe ( — , -n) ; die Zauberin 
with, mit. ( — , -nen). 

within, inwendig, binnen. 
without, ohne. [ (-es, -er). 

woman, die Frau ( — , -en), das Weib 
wonderful, wundervoll. 
wood, das Holz (-es, Holzer) ; woods, 

der Wald (-es, Walder). [(42). 

word, das Wort (-es, -e or Worter) 
work, die Arbeit ( — , -en) ; das Werk 

(-es, -e) ; writings, Werke ; v. arbei- 

ten. 
world, die Erde ; die Welt ( — , -en), 
worth, der Wert (-es, -e); adj. wert, 

wiirdig ; ten marks — of, fiir 1 o Mark, 
would, wiirde, imp. sub. <?/"werden (147). 
write, schreiben (schrieb, geschrieben). 
writing, die Schrift ( — , -en), das 

Schreiben (-s). 



year, das Jahr (-es, -e). 

yes, ja. 

yesterday, gestern. 

yet, noch ; not — , noch nicht. 

yield, weichen (wich, gewichen). 

you, du; ihr ; Sie (82, 1). 

young, jung. 

your, dein ; euer; Ihr (87, 1). 

Z 

Zone, die Zone ( — , -n) ; the temper- 
ate — , die gemafiigte Zone. 



APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR 



WORD-FORMATION. — DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION 

The German language is peculiarly rich in its processes of word- 
formation, and to the brief treatment of the subject in the preceding 
pages will now be added a general summary of principles. 

Words are classed as primitive, derivative and compound. A primi- 
tive word is one that bears no evidence of derivation from any other 
word : e. g., 9)tonn, gran, !Qau$, tang, furj, gefyen, effen. 

For the origin of derivative and compound words we must go back 
to simple roots which have been modified or expanded by means of 
prefixes, suffixes, or vowel change, and of these formative elements 
the suffixes play by far the largest part. 

Prefixes retain to a great extent their original character as separate 
words, while the suffixes often blend with the root and lose their indi- 
viduality. The endings of declension, comparison, and conjugation 
are largely of this character. 

Derivation by means of vowel change is either by the modification 
of one of the vowels, a, 0, U, or CM changed to a, 0, it, CM, and called 
the Umlaut (meaning change of sound), or by the replacing of one 
vowel by another, called the Ablaut (divergence of sound ) ; thus, 
©CMSlettt, little house, from @CM§, house; fallen, to fell, from fallen, to 
fall, and farben, to color, from garbe;, color, are umlaut changes ; while 
trcinfen, to give drink, from trtnf en, to drink ; fe^en, to set, from ftfeen, 
to sit, and the gradation of vowels in the conjugation of the strong 
verbs (as in geljen, ging, gegangen) are ablaut changes. The umlaut 
was formerly represented by the letter e over the vowel and it may 
now be placed at the side of it (ae, oe, lie). 

FORMATION OF NOUNS 

I. By Prefixes. The prefixes by which derivative nouns are formed 
are few in number ; yet they are applied to many roots, thus forming 
numerous derivatives. Examples are : 



ii NEW GERMAN COURSE 

©C-. The derivatives formed by this prefix have mostly a collect- 
ive meaning ; e.g., ba$ ©eftrtiudj, shrubbery, f rom ©traitd), shrub; ba$ 
©eftolf, cloud-mass, from 2Bo(fe, cloud ; ba# ©ebtrge, mountain range, 
from 33erg, mountain; bte ©ebritber, brothers, from £3ntber, brother ; 
ber (55etiatter r godfather, from $ater, /tf//^r,- bte ®efd)totfter, brothers 
and sisters, from <£>d)tt)efter, j^ter. Some are from verbs, as bdS ©e= 
I)br, //fc sense of hearing, from fyorett, /# hear ; bct£ @emd(be, //&£ paint- 
ing, from malett, to paint. The words formed with this prefix are very 
numerous and are mostly of the neuter gender. 

9JUjf-. This prefix has the same negative signification as mis-, dis-, 
etc., in English; e.g., bct3 SDftjfterftatlbttte, misunderstanding; bte 
Ofltjsgtmft, disfavor ; ba$ TOj^trauert, suspicion. 

Utt- has the same meaning as the English negative particles un-, 
in-, dis-, mis-, etc.; e.g., bte UttgUtcffettcjfett, unhap pines s ; bct$ Utl- 
gtittf, misfortune; bte Utt()bfltd)fett, incivility ; bctS Uttfrcmt, zew</, tar*. 

(S*rj- has the same meaning as arch ; e. g., ber (Sr^ergOCj, archduke ; 
ber (§r$btfd)0f, archbishop ; ber Grrjettget, archa?igel. 

5lber- equals English #/fcr, used in a bad sense and meaning some- 
thing secondary, spurious or false ; e. g., ber 3lberglaube, superstition ; 
ber Wszx\x>\% t folly. 

23ct— implies an addition to something ; e. g., bct$ 33etfptel, example; 
ber 33ettrctCj, contribution ; bte ^Betlage, supplement ; ber S3eifall, applause. 

Ur- denotes primeval, original; e.g., ber UrfprUTtg, origin; bte Ur- 
foelt, the primeval world ; ber UrtrjClIb, primeval forest. 

SSer- and 3er-. Nouns with these prefixes are mostly from infini- 
tives having these prefixes ; e.g., bd$ ^ertrctttert, confidence, from tier- 
trctuett, to trust ; ba3 33erfpre^ett r the promise, from t)erfpred)ert, to prom- 
ise; bte S8tX§an$ii<i)Mt,perishableness, from &erganglttf),/^7.$7to/<?/ bte 
3erhttttptf)eit, raggedness, from gerfttmpett, to fall to rags. 

2. By Suffixes. The suffix is added to the root of some verb or to 
the stem of a noun or adjective, e. g., 

-djett and -(eitt are used in the formation of diminutives, such as 
bct$ §au3(f)ert, the little house ; ba$ £3itd)tettt, the little book. All such 
diminutives are neuter (see § 55). 

-el. With this suffix are formed nouns denoting that by which 
something is done, e. g., ber gebef, the lever, from fyebett, to lift; ber 



APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR 111 

StiJjjel, the pestle, pounder, from ftofjett, to hit, strike ; ber £)e(M, the 
cover, lid, from becfett, to cover. Most nouns in e( are masculine. 

-er. With this suffix are formed nouns denoting male persons or 
animals and also instruments used as tools, all of which are mascu- 
line, e.g., ber Dicker, the rider, from retten, to ride ; ber Sefyrer, the 
teacher, from fcfyrett, to teach ; ber iBoljrer, the gimlet, from bofyrett, to 
bore ; ber Crttglimber, the Englishman ; ber ^Berliner, the man of Berlin ; 
ber Scfyroetser, the Swiss. 

-uu With this suffix are formed, from masculine nouns, corres- 
ponding female appellations such as Me $dntgttt, the queen, from ber 
$0tttg, the king ; bte Sdnritt, the lioness, from ber £oft>e, the lion. 

-ling. With this suffix are formed some masculine nouns denoting 
the passive recipient of an action, sometimes in a diminutive or depen- 
dent sense, as, ber $itttg(tttg, the youth, from \un§, young; ber gremb* 
Httg, the stranger, from fremb, strange ; ber (MttftUttg, the favorite, from 
(&Un)t, favor ; ber 2Betd)iing, the weakling, from tnetcf), weak, soft, effem- 
inate. 

-c. With this suffix are formed, from adjectives, abstract nouns, 
mostly feminine, the root vowel of which is modified (if a, 0, or u); 
e. g., from grojj, great, bte ©rofte, size; from ftarf, strong, bte @tarfe, 
strefigth ; from fyod), high, bte @ofye, height; from brett, broad, bte 
33rette, the breadth. 

-tttg forms from verbs (and sometimes from adjectives) nouns ex- 
pressing condition or quality ; e. g., from fymbent, to hinder, bag Ditt- 
benttg, hi?idra?ice ; from bebitrfett, to need, bag £3ebitrftttg, need; from 
fittfter, dark, bte gtttftenttg, darkness. 

-f o( and -f c( form nouns from verbal roots ; e.g., from fcfytCtett, to send, 
bag ed)icf[af, fate; from irrett, to wander, bag ^rrfaf, error ; from ratett, 
to guess, bag Dtatf el, puzzle. 

-tum (English -dom) denotes quality or condition ; e. g., from retd), 
rich, ber $Retd)tUm, wealth; from etgett, 0O/«, bag (StgetttUm, property ; 
from nxtdjfert, A? ^a/, ba^> 2Satf)3tum, growth ; from irrett, A? <?rr, ber 
-3r^tum, error; also collectives; e.g., from Qifyrtft, christian, bag 
©fyriftetltum, Christendom ; from gitrft, prince, bag gitrftetttttttt, princi- 
pality. 

With the suffixes -et, -fyeit, -fett, — fcfjaft and -uttg are formed a large 
class of feminine nouns (38, 2). 



IV NEW GERMAN COURSE 

-CU With this suffix are formed feminine nouns of two classes : 

(a) from verbs ; e. g., from f)eud)etrt, to deceive, bte §eud)efet, hypoc- 
risy ; from fd)metcf)etrt, to flatter, bte @dnnetd)e(et, flattery ; from plau= 
bent, to prattle, gossip, bte ^faitberet, the small talk, gossip. 

(b) from nouns in er; e.g., from 33acfer, baker, bte 33a(feret, bakery; 
from £)nt(f er, printer, bte £)rU(f eret, //&<? printing-ojflce ; from (Sieger, 
founder, bte ©tefjeret, the foundry. 

— fjett (English -head, -hood, etc.). With this suffix are formed femi- 
nine nouns : 

(a) from nouns ; e. g. from @ott, £"<?</, bte ©Ottljett, godhead ; from 
fttttb, child, bte ®tttbljett, childhood ; from !Otterifdj, w#/z, bte !IRenf(f)t)ett, 
mankind. 

(b) from adjectives, abstract nouns ; e.g., from ffug, prudent, bte 
$(ttgl)ett, prudence ; from bftttb, M«//, bte 33ltnbfyett, blindness. 

— fctt is a subordinate form of f)ett, e.g., from bctttfbar, thankful, bte 
©anfbarfeit, thankfulness ; from fparfam, saving, bte ^parfamfett, 
eco?iomy ; etc. 

-fdjaft (English -^2)> in lordship). With this suffix are formed nouns 
of two classes. 

(a) with nouns; e. g., from grettttb , friend, bte greuttbfdjaft, friend- 
ship; from ^)err, master, bte @errfdj)aft, dominion; from OJMfter, w«j- 
/<?r, bte SO^etfterf djaf t, mastery ; from 33iirger, «Vto, bie 23itrgerfd)af t, 
citize?iship. 

(b) from adjectives or participles ; e. g., bte 23ertDCtttbtfd)aft, relation- 
ship; from gemettt, common, bte ©emehtfdjaft, community; from fcerttxtttbt, 

-Ultg (English — /flg) forms verbal nouns from infinitives ; e. g., from 
frfjretben, to write, bte <Sdjreibwtg, writing ; from redjrten, /# reckon, bte 
SRedjmmg, account, bill ; from beaten, to pay, bie $8 t%aty\m§, payment ; 
from erfittbert, & invent, bte (SrfhtbMtg, invention. 

Less used and often of obscure meaning are the suffixes 

-attb : ber §ettcmb, Saviour. 

-ityt : ba$ $eijridjt, sweepings, bd% £)t(ftd)t, thicket. 

-id) : ber 33ottttf), tub, vat; ber (Styridj, j'zy. 

-ig : ber §0tttg, honey, ber (Sfftg, vinegar. 



APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR V 

-rid) : designating masculine persons or animals ; e. g., ber Sctfjtt 5 
rid), ensign, from bte $a§ne,fag; ber SBiiterttf), the furious one, tyrant, 
from bte 23ltt, rd#v? / ber ®anf end), gander from bte ®att$, goose. 

Compound Nouns 

A compound noun consists of two or more words united, the last 
one being a noun, while the others may be a noun or some other part 
of speech. The most numerous class is formed by the union of noun 
with noun, there being practically no limit to this method of word- 
formation. The gender and declension are determined by the last 
component (45, 1) ; e. g., ber §CM$fd)luffef, house-key ; bte £afdjettuljr, 
watch; ba$ 33ilberbU(f), picture book; ba% £efeblttf), reading book; boA 
@d)retbbucf), writing book ; ba3 Dtettpferb, riding horse ; ber (Sbelftem, 
gem; ber $temmttt, faint-heartedness ; ba§ ($5ietcf)gett)tli)r, equilibrium; 

ber Untergcmg, destruction, ruin ; ber 2vu3gcmg, exit, issue ; ber iiberflujj, 
abundance ; ber (gotmenutttergcmg,, sunset. 

FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES 

Adjectives are primitive or derivative. Examples of primitive ad- 
jectives are grog, large; flettt, small; alt, old ; jwtg, young. 

Derivative adjectives are mostly formed by means of suffixes, but 
sometimes by the same prefixes as are used in forming derivative 
nouns ; e. g., ctber-, be-, erg-, ge-, mtfj- tm-, ur- 

1. Adjectives with Prefix. 

abet- denotes excess, here in a bad sense; e.g., Ctberttri|tg, crazy. 

6e-» With this prefix are formed a few adjectives such as, berett, 
ready ; beqttettt, comfortable ; bef eelt,' inspired; bejetfyrt, aged. 

er§- is prefixed with a disparaging and somewhat humorous signifi- 
cation to some few adjectives ; e. g., ergbutttttt, very stupid; ergfctltt, 
very lazy ; erg(teberftd), very dissolute. 

ge— is a prefix of various meanings. Its original signification was 
with or together, a sense only vaguely apparent in its present use. It 
is also the regular prefix of the past participle (which is of the nature 
of an adjective). Examples of its use are, gefyoren, to belong to ; gebenfett, 
to think of intend; gettrifj, certain; getDCtrttg, expecting; gered)t, just ; 
getreit, faithful; gemeitt, common. 



VI NEW GERMAN COURSE 

miff- as a prefix to an adjective has the same meaning as when 
prefixed to a noun ; e. g., mifttrcttttfrf), distrustful ; mifjfdu'tg, disagree- 
able ; mtjjtmttig, ill-humored; mt§Dergnugt, displeased. 

Utt- is equivalent to the negative prefixes in English (un-, dis-, in-); 
e. g., Uttred)t, unjust ; Uttangene^m, disagreeable ; Utttiorftdjttg, incautious. 

uv- prefixed to a few adjectives indicates something either sudden 
or something original, ancient ; e. g., urplo^tttf), very sudden ; urfprimg- 
ltd), original, primitive ; ttrcttt, very old. 

2. Adjectives with Suffix. A large number of adjectives are 
formed with suffixes to nouns, verbs, adverbs and to other adjectives. 
These suffixes will here be given in alphabetical order. 

-artig suggests kind, sort, as in fugelarttg, globular ; groftartig, 
grand. 

-Bar equals our -able, -ible ; e. g., btettftbctr, serviceable ; fidjtbar, 
visible ; ^afylbar, payable. 

-ett, -cm denotes material: e.g., golbett, of gold ; febertt, of leather. 
— fac^p = English -fold ; e. g., ^toetfatf), twofold; tnelfatf), manifold. 

— fotttg = English -fold; e.g., ehtfalttg, onefold, simple; mefjrfalttg, 
manifold. 

-fifrmtg = English -form ; e. g., fugeif orttttg, spherical. 

— ^aft is from fjabert, and denotes of the nature of something ; e. g., 
fd^atf^aft, roguish (from @d)alf, rogue) ; fet)fer^aft, erro?ieous (from ftelj* 
\tX, error). 

-ig corresponds to English -y in watery; e.g., ruafferig, watery; 
brecfig, dirty ; tafttg, troublesome. 

-idjt, tortdjt, foolish; bergtd)t, mountainous ; fteitttdjt, stone-like. 

-tfdj is cognate with -ish in childish ; e. g., ftttbtfcf), childish ; regtte* 
rifrf), rainy ; ameriftmifd), American. 

-ltd) equals -ly in neighborly ; e. g., ttCtdjbctriidj, neighborly ; fremtb* 
\\ti), friendly ; feittbltd), hostile ; mattttiitf), masculine. 

-Io§ equals -&w in shoreless; e.g., fveuttbloS, friendless ; f)tffIo$, 
helpless ; gal)llo$, countless. 

-moftig, from Sftaf}, measure; e. g., ^tDedtttaftig, .««'/*/ A? a purpose; 

regelmagtg, regular. 



APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR Vll 

— tttiittg, from Tint, spirit, courage ; e. g., fyelbetttttitttg, heroic ; grog- 
Ittitttg, generous. 

-fam is cognate with -some in tiresome; e. g., ehtfam, lonesome ; mitfy- 
fatrt, tiresome. 

-fcltg (= English happy)', fcfyretbfeltg, fond of writing ; tttitfyfeitg, 
toilsome; glMfeltg, blissful. 

-jig is cognate with -ty in tiventy ; e. g., etttjtg, j*/^/* / .titer jig, y^r/y ; 
tteitttgtg, ninety. 

Compound Adjectives 

A compound adjective consists of an adjective (including participles 
used adjectively) and a preceding word that limits or qualifies it ; 
e.g., menftfjettieer (SD^enfrf) + leer), uninhabited; fyoffctfytg (§of + fcif)tg), 

privileged to appear at court ; fjolgfret (©Olj + fret), having wood fur- 
nished free ; morgenftfjtirt (Sttorgett + fdjott), beautiful as the morning; 
taitbftumm, deaf and dumb ; bltttfetbiau, dark blue ; altl)0d)beutfdj, Old 
High German; fyodjberitfymt, very celebrated ; gottgeltebt, beloved of God ; 
fogenanttt, so-called; ftarfttrirfettb, energetic (strongly acting). 

The adjective element often ends in tg = ed ; ifdj = ish or (id) = 
ly ; e.g., ^toetfityftg, two-headed; guttrtitttg, goodhumored ; fretgebtg, 
benevole?it ; aftmobtfd), old-fashioned (old-modish) ; r)dcf)ftfreurtbttc^ r very 
friendly. 



FORMATION OF VERBS 

Verbs are classed as primitive and derivative. The strong verbs 
are, with few exceptions, primitive. "They constitute the most impor- 
tant body of primitive roots in the, language." Many weak verbs are 
also primitive, but all verbs having more than one syllable in the root 
are regarded as derivative. 

Derivative verbs are from various sources : 

i. Verbs from Primitive Verbal Roots. An important class of 
these are called causative verbs because their action causes in a tran- 
sitive sense that which is only an intransitive act or condition in the 
primitive from which they are derived. The derivation is by means of 
a change (umlaut or ablaut) of the root-vowel. Examples are : 



Vlll NEW GERMAN COURSE 

Primitive and Intransitive Derivative and Transitive 

fprmgen, to spring, jump fprettgen, to cause to spring 

ftttfen, to sink fenfett, to sink (a thing) 

fallen, to fall fallen, to fell 

fyangen, to hang fyangen, to hang 

fafyren, to ride, go f iifyren, to guide 

fifcen, to sit f e£en, to set, place 

fdjttnmmen, to swim fdjlDemmen, to water {animals} 

(iegen, to lie (down) legen, to lay 

ftc^en, ^ jfo«</ ftetten, & //aw 

2. Verbs from primitive nouns : 

fifdjen, to fish, from ber }$tfd), the fish 
fcfytffen, to ship, from ba$ <Sd)tff, the ship 
fyaufen, to dwell, from ba3 §au$, //z<? house 
fcfliigen, to plow, from ber ^flug, the plow 
regnen, to rain, from ber 9?egen, the rain 
arbeiten, to work, from bte Arbeit, the work 
fatteln, to saddle, from ber battel, the saddle 
fycintmern, to hammer, from ber jammer, the hammer 

3. Verbs from primitive adjectives: 

f tar ten, to strengthen, from ftatf, strong 
I'b'ten, to redden, from rot, red 
tt)tirmen, to warm, from niarnt, warm 
retntgen, to clean, from rein, clean 

4. Verbs ending in -eftt, -em* Such verbs often convey the idea 
of diminution or disrespect ; e. g., 

tabeln, to blame, from ber £abel, blame 
fadjeftt, to smile, from fadjen, to laugh 
fpbttetn, to banter, jeer, from fpotten, to mock 
fiinftetn, to treat artificially, affect, from bte $Unft, art 
nri^efn, to affect wit, from ber 2Bt£, wit 
frdntnteln, to affect piety, from frontm, pious 
ftappern, to rattle, from ffappen, tofiap, clap 
fd)tafem, to feel sleepy, from fd)(afen, to sleep 
random, to fumigate, from raudjen, to smoke 
ftetgem, to increase (price), from fteigen, to ascend 
etnfdjlafern to make sleepy, from etnfd)(afen, to fall asleep 



APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR IX 

5. Verbs ending in -fdjeu, -$eit f -igen : 

f)errfd)en, to rule, from §eiT fettt, to be master 
}aud)3en, to shout, from jttd)l)e ! huzza I 
frf)(utf)3en, to sob, from fd)(uden, to swallow 
reintgett, to clean, from rein, clean 
Ijetltgett, to sanctify, from fyetftg, holy 
mafttgett, /# moderate, from tttajtg, moderate 

6. Verbs ending in -teren. Such words are derivatives from French 
verbs in er- and -ir, together with some from German roots that have 
taken on the same ending; e. g., marj"d)terett, to march; ftubteren, to 
study; abbteren, to add; regieren, to govern ; probteren, to prove ; bud)- 
ftubteren, to spell; fpa^teren, to walk for pleasure. 

Compound Verbs 
Verbs may be compounded : 

1. With substantives, as : f)cmbf)aben, to handle, use ; (ujtttJCmbetn, to 
walk for pleasure ; tethtefymen, to share, take part ; fyofyntadjeftt, to smile 
scornfully ; fiattfhtben, to take place. 

2. With adjectives, as : groftfpredjett, to boast ; t)od)ad)tett, to esteem 
highly; fretfprecfyen, to acquit; redjtferttgen, to justify ; bottfiifyren, to 
accomplish. 

3. With prepositions or adverbs employed as separable prefixes 
and with the inseparable prefixes be-, ettt-, er-, ge-, t)er-, ytx-. These 
prefixes have been treated at length in §§ 160-167 an d it only re- 
mains to explain more fully the meaning and use of the inseparable 
prefixes. 

Originally each of these prefixes had a distinct meaning like the 
separable prefixes, but this meaning has, to a great extent, been lost, 
so that the meaning of the whole word cannot be found by analyzing 
it. It must be taken entire. Of these prefixes : 

foe— is similar to the same prefix in English. It helps to form a 
transitive verb which signifies the doing or making of something. It 
may be prefixed to a verb, a noun or an adjective ; e. g., beljaltett, to 
keep (from fallen, to hold)-, begraben, to bury (from graben, to dig); 
befoftttett, to reward (from $of)tt, wages) ; benad)rid)ttgett, to inform (from 
9iad)rtd)t, news) ; befreten, to set free (from \xt\,free) ; beretdjern, to en- 
rich (from retdjer, comparative of retdj). 



X NEW GERMAN COURSE 

ettt- or emp- is used in forming verbs expressing loss or deprivation, 
sometimes also, origin, and sometimes it adds nothing to the root to 
which it is joined; e.g., etttfommett, to escape (from fommett, to come); 
entbtrtbert, to unbind, loosen (from btttbert, bind) ; entfteljen, to arise, 
originate (from ftefyen, to stand) ; entfyalten, to contain (from fjalten, to 
hold) ; entfjaupten, to behead (from §aupt, head) ; entfeeren, to empty 
(from leer, empty). 

The prefix emp- appears only in the words empfangen, to receive ; 
empfefylen, to commend ; empfinben, to feel, perceive, and empfinbetn, to 
affect sensibility ■, to play the sentimental. 

cr- in composition with nouns, verbs and adjectives adds various 
meanings to the root-word. Its primitive meaning is a going forth, 
accomplishing ; thus, from rot, red, we have errbten, to redden, blush ; 
from bettfett, to think, erbenfen, to think out, invent ; from reid)en, to 
reach, erretdjen, to attain by effort ; from ©rttttb, ground, cause, ergrun- 
bett, to fathom, explore; from fait, cold, erldltett, to take cold; from 
fcfyteften, to shoot, erfdjteften, to shoot dead. 

tier- has the same origin as our word forward, forth, and it usually 
suggests some change of state or condition, or a passing away as in 
death, hence it often implies loss or destruction; e.g., t>erctd)teu, to 
despise,' from Ctdjtert, to respect ; t)enttd)ten, to destroy, from ntd)t, not; 
fcerfptelen, to lose by play, from jptelen, to play ; rjerfprecfyen, to promise, 
from fpredjett, to speak. 

$cr- adds force to a verb in the direction of separation, destruction, 
or decay ; e. g., jerretjen, to tear in pieces, from ret^ett, to tear ; ytx- 
bredjett, to break in pieces, from brerfjett, to break ; gerfpalten, to split in 
two, from fpalten, to split. 

ge- has, in its present use, a very indefinite meaning ; originally it 
meant with or together, and this sense is apparent in collective nouns 
such as ba% ©ebtrge, the mountain-chain; bit ©eittetttbe, the commu- 
nity; but with verbs this signification has been obscured or lost. It is 
found in all the forms of a few verbs such as gef alien (gefiel, gef alien), 
to please ; gefdjefyen (gefdjal), gefd)el)en), to happen, and as the regular 
prefix to past participles, as in loben (lobte, gelobt). 



APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR XI 

FORMATION OF ADVERBS 

All adjectives and many participles may be used in their uninflected 
form as adverbs ; e. g., gut, well ; fdjbtt, beautifully ; ettt^iicfenb, charm- 
ingly ; ctltSgqetcfyrter, excellently. 

Derivative and compound adverbs are from various sources, espe- 
cially from nouns ; e. g., 

From Me Wet, the manner, kind, we have berctrt, thus, in this manner. 

From bte ©eftctlt, the form, fashion : bergeftdlt, in such a manner. 

From bet* ^dH, the case : falls, in case ; feittertf au% in ?io case. 

From baS tylal, the time: tuetmatS, often; jetttaiS, ever; tttema(3, 
never. 

From bte Sftafje, the measure : etrttgerma^ert, in some degree ; belarttt' 
terma^ert, as is knowti. 

From ber Drt, the place : aflerortett, everywhere ; attberortett, some- 
where else. 

From bte ^ette, the side : bteSfett3, on this side ; afterfett$, on all sides. 

From ber Xet(, the part : mehteStette, for my part ; attbertttet(3, on 
the other hand ; metftettteU$,/tfr the most part. 

From ber 23kg, the way : affertoegS, everywhere ; fettte3tt>eg$, in no 
way ; \x\\$)\0Z§, freely , quickly. 

From bte Setfe, the while : eittftlDeilett or mitttertt)et(e, in the mean- 
time. 

From bte $Betfe, the way, manner : moglid)erit)et|e, as far as possible ; 
merftt>itrbtgertt)etfe, in a remarkable manner; auSttafjmStoeife, by excep' 
Hon ; tropf erttretfe, by drops ; ftltf etttoetf e, by degrees, gradually. 

From bte £eit, the time: aller^ett, all the time; jebeqett, at every 
time. 

From ber £ag, the day : tagttcf), daily ; tag£, by day. 

From bte (Stttttbe, the hour : ftiittblttf), hourly. 

From bte 9tCttttr, the nature : rtaturltdj, naturally, of course. 

From ber gtmmet, the heavens : ljumrtettodrtS, toward heaven. 

Some adverbs are formed by the union of a noun and a preposition ; 
e.g., $urM, backwards; Utttertt)eg3, on the way; bet^ettett, in time; 
guroetlert, sometimes ; ixhtxfyaupt, in general ; bergart, up hill ; ftromauf, 
upstream ; j;afyrcm§, Jatjrettt, year out, year in (all the year around}. 

Some adverbs or adverbial phrases are formed by the union of an 
adjective and a preposition; e. g., bet ttettem, by far ; ttt Ctfterrt, in all 



Xll NEW GERMAN COURSE 

respects ; tior fuqettt, not long ago ; ctttf S befte, in the best manner ; am 
metften, most of all ; lVJtx\\, first ; ttbtxaii, everywhere. 

Some adverbs are formed by adding the ending -titf), or -(trtgS, to 
an adjective ; e. g., |rf)tt)erltd), hardly, scarcely ; ganoid), totally ; rteu(id), 
of late ; ftafyrltd), truly; f itrjltd), recently ; btmbUrtg^, blindly ; ia()lmg3, 
precipitously, suddenly. 

Some adverbs are case-forms of adjectives, especially genitives; e. g., 
(Utber3, otherwise ; ftet$, continually, always; red)t3, to the right; ltrtf$, 
to the left; bereitS, already; etttft, sometimes, once; erftertS , firstly ; beftettS, 
in the best manner ; fyodjftett^, at the most ; ttac^ften^, soon. 



Words of other parts of speech, — pronouns, prepositions and con- 
junctions, — are mostly primitive or are derived or compounded in 
a manner apparent without explanation. Prepositions and conjunc- 
tions are mostly of adverbial origin. 



THE KINSHIP OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH 

WORDS 

Grimm's Law 

The similarity between many English and German words gives evidence 
of a common origin ; but this relationship has only in recent times been 
made the subject of profound and exact study. To German philologists, 
especially to Rask and Grimm, we owe the discovery of the laws that have 
prevailed in the process of word-formation as new dialects have been suc- 
cessively evolved one from another in past times. 

This law of phonetic change, first formulated by Jacob Grimm, is called 
from him Grimni's law, — in German fiaurberfcfjtebimg, permutatio7i of con- 
sonants. It is too large a subject for an elementary grammar, belonging 
rather to the broad domain of comparative philology and going back to the 
remote origin of Indo-European speech. One of its lessons, however, is of 
practical importance to every student of German. This is the observation 
of the similarities between the words of modern English and the High Ger- 
man which we are studying. Only enough examples can here be given to 
attract attention to the subject and to cultivate the habit of close observation 
of the numerous instances to be found in all comparison of the two languages. 
A brief classified list of words will answer this purpose. 



APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR 



Xlll 



Letters are classed as Labials, Dentals, Gutturals, Liquids, Nasals and 
Semi-vowels.* 



Labials 
i . English p corresponds to German f , ff , pf. 

deep, tief g a P e i gaffert 

soap, ©eife open, offen 

2. English b corresponds to German b. 
ball, <Bciff bear, <8ar 
bath, 23a b beard, 93art 

3. English/,^*, v correspond to German b. 
thief, 2)ieb staff, 3tctb 

off, ab grave, ©rab 



pipe, ^feife 
j«?^, Scfyvtepfe 



foVr, 23a bre 
fo'te, beipert 



raven, 9ftabe 
weave, me ben 



4. English initial/" corresponds to German f (b). 

/^/£r, geffel ./£&, geiie father, Sgater 

5. English medial or final y^^" correspond to German f, ff, b. 
j^ Stfjiff half hatb ^, felbft 
r^fc, riefetn shaft, ©djaft J 1 ^ fteif 

6. English// corresponds to German ft. 

often, oft j^, fanft drift, %x\\\ 



7. English 2/ corresponds to German b, f. 
give, geben 07/^r, itber 



tfz^/z, Dfen 



Dentals 

1 . English / corresponds to German j, %, ff , §, jj. 
tinder, Quttber set, fe|en 

twinkle, gttunfern «/^<?/, toetjert 

twitter, grotrfd^errt hate, haffert 

j*/, ft§en <?#/, effen 

2. English */ corresponds to German t. 
speed, fjmten /awT, tetten 
^ £itr «afc^, tief 



what, raa§ 
///#/, ba§ 
street, ©trape 
shoot, fchteften 



bread, 93rot 
dead, tot 



* This section accords with the larger treatment of the subject in Thomas' German 
Grammar. 



XIV 



NEW GERMAN COURSE 



3. English th corresponds to German b. 
that, ba3 leather, 2eber 
thin, burnt thick, bid 

4. English s corresponds to German f, ft. 
sight, ©tdjt see, fefjeit 

5. English sh corresponds to German fd). 
wash, toajdjen shame, ©d)am 



thank, 2)anf 
thou, bu 



horse, 9? oft 
shank, ©djettfel 



Gutturals 
1 . English <:, k, ck, ch, tch correspond to German f , cf, d). 



can, farm 
kernel, ®ern 
knuckel, ®ni5d)el 



church, .ftirdje 
&#/£, Sed 



2. English _y and w correspond to German g. 
slay, fd)lagett way, 38eg 

3. English h, gh, correspond to German lj, dj. 
harm, <parm //<z;z;/, £mnb 



j«^, <Sad 



borrow, borgen 

knight, ®ned)t 
might, Wad)t 



Liquids, Nasals and Semi-Vowels 

English /, m, n, r, ng,y, w correspond to the same letters in German 
(English^ becoming j in German). 

lame, latjm no, item yes, ja 

hold, tjalten bind, binben youth, ^ttgettb 

rich, retd) finger, finger wind, SBtttb 

fire, $euer ring, SRing whine, roeinen 



flcr a 



+y\i- ~ 




^ \.A 



s-V 







?• .ft 33 . * U rO. .«." *" .ft^ *« *fU 




'Wi**'^ 






^ 




\ ^ 




^ 



t ^ 



c5> ^ 





«S 



^0* 



<d ©* o 






LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 





003 224 962 # 






I 



■ H 
I 



